JP2019072074A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of making suitable a configuration regarding a setting value for determining a degree of advantage of the game machine.SOLUTION: A main-side CPU 63 executes setting value update processing by execution of setting change operation when operating power starts to be supplied, and executes the setting confirmation processing by execution of the setting confirmation processing. When supply of operating power to the main-side CPU 63 is stopped in a situation in which the setting update processing is under execution, a start of processing for proceeding with a game is regulated as far as the setting change operation or the setting confirmation operation is not executed in the subsequent resumption of supply of operating power. An OFF confirmation flag is set to "1" when the setting value update processing is started in a configuration in which a reset button 68c needs to be pressed so as to start the setting value update processing and a setting value of a selection object is changed each time when the reset button 68c is pressed in the setting value update processing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided to the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP, 2009-261415, A

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to make the configuration regarding the setting value that determines the degree of advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of making a configuration regarding setting values for determining the degree of advantage of gaming machines suitable. It is a thing.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 executes the processing for giving profit in a mode corresponding to the setting value set as the use target among the setting values corresponding to the player's degree of preference. Means to
Setting related execution means for executing predetermined setting related processing related to the set value based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operation power is started;
And another related execution means for executing a predetermined other related process related to the setting value based on the fact that the predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started.
In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the regulation is restricted in which the execution of the predetermined progressing processing for advancing the game is performed. The regulation means to make a state,
Equipped with
The restriction means is that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started even after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the supply of the operating power is started after that even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed. It is characterized in that the restricted state is not made based on the fact that the predetermined related operation has been performed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to make the configuration regarding the setting value that determines the degree of advantage of the gaming machine suitable.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which disassembles and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition concerning discharge of a game ball which flowed down a game field. It is a front view of a main control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables memorize | stored in main side ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure electric power control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change start process performed by main side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition which makes a main CPU detect a detection result of a ball entering detection sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of various apparatuses which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by delivery side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of management IC. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of an input port of a management side I / F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for correspondence. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by management side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-15th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in memory for correspondence. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that historical information is stored in memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the output process of the setting value update signal performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display output process performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed by management side CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables memorize | stored in the main side ROM in 2nd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition of memory for another preservation in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the repetition change performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the repetition change performed by main side CPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting update recognition performed by management side CPU in 5th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition of memory for history in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition of memory for history in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of memory for log | history in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting update recognition performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display output process performed by management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of the management side I / F in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by management side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of a 1st-12th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in memory for correspondence. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball | bowl detection sensor in 10th Embodiment to main side CPU and management IC. It is a front view of the main control unit in 11th embodiment. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical configuration for performing various displays in the display apparatus for 1st-4th based on control of MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed by management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting when the management result of a game history is displayed, (b) in the case where the setting state of a pachinko machine is changed It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of the 1st-4th indicatory display device. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the display apparatuses for 1st-4th notification will be in a display state. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the display apparatus for 1st alerting | reporting in 12th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the display apparatus for 2nd alerting | reporting. The first notification display device in the case of displaying the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices, and in the case of displaying that the setting state of the pachinko machine can be changed 6A and 6B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of a second notification display device. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the abnormality display area in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality setting process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for abnormality display performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output processing for a management performed by the main side CPU in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting aspect of the program of the main side ROM in 15th Embodiment, and data. It is an explanatory view for explaining a setting mode of each area in the main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by main side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining various areas of a work area for non-specific control used to manage a game history. It is a flowchart which shows the check process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ball-entry management processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing for management performed by main side CPU in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main side CPU in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main side CPU in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main side CPU in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 20th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by main side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining an electrical configuration in a twenty-first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows RAM monitoring processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM monitoring process performed by the main side CPU in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows RAM monitoring processing performed by the main side CPU in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another monitoring process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for management performed by the main side CPU in 29th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed by main side CPU. (A) It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of MPU, (b) It is a time chart which shows the mode of an output of the reset signal by a reset signal output part. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting monitoring process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another monitoring process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 31st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the clear process at the time of the abnormality performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the clear process for nonspecific control performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed by the main side CPU in 32nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the checksum performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the clear process for nonspecific control performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 33rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interrupt process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting monitoring process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure for carrying out display control of various display circuits by main side CPU. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining various buffers provided in a work area for specific control, and (b) an explanatory view for explaining various storage areas provided in a work area for non-specific control is there. It is an explanatory view for explaining an electrical configuration of a display IC. (A) to (g) show how type data and display data are transmitted from the main CPU to the display IC and the display data transmitted from the display IC is received by the first display circuit or the second display circuit It is a time chart. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for 1st-4th in the condition where a setting value is updated, (b) 1st-4th notification in the condition where a setting value is confirmed It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by the main side CPU in 34th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an electrical configuration of a calculation result storage area in a thirty-fifth embodiment. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the base value of various areas was alert | reported by the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interrupt process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing at the normal time performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. (A)-(f) It is a time chart for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for 1st-4th when the supply of the operation | movement electric power to main side CPU is started. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 36th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 37th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing at the time of the normal time performed by the main side CPU in 38th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting corresponding | compatible storage area provided in the main side ROM in (a)-(d) 39th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the read-out process of the success / failure table performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 5th display data buffer under setting update performed by main side CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting corresponding | compatible storage area provided in the main side ROM in 40th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various display parts provided in the area | region which can be visually recognized from the front of a pachinko machine through the window panel in 41st Embodiment, (b) The display content of a round display part is demonstrated. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 42nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st timer interrupt process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the result arithmetic processing performed by the main side CPU in 43rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a display performed by main side CPU. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the base value of various areas was alert | reported by the display apparatus for 1st-4th alerting | reporting. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the base value of various areas was alert | reported by the display apparatus for 1st-4th in 44th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 45th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the storage area about the setting value provided in the work area for specific control. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 5th display data buffer in setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 5th display data buffer under setting update performed by main side CPU. Description for explaining the contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operation power is resumed after the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the process for setting confirmation is being executed FIG. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows the completion | finish timing of a setting value update process and the relationship with the operation state of the setting key insertion part of the process for setting confirmation. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 46th Embodiment. Description for explaining the contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operation power is resumed after the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the process for setting confirmation is being executed FIG. The contents of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operation power is resumed when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the processing for setting confirmation in the 47th embodiment is executed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. The contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operation power is resumed when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting value update process or the process for setting confirmation in the forty-eighth embodiment is being executed It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in the forty-ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting confirmation performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the interruption of a 1st timer interrupt process and a 2nd timer interrupt process is permitted in the condition where the process at the time of supply start of operation power is performed. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows the progress aspect of a process when abnormality regarding a power failure flag, a checksum, or a setting value generate | occur | produces. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows the display content of the display apparatus for 1st-4th in, when supply of the operation | movement electric power to main side CPU is started. Description for explaining the contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operation power is resumed after the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the process for setting confirmation is being executed FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining an electric configuration of a voice emission control device. It is a flow chart which shows production control processing performed by sound light side CPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for describing an action corresponding to the content of the process executed in the process at the time of the supply start of the operating power in the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows production control processing performed by sound light side CPU in a 50th embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for describing an action corresponding to the content of the process executed in the process at the time of the supply start of the operating power in the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 51st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 52nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 53rd Embodiment. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows the mode of the subsequent process when the supply of the operation | movement electric power to main side CPU is stopped in the condition where the setting value update process is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by main side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the storage area provided in the work area for specific control. (A)-(f) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the setting value of update object is updated. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in 54th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is abbreviate | omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. Have. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plate members to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on an island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 is pivotable forward with the left side as the pivoting base end and the right side as the pivoting tip side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be pivoted forward with the left side as a pivoting base end and the right side as a pivoting tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip end side in a front view.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function to lock the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 mainly includes a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

  The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide means Guide rails are configured as. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window holes 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the top of the game area PA by the guide rails.

  Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper tray 55a described later onto the firing rail 27a, and a firing rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that causes the game ball supplied to the control unit to shoot toward the guide rail. By rotating the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the gaming ball is fired.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operation opening 33, a second operation opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and the others are provided one by one.

  Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when entering the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of winning balls, when one game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or when one game ball entering the second operation opening 34 occurs. When one prize ball is paid out and when one game ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, the payout of ten prize balls is executed, and the special electric prize device 32 is sent. When one game ball enters, a payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

  The number of winning balls is arbitrary. For example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be a first operating port. The number of balls may be greater than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls which did not enter the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are implanted to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being ejected from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening Also included is an aspect of continuing the flow of the game area PA without being discharged. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24 a clearly, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 The entry of the game ball to the is also expressed as a winning.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are both open upward. Further, both operation ports 33 and 34 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general-purpose utility product 34 a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the commercial power item 34a, the gaming ball can not win in the second operation port 34, and when the common electric symbol 34a is in the open state, it is possible to win the second operating port 34.

  A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the gaming ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning. Thereby, it is possible for the game ball that has won the through gate 35 to win the second operation port 34.

  Based on the winning on the through gate 35, the utility power supply 34a of the second operation port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed triggered by the winning on the through gate 35, and a common drawing display of the drawing unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is an area where the gaming ball does not pass in the gaming area PA The variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electronic combination open winning, the result of the stop corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the common view display unit 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power transmission open state. In the general-purpose open state, the general-purpose utility item 34a is open in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, although the common view display part 38a is comprised by the segment display which the some display segment by LED arranges in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, organic EL It may be configured by a display device, a CRT, or another type of display device such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed in the common view display unit 38a, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the common drawing unit 38, a common drawing suspension display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the common drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls winning through the through gate 35 is held at a maximum of four, and the number of the held balls is displayed by lighting of the common drawing hold display unit 38b.

  A lottery is triggered by winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly indicated through display effects in the special display unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

  In detail, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display unit 37 a. The display area of the special view display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. In the special view display unit 37a, the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34 is used as a trigger and a lottery is performed, thereby performing variable display of symbols or predetermined display. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the special view display part 37a is comprised by the segment display which the some segment for display by LED arranges in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, organic EL It may be configured by a display device, a CRT, or another type of display device such as a dot matrix display. Moreover, as a pattern displayed on the special view display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of colors May be displayed.

  In the special drawing unit 37, a special drawing reservation display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special drawing display unit 37a. The number of game balls played in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of holdings is displayed by turning on the special view holding display unit 37b.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be

  In the symbol display device 41, when the special pattern display or the predetermined display is performed on the special view display unit 37a based on the winning on the first operation opening 33 or the winning on the second operation opening 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. Variable display or predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of the upper row, middle row and lower row are set as a plurality of display areas, and the main characters with numbers "1" to "9" attached in each symbol row The symbols are scrolled in an ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, scroll display in all symbol rows is first started, and scroll display is switched from standby display to standby display in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and finally predetermined in each symbol row It is ended in the state where the symbol is displayed still. Then, in the game round where the game result is a big hit result, the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line set in advance on the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the combination of the same odd symbols is stopped and displayed when the most advantageous jackpot result described later is obtained, and the combination of the same even symbols is displayed stopped when the low probability jackpot result described later is obtained. If it is not the combination of the same symbol but it is not the combination of the same symbol, the combination of the symbols which are not displayed is not displayed.

  In the symbol display device 41, not only display effects triggered by winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also display effects in the open / close execution mode to be shifted after winning are won. It will be. In addition, based on winning in any of the operation openings 33, 34, the display is started on the special view display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined result is displayed and one game cycle is completed. It corresponds to the number of times. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  When the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34, transition to the open / close execution mode in which winning to the special power prize device 32 is possible. The special power winning device 32 has a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is disposed in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not be won, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can be won if the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which transition is made when a hit result is obtained. In the closed state, although it is not impossible to win, it may be in a state in which the winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view for explaining a configuration relating to the discharge of gaming balls having flowed down the game area PA.

  As described above, the game balls entered in any of the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the out opening 24a are discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the gaming ball which is fired from the gaming ball firing mechanism 27 and flows into the gaming area PA is any of the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the out opening 24a. The player is discharged from the game area PA by entering the ball. The game ball entered in any of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34 and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

  At the back of the game board 24, discharge passage parts 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34 and out opening 24a respectively. . The game ball having flowed into the discharge passage portion 42 to 48 is led to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the discharge passage portion 42 to 48 which has flowed into the discharge ball collecting portion not shown. Be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Each of the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 is provided with various detection sensors 42 a to 48 a for detecting a game ball. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, discharge passage portions 42 to 44 are provided corresponding to the four, respectively. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right thereof. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided such that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided to be present. The game ball having entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a on the way through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game is entered into the general winning opening 31 next to the right The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43 a while passing through the second discharge passage 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to merge at an intermediate position with respect to the two right side general winning a prize openings 31 is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and the outlet side regions merge to have one outlet side region. doing. A third winning opening detection sensor 44 a is provided such that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the exit side area of the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball having entered the right two normal winning openings 31 is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44 a while passing through the third discharge passage 44.

  A fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided corresponding to the special power winning device 32. A special power detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the fourth discharge passage 45, and the gaming ball entering the special power winning device 32 passes the fourth discharge passage 45 on the way It is detected by the special charge detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage 46 is provided corresponding to the first operation port 33. The first operation port detection sensor 46 a is provided so that the detection range exists at an intermediate position of the fifth ejection passage portion 46, and the gaming ball having entered the first operation port 33 is the fifth ejection passage portion 46. While passing through, it is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operation port 34. The second operation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the sixth discharge passage section 47, and the gaming ball entering the second operation port 34 is the sixth discharge passage section 47. While passing through, it is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the seventh discharge passage 48, and the gaming ball entering the out-port 24a passes the seventh discharge passage 48 halfway It is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a.

  The game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a while flowing down the game area PA.

  Although an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as each of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, any sensor may be used as long as it can individually detect the game balls. The various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and detection results of the various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal in a state in which the gaming ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal in a state in which the gaming ball is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the gaming board 24 of the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 that enables the player to view substantially the entire game area PA from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and the game area PA may be made through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 If it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  The display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output are provided. Further, below the window 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 bulging toward the front side are vertically juxtaposed. An upper plate 55a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a opening similarly upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function for temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the later described payout device and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing the game balls which become surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 60 which controls the main control of the game is mounted. FIG. 5 is a front view of main controller 60. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the main control device 60 is configured such that the main control substrate 61 is accommodated in the substrate box 60 a. The MPU 62 is mounted on an element mounting surface which is one plate surface of the main control substrate 61. The substrate box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. Although the substrate box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, the substrate box 60a may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 in the substrate box 60a faces the back of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by making the gaming machine main body 12 open to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually check the opposing wall portion 60b It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 62 through the facing wall portion 60b.

  The substrate box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c back and forth, but in the plurality of case bodies 60c, the separation of the case bodies 60c is prevented and the traces thereof when the case bodies 60c are separated. A joint 60e is provided for leaving. A plurality of connecting portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular substrate box 60a. As a result, even if the partial joint portion 60e is broken to separate the case body 60c in a state where the partial joint portion 60e is used to prevent the separation of the case body 60c, another joint is thereafter made. It is possible to prevent the separation of the case body 60c again by bringing the portion 60e into the coupled state. In addition, when the case body 60c is separated, the connecting portion 60e is broken and the trace thereof remains, so that whether the separation of the case body 60c is improperly performed can be grasped by visually confirming the connecting portion 60e. It becomes possible. In addition, a sealing seal 60f is attached to one side of the substrate box 60a opposite to one side where the coupling portions 60e are juxtaposed so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. The adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c when the sealing seal 60f is peeled off. Thereby, when the sealing seal 60f is peeled off at the time of separation of the case body 60c, it becomes possible to leave the mark.

  In the main control device 60 of the above configuration, the game hall manager owns the main control board 61 in order to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". A setting key insertion portion 68a inserted with a setting key and turned ON, an update button 68b operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after an ON operation to the setting key insertion portion 68a, and a main control device A reset button 68c operated to clear data of the main RAM 65 described later provided in the MPU 62 of 60, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying of the management result of the game history , Is provided. In addition, the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. A read terminal 68d is provided. The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to six stages of “setting 1” to “setting 6” and is arbitrary if it is a plurality of stages.

  The setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, the reading terminal 68d (that is, the MPU 62), and the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. Further, the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the facing wall portion 60b of the substrate box 60a as described above, but the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered by the wall 60b. That is, in the facing wall portion 60b, regions facing the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d are made as separate openings. Thus, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a without requiring the substrate box 60a to be opened, the update button 68b can be pressed, and the reset button 68c is pressed. It is possible to connect the connection terminal of the external device to the read terminal 68d.

  By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion unit 68 a and rotating the setting key in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion unit 68 a is turned on. It is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by starting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in that state (that is, by starting the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). Changeable state. Then, each time the update button 68 b is pressed once in this state, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed in ascending order by one step in the range of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. When the update button 68 b is operated in the state of “setting 6”, the setting is updated to “setting 1”. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion portion 68a from the position of the ON operation in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction and returning to the initial position Become. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, the changeable state is ended, and it is possible to play a game with the set value at that time. That is, the setting value can not be changed even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state is finished.

  The ON operation to the setting key insertion unit 68a is effective only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is started). Therefore, the setting value can not be changed even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on after the process at the start of supply of the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of n of “setting n” (n is an integer of “1” to “6”) (ie setting The higher the value, the higher the degree of advantage. Although the details will be described later, there are a low probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively high as a winning lottery mode for determining the winning probability of the big hit result. The higher it is set, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is set. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is constant regardless of the setting value.

  The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above, but in order to cause the data to be cleared, supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with pressing the reset button 68c (Ie, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 needs to be started). The ON operation to the reset button 68c is effective only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is started). Therefore, the data in the main RAM 65 can not be cleared even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  The reading terminal 68d is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read information (program and data) stored in the game history management result or the main ROM 64 as already described, but the external device In order to perform external output, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the connection terminal of the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d (ie, operation of the main controller 60 to the MPU 62) Need to start supplying power). The connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is effective only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is started). Therefore, even if an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, external output to the external device is not performed.

  Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this and it is not limited to this. It may be a light emitter, may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is installed with its display surface facing the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 faces, and by the facing wall portion 60b of the substrate box 60a It is covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c housed in the substrate box 60a are viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, as described above, the main control unit 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 in the substrate box 60a faces the back of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notifications through the facing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually observe the display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c.

  Not only the numerals “0” to “9” but various characters including alphabet characters are displayed on the display surface of the first notification display device 69a. On the other hand, in the second notification display device 69 b and the third notification display device 69 c, the numerals “0” to “9” are displayed. Although the management result of the game history is notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the contents of the notification will be described in detail later. Further, in the changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. The value corresponding to the setting value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a, or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. Further, the setting value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c and the current setting value is the first to third notification. It may be configured to be displayed on another notification display device of the display devices 69a to 69c.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and the delivery mechanism 73 and the control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which the gaming balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the gaming balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. In addition, for example, a main pack power of, for example, 24 AC, is supplied to the dispensing mechanism portion 73, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power is mounted.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices and the like as a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and is accompanied by the operation of the discharge operation device 28 by the player. A power supply and launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / discharge control device 78 are disposed so as to be stacked back and forth so that the payout control device 77 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 which monitors the power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 incorporates a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and various counter circuits as a random number generator.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply for storing and holding such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs to be executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main RAM 65 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply for storing data, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data in response to the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the game history based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, while the general IC card opening 31, the special electric power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the out opening 24 a are grasped by the management IC 66, The frequency of entering the ball into the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is grasped in accordance with the held ball entry history. In addition, the occurrence frequency of the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode described later is grasped by the management IC 66.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The power failure monitoring board 67 and the payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power and emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and the operation power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as ball entering detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the electric power detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection for each light detection sensor 42a to 49a. A sensor 46a, a second operation port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a are included. Based on the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 performs the ball entering determination on each ball entering part. Further, the main CPU 63 executes various lottery based on the winning on the first operation port 33 and executes various lottery based on the winning on the second operating port 34.

  On the input side of the MPU 62, a setting key insertion portion 68a provided on the main control board 61, an update button 68b and a reset button 68c are provided. The setting key insertion portion 68a is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects which of the position of the ON operation and the position of the OFF operation the setting key insertion portion 68a is disposed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies, based on the detection result from the sensor, which one of the position of the ON operation and the position of the OFF operation the setting key insertion unit 68a is disposed. The update button 68 b is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether the update button 68 b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the update button 68 b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. A sensor (not shown) is provided on the reset button 68c, and whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed is detected by the sensor. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

  The power failure monitoring board 67, the payout control device 77, and the sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. A payout ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on, for example, the game ball entering the prize ball corresponding ball portion corresponding to the payout of the game ball among the above ball portions Ru. The voice light emission control device 81 outputs various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a drive unit 32b for special power to open and close the open / close door 32a of the special power winning device 32, a drive unit 34b for general power to open and operate the common electric utility 34a of the second operation port 34, The drawing unit 37 and the drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display unit 37 a and a special drawing reservation display unit 37 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the common drawing unit 38 is provided with a common drawing display unit 38 a and a common drawing reservation display unit 38 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control substrate 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, drive control of the drive unit 32b for the special power is performed in the main CPU 63 so that the special power prize device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the open state of the common utility player 34a is won, the drive control of the common drive unit 34b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the common utility product 34a is opened and closed. In addition, display control of the special view display unit 37a is executed in the main CPU 63 at each game play. Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not the general electric utility product 34a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the common drawing display unit 38a is executed in the main CPU 63. In addition, when winning is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special view display unit 37a, display control of the special view reserve display unit 37b in the main CPU 63 Is executed, and when the winning of the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the common drawing display unit 38a, display control of the common drawing reservation display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63.

  First to third notification display devices 69 a to 69 c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Further, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 is notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In addition, when changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are controlled by the management IC 66 and not controlled by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display control is performed and the display control is performed by the management IC 66. The display control by the main CPU 63 has priority over the display control by the management IC 66 for the display of the third notification display device 69c.

  However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the display control of the third notification display device 69c may be performed by the management IC 66 and may not be controlled by the main CPU 63. In this case, when displaying the current setting value on the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the main CPU 63 instructs the management IC 66 to display the setting value. Good.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68 d. A sensor (not shown) is provided on the reading terminal 68d, and the sensor detects whether or not the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, based on the detection result from the sensor, the main CPU 63 specifies whether the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. When an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output to the external device.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply and emission control device 78, and monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs the payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc. generate necessary operation power for each, and supply the generated operation power. Incidentally, the power supply / discharge control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for powering off such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the powering unit for powering off mainly The main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77 are supplied with storage power. Further, the power source and launch control device 78 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. In addition, as described above, the power supply switch is provided in the dispensing mechanism unit 73, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the power switch is turned off. As a result, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  The sound emission control device 81 controls the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60 and controls the display control device 82. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  During the game, the main CPU 63 uses various counter information to set a big hit occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special view display unit 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the common drawing display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the random number counter C1 used for lottery of occurrence of hit, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are out of variation The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when doing, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the per random number counter C1, and the display continuation time in the special view display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41 The variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, a common control utility release counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether the common control utility 34a of the second operation port 34 is to be put into the common use release state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as an acquisition information storage means in the main side RAM 65 when a winning on the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs. It is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

  The holding storage area 65a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The reserve area RE includes a first reserve area RE1, a second reserve area RE2, a third reserve area RE3 and a fourth reserve area RE4, and the winning history to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 In addition, the combination of each numerical information of the per-random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, if winnings to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occur consecutively in a plurality of times in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, the first holding area RE1 → second Each numerical value information is stored in chronological order in the order of reserved area RE2, third reserved area RE3, and fourth reserved area RE4. By providing four reserve areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, the game ball's winning history of the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is reserved and stored up to four at maximum. .

  The number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, five or more, or may be singular.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when the variable display of the special view display unit 37a is started, and the start of one game cycle is started On the occasion of the above, on the basis of various numerical value information stored in the execution area AE, a judgment of success or failure is performed.

  The respective counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general purpose power product release counter C4 will be described. For example, the commercial power release counter C4 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The routine charge release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the common charge holding area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball reaches the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the general-purpose utility 34a is controlled to an open state by the value of the stored general-purpose utility open counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set such that the modes of support by the power control unit 34a differ from one another. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner in the game area PA, the commercial battery 34a of the second operation opening 34 is opened per unit time. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set such that the frequency of state becoming relatively high and low.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the common power open status in the common power open lottery using the common power utility open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5) In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general-purpose product 34a becomes open when the general-purpose open state is won is set to a larger number than in the low-frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer It is done. In this case, when the general electric power release state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power utility item 34a occurs a plurality of times, it is from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set to be shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the securing time minimumly secured in performing the next public power release lottery after the first public power release lottery is performed rather than the low frequency support mode One display continuation time in the display unit 38a is set to be short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first operation port 33 is higher than that of the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operation port 33. There is a high probability that a winning on the mouth 34 will occur. And, when the winning a prize to the 2nd operation opening 34 occurs, because the payout of the game sphere of specified number is executed, in the high frequency support mode, the game while the player does not decrease the ball very much It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the common power release state occurs per unit time in the high-frequency support mode rather than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It is good also as composition which makes high the probability of being in a state where the general public is released. In addition, a securement time (for example, based on winning on the through gate 35) is performed in the generalization display portion 38a, which is secured when the next general public open lottery is performed after one public open public lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that the short securing time is easier to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It is also good. Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening time is extended, and the securing time secured in performing the next public power release lottery after the one public power opening lottery is performed, the securing time to be related, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among the shortening of the average time of and the increase of the winning probability.

  Here, as described above, setting states “setting 1” to “setting 6” exist in the pachinko machine 10, but the opening frequency and opening mode of the general public utilities 34a in the low frequency support mode are any The setting values are the same, and the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general control utility product 34a in the high frequency support mode are the same regardless of which setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the opening frequency and the opening mode of the commercial power commercial product 34a changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in at least one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. It is good also as composition. For example, the setting frequency may be higher in the low frequency support mode, and the opening frequency of the general purpose utilities 34a may be higher. The second operation in the case where the general purpose utilities 34a are in the open state once in the low frequency support mode The probability of entering the game ball into the mouth 34 may be high. Also, the higher the setting value, the higher the frequency with which the general-purpose utility 34a opens in the high-frequency support mode. Alternatively, the second in the case where the general-purpose utility 34a becomes open once in the high-frequency support mode The probability of entering the game ball into the operation opening 34 may be increased.

  Next, the per-random number counter C1 will be described. The per-random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one, for example, within the range of 0 to 599, and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the per-random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random-number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the per-random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the per random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success or failure table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As shown in FIG. As the pass / fail tables, low probability tables 64a to 64f for the low probability mode and a high probability table 64g for the high probability mode are stored.

  The low probability results tables 64a to 64f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". That is, the low probability table 64a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and the setting referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2" The low probability failure table 64b for 2, the low probability failure table 64c for setting 3 referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3", and the setting state for the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4" If the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5", the low probability non-existence table 64e for the setting 5 referred to when the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5", and the pachinko machine 10 There is a low probability of failure table 64 f for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of is “setting 6”.

  The low probability table 64a to 64f is set such that the winning probability of the jackpot result is higher as the setting value is higher. Specifically, when the low probability of failure table 64a for setting 1 is referred to, the result is a big hit with about 1/320, and when the low probability of failure table 64b for setting 2 is referred to, it is about 1/310. Results in a big hit, and when the low probability table 64c for setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/300, and when the low probability table 64d for setting 4 is referred to, about 1/290 The jackpot results in and the jackpot result for about 5 if the low probability table 64e for setting 5 is referenced is about 1/270 if the low probability for table 6f for setting 6 is referred to Results in a big hit. As a result, a jackpot result is more easily generated in the low probability mode when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, which is advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, only one type of the high probability of failure table 64 g is provided so as to be common regardless of any setting state of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. The high probability of failure table 64g is set such that the winning probability of the jackpot result is higher than that of the low probability of failure tables 64a to 64f in any setting state of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Specifically, when the high probability nonconforming table 64g is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/30. Thus, regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the high probability mode can be made more advantageous than the low probability mode. In addition, even if it is "Setting 1" which is the lowest setting state, the probability of becoming a jackpot result can be made higher than the low probability mode of "setting 6" which is the highest setting state by becoming the high probability mode. It becomes. In addition, in the high probability mode, it becomes possible to avoid the advantage or disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and reduce the storage capacity for storing the high probability failure table 64g in the main ROM 64 in advance. It becomes possible.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 65a at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening and closing control of the special power winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the lottery means after completion of the opening and closing execution mode, and (3) the third after opening and closing execution mode A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the common use utility 34 a of the 2 operation port 34.

  As an aspect of the open / close control of the special power winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings on the special power winning device 32 in the period from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a predetermined number of round games are executed with an upper limit.

  The round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls wins the special power prize device 32 is satisfied. It is. Further, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed round number regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 is set by making the opening continuation time from the opening of the special electric winning device 32 to the closing different. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the opening continuation time is set to 29 seconds is long, and a short-time mode in which the opening continuation time is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the long time, Is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds. It is controlled. In addition, the upper limit number of end conditions of the round game is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the open modes, the open continuation time of a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and one round game is set. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the opening duration time of the time shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and one round game, more specifically, the time shorter than the game ball firing cycle is set. Therefore, when one opening is performed in the long time mode, it is expected that the special power winning device 32 will receive winnings for the upper limit number in one round game, and the short time mode 1 When the opening is performed, it is expected that no prize will be generated on the special power winning device 32, or even if there is a prize, it will be about one.

  In the high frequency winning mode, the special power winning device 32 is opened once by the long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special power winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

  In addition, the number of opening and closing times of special power winning device 32 in high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, opening continuation time for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game, the high frequency winning mode If the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the special power winning device 32 in the period from when the opening / closing execution mode is started to the end is higher than in the low frequency winning mode, it is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary It is.

  The distribution destination of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 as shown in FIG. In the distribution table 64h, the low probability jackpot result, the low winning high probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result are set as the distribution destination of the jackpot result when the jackpot result is obtained.

  The low probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, in the high-frequency support mode, the transition to the low-frequency support mode is made when the number of games has reached the end reference frequency (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

  In the low winning high probability big hit result, the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the success or failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and shifts to the jackpot state by it.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and shifts to the jackpot state by it.

  Note that the normal gaming state is not the opening / closing execution mode, but the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, in relation to the above gaming states. Further, as a game result, a configuration may be made in which the low winning high probability big hit result is not set. Further, in the opening and closing execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the low probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

  In the distribution table 64h, among the values of "0 to 29" jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" correspond to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" is the low winning high probability jackpot result It corresponds, and "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous big hit result.

  Only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common regardless of any setting state of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the setting condition of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming advantageous or disadvantageous for the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and the storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64 h in the main side ROM 64 in advance. Can be reduced.

  The distribution mode of the jackpot result may be different depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous jackpot result, or the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous jackpot result or the low winning high probability jackpot result. In this case, it is possible to increase the probability of becoming a high probability mode after becoming a jackpot result as the set value is higher. Also, the higher the set value may be configured to lower the probability of being assigned to the low winning high probability jackpot result, the high setting value may not be assigned to the low winning high probability jackpot result, whereas the low setting value may be the low winning height certainty. It is good also as composition which can be distributed to a jackpot result. In this case, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability that the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode will occur.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 41. An expected effect includes the symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in the gaming machine that results in a predetermined jackpot, the symbol display device 41 in the gaming machine in which the final stop result is the corresponding result. Before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in is started, it means the display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the above-mentioned correspondence with correspondence result is likely to be obtained. In addition, specifically, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol in which the same number was attached | subjected on one effective line is stopped-displayed.

  In the expectation effect, two types of reach display and advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the occurrence of the response to an assignment in a stage before the reach display and the like are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. The display state which performs the fluctuation display of a symbol in a symbol row is included. Also, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, or Also, there is a method of performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface 41 a after reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols in reduced size or non-display.

  In the advance notice display, after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows, or a part of the symbol rows are plural. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row. In addition, the background screen is a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and the pattern on the symbol array is the predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice may occur at any of the game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but it is higher when reach display is performed than when reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the game time corresponding to the big hit result in which the combination of the same symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is not performed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the game times corresponding to the out result are executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main side ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. .

  On the other hand, the main control unit 60 does not determine whether to display the advance notice, but the sound emission control unit 81 determines. In this case, in the voice light emission control device 81, the game display corresponding to any of the big hit results is more likely to generate a notice display than the game play corresponding to the out result, and the notice display having a low appearance rate A lottery process for displaying a notice is performed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that are likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  Here, the probability that the reach display occurs in the game round which results in the disconnection result is the same regardless of which setting state of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. This makes it possible to prevent the setting condition of the pachinko machine 10 from having an advantage or a disadvantage with respect to the probability that the reach indication occurs in the game time that results in the disconnection. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the higher the setting value may be, the higher the probability that the reach display occurs in the game result which is the result of being out may be high.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display continuation time in the special view display unit 37 a and the display continuation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the timer interrupt process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the special view display unit 37a and the time of the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of the fluctuation start of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process performed in order to advance a game in main side CPU63 is explained. The processes of the main CPU 63 can be roughly classified into a main process activated upon power-on and a timer interrupt process activated periodically (with a cycle of 4 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, power on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for weight (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and initialization of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step S103). If the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on (step S103: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step S104), each area of the main RAM 65 is selected except for the area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 65. At the same time, “0” is cleared and initialization is performed on the area cleared by “0” (step S105). That is, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 for the information of the setting value While maintaining the state before the supply of power is stopped, the process of clearing the main RAM 65 is performed, and initialization is performed on the storage area in which the process of clearing is performed. This makes it possible to initialize other areas of the main RAM 65 without requiring a change in setting values. In step S105, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S106). The power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 65, and when the processing at the time of a predetermined power failure is normally executed when the supply of operation power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped, the power failure flag is "1". Will be set. If "1" is set in the power failure flag, it is determined whether the calculation result of the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data (step S107) . When the process of step S105 is performed, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by confirming the main side RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, it is determined that the setting value is normal when the setting value is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and it is determined that the setting value is abnormal when it is “0” or 7 or more.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, the operation inhibiting process is performed. In the operation prohibition process, after an error notification process for notifying a hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S109), an infinite loop is made. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S117) described later.

  If the determination in step S106 to step S108 is affirmative, the power on setting process is performed (step S110). In the power on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In addition, after the process of step S110 is performed, a recognition process (step S111) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information and various data is output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. A data output process is performed (step S112). The details of the recognition process and the data output process will be described later.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is inhibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S113 is completed after the process of step S112 is completed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. Thus, when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S112 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S113 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start processing for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S113 to step S116. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of step S113 to step S116 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processing of the step S113 to the step S116 is a non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S113, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt disable setting is performed. In the following step S114, random number initial value updating processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S115, variation counter updating processing for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the present numerical value information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main side RAM 65, and the process of adding one to the read out numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, they are cleared to "0". After that, in step S116, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state where the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state where it is permitted. When the process of step S116 is performed, the process returns to step S113, and the processes of step S113 to step S116 are repeated.

  On the other hand, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON (step S103: YES), the main RAM 65 includes the area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. All areas are cleared to "0" and initialization is performed on the areas cleared to "0" (step S117). That is, when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, all areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" while the reset button 68c is not pressed. Initialization is performed on the storage area for which processing has been performed. In step S117, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0", and initialization is performed. The present invention is not limited to this, and even when the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the entire main RAM 65 is not operated when the reset button 68c is not operated. The clear processing may be performed when the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68 c is pressed and the clear processing is not performed.

  Thereafter, the setting value update process is performed in step S118, and the output process of the setting value update signal is performed in step S119, and then the process proceeds to step S110. Hereinafter, the setting value update process will be described. The process of outputting the set value update signal will be described in detail later. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing.

  First, "1" is set in the set value counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S201). The set value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to identify which set value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting “1” to the setting value counter, when the setting value updating process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting values up to that time.

  Thereafter, display start processing of the setting value is executed (step S202). In the display start process of the setting value, the display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. The manager of the gaming hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting value.

  Thereafter, under the condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned OFF (step S203: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b is pushed once (step S204). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68 b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off.

  If the update button 68 b has been pressed once (step S 204: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S 205). If the value of the set value counter after the addition of 1 exceeds "6" (step S206: YES), "1" is set in the set value counter (step S207). Thus, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", it is changed to "setting 1". I will be back.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206, or if the process of step S207 is performed, display update processing of the setting value is performed (step S208). In the display value update process of the setting value, the display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65 is displayed. By confirming the third notification display device 69c, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

  After the process of step S208 is performed, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processing after step S204 is executed again. When the OFF operation is performed (step S203: YES), the display end processing of the setting value is executed (step S209). In the display end process of the setting value, the display of the setting value on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, in a 4 millisecond cycle).

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S301). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption is received from the power interruption monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of the power interruption is identified, the processing at power failure is executed and Become. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number updating process is executed (step S302). In the random number updating process for drawing, the update of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general purpose battery release counter C4 is executed. Specifically, the present numerical value information was sequentially read out from the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general electric utility release counter C4, and the process of adding one each of the read numerical information was executed. Later, the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, they are cleared to "0". Thereafter, in step S303, the random number initial value updating process is performed as in step S114, and in step S304, the variation counter updating process is performed as in step S115.

  Thereafter, the fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred (step S305). In the fraud detection process, occurrence of multiple types of events is monitored, and it is confirmed that a predetermined event has occurred, thereby setting “1” to the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In the following step S306, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S306, the processes in step S307 and subsequent steps are executed.

  In step S307, port output processing is performed. In the port output process, when setting of output information is performed in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing an output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32 b and 34 b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special power winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special power is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information to switch the common use utility 34 a in the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34 b for general use should be started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Thereafter, the reading process is executed (step S308). In the reading process, reading of signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal is executed, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, the ball entering detection process is executed (step S309). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from the respective ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 , And the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35. The details of the ball entering detection process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S310). In this case, the timer counter is stored in which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated, but both the update of the subtraction type timer counter and the update of the addition type timer counter are collectively performed. It is good also as composition.

  Thereafter, launch control processing for performing launch control of the game balls is executed (step S311). In the situation where the firing operation to the firing control device 28 is continued, one gaming ball is fired in 0.6 seconds which is a predetermined firing cycle. In the following step S312, as input state monitoring processing, confirmation of disconnection of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a or confirmation of opening of the game machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 based on the information read in the reading processing of step S308. I do.

  Thereafter, special figure special power control processing for executing execution control of the game run and execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S313). The special figure special power control process will be described in detail later.

  After that, the common drawing common control control process is executed (step S314). When the winning gate on the through gate 35 has been awarded, the routine control routine executes processing for acquiring the hold information on the general view side, and the hold information on the general view side is stored. Then, the release determination is performed on the hold information, and the release determination is used as a trigger to execute processing for producing effects for the common drawing. Also, based on the result of the open determination, processing is performed to open and close the general purpose utility product 34 a of the second operation port 34. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding processing is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding processing is executed. Further, in the case of the open / close execution mode, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set.

  In the following step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S313 and step S314, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information concerning the special view display unit 37a on the special view hold display unit 37b is performed. The output information is set to reflect the increase / decrease number of the suspension information related to the common drawing display unit 38a on the common drawing reservation display unit 38b. Further, in step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S313 and step S314, output information for updating the display content of the special view display unit 37a is set, and the display content of the common view display unit 38a is set. Set the output information for updating.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S316). Further, a payout output process for setting a winning ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). Also, an external information setting process is performed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time (step S318). Thereafter, a management output process is executed to output information corresponding to the ball entry result of the gaming ball in the gaming area PA to the management IC 66 (step S319). Details of the management output process will be described later.

  Next, the special view special power control process of step S313 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, acquisition processing of suspension information is executed (step S401). In the process of acquiring the hold information, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34, and when the winning is occurring, the number of holdings in the holding storage area 65a is an upper limit It is determined whether it is less than a value ("4" in the present embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, the number of reservations is incremented by 1 and each numerical information of the per-random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is for suspension It stores in the first reserve area among the reserve areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. In the case where winnings to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are occurring at the same time, the processing for acquiring the above-mentioned suspension information within the range of executing the acquisition process of the suspension information once is performed. Run multiple times. In addition, when new acquisition of the hold information is performed, an acquisition command corresponding to that is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the command, the voice light emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of the hold information in the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase of the hold information.

  Thereafter, the information of the special drawing special charge counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special drawing special electric address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electricity counter is acquired from the special figure special electricity address table (step S404), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). ). The special figure special charge counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which one of the various processes from step S406 to step S412 should be executed, and the special figure special charge address table is a special figure special charge counter A start address of a program for executing the processing of step S406 to step S412 is set corresponding to the numerical information.

  In step S406, special figure fluctuation start processing is executed. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start process.

  In the special view fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed (step S502) on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE is one or more (step S501: YES). In the data setting process, the number of reservations is first decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting data stored in the respective reserve areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserve area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4 to the lower area side, and more specifically, the second reserve area RE2 → the first reserve area RE1. The data in each area is shifted in such a way as to the third reserve area RE3 → the second reserve area RE2 and the fourth reserve area RE4 → the third reserve area RE3 and the fourth reserve area RE4 is cleared to “0”. At this time, a shift command for making it possible to recognize that the data of the reserved area has been shifted is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the command, the voice light emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of the hold information in the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the decrease of the hold information.

  After the data setting process is executed, the success / failure table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, information on the main RAM 65 indicating the main lottery mode is read out to grasp the current main lottery mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the high probability decision table 64g is read from the main ROM 64. On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the low probability of failure table 64 a to 64 f corresponding to the grasped setting value is read out from the main ROM 64.

  Thereafter, the success or failure determination process is executed with reference to the success or failure tables 64a to 64g read out in step S503 (step S504). In the success / failure determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for determination of success or failure, that is, numerical information related to the per random number counter C1, is the jackpot numerical information set in the success or failure tables 64a to 64g It is determined whether or not it matches.

  If the result of the propriety determination processing is a big hit winning result (step S505: YES), the distribution determination processing is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information on the jackpot type counter C2 is read. Then, with reference to the distribution table 64h provided in the main ROM 64, it is specified which of the jackpot results the numerical information related to the read out jackpot type counter C2 corresponds. Specifically, the low probability jackpot result, which of the low winning high probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to which jackpot result is specified.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64, information of the aspect of the pattern to be finally displayed on the special view display unit 37a finally in the game round related to the start of fluctuation this time Identify and write the identified information to the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information of the pattern aspect to be stopped and displayed on the special view display unit 37a is set to be different for each type of the jackpot result.

  Thereafter, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with a flag corresponding to the type of each jackpot result, and in step S508, of the flags corresponding to the type of each jackpot result, the distribution determination process of step S506 is performed. Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the result.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S505 that the jackpot is not the winning result, the stop result setting process for the outlier is executed (step S509). Specifically, information on the pattern aspect to be finally displayed on the special view display unit 37a in the game round relating to the start of the change from the stop result table for deviation result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64 Identify and write the identified information to the main RAM 65. The information of the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information of the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After one of the processes in step S508 and step S509 is executed, a process of grasping the duration of the game is executed (step S510). In this process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game time relating to the start of the change is the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result. If neither the jackpot result nor the numerical information on the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

  If it is determined that the reach display occurs, the duration period of the game corresponding to the numerical information of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the reach generation continuation period table stored in the main ROM 64 . On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display is not generated, the reach non-occurrence continuation time period table stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the game time corresponding to the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is continued. Get a period. Incidentally, the duration of the game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence duration table.

  In addition, the continuation period of the game times at the time of reach non-occurrence | occurrence | production is set so that the continuation period of game times becomes short, so that there are many numbers of pending | holding information stored in area RE for suspension. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the duration of the short game times is selected as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same as the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A reach non-occurrence duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the duration of the game times may not change depending on the number of holding information and the support mode, or may be opposite to the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game play at the time of reach occurrence. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, a duration table may be individually set for each of the case of outreach and the case of outreach in which no reach occurs. In this case, distribution of the continuation period of the game times according to each game result will be performed.

  Thereafter, the information on the continuation period of the game times acquired in step S510 is set in the special-image special-charge timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S511). The updating of the numerical information set in the special drawing special power timer counter is executed in the timer updating process (step S310). By the way, although the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a and the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 are performed as the effect for the game use, when the respective variation displays are ended, the game run The final stop display is displayed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the state where the stop result of is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a combination of predetermined symbols is on standby on the effective line). In this case, the continuation period of the game times acquired in step S510 is the total time for one game cycle.

  Thereafter, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S512). The variable command includes information on the duration of the game play. Here, the duration of the game times obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table as described above is different from the duration of the game times obtained with reference to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the command for variation does not include information on the presence or absence of reach, the voice emission control device 81 can specify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the duration of the game. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Note that the change command may include information directly indicating the presence or absence of reach. Further, the type command includes information on the game result.

  When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command from the main CPU 63, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 execute effects for the game circulation. In this case, the effect for the game cycle is performed in a mode corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command. Further, in the symbol display device 41, the variation display of the symbol is performed as the effect for the game use, and when the effect for the game use is completed, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the result of the acceptance determination process and the distribution determination process is Stop display.

  Thereafter, the variation display of the pattern on the special view display unit 37a is started (step S513). Then, the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special view special charge counter is “0” when the special view change start process is executed, the numerical information of the special view special charge counter is “1”. After that, “1” is set to the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for specifying that the main CPU 63 should execute information output indicating that the game play has been started to the management IC 66.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52), in step S407, the special figure changing process is executed. In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is the continuation time of the game times and the timing before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special view display unit 37a is ruled Execute the process to make a change. When it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is added by 1, and the numerical information of the counter is processed from the special figure during fluctuation processing to the special figure determination fixed processing Update to things. In the present embodiment, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control apparatus 81.

  In step S408, the process is executed during special image determination. In the special figure determination process, the display mode of the pattern in the special view display unit 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Further, in the processing during special-figure determination, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. If transition to the open / close execution mode does not occur, the numeric information of the special figure special power counter is cleared to “0”. When transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special electric power special counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is processed while the special electric power is determined. Update.

  In step S409, a special power start process is performed. In the special power start process, when the process for starting the opening period in the current switching execution mode is not performed yet, the setting process of the opening period is performed. Also, the opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 to execute the opening effect by receiving the opening command. If the opening period has elapsed, the start processing for starting the first round game is executed. In the start process, the special power winning device 32 is opened, and the ending condition of the round game is set. When setting the ending condition, the upper limit continuation time in the case of continuing the special power winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set, and the special power winning device 32 can be won in the first round game of this time The upper limit number of gaming balls is set in the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 65.

  In step S410, the special power release open process is executed. In the processing during the special power release, it is determined whether the ending condition of the round game is satisfied. If the termination condition is satisfied, the special power winning device 32 is closed. And if the round game which ended this time is the round game of the last execution time, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is added 1 by the numerical electric information of the counter concerned from the thing corresponding to the special electric power open processing If the round game ended this time is the round game of the last execution time, the numerical information of the special power special counter is added by 2 and the numerical information of the counter is processed during the special electric power release process. Update from the one corresponding to the special power termination process.

  In step S411, the processing during special power close is executed. In the special power closed process, it is determined whether or not an interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has elapsed, the special power winning device 32 is set in the open state and the ending condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special drawing special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric power open process.

  In step S412, a special power termination process is performed. In the special power termination process, when the process for starting the ending period in the current opening / closing execution mode is not yet executed, the ending period (for example, 5 seconds) is set and the ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 . The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute an ending effect by receiving the ending command. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the success or failure lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the jackpot result that is the start trigger of the current open / close execution mode.

  Next, based on the detection result of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a in the main CPU 63, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34 and the through The configuration for specifying the presence or absence of the game ball entering the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration for causing the main CPU 63 to receive detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. And, according to the voltage of each signal, the area where the information of “0” or “1” is stored is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, 0th bit D0-7th bit D7 are provided as the said area. Also, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, in order to limit the targets to be input simultaneously to eight types, the group of signals to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC Switching is performed through switching control.

  In the ball entering detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set as a signal group from each ball entering detection sensor 42a to 49a. In such a setting, information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is stored in the zeroth bit D0, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the electric power detection sensor 45a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second operation port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the out-port detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  Each of the above-mentioned ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that no detection is in progress as a detection signal when the passage of the game balls is not detected, and detects the passage of the game balls In this case, an HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. Then, the input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Store information. That is, in the situation where passage of the game ball is not detected in the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and passage of the game ball is In the detected situation, "1" information corresponding to the information indicating that the corresponding bit is being detected is stored.

  FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the ball entering detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0, one first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S602), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S603) . The first output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42 a should be executed on the management IC 66. It is a flag. The ten prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of ten game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the 10-prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10-prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) and When the command is output once, the value of the 10-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that ten gaming balls are paid out when the ten prize ball command is received.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1, one second winning opening detection sensor 43a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S605), and the value of the 10-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S606) . The second output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed on the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2, one third winning opening detection sensor 44a is used. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S 607: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S608), and the value of the 10-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S609) . The third output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed on the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3, one game ball is detected by the electric power detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, the special power prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S611), and the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S612). The value of the 15-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special power winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one gaming ball has entered the special power winning device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. In the special figure special power control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the special power prize flag, thereby entering one gaming ball to the special power prize device 32. It identifies that a ball has been generated, and subtracts 1 from the remaining number of ball that can be entered into the special power winning device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of ball that can enter the ball is executed, the special electric power winning flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special power detection sensor 45 a should be executed to the management IC 66 . The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of the 15 game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 15 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that fifteen gaming balls are paid out when the fifteen winning ball command is received.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored from the state in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4, one first operation port detection sensor 46a is used. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), and the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616). Further, the value of the one-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that one gaming ball has entered the first operation opening 33. In the special figure special power control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is stored in the reserve area RE of the reserve storage area 65a by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation prize flag. On the condition that the number of pending information being processed is less than four, which is the upper limit number, a process of newly storing the pending information is executed. In the special power control process (step S313), it is confirmed that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, and the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed to clear the first operating winning flag "0". Do. The fifth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the management IC 66 should execute information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. It is a flag. The one winning ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of one gaming ball should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the one prize ball command is generated. When the command is output once, the value of the one-prize ball counter is decremented by one. The payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one gaming ball is paid out, when the one winning ball command is received.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored from the state in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5, one second operation port detection sensor 47a is used. It is determined that a gaming ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S619), and the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S620). Further, the value of the one-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for specifying that the main game CPU 63 has entered one game ball into the second operation opening 34. In the special figure special power control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is stored in the reserve area RE of the reserve storage area 65a by confirming that "1" is set in the second operation prize flag. On the condition that the number of pending information being processed is less than four, which is the upper limit number, a process of newly storing the pending information is executed. Confirm that the second operation winning flag is set to "1" in the special electric power control process (step S313), and clear the second operation winning flag to "0" when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed. Do. The sixth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the management IC 66 should execute information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6, one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. Is determined (step S622: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the information has been switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored from the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the program control routine (step S314) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to “1”, whereby the general view stored in the common station area 65c is stored. Processing for storing the numerical information of the current general public utility boat release counter C4 as general-purpose hold information in the general-purpose hold area 65c under the condition that the number of hold information on the side is less than four, which is the upper limit number. Run. In step S314, it is confirmed that "1" is set in the gate winning flag, and when processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated at a cycle of 4 milliseconds as described above, when one ball detecting sensor 42a to 49a starts detecting one game ball, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) The main CPU 63 is specified that one game ball has been detected by the ball detection sensor 42a-49a while the detection of one game ball is being continued by the ball detection sensor 42a-49a. It takes place at Therefore, it is sufficient if one each of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

  Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configurations of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the payout side CPU 92 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout side ROM 93 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) which does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used as a read only memory. The dispensing side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the dispensing side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain the SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The dispensing side RAM 94 is capable of random access and has a faster reading time than the dispensing side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like in response to the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

  The payout CPU 92 can perform two-way communication with the main CPU 63. The payout CPU 92 receives an award ball command from the main CPU 63, and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of gaming balls corresponding to the award ball command is dispensed. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the gaming balls can be properly paid out, and if it is determined that the gaming balls can not normally be paid out, the payout side RAM 94 Even in the situation where the number information of the number of unpaid winning balls is stored, the payout device 76 is stopped. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that it is not possible to properly pay out as described above. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute notification indicating that the gaming ball can not be properly paid out. The notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 as described above. In a state where it is not possible to pay out gaming balls normally, a full state in which the lower plate 56a is full with gaming balls, a ball non-supply state in which gaming balls are not replenished in the tank 75, and a payout device 76 Does not operate normally, there is a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the gaming ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming ball is continuously detected in the full tank detection sensor as being full, and the state in which the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is canceled. In the case, it is specified that the full condition has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position in the gaming ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the ball is in the non-ball state when the game ball is not detected continuously by the non-ball detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the non-ball detection sensor is released. Identify that the no-ball condition has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one gaming ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the gaming ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 92 determines that the payout abnormal state is in the case where the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor despite the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. When the state where the gaming ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is specified that the payout abnormal state is released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. When the dispensing side CPU 92 receives the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, it specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when it is determined that the front door frame 14 is opened from the closed state, and it is specified that the front door frame 14 is closed from the open state. The front door close command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing described above. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when the front door open command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the front door closing command is received.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11. If there is, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and the gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at a timing when it is determined that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the opening state from the closing state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closing state from the opening state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the opening state when the main body opening command is received, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closing state when the main body closing command is received.

  The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). In the full tank process, as described above, it is specified based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor whether or not it is full, and in the case of the full tank process, the process for stopping the payout of gaming balls And a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the full tank state is canceled, the processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a ball useless process is executed (step S702). In the ball useless processing, as described above, it is specified whether or not the ball is in the non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor, and the process for stopping the payout of the game ball Along with execution, a command indicating that the ball is in a non-ball state is sent to the main CPU 63. Further, when the non-ball state is released, a process for making it possible to pay out the gaming ball is executed, and a command indicating that the non-ball state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the dispensing abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring processing, as described above, whether or not the payout abnormal state is identified based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor is executed, and in the case of the payout abnormal state, processing for stopping the payout of the gaming ball is executed. At the same time, the main CPU 63 transmits a command indicating that it is in a payout abnormal state. In addition, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process of enabling the payout of the gaming ball is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S704). In the front door opening monitoring process, whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 as already described, and in the case where the front door frame 14 is in the open state A process of stopping the payout of the game balls is executed, and a front door open command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for making it possible to pay out the game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S705). In the main body opening monitoring process, whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 as already described, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the opening state The main CPU 63 transmits a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 while executing processing for stopping the payout of the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, processing for enabling payout of gaming balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, command read processing is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, the main ball CPU 63 executes a process of reading the sent prize ball command, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S 707), the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 76 is performed. A payout control process is performed to control the execution (step S708). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 has a value of 1 or more, drive control of the payout device 76 is performed, and one gaming ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. When it is determined, the value of the winning balls number information is decremented by one. Then, when the value of the winning balls number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S709).

  Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, and is a part of external terminals, and a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and a part of external terminals A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. By electrically connecting each of the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 in this manner, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail, regarding the configuration of the electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is branched from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92, and a branch path SL2 is provided. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97. As a result, it is possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state, to the hall computer HC without the control by the payout side CPU 92.

  More specifically, the main body opening sensor 96 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 directed from the main body opening sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92 on the signal relay board 98. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result in the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for main body opening in the external terminal plate 97. As a result, it is possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control by the payout side CPU 92.

  Next, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the main CPU 63 performs the output setting of the information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 in the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in high-frequency support mode, and one game cycle have ended Information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are out of the game area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operation opening 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 are included. .

  In the external information setting process (step S 709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the payout side CPU 92 performs the output setting of information to each external terminal allocated to the payout side CPU 92 in the external terminal board 97. Information that is output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that payout of ten gaming balls has been performed.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the payout of the gaming balls in the pachinko machine 10 according to the various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97. For example,
・ Dumping rate that is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 ・ Out in the normal gaming state which is not the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode Ball rate (Hereafter, let this ball rate be "B")
・ Dumped ball rate in open / close execution mode ・ Dumped ball rate in high frequency support mode ・ Number of times played before 100 game balls were discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio "S")
-B-S x "the number of prize balls for winning on the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34"
The number of game balls entered into the first operation opening 33 generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of ball entry into the second operation opening 34 which occurred until 100 game balls were ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
-B-(S1 x "number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34")
-Probability of opening / closing execution mode in unit game times-Occurrence probability of high frequency support mode in unit game times, etc. are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the ball entering mode of the game balls in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of winning balls means the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the corresponding ball entry portion.

<Configuration for Managing the Prize Mode of the Game Ball>
Next, the configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. The MPU 62 further includes the I / F 101 in addition to the above, and also includes the reading terminal 68d described above.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a through the input port of the I / F 101 and commands from the payout CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. Further, as a result of the main CPU 63 executing various processes, when the signal output is performed to the device such as the drive unit 32b for special power, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101, and As a result of the CPU 63 executing various processes, when command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the audio light emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The management IC 66 includes a management I / F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, a history memory 117, and a calculation result memory 131. Is equipped. Each of these devices is bi-directionally connected via an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the unidirectional communication signal path group 118 incorporated in the MPU 62, and the unidirectional signal paths 119 incorporated in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the read terminal 68d via the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68 d via a signal path group 120 for two-way communication built in the MPU 62.

  The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an operation unit. The management side ROM 113 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory, a NAND type flash memory, etc. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management side RAM 114 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 is capable of random access and has a faster read time than the management side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data etc. in response to the execution of the control program stored in the management side ROM 113.

  The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the measured date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to an instruction from the management CPU 112 Configuration is possible. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and can measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain the SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence relationship memory 116 stores correspondence relationship information between the buffers 122a to 122p provided at the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence relationship memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information on the game history received from the main CPU 63 through the management side I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  The operation result memory 131 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is a signal to be input When the signal is LOW, information "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is HI, information "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a first signal of LOW level in a situation where a new gaming ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a When the ball is detected, the first signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal of HI level is inputted to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is performed by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a When the ball is detected, the second signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 122 b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is generated by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal of HI level is input to the third buffer 122 c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new game ball is not detected by the special power detection sensor 45a, and one special game ball is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. The fourth signal of HI level is output over a specific period of time. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal of the HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122 d.

  A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new gaming ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is performed by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. When the ball is detected, the fifth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of the HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122 e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of the LOW level in a state where a new game ball is not detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is performed by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the sixth signal of the HI level is input to the sixth buffer 122 f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal of the LOW level in a state where a new gaming ball is not detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a, and one gaming ball is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal of the HI level is input to the seventh buffer 122 g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122 h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in a state other than the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in a state in the open / close execution mode.

  A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode period is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in a state other than the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in the state the high frequency support mode.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122 j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the tenth signal of the LOW level in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the tenth signal of the HI level in a state where the front door frame 14 is open. Output.

  An eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not the game play has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eleventh signal of the LOW level until the game times are started, and outputs the eleventh signal of the HI level over the specific period when the game times are started. Do. The specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the eleventh signal of the HI level is input to the eleventh buffer 122 k.

  A setting value update signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize that the setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly performed by the main CPU 63 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. In this case, when the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not performed, the main CPU 63 outputs the setting value update signal of the LOW level, and the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. The pulse signal whose set value updating signal at the HI level is maintained over a specific period is output for the number corresponding to the newly set set value. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the setting value update signal of the HI level is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

  An output instruction signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the trigger to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 to the read terminal 68 d is stored in the sixteenth buffer 122 p. It is input. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs an output instruction signal of LOW level in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs an output instruction signal of HI level over a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. Do. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the output instruction signal of HI level is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  Although the twelfth buffer 1221, the thirteenth buffer 122m and the fourteenth buffer 122n can receive signals from the main CPU 63, they are blank in the pachinko machine 10 to which no normal signal is inputted. As described above, the number of buffers 122a to 122p is larger than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 as the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111. The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from that of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p to correspond to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p on a one-to-one basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 1181 to 118n may not be formed between the buffers 1221 to 122n to be blanked.

  That the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122 o and that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122 p are determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and an instruction from the main CPU 63 is received. Instead, the management CPU 112 can identify that the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122 o and that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122 p. On the other hand, it has not been determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, and the types of these signals receive an instruction from the main CPU 63 Is identified by the management CPU 112. Although the specification of the types of these signals in the management CPU 112 will be described in detail later, when control is started in the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 with the start of supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the main CPU 63 controls the management CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command to In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116, and when the types of various signals are specified by the management CPU 112 in a situation where operating power is supplied. The information stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence relationship memory 116. As shown in FIG. In the correspondence relationship memory 116, the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n correspond to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 on a one-to-one basis. It is provided.

  In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is in the first correspondence relationship area 123a (10 pieces) Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is in the second correspondence relationship area 123b (10 pieces) Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 as well as information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is in the third correspondence relationship area 123c (10 pieces) Stored.

  The fourth correspondence area 123 d stores information indicating that the special-purpose winning device 32 is used as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122 d by the management CPU 112. In addition, information (15 pieces) of the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the special electric winning device 32 as well as information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is in the fourth correspondence relationship area 123d. Stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that the first operation port 33 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fifth buffer 122e by the management CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the first operation opening 33, together with information indicating that it is the first operation opening 33 in the fifth correspondence relationship area 123e (one piece ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that the second operation port 34 is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management side CPU 112. In addition, information indicating the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the second operation opening 34 together with information indicating that it is the second operation opening 34 in the sixth correspondence relationship area 123 f (1 piece ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating that the out port 24a is stored is stored as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the seventh buffer 122g by the management CPU 112.

  The eighth correspondence area 123 h stores information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122 h by the management side CPU 112. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is set is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i by the management side CPU 112. The tenth correspondence area 123 j stores information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 as information for specifying the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122 j by the management side CPU 112. The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that it is the start of the game.

  The twelfth correspondence area 1231 stores, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 1221 by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that it is a blank that does not correspond to any of them. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank is not compatible with any of them. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating that the management side CPU 112 identifies the type of the signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is information indicating blank which does not correspond to any of them.

  By configuring the management side CPU 112 to specify what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122 a to 122 n as described above by receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from that of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66.

  In addition, each time the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n perform signal output corresponding to storage of history information, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of the signal, the type of the signal is recognized in advance. The correspondence relationship memory 116 stores information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management side CPU 112 based on the output information. Configuration. Thus, each time the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n perform the signal output corresponding to the storage of the history information, the information for making the type of the signal recognized is output, the main signal output is performed each time the signal is output. It becomes possible to reduce the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

  Further, the output of information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management side CPU 112 is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Thus, in a situation where a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management CPU 112 can specify the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

  Further, information setting that the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122 o and information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122 p are performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the set value update signal and the output instruction signal to be used reliably even for other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66 as well as the pachinko machine 10 are the fifteenth buffer 122o and the sixteenth buffer 122p. It is possible to omit the process for specifying the type of signal input to the. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for identifying the type of such signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117. As shown in FIG.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set sequentially, and a history information storage area 125 is set in correspondence with each piece of pointer information on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and as an area for storing correspondence information Data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When the correspondence information needs to be stored according to the signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (in the case of the pachinko machine 10, actually, the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k) In the area of the history information storage area 125 for storing the RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the current pointer information to be written, the date and time information currently measured in the RTC 115 is stored. Thereafter, the correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffer 122a to 122n that has triggered the information storage at this time is read from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the read correspondence information Are stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

  Specifically, as for the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 48a as already described. Therefore, in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116, information corresponding to the types of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entry unit corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, since the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are all for detecting the game ball entering the general winning opening 31, these first to third winning openings In each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric symbol winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation opening 33. The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating the second operation opening 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating the out opening 24a. When the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the information storage at this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entry unit corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to seventh Information read out from any one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g and the read type information of the ball entry part is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether the eighth buffer 122 h is in the open / close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether the high frequency support mode is in the ninth buffer 122 i is input, and the tenth buffer 122 j is A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input, and a signal indicating whether or not the game play has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122 k. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and a tenth correspondence area is stored. The information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and the information indicating that it is a game round is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation in the opening / closing execution mode. The CPU 112 determines that the open / close execution mode is started when the eighth signal changes from low level to high level, and identifies that the open / close execution mode ends when the eighth signal changes from high level to low level It becomes possible. Then, in any of the cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and also from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 triggers storage of correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. To identify. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is read out from the eighth correspondence area 123 h, but also the start information together, the history information storage area 125 In the area for storing the correspondence information of Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is read out from the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h, but also the end information, the history information storage area 125 In the area for storing the correspondence information of

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in the non-high frequency support mode and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in the high frequency support mode. The management CPU 112 determines that the high frequency support mode is started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and the high frequency support mode ends when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It can be identified as Then, in any of the cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and also from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 triggers storage of correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. To identify. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is read out from the ninth correspondence area 123i, but also the start information is also stored in the history information storage area. The correspondence relationship information of 125 is stored in the area for storing. In addition, when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the high-frequency support mode read out from the ninth correspondence area 123i, but also the end information together, the history information storage area The correspondence relationship information of 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the tenth signal of the LOW level in the state where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the main CPU 63 In order to continuously output, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 determines that the front door frame 14 is opened, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Can identify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in any of the cases where the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and also from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 triggers storage of correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. To identify. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read out from the tenth correspondence area 123 j, but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information The correspondence relationship information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing. When the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read out from the tenth correspondence area 123 j, but also the release end information is stored together with the history information. The correspondence relationship information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  The main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eleventh signal of the LOW level until the start timing of the game times as described above, and when the start timing of the game times is reached, the eleventh level of the HI level is maintained over the specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the game play has started. That is, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the information indicating that it is the game number read out from the eleventh correspondence area 123 k is stored in the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125. Store in the area of

  The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during that period even if the business day on which firing of the gaming ball in the pachinko machine 10 is continued continues for 10 days from opening to closing. It is provided for a few minutes. For example, when history information is generated 60000 times a day, 600000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. Thus, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124. In the pointer area 126, information for specifying, by the management CPU 112, pointer information which is a current write target in the history memory 117 is stored. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information of “0” as the write target is set in the pointer area 126. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the last order pointer information is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last order pointer information, the pointer is set so that the pointer information of “0” becomes the writing target The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, when the history information storage trigger occurs exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is sequentially overwritten from the history information storage area 125 where the old history information is stored. Become.

  When reading of history information from the history memory 117 by the external device occurs, all the history information storage area 125 is cleared to "0", and pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has once been read from becoming read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing in the correspondence relationship memory 116 information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the types of signals will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  First, "14" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S801). The recognition output counter is the remainder of the information output for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize which kind of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 correspond to. Is a counter for specifying the required number of times in the main CPU 63. As described above, 14 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are to be recognized as the type of signal, so "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

  Thereafter, output processing of the identification start command is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122 a to 122 n correspond to. The first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used for the command output. That is, using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a A command output is performed to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal the signals .about.122 n correspond to. Thereby, the number of signal paths is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the signal paths for performing the command output are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period for outputting the identification start command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal to HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification start command and the ninth signal. It is done. By receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 should start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read out from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first buffer 122a is first set as a signal type setting target, and thereafter, the first to 14th buffers 122a to 122n are set so that the n + 1th buffer is set as a signal type setting target next to the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "14" to "12", the type identification command indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and the number of winning balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "11" The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read, and if the recognition output counter is “10”, the type identification command indicating the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is "9", the second operation port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of balls are read out, and if the recognition output counter is "8", the out port 24a is displayed. If the output counter for recognition is “7”, the type identification command for indicating the open / close execution mode is read out, and the output counter for recognition is read out. If it is 6 ", the type identification command indicating high frequency support mode is read out, and if the recognition output counter is" 5 ", the type identification command indicating front door frame 14 is read out, and the recognition output counter If “4” is “4”, the type identification command indicating that the game is played is read out, and if the recognition output counter is “3” to “1”, the type identification command indicating that it is blank is read out.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity as in the identification start command, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Also, the output period of the identification type command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification type command and the ninth signal. It is done. By receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 responds to the identification type command in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffer to be currently set among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. Information to be stored.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step S805), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction of one is "0" (step S806). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after one subtraction is executed (step S803 and Step S804).

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S806: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period for outputting the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal to HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification end command and the ninth signal. It is done. By receiving the identification end command, the management CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the correspondence information between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 is completed. Do.

  Next, management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started in the main CPU 63. The combination of the processes after step S 908 in the management process is performed 16 times or more before the start of the process.

  First, it is determined whether an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). If the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), the setting update recognition process is executed (step S902), and the process returns to step S901. In the setting update recognition process, although the details will be described later, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by the main CPU 63, the corresponding process is executed.

  When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S 901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S 903). The setting target counter is a counter for specifying the types of the buffers 122 a to 122 n which are targets of setting of the signal type by the management CPU 112. The first buffer 122a is first set as a signal type setting target, and thereafter, the nth buffer is next to an n + 1th buffer target.

  Thereafter, under the condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence memory 116, the type identification received this time in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 Stores information on the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S906).

  If a negative determination is made in step S904, or if the process of step S906 is performed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S 907: NO), the process returns to step S 904, and on condition that a type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S 904: YES), step S 905 and step S 906 are performed. Execute the process again.

  If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S 907: YES), the processing of step S 908 to step S 910 is repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later in step S 908, history setting processing for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S909, the details will be described later, but various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation results are notified by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Execute display output processing for In step S 910, although the details will be described later, an external output process for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68 d is executed.

  FIG. 24 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores correspondence information between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122n. FIG. 24A shows a period during which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (ie, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows a period during which the output state of the ninth signal is HI level, and FIG. 24 (c) shows the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals inputted to these buffers 122a to 122n. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed is shown, and (d) of FIG. 24 shows the timing when the correspondence setting process (step S905) is executed in the management side CPU 112.

  When the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. Ru. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, which is a situation where the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24 (b). The management CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information of (1). In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S901 of the management processing (FIG. 23). After that, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the identification start command is stopped at the timing of t3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t4. Further, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. After that, at the timing of t5 where the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24 (b). The management CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are provided. The content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information. In this case, since the first type identification command is received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 24D at the timing of t5. In the correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information of the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at time t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Then, at timing t7 to timing t9, timing t10 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t15, and timing t16 to timing t18, respectively, as in timing t4 to timing t6, The correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fourteenth type identification command is completed at timing t16 to timing t18.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t19. Further, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. After that, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24B at time t20 at which the output of the identification end command is continued. The management CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are provided. The content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at time t20 as shown in FIG. After that, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG.

  As described above, the management CPU 112 is configured to recognize whether the command is output using the ninth signal, thereby instructing the management CPU 112 to store the history information. Even when the command output is performed using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used, the management CPU 112 clearly indicates that the command is output. It becomes possible to make it recognize.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, "11" is set in the management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1001). The management target counter specifies with the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not the target of specifying whether the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the management output processing this time. At the same time, the main CPU 63 is a counter for specifying which management target the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The target to be identified by the main CPU 63 as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process is seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 11 pieces of presence / absence of execution of the open / close execution mode, presence / absence of execution of the high frequency support mode, presence / absence of opening / closing of the front door frame 14, and presence / absence of start of the game play. Therefore, first, "11" is set to the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the value of the current management target counter is HI level (step S1002). If it is not the HI level (step S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 5 or more, and the management target corresponding to the value of the management target counter is seven ball entry detection sensors 42a. It is specified whether it is any one of ~ 48a (step S1003).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1004). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is "11" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is "1" or not. When the value of the management target counter is "10" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether "1" is set to the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter If the value is "9" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether the third output flag is "1" or not, and the value of the managed counter is "8" If there is a special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the management target counter is "7" and the first operation port detection sensor 46a If it corresponds to the fifth output flag "1" It is determined whether or not it is set, and if the value of the managed object counter is "6" and corresponds to the second operation port detection sensor 47a, "1" is set in the sixth output flag or not If it is determined that the value of the management target counter is "5" and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether "1" is set in the seventh output flag. As described above, “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 15).

  If "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is HI level (Step S1005). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether a trigger to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level has occurred (step S1007). Specifically, it is determined whether the transition to the open / close execution mode has occurred when the value of the management target counter is “4”, and is high when the value of the management target counter is “3”. It is determined whether the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and if the value of the managed counter is “2”, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has become open or not. If the value is "1", it is determined whether the game play has started by determining whether the eleventh output flag is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S1008). When the processing of step S1008 is executed when the value of the management target counter is “1”, the eleventh output flag is cleared to “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether a trigger to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009). Specifically, in the case where the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or "1" and the current management target is any one of the entering detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of the game, the first to seventh signals It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the 11th and 11th signals is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. . The HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S 908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level It is a period during which the management CPU 112 can reliably specify the state. If the value of the management target counter is “4” and the current management target is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is “3” If the current management target is the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is "2" and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. If a trigger to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S1010).

  When a negative determination is made in step S1004, when the process of step S1006 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S1007, when a process of step S1008 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S1009, or When the process of S1010 is executed, the value of the management target counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether the value of the management target counter after the one subtraction is “0” (step S1012). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the processing of step S1002 and subsequent steps is executed for the management target corresponding to the new value of the management target counter.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k as already described, “11” is set in the confirmation target counter in step S1101. Do.

  After that, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th buffers 122 a to 122 n are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh buffer 122k is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the target of the numerical information check. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the RTC 115, which is date information and time information, is read out from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information which is the writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relationship information is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, and the correspondence relationship information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. If the correspondence information is any one of information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode, and information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence areas 123 a to 123 n are read targets of correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh correspondence area 123k is the read target of the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. It becomes an object of reading information.

  By executing the writing process as described above, the value of the check target counter is any of the out-port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the game time If so, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33, the second in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the operation opening 34 and the correspondence information indicating that the game is played is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the correspondence information indicating one of the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed (step S1105). In the updating process, numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102 or if the process of step S1105 is executed, signal output is switched to the LOW level in correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the value of the current check target counter. It is determined whether correspondence relationship information to be checked is stored (step S1106). Specifically, when the value of the current check target counter is “8” to “10”, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in the corresponding correspondence areas 123 h to 123 j, in the high frequency support mode Since either information indicating that there is information or information indicating that this is the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1106.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from "1" to "0". It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, RTC information is read (step S1108) as in step S1103, and write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence relationship information is read out from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, and the correspondence relationship information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 by performing the writing process in this way, it corresponds to the pointer information to be written. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information and correspondence information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, or the front door frame 14 is any one of the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the Thereafter, as in step S1105, the process of updating the target pointer is executed (step S1110).

  If the negative determination is made in step S1106, the negative determination is made in step S1107, or the process of step S1110 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S1112). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the processing in step S1102 and subsequent steps is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 27 (a) shows a period during which a signal at the HI level is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and FIG. 27 (b) shows the HI level to the eighth buffer 122h. 27 (c) shows a period in which a signal of HI level is inputted to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 27 (d) shows a signal of HI level in a tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 27E shows the write timing of the history information to the history memory 117. FIG.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 27A, the output state of the signal input to any one of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. 27 (e) at the timing of t1. After that, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 27A, the signal switched to HI level at timing t1 is switched to LOW level. However, the signal is a signal input to any one of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and switching of the LOW level is not a storage target of history information. At timing, writing of history information is not executed as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at timing t3, timing t5, timing t6, timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, and timing t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of the 11 buffers 122a to 122g and 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, history information is written at each of these timings.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. The eighth buffer 122 h corresponds to the presence or absence of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each of the timings of t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes the end information. Thus, the execution period of the open / close execution mode can be grasped by confirming the history information of the history memory 117.

  In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in the order of elapsed time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that ball entry to any of out port 24a, general winning a prize port 31, special power prize winning device 32, first operation port 33 and second operation port 34 has occurred is in the open / close execution mode It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 can be obtained by comparing the RTC information. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not history information indicating that a ball has entered a ball is in the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the occurrence of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing of t8, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each of the timings of t11 which is In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes the end information. Thus, the execution period of the high frequency support mode can be grasped by confirming the history information of the history memory 117.

  In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in the order of elapsed time. Therefore, even in the high-frequency support mode, the history information indicating that the ball has entered into any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 can be obtained by comparing the RTC information. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not history information indicating that a ball has entered a ball is in the high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122 j corresponds to the presence or absence of the opening of the front door frame 14. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing of t12, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level History information is written at each of the timings of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes the end information. As a result, by checking the history information of the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in the order of elapsed time. Therefore, while the front door frame 14 is open, history information indicating that entry of the ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 has occurred. It is possible to distinguish whether it is or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 can be obtained by comparing the RTC information. It becomes possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is the opening of the front door frame 14 or not.

  Next, an output process of the setting value update signal executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of outputting the set value update signal executed by the main CPU 63. The output process of the setting value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  A value corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to the pulse number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether the set value update signal directed to the management side CPU 112 is HI level (step S1202). As described above, the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122 o of the input port 121 in the management IC 66. Here, the process of outputting the setting value update signal is a process for causing the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main process (FIG. 9). It is executed at a timing prior to certain recognition processing. On the other hand, the fact that the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is set in the management IC 66 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, so the setting value update signal is output prior to the recognition process. Even if the process is executed, it is possible to specify that the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122 o in the management CPU 112 is the set value update signal.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1203), and the value of the LOW level counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" or not. It is determined (step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 63 whether or not the set value update signal is maintained at the LOW level for a predetermined period while outputting a plurality of pulses in which the set value update signal becomes HI level. It is. If the value of the LOW level counter is “0” (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, so the set value update signal is set to the HI level The setting is made (step S1205).

  Thereafter, “20” is set in the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63 a period in which the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 in a cycle of about 10 microseconds, the setting value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. The period during which the HI level is maintained is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to identify that the setting value update signal has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  If the set value update signal is HI level (step S1202: YES), the value of the HI level counter of the main side RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the one subtraction is "0". It is determined whether or not (step S1208). If the value of the HI level counter is "0" (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the LOW level, so the set value update signal is set to the LOW level The setting is made (step S1209).

  Thereafter, the value of the pulse number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step S1210), and it is determined whether the value of the pulse number counter after the decrement of one is "0" (step S1211). When the value of the pulse number counter is not "0" (step S1211: NO), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signal for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. In order to mean that there is no, "20" is set to the LOW level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1212). The value set in the LOW level counter is decremented by 1 in a cycle of about 10 microseconds, so that it is maintained at the LOW level for 200 microseconds between multiple pulse outputs by the setting value update signal. The period during which the LOW level is maintained is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to identify that the setting value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

  When the value of the pulse number counter is “0” (step S1211: YES), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signal for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. In order to mean, the output process of the setting value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The setting value identification end command is a command for making the management CPU 112 recognize that the output of the setting value update signal for making the management CPU 112 recognize the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. When outputting the setting value identification end command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used similarly to the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the setting value identification end command is different from the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command.

  As described above, in the process of outputting the set value update signal, pulse signals corresponding to the set value update signals corresponding in number to the set value value of the pachinko machine 10 set at the start of supply of operating power this time are output to the management IC 66 Do. The management side CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition process to grasp the number of pulse signals according to the setting value update signal, and grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time based on it.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process executed by the management side CPU 112. The setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  It is determined whether the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1301). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112, and means, for example, that the setting value grasping counter is "setting 1" if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1303). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified in the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1303, or if the process of step S1304 is performed, the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 are input. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, date information and RTC information as time information are read out from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information which is the writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the information on the value of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thus, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and information of setting values when the setting is performed The combination is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed (step S1308). In the updating process, numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set by executing the setting update recognition process as described above, the fact that the setting has been performed, the date and time when the setting was performed, and the relevant setting A combination of setting values when setting is performed is stored in the history area 124 as history information. Thus, by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 using the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting It becomes possible to grasp the contents of the setting value when it is performed.

  Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information of the history memory 117 from being erased, and various parameters described later change timing of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 It is calculated using the history information existing across the front and back of. In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set as described above is stored in the history memory 117, an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d and stored in the history memory 117. By reading the information, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters in a period after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting state is maintained.

  Next, the display output process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  First, it is determined whether it is the operation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have elapsed since the start of the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112, or if 51 seconds have elapsed since the affirmative determination in the previous step S1401, then an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the number of balls entered in the normal state is calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the out port 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is counted to obtain the out port 24a. Calculate the number of ball hits. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, entering the general winning opening 31 is achieved. Calculate the number. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the player enters the special electric winning device 32. Calculate the number. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operation port 33 can be obtained. Calculate the number of ball hits. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the second operation opening 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the second operation opening 34 can be obtained. Calculate the number of ball hits.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and correspondence that indicates that it is the front door frame 14. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out door that occurs in the state where the front door frame 14 is in the open state The number of balls entered into each of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33 and second operation opening 34 is calculated (step S1403). History information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, correspondence information that indicates the front door frame 14, and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Moreover, in the whole pointer information which becomes a serial number, the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 where the start information is stored and the correspondence that indicates that it is the front door frame 14 In the case where there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the number of ball entries for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is not stored in the history information storage area 125 where the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. All pieces of history information of the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125 being stored is stored are treated as the front door frame 14 in the open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1402 and step S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1403 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1402. And the following 1st-8th parameter are calculated using each entering number of balls after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls in the out-port 24a calculated in step S1403 to the number of balls in the out-port 24a calculated in step S1402 is the number K1 of balls, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1402. The difference between the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated at step S1403 and the number of balls is the number K2 of balls, and the special electric winning device calculated at step S1403 for the number of balls of special electric winning device 32 calculated at step S1402. The difference in the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in the step S1403 to the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in the step S1402 with the difference in the number of balls received in the ball being the number K3 of balls. The number K4 is calculated, and the second calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls in the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1402 The difference between the ball entrance number of Doguchi 34 and ball entrance number K5.
First parameter: total payout number of game balls (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operation opening 33 The number of winning balls for winning in the game + K5 × the number of winning balls for winning in the second operation port 34) / The ratio of the total number (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (hereinafter, this ratio D1))
-Second parameter: Total number of game balls entering general winning opening 31 / Ratio of total number (K1 + K 2 + K 3 + K 4 + K 5) of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA-Third parameter: gaming ball to special power prize device 32 Total entry number K3 / Percentage of total number (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA · Fourth parameter: Total entry number of game balls to the first operation opening 33 K 4 / Discharge from the game area PA The percentage of the total number of game balls played (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter referred to as "D2")
The fifth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the second operation opening 34 K5 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D3”)
Sixth parameter: D1− (D2 × “number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33” + D3 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)
· Seventh parameter: (K3 × "number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32" + K5 × "number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "general" Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K3 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 4 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 5 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 8th parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 2 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning on first operation port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 Ratio of step S1404) Which stores the first to eighth parameter is the operation result to the normal storage area for the time of the operation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. That is, when the next step S1404 is executed and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal time storage area, The previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are overwritten.

  Thereafter, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the out opening 24 a which occurs in the open / close execution mode, the general winning opening 31 The number of ball entry into each of the special electric power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is calculated (step S1405). History information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and start information are stored, correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode, and end information The period between the history information storage area 125 in which is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information which is a sequential number, history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode and start information is stored, correspondence information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, In the case where there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of ball entry for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is the open / close execution mode and start information is stored, RTC information corresponding to a later time than the history information storage area 125 is When the correspondence information and end information indicating that the open / close execution mode is not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, the correspondence information and start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is stored. All pieces of history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored are treated as those in the open / close execution mode.

  Thereafter, out of the periods in the open / close execution mode specified in step S1405, the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and The number of balls in each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that in step S1403 except that the period in the open / close execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1405 and step S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1406 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1405. And the following 11th-18th parameters are calculated using each entering number of balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1406 and the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1405 is the number of balls K11, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1405. The difference between the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated at step S1406 and the number of balls is the number of balls K12, and the special electric winning device calculated at step S1406 for the number of special electric winning devices 32 calculated at step S1405. The difference in the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1405, with the difference in the number of balls received in 32 as the number K13 of balls. It is set as the number K14, and is calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of ball entry of the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1405. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
-11th parameter: Total payout number of game balls (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "1st operation opening 33 The number of winning balls for winning in the game + K15 × the number of winning balls for winning in the second operation opening 34) / The ratio of the total number of gaming balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the gaming area PA (hereinafter referred to as “this ratio” D11 ”)
Twelfth parameter: Total entry number of gaming balls to general winning opening 31 / proportion of total number (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA. Thirteenth parameter: gaming ball to special power prize device 32 The total number of ball entry K13 / The ratio of the total number (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA · The fourteenth parameter: The total number of gaming balls to the first operation opening 33 K14 / discharging from the gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12")
Fifteenth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the second operation port 34 (K15) / the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
Sixteenth parameter: D11− (D12 × “number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33” + D13 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)
・ The 17th parameter: (K13 × “number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32” + K 15 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation opening 34”) / total number of game balls paid out (K12 × “general Number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 + K 13 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K 14 × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + K 15 × “second operation opening 34 Ratio of winning balls to winnings)) 18th parameter: K 13 × “number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32” / total payout number of gaming balls (K 12 × for winning in general winning opening 31 Number of prize balls "+ K13 x" Number of prize balls for winning in special electric winning device 32 "+ K 14 x" Number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33 "+ K 15 x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 ") In step S1407, the above-described eleventh to eighteenth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the open / close execution mode storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The first to eighteenth parameters stored in the open / close execution mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1407 is executed. That is, when the next step S1407 is executed to calculate the first to eighteenth parameters, the newly calculated first to eighteenth parameters are stored in the open / close execution mode storage area. The previous calculation results of the eleventh to eighteenth parameters stored in the open / close execution mode storage area are overwritten.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and correspondence that indicates that it is in the high frequency support mode. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out port 24 a occurred in the high frequency support mode, general The number of balls in each of the winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 is calculated (step S1408). History information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and start information are stored; correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode; The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Moreover, in the whole of the sequential pointer information, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and correspondence that indicates that it is in the high frequency support mode. In the case where there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the number of ball entries for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 When the correspondence information and end information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored is not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored All pieces of history information of the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 being stored is stored are treated as those in the high frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, out of the period in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state, out of the period in the high frequency support mode specified in step S1408, the out-port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 And the number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1403 except that the period in the high frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1408 and step S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1409 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters are calculated using the number of entered balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1409 relative to the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1408 is the number of balls K21, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1408. The difference in the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1409 to the number of balls is referred to as the number K22 of balls entered, and the special electric winning device calculated in step S1409 relative to the number of balls in special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1408 The difference in the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1408 is the difference in the number of balls in the number of balls K23. It is set as the number K24, and is calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of ball entry of the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1408. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: Total payout number of game balls (K 22 × “number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31” + K 23 × “number of balls for winning in special electric winning device 32” + K 24 × “first operation opening 33 The number of winning balls for winning in the game + K 25 × the number of winning balls for winning in the second operation opening 34) / the ratio of the total number (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (hereinafter, this ratio D11 ”)
22nd parameter: Total entry number of gaming balls to general winning opening 31 / total number of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio 23rd parameter: gaming ball to special power prize device 32 Of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio · The 24th parameter: The total number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 K24 / discharge from the game area PA The ratio of the total number (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) of game balls played (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22")
Twenty-fifth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the second operation opening 34 K25 / the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) discharged from the game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23")
Twenty-sixth parameter: D21− (D22 × “number of prize balls for winning in first operation port 33” + D23 × “number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34”)
In step S1410, the above-described twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The above-described twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. That is, when the next step S1410 is executed and the above-mentioned twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters are computed, the above-mentioned twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters computed newly are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high frequency support mode storage area are overwritten.

Thereafter, the occurrence frequency of the open / close execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, the open / close execution mode is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and start information are stored. Calculate the number of occurrences of Further, the number of times of occurrence of game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the memory 117 for history. . Then, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit game cycle is calculated. Note that the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode is set as the number of occurrences K31, and the number of occurrences of game times is set as the number of occurrences K32.
The 31st parameter: K31 / K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the opening / closing execution mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the open / close execution mode frequency storage area is stored and held until the next step S1411 is performed. That is, when the 31st parameter is calculated by executing the next step S1411, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the opening / closing execution mode frequency storage area, so that the opening / closing execution mode The calculation result of the previous 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Thereafter, the occurrence frequency of the high frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the high frequency is achieved. Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. Further, the number of times of occurrence of game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the memory 117 for history. . Then, the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game cycle and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode to the occurrence number of the open / close execution mode are calculated. The number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode is the number of occurrences K41, the number of occurrences of game times is the number of occurrences K42, and the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode calculated in step S1411 is the number of occurrences K43.
・ The 41st parameter: K41 / K42
・ The 42nd parameter: K41 / K43
In step S1412, the above-described 41st to 42nd parameters, which are calculation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The above-described 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412. That is, when the next step S1412 is executed and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the 41st to 42nd parameters calculated newly are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area Then, the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are overwritten.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401 or if the process of step S1412 is performed, a display process is performed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing display processing.

  First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for specifying by the management side CPU 112 that it is the timing to update the display contents of the management result of the game history in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to display the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the second to 26th parameters, and the 31st parameter. The parameter and the calculation result of the 41st to 42nd parameters are notified. In this case, in the first notification display device 69a, information corresponding to the type of the parameter to be notified is displayed. Further, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, a number corresponding to the tenth digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and a number corresponding to the first digit is the third notification display It is displayed on the device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty first to twenty sixth parameters, the thirty first parameter, and the fourth to fourth parameters are provided. The display corresponding to the calculation result of the 42nd parameter is sequentially switched in accordance with a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter which is the display target of the last order is displayed, the display target of the first order The calculation result of one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds.

  Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25 and the period in which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c at least once.

  When the process of step S1501 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after one subtraction is "0". It is determined whether it is time to do (step S1502). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). Then, when the value of the display object counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value "24" (step S1504: YES), the value of the display object counter is cleared to "0" (step S1505).

  The display target counter is a counter for specifying the types of parameters to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69 a to 69 c by the management CPU 112. The first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the second to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters, and a display target counter of "0" to "24" Possible values correspond one-to-one. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter which is the first display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is "24". In this case, the forty-second parameter, which is the last display target, is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1504, or if the process of step S1505 is performed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. Control is performed (step S1506). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read out from the calculation result memory 131, and the read out parameter is multiplied by 100, and a number corresponding to the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. A number corresponding to one's place is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in steps S1506 and S1507 continue until the next update timing, or until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped. Ru. After that, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as the value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S1508).

  When the supply of operation power to the management side CPU 112 is started by executing the display processing as described above, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Be done. The display of the management result of the game history is performed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and the main control device 60 is operated from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. It takes place regardless of whether it is visible or not. As described above, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game status or the state of the pachinko machine 10, thereby the first to third notification display devices 69a. It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of ~ 69c.

  The display of the management result of the game history in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is started after the supply of the operation power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63 Be done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and held even when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, like the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the managing CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the managing CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

  When the setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the information corresponding to the setting value during the change is displayed on the third notification display device 69c Although the display of the information corresponding to the setting value is performed before the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the game history in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is The display of the management result of is started after the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. Thus, even if the third notification display device 69c is used as a display device for displaying information corresponding to the setting values and displaying the management result of the game history, these displays are displayed. It is possible to prevent overlapping of periods.

  When the display of the information corresponding to the setting value is performed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not displayed. On the other hand, when the display of the management result of the game history is performed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b do not become undisplayed. This makes it possible to identify which of the display of the information corresponding to the setting value and the display of the management result of the game history is being performed on the third notification display device 69c.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68 d of the MPU 62 explain. FIG. 32 (a) is a flowchart showing the data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  In the data output process, it is first determined whether a connection signal indicating that the external device is electrically connected to the read terminal 68d is received from the read terminal 68d (step S1601). If a negative determination is made in step S1601, the present data output processing ends. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63. Thus, in order to externally output the history information and various parameters, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. You need to Since the power switch for performing the stop operation and start operation of the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is provided in the dispensing mechanism unit 73 mounted on the back of the back pack unit 15, these stop operation and start operation are In order to do this, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 to expose the back of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to externally output the history information and various parameters, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. With the configuration that needs to be set, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform operations to read history information and various parameters other than the game hall manager.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the current connection of the external device to the read terminal 68d is the main ROM 64 by determining whether a signal for control information confirmation is received from the read terminal 68d. It is determined whether it corresponds to the confirmation of the control information (program and data) (step S1602). The external device is configured to be able to perform both confirmation of control information and confirmation of history information and various parameters, and when confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation on the external device, an external device is selected. A signal for control information confirmation is transmitted, and when confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by a manual operation on the external device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device. The present invention is not limited to this, and the external device for control information confirmation and the external device for history confirmation may be different. In this case, when an external device for control information confirmation is electrically connected to the read terminal 68d, a signal for control information confirmation is transmitted from the external device, and an external for history confirmation is sent to the read terminal 68d. When the device is electrically connected, the external device transmits a signal for history confirmation.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, an output process for control information confirmation is executed (step S1603). In the output process, the program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the read terminal 68d. As a result, the control information can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and it is confirmed whether the control information is normal or normal. It is possible to do

  If a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This particular period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the output instruction signal of HI level is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32B, when the management state CPU 112 switches the output state of the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 from the LOW level to the HI level (Step S1701: YES), reads out the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and outputs the read history information and various parameters to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). As a result, it becomes possible to read history information and various parameters in an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and it becomes possible to analyze information on the management result of the game history. When the management CPU 112 outputs history information to the reading terminal 68d, the management CPU 112 clears the history memory 117 to "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is erased only when the external device reads the history information.

  Returning to the description of the data output process (FIG. 32A), when the process of step S1603 is performed or when the process of step S1604 is performed, the electrical connection of the external device to the read terminal 68d continues It is determined whether it is set (step S1605). If it is continued (step S1605: YES), the process waits in step S1605. Thus, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released. When the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released (step S1605: NO), the data output process is ended.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The game ball is paid out when the game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, so the player can choose one of these ball entering sections. The game is played while expecting the game ball to enter the game. In the configuration, the ball enters the game ball to any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as history target ball entry section) In the event of occurrence of a problem, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of ball entry of game balls into each history target ball entry unit, and this managed information is used It becomes possible to manage appropriately the ball entering mode of the game ball to each history object ball entry part by this. In addition, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

  All ball entry units that discharge game balls from the game area PA are targets for execution of storage processing of history information and targets for management using history information. As a result, it is possible to manage the pitching frequency for any history target ball entry unit using history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls to be entered into each history object ball entry unit to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using history information.

  The history information includes RTC information which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the history target ball entry unit that has triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it becomes possible to grasp the ball entering history of the gaming ball to the history target ball entering unit in detail.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history target ball entry portion, but also history information indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, the high frequency support mode is in progress. The history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not is stored. Thereby, it becomes possible to distinguish whether or not each of these situations, and manage the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball to the history target ball entry part.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to an external device which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, it becomes possible to read history information by the external device and analyze the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball to the history object ball entry unit using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and a program can be read from the main side ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 68 d for outputting the program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  It is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is either program or history information, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 68d. As a result, in a configuration in which history information is output to the outside using the reading terminal 68 d for outputting the program to the outside, the pachinko machine 10 determines which of the program and the history information is the information targeted for the external output. The information specified on the side is output to the outside. Therefore, even in the configuration in which the reading terminal 68d is also used, only necessary information can be read.

  Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified which of the program and the history information the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be externally output from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 for pre-storing a program has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. As a result, the signal path for the reading terminal 68d can be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, while making unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 68d difficult, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

  Main side CPU 63 that executes processing for making the game balls paid out based on the entry of the game balls into any of the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33 and second operation opening 34 A management side CPU 112 is separately provided, and the management side CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the ball entering aspect of the game ball to each history target ball entry part while preventing the processing load of the main side CPU 63 from extremely increasing.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided as the MPU 62 in the same chip. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main CPU 63 uses the signal paths corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, and the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry sensors 42a to 48a. Send to 122a-122g. As a result, the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 correspond to the respective buffers 122a to 122g (that is, respective signal paths), and the configuration for discriminating the types of each information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It is possible to

  Information corresponding to whether or not the main CPU 63 is in the open / close execution mode, information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open, The information corresponding to the start of the game is transmitted to the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to the respective situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to the respective situations correspond to the respective buffers 122h to 122k (that is, the respective signal paths), and the configuration for discriminating the types of the respective information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits, to the management CPU 112, correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122k (that is, each signal path 118a to 118k) corresponds to. As a result, there is no need to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  When the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thus, in a situation where game ball entry to the history target entry section may occur, the management IC 66 can specify the correspondence between information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history entry section It will be possible to

  The correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating the presence or absence of the game ball to the history target ball entry unit. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration relating to communication as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence relationship information is provided.

  A correspondence relationship memory 116 is provided in the management IC 66, and the correspondence relationship information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. Thus, the information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the information to be transmitted can be transmitted each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. There is no need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68 d is performed. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122 p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with buffers having a number larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 as buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. It is done. As a result, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, correspondence information indicating the type of history target ball entry unit corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the ball entering aspect of the game ball to each history object ball entry part using the read history information.

  By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, the eleventh parameter, the eleventh parameter, and the eleventh symbol corresponding to the ball entering aspect of the gaming ball in the gaming area PA in a predetermined period) The 18th parameter, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated. Then, various parameters resulting from these calculations are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. As a result, it is possible to notify the pachinko machine 10 of various parameters that are the result of calculation using history information.

  Various parameters are calculated in a state in which the history information corresponding to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Also, various parameters corresponding to the situation in the open / close execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the entering manner of the game ball according to each situation.

  When the history information of the history memory 117 is output to the external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117. As a result, history information to the extent that the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is exceeded is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should normally be stored may be erased by overwriting. It is possible to make it hard to occur.

  The history information is stored in the history memory 117 in a configuration in which when the game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, the corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal board 97. . Thereby, by using information externally output through the external terminal board 97, the number of ball entry into the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the frequency of ball entry can be simply grasped, By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of ball entry and the frequency of ball entry of the game ball into the history target ball entry part.

  The probability of becoming a jackpot result in the low probability mode fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. This makes it possible to create a situation in which even a single pachinko machine 10 has an advantage or disadvantage with respect to the probability of winning in a low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The probability of becoming a jackpot result in the low probability mode fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, while the probability of becoming a jackpot result in the high probability mode is setting of the pachinko machine 10 It does not change according to the condition. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 on the probability of becoming a jackpot result to the situation in the low probability mode. Further, since the high probability table 64g to be referred to in the high probability mode can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, in the main ROM 64, the probability tables 64a to 64g are made in advance. It is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storage.

  The probability of becoming a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, while the sorting mode of the kind of jackpot result is the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 It does not change accordingly. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low probability mode. In addition, since it becomes possible to make the distribution table 64h to be referred to when distributing the type of the jackpot result common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h in the main side ROM 64 It is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing in advance.

  Even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored without being deleted. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history memory 117, and the history memory can be maintained for a long period of time. It becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history using the history information accumulated in 117.

  In the configuration where history information stored in history memory 117 is stored without being deleted even if new setting of setting state of pachinko machine 10 is performed, new setting of setting state of pachinko machine 10 In the case where the event is performed, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to distinguish between history information before new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and history information after the setting.

  When new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117, the information corresponding to the setting value is included in the history information. This makes it possible to identify the content of the setting value set in the past by referring to the history information.

  When the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the predetermined start. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value updating process (FIG. 10) is started, in the setting value updating process (FIG. 10), the setting value changing operation from the setting value corresponding to a certain start. It is possible to do Therefore, the work content of the setting value changing operation can be easily understood by the operator.

  Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is “setting 1” with the lowest degree of advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the setting value is changed from "setting 1" having the lowest degree of advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally ends the setting value updating process (FIG. 10) immediately after the start of the setting value updating process (FIG. 10), the setting value with the lowest degree of advantage is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended disadvantages in the gaming hall in such a situation.

  When various parameters are calculated by the operation timing, history information stored later than the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used. Then, various parameters may be calculated. In this case, it becomes possible to derive, as various parameters, the management result of the game history at the timing after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed.

  When various parameters are calculated by the calculation timing, history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used with reference to the history information corresponding to change of the setting value. The various parameters may be calculated using the history information stored later than that. In this case, it becomes possible to derive, as various parameters, the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

  Although the substrate box 60a of the main control device 60 is provided with an opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d, the opening is not provided and the reading terminal 69d is provided on the facing wall 60b. It is good also as composition covered by. In this case, in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the contents of the pass / fail table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are different from those of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the main ROM 64 has a setting 1 area 161, a setting 2 area 162, a setting 3 area 163, a setting 4 area 164, a setting 5 area 165, and a setting 6 area. 166 are provided. In the area for setting 1 161, a low probability of failure table 161a for setting 1 to be referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1" and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability of failure table 161 b for setting 1 which is referred to when the setting state of is “setting 1” and the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. In the setting 2 area 162, a low probability of failure table 162a for setting 2 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2” and the pass / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability of failure table 162b for setting 2 which is referred to when the setting state of is “setting 2” and the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. In the setting 3 area 163, a low probability of failure table 163a for setting 3 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3" and the pass / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability of failure table for setting 3 which is referred to when the setting state of is “setting 3” and the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored.

  In the setting 4 area 164, a low probability of failure table 164a for setting 4 to be referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4” and the pass / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability of failure table 164 b for setting 4 to be referred to when the setting state of is “setting 4” and the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. In the setting 5 area 165, a low probability table 165a for setting 5 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5" and the pass / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability of failure table 165 b for setting 5 to be referred to when the setting state of is “setting 5” and the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. In the setting 6 area 166, a low probability of failure table 166a for setting 6 to be referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6" and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability of failure table 166 b for setting 6 to be referred to when the setting state of is “setting 6” and the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored.

  The winning probability of the jackpot result set in each of the low probability table 161a to 166a is mutually different. Specifically, when the low probability nonconforming table 161a for setting 1 is referred to, a big hit results at about 1/320, and when the low probability nonconforming table 162a for setting 2 is referenced, it is approximately 1/310. Results in a big hit, and when the low probability table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/300, and when the low probability table 164a for setting 4 is referred to, about 1/290 Results in a big hit, and when the low probability table 165a for setting 5 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/280, and when the low probability table 166a for setting 6 is referred to, about 1/270 Results in a big hit. As a result, a jackpot result is more easily generated in the low probability mode when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, which is advantageous for the player.

  The winning probability of the jackpot result set in each of the high probability failure tables 161b to 166b is different from each other. Specifically, when the high probability non-conformity table 161b for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/45, and when the high probability non-existence table 162b for setting 2 is referenced, it is about 1/40. Results in the jackpot result, and when the high probability nonconformity table 163b for setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot results in about 1/35, and when the high probability nonconformity table 164b for setting 4 is referred to approximately 1/30 The jackpot results in and the jackpot result for about 5 when the high probability failure table 165b for setting 5 is referenced is about 1/20 when the high probability failure table 166b for setting 6 is referred to Results in a big hit. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode becomes higher as the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is “setting 1”. In the present embodiment, both the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode are pachinko. The higher the setting value of the machine 10, the higher the setting value. This makes it possible to increase the player's advantage over the fact that high set values are set.

  In addition, even if it is the winning probability of the jackpot result of the low probability mode in the case of "setting 6" which is the highest setting state, the winning of the jackpot result of high probability mode in the case of "setting 1" which is the lowest setting state. It is set lower than the probability. This makes it possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting It is possible to prevent the player's advantage in the case of 6 "from becoming extremely high.

  On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common to any setting state of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the setting condition of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming advantageous or disadvantageous for the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and the storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64 h in the main side ROM 64 in advance. Can be reduced.

  The winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the setting probability of the pachinko machine 10 is high for the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode The configuration may be such that the setting value is lower. In this case, in the low probability mode, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the high probability mode, the lower the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous for the player. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high setting value, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is “setting 1” to “setting 6 The configuration may be constant in the setting state of "." In this case, in the high probability mode, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous it is for the player to be set. In the low probability mode, it is possible to avoid the advantage or disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 Become.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, handling of the management result of the game history when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  The management IC 66 is provided with another storage memory 171 in addition to each memory in the first embodiment as a memory for storing information. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. As shown in FIG. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require an external power supply for storing and storing such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing.

  The separate storage memory 171 is provided with a first separate storage area 172, a second separate storage area 173, a third separate storage area 174, a fourth separate storage area 175, and a fifth separate storage area 176. Information of the management result of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, more specifically, the first embodiment. The various parameters described in (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st parameters to 42nd parameters) are sequentially stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are first stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter, every time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set The areas to be stored are switched so as to be storage areas 172 to 176 → (n + 1) th different storage areas 172 to 176. When various parameters are stored in the fifth separate storage area 176 and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the various parameters are again stored in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are erased. As a result, various parameters until the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed five times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and the oldest various parameters are erased for more than five times. It is memorized by.

  Various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68 d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the processing for setting update recognition in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". The setting is made (step S1802). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112, and means, for example, that the setting value grasping counter is "setting 1" if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1803). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1804). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified in the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1803, or if the process of step S1804 is performed, the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 are input. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, a repeated change monitoring process is executed (step S1806). Although details will be described later in the repeated change monitoring process, a process for notifying that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has occurred repeatedly in a short period of time is executed. In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 every time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is performed over a predetermined period is intended It is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to make it disappear. On the other hand, when such an action is performed, the notification corresponding to that is performed by repeatedly monitoring the change.

  Thereafter, various calculation processes are executed (step S1807). In the various arithmetic processing, the processing of step S1402 to step S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, and thirty-first parameters) are used by using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. The 42nd parameter is calculated.

  Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the area which is the current storage target among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area for making it possible to specify the storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 by the management CPU 112 is set. When various parameters are stored in the storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage target of the information on the pointer information area is changed to the next order area Updated to By executing the process of step S1808, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 with respect to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 at this time.

  Thereafter, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). That is, in this embodiment, not only when history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory The history information of 117 is deleted.

  After that, the RTC 115 which is date information and time information is read out from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information which is the writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S 1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the information on the value of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thus, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and information of setting values when the setting is performed The combination is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, the process of updating the target pointer is executed (step S1812). In the updating process, numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, the repetitive change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, it is determined whether the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was previously set is grasped, and it is further determined whether the grasped number of game times is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repetition change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). Since the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to store and hold the data as described above, it is not necessary to supply the external power to store and keep the value of the repetitive change counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition change counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the notification reference value “5” (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without putting the execution of game times exceeding the reference number between the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether it has exceeded.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing of repeated change is executed (step S1904). In the display processing of repeated change, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c correspond to the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 exceeds the notification reference value in a short time. It shall be the display contents of repeated change. The display content of the repeated change is display content for displaying "E" in all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. Further, the state in which the display contents of the repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is continued until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". . The repeated change flag is a flag for specifying by the management CPU 112 that the display contents of repeated change should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the repeated change flag is set to “1” and the display contents of repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display process in the first embodiment (FIG. 31) is not performed. After that, “1” is set to the repetition change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1905).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repetitive change counter in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). Thereafter, under the condition that "1" is set in the repeat change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repeat change in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are The display is ended (step S1908), and the repetitive change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased. As a result, it is possible to leave in the history memory 117 history information of the game executed after new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed.

  When new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters are calculated as the management result of the game history using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, even if the history information of the history memory 117 is erased when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history by the history information to be erased. It becomes possible.

  In the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time when new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the calculated various parameters are stored separately. It is stored in 171. Thereby, even if a new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting is performed at any timing thereafter.

  By providing a plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 in the separate storage memory 171, it becomes possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timing of the setting state for a plurality of times. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods on the basis of the timing when the new setting of the setting state is performed. In addition, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated under a situation in which a game is not performed, various parameters calculated using history information of a situation in which a game is substantially performed are It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in the separate storage memory 171.

  Various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68 d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 every time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is performed over a predetermined period is intended It is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to make it disappear. On the other hand, when such an action is performed, the notification corresponding to that is performed by repeatedly monitoring the change. This makes it possible to notify the administrator or the like that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  Notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period is performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly performed in a short period of time by using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying of the management result of the game history. It is possible to make a notification.

  In the situation where it should be notified that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period, the display contents of the repeated change are continuously displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The notification of the management result of the game history at the normal time is not performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This makes it possible to emphasize notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  In the situation where the number of times of game execution executed since the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues continuously beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding to that is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. When the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value in a situation where the number is within the reference number, notification corresponding to the event may be executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operation port 33, or the second operation port 34 or In the situation where the total discharge number of game balls entering the combination) is within the reference number and the event for which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. Good. In addition, after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the event that the new setting is performed is notified in a situation where the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 is within the reference number. When continuous exceeding the reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed.

  Further, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed beyond the notification reference value within the monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds), the notification corresponding thereto may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed since the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding to it is configured to be executed, but the setting value is changed in a situation where the number of game times executed since the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number In the case where an event exceeds the notification reference value and continues, notification corresponding to that may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed since the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding to that is executed, but the new setting is triggered in a situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number. When events for which various parameters are calculated are continuously exceeded the notification reference value, notification corresponding to the notification may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game times executed since the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. In addition to or instead of that, the progress of the game may be limited for a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

Fourth Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the main CPU 63 executes repeated change monitoring processing. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a monitoring process of repetitive change executed by the main CPU 63. The repeated change monitoring process is executed when the setting value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the monitoring process of the change is repeatedly executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured that the monitoring process of the change is repeatedly executed when the set value is changed.

  First, it is determined whether the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S2001). The main side RAM 65 is provided with a game number counter for measuring the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and the main side CPU 63 newly executes the game times. Every time the game is played, the value of the game counter is incremented by one. The game number counter is excluded from the target of “0” clear even when the clear process (step S105, step S117) of the main side RAM 65 is executed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2002). The repeated change counter is excluded from the target of “0” clear even if the clear process of the main side RAM 65 (step S105, step S117) is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition change counter after one addition exceeds the notification reference value “5” (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without putting the execution of game times exceeding the reference number between the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether it has exceeded.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, "1" is set in the repeat change flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2004). The repeated change flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that it is a situation where repeated change notification should be performed. The repeated change flag is excluded from the target of “0” clear even if the clear process of the main side RAM 65 (step S105, step S117) is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). After that, on the condition that "1" is set to the repetition change flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2006: YES), the repetition change flag is cleared to "0" (step S2007).

  In the repeated change monitoring process, when “1” is set in the repeated change flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2008: YES), a notification command of repeated change is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the sound emission control device 81 repeatedly receives the notification command of the change, the notification of the change is repeatedly performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. The notification of the repeated change is continued until the supply of the operation power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short time based on the control by the main CPU 63. Further, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, the pachinko machine 10 is in the set state even if the game machine main body 12 is not opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11. It becomes possible to make the administrator aware that new settings have been repeated in a short period of time.

  In addition to or instead of a configuration in which a notification command of repeated change is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control apparatus 81 when new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, An external output corresponding to that may be performed.

  Further, the main CPU 63 may execute the monitoring process of repetitive change in this embodiment, and the management CPU 112 may execute the monitoring process of repetitive change in the third embodiment. As a result, it becomes possible to strictly monitor whether or not the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

Fifth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of processing for setting update recognition in the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process according to the present embodiment which is executed by the management side CPU 112.

  When the setting value update signal inputted to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". The setting is made (step S2102). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112, and means, for example, that the setting value grasping counter is "setting 1" if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2103). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2104). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified in the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, or if the process of step S2104 is performed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information exists in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was previously set is grasped, and it is further determined whether the grasped number of game times exceeds the reference number (specifically, 100 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA is stored is a reference number (specifically, 1000). In step S2106, it may be determined whether or not. In addition, correspondence information indicating that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one or a predetermined combination of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34) In step S2106, it may be determined whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 in which is stored exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000). Further, it may be configured to determine in step S2106 whether the total number reference number (specifically, 1000) of the history information stored in the history memory 117 is exceeded.

  In the situation where the number of times of game execution executed since the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, the event in which the new setting is performed continues continuously beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding to that is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. When the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value in a situation where the number is within the reference number, notification corresponding to the event may be executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operation port 33, or the second operation port 34 or In the situation where the total discharge number of game balls entering the combination) is within the reference number and the event for which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. Good. In addition, after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the event that the new setting is performed is notified in a situation where the total number of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 is within the reference number. When continuous exceeding the reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various arithmetic processing is executed (step S2107). In the various arithmetic processing, the processing of step S1402 to step S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, and thirty-first parameters) are used by using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. The 42nd parameter is calculated.

  Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the area which is the current storage target among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area for making it possible to specify the storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 by the management CPU 112 is set. When various parameters are stored in the storage target area among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage target of the information on the pointer information area is changed to the next order area Updated to By executing the processing of step S2108, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 with respect to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 at this time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” (step S2109). That is, in this embodiment, not only when history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory The history information of 117 is deleted.

  After that, the RTC 115, which is date information and time information, is read out from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information which is the writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the information on the value of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thus, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and information of setting values when the setting is performed The combination is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed (step S2112). In the updating process, numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is stored in the history memory 117 on condition that the history memory 117 stores a predetermined number or more of history information. Various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171. Thereby, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, information on the management result of the game history as a result of the game being substantially played is stored in the separate storage memory 171 It can be made to be stored.

  The process of step S2109 may be executed on condition that the process of step S2107 and step S2108 is performed. That is, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is deleted on the condition that the history memory 117 stores a predetermined number or more of history information. As a result, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short time, it is possible to prevent the history information of the history memory 117 from being erased.

Sixth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, and 144a to 144n are provided in the areas 141 to 144, respectively. Information of the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122 b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141 b to 144 b of the areas 141 to 144. Information of the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122 d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141 d to 144 d of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122 e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141 e to 144 e of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122 f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth counters 141 f to 144 f of the areas 141 to 144. The seventh counters 141 g to 144 g of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122 g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122 h has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141 h to 144 h of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information of the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122 j has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141 j to 144 j of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122 k has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141 k to 144 k of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 1221 has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 1411 to 1441 of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122 m has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141 m to 144 m of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122 n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourteenth counters 141 n to 144 n of the areas 141 to 144.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a history setting process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas storing information other than the information indicating blank is specified, and the specification The set number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set in the confirmation target counter in step S2201.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which a signal of state information is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, information indicating that it is the open / close execution mode, information indicating that it is the high frequency support mode, and the correspondence information. It is determined whether any of the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, setting processing of state information is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the management of the information of the first state indicating that the open / close execution mode is being performed It is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect switches from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is managed by the management side RAM 114 In the case where the output state of the ninth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information of a third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Are stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202 or if the process of step S2203 is performed, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is , It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level by confirming whether or not it has been changed from “0” to “1” ( Step S2204). If the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from “0” to “1” in the situation where the value of the current check target counter is a value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. While the information on the first state is stored in the management side RAM 114, an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. When the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from “0” to “1” in the situation where the value of the current check target counter is a value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. While the information on the second state is stored in the management side RAM 114, an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical information stored in the tenth buffer 122 j is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is a value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122 j, the process proceeds to step S 2203. While the information of the third state is stored in the management side RAM 114, an affirmative determination is made in step S2204.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, an adding process of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2205). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target among the first to fourteenth counters 141 a to 141 n for total in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh total counter 141k is the addition target, and if the check target counter is "5", the fifth total counter 141e is the addition target. If the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first total counter 141 a is to be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is judged whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the process of adding the corresponding first state counter is executed (step S2207). In the addition processing, among the first to fourteenth counters 142a to 142n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh counter 142k for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is When the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter 142 a for the first state is the addition target.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is judged whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), an adding process of the corresponding second state counter is executed (step S2209). In the addition processing, among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh counter 143k for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is When the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first state counter 143 a for the second state is the addition target.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the process of adding the corresponding third state counter is executed (step S2211). In the addition processing, among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is If the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first state counter 144a for the third state is the addition target.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2204, if a negative determination is made in step S2210, or if the process of step S2211 is performed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S2213). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processing of step S2202 and subsequent steps is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the number of times the game ball enters the game opening to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, opening and closing execution The number of occurrences of the mode, the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode, and the number of occurrences of the game are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment but stored as number information. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the history memory 117 as compared to a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  As described above, since the configuration is stored as the count information instead of the history information, there is no need to execute the process of deriving the count information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for computing various parameters.

  Next, the processing for setting update recognition in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the set value update signal inputted to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". The setting is made (step S2302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112, and means, for example, that the setting value grasping counter is "setting 1" if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2303). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2304). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified in the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the process of step S2304 is performed, the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 are input. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, an opening and closing execution is performed in the total 11th counter 141k for measuring the number of times of game times executed in the total area 141 in the history memory 117 and the total area 141 in the history memory 117 The eighth total counter 141h which measures the number of occurrences of the mode, and the ninth total counter 141i which measures the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode in the total area 141 in the history memory 117 "0" is cleared (steps S2306 to S2308). Thereby, each number information of the number of times of execution of the game times, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode, and the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode clears “0” when new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Be done. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode for the 31st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode per unit game cycle, the 41st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game cycle, and the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode The calculation result of the forty-second parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration where the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter is the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. The calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter is appropriate based on the current setting value by setting it to correspond to the game content after the new setting of is made. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the counters other than the eighth counter 141h for total, the ninth counter 141i for total, and the eleventh counter 141k are 0 "is not cleared. In this way, the management of the number of balls or the pitch frequency of gaming balls to each history target ball entry unit is performed based on long-term gaming history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, the number of times the game ball is entered into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode, high frequency support The number of occurrences of the mode and the number of occurrences of the game are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment but stored as number information. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the history memory 117 as compared to a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  Further, since the configuration is stored as frequency information instead of history information, there is no need to execute processing for deriving frequency information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for computing various parameters.

  Information on the number of times of execution of the game, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode, and the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode is cleared to “0” upon new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode for the 31st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode per unit game cycle, the 41st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game cycle, and the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode The calculation result of the forty-second parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration where the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter and the 42nd parameter is the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. The calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter is appropriate based on the current setting value by setting it to correspond to the game content after the new setting of is made. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the counters other than the eighth counter 141h for total, the ninth counter 141i for total, and the eleventh counter 141k are 0 "is not cleared. In this way, the management of the number of balls or the pitch frequency of gaming balls to each history target ball entry unit is performed based on long-term gaming history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible.

  The configuration of the history memory 117 as in the present embodiment may be applied to the embodiments described in the first to fifth embodiments and the subsequent embodiments. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. In addition, when applied to the third embodiment, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to "0".

  In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the process of step S2306 to step S2308 may be executed in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41). As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the setting value is not changed before and after, the information of the number of times of playing the game, the information of the number of occurrence of the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support Information on the number of occurrences of the mode is not cleared to "0", and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, information on the number of executions of game times, information on the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode and high frequency support mode It is possible to make the information on the number of occurrences of "0" be cleared.

  Also, before the processing of step S2306 to step S2308 is executed in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41), various parameters are calculated using the counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117 and the calculation is performed. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

Seventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  As the memory 117 for history, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6” which are setting states of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Specifically, history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided corresponding to “setting 1”, and history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided corresponding to “setting 2”. A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided corresponding to setting 3 ", a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided corresponding to" setting 4 ", and" setting 5 "is provided. A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to "setting 6".

  In each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment is provided. As a result, it becomes possible to store history information in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting is performed are to be stored as history information. Even if history information is not deleted when setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, history information can be stored separately for each setting value. In addition, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 currently set, it becomes possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

  In addition, the area for total 141, the area for first state 142, the area for second state 143, and the area for third state 144 in the sixth embodiment are respectively stored in the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6. A combination of the above may be set.

  Next, the processing for setting update recognition in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 Is set to "1" (step S2402). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112, and means, for example, that the setting value grasping counter is "setting 1" if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6". Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the supply of the operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped because the setting value grasping counter is provided in the calculation result memory 131 which is a memory that does not require the supply of power from outside to store data. The values stored in the set value grasping counter are also stored.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). If an affirmative determination is made in step S 2403, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the calculation result memory 131 is incremented by 1 (step S 2404). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified in the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S 2403, or if the process of step S 2404 is performed, the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122 a to 122 h of the input port 121 are input. It is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the value of the setting value grasping counter of operation result memory 131 are set as storage targets of history information and reference objects at the time of operation of various parameters ( Step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means that "setting 1" is set, so the history memory 181 for setting 1 is used as a storage target of history information and various parameters. Set as reference target at the time of operation. Further, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "2", it means that "setting 2" is set, so the history memory 182 for setting 2 is used as a storage object of history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as reference target. Further, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "3", it means that "setting 3" is set, so the history memory 183 for setting 3 is used as a storage object of history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as reference target. Also, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "4", it means that "setting 4" is set, so the history memory 184 for setting 4 is used as a storage object of history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as reference target. Further, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "5", it means that "setting 5" is set, so the history memory 185 for setting 5 is used as a storage object of history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as reference target. Further, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that "setting 6" is set, so the history memory 186 for setting 6 is used as a storage object of history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as reference target.

  Thereafter, date information and RTC information which is time information are read out from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as history information storage targets in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memories 181 to 186 that are storage targets, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current write target is specified, and becomes the write target. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information that is stored. In addition, information for identifying the setting value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the write target. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed (step S2409). In the update process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as history information storage targets in step S2406 among the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are selected, and the history memories 181 to 186 are selected. The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read out and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided as the history memory 117 so as to correspond to “setting 1” to “setting 6”, respectively. As a result, it becomes possible to store the game history in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting is performed are to be stored as history information. Even if history information is not deleted when setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, history information can be stored separately for each setting value. In addition, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 currently set, it becomes possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each setting value.

  The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the six memories of history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided as the history memory 117, and one memory may be used for setting 1 , An area corresponding to the history memory 182 for setting 2, an area corresponding to the history memory 183 for setting 3, and an area corresponding to the history memory 184 for setting 4 An area, an area corresponding to the history memory 185 for setting 5 and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

Eighth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. In each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment is provided. In this case, new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the history information is stored using one of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. If any of the history information of a predetermined number or more is stored in the other history memory 191, 192, the history information of the one history memory 191, 192 is left without being deleted. It is possible to newly store history information in both of the history memories 191, 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191, 192. Become.

  Next, the processing for setting update recognition in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the setting value update signal inputted to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is It is set to "1" (step S2502). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112, and means, for example, that the setting value grasping counter is "setting 1" if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2503). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2504). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified in the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2503, or if the process of step S2504 is performed, the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 are input. It is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, “1” is set in the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag has been set as the storage target of the history information in the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 after the setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Not only the history memory 191, 192 but also the other history memory 191, 192 is a flag for specifying in the management side CPU 112 whether or not the history information is to be stored. In addition, since the setting change occurrence flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require power supply from outside for storage and retention, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped The value stored in the flag is stored.

  After that, the RTC 115, which is date information and time information, is read out from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, write processing to each history memory 191, 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191, and pointer information which is the writing target The RTC information read out at step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the information on the value of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thus, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and information of setting values when the setting is performed The combination is stored in the first history memory 191 as history information. Further, in the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the pointer which is the writing target The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the information on the value of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thus, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and information of setting values when the setting is performed The combination is stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the updating process, first, numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. Further, in the updating process, numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read out and added one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the 1 addition has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, the history setting process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  If “1” is not set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S 2601: NO), the memory 191 is selected as the storage target among the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. It means that it is the situation where only history information should be memorized. In this case, first, the history memory 191, 192 currently being stored is grasped (step S2602). A storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, and when the value of the storage target flag is "0", the first history memory 191 is the storage target, and the value of the storage target flag is "1". In this case, the second history memory 192 is to be stored. Note that the storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131 that is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage, so the storage target flag even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. The value of is remembered.

  Thereafter, execution processing of history setting is executed on the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored (step S2603). Specifically, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored. As a result, history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

  On the other hand, when the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to “1” (step S 2601: YES), the memory for the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is the storage target. It means that it is a situation where history information should be stored not only on the side but also on the other side. In this case, execution processing of history setting is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the first history memory 191. As a result, history information is stored in the first history memory 191. Thereafter, the processing of step S1101 to step S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed on the second history memory 192. As a result, history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

  If the process of step S2603 is performed or if the process of step S2604 is performed, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2605). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of ball discharge histories exist in the non-storage target history memory 191, 192 (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is a storage target, so the game area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. It is determined whether or not history information indicating that the game ball has been discharged is stored at least a predetermined number (specifically, "1000"). Further, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “1”, the second history memory 192 is the storage target, so the game ball PA is stored in the first history memory 191 from the game area PA. It is determined whether or not the history information indicating that the ink has been discharged is stored a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more. It should be noted that, instead of determining whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that the game ball has been discharged from the game area PA is stored, the game cycle is executed. It is also possible to determine whether or not the history information indicating “H” is stored for a predetermined number (specifically, “100”) or more.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a change process of the storage target is executed (step S2607). In the storage target change process, the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to a value different from the current value between two values, and the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are obtained. Change the side to be stored. Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting “1” in the storage target flag. When the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag to “0”. As a result, history memories 191 and 192 in which only history information of a game executed after new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed are set as storage targets. Then, the various parameters are calculated using the history information of the newly stored history memories 191 and 192, and the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It becomes possible to derive various parameters by the game.

  After that, the clear process of the side which has been the storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is executed (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the second history memory 192 is cleared to "0", and if the value of the storage target flag is "1," the first history memory 191 is 0 "clear. Thereafter, the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0" (step S2609).

  Next, the display output processing in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), the side which is the storage target among the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is grasped (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is grasped as the storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the second The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage target. After that, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed using the history information stored in the history memory 191, 192 of the storage object grasped in step S2702. While calculating various parameters (the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, the 41st to 42nd parameters), the various parameters thus calculated are calculated. It is stored in the result memory 131 (step S2703). In this case, since the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to “1”, history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. Even if any, various parameters are calculated using one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2701 or if the process of step S2703 is performed, a display process is performed (step S2704). The processing content of the display processing is the same as the display processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided. The history information is stored in the history memory 191, 192 not to be stored, while the history memory 191, 192, which has been stored, is directly stored. When the history information corresponding to the game ball being ejected from the game area PA is stored in the predetermined number or more in the history memory 191, 192 on the side not to be stored, it is not the storage object. The side history memories 191 and 192 are to be stored as they are, and the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored until that time are cleared to “0”. As a result, when new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only the history information of the game performed at the newly set setting value. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to appropriately calculate various parameters, it is for history to be stored The memories 191, 192 are maintained without being changed. As a result, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short time, it becomes possible to appropriately derive the management result of the game history up to that point.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which two memories of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and the first history for one memory is not limited. The first history area corresponding to the memory 191 and the second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 may be set.

  Further, only one history memory 117 may be provided. In this case, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the predetermined number after the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. The history information before the stored timing may be erased, and the history information after the timing at which the setting is performed may be stored without being erased. As a result, when new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and when history information of a predetermined number or more is accumulated, history before the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to make the information erased. Also, by setting the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to be stored in the history memory 117 at the time when the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the new setting of the setting state in the history memory 117 is performed. It is possible to distinguish between the history information before and the timing when the event was performed.

  Further, the timing of erasing the history information is limited to the case where the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the predetermined number after the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Instead, the number of times of game execution executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed may be a predetermined number or more.

  Further, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, if the setting value has not been changed before and after that, the change of the memory 191, 192 for storing the history to be stored as described above and the history information In the case where new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the setting value is changed before and after the deletion is not performed, the history memory 191, 192 for storage as described above is used. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the change of and the deletion of history information are performed.

The ninth embodiment
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111, the type of the signal to be input is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. It differs from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to make the management CPU 112 identify the type of the input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The same types of signals as the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth buffer 122d is the fourth corresponding to the detection result of the electric power detection sensor 45a. A signal is input, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction is output to the sixteenth buffer 122p. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as an eighth signal, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as a ninth signal, A signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as a tenth signal, a signal corresponding to the start of the game play is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as an eleventh signal, and a setting value update signal is a fifteenth buffer Although the configuration is such that the signal is input to 122o, in the present embodiment, buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the start of gaming times is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as a gaming time signal, a set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 1221, and a signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is in the opening / closing execution mode A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as a signal, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a signal during the high frequency support mode. It is input to the buffer 122o.

  The game time signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k, the setting value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 1221, the open / close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n The high frequency support mode input signal, the door open signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 The management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to the first to sixteenth buffers 122 k to 122 p are input without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, it has not been determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 what kind of signal is input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j, and the types of these signals receive an instruction from the main CPU 63 Is identified by the management CPU 112. The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment.

  First, “10”, which is the number of first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j to be recognized as signal types, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2801). Thereafter, output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level to start the output of the identification start signal. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the output counter for recognition of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the information on the number of outputs read is set in the output number counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2803). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of outputs of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

  In the present embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 recognizes the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of winning balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the type of the signal And output the type identification signal the same number of times. The management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j is grasped as the number of winning balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the type of the signal.

  In step S2803, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "10", "9" and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter . Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is “7”, “15” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “6”, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the first operation opening 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “5”, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "4", although the game ball corresponds to the out port 24a but the game ball does not enter even if the game ball enters the out port 24a, the output frequency counter is not executed. Set “0” to Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any one of "3" to "1", since the corresponding ball entry unit does not exist and is blank, "0" is set in the output number counter.

  Thereafter, output processing of the start trigger signal is executed (step S2804). In the output process, the output state of the start signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period in which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on condition that the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not “0” (step S2805: YES), that is, on condition that one or more values are set in the output number counter at step S2803, The process advances to step S2806. In step S2806, output processing of the type identification signal is performed. In the output process, the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122 b is set to the HI level to start the output of the type identification signal. The period in which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the output number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S2808). If the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In the output process, the output state of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122 c to the HI level. The period in which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2810), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2811). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803, and executes processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after one subtraction. Do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S2811: YES), the process of outputting the identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to HI level to start the output of the identification end signal. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, the management processing in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2901). If the identification start signal is not received, the process of step S2901 is performed again after the process of setting update recognition is performed in step S2902. The processing content of the setting update recognition process is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S2903). Thereafter, on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63 or not. When the type identification signal is received (step S2905: YES), the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2906). The reception number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 by the management CPU 112. The value of the reception number counter is cleared to “0” when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or if the process of step S2906 is performed, it is determined whether an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905, and if the end trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence setting process, of the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116, the reception count counter is set to the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114. Store the value being stored. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. “15” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the special electric power winning device 32 is set, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the first operation port 33 is set in the fifth correspondence relationship area 123 e. In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second operation opening 34 is set. In addition, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123 g to 123 l. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2904, or if the process of step S2909 is performed, it is determined whether the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2910). If reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process from step S2905 is performed. Run. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2910: YES), the history setting process of step S2911, the display output process of step S2912 and the external output process of step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 51 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores correspondence information between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122j. 51 (a) shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is HI level, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is HI level. 51 shows a period in which the output state of the third signal is HI level, FIG. 51 (d) shows a period in which the output state of the signal is HI level during the open / close execution mode, and FIG. FIG. 51 (f) shows the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j during a period in which the output state of the signal in the high frequency support mode is HI level. 51 (g) shows the timing when the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by one, and FIG. 51 (h) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed. Management CPU 112 Correspondence relationship setting Te processing (step S2908) shows a timing of the execution of.

  As the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a), 51 (d) and 51 (e), at the timing of t1, the first signal is generated. The output states of the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the signal in the switching execution mode and the signal in the frequent support mode are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the management processing (FIG. 50) to be in an identification state as shown in FIG. 51 (f).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51A, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing t5 to the timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management CPU 112 once. In this case, as shown in FIG. 51 (g), the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by one at the timing of t6.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51C, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing of t8 to the timing of t10. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence relation areas 123 a to 123 j of the current setting target in the correspondence relation memory 116 “1 Stores the information of

  After that, as shown in FIG. 51A, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level over the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, a timing t13 to a timing t15, a timing t16 to a timing t18, a timing t19 to a timing t21, and a timing t22 to a timing t24, as shown in FIG. 51 (b). The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management side CPU 112 once. In this case, as shown in FIG. 51 (g), the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by one at each of the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20 and the timing of t23.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51C, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t25 to timing t27. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. 51 (h). Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence relation areas 123 a to 123 j of the present setting object in the correspondence relation memory 116 “10” as the correspondence relation information. Stores the information of

  Thereafter, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 51C, 51D, and 51E, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are LOW. Change from level to HI level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the signal in the switching execution mode and the signal in the frequent support mode are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2910 of the management processing (FIG. 50), whereby the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG. 51 (f).

  In the present embodiment, since the information on the number of winning balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 corresponds to the winning ball corresponding to the ball entry portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number is included as correspondence information. In the said structure, when two or more types of ball entry parts with which the number of prize balls is the same exist, those ball parts can not be distinguished in historical information. Specifically, since the number of winning balls is one in each of the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 may be distinguished in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of winning balls in the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 may be made different. As a result, even when history information is stored as in the present embodiment, it is possible to distinguish between the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 in the history information.

  According to the present embodiment described above, not only the setting value update signal and the output instruction signal but also information corresponding to whether or not the game play has started, and information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. The information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress, and the information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are also signal paths corresponding to these information from the main CPU 63 The management CPU 112 can specify the correspondence information without receiving the correspondence relation information. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a needs to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118j. Become. Then, when making the management side CPU 112 recognize the correspondence information, the pulse signals of the same number as the number of balls corresponding to the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a make use of the second signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU112. Output to This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

Tenth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, a configuration for providing information on each ball entry result to the management IC 66 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of signal paths for causing the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 48a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to be branched from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from the midway position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above configuration, the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervention of the processing by the main CPU 63. Thus, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34. It is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63 because it is not necessary to do so.

  The branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. As a result, it becomes possible to make external access to the branch point and the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside difficult, and it becomes possible to prevent a fraudulent action to make the management IC 66 input an abnormal ball entry result. .

Eleventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of a display device for displaying the game history management result is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a front view of the main control device 60 in the present embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the first notification display device 69a, the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69c, but in the present embodiment, the first notification display device is provided. A display device 201, a second notification display device 202, a third notification display device 203, and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided. These first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61.

  Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this and it is not limited to this. It may be a light emitter, may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be an organic EL display. Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is installed with its display surface facing the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 faces, and by the facing wall portion 60b of the substrate box 60a It is covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 accommodated in the substrate box 60a are viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 in the substrate box 60a faces the back of the pachinko machine 10 When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth display devices 201 for notification via the facing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually observe the display surface of -204.

  On the display surface of the first notification display device 201, alphabets such as "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" are displayed. On the other hand, in the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204, numbers are displayed in the range of "0" to "9". The management result of the game history is notified using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the management results of the game history being notified on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 (the first to eighth parameters in the first embodiment, and the eleventh to eighteenth embodiments). The display corresponding to the parameter, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters) is performed, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 become a notification target The display corresponding to the content of the management result of the type of game history is performed.

  In detail, the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42th parameters in the first embodiment as the type of management result of game history Exists. In the first notification display device 201, display corresponding to the type of parameter group to be notified is performed. Specifically, when any of the first to eighth parameters is to be notified, “A” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and any of the first to eighteenth parameters is If it is a notification target, "E" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and if any of the 21st to 26th parameters is a notification target, the first notification display device If "H" is displayed at 201 and one of the 31st parameters is to be notified, "L" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are notified. When it is the target, “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201.

  In the second notification display device 202, the display of the order corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history which is the notification target in the arrangement order of the management results of the game history in the parameter group which is the notification is performed. The parameter group of the first to eighth parameters will be described by way of example. When the first parameter is a notification target, "1" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the second parameter is displayed. If it is the notification target, "2" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and if the third parameter is the notification target, "3" on the second notification display device 202. Is displayed, and “4” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the fourth parameter is a notification target, and for the second notification when the fifth parameter is a notification target When "5" is displayed on the display device 202 and the sixth parameter is to be notified, "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the seventh parameter is to be notified. If there is a second notification display 202 "7" is displayed Te, when the eighth parameter is a notification target "8" is displayed in the second notification for the display device 202. Further, when the parameter group of the 21st to 26th parameters is described as an example, when the 21st parameter is a notification target, "1" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the 22nd If the parameter is a notification target, "2" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and if the 23rd parameter is a notification target, "2" is displayed on the second notification display device 202. 3 ”is displayed, and“ 4 ”is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 24th parameter is a notification target, and“ 2 ”is a second when the 25th parameter is a notification target. “5” is displayed on the notification display device 202, and “6” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the twenty-sixth parameter is a notification target.

  Regarding the display contents of the third informing display device 203 and the fourth informing display device 204 in detail, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tenth place is for the third informing The number displayed on the display device 203 and corresponding to the first digit is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the second to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd. The display corresponding to the calculation result of the parameters is sequentially switched in accordance with the predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter which is the display object of the last order is displayed, the first parameter which is the display object of the first order The calculation result of is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. On the other hand, the operation cycle of the various parameters in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds, and the number of various parameters is 25. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 become notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202 at least once.

  In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to change not only the notification of the management result of the game history but also the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as in the first embodiment. In, the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed. Specifically, while the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off in the changeable state, they are present at the right end in the horizontally arranged first to fourth notification display devices 204. A value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. That is, when "setting 1" is selected in the changeable state, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when "setting 2" is selected in the changeable state. If "2" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and "setting 3" is selected in the changeable state, "3" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and changeable If "setting 4" is selected in the state, "4" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and if "setting 5" is selected in the changeable state, the fourth notification is displayed. “5” is displayed on the display device 204, and “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 when “setting 6” is selected in the changeable state.

  Next, an electrical configuration for performing various displays in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 based on the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram for describing an electrical configuration for performing various displays in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 based on the control of the MPU 62.

  As described above, the main control board 61 is provided with the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, on the main control substrate 61, a first display IC 205, a second display IC 206, a third display IC 207, and a fourth display IC 208 are provided.

  The first display IC 205 is provided to correspond to the first notification display device 201, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 by the signal path SL31 and electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 by the signal path SL32. It is connected. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the first notification display device 201 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Control the light emission of the The first display IC 205 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operation power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the display data stored and held is the first notification display device Display continuously on 201. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the first notification display device 201 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in the situation where the setting of the display data is not performed by the MPU 62 after the supply of the operating power to the first display IC 205 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data, but in this case Is in the non-display state, that is, in the off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the first display IC 205, the display is displayed on the first display IC 205 Data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of the operating power for the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is the relevant. It will be started by the first notification display device 201.

  The second display IC 206 is provided to correspond to the second notification display device 202, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 by the signal path SL33 and electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 by the signal path SL34. It is connected. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the second notification display device 202 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Control the light emission of the The second display IC 206 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operation power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the display data stored and held is the second notification display device Display continuously on 202. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the second notification display device 202 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in the situation where the setting of the display data is not performed by the MPU 62 after the supply of the operation power to the second display IC 206 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data, but in this case The second informing display device 202 is in the non-display state, that is, in the off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the second display IC 206, the display is performed on the second display IC 206 Data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of the operating power for the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is the relevant. It will be started by the second notification display device 202.

  The third display IC 207 is provided to correspond to the third notification display device 203, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 by the signal path SL35 and electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 by the signal path SL36. It is connected. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the third notification display device 203 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Control the light emission of the The third display IC 207 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operation power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is used as the third notification display device Display continuously on 203. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the third notification display device 203 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in the situation where the setting of the display data is not performed by the MPU 62 after the supply of the operation power to the third display IC 207 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data, but in this case The third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state, that is, in the off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying the backup power to the third display IC 207, the display is performed on the third display IC 207. Data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the third notification display device 203 immediately before the supply of the operating power for the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is the relevant. It will be started by the 3rd alerting | reporting display apparatus 203. FIG.

  The fourth display IC 208 is provided to correspond to the fourth notification display device 204, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 by the signal path SL37 and electrically connected to the fourth notification display device 204 by the signal path SL38. It is connected. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the fourth notification display device 204 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, ie, each display Control the light emission of the The fourth display IC 208 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operation power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the display data stored and held is the fourth notification display device Display continuously on 204. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in the situation where the setting of the display data is not performed by the MPU 62 after the supply of the operating power to the fourth display IC 208 is started, the display data becomes all “0” data, but in this case The fourth notification display device 204 is in the non-display state, that is, in the off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the fourth display IC 208, the display is performed on the fourth display IC 208 Data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the fourth notification display device 204 immediately before the supply of the operating power for the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is the relevant. It will be started by the 4th alerting | reporting display apparatus 204. FIG.

  Although the display data is output to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 by the MPU 62, the output setting of the display data is performed by each of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112. That is, display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed in the main CPU 63, and display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed in the management CPU 112. In this case, the period in which the output setting of the display data is performed is adjusted so that the output setting of the display data is not performed in the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 at the same time. Specifically, in the changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, the output setting of display data by the main CPU 63 is performed. On the other hand, output setting of display data by the management side CPU 112 is not performed. On the other hand, in the state where the setting value is not changeable, output setting of display data is performed by the management side CPU 112, whereas output setting of display data by the main CPU 63 is not performed.

  If the output setting of display data by the main CPU 63 and the output setting of display data by the management CPU 112 are performed at the time of synchronization, the output setting of display data by the main CPU 63 is prioritized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output setting of display data by the management CPU 112 may be prioritized.

  Next, the display processing in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, the value of the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter for specifying the management side CPU 112 that it is the timing to update the display contents of the management result of the game history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereafter, it is determined whether it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after 1 subtraction is "0". Is determined (step S3002).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the value of the display target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S3003). Then, when the value of the display object counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value “24” (step S3004: YES), the value of the display object counter is cleared to “0” (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter for specifying the types of parameters to be displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by the management CPU 112. The first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the second to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters, and a display target counter of "0" to "24" Possible values correspond one-to-one. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter which is the first display target is the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the value of the display target counter is "24". When it is the 42nd parameter which is the last display subject, it becomes a display subject of the display devices 201-204 for the 1st-4th information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3004, or if the process of step S3005 is executed, display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, while setting processing of display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), setting processing of display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0” and the first parameter is to be displayed, display data for displaying “A” on the first notification display device 201 is displayed on the first display IC 205. While outputting, the display data for displaying "1" on the 2nd alerting | reporting display apparatus 202 are output to 2nd display IC206. Also, for example, if the value of the display target counter is “24” and the 42nd parameter is a display target, the display data for displaying “O” on the first notification display device 201 is displayed first While outputting to the IC 205, display data for displaying “2” on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206.

  Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read out from the calculation result memory 131, and the display data corresponding to the tenth place of the result obtained by multiplying the read parameter by 100 and the display data corresponding to the one place It reads from the management side ROM 113 (step S3009). And while carrying out display control of the 3rd alerting | reporting display apparatus 203 so that the number corresponding to the 10th digit of the result is displayed (step S3010), the number corresponding to the 1st digit is displayed 4th The display control of the notification display device 204 is performed (step S3011). For example, when the result of multiplying by 100 is “53”, display data for displaying “5” on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207, and the display data for the fourth notification display device 204 is Display data for displaying "3" is output to the fourth display IC 208.

  After that, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as the value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3012).

  As described above, when the display processing is executed, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display of the management result of the game history is performed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and the main control device 60 is operated from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. It takes place regardless of whether it is visible or not. As described above, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed regardless of the game status or the state of the pachinko machine 10, whereby the first to fourth notification display devices 201 can be executed. It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of.

  The display of the management result of the gaming history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started after the supply of the operation power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63 Be done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and held even when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, like the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the managing CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the managing CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

  The first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 store and hold display data output from the MPU 62 while operating power is supplied, and the corresponding first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. Display control. Therefore, after the display of the management result of the game history is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not turned off (that is, not displayed), and the lighting state corresponding to some display ( That is, it is in the display state).

  Next, the setting value update processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, the process of turning off the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is executed (step S3101). Specifically, display data that is all "0" is output to the first to third display ICs 205-207. As a result, all the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are not displayed. Immediately after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all turned off, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are turned off. -204 are non-display states. Therefore, step S3101 is processing to maintain the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 in the non-display state, and temporarily any one of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is When it is in the display state, it is a process to make it non-display state.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3102). The set value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to identify which set value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting “1” to the setting value counter, when the setting value updating process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting values up to that time.

  Thereafter, display start processing of the set value in the fourth display notification device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the display start process of the setting value, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Thereafter, under the condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned OFF (step S3104: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b is pushed once (step S3105). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68 b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3105: YES), the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3106). If the value of the set value counter after one addition exceeds 6 (step S3107: YES), the set value counter is set to 1 (step S3108). Thus, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", it is changed to "setting 1". I will be back.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process of step S3108 is executed, display update processing of the setting value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3109). In the display update process of the set value, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

  After the process of step S3109 is performed, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processing after step S3105 is executed again. When the OFF operation is performed (step S3104: YES), display start processing of the management result in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3110).

  In the display start process, the display start command of the management result is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management side CPU 112 which has received the display start command of the management result executes processing for displaying the first parameter among various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Next, display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated will be described. FIG. 57 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed, and FIG. 57 (b) is a pachinko machine It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the display apparatuses 201-204 in the case where the setting state of 10 is changed.

  When the game history management result is displayed, as shown in FIG. 57A, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 emits light. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in the display state. And this is the same even when any of the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty first to twenty sixth parameters, the thirty first parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are to be notified. . Thereby, the administrator of the game hall visually observes that all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. It becomes possible to grasp that the game history management result is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, all the display segments are turned off in each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 as shown in FIG. 57 (b). That is, each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in the non-display state. Further, one of “1” to “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. As described above, when any one of “1” to “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in the non-display state, The administrator of the gaming hall can grasp that the display corresponding to the setting value is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and clearly grasps the current setting value. It becomes possible.

  Next, how the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state will be described with reference to the time charts of FIG. 58 (a) to FIG. 58 (h). FIG. 58 (a) shows a changeable state period in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, and FIG. 58 (b) is an update of the setting display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 58 (c) shows a timing when displaying the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 58 (d) shows the first to fourth notification display devices. FIG. 58 (e) shows a period during which the first notification display device 201 is in the display state, and FIG. 58 (f) shows the update timing of the display corresponding to the management result of the game history in 201 to 204. 58 (g) shows a period during which the third notification display device 203 is in a display state, and FIG. 58 (h) shows a fourth notification. Period when the display device 204 for display is in the display state It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 58A, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed at timing t1 as the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started with the setting key insertion portion 68a turned on. Can be changed. At timing t1, the setting display is updated as shown in FIG. 58 (b), and as shown in FIG. 58 (h), the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state, and the display state is continued. In this case, since “setting 1” is selected, “1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 58 (e) to FIG. 58 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, that is, all display segments are turned off. Maintained.

  Thereafter, each of the timings is changed as shown in FIG. 58 (b) by the operation of changing the set value by the operation of the update button 68b at each of the timing t2, timing t3, timing t4 and timing t5. It becomes the update timing of the setting value display at. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (h), in the fourth notification display device 204, the display content is switched to the number corresponding to the setting value after the change at each timing, but the display content is switched The fourth notification display device 204 is maintained in the display state, including each timing at which the second notification is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (e) to FIG. 58 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are also in the non-display state, that is, all display The segment is kept off.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF at the timing of t6, whereby the changeable state is ended as shown in FIG. 58 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 58C, the display period of the management result of the game history is started at the timing of t6. Specifically, display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Therefore, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state as shown in FIG. 58 (e) to FIG. 58 (g) at the timing of t6, and the fourth notification display The display content of the device 204 is maintained, but the display state is maintained.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 58D, the display update result of the game history management result is obtained at timing t7, timing t8, timing t9, timing t10, timing t11 and timing t12. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (e) to FIG. 58 (h), the display contents corresponding to the management result of the game history after the update at the respective timings in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Although it is to be switched, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the display state including the respective timings at which the display contents are switched.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the configuration in which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display corresponding to it is possible in the changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. This is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying game history management results but also as display devices for performing corresponding displays in the changeable state. .

  It corresponds to being in the change possible state of the setting value in the period when the management result of the game history is displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period in which the display takes place. Thereby, any display is performed in the said 1st-4th notification display devices 201-204 by grasping | ascertaining the condition in which the display is performed in the 1st-4th notification display devices 201-204. It is possible to identify the

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification are different from the display mode in the case where the management result of the game history is displayed. Display control. Thus, by grasping the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is specified which display is being performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

  A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. As a result, it is possible to perform various displays as the display corresponding to the management result of the game history. In addition, when there are a plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode is largely set depending on whether the game history management result is displayed or the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed. It is possible to make a difference.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 which are not in the non-display state when the game history management result is displayed, are in the non-display state. Thereby, only by confirming whether or not the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value It becomes possible to clearly specify which one of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is being performed.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state, and the display content is the fourth notification display device 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed. Are display contents that can be displayed. As described above, by making the display contents in the fourth notification display device 204 overlap, each of the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed. It is possible to make no restriction on the display content of. In addition, even if the display contents of the fourth notification display device 204 can be overlapped as described above, the first to third notification display devices can be displayed when the display corresponding to the settable changeable state is performed. Since 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the game history management result is displayed, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in the display state. Thereby, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are distinctly different between when the game history management result is displayed and when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed. It becomes possible.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the non-display state even if the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is changed . This makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked in the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed. In addition, regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked, it is possible to display the game history management result and change the setting value in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to specify which of the corresponding displays is being performed.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. This makes it easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed.

  In the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in the lateral direction, the display corresponding to the changeable setting value is made using only the fourth notification display device 204 disposed at the right end. To be done. This makes it easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is performed using the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. The display corresponding to the contents of the management result of the game history is performed using the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp the management result of the game history. In this case, in the changeable state of the setting value, both the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in which the type of the management result of the game history is displayed are in the non-display state. Thus, the non-display state of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the type corresponds to the changeable state of the set value, and corresponds to the changeable state of the set value. It becomes easy to understand that the display is being performed.

  In addition, when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in which the type of the management result of the game history is displayed, but also the game The third notification display device 203 in which the content of the management result of the history is displayed is also in the non-display state. This makes it easy to grasp that the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is being performed.

  Display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 perform predetermined display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. In the configuration, the display data is stored and held by the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Thereby, for example, even if the main CPU 63 stops the execution of the processing for advancing the game due to the occurrence of the radio wave detection abnormality or the vibration detection abnormality (when making an affirmative determination in step S306), It becomes possible to maintain the display of the management result of the game history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Among the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the target to be in the non-display state (all off state) in the changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed is the first to fourth The present invention is not limited to the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and may be the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. In this case, a predetermined display (for example, “5” display) different from the content of the current setting value is performed on the third notification display device 203, and the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. In the fourth notification display device 204, a predetermined display (for example, “5” display) different from the content of the current setting value is performed, and the third notification may be displayed. The configuration may be such that a number corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the display device 203. In addition, the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in the non-display state (all off state) and the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in the display state. The first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in the non-display state (all off state), and the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in the display state. The second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in the non-display state (all off state) and the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. The second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in the non-display state (all off state), and the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 may be configured. Is in the display state It may be configured.

  In addition, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the non-display state (all off state). Only the display device 202 may be in the non-display state (all off state), or only the third notification display device 203 may be in the non-display state (all off state), or the fourth notification display device Only the display 204 may be in the non-display state (all off state).

  Further, in the changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the display state, and only the second notification display device 202 is displayed. Alternatively, only the third notification display device 203 may be in the display state.

Twelfth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the changeable state of the setting value are different from those in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 59 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 59 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration of the second notification display device 202.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, the first notification display device 201 includes seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is formed in a rod shape, and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. The seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged such that the first notification display device 201 is a so-called seven-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the second informing display device 202 is provided with seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is formed in a rod shape, and has a light emitter such as an LED inside. The seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g are arranged such that the second notification display device 202 is a so-called seven-segment display.

  In FIG. 60, when displaying the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and displaying that it is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus 201 for 1st alerting | reporting in 2nd, and the display apparatus 202 for 2nd alerting | reporting.

  The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the case of displaying the game history management result are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, one of “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and “1” to “8” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. "" Is displayed.

  In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first notification display device 201 corresponds to “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and the like in the first notification display device 201. It is a light emission target in at least one type of display of "O". That is, the display segments 201 a to 201 g that are not to be emitted even when any of “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201 are It does not exist.

  Similarly for the second notification display device 202, each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 is “1” to “8” in the second notification display device 202. It becomes a light emission target in at least one type of display among the display of. That is, even when any of “1” to “8” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, there are no display segments 202a to 202g that are not to be emitted.

  In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emission state in the first notification display device 201. The second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can be in the light emitting state when displaying the management result of the game history on the first notification display device 201 as described above. Furthermore, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state in any case where the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201. On the other hand, the display content of the first notification display device 201 in which only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is the management of the game history Not present when displaying results. Thereby, in the changeable state of the setting value, the display result is not displayed when the game history management result is displayed while using the display segments 201b and 201e that can be in the light emission state when the game history management result is displayed. It is possible to display the mode on the first notification display device 201. Therefore, while using the display segments 201a to 201g used when displaying the management result of the game history, it is possible to cause the display device 201 to perform the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value. It becomes possible.

  In the changeable state of the set value, the third display segment 202c is in the light emission state in the second notification display device 202. The third display segment 202c can be in the light emitting state when displaying the management result of the game history on the second notification display device 202 as described above. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in which only the third display segment 202c is in the light emitting state is present when displaying the game history management result I did not. Thereby, in the changeable state of the setting value, when displaying the management result of the game history while using the display segment 202c that can be in the light emission state when displaying the management result of the game history, the display mode not displayed It becomes possible to display on the second notification display device 202. Therefore, while using the display segments 202a to 202g used when displaying the management result of the game history, the second notification display device 202 can perform the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value. It becomes possible.

  Next, the setting value update processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, start processing of setting value display in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, in the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state, and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, and 201g are in the light off state. Output data to the first display IC 205. In addition, for the second notification display device 202, display data is output to the second display IC 206 such that the third display segment 202c is in the light emitting state and the other display segments 202a, 202b, 202d to 202g are in the off state. As a result, the display for notifying that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed is notified by the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202.

  Thereafter, the process of turning off the third notification display device 203 is executed (step S3202). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the third display IC 207. As a result, all the display segments of the third notification display device 203 are turned off, and the third notification display device 203 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3203). The set value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to identify which set value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting “1” to the setting value counter, when the setting value updating process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting values up to that time.

  Thereafter, display start processing of the setting value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the display start process of the setting value, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned OFF (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b is pushed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68 b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205 to determine whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF.

  If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S3207). If the value of the set value counter after the addition of 1 exceeds “6” (step S3208: YES), “1” is set in the set value counter (step S3209). Thus, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", it is changed to "setting 1". I will be back.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3208, or if the process of step S3209 is performed, display update processing of the setting value in the fourth notification display device 204 is performed (step S3210). In the display update process of the set value, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

  After the process of step S3210 is executed, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processing after step S3206 is executed again. When the OFF operation is performed (step S3205: YES), display start processing of management results in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3211).

  In the display start process, the display start command of the management result is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management side CPU 112 which has received the display start command of the management result executes processing for displaying the first parameter among various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Setting values can be changed by setting the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 that can be in the light emission state when the management result of the game history is displayed The display corresponding to the state is performed. This makes it possible to limit the content of the display corresponding to the game history management result as much as possible in order to diversify the display of the game history management result. On the other hand, the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 2022 to 2022 to be in the light emission state when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 The combination of 202 g is a combination that does not exist when the management result of the game history is displayed. Thereby, the display of the management result of the game history is realized by grasping the combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g in the light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. And it becomes possible to grasp which of the displays corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is being performed.

  For each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there are display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g which do not become the light emission state even if the display of the management result of the game history is performed in all patterns. I did not. This makes it possible to limit the display contents of the game history management result as much as possible in order to diversify the display corresponding to the game history management result.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed, the third notification display device 203 that is not in the non-display state when the management result of the game history is displayed is in the non-display state. As a result, the game history is confirmed by checking whether the third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state as well as the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. It becomes possible to clearly specify which of the display of the management result and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In addition, it is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, and it is limited to the configuration in which only one type of display content is set corresponding to the changeable state. It is not necessary to set, and a plurality of types may be set. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display contents may be predetermined, and the display contents to be displayed may be changed in accordance with the display order each time the changeable state is newly executed. As described above, even if there are a plurality of types of display contents corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value, the display segments 201a are in the light emission state when displaying the management result of the game history. -201 g and 202a-202g are used, and when displaying the management result of the game history, the display content is not displayed.

  In one of the case of displaying the management result of the game history and the case of performing the display corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first and second notification display devices The display may be blinked at 201 and 202, and may be displayed on the other side so as to maintain lighting. In this case, since the game hall manager can specify which of the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state depending on which of the blinking display and the lighting display, the change is made. The combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g set to be in the light emitting state in the display corresponding to the possible state may be a combination used when displaying the management result of the gaming history, and management of the gaming history It may be a combination that is not used when displaying the result. Further, the lighting period and the extinguishing period in the blinking display may be mutually identical between the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, or they may be completely deviated. The configuration may be partially overlapping.

The thirteenth embodiment
In the present embodiment, when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the corresponding display is performed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, unlike the eleventh embodiment. There is. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the abnormality display area 211 provided in the main RAM 65. As shown in FIG.

  The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing information on an abnormal state to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The abnormality display area 211 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d. Specifically, a first unit area 211a, a second unit area 211b, a third unit area 211c, and a fourth unit area 211d are provided. Information on an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored one by one in each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d. That is, in the abnormality display area 211, information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored and held up to four.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 identifies all the information of the abnormal state occurring in the pachinko machine 10. For example, when an abnormality related to the payout of the game balls (for example, the lower plate 56a is full, the ball of the tank 75 is not present, the payout abnormality due to the payout device 76), the command corresponding to the generated abnormality is the payout CPU 92 From the main CPU 63 to the main CPU 63. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown), and when the radio wave detection sensor detects an incorrect radio wave, the corresponding abnormal signal is transmitted to the main CPU 63, which is abnormal. When the vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor, an abnormality signal corresponding to that is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, based on specifying that transmission of a normal signal is not performed from the respective ball entering detection sensors 42a to 49a, occurrence of disconnection abnormality of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 49 a is specified.

  The type of abnormal state specified by the main CPU 63 is a number larger than the maximum number of pieces of abnormal state information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211. Then, when a large number of abnormal states occur simultaneously, it is assumed that new abnormal information is generated despite the fact that the information on the maximum number of abnormal states is already stored in the abnormal display area 211. On the other hand, the storage priority is set at the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10 for the information of the abnormal state, and in the situation where the information on the maximum number of abnormal states is already stored in the abnormal display area 211 In the case where an abnormal state has occurred, information on an abnormal state having a high storage priority is left in the abnormal display area 211. This makes it possible to prioritize and execute notification of an abnormal state with high storage priority.

  Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The abnormality setting process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, it is determined whether an abnormal display target is generated (step S3301). The types of abnormality display targets include full tank of the lower tray 56a, no ball of the tank 75, dispensing abnormality by the dispensing device 76, radio wave detection abnormality, vibration detection abnormality, and disconnection abnormality of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. The number of types of abnormality display targets is larger than the number of first to fourth unit areas 211 a to 211 d provided in the abnormality display area 211.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, it is determined whether the information of the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target generated this time is already stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211 or not. Is determined (step S3302). If it is already stored, the information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormal display area 211. This makes it possible to prevent information on the same kind of abnormal state from being stored redundantly in the abnormal display area 211.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically, "4") (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of areas in the abnormality display area 211 in which the information on the abnormal state is stored among the first to fourth unit areas 211 a to 211 d.

  If the value of the abnormality target counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), priority comparison processing is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first, the information of the abnormal state having the lowest storage priority is specified among the information of the abnormal state stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. The storage priority is predetermined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, full tank of the lower plate 56a → no ball of the tank 75 → vibration detection abnormality → dispensing abnormality by the dispensing device 76 → ball falling detection sensor 42a The storage priority is increased in the order of disconnection abnormality of ~ 49a → radio wave detection abnormality. In the priority comparison process, any one of the information on the abnormal state having the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the abnormal display target generated at this time has a high storage priority. Compare and determine the

  When the storage priority of the abnormality display target generated this time is lower (step S3305: NO), the information on the abnormality state corresponding to the abnormality display target generated this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. As a result, in a configuration in which the number of types of abnormality display targets is more than the number of first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211, information on the abnormal state having high storage priority is stored. It is possible to leave in the abnormality display area 211.

  If the storage priority of the abnormality display target generated this time is higher (step S3305: YES), the setting processing of the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3306). In the setting processing of the abnormality display area 211 executed when the positive determination is made in step S3305, the unit areas 211a to 211d specified as storing the information of the abnormal state having the lowest storage priority occur this time Overwrites information on the abnormal status corresponding to the abnormal display target.

  On the other hand, when the value of the abnormality target counter in the main RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), the value of the abnormality target counter is incremented by 1 (step S3307), and the setting processing of the abnormality display area 211 is performed. Are executed (step S3306). In the setting process, one area is selected from the unit areas 211a to 211d in the abnormal display area 211 in which the information on the abnormal state is not stored, and the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target generated this time in the selected area. Store information.

  In step S3306, when there is only one piece of abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211, the information on the abnormal state is stored in the first unit area 211a, and the abnormal display area 211 is displayed. When there is a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the area of the nth unit areas 211a to 211b, the information on the abnormal state is stored in order from the area having the smallest value of "n".

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether a cancellation event for the abnormality display target has occurred (step S3308). For example, whether or not a command indicating that the lower tray 56a has been full, that the tank 75 has been removed from the ball, or that the dispensing device 76 has released a dispensing abnormality has been received from the dispensing side CPU 92 judge. In addition, whether the abnormal release operation for the occurrence of the radio wave detection abnormality has been performed, whether the abnormal release operation for the occurrence of the vibration detection abnormality has been performed, or whether the abnormal release operation for the occurrence of the disconnection abnormality has been performed judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3308, deletion processing of the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3309). In the deletion process, it is specified whether information on an abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target to be canceled this time is stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. If it is stored, the information in the abnormal state is erased by clearing the stored area to "0". In this case, if there is only one piece of abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211 after erasure, the information on the abnormal state is stored in the first unit area 211a, and the abnormality is found after erasure. When there is a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area of the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b having the smallest "n" value. Further, the value of the abnormality target counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3310).

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation to start abnormality display has occurred (step S3311). The start operation of the abnormal display presses the update button 68b in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. It is done by operating.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether information on one or more abnormal states is stored in the abnormal display area 211 (step S3312). When the information on the abnormal state is not stored, the abnormality display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. This makes it possible to prevent an abnormal display from being started even though there is no abnormal state information to be notified.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, "1" is set in the abnormality display flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3313). The abnormal display flag cancels the display corresponding to the management result of the game history, and displays the display corresponding to the information of the abnormal state stored in the abnormal display area 211 to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is a flag for specifying with main side CPU 63 that it is the situation which should be performed in. In addition, even if the start operation of the abnormality display is performed in the situation where the abnormality display flag is already set to “1”, a negative determination is made in step S3311.

  After that, processing for setting cancellation of display of the management result is executed (step S3314). In the suspension setting process, the display suspension command is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 to temporarily suspend updating of the display of the management result of the game history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The management side CPU 112 stops the execution of the display process (FIG. 55) by receiving the display stop command. However, even if the management CPU 112 receives the display stop command, it does not set display data to be all “0” data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the display of the management result of the game history at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Ru.

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation for ending the abnormality display has occurred (step S3315). In the abnormal display end operation, the reset button 68c is pressed in a state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. It is done by operating. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3315, the abnormality display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3316). In addition, even if the end operation of the abnormal display is performed in the situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is “0”, the negative determination is made in step S3315.

  Thereafter, the cancellation of the display of the management result is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation cancellation process, by transmitting a cancellation cancellation command to the management side CPU 112, a state in which the display update of the management result of the game history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is canceled is To release. The management side CPU 112 resumes the execution of the display process (FIG. 55) by receiving the cancel release command. However, even if the management CPU 112 receives the cancellation cancellation command, it does not set display data to be all “0” data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until display data is transmitted from the management side CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormality display at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, the management CPU 112 continues storing the history information and calculating various parameters even when updating of the display of the management result of the game history is canceled, and calculation of various parameters is calculated It is stored in the result memory 131. Therefore, when the update of the display of the management result of the game history is canceled, the display of the management result of the latest game history is immediately displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be resumed.

  In the abnormality setting process, when “1” is set in the abnormality display flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S3318: YES), the process for the abnormality display is executed (step S3319). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an abnormality display process.

  First, the process of turning off the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3401). Specifically, display data which is all "0" is output to the first and second display ICs 205 and 206. As a result, all the display segments of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, the value of the update timing counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the timing to update the display content of the abnormality display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. When the value of the update timing counter is already "0", the state is maintained. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by determining whether the value of the update timing counter is “0” or not ((1) Step S3403).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, the process of updating the display target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3404). In the updating process, if it is the processing cycle of the first abnormality display process after the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” this time, “0” is set to the display target counter. The value of the display target counter corresponds to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Specifically, the value "0" of the display target counter corresponds to the first unit area 211a. The value of "1" of the display target counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b, and the value of "2" of the display target counter corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and "3" of the display target counter The value of “corresponds to the fourth unit area 211 d. In the updating process, the value of the display target counter is incremented by one if it is not the process cycle of the first abnormality display process since the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” this time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether information of an abnormal state is stored in an area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as described above, when only one piece of information on an abnormal state is stored, the information on the abnormal state is stored in the first unit area 211a, and a plurality of pieces of information on an abnormal state are stored. In this case, the information on the abnormal state is stored in order from the area having the smallest value of “n” of the n-th unit areas 211 a to 211 b. Therefore, when the information on the abnormal state is not stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter, the information on the abnormal state is also stored in the area corresponding to the value larger than the value of the display target counter. It will not be. Further, when the value of the display target counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value “3”, the corresponding area does not exist in the first place, so the information of the abnormal state is treated as not stored. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3406). Here, it is assumed that all the abnormal states that are targets of the abnormal display are canceled in the situation where the abnormal display is performed. In this case, even when the abnormality display process is being performed, no abnormal state information is stored in the abnormality display area 211. In such a situation, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 display an indication that no abnormal state information is stored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3405, or if the process of step S3406 is executed, display data to be displayed corresponding to the value of the display object counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, the information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211 is read out. Then, display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64. The display data is set in one-to-one correspondence with the information of the abnormal state, and the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 according to the display data are for each type of the information of the abnormal state. It is different. Further, display data corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state information is also present, and the display data is different from the display data corresponding to the abnormal state information. Therefore, when there is no abnormal state information, the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 become display contents different from those in the case where the abnormal state information exists.

  On the other hand, the display contents of the display corresponding to the information of the abnormal state in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display contents of the display corresponding to the absence of the information of the abnormal state are the third and the fourth. The display contents in the case of displaying the management result of the game history on the 4 alarm display devices 203 and 204 and the display contents of the setting values on the fourth alarm display device 204 overlap. On the other hand, when displaying the management result of the game history, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In the state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state and the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state, and when displaying an abnormality, the first and second notification display devices Since 201 and 202 are in the non-display state and the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in the display state, even if the display contents overlap as described above, it corresponds to any situation. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to grasp whether it is a display.

  Thereafter, display control of the third notification display device 203 is performed in accordance with the display data read in step S3407 (step S3408), and display control of the fourth notification display device 204 is performed (step S3409). In this case, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification may be displayed regardless of whether the display corresponds to the abnormal state information or the display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state information. None of the display devices 204 is in the non-display state (that is, it is not in the all-off state), and is in some display state.

  After that, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as the value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3410).

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the configuration in which the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Be done. Thus, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing display corresponding to the abnormal state.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed by the first to fourth informing displays 201 to 204 when the abnormal state does not occur in the pachinko machine 10, in the first to fourth informing displays 201 to 204 A display corresponding to the occurrence of an abnormal state is performed. As a result, by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10.

  The display period corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 in the period when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is distinguished from the period of being Thereby, any display is performed in the said 1st-4th notification display devices 201-204 by grasping | ascertaining the condition in which the display is performed in the 1st-4th notification display devices 201-204. It is possible to identify the

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification are different from the display mode in the case where the management result of the game history is displayed. Display control. Thus, by grasping the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is specified which display is being performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

  A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. As a result, it is possible to perform various displays as the display corresponding to the management result of the game history. In addition, the presence of the plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 greatly increases the display mode depending on whether the game history management result is displayed or the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to make a difference.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 which are not in the non-display state when the game history management result is displayed, are in the non-display state. Thereby, only by confirming whether the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible to clearly specify which one of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is being performed.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in the display state, and the display contents are the third when the management result of the game history is displayed. , And the display contents that can be displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. As described above, by making the display contents in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 overlap, when the management result of the game history is displayed, the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. It is possible to give no restriction to each display content when it is performed. In addition, even if the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 can overlap in this manner, the first, second, and third display can be performed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. (2) Since the notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In addition, when the start operation of an abnormal display is performed in the condition where the information of the abnormal state is not memorize | stored in the abnormal display area 211, the information of an abnormal state in the display apparatuses 201-204 for the 1st-4th alert at that time May be configured to be displayed corresponding to the fact that is not stored.

Fourteenth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the management output process according to the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63.

  First, it is judged whether "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the history information is to be stored in the history memory 117. In the present embodiment, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA is the management start reference When the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value without storing history information in the history memory 117 until the number corresponding to the value is reached or more. Storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before shipping, and at that time, the game ball is kept in each ball entry portion and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, the history memory 117 is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the result of ball entry and the like at the time of the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3501, "7" is set in the start time management counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3502). The start time management counter is a state in which the detection state of the game ball is specified for which one of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a when the management start flag is not set to "1". It is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the start time management counter (step S3503). Specifically, when the value of the start time management counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is "1" or not. If the value of the start time management counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is "1" or not, and the start time management If the value of the counter is "5" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the start management counter is If it is "4" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is judged whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, and the value of the start time management counter is "3" and the first If it corresponds to the operation opening detection sensor 46a, the fifth output flag It is determined whether "1" is set, and when the value of the start time management counter is "2" and corresponds to the second operation port detection sensor 47a, "1" is set in the sixth output flag If the value of the start time management counter is "1" and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the seventh output flag. . As described above, “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entering detection process (FIG. 15).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the start time management counter is cleared to "0" (step S3504). Thereafter, the value of the discharge number counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3505). The number-of-discharges counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in the main CPU 63 in a situation where the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is not set to “1”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the discharged number counter is equal to or more than the management start reference value (step S3506). Although the management start reference value is set to "300", it is not limited to this, and may be a number smaller than "300", or may be a number larger than "300". .

  If a negative determination is made in step S3503, or if a negative determination is made in step S3506, the value of the start management counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start time management counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S3508). If a negative determination is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and if a positive determination is made in step S3508, the present management output process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the discharged number counter of the main RAM 65 is equal to or more than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), "1" is set to the management start flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3509). Thereafter, the management process is executed (step S3510). Also, when the management start flag is set to “1” and a positive determination is made in step S3501, the management process is executed (step S3510). The processing content of the management process is the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA is managed. The total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA is equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value without storing history information in the history memory 117 until the number corresponding to the start reference value is reached. In this case, storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before shipping, and at that time, the game ball is kept in each ball entry portion and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, the history memory 117 is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the result of ball entry and the like at the time of the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

  Here, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started as described above, until the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, In the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the memory 117, it is not possible to calculate the management result of the game history during that time. Therefore, in such a situation, display corresponding to the situation may be performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. For example, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, all display segments may be set to be in the light emitting state. The display content is not displayed either when displaying the management result of the gaming history or when displaying that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, which is a changeable state. By checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify whether or not the history information is not stored as described above.

  It should be noted that the setting mode of the information of the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is different depending on whether or not it becomes a changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts It may be configured to FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the main processing in the other form executed by the main CPU 63. In steps S3601 to S3609, the same processes as steps S101 to S109 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed, and in steps S3611 to S3620, the main processes in the first embodiment (FIG. The same processing as step S110 to step S119 of 9) is executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3610), and the processing of step S3620 is performed and then the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is executed. Is set to "1" (step S3621). According to the configuration, the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 when the process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the value becomes equal to or higher than the management start reference value, and when processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the pachinko machine 10 is The history information is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the number of game balls discharged after the start of supply of the operation power. As a result, in a situation where there is a high possibility that the operation check does not correspond to the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to manage the game history immediately after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts.

  In addition, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. Instead of the non-configuration, an area for storing history information may be provided separately from the history memory 117 until the total number of gaming balls reaches the management start reference value or more. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the situation.

  In addition, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. A condition may be added to the case where the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 as a condition under which no condition occurs. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the history information is already stored in the history memory 117, the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA is the management start reference The history information is stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning regardless of whether the value is equal to or more than the value.

  In addition, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition to or in place of the configuration, when an abnormal state such as a radio wave detection abnormality or a vibration detection abnormality occurs, history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 until the abnormal state is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for an event that occurs in an abnormal state.

  In addition, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. The history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 when the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is opened in addition to or in place of the non-configuration. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for an event that occurs in a situation in which the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is opened.

The fifteenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution subject of the process of managing the game history is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  Although the management IC 66 is provided in the MPU 62 in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided in the MPU 62 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, processing for managing the game history is executed by the main CPU 63 instead of providing the management IC 66. Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 distinguishes between specific control and non-specific control and executes various controls. Specifically, control relating to management of the game history is nonspecific control, and control other than nonspecific control including control for advancing the game based on the game operation by the player is specific control.

  More specifically, the control according to the main process (FIG. 9) executed when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started is included in the specific control. In the present embodiment, among the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment, the processing for recognition (step S111), the processing for data output (step S112), and the processing for outputting the set value update signal (step S119) Not run. Further, even in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed so as to interrupt the processes of step S113 to step S116 in the main process (FIG. 9), but various processes of the timer interrupt process Among them, processes other than the management process described later are all included in the specific control. Further, part of the management process is also included in the specific control.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for describing a setting mode of programs and data in the main ROM 64. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 67, the control executed by main CPU 63 is differentiated between the specific control and the non-specific control, and as shown in FIG. The address of the area where the data and the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored is clearly distinguished.

  Specifically, programs for specific control are collectively stored in the area of each successive address within the range of the addresses X (1) to X (k + 2). In addition, addresses X (k + 3) to X (k + 5) following addresses X (1) to X (k + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which data are not stored, and address X Data for specific control is collected and stored in the area of each successive address in the range of k + 6) to X (m + 2). Also, addresses X (m + 3) to X (m + 5) following addresses X (k + 6) to X (m + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which data are not stored, and address X (m Programs for non-specific control are stored collectively in the area of each successive address in the range of m + 6) to X (n + 2). In addition, addresses X (n + 3) to X (n + 5) following addresses X (m + 6) to X (n + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which data are not stored. Data for non-specific control are stored collectively in the area of each successive address in the range of n + 6) to X (p + 2). The relationship between the program and data as described above and the address is set in both the physical address in the main ROM 64 and the logical address on the memory map recognized in the main CPU 63.

  As described above, the program for specific control and the data for specific control, and the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are independent of the execution order of the process for executing the corresponding control, For example, when only a program for specific control and data for specific control are checked by storing in an area of an address of a different range, an address where the program for specific control and the data for specific control are stored Only the area of the range needs to be checked. For example, when only the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are checked, an address at which the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are stored You only need to check the area of the range. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently carry out an operation in the case where programs and data are checked separately for specific control and non-specific control. Moreover, it becomes possible to perform efficiently the task in the case of distinguishing and modifying a program and data by specific control and non-specific control in connection with it.

  Any data is stored between the address range of the area where the program for specific control and data for specific control is stored, and the address range of the area where the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are stored By setting the address range of the unused area which is not used, it becomes easy to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control at the time of check work.

  In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, the program and data are stored in the area of the address of different range regardless of the execution order of the process for executing the corresponding control. By doing this, it is possible to efficiently carry out the work in the case of separately checking the program and the data. In addition, the address range of the unused area in which no data is stored is set between the address range of the area in which the program is stored and the address range of the area in which the data is stored. The boundary between the address range and the data address range can be easily grasped in the checking operation.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for describing a setting mode of each area in the main RAM 65. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68, the work area 221 for specific control and the specific control are also performed in the main RAM 65 in correspondence with the control executed by the main CPU 63 being distinguished between the specific control and the non-specific control. The address range of the stack area 222 for the second embodiment is clearly distinguished from the address range of the work area 223 for the nonspecific control and the address range of the stack area 224 for the nonspecific control.

  Specifically, the area of each successive address within the range of the addresses Y (1) to Y (r + 2) is set as the work area 221 for specific control. Also, the addresses Y (r + 3) to Y (r + 5) following the addresses Y (1) to Y (r + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and the addresses Y (r + 6) to Y (s + 2) are subsequently followed. The area of each successive address within the range of) is set as a stack area 222 for specific control. In addition, addresses Y (s + 3) to Y (s + 5) following addresses Y (r + 6) to Y (s + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and addresses Y (s + 6) to Y (t + 2) are subsequently followed. The area of each successive address within the range of) is set as a work area 223 for non-specific control. Also, addresses Y (t + 3) to Y (t + 5) following addresses Y (s + 6) to Y (t + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and addresses Y (t + 6) to Y (u + 2) are subsequently followed. The area of each successive address in the range of) is set as a stack area 224 for nonspecific control. The relationship between each area and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 65 and the logical address on the memory map recognized in the main CPU 63.

  As described above, when the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control are separately set, the main CPU 63 executes the specific control and the non-specific control. Thus, different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when performing various operations and the like. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to generate an event that the information of the main RAM 65 required in the other is erased when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed. Incidentally, at the time of writing information to the work areas 221 and 223 and reading information from the work areas 221 and 223, a load instruction is performed by the main CPU 63.

  Since the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are separately set, the main side CPU 63 performs main and non-specific control in particular. In the case of saving the information stored in the register of the side CPU 63 and in the case of storing the information of the return address in the program, different areas of the main side RAM 65 are used. Thus, when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is being executed, the information stored in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved, and when the information of the return address on the program is stored, it is used in the other It is possible to make it difficult to generate an event that the information to be deleted is erased. Incidentally, when writing information in the stack areas 222 and 224, a push instruction is issued by the main CPU 63, and when reading information from the stack areas 222 and 224, a pop instruction is issued by the main CPU 63. Further, when reading information from the stack areas 222 and 224, the order of writing to the stack areas 222 and 224 is to be read first from later information.

  Here, when the main CPU 63 executes the processing corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. It is possible to read information from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224. Information can not be written to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control from being erroneously erased in the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed.

  When the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to nonspecific control, the main CPU 63 can write information in the nonspecific control work area 223 and nonspecific control stack area 224. In addition, it is possible to read information from the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to nonspecific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, It is not possible to write information to the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control from being erroneously erased while the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being performed.

  Although backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the backup power is the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, non-specific control It is supplied to all of the work area 223 for non-specification and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 It is stored as long as backup power is supplied later.

  Next, timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, in a cycle of 4 milliseconds) in a state where the processes of step S113 to step S116 are performed in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment. The program corresponding to the timer interrupt process is set in the program for specific control.

  In steps S3701 to S3718, the same processes as steps S301 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. At step S3719 in the timer interrupt process, a management process is executed. When executing the management process, a program of a subroutine corresponding to the management process set in the program for specific control is executed. However, when executing the program of the subroutine, after execution of the management process The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process in step (1) is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction. Then, when the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing management processing. The processes of steps S3801 to S3805 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt disable is set (step S3801). In this way, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to specific control, is prevented from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH PSW”, the information on the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction (step S3802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, and an input / output instruction. By saving the information of such a flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution processing is started, the information of the flag register of the state before changing after calling of the subroutine or the subroutine is started. It is possible to evacuate in the stack area 222 for specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

  Thereafter, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program is read out to start the management execution process (step S3803). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  When returning to the program for management processing after execution of the management execution processing, the main CPU 63 receives information on the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 by the pop instruction as "POP PSW". Is returned to the flag register of (step S3804). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S3802 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, the setting of interrupt permission is performed (step S3805). This enables new execution of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing management execution processing. The processes of steps S3901 to S3915 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (u + 2)" by the load instruction (step S3901). The stack pointer is an area in which information of an address for specifying the storage area to which information is to be written by a push instruction in the stack areas 222 and 224 is specified by the main CPU 63. Whenever the push instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order, and every time the pop instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is the write object of the previous order The information of the address of the storage area to be When the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control, and the information to be stored is added each time The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control. Therefore, in step S3901, the information of the last address in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is set in the stack pointer. As described above, the storage of information from the storage area of the last address to the storage area of the first address is the same as in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Incidentally, for any of the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, when an additional push instruction is executed although information is set in all storage areas, The entire area of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” on the assumption that an abnormality has occurred in storage processing. This makes it possible to prevent the game from proceeding as it is despite the occurrence of an abnormality in the memory processing.

  After that, the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for nonspecific control by the load instruction as “LD (_WABUF), WA” (step S 3902). In addition, as “LD (_BCBUF), BC”, the information on the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for nonspecific control by the load instruction (step S3903). Further, as “LD (_DEBUF), DE”, the load instruction saves the information of the DE register of the main CPU 63 in the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3904). Also, as “LD (_HLBUF), HL”, the load instruction saves the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the HL buffer set in the work area 223 for nonspecific control (step S3905). Further, as “LD (_IXBUF), IX”, the load instruction saves the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 into the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3906). Also, as “LD (_IYBUF), IY”, the load instruction saves the information of the IY register of the main CPU 63 to the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for nonspecific control (step S3907).

  In the registers of the main CPU 63, various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers exist in addition to the flag registers described above. In this case, in steps S3902 to S3907, information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register which is a part of these various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. Are evacuated to the corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for nonspecific control. The amount of information in each of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is 2 bytes.

  These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in the check processing (step S3908) corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers in the work area 223 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the check process (step S3908), non-specific control is performed on the information of these registers used in the specific control It is possible to evacuate before the Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten in non-specific control, when the non-specific control is ended, the status of these registers is restored by restoring the information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 to these registers. It is possible to return to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  Also, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA to be used in the check process corresponding to non-specific control By selectively saving the information of the register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register in the non-specific control work area 223, the register information is saved in the non-specific control work area 223 It is possible to reduce the capacity secured to make the Therefore, it is possible to save the information of the register as described above while securing a large capacity of the non-specific control work area 223 which can be used in the check process. Of course, among various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers in the main CPU 63, non-specific control is supported for registers other than WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register. The information set before the start of the process is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed.

  In addition, the capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224 can be reduced accordingly by saving the register information in the non-specific control stack area 224 instead of the non-specific control stack area 224. It becomes possible. Also, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the writing order of the information is read first from the later information as described above, so the reading order of the information may be shifted due to some sort of noise. If this happens, all subsequent read order information will be restored to different registers. The occurrence probability of such an event becomes higher as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the non-specific control work area 223, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned event even if there is much information to be saved. .

  After the processes of steps S3902 to S3907 are performed, a check process is performed (step S3908). When executing check processing, a program of a subroutine corresponding to the check processing set in the non-specific control program is executed, but when executing the program of the subroutine, management after execution of the check processing Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by the push instruction. Then, when the check processing is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the management execution processing indicated by the return address. Details of the check process will be described later.

  After executing the check processing, Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address at the return to the specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD SP, Y (r + α)" (step S3909) ). The address Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  The amount of information stored in the specific control stack area 222 is always constant immediately before the subroutine of the management execution process is executed in step S3803 of the management process (FIG. 70), and accordingly, the main Information on the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control includes, for example, information on the return address of the management process (FIG. 70) after the management execution process (FIG. 71) is completed, and management process (FIG. Information on the return address of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) after completion of FIG. 70) can be mentioned. The certain information of the stack pointer is Y (r + α). Therefore, when the check process which is a process corresponding to non-specific control ends and returns to the process corresponding to specific control, Y (r + α) which is the fixed information is set in the stack pointer of main CPU 63. This makes it possible to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is started. By setting the fixed information in the stack pointer in this way and returning the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the process corresponding to the non-specific control It is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 before starting the process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and it is not necessary to secure the area for the evacuation in the main RAM 65.

  After that, the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten on the WA register of the main CPU 63 as “LD WA, (_WABUF)” (step S3910). Further, as “LD BC, (_BCBUF)”, the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3911). Further, the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 as “LD DE, (_DEBUF)” (step S3912). Further, the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 as “LD HL, (_HLBUF)” (step S3913). Further, as “LD IX, (_IXBUF)”, the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3914). Also, as “LD IY, (_IYBUF)”, the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3915). By executing the processing of step S3910 to step S3915, processing corresponding to non-specific control of each information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of main side CPU 63 is started. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the event.

  Here, when the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the main RAM 65 when the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed. . As a result, there is no need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222.

  In addition, when the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 is the process corresponding to non-specific control after returning to the process corresponding to specific control. This information is not used when it is restarted. That is, the information necessary for a plurality of processing cycles of the process corresponding to non-specific control executed with the process corresponding to the specific control in between is the work area 223 for non-specific control or the stack area for non-specific control It is stored in 224 and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register of the main CPU 63 and various registers is not saved in the main RAM 65 when the processing corresponding to the nonspecific control is executed, the processing corresponding to the nonspecific control is performed. There is no problem with

  Next, check processing executed by calling a program of a subroutine in step S3908 will be described. In the check process, a process for collecting game history information, a process for deriving a game history management result, and a process for notifying the management result are executed. That is, the process for collecting the game history information, the process for deriving the game history management result, and the process for notifying the management result are executed as the process corresponding to the nonspecific control.

  Prior to the description of the check process, the contents of the various areas 231 to 234 of the non-specific control work area 223 used to manage the game history will be described. FIG. 72 is an explanatory view for explaining the various areas 231 to 234 of the work area 223 for nonspecific control used to manage the game history.

  In the work area 223 for non-specific control, a normal counter area 231, an opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and a high frequency support mode counter area 233 are provided. In each of these areas 231 to 233, general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a, special power winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, first operation counters 231c, 232c, 233c, second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and Out counters 231e, 232e and 233e are provided. The general winning counters 231a, 232a and 233a are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special power pay counters 231b, 232b, and 233b are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the special power pay device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counters 231c, 232c, and 233c are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The second operation counters 231d, 232d, and 233d are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The out counters 231e, 232e and 233e are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start timing.

  The counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are the ball entry portions 24a, 24b, 24b, and 24c, which are targets in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode It is utilized in order to measure the number of game balls which entered 31-34. The counters 232a to 232e of the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232 enter the ball receiving portions 24a and 31 to be targets in the opening / closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. It is used to measure the number of balls that have been played. The counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to be targeted in the state in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the high frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls that have entered a ball.

  It should be noted that the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is not to be measured because the game ball enters the ball by cleaning the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34 with the front door frame 14 open. It is for excluding the number of ball entering in the case of being carried out from measurement object. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state may be measured as in the case in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

  In the work area 223 for nonspecific control, in addition to the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233, an operation result storage area 234 is provided. The calculation result storage area 234 is an area for storing information on the management result of the game history calculated using the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233. . The information of the management result of the game history stored in the calculation result storage area 234 is stored and held until the information of the management result of the game history is newly calculated and the newly calculated information is overwritten.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by calling a subroutine program in step S3908. The processes of steps S4001 to S4008 in the check process, including the process of a subroutine, are executed by the main CPU 63 using the nonspecific control program and the nonspecific control data. Further, when executing the processing of the subroutine, the information of the return address after execution of the processing of the subroutine is written in the storage area corresponding to the value of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control. At the same time, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the information on the address of the storage area to be stored in the next order. Also, when the processing of the subroutine is completed, the information of the return address is read from the storage area corresponding to the value of the previous order with respect to the value of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 and the information of the return address is corresponded. While returning to the program, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the information of the address of the storage area from which the information of the return address is read.

  In the check process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S4001: YES), the normal ball entry management process (step S4004), the ball entry management process in the open / close execution mode (step S4005) and the high frequency The result calculation process (step S4007) and the display process (step S4008) to be described later are executed without executing any of the ball entering management process (step S4006) in the support mode. Since the game area PA is formed by the space divided back and forth by the back of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front of the game board 24, the front door frame 14 is opened. Even if the game area PA is opened forward and the game ball is fired toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball can not flow down the game area PA normally. In addition, when game ball entry to ball entry section 24a, 31-34 occurs when front door frame 14 is in the open state, the manager of the game hall because of the elimination of maintenance and trouble This is a case where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and the game ball enters due to maintenance or the like. Since entering of such a game ball is not entry of the game ball in the regular game execution situation, it is not necessary to manage entry of such a game ball. Therefore, in the check process, as described above, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, any process of steps S4004 to S4006 is not executed.

  If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is neither the open / close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode (steps S4001 to S4003: NO), the normal ball entry management process is executed (step S4004). When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the open / close execution mode (step S4001: NO, step S4002: YES), the ball entry management process in the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4005). When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the high frequency support mode (step S4001: NO, step S4003: YES), the ball entry management process in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4006).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the normal ball entering management process in step S4004.

  When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a (step S4101: YES), that is, the signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level When it is confirmed that it has been replaced, when it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a (step S4103: YES), that is, a signal received from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a When it is confirmed that the game player has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, or when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a (step S4105: YES), that is, the third prize opening If it is confirmed that the signal received from the detection sensor 44a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the general input for general use is The value of the counter 231a is incremented by 1 (step S4102, step S4104, step S4106).

  If the ball entering management process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 232a for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the processing corresponding to step S4102, step S4104 and step S4106. In the case of the ball management process, the value of the general winning counter 233a for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one as the process corresponding to the steps S4102, S4104 and S4106. The detection results of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are also monitored in the ball entering detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control. A process for causing the game balls corresponding to the number of general winning openings 31 to be paid out when it is determined that one game ball is detected in any of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a. Run.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special charge detection sensor 45a (step S4107: YES), it is confirmed that the signal received from the special charge detection sensor 45a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level In the case, the value of the special power pay counter 231b for normal use is incremented by 1 (step S4108).

  If the ball entering management process is in the open / close execution mode, the value corresponding to the special power winning counter 232b for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4108. If the ball entry management process is in the high frequency support mode As a process corresponding to step S4108, 1 is added to the value of the special power pay counter 233b for the high frequency support mode. The detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is also monitored in the entering detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, and the special power detection sensor 45a If it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a process is executed to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the special power prize device 32 and a process to specify an end trigger of the round game.

  When it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a (step S4109: YES), that is, the signal received from the first operation opening detection sensor 46a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level If it is confirmed that the replacement has been made, the value of the normal first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1 (step S4110).

  If the ball entering management process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value corresponding to step S4110 is added to the value of the first operation counter 232c for the opening / closing execution mode, and the ball entry management processing in the high frequency support mode For example, as a process corresponding to step S4110, the value of the first operation counter 233c for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one. The detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is also monitored in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, and the first operation port detection sensor When it is determined that one game ball is detected in 46a, processing for making the number of game balls corresponding to the first operation opening 33 be paid out and acquisition of reservation information for special drawing Execute processing to identify the trigger.

  When it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a (step S4111: YES), that is, the signal received from the second operation opening detection sensor 47a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level If it is confirmed that it has been replaced, the value of the second operation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by 1 (step S4112).

  If the ball entering management process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 232d for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4112, and the ball entering management processing in the high frequency support mode For example, as a process corresponding to step S4112, the value of the second operation counter 233d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one. The detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is also monitored in the ball entering detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) executed as processing corresponding to the specific control, and the second operation port detection sensor When it is determined that one game ball is detected in 47a, processing for making the number of game balls corresponding to the second operation opening 34 be paid out and acquisition of reservation information for special drawing Execute processing to identify the trigger.

  If it is determined that one gaming ball has been detected by the out port detection sensor 48a (step S4113: YES), that is, the signal received from the out port detection sensor 48a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level If confirmed, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1 (step S4114).

  If the ball entering management process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the out counter 232e for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4114. If the ball entry management processing in the high frequency support mode is performed, the step As a process corresponding to S4114, the value of the out counter 233e for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one. Further, in the entering detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is not monitored.

  As described above, by executing the processing of steps S4004 to S4006, the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 is measured using the general winning counters 231a, 232a and 233a, and the special electric winning device 32 The number of ball entry to the game ball is measured using the special power prize counter 231b, 232b, and 233b, and the number of ball entry to the first operation port 33 uses the first operation counter 231c, 232c, and 233c. The number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 is measured using the second operation counters 231 d, 232 d and 233 d, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24 a is the out counter 231 e, It measures using 232e and 233e. Thereby, it becomes possible for main side CPU63 to grasp ball entering history to each ball entering part 24a and 31-34. In addition, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are separately provided, so that neither the open / close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is available. It is possible to distinguish the situation in the opening / closing execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode, and to grasp the ball entering history to the ball entering sections 24a, 31 to 34 by the main CPU 63.

  Returning to the description of the check process (FIG. 73), when an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, the process of step S4004 is performed, the process of step S4005 is performed, or the process of step S4006 is performed, the step In step S4007, result calculation processing is performed, and in step S4008, display processing is performed.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process of step S4007.

  First, it is determined whether "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step S4201). The management start flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not collection of gaming histories for calculating gaming history management results should be performed. In the present embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the production of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the game discharged from the game area PA Until the total number of balls reaches the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA without executing the collection of the game history for calculating the management result of the game history When the number of players corresponding to the management start reference value becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, collection of the game history for calculating the management result of the game history is executed. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before shipping, and at that time, the game ball is kept in each ball entry portion and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, the game for calculating the management result of the game history until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value By not executing the collection of the history, it is possible to prevent the ball entry result at the time of the operation check as described above from being collected as the game history for calculating the management result of the game history. Become.

  Here, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the production of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the value of the management start flag is “0”. It has become. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 Is also "0". On the other hand, when the value of the management start flag is "1", the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and thereafter, the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is supplied with backup power to the main RAM 65. The value of the management start flag remains at “1” when the supply of is started. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 Also, the state before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is maintained. With the above configuration, when the value of the management start flag is "0", the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, Also, the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 also become “0”.

  Incidentally, when the clear process of the main RAM 65 is executed in step S105 or step S117 in the main process (FIG. 9), the target of the clear process is the work area 221 for specific control and the stack for specific control The area 222, the work area 223 for nonspecific control, and the stack area 224 for nonspecific control are excluded from the targets of the clearing process. As a result, the game hall manager can not intentionally clear the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 to "0".

  Further, the main CPU 63 confirms whether or not an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) described later, and generates an abnormality. When it is confirmed, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be cleared to "0". As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224, initialization becomes possible. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the non-specific control work area 223 in the configuration, the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to “0” without clearing the non-specific control stack area 224 to “0”. When an abnormality occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the non-specific control stack area 224 is cleared to "0" without clearing the non-specific control work area 223 to "0". It is also good. Further, even if an abnormality occurs in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224, the calculation result storage area 234 may be excluded from the target of "0" clear.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 The total number is calculated by totaling all the values of the counters 233a to 233e (step S4202). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is a number larger than “300” which is the management start reference value (step S 4203).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, "1" is set in the management start flag of the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4204). Further, the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4205). Thereby, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA is the management start reference value All the information of the game history collected until it becomes more than the number corresponding to will be deleted. Therefore, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts, until the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value, collection of gaming history for calculating the management result of the gaming history It is possible to prevent the execution of

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, calculation processing of the total number is executed as in step S4202 (step S4206). That is, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 The total number is calculated by totaling all. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is equal to or greater than the calculation reference number “6000” (step S4207).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, arithmetic processing of various parameters is executed (step S4208). Specifically, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are K61 to K65, and the values of the various counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232 are K71 to K75. Assuming that the values of the various counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 are K81 to K85, the following 61st to 68th parameters are calculated.
・ The 61st parameter: Total payout number of game balls (“K 61 + K 71 + K 81” × “number of prize balls for winning on general winning opening 31” + “K 62 + K 72 + K 82” x “number of prize balls for winning on special electric prize device 32” + “K 63 + K 73 + K 83 × “number of prize balls for winning in the first operation opening 33” + “K 64 + K 74 + K 84” × “number of prize balls for winning in the second operation opening 34” / total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA Ratio of K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85: Parameter 62: Total payout number of game balls in normal time × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33” + K 64 × Number of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34) / Total number of gaming balls discharged from the skill area PA at normal time (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 Percentage of) · 63rd parameter: Total payout number of gaming balls in opening / closing execution mode (K 71 × "number of prize balls for winning on general winning opening 31" + K 72 × "number of winning balls for winning on special electric winning device 32" + K 73 × “number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33” + K 74 × “number of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34” / total of gaming balls discharged from the skill area PA in the opening / closing execution mode The ratio of the number (K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75) · The 64th parameter: The total payout number of game balls in high frequency support mode (K 8 X "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K 82 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special power prize device 32" + K 83 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33" + K 84 x "2nd Number of prize balls for winning in the operation opening 34)) / ratio of total number (K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) of gaming balls discharged from the skill area PA at the time of high frequency support mode · 65th parameter: game balls to the general winning opening 31 Total number of ball entry (K61 + K71 + K81) / Total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K71 + K72 + K72 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K84 + K85 + K85 + K85 + K85 + K85 + K84 + K85) Total number of gaming balls discharged from the area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) · 67th parameter: Number of prize balls for winning in) / total payout number of gaming balls ("K61 + K71 + K81" x "number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + "K62 + K72 + K82" x "prize balls for winning in special electric prize device 32 Number “+” K63 + K 73 + K 83 × “number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33” + “K 64 + K 74 + K 84” × “number of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34” 68th parameter Ta: "K62 + K72 + K82" × "number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32" / total payout number of gaming balls ("K61 + K71 + K81" × "number of winning balls for general prize hole 31" + "K62 + K72 + K82" × "× Number of prize balls for winning on special electric power winning device 32 "+" K63 + K73 + K83 "x" Number of prize balls for winning on first operation port 33 "+" K64 + K 74 + K84 "x" Number of prize balls for winning in second operation port 34 " After that, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated in step S4208 are overwritten in the calculation result storage area 234 (step S4209). In this case, the 61st to 68th parameters of the calculation result in the previous processing cycle which are already stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are erased. Even if the operation power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65. Therefore, to the pachinko machine 10 if the backup power is supplied. Even immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power, the calculation result storage area 234 stores information of the 61st to 68th parameters calculated before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  Thereafter, the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4210). This makes it possible to temporarily delete the information on the game history at that time, with the 61st to 68th parameters being calculated.

  If the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the value obtained by subtracting the management start reference value from the calculation reference number immediately after the management start flag is set to “1”, step S4208 to S4208 The process of step S4210 may be executed, and thereafter, the process of step S4208 to step S4210 may be executed when the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or greater than the calculation reference number.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the display process of step S4008 in the check process (FIG. 73).

  First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is decremented by 1 (step S4301). The update timing counter is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63 that it is the timing to update the display contents of the management result of the game history in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The main CPU 63 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to notify the calculation result of the sixty-first to the sixty-eighth parameters. In this case, in the first notification display device 69a, information corresponding to the type of the parameter to be notified is displayed. Further, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, a number corresponding to the tenth digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and a number corresponding to the first digit is the third notification display It is displayed on the device 69c. Then, in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display corresponding to the calculation result of the above-mentioned sixty-first to sixty-eighth parameters is sequentially switched in accordance with the predetermined order, and the display object is the last one. After the calculation result of the 68th parameter is displayed, the calculation result of the 61st parameter to be displayed in the first order is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds.

  Here, the calculation cycle of the above-described sixty-first to sixty-eighth parameters in the main CPU 63 is 60 minutes at the shortest. On the other hand, the number of the 61st to 68th parameters is eight, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Therefore, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated by the main CPU 63 are to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c at least once.

  When the process of step S4301 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after 1 subtraction is "0". It is determined whether it is time to perform (step S4302). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4302, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4303). Then, when the value of the display object counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value “7” (step S4304: YES), the value of the display object counter is cleared to “0” (step S4305).

  The display target counter is a counter for specifying the types of parameters to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c by the main CPU 63. The 61st to 68th parameters and the possible values of the display target counter of "0" to "7" correspond one to one. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the 61st parameter which is the first display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is "7". In this case, the 68th parameter which is the last display object is the display object of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4304, or if the process of step S4305 is performed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. Control is performed (step S4306). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read out from the calculation result storage area 234, and the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. A number corresponding to the first digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S4307).

  Here, a display IC is provided to correspond to each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In step S4306, the main CPU 63 outputs display data to the display IC corresponding to the first notification display device 69a, and in step S4307, the main CPU 63 displays the display IC corresponding to the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification Display data is output to each of the display ICs corresponding to the display device 69c. These display ICs are capable of storing and holding display data when operating power is supplied, and the display contents corresponding to the stored display data are continuously transmitted to the corresponding notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display. Then, when the display data is changed by the main CPU 63, the display of the notification display devices 69a to 69c is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Thus, even after the management execution process (FIG. 71) corresponding to non-specific control ends and returns to the process corresponding to specific control, it is set in the execution status of the process corresponding to non-specific control The display corresponding to the display data is continued at the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set as the value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the non-specific control work area 223 (step S4308).

  As described above, when the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is started by executing the display processing, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Be done. The display of the management result of the game history is performed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and the main control device 60 is operated from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. It takes place regardless of whether it is visible or not. As described above, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game status or the state of the pachinko machine 10, thereby the first to third notification display devices 69a. It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of ~ 69c.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. The work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control use the program for specific control and the data for specific control to execute processing corresponding to specific control by the main CPU 63 While the information storage and information readout are possible, the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data. In the case where reading of information is possible, storage of information is impossible. The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control can store information and read information when the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63. On the other hand, when the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed by the main CPU 63, reading of the information is possible but storing of the information is impossible. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control It becomes possible to treat 224 as a dedicated storage area of processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, the storage destination of the information in the main RAM 65 can be clearly differentiated between the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed.

  The process corresponding to the specific control includes a process for controlling the progress of the game, and the process corresponding to the non-specific control includes a process for managing a game history. As described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as storage areas dedicated to processing corresponding to specific control, and also for non-specific control work area 223 and non-specific control. The stack area 224 is treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Thereby, when executing the process for controlling the progress of the game, information used in the process for managing the game history, for example, the counter area 231 for normal use, the counter area 232 for open / close execution mode, high frequency support mode It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 from being rewritten.

  The main RAM 65 is provided with a normal counter area 231 in which information for managing the game history is stored, an opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and an operation result storage area 234. Thereby, the main CPU 63 can complete the process for managing the game history. In addition, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized alteration to information on game history information and various parameters calculated using the game history information.

  When the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed from the situation where the process corresponding to specific control is executed, or when the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, various types of main CPU 63 The register information is saved in the main RAM 65. Thereby, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, information stored in various registers of the main CPU 63 can be prevented from being rewritten when the processing corresponding to specific control is executed. Become. Further, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is ended or after the end, the information saved in the main side RAM 65 is restored to various registers of the main side CPU 63. Thus, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed, processing corresponding to specific control can be executed from the state of various registers of the main CPU 63 before execution of processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Become.

  When the process corresponding to the specific control is executed, the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is executed or the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is executed, the various registers of the main CPU 63 The information of some of the registers is saved in the main RAM 65. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to save the information of the register of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65.

  When the process corresponding to the specific control is executed, the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is executed or the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is executed, the various registers of the main CPU 63 The information of the register to be stored of information is saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the nonspecific control. Thereby, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed, it is possible to restart processing corresponding to specific control from the state of the register of main side CPU 63 before execution of processing corresponding to the non-specific control. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to save the information of the register of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65.

  When the process corresponding to non-specific control is started, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the WA register, the BC register of the main CPU 63, Each piece of information of the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is saved in the work area 223 for nonspecific control in the process corresponding to the nonspecific control. As a result, saving can be performed at a timing preferable for each information stored in various registers of the main CPU 63, and processing for saving information corresponds to processing corresponding to specific control and non-specific control. It becomes possible to distribute and execute the processing.

  The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, and an input / output instruction. In this case, the information of the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in the process corresponding to the specific control before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. As a result, it is possible to save information of the call of a subroutine corresponding to nonspecific control and the flag register of the state before changing after the start of the subroutine in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  The information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register is not saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 but is saved in the non-specific control work area 223. It is possible to reduce the capacity of the specific control stack area 224. In addition, when using the stack area 224 for nonspecific control, since the writing order of the information is read first from the later information, if the reading order of the information deviates due to some sort of noise etc. All subsequent read order information will be restored to different registers. The occurrence probability of such an event becomes higher as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the non-specific control work area 223, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned event even if there is much information to be saved. .

  The stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to the specific control is executed and the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is executed or when the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is executed The above information is a fixed information, and the information of the stack pointer is not saved in the main RAM 65 at the start of the process corresponding to the nonspecific control. As a result, since it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving the information of the stack pointer in the main RAM 65, the storage capacity of the main RAM 65 can be reduced accordingly. In addition, even when the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above, when the process corresponding to the specific control is performed, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is performed or the non-specific control is performed. Since the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is fixed when the corresponding process is executed, the process corresponding to non-specific control is performed even if the information on the stack pointer is not saved as described above. If it has ended, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  Although the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, it is limited to this Instead, the information of the flag register may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the nonspecific control. Further, although the configuration is such that the return of the information to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is performed in the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the present invention is not limited thereto. The configuration may be such that the return of the information to the flag register is performed in the process corresponding to the nonspecific control.

  In addition, after the processing corresponding to non-specific control of the information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of main side CPU 63 is started, the main processing is performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. The configuration is such that the information is saved in the side RAM 65. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The information of these registers may be saved in the main side RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when processing corresponding to non-specific control ends, the configuration is such that restoration of information to each register is performed by processing corresponding to non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the return of the information to the register is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

Sixteenth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing management processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S4401 to S4405 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt disable is set (step S4401). In this way, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to specific control, is prevented from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Is possible.

  After that, as “LD (_PSWBUF), PSW”, the load instruction saves the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control (step S4402). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, and an input / output instruction. By saving the information of such a flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution processing is started, the flag register of the state before the call of the subroutine or the change of the subroutine after the start of the subroutine is performed. It is possible to save information in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program is read out to start the management execution process (step S4403). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  If it returns to the program for management processing after execution of the management execution processing, it is saved as a "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" in the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control by the load instruction in step S4402. The information of the flag register is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S4404). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S4402 was previously performed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, the setting of interrupt permission is performed (step S4405). This enables new execution of the timer interrupt process.

  According to the above configuration, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 immediately before switching from the specific control to the non-specific control is saved not in the stack area 222 for the specific control but in the work area 221 for the specific control. This makes it possible to save the information of the flag register while suppressing the capacity of the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Although the PSW buffer in the specific control work area 221 is secured as a dedicated area, it is not limited to this, and may be a shared area in which other information may be written. That is, since it is not necessary to save the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control when the management process is not executed, the predetermined process is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control in the situation where the management process is not executed. In the case where arithmetic processing is performed, a shared area that is also used as a PSW buffer may be used. In this case, the shared area is surely used to save the information of the flag register when the management process is executed. Therefore, before the management process is executed as information other than the flag register information. It is necessary to be configured to write unnecessary information in the shared area.

Seventeenth Embodiment
The processing configuration of the management execution processing in this embodiment is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing management execution processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S4501 to S4515 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is used to start the nonspecific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction. Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address in step S4501 (step S4501).

  After that, as "PUSH WA", the push instruction is made to save the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control (step S4502). In this case, the information in the WA register is saved in the storage area corresponding to the fixed address set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S4501. Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written next in the next order.

  After that, the information of the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control by the push instruction as “PUSH BC” (step S4503). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written next in the next order.

  After that, as "PUSH DE", the push instruction is made to save the information of the DE register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control (step S4504). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written next in the next order.

  After that, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control by the push instruction as "PUSH HL" (step S4505). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written next in the next order.

  After that, the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control by the push instruction as "PUSH IX" (step S4506). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written next in the next order.

  After that, as “PUSH IY”, the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control S4507). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written next in the next order.

  After the processes of step S4502 to step S4507 are performed, a check process is performed (step S4508). When executing the check process, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of execution of the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after execution of the check process is the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control Write in the storage area corresponding to the information. Then, when the check processing is completed, the information for identifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the management execution processing indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

  Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (r + α)” is used to return to the specific control to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction. Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address in step S4509 (step S4509). The address Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as "POP IY", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control The IY register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4510). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Thereafter, as "POP IX", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control The IX register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4511). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  After that, as "POP HL", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control The HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S 4512). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Thereafter, as "POP DE", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control The DE register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4513). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Thereafter, as "POP BC", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control The BC register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4514). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  After that, as "POP WA", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control The WA register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4515). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  By executing the processing of step S4510 to step S4515, processing corresponding to non-specific control of each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main CPU 63 is started. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the event.

  In the registers of the main CPU 63, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers exist in addition to the flag register. In this case, in step S4502 to step S4507, each information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register which is a part of these various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. Are evacuated to the stack area 224 for nonspecific control. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4508) corresponding to the nonspecific control. By saving the information set in such registers in the stack area 224 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the check process (step S4508), non-specific control is performed on the information of these registers used for the specific control. It is possible to evacuate before the Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten in non-specific control, when non-specific control is ended, the state of these registers is restored by restoring the information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 to these registers. It is possible to return to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  Also, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the WA to be used in the check process corresponding to non-specific control By selectively saving the information of the register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control, information of the register in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is saved. It is possible to reduce the capacity secured to make the Therefore, it is possible to save the information of the register as described above while securing a large capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control that can be used in the check process.

Eighteenth Embodiment
The processing configuration of the management execution processing in this embodiment is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing management execution processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S4601 to S4605 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the nonspecific control program and the nonspecific control data.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is used to start the nonspecific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address in step S4601 (step S4601).

  After that, the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved to the ALL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction as “LD (_ALLBUF), ALL” (step S4602). Thereby, not only the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register used in the check processing corresponding to non-specific control but also all other registers The register information is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By thus saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is not necessary to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63.

  Here, the registers to be saved include flag registers. The information of the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 of the management process (FIG. 70), but the information of the flag register is saved in the work area 223 for nonspecific control in step S4602. Be done. As a result, there is no need to selectively save the information of the register of the main CPU 63 including the information of the flag register. Also, even if the information of the flag register is redundantly saved in this way, the main control CPU 63 is started from the special control stack area 222 in step S3804 of the management process (FIG. 70) after the end of the management execution process. Because the information is returned to the flag register of, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state immediately before the management execution process is executed. It becomes.

  Thereafter, check processing is executed (step S4603). When executing the check process, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of execution of the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after execution of the check process is the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control Write in the storage area corresponding to the information. Then, when the check processing is completed, the information for identifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the management execution processing indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

  Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (r + α)” is used to return to the specific control to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction. Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address in step S4604 (step S4604). The address Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as “LD ALL, (_ALLBUF)”, the information saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten on the registers corresponding to the respective main CPUs 63 by the load instruction (step S4605). This makes it possible to restore the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  According to the above configuration, the stack area for non-specific control is saved by saving the information of the register of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control work area 223 instead of saving the information to the non-specific control stack area 224. It is possible to keep the capacity of 224 small. In addition, when using the stack area 224 for nonspecific control, since the writing order of the information is read first from the later information, if the reading order of the information deviates due to some sort of noise etc. All subsequent read order information will be restored to different registers. The occurrence probability of such an event becomes higher as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the non-specific control work area 223, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned event even if there is much information to be saved. .

  Further, when the information in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for nonspecific control, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register used in the check process corresponding to nonspecific control The information of all the registers including not only the IX register and the IY register but also other registers are collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223. By thus saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is not necessary to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63.

  Although the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 by the process corresponding to the nonspecific control after the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is started, the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the information of all the registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when processing corresponding to non-specific control ends, the configuration is such that restoration of information to all registers is performed by processing corresponding to non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The restoration of the information may be performed in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

The Nineteenth Embodiment
The processing configuration of the management execution processing in this embodiment is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing management execution processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S4701 to S4706 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the nonspecific control program and the nonspecific control data.

  First, with the load instruction, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is saved in the SP buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control as "LD (_SPBUF), SP" (step S4701). As a result, the information on the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  After that, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is used to start the nonspecific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address in step S4702 (step S4702).

  Thereafter, as "PUSH ALL", the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is stored from the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control It is evacuated to a continuous storage area (step S4703). In this case, since the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 can not be stored in one storage area in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, as described above, the current state of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control A storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer and a storage area continuous from the storage area are set as a save destination of the information of the register. Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be the next writing target for the storage area where the last information is stored when saving the information of all the registers.

  Thereafter, check processing is executed (step S4704). When executing the check process, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of execution of the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after execution of the check process is the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control Write in the storage area corresponding to the information. Then, when the check processing is completed, the information for identifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the management execution processing indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

  Thereafter, as a "POP ALL", a storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control and information saved in a storage area contiguous from the storage area by a pop instruction. Are written over the registers corresponding to each of the main CPUs 63 (step S4705). This makes it possible to restore the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  After that, the information saved in the SP buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as “LD SP, (_SPBUF)” (step S4706). As a result, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  According to the above configuration, when the information in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control, the WA register, BC register, DE used in the check process which is the process corresponding to the nonspecific control The information of all the registers including not only the registers, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register but also the other registers are collectively saved in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control. By thus saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control, it is not necessary to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63.

  The information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for the non-specific control. As a result, even if the information on the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started may change, the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the specific control is performed. When returning to the corresponding processing, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  Although the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 by the process corresponding to the nonspecific control after the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is started, the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the information of all the registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when processing corresponding to non-specific control ends, the configuration is such that restoration of information to all registers is performed by processing corresponding to non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The restoration of the information may be performed in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

The Twentieth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of management processing and management execution processing is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing management processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S4801 to S4811 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), the interrupt disable is set (step S4801). In this way, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to specific control, is prevented from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH PSW”, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction (step S4802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, and an input / output instruction. By saving the information of such a flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution processing is started, the flag register of the state before the call of the subroutine or the change of the subroutine after the start of the subroutine is performed. It becomes possible to save information in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, as a load instruction, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” as “LD WA, 0” (step S 4803). Also, with the load instruction as “LD BC, 0”, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” (step S 4804). Also, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction as "LD DE, 0" (step S4805). Also, with the load instruction as "LD HL, 0", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" (step S4806). In addition, as a "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4807). In addition, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction as "LD IY, 0" (step S4808).

  In the registers of the main CPU 63, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers exist in addition to the flag register. In this case, in steps S4803 to S4808, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are a part of the various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are respectively selected. Clear "0". The WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4902) corresponding to the nonspecific control. By clearing "0" to such registers prior to execution of the management execution process (step S4809) corresponding to non-specific control, before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In addition, each information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the processing corresponding to non-specific control is started after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. This is unnecessary information in the process corresponding to the specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control returned after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends.

  After the processes of steps S4803 to S4808 are executed, the management execution process is started by reading a program of a subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S4809). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, the main CPU 63 receives information on the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S4802 as a "POP PSW" as a pop instruction. Is returned to the flag register of (step S4810). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S4802 was previously executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, the setting of interrupt permission is performed (step S4811). This enables new execution of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing management execution processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 executes the process of step S4901 to step S4909 in the management execution process using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is used to start the nonspecific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address (step S4901).

  Thereafter, check processing is executed (step S4902). When executing check processing, a program of a subroutine corresponding to the check processing set in the non-specific control program is executed, but when executing the program of the subroutine, management after execution of the check processing Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by the push instruction. Then, when the check processing is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the management execution processing indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

  After that, the load on the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” as “LD WA, 0” (step S 4903). Also, with the load instruction as “LD BC, 0”, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” (step S 4904). Further, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction as “LD DE, 0” (step S 4905). Also, with the load instruction as “LD HL, 0”, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” (step S 4906). In addition, as a "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4907). Further, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction as “LD IY, 0” (step S 4908).

  The WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register and the IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4902) corresponding to the nonspecific control as described above. By clearing such registers to “0” prior to returning from processing corresponding to non-specific control to processing corresponding to specific control, the state of these registers is mainly returned to the processing corresponding to specific control. It becomes possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operation power to the side CPU 63 is started.

  In addition, each information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register before the process corresponding to the specific control is started is not specified after the process corresponding to the specific control is completed. It is unnecessary information in the process corresponding to control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the process corresponding to the non-specific control returned after the process corresponding to the specific control is completed.

  Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP, Y (r + α)” is used to return to the specific control to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction. Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address in step S4909 (step S4909). The address Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  According to the above configuration, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started from the situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed, WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register of main CPU 63 And the IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, it is not necessary to save the information of each register in the main RAM 65. Therefore, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving these pieces of information.

  Also, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register and the IY register of the main CPU 63 It is a configuration to clear "0". Thereby, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore the state of each of these registers to the state immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  The state where each of the above registers is cleared to “0” is a state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting each of the registers in the predetermined state when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control. .

  The registers targeted for execution of “0” clear are a part of various registers of the main CPU 63 when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and returning to processing corresponding to specific control. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting each of the registers in a predetermined state when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control.

  In a configuration in which the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are cleared to “0” when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and returning to processing corresponding to specific control Registers other than "0" are not cleared. This makes it possible to prevent information required in the process corresponding to the specific control from being erased when the process corresponding to the non-specific control starts.

  Also, information on registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is not saved in the main RAM 65 at the start of processing corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, there is no need to secure an area for saving such information in the main RAM 65.

  Information on the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 before the processing corresponding to non-specific control is started after the processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed The information is not used in the process corresponding to the specific control. Thereby, even if each register is configured to be cleared to “0” when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started, it corresponds to specific control after processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed. It becomes possible not to affect the processing.

  It should be noted that instead of the configuration in which the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81) The register may be initialized. That is, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, each register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to “0”, and then information setting of each register is performed so as to be in the initial state. In step S4803 to step S4808, each register may be set to be in this initial state. In this case, the setting of each register is performed so as to be in the above-described initial state also in steps S 4903 to S 4908, and the state of each register is not specified when returning to processing corresponding to specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the process corresponding to the control is started.

  Also, in place of the configuration in which the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81) The configuration may be such that "1" is set to all of the registers. In this case, by setting “1” to all the registers in steps S 4903 to S 4908 as well, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control It is possible to return to the state just before the start of.

  In addition, when the processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control, but is limited to this Instead, the information of the flag register may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the nonspecific control. Further, although the configuration is such that the return of the information to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is performed in the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the present invention is not limited thereto. The configuration may be such that the return of the information to the flag register is performed in the process corresponding to the nonspecific control.

  In addition, processing for clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to “0” starts processing corresponding to non-specific control processing corresponding to specific control However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of clearing these registers to “0” may be executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control. In addition, although the process of clearing each of the registers to “0” when the process corresponding to non-specific control ends is performed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, the present invention is not limited to this. The process of clearing each of the registers to “0” may be performed in the process corresponding to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed.

  Further, in the management process (FIG. 81), the process of "PUSH PSW" in step S4802 is performed before setting "0" in each register in steps S4803 to S4808, but instead of this, After the processing of "PUSH PSW" in step S4802 sets "0" in each register in steps S4803 to S4808 and before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution processing is read out in step S4809 It may be configured as As a result, it is possible to save information of the flag register after being changed by the load instruction of steps S4803 to S4808 in the stack area 222 for specific control.

The Twenty-first Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment in the configuration for collecting game history information. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65 as in the fifteenth embodiment. Further, unlike the fifteenth embodiment, the management RAM 241 is electrically connected to the MPU 62. That is, the management RAM 241 is provided separately from the main RAM 65 built in the MPU 62, and the management RAM 241 is externally attached to the MPU 62.

  Similar to the fifteenth embodiment, the main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. ing. Therefore, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to specific control using the program for specific control and data for specific control in the main ROM 64, the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 and When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, and the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to nonspecific control using the nonspecific control program and nonspecific control data in the main ROM 64 A work area 223 for nonspecific control in the main RAM 65 and a stack area 224 for nonspecific control are used.

  The management RAM 241 is provided with a normal counter area 231, an open / close execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and an operation result storage area 234. The contents of the areas 231 to 234 are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment. Also in the present embodiment, management execution processing including check processing is executed as processing corresponding to nonspecific control in the main CPU 63. In the check process, the game history is collected through the update of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 in the same manner as the fifteenth embodiment. The 61st to 68th parameters calculated using the collected game history are written in the calculation result storage area 234. That is, since the management RAM 241 is used when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to nonspecific control, the management RAM 241 is used as a nonspecific control work area.

  In addition, when calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collection of game history and the collected history information, the work area 223 for nonspecific control of the main RAM 65 and the stack area 224 for nonspecific control are Used appropriately.

  According to the above configuration, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to store the information of the collected game history while preventing the storage capacity required in the work area 223 for nonspecific control in the main RAM 65 from increasing, and using the game history It is possible to store the calculated 61st to 68th parameters. In addition, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing the information of the game history while using the general-purpose MPU 62.

  When calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collection of gaming history and the collected history information, the work area 223 for nonspecific control of the main RAM 65 and the stack area 224 for nonspecific control are appropriately used Be done. This makes it possible to prevent the processing speed from extremely decreasing when the process related to the history information is performed.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration that the management RAM 241 is provided with the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234, the first embodiment A storage area corresponding to the history memory 117 in the form or the like may be set. In this case, although it is necessary to increase the storage capacity required to store the history information, the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 is configured to be used as storage means for storing the history information. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly cope with the increase in storage capacity.

Twenty-Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 executes the processing of step S5001 to step S5019 in the main processing using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, power on wait processing is executed (step S5001). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for weight (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and initialization of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5002).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5003), and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S5004). It is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to 13 (step S5005), and it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S5006).

  In the present embodiment, a front door open sensor 95 for detecting whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the front door open sensor The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. When the main CPU 63 receives the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, it specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a main body opening sensor 96 for detecting whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main body opening sensor The detection result of 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11. If there is, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and when the opening detecting signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, the gaming machine It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state.

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step S5003) and if the negative determination is made in any of steps S5004 to S5006, the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S5007) . In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the specific control except for the area (specifically, the setting value counter) in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control The work area 221 is cleared to “0”, and initialization is performed on the area cleared to “0”. As a result, the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, and therefore the success or failure lottery is performed regardless of the success or failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed. Furthermore, the common view display portion 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utility symbol 34a is in a closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. Further, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. Further, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”.

  In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the operation power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to "0". It will be possible to

  If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S5003: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S5008). The power failure flag is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and when the processing at the time of a predetermined power failure is normally executed when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power failure flag Will be set to "1". If “1” is set in the power failure flag, it is determined whether the calculation result of the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data (step S5009) . If clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed in step S5007, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S5009, setting of the pachinko machine 10 is confirmed by confirming the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether the value is normal (step S5010). Specifically, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value counter is normal if the setting value is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is abnormal if it is “0” or 7 or more. Determine that there is.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5008 to S5010, the operation inhibiting process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after an error notification process for notifying a hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error is performed (step S5011), an infinite loop is made. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a clear process (step S5018) at the time of setting update, which will be described later.

  If all the steps S5008 to S5010 make an affirmative determination, the power on setting process is executed (step S5012). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is inhibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S5013 is completed after the process of step S5012 is completed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power on setting process of step S5012 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S5013 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start processing for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S <b> 5013 to step S <b> 5016. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of steps S5013 to S5016 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of the steps S5013 to S5016 are non-periodic processes that are performed non-periodically. In steps S5013 to S5016, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

  On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step S5003) and the determination in step S5004 to step S5006 is affirmative, the process for updating the set value is executed. Specifically, first, copy processing of the setting value is executed (step S5017). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify a setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information on the setting value counter is cleared to "0" in the setting updating process (step S5018) to be executed later, the main process before the setting information updating process is executed is performed. It becomes possible to grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

  Thereafter, the clear processing at the time of setting update is executed (step S5018). In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “0” except for the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode in the specific control work area 221 is the high probability mode and the copy area. Clear and initialize the area cleared to "0". As a result, the game times are not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed. Further, the common drawing display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utilities 34a are closed. It will be a certain situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. Further, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, and initialization is performed on the area cleared to “0”. Further, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to “0”. In addition, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”, and initialization is performed.

  On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the area indicating whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is not cleared to “0”. Therefore, the winning lottery mode is set even if the set value updating process (step S5019) is executed. Can be maintained in the mode before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to “0” in the clearing process at the time of setting update, it is possible to specify the setting value which was set before the clearing process at the setting update time is executed.

  In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the setting value update process capable of changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to "0". It will be possible to

  Thereafter, after the setting value update process is performed in step S5019, the process proceeds to step S5012. Hereinafter, the setting value update process will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing. The main CPU 63 executes the processing of steps S5101 to S5114 in the setting value update processing using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, “1” is set to the set value counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S5101). The set value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to identify which set value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting “1” to the setting value counter, when the setting value updating process is executed, the setting value becomes “setting 1” regardless of the setting values up to that time.

  Thereafter, display start processing of the set value is executed (step S5102). In the display start process of the setting value, the display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. The manager of the gaming hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not one gaming ball has been detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a (step S5103). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal received from the out-port detection sensor 48a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S5103, it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68 b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process returns to the process of step S5103, and it is determined whether one out of the game balls has been detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a.

  If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104: YES), the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by one (step S5105). If the value of the set value counter after one addition exceeds “6” (step S5106: YES), “1” is set in the set value counter (step S5107). Thus, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the state of "setting 6", it is changed to "setting 1". I will be back.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5106, or if the process of step S5107 is performed, display update processing of the set value is performed (step S5108). In the display value update process of the setting value, display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. By confirming the third notification display device 69c, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

  After executing the process of step S5108, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one game ball has been detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a. When one game ball is not detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a (step S5103: NO), the processing after step S5104 is executed again. When one game ball is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a (step S5103: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5109). In this case, it is not specified whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is in the OFF state, but whether or not the switching from the ON state to the OFF state has occurred, and the switching has occurred. When it is specified, an affirmative determination is made in step S5109.

  If not switched to the OFF state (step S5109: NO), the process of step S5109 is executed again. As a result, the process waits until the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. If it has been switched to the OFF state (step S5109: YES), display end processing of the set value is executed (step S5110). In the display end process of the setting value, the display of the setting value on the third notification display device 69c is ended. In this case, the display of information of various parameters stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is started by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  After that, the comparison processing of the set value is executed (step S5111). In the comparison processing of the setting value, it is determined whether the information of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control matches the information stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control. That is, it is determined whether the set value set before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is the same as the set value set in the present set value update process.

  If the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is the same as the set value set in the present set value update process (NO in step S5112), The process for notification at the time of change is executed (step S5113). In the notification process at the time of non-change, a setting maintenance command indicating that the setting value has not been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. By receiving the setting maintenance command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting maintenance, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output an audio of “setting maintenance.” In addition, a character image "setting maintained." Is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  These notifications are maintained until the notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting maintenance command is transmitted, and is ended when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68 b may be pressed, or the reset button 68 c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp that the set value is maintained. In the notification process at the time of non-change, the setting value is maintained by setting the display content of at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c as the display content corresponding to the setting maintenance. It may be configured to notify that, or it may be configured to perform an external output indicating that the set value is maintained.

  If the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is not the same as the set value set in the present set value update process (step S5112: YES), change The notification process is executed (step S5114). In the notification process at the time of change, a setting change command indicating that the set value has been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. By receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting change, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound of “setting change”. In addition, a character image of "setting change." Is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  These notifications are maintained until a notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting change command is transmitted, and is ended when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68 b may be pressed, or the reset button 68 c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the setting value has been changed. In the notification process at the time of the change, the setting value is changed by setting the display content of at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c as the display content corresponding to the setting change. May be notified, or an external output may be provided to indicate that the set value has been changed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the setting value update process, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, but the reset button 68c is pressed, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. It is necessary that the gaming machine main body 12 be in the open state. This makes it possible to make it difficult to execute the setting value update process illegally.

  Further, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in the open state in order to execute the setting value update processing. As a result, even if it is attempted to execute the setting value update process illegally, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the injustice becomes noticeable, and the game hall administrator It makes it easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in order to execute the setting value update process, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 are required, While the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be made complicated, it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent activity stand out.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the setting value update process is not completed, the process does not return to the process for advancing the game, and in order to fix the set value selected in the set value update process and end the set value update process, It is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the out port 24a and cause the out port detection sensor 48a to detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a. As a result, even if the setting value update process is performed illegally, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation to return to the process for advancing the game by terminating the setting value update process thereafter.

  Further, the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is compared with the set value selected in the set value update process, and both set values are identical or not A notification corresponding to the is performed. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting value can be changed by the setting value update process.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, in a cycle of 4 milliseconds) in a state where the processes of steps S5013 to S5016 are executed in the main process (FIG. 84). The program corresponding to the timer interrupt process is set in the program for specific control.

  In steps S5201 to S5205, the same processes as steps S301 to S305 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  Thereafter, a setting confirmation process is executed (step S5206). While the setting confirmation process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the setting confirmation process set in the specific control program is executed. However, the setting confirmation process is executed when the subroutine program is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process after execution of is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction. Then, when the setting confirmation process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the setting confirmation process. The processes of steps S5301 to S5312 in the setting confirmation process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, it is determined whether the setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S5301). If a negative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether or not it is neither the game times nor the open / close execution mode (step S5302), and the variable display times of symbols in the common view display unit 38a and the common notification item 34a are opened. It is determined whether or not any of the general power release states that can be brought into a state (step S5303), and whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5304) 11. It is determined whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state (step S5305), and it is determined whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on (step S5306). Whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is determined based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 as in step S5005 in the main process (FIG. 84), and the game machine body 12 is in the open state This determination is performed based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 as in step S5006 in the main processing (FIG. 84).

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5302 to S5306, the process for setting confirmation is ended without executing the processes of steps S5307 to S5309. If the determination in step S5302 to step S5306 is affirmative, processing to start display of the set value is executed (step S5307). In the display start process of the setting value, display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that the numeral of the setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. The administrator of the game hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by visually checking the third notification display device 69c at the time of confirming the setting value.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S5308). The game stop flag is a situation where the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86) makes an affirmative determination in step S5207 and the processes of step S5208 to step S5221 are not executed, that is, the situations where execution of the process for advancing the game should be stopped It is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not there is any. By setting “1” to the game stop flag, the processing in step S5208 to step S5221 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S5207 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86). Thereby, the confirmation of the setting value is performed in a situation where the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. However, even if the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of step S5201 to step S5205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86) is executed, so that the setting value is checked. Even if the power failure monitoring is executed, the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and the detection of fraud is executed.

  Thereafter, a confirmation notification start command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S5309). By receiving the confirmation notification start command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a corresponding mode during setting confirmation, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice “setting confirmation in progress”. . In addition, a character image "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are continued until a confirmation notification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Note that an external output may be performed to indicate that the setting value is being confirmed.

  As described above, it is neither in the game times nor in the opening / closing execution mode, and further, under the condition that it is neither in the fluctuation display times of the symbols in the common drawing display portion 38a nor the common power open state in which the common control utility 34a can be open. By performing the display for confirming the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, the confirmation operation of the setting value is not performed in the situation where the game is being performed. It becomes possible.

  In addition, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, but also the front door frame 14 is opened. It is necessary that the gaming machine main body 12 be in the open state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform display of confirmation of the setting value illegally.

  Further, in order for the display for confirming the setting value to be performed by the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in the open state. As a result, even if it is attempted to illegally display the confirmation of the set value, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the injustice becomes noticeable, and the management of the gaming hall It is easy for a person to find out the fraud.

  In particular, in order to cause the display for confirming the setting value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 is performed. By requiring the opening operation of the front door frame 14 as well, it is possible to make the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent work complicated, and it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent activity stand out.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off (step S5310). When the OFF operation is performed (step S5310: YES), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5311). As a result, by making a negative determination in step S5207 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), the processes of steps S5208 to S5221 are performed. Thereby, the state in which execution of the process for advancing a game is stopped is cancelled | released.

  Thereafter, a confirmation notification end command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S5312). By receiving the confirmation notification end command, the voice emission control device 81 ends the notification indicating that the setting values in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are being confirmed.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), after the process for setting confirmation in step S5206 is ended, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (step S5207). In this case, if "1" is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control in the setting confirmation process in step S5206, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, and the process from step S5208 to step S5221 is performed. Do not execute the process. Further, even when occurrence of fraud is detected in the fraud detection process of step S5205, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, and the processes of steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed.

  In steps S5208 to S5219, the same processes as steps S307 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In step S5221, the same process as step S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, in step S5220, a RAM monitoring process is executed. When executing the RAM monitoring process, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the RAM monitoring process set in the program for specific control is executed. However, when executing the program of the subroutine, after the execution of the RAM monitoring process The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process in step (1) is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction. Then, when the RAM monitoring process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a RAM monitoring process. The processes of steps S5401 to S5412 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5401). In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the information stored in the specific control work area 221 is abnormal due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the work area 221 for specific control, whether or not the state of the storage area in which writing of information is not performed in various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state There is a method of monitoring and determining that an abnormality occurs when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, when the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, when “1” is stored in the storage area, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of the predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in the normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5401 that there is an abnormality (step S5402: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is not determined in step S5401 that there is an abnormality (step S5402: NO), the process proceeds to step S5403.

  In step S5403, monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the information stored in the specific control stack area 222 is abnormal due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, whether or not the state of the storage area in which writing of information is not performed by various controls in the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 is different from the initial state There is a method of monitoring and determining that an abnormality occurs when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, when the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, when “1” is stored in the storage area, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of the predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in the normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5403 that there is an abnormality (step S5404: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is not determined in step S5403 that there is an abnormality (step S5404: NO), the process proceeds to step S5405.

  In step S5405, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the information stored in the non-specific control work area 223 is abnormal due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the work area 223 for non-specific control, whether the state of the storage area in which writing of information is not performed in various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state There is a method of monitoring whether or not an abnormality occurs when it is in a state different from the initial state. In this case, when the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, when “1” is stored in the storage area, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of the predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in the normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5405 that there is an abnormality (step S5406: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is not determined in step S5405 that there is an abnormality (step S5406: NO), the process proceeds to step S5407.

  In step S5407, monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is executed. In the monitoring processing, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the stack area 224 for non-specific control due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control, whether the state of the storage area where writing of information is not performed in various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state or not There is a method of monitoring whether or not an abnormality occurs when it is in a state different from the initial state. In this case, when the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, when “1” is stored in the storage area, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of the predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in the normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5407 that there is an abnormality (step S5408: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. Specifically, first, copy processing of the setting value is executed (step S5409). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify a setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information on the setting value counter is cleared to “0” in the clearing process (step S 5410) to be executed after this, the pachinko machine 10 before the clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the setting value of.

  Thereafter, the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5410). In the clearing process at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” excluding the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack for non-specific control The area 224 is cleared to "0". Also, initialization is performed after clearing "0". That is, in the RAM monitoring process, an error occurs in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224. If it is specified, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the non-specific control Clear the stack area 224 of “0”. Thereby, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the main side RAM 65, neither the processing corresponding to the specific control nor the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed in the state as it is It will be possible to

  When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, information on the return address after execution of the RAM monitoring process is also erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", after the process of step S5412 is finished, the program is uniquely returned to a predetermined program. Specifically, the process is uniquely returned to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 22). However, the program to uniquely return is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86). When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that the clear processing at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S5411). By receiving the abnormality command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to forced clear, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice of “forced clear.” In addition, a character image of "forced clear" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68 b may be pressed, or the reset button 68 c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the main side RAM 65 has been forcibly cleared.

  Thereafter, the setting value update process is executed (step S5412). That is, since “0” clear is executed including the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control when the clearing process at the time of abnormality occurs, resetting of the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is required. Execute set value update processing to do this. The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as step S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84). Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated one step at a time, and the out-port detection sensor 48a detects the game ball, whereby the selected set value is determined. The set value in the middle of updating and the set value determined are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Thereafter, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the termination condition of the setting value update processing is satisfied.

  Here, it is not determined that the termination condition is satisfied only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, and the termination condition is when the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. It is determined that it has been established. When the setting value update process is executed in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88), since the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state when the setting value update process is started, the ending condition of the setting value update process is In order to make the setting effective, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion unit 68 a and perform the ON operation once and then perform the OFF operation. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value update process from ending even though the regular operation by the game hall manager has not been performed.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the end condition of the set value update process is satisfied, the step S5111 in the set value update process (FIG. 85) is executed to make it possible. It is compared whether the setting value stored in the copy area in the specific control work area 221 is the same as the setting value currently set in the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221. That is, it is determined whether the setting value set before the clearing process (step S5410) at the time of abnormality is performed and the setting value set in the setting value update process of this time are the same. If the two setting values are the same (step S5112: NO), the setting maintenance notification described above is performed by executing the notification process (step S5113) when not changing. On the other hand, if the setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the setting change notification described above is performed by executing the notification process (step S5114) at the time of change.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on, but the reset button 68c is pressed. The front door frame 14 is in the open state, and the gaming machine main body 12 needs to be in the open state. This makes it possible to make it difficult to execute the setting value update process illegally.

  The front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in the open state in order to execute the setting value update process. As a result, even if it is attempted to execute the setting value update process illegally, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the injustice becomes noticeable, and the game hall administrator It makes it easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in order to execute the setting value update process, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 are required, While the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be made complicated, it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent activity stand out.

  In the configuration where the setting value update process is not completed, the configuration does not return to the process for advancing the game, and the setting value selected in the setting value update process is fixed to end the setting value update process. It is necessary to cause the game ball to be detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a by causing the game ball to enter the ball 24a and then to turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a. As a result, even if the setting value update process is performed illegally, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation to return to the process for advancing the game by terminating the setting value update process thereafter.

  The setting value set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is compared with the setting value selected in the setting value update process, and it is determined whether both setting values are the same. A corresponding notification is performed. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting value can be changed by the setting value update process.

  The setting value is set under the condition that neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is in any of the variation display times of the symbol in the common drawing display portion 38a and the common power release state in which the common control utility 34a can be opened. By performing the display for confirmation on the third notification display device 69c, it becomes possible to prevent the confirmation operation of the set value from being performed in the situation where the game is being performed. .

  In order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, but also the front door frame 14 is opened. The gaming machine main body 12 needs to be in the open state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform display of confirmation of the setting value illegally.

  In order for the display for confirming the setting value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, it is necessary for the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 to be in the open state. As a result, even if it is attempted to illegally display the confirmation of the set value, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the injustice becomes noticeable, and the management of the gaming hall It is easy for a person to find out the fraud.

  In particular, in order to cause the display for confirming the setting value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 is performed. By requiring the opening operation of the front door frame 14 as well, it is possible to make the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent work complicated, and it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent activity stand out.

  When it is specified that an error has occurred in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224 Clears the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control "clear. Thereby, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, both the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control are executed in the state as it is It becomes possible not to go wrong.

  In the process corresponding to the specific control, information abnormality occurs not only in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 but also in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 It is monitored whether it does. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared to the configuration in which whether or not an information abnormality has occurred is divided into processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  When it is specified that an error has occurred in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224 In the process corresponding to the specific control, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control 'Cleared. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared to the configuration in which “0” is cleared by dividing the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

  When the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed due to the occurrence of the information abnormality, the setting value update processing is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the game from proceeding even though the set value is not set. In this case, when the setting value set before the clearing process at the time of abnormality is executed and the setting value set by the setting value updating process after the execution of the clearing process at the time of abnormality are the same. The setting maintenance notification is performed. As a result, even if the clearing process at the time of abnormality is executed, the setting maintenance notification is performed by resetting the setting value set in the previous situation, and it is assumed that the clearing process at the time of abnormality is executed. It is also possible to clearly indicate to the player that the setting value has not changed. By the way, since it is general to record the setting value of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall, the setting value update process after execution of the clearing process at the time of abnormality so as to become the recorded setting value It is possible to

  The condition for executing the setting value update process may be different from that in the above-described embodiment when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the main processing in another form. In the main processing, the same processing as step S5001 to step S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the above embodiment is executed in step S5501 to step S5506 and step S5508 to step S5520. On the other hand, in the main process, it is determined in step S5507 whether the operation handle of the launch operation device 28 operated to cause the gaming area PA to launch the game ball has been pivoted from the initial rotation position. Then, the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5503: YES), the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (step S5504: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. (Step S5505: YES), the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S5506: YES), and the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position. If it is (step S5507: YES), the setting value update process (step S5520) is executed. Thus, in order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion unit 68a and the ON operation is performed, but also the firing is performed. It is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while the operating handle of the operating device 28 is turned. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to change the setting value illegally. It is determined whether or not the player operating device 28 is touched by the player instead of determining whether or not the operating handle of the driver operating device 28 has been rotated from the initial rotational position in step S5507. It is good also as composition.

  In addition, as a condition for executing the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outside Although both conditions that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state are set with respect to the frame 11, it may be configured as only one of these conditions is set.

  Further, as a condition for executing the setting value update process when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed is set. However, the condition may not be set.

  In addition, as a condition for executing the setting value update process when the supply of operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where the gaming ball is detected in the gate detection sensor 49a. The condition that the supply of power has been started may be set. As a result, in order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the setting key is not only inserted into the setting key insertion unit 68a to perform the ON operation, but also through It is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the gaming balls being retained at the gate 35. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to change the setting value illegally.

  Further, the content of the operation for fixing the setting value in the setting value update process may be different from that of the above embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing according to another embodiment. In the setting value update process, the same process as step S5101 to step S5102 and step S5104 to step S5114 of the setting value update process (FIG. 85) in the above embodiment is executed in step S5601 to step S5602 and step S5604 to step S5614. . On the other hand, in the setting value update process, in step S5603, it is not determined whether the game ball is detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a, but the ON signal is continuously output from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined whether the ON continuation period is equal to or longer than the end reference period (specifically, 5 seconds). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, the setting value being selected is determined, and the process proceeds to step S5609. According to the said structure, in order to fix the setting value in process of selection, it is necessary to make the through ball 35 hold intentionally for a game ball over the completion | finish reference | standard period. The fact that the game balls stay in the through gate 35 over the end reference period does not occur in a normal game situation. As a result, it is possible to make the condition for fixing the setting value being selected not be established or difficult to be established in the situation where a normal game is being performed. In addition, even if the setting value update process is started due to fraud, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for fixing the setting value currently selected in the setting value update process.

  Further, in the setting value update process, the setting value being selected may be determined when the operation handle of the launch operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position, and the launch operation device 28 is touched by the player The configuration may be such that the setting value currently selected is determined when it is received.

  In addition, in the setting value update process, the setting value being selected is determined when the special electric power detection sensor 45a detects that the game ball has entered the special electric power winning device 32 provided with the opening / closing member. Preferably, the setting value being selected may be determined when it is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a that the game ball has entered the second operation port 34 provided with the opening / closing member. In this case, in order to fix the selected set value, it is necessary to clean the gaming ball after manually opening the target ball entry part, so it is difficult to perform an action of changing the set value illegally It becomes possible.

  In the set value update process, selection is made based on detection that the game ball has entered the second ball entry portion after it is detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entry portion. The setting value in the middle may be determined. In this case, in order to fix the selected set value, it is necessary to cause the game balls to enter the plurality of ball storage sections by maintenance in accordance with a predetermined order, thus making it difficult to perform an action of changing the set value illegally. Is possible. In this case, by setting the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion as the ball entering portions not provided with the opening / closing member, the workability of the regular operation is not extremely reduced. It is possible to

  Further, in the setting value updating process, the setting key insertion unit 68a may be switched from the ON state to the OFF state, whereby the setting value being selected is decided and the ending condition of the setting value updating process is satisfied.

  Further, the setting value updating process is not limited to the configuration in which the setting value is updated by one step in the setting value update process by pressing the update button 68b, and the setting value is changed by one step by pressing the reset button 68c. The configuration may be updated.

  In the situation where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on by the setting key, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. When the front door frame 14 is not in the open state with respect to the frame 13 or when the gaming machine main body 12 is not in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the clear process (step S5007) at the time of non-setting update is executed The configuration is not limited, and the configuration may be configured such that the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the clear processing at the time of non-setting update from being executed against the intention of the game hall manager.

  In the situation where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on by the setting key, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. When the front door frame 14 is not in the open state with respect to the frame 13 or when the gaming machine main body 12 is not in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the clear process (step S5007) at the time of non-setting update is executed The configuration is not limited, and the configuration may be configured such that the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is not performed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the clear processing at the time of non-setting update illegally.

The Twenty-Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing is different from that of the twenty-second embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the twenty-second embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the twenty-second embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 executes the processing of step S5701 to step S5720 in the main processing using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, power on wait processing is executed (step S5701). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for weight (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and initialization of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5702).

  Thereafter, based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5703). Then, it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state (step S5704), and it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5705). If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5703 to S5705, the processes of steps S5706 to S5714 are executed. The processes of steps S5706 to S5714 are the same as steps S5008 to S5016 of the main process (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  If the determination in step S5703 to step S5705 is affirmative, the process for selection is executed (step S5715). In the process for selection, there is a situation in which the clear process at the time of non-setting update is performed and the setting value update process is not performed, and the clear process at the time of setting update is performed and the setting value update process is performed The game is executed based on the selection operation of the game hall manager. Specifically, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, one of the above-mentioned situations is selected, and the other situation is selected. The selection operation may be performed by the operation of the reset button 68c, or may be performed by the operation of another operation unit. In addition, when selecting the circumstance where clearing processing at the time of non setting renewal is executed and setting value renewal processing is not done, “O” is displayed in the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b. When the third notification display device 69c is turned off and the setting update processing is to be performed while the clear processing at the setting update time is executed, "O" is displayed in the second notification display device 69b. Is displayed and the first notification display device 69a and the third notification display device 69c are turned off. In addition, when the reset button 68c is continuously pressed for the final selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or more, the status on the selected side among the above statuses is decided as the current selection target. Do.

  When the update button 68b is continuously pressed for a definite selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or more, the situation on the selected side of the above situations is decided as the current selection target It is good also as composition, when other operation parts are continuously pressed and operated over a definite selection period (specifically 10 seconds) or more, the situation of the side selected among the above-mentioned situations is selected this time It may be determined as a target. Further, the operation handle of the launch operation device 28 may be turned and the situation selected on the above-mentioned situations may be determined as the current selection target.

  In the processing for selection, when the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value update processing is not executed is decided as the current selection target (step S5716: NO), the clear processing at the non-setting update is executed. (Step S5717). The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is the same as step S5007 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  In the selection process, when the setting update process and the setting value update process are determined as the current selection target (step S5716: YES), the setting value copy process is executed (step In step S5718), the clear processing at the time of setting update is executed (step S5719), and the setting value update processing is executed (step S5720). The processing contents of these steps S5718 to S5720 are the same as the steps S5017 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, even in the configuration in which the setting key insertion unit 68a is not provided, the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is performed and the setting value update processing is not performed, and the clear processing at the setting update At the same time, the administrator of the game hall can select which of the situations in which the setting value update process is to be performed.

  Further, not only when the setting value update process is performed but also when the clear process at the time of non-setting update is performed, the operation power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is performed when the reset button 68c is pressed. Not only to start, it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 and to open the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the clear processing at the time of non-setting update illegally.

  The front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outer frame is a condition for the selection process to be performed when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. Although both of the conditions that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state are set to 11 with respect to 11, it may be configured that only one of these conditions is set.

  In addition, as a condition for executing the selection process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the condition that the launch handle of the launch operation device 28 is turned is added. The configuration may be added, or the condition that the launch operation device 28 is touched may be added, or the condition that the game detection ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a may be added. It is also good.

Twenty-Fourth Embodiment
The processing configuration of the RAM monitoring processing in this embodiment is different from that of the twenty-second embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the twenty-second embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the twenty-second embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring processing according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 executes the processing of step S5801 to step S5814 in the RAM monitoring processing using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5801). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5801 that there is an abnormality (step S5802: YES), the processes of steps S5805 to S5808 are executed.

  If it is not determined that there is an abnormality at step S5801 (step S5802: NO), monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5803). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5803 that there is an abnormality (YES in step S5804), the processing in step S5805 to step S5808 is executed.

  In detail, the process of steps S5805 to S5808 executes the copy process of the setting value (step S5805). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify a setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information on the setting value counter is cleared to “0” in the process of clearing the abnormality (step S5806) to be executed later, the pachinko machine 10 before the process of clearing the abnormality is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the setting value of.

  Thereafter, the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5806). In the clear processing at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” excluding the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. Also, initialization is performed after clearing "0". On the other hand, “0” clear of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not executed. That is, in the RAM monitoring process in the present embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in any of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the specific control excluding the copy area is performed. While clearing the work area 221 for “0”, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared “0”. Thus, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the process corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent Also, even if information abnormality occurs in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are cleared to "0". In the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are cleared to “0” as a result of not being executed. It becomes possible not to do so.

  When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, information on the return address after execution of the RAM monitoring process is also erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, after the process of step S5808 is finished, the process returns uniquely to the predetermined program. Specifically, the process is uniquely returned to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 22). However, the program to uniquely return is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86). When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that the clear processing at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S5807). By receiving the abnormality command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to forced clear, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice of “forced clear.” In addition, a character image of "forced clear" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68 b may be pressed, or the reset button 68 c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are forcibly cleared.

  Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed (step S5808). The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in both step S5801 and step S5803 (step S5802 and step S5804: NO), monitoring processing of the non-specific control work area 223 is executed (step S5809). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5809 that there is an abnormality (step S5810: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is performed (step S5811). In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control work area 223.

  On the other hand, in step S5811, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thus, even if an information abnormality occurs in the non-specific control work area 223, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control stack area 224 It is possible to prevent 0 'clearing.

  Note that, in step S5811, the management start flag for clearing “0” for the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared “0”. It is good also as composition. In step S5811, although the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0". It is good also as composition. In step S5811, although the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to "0". It is good also as composition.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5810, or if the process of step S5811 is performed, a monitoring process of the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is performed (step S5812). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5812 that there is an abnormality (step S5813: YES), the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is performed (step S5814). Thereby, it becomes possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  On the other hand, in step S5814, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are It is possible to prevent 0 'clearing.

  According to the above configuration, when it is determined that an abnormality occurs in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the copy area is excluded and the specific control work area 221 is excluded. Is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Thus, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the process corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent

  Even if an information error occurs in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to “0”. Thus, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0” in response to an information error in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222. It will be possible to

  Even if an information abnormality occurs in the non-specific control work area 223, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to "0". As a result, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control stack area 224 are prevented from being cleared to "0" in response to an information abnormality in the non-specific control work area 223. It becomes possible.

  Even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thereby, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are prevented from being cleared to “0” in response to an information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It becomes possible.

  When an information error occurs in the specific control work area 221, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, while the specific control stack area 222 is " "0" may not be cleared.

  In addition, when an information error occurs in the stack area 222 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", while the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0". It may be In this case, even if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the processing in steps S5805 to S5808 may not be executed.

The Twenty-Fifth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for monitoring whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 is different from that of the twenty-second embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the twenty-second embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the twenty-second embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring processing according to the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S5901 to S5908 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5901). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5901 that there is an abnormality (step S5902: YES), the processes in steps S5905 to S5908 are executed.

  If it is not determined at step S5901 that there is an abnormality (step S5902: NO), monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5903). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5903 that there is an abnormality (YES in step S5904), the processing in step S5905 to step S5908 is executed.

  In detail, the process of steps S5905 to S5908 is executed to copy setting values (step S5905). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify a setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information on the setting value counter is cleared to “0” in the process of clearing the abnormality (step S5906) to be executed later, the pachinko machine 10 before the process of clearing the abnormality is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the setting value of.

  Thereafter, the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5906). In the clear processing at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” excluding the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. Also, initialization is performed after clearing "0". On the other hand, “0” clear of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not executed. That is, in the RAM monitoring process in the present embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in any of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the specific control excluding the copy area is performed. While clearing the work area 221 for “0”, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared “0”. Thus, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the process corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent Also, even if information abnormality occurs in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are cleared to "0". In the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are cleared to “0” as a result of not being executed. It becomes possible not to do so.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that the clear processing at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S5907). The voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control by receiving the abnormal command. The voice of “The forced clear has been executed for the specific control.” Is output. In addition, a character image "forced clear has been executed for specific control" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68 b may be pressed, or the reset button 68 c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are forcibly cleared.

  Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed (step S5908). The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

  As described above, in the RAM monitoring process executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control, monitoring of information abnormality is performed for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. However, information abnormality monitoring is not performed for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224. The monitoring of information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is a process corresponding to non-specific control in which a non-specific control program and non-specific control data are used. Is executed.

  FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing management execution processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. As in the fifteenth embodiment, the management execution process is executed by reading out the program of the subroutine in the management process (FIG. 70). Also, the processing of step S6001 to step S6016 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  Steps S6001 to S6008 and steps S6010 to S6016 execute the same processes as steps S3901 to S3915 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. In step S6009, another monitoring process is performed. When executing the separate monitoring process, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the separate monitoring process set in the non-specific control program is executed, but when the program of the subroutine is executed, the separate monitoring process is executed Information for specifying the return address of the management execution process later is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by the push instruction. Then, when another monitoring process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. The processes of steps S6101 to S6108 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for nonspecific control is executed (step S6101). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S6101 that there is an abnormality (YES in step S6102), the work area 223 for nonspecific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is performed (step S6103). In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control work area 223.

  On the other hand, in step S6103, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thus, even if an information abnormality occurs in the non-specific control work area 223, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control stack area 224 It is possible to prevent 0 'clearing.

  In step S6103, the management start flag is not cleared to “0” although “0” is cleared in the normal counter area 231, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234. It is good also as composition. In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to “0”, but the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared to “0”. It is good also as composition. In step S6103, although the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to "0". It is good also as composition.

  Thereafter, the clear notification process is executed (step S6104). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81. By receiving the command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear of the non-specific control work area 223, and “the history information is forcibly cleared from the speaker unit 54. Sound is output. In addition, a character image "History information has been forcibly cleared" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68 b may be pressed, or the reset button 68 c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the non-specific control work area 223 is forcibly cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6102 or if the processing of step S6104 is executed, monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is executed (step S6105). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S6105 that there is an abnormality (YES in step S6106), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is performed (step S6107). Thereby, it becomes possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  On the other hand, in step S6107, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are It is possible to prevent 0 'clearing.

  Thereafter, the clear notification process is executed (step S6108). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the stack area 224 for nonspecific control has been cleared to “0” is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. By receiving the command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to forced clearing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and the speaker unit 54 Forced clear. ”Is output. In addition, a character image "The stack of non-specific control is forcibly cleared" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68 b may be pressed, or the reset button 68 c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, it becomes possible for the game hall manager to grasp that the non-specific control stack area 224 has been forcibly cleared.

  When the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is forcibly cleared, the address of the program in step S6010 in the management execution process (FIG. 94) is uniquely set as information on the return address after execution of another monitoring process. . As a result, even if the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, it is possible to return to the program that should originally be restored in the management execution process. Further, when the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is forcibly cleared, the storage pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control.

  According to the above configuration, the monitoring of whether or not the information abnormality occurs in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is executed by the processing corresponding to the specific control in the main CPU 63, Monitoring as to whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed by processing corresponding to non-specific control in the main CPU 63. As a result, the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 to be used are not only clearly distinguished by the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the nonspecific control, but the area of the main RAM 65 to be monitored 221 to 224 can also be clearly distinguished.

  When the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to “0”, information on various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control is stored in the non-specific control work area 223. The saved information is also cleared to "0". In this case, even if the process corresponding to non-specific control ends and returns to the process corresponding to specific control, there is a possibility that the state before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started can not be restored. Therefore, when the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to “0”, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 may also be cleared to “0”. Further, in the configuration, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”, so when the process corresponding to non-specific control returns to the process corresponding to specific control, As a corresponding process, the setting value update process may be performed first.

Twenty-Sixth Embodiment
The present embodiment differs from the twentieth embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing. The configuration different from the twentieth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the twentieth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing management processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S6201 to S6219 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt disable is set (step S6201). In this way, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to specific control, is prevented from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Is possible.

  Thereafter, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD HL, SP" (step S6202). In this case, since the amount of information of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the amount of information of each of the H register and L register is 8 bits, the continuous 8-bit information from the upper side of the stack pointer is the H register And the L register is overwritten with successive 8-bit information from the lower side of the stack pointer.

  After that, as “LD (HL), 0”, 1 byte of storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is “0” by the load instruction. It clears (step S6203). The information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 at step S6202, and the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated of the information before the process of step S6203 is executed. Since this is not performed, in step S6203, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0".

  After that, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information on the address of the storage area to be written next in the stack area 222 for specific control by the load instruction as "LD SP, SP-1". (Step S6204). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and is used for specific control each time information to be stored is added. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 of FIG. Therefore, in step S6204, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area on the side with the smaller address by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing of step S6204, the storage area of the next order is set as the storage target of the information by the next push instruction for the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203, and at step S6203. The storage area cleared to “0” is set as a read target of information by the next pop instruction.

  After that, as a load instruction, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” as “LD WA, 0” (step S 6205). Further, as a "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6206). Further, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction as "LD DE, 0" (step S6207). Also, with the load instruction as “LD HL, 0”, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” (step S 6208). Further, as a "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6209). Also, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction as "LD IY, 0" (step S6210).

  In the registers of the main CPU 63, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers exist in addition to the flag register. In this case, in steps S6205 to S6210, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are a part of these various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, respectively. Clear "0". These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are registers used in the management execution process (step S6212) which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing "0" to such a register prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6212), which is a process corresponding to nonspecific control, before the process corresponding to nonspecific control is started. It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In addition, each information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the processing corresponding to non-specific control is started after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. This is unnecessary information in the process corresponding to the specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control returned after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends.

  Thereafter, as a "POP PSW", the information is read from the storage area of the immediately preceding writing order to the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction. The read information is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6211). Information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction in step S6211 is executed is the next write order storage area to the storage area in the specific control stack area 222 cleared to "0" in step S6203. It corresponds to the information. Therefore, the storage area of the previous writing order to the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203. . Then, the information read out from the storage area is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63, whereby the flag register is cleared to "0". Note that one storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte) and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). . By clearing the flag register to “0” prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6212) corresponding to non-specific control, the state of the flag register is started before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. It becomes possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  Thereafter, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program is read out to start the management execution process (step S6212). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  The contents of the management execution process are the same as the management execution process (FIG. 82) in the twentieth embodiment. Therefore, after the check process is completed in the management execution process, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers are cleared to “0” prior to the return from the process corresponding to non-specific control to the process corresponding to specific control, and the state of these registers is returned to the process corresponding to specific control. It becomes possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  After returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, processing for clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" is executed. In detail, as “PUSH HL”, the information on the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction (step S6213). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the information of the HL register is saved. Become.

  After that, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD HL, SP” (step S 6214). In this case, since the amount of information of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the amount of information of each of the H register and L register is 8 bits, the continuous 8-bit information from the upper side of the stack pointer is the H register And the L register is overwritten with successive 8-bit information from the lower side of the stack pointer.

  After that, as “LD (HL), 0”, 1 byte of storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is “0” by the load instruction. It clears (step S6215). The information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in step S6214, and the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated of the information until the process of step S6215 is executed. Since this operation is not performed, in step S6215, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0".

  After that, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information on the address of the storage area to be written next in the stack area 222 for specific control by the load instruction as "LD SP, SP-1". (Step S6216). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and is used for specific control each time information to be stored is added. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 of FIG. Therefore, in step S6216, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area on the side with the smaller address by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing of step S6216, the storage area of the next order is set as the storage target of the information by the next push instruction to the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6215, and at step S6215 The storage area cleared to “0” is set as a read target of information by the next pop instruction.

  Thereafter, as a "POP PSW", the information is read from the storage area of the immediately preceding writing order to the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction. The read information is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6217). Information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction in step S6217 is executed is the next write order storage area to the storage area in the specific control stack area 222 cleared to "0" in step S6215. It corresponds to the information. Therefore, the storage area of the immediately preceding write order to the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is “0” cleared in step S6215 for the specific control It becomes a storage area in the stack area 222. Then, the information read out from the storage area is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63, whereby the flag register is cleared to "0". Note that one storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte) and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). . By clearing the flag register to “0” after execution of the management execution process (step S6212) corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 is processed after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operation power to the power supply is started. Further, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the immediately preceding storage area in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as "POP HL" (step S6218). Since the HL register is cleared to "0" immediately before the end of the management execution process (step S6212), the information cleared to "0" is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213. At the same time, in step S6218, the information cleared to "0" is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63, and as a result, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". In addition, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the second preceding storage area in the specific control stack area 222.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, the interrupt permission is set (step S6219). This enables new execution of the timer interrupt process.

  According to the above configuration, in addition to the effects described in the twentieth embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

  When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. As a result, there is no need to save information of the flag register used in the process corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 in a situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. Therefore, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving the information.

  The flag register of the main CPU 63 is also cleared to “0” when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. Thereby, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore the state of the flag register to the state immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  The state in which the flag register is cleared to “0” is a state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the flag register to the predetermined state when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control.

  The information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started is information not used in the process corresponding to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. Thus, even if the flag register is cleared to “0” when the process corresponding to non-specific control is started, the process corresponding to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed It is possible to prevent the influence.

  A predetermined storage area of the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, and the flag register is cleared to “0” by overwriting information in the storage area cleared to “0” to the flag register by a pop instruction. It is a structure. As a result, even in the configuration in which it is regulated that “0” clear to the flag register is directly performed by the load instruction, the flag register can be cleared to “0”.

  The flag register may be initialized instead of the flag register being cleared to “0”. That is, when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to “0”, and then information setting is performed so as to be in the initial state. In step S6204 and step S6211, the flag register may be set to be in this initial state. In this case, by setting the flag register to be in the above-described initial state also in steps S6213 to S6218, the state of the flag register is not specified when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to restore the state immediately before the process corresponding to is started.

  Further, instead of clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" in steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, "1" may be set to all the flag registers. In this case, by setting “1” to all of the flag registers also in steps S6213 to S6218, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control starts. It is possible to return to the state immediately before being

  Further, instead of the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be directly cleared to "0" by the load instruction as "LD PSW, 0". Further, instead of the processing of steps S6213 to S6218, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be directly cleared to "0" by the load instruction as "LD PSW, 0".

  Also, instead of executing the processes of steps S6213 and S6218, the HL register may be cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL, 0". Even in this case, it is possible to restore the state of the HL register to the state immediately before the management execution process which is the process corresponding to the nonspecific control.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register to "0" is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process may be executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

Twenty-Seventh Embodiment
The present embodiment differs from the twentieth embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing. The configuration different from the twentieth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the twentieth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing management processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S6301 to S6323 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt disable is set (step S6301). In this way, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to specific control, is prevented from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH AF”, storage of the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 and the information of the flag register by the push instruction is stored corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The area and the storage area concerned are saved in the next write order storage area (step S6302). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually assigned to two storage areas where addresses are continuous. Be evacuated. Note that, when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two after the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as the “POP HL”, the information on the A register and the information on the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6302 are overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6303) . In this case, the H register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is L of the main CPU 63 The register is overwritten. The H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, with the load instruction as “LD A, 0”, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” (step S 6304). Then, the load instruction overwrites the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 with the L register of the main CPU 63 as "LDL, A" (step S6305), and the load instruction as "LD H, A". The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6306). Since the A register is cleared to "0" in step S6304, the L register and the H register are cleared to "0" by overwriting the information of the A register to the L register and the H register, respectively. It becomes.

  Thereafter, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area of the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6307). Since the H and L registers of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and the information of the L register are individually assigned to two storage areas where addresses are continuous. Be evacuated. Note that, when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two after the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, with the load instruction as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" (step S6308). Further, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction as “LD DE, 0” (step S 6309). In addition, as a "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6310). Further, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction as "LD IY, 0" (step S6311).

  In the registers of the main CPU 63, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers exist in addition to the flag register. In this case, in steps S6308 to S6311, each of the various general-purpose registers, the auxiliary registers, and the index registers, that is, a BC register, a DE register, an IX register, and an IY register, is partially cleared to "0". Also, the HL register is cleared to "0" in step S6305 and step S6306. The BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are registers used in the management execution process (step S6313) corresponding to the nonspecific control. By clearing "0" to such registers prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6313), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In addition, each information of the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the processing corresponding to non-specific control is started to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It is unnecessary information in the corresponding processing. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control returned after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends.

  After that, the information on the H register and the information on the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6307 is overwritten to the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 by the pop instruction as “POP AF” ( Step S6312). In this case, the H register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the L register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the flag of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. Since both the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all “0”, the A register of the main CPU 63 is processed by executing the processing of step S6312. At the same time, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". This makes it possible to set the state of the flag register to the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program is read out to start the management execution process (step S6313). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  It should be noted that, after the check process is completed in the management execution process, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register and the IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers are cleared to “0” prior to the return from the process corresponding to non-specific control to the process corresponding to specific control, and the state of these registers is returned to the process corresponding to specific control. It becomes possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  After returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, processing for clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" is executed. Specifically, first, as “PUSH HL”, the information on the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction (step S6314). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the information of the HL register is saved. Become.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH AF”, storage of the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 and the information of the flag register by the push instruction is stored corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The area and the storage area concerned are saved in the next write order storage area (step S6315). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually assigned to two storage areas where addresses are continuous. Be evacuated. Note that, when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two after the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as the “POP HL”, the information on the A register and the information on the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6315 are overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6316) . In this case, the H register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is L of the main CPU 63 The register is overwritten. The H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, with the load instruction as "LD A, 0", the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" (step S6317). Then, with the load instruction, the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63 as "LDL, A" (step S6318), and as the "LD H, A", the load instruction is used. The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6319). Since the A register is cleared to “0” in step S6317, the L register and the H register are cleared to “0” by overwriting the information of the A register to the L register and the H register, respectively. It becomes.

  Thereafter, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area corresponding to the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6320). Since the H and L registers of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and the information of the L register are individually assigned to two storage areas where addresses are continuous. Be evacuated. Note that, when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two after the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information on the H register and the information on the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6320 is overwritten in the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 as a "POP AF" Step S6321). In this case, the H register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the L register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the flag of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. Since both the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all “0”, execution of the processing of step S6321 causes the A register of the main CPU 63 to At the same time, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". By clearing the flag register to “0” after execution of the management execution process (step S6313) corresponding to nonspecific control, the main CPU 63 is processed after the processing of the flag register state corresponding to nonspecific control is completed. It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operation power to the power supply is started. When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the pop instruction as "POP HL" (step S6322). Since the HL register is cleared to "0" immediately before the end of the management execution process (step S6313), the information cleared to "0" is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314. At the same time, in step S6322, the information cleared to "0" is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63, and as a result, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". In addition, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the second preceding storage area in the specific control stack area 222.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, the setting of interrupt permission is performed (step S6323). This enables new execution of the timer interrupt process.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to clear the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" without executing a process to clear "0" to a predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control by the load instruction. It becomes. By this, even if the configuration in which the load instruction is performed to clear “0” to the predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control is restricted, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. Is possible.

  The flag register may be initialized instead of the flag register being cleared to “0”. That is, when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to “0”, and then information setting is performed so as to be in the initial state. In step S6307 and step S6312, the flag register may be set to be in this initial state. In this case, by setting the flag register to be in the above-described initial state also in steps S6314 to S6322, the state of the flag register is not specified control when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to restore the state immediately before the process corresponding to is started.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" in step S6302 to step S6307 and step S6312, "1" may be set to all the flag registers. In this case, by setting “1” to all of the flag registers in steps S6314 to S6322 as well, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control starts. It is possible to return to the state immediately before being

  In addition, the processing in step S6302 and step S6303 may not be executed. In this case, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  In addition, the processing in step S6315 and step S6316 may not be executed. In this case, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Also, instead of executing the process of step S6302 to step S6306, the HL register is cleared to "0" by the load instruction as "LD HL, 0", and then the HL register cleared to "0" is pushed. Then, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be cleared to “0” by restoring the saved information to the AF register by the pop instruction after saving to the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register to "0" is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process may be executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

<Twenty-eighth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing management processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S6401 to S6416 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), the interrupt disable is set (step S6401). In this way, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to specific control, is prevented from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as "PUSH WA", the information on the WA register (that is, the W register and the A register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information on the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area for the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6402). Since the W register and A register of the main side CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the W register and A register is saved separately to two storage areas where addresses are continuous. Ru. Note that, when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two after the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as the "LD A, PSW", the information on the flag register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6403). In this case, the amount of information in each of the flag register and the A register is 8 bits (1 byte). Then, as a "LD (_FGBUF), A", the load instruction causes the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 to be saved in the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6404). Since the information in the flag register is overwritten in the A register in step S6403, the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6404.

  After that, the information of the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control at step S6402 is restored to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as "POP WA" (step S6405). As a result, even if the A register is used to save information in the flag register to the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible to restore the state of the A register to the state before the save is performed. Become. When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program is read out to start the management execution process (step S6406). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  The contents of the management execution process are the same as the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. Therefore, before check processing is started in the management execution processing, each information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of main side CPU 63 is saved in work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, each information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 after completion of check processing in the management execution processing is the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. Will be returned to As a result, the state of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 can be made the same before and after the check processing.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration of the management execution process may be identical to the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, and the management execution process in the eighteenth embodiment. The configuration may be the same as (FIG. 79), or may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 80) in the nineteenth embodiment.

  If the program for the management process is restored after the execution of the management execution process, the process for restoring the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the execution of the management execution process is executed. In detail, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction (step S6407). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the information of the HL register is saved. Become.

  After that, as “PUSH WA”, the information on the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction (step S6408). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the information of the WA register is saved. Become.

  After that, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD HL, SP” (step S6409). In this case, since the amount of information of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the amount of information of each of the H register and L register is 8 bits, the continuous 8-bit information from the upper side of the stack pointer is the H register And the L register is overwritten with successive 8-bit information from the lower side of the stack pointer.

  After that, with the load instruction as "LD A, (_FGBUF)", overwrite the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6406 in the A register of the main CPU 63 (step S6410). Then, as the “LD (HL), A”, the load instruction causes the main area to store a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. Information of the A register of the CPU 63 is stored (step S6411). As a result, the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the specific control work area 221 in step S6404 is saved in the specific control stack area 222.

  After that, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information on the address of the storage area to be written next in the stack area 222 for specific control by the load instruction as "LD SP, SP-1". (Step S6412). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and is used for specific control each time information to be stored is added. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 of FIG. Therefore, in step S6412, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area on the side with the smaller address by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing of step S6412, a storage area of the next order is set as a storage target of information by the next push instruction with respect to the storage area where the information of the A register is saved in step S6411. The storage area in which the information of the A register is saved in S6411 is set as a read target of the information by the next pop instruction.

  Thereafter, as a "POP PSW", the information is read from the storage area of the immediately preceding writing order to the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction. The read information is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6413). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction of step S6413 is executed corresponds to the information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order to the storage area where the information of the A register is saved at step S6411. It has become. Therefore, in the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, the storage area of the immediately preceding writing order is the storage where the information of the A register is saved at step S6411. It becomes an area. Then, the information read out from the storage area is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63, whereby the flag register information saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is the flag of the main CPU 63. It will be returned to the register. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the immediately preceding storage area in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information of the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6408 is restored to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as "POP WA" (step S6414). When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control. Further, as the “POP HL”, the information on the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6407 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6415). When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, the setting of interrupt permission is performed (step S6416). This enables new execution of the timer interrupt process.

  According to the above configuration, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is executed, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is not the stack area 222 for the specific control It is possible to save in the work area 221 for specific control. When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed and the process returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the information of the flag register saved in the work area 221 for specific control is the flag of the main CPU 63 It is returned to the register. As a result, the information may be restored from the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control designated in the program to the flag register of the main CPU 63 without referring to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. Even when the information of the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 is rewritten due to noise or the like, the information can be restored to the flag register of the main side CPU 63.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the information of the flag register in the main RAM 65 is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process may be executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Also, instead of the process of returning the information of the flag register saved in the main RAM 65 to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process corresponding to the nonspecific control It may be configured to be executed.

The Twenty-ninth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing management processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S6501 to S6519 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt disable is set (step S6501). In this way, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process corresponding to specific control, is prevented from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process described later, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6502). Since the H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and L register is saved separately to two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Ru. Note that, when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two after the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH AF”, storage of the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 and the information of the flag register by the push instruction is stored corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The area and the storage area concerned are saved in the storage areas of the next writing order (step S6503). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually assigned to two storage areas where addresses are continuous. Be evacuated. Note that, when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two after the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as the “POP HL”, the information on the A register and the information on the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6503 are overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6504) . In this case, the H register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is L of the main CPU 63 The register is overwritten. When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the information on the L register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD A, L" (step S6505). Since the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register in step S6504, the information in the A register is overwritten in the A register by overwriting the information in the L register. Become. Then, as a "LD (_FGBUF), A", the load instruction causes the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 to be saved in the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6506). Since the information in the flag register is overwritten in the A register in step S6505, the information in the flag register is saved in the specific control work area 221 by executing step S6506.

  Thereafter, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6507). In this case, since the HL register is overwritten with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register in step S6504, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507. It will be done. Note that, when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two after the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information on the H register and the information on the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507 is overwritten in the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as "POP AF" ( Step S6508). In this case, the H register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the L register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the flag of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. The information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information of the A register at the time of step S6503, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for the specific control is the flag at the time of step S6503. It is register information. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6508, the state of the A register of the main CPU 63 and the flag register is restored to the state at the time of step S6503. When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6502 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as "POP HL" (step S6509). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state at the time of step S6502. When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program is read out to start the management execution process (step S6510). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  In the management execution process, each information of the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for nonspecific control before the check process is started. After the check process is completed in the management execution process, each piece of information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 is restored to the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. As a result, the state of the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 can be made the same before and after the check processing.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration of the management execution process may be identical to the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, and the management execution process in the eighteenth embodiment. The configuration may be the same as (FIG. 79), or may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 80) in the nineteenth embodiment.

  If the program for the management process is restored after the execution of the management execution process, the process for restoring the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the execution of the management execution process is executed. In detail, as "PUSH HL", the information on the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction (step S6511). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the information of the HL register is saved. Become.

  Thereafter, as “PUSH AF”, storage of the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 and the information of the flag register by the push instruction is stored corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The area and the storage area concerned are saved in the next write order storage area (step S 6512). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually assigned to two storage areas where addresses are continuous. Be evacuated. Note that, when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two after the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as the “POP HL”, the information on the A register and the information on the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6512 are overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6513) . In this case, the H register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is L of the main CPU 63 The register is overwritten. When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information on the flag register at the time of step S6503 saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control at step S6506 by the load instruction as “LD A, (_FGBUF)” is A register of the main CPU 63 Is overwritten (step S6514). Then, the information on the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LDL, A" (step S6515). Since the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 at the time of step S6503 is restored to the A register in step S6514, the information in the A register is overwritten in the L register to perform the process in step S6503 in the L register. Information in the flag register is overwritten.

  Thereafter, as "PUSH HL", the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area corresponding to the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6516). In this case, since the information in the A register at the time of step S 6512 is overwritten in the H register in step S 6513, the information in the A register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S 6516. Become. Further, since the information in the flag register at the time of step S6503 is overwritten in the L register in step S6515, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516.

  After that, the information on the H register and the information on the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516 is overwritten in the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 by pop instruction as “POP AF” ( Step S6517). In this case, the H register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the L register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the flag of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. The information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information of the A register at the time of step S6512, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for the specific control is the flag at the time of step S6503. It is register information. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the state of the A register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state of step S6512, and the state of the flag register returns to the state at the time of step S6503.

  Incidentally, the A register of the main CPU 63 is not used in the management execution process. Therefore, the state of the A register at the time of step S6512 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6508, and the state of the A register at the time of step S6508 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the state of the A register of the main CPU 63 and the flag register is restored to the state at the time of step S6503. When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6511 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the pop instruction as "POP HL" (step S6518). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state at the time of step S6511. When the above-mentioned pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area of the previous two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, the interrupt permission is set (step S6519). This enables new execution of the timer interrupt process.

  According to the above configuration, the load instruction causes the flag register of the main CPU 63 to overwrite the information of the flag register directly on the other register of the main CPU 63 without executing the process of overwriting the information of the flag register. Can be evacuated to the work area 221 for specific control.

  It should be noted that the information of the flag register is overwritten by the load instruction as “LD (_FGBUF), L” after performing the processing of step S6504 instead of performing the processing of steps S6505 to S6508. The information in the flag register may be saved in the specific control work area 221 by saving the information in the L register in the FG buffer.

  In addition, without executing the process of step S 6514 and step S 6515, instead, after executing the process of step S 6513, the work area for specific control according to the load instruction as “LDL, (_FGBUF)”. The information of the flag register saved in 221 may be overwritten in the L register.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the information of the flag register in the main RAM 65 is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process may be executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Also, instead of the process of returning the information of the flag register saved in the main RAM 65 to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process corresponding to the nonspecific control It may be configured to be executed.

The thirtieth embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of step S6601 to step S6621 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, power on wait processing is executed (step S6601). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for weight (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and initialization of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S6602).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main side RAM 65 is set to “1” (step S6603). If "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S6603: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6604).

  Although the calculation method of a checksum is arbitrary, the calculation method which adds all the numerical values of the storage area used as calculation object of a checksum, for example is mentioned. The method of calculating the checksum is the same as the method of calculating the checksum in the power failure process described later. Although the checksum calculated in the power failure process described later is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control in which the checksum is stored is calculated as a checksum. Are excluded from the storage area to be calculated.

  That is, at the time of calculation of the checksum, a part of the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are to be calculated. In the storage area to be calculated, the checksum is calculated in the power failure process when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, and then the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed, and the process of step S6604 is performed. When power supply such as backup power to the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is continued until it is performed, basically, it is a storage area in which rewriting of information is not performed. Therefore, the information of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is not changed after the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is stopped and the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is resumed. In this case, the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are the same as immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. In addition, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum, an area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically, the setting value counter )It is included.

  Thereafter, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area which are calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 The checksum for 222 is read out from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read-out checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S6604 (step S6605). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S6606).

  Here, the power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 101. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) described later.

  In the power failure information storage process, first, the information of "10" which is the repetition frequency information for the power failure signal is set in the repetition counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6701) and the work area for specific control The power failure detection counter provided at 221 is cleared to "0" (step S6702).

  Thereafter, processing for reading information of the power failure signal received at the input port of the MPU 62 is executed (step S6703). In this case, when a power failure signal (power failure signal at LOW level) corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received, “0” information is stored in the input port as non-power failure information, When the power failure signal (power failure signal at HI level) corresponding to the occurrence of the power supply interruption is received, the information “1” is stored in the input port as the power interruption occurrence information. In step S6703, processing of reading the information of the power failure signal into the register of the main CPU 63 is executed.

  If the information of the power failure signal read in step S6703 corresponds to the occurrence of power failure (occurrence of power failure) (step S6704: YES), the numerical information of the power failure detection counter is incremented by 1 (step S6705). If a negative determination is made in step S6704, or if the process of step S6705 is performed, the numerical information of the repetition counter is decremented by 1 (step S6706). Then, it is determined whether the numerical information of the repetition counter after the one subtraction is “0” (step S6707). When negative determination is carried out in step S6707, it returns to step S6703 and repeats the process of step S6703-step S6706. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S6707, the process proceeds to step S6708.

  In step S6708, it is determined whether the current numerical value information of the power failure detection counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of times corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure. If it is less than the trigger reference number of times, the main power failure information storage process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the number of times is equal to or more than the trigger reference number, the power failure process of step S6709 to step S6712 is executed.

  Specifically, first, the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S6709). As a result, when the power failure process is normally executed and the storage of information in the main RAM 65 is normally performed, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted, it is for the specific control. The power failure flag of the work area 221 is set to "1".

  Thereafter, checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S6710). In this case, the storage area in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 to be calculated when calculating the checksum becomes the checksum calculation target in step S6604 of the main process (FIG. 100). It is the same as the storage area in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. In addition, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum, an area in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically, the setting value counter )It is included. Then, the calculated checksum is stored in the storage area for storing the checksum in the specific control work area 221, and is stored in the storage area excluded from the checksum calculation target.

  Thereafter, all the information on the output port in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to "0" (step S6711), and the access to the main RAM 65 is inhibited (step S6712). Then, the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and processing can not be performed.

  Since the power failure information storage process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process, it is not necessary to execute the process from the middle of the timer interrupt process after the power recovery. As a result, there is no need to store the address of the process being executed at the time of the power failure as stack information in the main RAM 65, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the process at the time of the power failure.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 100), when a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S6607). In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the specific control except for the area (specifically, the setting value counter) in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control The initial setting is executed while clearing the work area 221 for “0”. As a result, the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, and therefore the success or failure lottery is performed regardless of the success or failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed. Furthermore, the common view display portion 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utility symbol 34a is in a closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. Further, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is executed. Further, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”.

  On the other hand, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are “0” even if “1” is not set in the power failure flag because the power failure process was not executed normally. It becomes possible not to be cleared. Also, even if an abnormality occurs in the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 clear "0". It is possible to prevent it.

  After executing the clear processing at the time of non-updating in step S6607 when a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, the pachinko machine is confirmed by confirming the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether the set value of 10 is normal (step S6608). Specifically, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value counter is normal if the setting value is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is abnormal if it is “0” or 7 or more. Determine that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6608: NO), processing (steps S6619 to S6621) for newly setting a set value described later is executed. Thereby, even if the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S6607) by making a negative determination in step S6603 or step S6606, it is possible to monitor whether the setting value is normal or not. When the set value is abnormal, it becomes possible to reset the set value.

  If the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), the power on setting process is executed (step S6609). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is inhibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S6610 is completed after the process of step S6609 is completed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. Thus, when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power on setting process of step S6609 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S6610 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start processing for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S6610 to step S6613. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of step S6610 to step S6613 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining process of the step S6610 to the step S6613 is a non-periodic process that is performed non-periodically. In step S6610 to step S6613, the same process as step S113 to step S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is started, “1” is not set in the power failure flag of the work area 221 for specific control, or the checksums do not match. In this case, if the setting value is normal (step S6608: YES) after executing the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the process proceeds to a process for advancing the game. As a result, even if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not normally executed, the power supply to the main CPU 63 is started after the power is turned on again. There is no need to do the OFF operation. In addition, even if an abnormality occurs in the check sum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the power supply is turned on and off again after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. There is no need to operate.

  If an affirmative determination is made in both step S6603 and step S6606, it is determined whether or not the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by confirming the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6614). ). Specifically, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value counter is normal if the setting value is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is abnormal if it is “0” or 7 or more. Determine that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6614: NO), processing (steps S6619 to S6621) for newly setting a set value, which will be described later, is executed.

  If the set value is normal (step S6614: YES), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615), and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key It is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S6617), and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S6616). It is determined whether there is any (step S6618).

  In the present embodiment, a front door open sensor 95 for detecting whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the front door open sensor The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. When the main CPU 63 receives the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, it specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a main body opening sensor 96 for detecting whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main body opening sensor The detection result of 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11. If there is, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and when the opening detecting signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, the gaming machine It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state.

  If the reset button 68c is not pressed (NO in step S6615), the power on setting process is performed in step S6609, and the remaining processes in step S6610 to step S6613 are repeated. That is, when the reset button 68c is not pressed, the process proceeds to a process for controlling the progress of the game without executing the process of clearing the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. .

  If it is determined that the reset button 68c has been pressed (YES in step S6615) and if the negative determination is made in any of steps S6616 to S6618, after the non-setting update clear process is performed (step S6607) ), On condition that the setting value is normal (step S6608: YES), the processing shifts to processing for controlling the progression of the game in step S6609 and subsequent steps. The processing contents of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update are as described above.

  If it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step S6615) and the determination in step S6616 to step S6618 is affirmative, processing for updating the setting value is executed. Also, when it is determined in step S6608 or step S6614 that the setting value is abnormal, processing for updating the setting value is executed.

  Specifically, first, copy processing of the setting value is executed (step S6619). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify a setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information on the setting value counter is cleared to “0” in the setting updating process (step S6620) executed after this, the main process before the setting information updating process is executed is performed. It becomes possible to grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

  Thereafter, the clear processing at the time of setting update is executed (step S6620). In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “0” except for the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode in the specific control work area 221 is the high probability mode and the copy area. Clear and execute initial settings. As a result, the game times are not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed. Further, the common drawing display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utilities 34a are closed. It will be a certain situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. In addition, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is executed. Further, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to “0”. Further, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”, and the initial setting is executed.

  On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, the area indicating whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode is not cleared to “0”. Therefore, even if the setting value update process (step S6621) is executed, the lottery mode Can be maintained in the mode before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to “0” in the clearing process at the time of setting update, it is possible to specify the setting value which was set before the clearing process at the setting update time is executed. The configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and the setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may not be cleared to "0" in the clearing process at the time of setting updating. In the clear processing, an area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode may be cleared to “0”.

  In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the setting value update process capable of changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to "0". It will be possible to

  Thereafter, in step S6621, setting value update processing is performed. The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as the setting value update processing (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. After executing the set value update process, the process proceeds to a process for controlling the progress of the game after step S6609.

  According to the above configuration, when the setting value is abnormal, the setting value update process is started without requiring a special operation by the game hall manager. And when setting value update processing is completed, it shifts to processing for controlling progress of a game. This makes it possible to play a game in a situation where the setting value is normal. On the other hand, in order to complete the setting value update process, since it is necessary to turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a by the setting key, etc., the setting value is arbitrarily set by persons other than the game hall manager and the game is started. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event of

  Next, a configuration for forcibly stopping the progress of the game when the main CPU 63 can not properly execute various processing will be described. FIG. 102 (a) is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the MPU 62. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64 and a main RAM 65, and a reset signal output unit 251 and a program monitoring unit 252. The reset signal output unit 251 has a function of outputting a reset signal to the main CPU 63. Specifically, when the operation power is supplied from the power and emission control device 78 and the output disabling condition is not satisfied, the reset signal output unit 251 uses the reset signal as the HI level signal on the main side. The reset signal is output to the main CPU 63 when it is output to the CPU 63 and the output disabling condition is satisfied even when the operating power is not supplied from the power and emission control device 78 or even when the operating power is supplied. Do not output to The main CPU 63 executes various processes when the operation power is supplied from the power and emission control device 78 and the reset signal is received from the reset signal output unit 251, and the power and emission control device 78 Even when the operation power is supplied, various processes are not executed when the reset signal is not received from the reset signal output unit 251. In the case where the main CPU 63 receives no reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 while operating power is supplied from the power and emission control device 78, the main CPU 63 switches to a state in which the reset signal is received. Start the main processing (FIG. 100).

  The program monitoring unit 252 has a function of monitoring whether or not the main CPU 63 can execute various processes normally. Specifically, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter provided in the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value. The program counter is for storing an address at which an instruction to be executed in the main CPU 63 is stored. Possible values of the program counter are determined, and the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter is a value other than the possible value. When the program monitoring unit 252 writes information in the work area 221 for specific control by the load instruction, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the address designated as the area of the writing destination is an abnormal address. When the program monitoring unit 252 reads out information from the work area 221 for specific control according to a load instruction, the program monitoring unit 252 may monitor whether the address designated as the area to be read is an abnormal address.

  When the program monitoring unit 252 determines that the value of the program counter is an abnormal value, or when it is determined that the address specified when writing information by a load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output unit 251 Output a monitoring error signal to. When the reset signal output unit 251 receives the monitoring abnormality signal from the program monitoring unit 252, the output of the reset signal is temporarily stopped even if the operation power is supplied from the power and emission control device 78, and the stop is continued. After stopping the output of the reset signal over the period, the output of the reset signal is resumed. The stop continuation period is a period sufficient for the main CPU 63 to specify that the output of the reset signal is stopped. Thereby, when the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value, or when the address designated when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, the main CPU 63 is turned off through the reset signal. The main process is to be executed at

  FIG. 102 (b) is a time chart showing how the reset signal output unit 251 outputs a reset signal. FIG. 102 (b1) shows a period during which operating power is supplied from the power and emission control device 78, and FIG. 102 (b2) shows a period during which a reset signal is outputted from the reset signal output unit 251. b3) shows the timing at which the program monitoring unit 252 outputs a monitoring error signal.

  First, the case where the monitoring abnormality signal is not output from the program monitoring unit 252 will be described. As shown in FIG. 102 (b1) at the timing of t1, the supply of operating power from the power and emission control device 78 to the MPU 62 is started. At timing t2, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (b1) at timing t3, the supply of operating power from the power and emission control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 102 (b2), reset is performed at timing t4. The output of the reset signal from the signal output unit 251 is stopped.

  Next, the case where the monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 will be described. Supply of operating power from the power and emission control device 78 to the MPU 62 is started at time t5 as shown in FIG. 102 (b1) Thus, the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is started as shown in FIG. 102 (b) at the timing of t6. Thereafter, at time t7, the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address designated when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, as shown in FIG. 102 (b3). The monitoring abnormality signal is output from the unit 252 to the reset signal output unit 251. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102 (b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is temporarily stopped at the timing of t7, and resumed at the timing of t8 thereafter.

  In this case, the main CPU 63 stops the execution of various processes at the timing of t7, and starts the main process (FIG. 100) at the timing of t8 at which the rising of the reset signal is confirmed. However, since the power failure process is not executed when the main CPU 63 stops the execution of various processes, the main process (FIG. 100) is performed with the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 not set to "1". Is started, and the main processing (FIG. 100) is started without storing the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. Therefore, in the main process (FIG. 100), a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, and the clear process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed. Thus, when the program monitoring unit 252 outputs a monitoring abnormality signal because the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address designated when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, It is possible to execute a clear process at the time of non-setting update in which a predetermined storage area of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". .

  However, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even if the program monitoring unit 252 outputs a monitoring abnormality signal because the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address designated when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, It is possible to prevent the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to “0”.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 102 (b), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102 (b1) at the timing of t9, the supply of the operating power from the power and emission control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped. As shown in FIG. 102 (b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is stopped.

  Next, timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, in a cycle of 4 milliseconds) in a state where the process of step S6610 to step S6613 is performed in the main process (FIG. 100). The program corresponding to the timer interrupt process is set in the program for specific control.

  In steps S6801 to S6819, the same processes as steps S5201 to S5219 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86) in the twenty-second embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. Thereafter, setting monitoring processing is executed (step S6820). FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing setting monitoring processing.

  Whether or not the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal is determined by confirming the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6901). Specifically, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value counter is normal if the setting value is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is abnormal if it is “0” or 7 or more. Determine that there is.

  If the set value is abnormal (step S6901: NO), copy processing of the set value is first executed (step S6902). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify a setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the execution of the setting value update process to be executed later.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that the setting value abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S6903). The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting value abnormality by receiving the abnormality command, and the speaker unit 54 generates an audio of "setting value abnormality detected." Make it output. In addition, a character image of "setting value abnormality detected" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68 b may be pressed, or the reset button 68 c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the setting value abnormality has occurred.

  Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed (step S6904). That is, every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is executed, whether or not an abnormality occurs in the set value is monitored, and when the occurrence of the set value abnormality is identified, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is reset Perform setting value update processing to The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as the setting value update processing (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated one step at a time, and the out-port detection sensor 48a detects the game ball, whereby the selected set value is determined. The set value in the middle of updating and the set value determined are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Thereafter, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the termination condition of the setting value update processing is satisfied. After executing the set value update process, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103).

  Here, in the setting value update process, it is not determined that the end condition is satisfied only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. If it is determined that the end condition is satisfied. When the setting value updating process is executed in the setting monitoring process, the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value updating process, so that the ending condition of the setting value updating process is satisfied. It is necessary to perform the OFF operation after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion unit 68a and performing the ON operation once. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value update process from ending even though the regular operation by the game hall manager has not been performed.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the end condition of the set value update process is satisfied, the step S5111 in the set value update process (FIG. 85) is executed to make it possible. It is compared whether the setting value stored in the copy area in the specific control work area 221 is the same as the setting value currently set in the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value set before the set value update process (step S6904) is performed is the same as the set value set in the present set value update process. If the two setting values are the same (step S5112: NO), the setting maintenance notification described above is performed by executing the notification process (step S5113) when not changing. On the other hand, if the setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the setting change notification described above is performed by executing the notification process (step S5114) at the time of change.

  In the configuration in which the setting value update process is executed when the setting value abnormality occurs, the setting value set before the setting value update process is performed and the setting value update process are set. If the setting value is the same, the setting maintenance notification is performed. As a result, even if the setting value update process is executed due to the setting value abnormality, the setting maintenance notification is performed by resetting the setting value set in the previous situation, and the setting value update due to the setting value abnormality is performed. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the setting value has not changed even if the processing is executed. By the way, since it is general to record the setting value of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall, the setting value updating process by the setting value abnormality may be executed so as to become the recorded setting value. It is possible.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), after the setting monitoring process is executed in step S6820, a management process is executed in step S6821. When executing the management process, a program of a subroutine corresponding to the management process set in the program for specific control is executed. However, when executing the program of the subroutine, after execution of the management process The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process in step (1) is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction. Then, when the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing management processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S7001 to S7005 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), interrupt disable is set (step S7001). In this way, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) corresponding to the specific control is prevented from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process described later which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

  After that, as “LD (_PSWBUF), PSW”, the load instruction saves the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the PSW buffer set in the specific control work area 221 (step S7002). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, and an input / output instruction. By saving the information of such a flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution processing is started, the flag register of the state before the call of the subroutine or the change of the subroutine after the start of the subroutine is performed. It is possible to save information in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program is read out to start the management execution process (step S7003). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  If it returns to the program for management processing after execution of management execution processing, it is saved in the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S7002 as "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" by the load instruction. The information of the flag register is restored to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7004). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7002 was previously performed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted, the interrupt permission is set (step S7005). This enables new execution of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 executes the non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the management execution process.

  Steps S7101 to S7108 and steps S7110 to S7116 execute the same processes as steps S4501 to S4515 of the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment. In step S7109, another monitoring process is executed. When executing another monitoring process, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the other monitoring process set in the non-specific control program is executed. However, when executing the program of the subroutine, after the execution of another monitoring process The information for specifying the return address of the management execution process in the step is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by the push instruction. Then, when another monitoring process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. The processes of steps S7201 to S7206 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  In the separate monitoring process, it is determined whether the value of the pointer indicating the process position of the process being executed in the non-specific control program is a value exceeding the normal numerical range (step S7201). Also, the information stored in the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 clearly becomes abnormal information. It is determined whether or not (step S7202). For example, if the value of the normal winning combination counter 231a in the normal counter area 231 is 1000 or more despite the value of the normal out counter 231e being "0", it is determined that the abnormality is present. In addition, it is determined whether the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is clearly abnormal information (step S7203). For example, if any one of the 62nd to 64th parameters is not "0" although the 61st parameter is "0", it is judged as abnormal.

  If an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S7201 to S7203, it is assumed that an information abnormality has occurred in the non-specific control work area 223, and partial clear processing of the non-specific control work area 223 is executed. (Step S7204). In the partial clearing process, the storage area other than the management start flag is cleared to "0" in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control work area 223.

  Also, by not clearing the management start flag to "0", it becomes possible to maintain the state in which "1" is already set in the management start flag, and the pachinko machine 10 is already continued in the game hall. It is possible to prevent the regulation of the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the collection of history information despite being used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In step S7204, the entire non-specific control work area 223 may be cleared to "0", including the management start flag.

  In step S7204, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". In the stack area 224 for non-specific control, information of various registers used in the process corresponding to the specific control is saved in steps S7102 to S7107 in the management execution process (FIG. 106). In this case, by not clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0", the information of the various registers used in the process corresponding to this specific control, which is the stack area for non-specific control It becomes possible not to erase the information saved in 224. Also, the stack area 224 for non-specific control stores information on the return address of the management execution process (FIG. 106) after the end of the separate monitoring process, but the stack area 224 for non-specific control By not clearing it, it is possible to prevent the information of this return address from being erased.

  Thereafter, the initial setting process is executed (step S7205). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed on the storage area which is the target of “0” clear in step S7204 in the non-specific control work area 223.

  Thereafter, the clear notification process is executed (step S7206). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81. By receiving the command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear of the non-specific control work area 223, and “the history information is forcibly cleared from the speaker unit 54. Sound is output. In addition, a character image "History information has been forcibly cleared" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68 b may be pressed, or the reset button 68 c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the non-specific control work area 223 is forcibly cleared.

  If negative determination is made in all of steps S7201 to S7203, or if the process of step S7206 is executed, the separate monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the monitoring execution process (FIG. 106).

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the program monitoring unit 252 specifies that the specified address is an abnormal address when writing information according to a load instruction, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, thereby the main CPU 63 Then, the main process (FIG. 100) is executed as in the case where the supply of operating power is newly started. When the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is not set to “1” and the checksum at the time of the power failure is stored in the specific control work area 221 Since it is not performed, the clear processing (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is forcibly executed. In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the storage area other than the storage area where the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is stored is cleared to "0" in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control “0” is cleared, and further initialization processing of these areas is executed. As a result, if there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 may be used. On the other hand, it is possible to eliminate the information abnormality by executing the “0” clear process and the initial setting process.

  When the program monitoring unit 252 determines that the value of the program counter of the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value, the reset signal output unit 251 performs OFF → ON of the reset signal to operate the main CPU 63 of the operating power The main process (FIG. 100) is performed as in the case where the supply is newly started. When the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is not set to “1” and the checksum at the time of the power failure is stored in the specific control work area 221 Since it is not performed, the clear processing (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is forcibly executed. In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the internal storage area of the main CPU 63 including various registers is cleared to “0”, and the initialization processing is executed. As a result, when there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, “0” clear and initialization processing are performed on the internal storage area of the main CPU 63. It becomes possible to eliminate the information abnormality.

  On the other hand, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thus, “0” is cleared in the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the work area 221 for specific control, and the stack area 222 for specific control when the information abnormality is specified in the program monitoring unit 252 as described above. Even when the initial setting process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information of the game history from being erased, and to prevent the information of the management result of the game history from being erased. It is possible to

  In the main processing (Fig. 100) when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power failure flag is not set to "1", or when the checksums do not match, clear at the time of non-configuration update In the configuration in which the process (step S6607) is executed, when the occurrence of information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring unit 252, “1” is not set in the power failure flag by performing OFF → ON of the reset signal. At the same time, the main process (FIG. 100) is executed in a situation where the checksum is not stored. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the information abnormality identified by the program monitoring unit 252 by using the configuration for resolving the information abnormality at the start of supply of the operating power.

  In the configuration where it is monitored whether or not the checksum is normal in the main processing (FIG. 100) when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the target for calculating the checksum is for specific control And the stack area 222 for specific control, and the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not included. As a result, it is possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in only the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65.

  If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the main process (FIG. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the clear process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed In the clear process at the time of the non-setting update, the process of clearing “0” in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is executed and the initial setting process is performed. On the other hand, the process of clearing "0" is not performed on the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Thus, the process corresponding to the specific control is not continuously executed in the state as it is despite the occurrence of the information abnormality in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. In the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, “0” is cleared up to the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control of the main RAM 65, triggered by the information abnormality. It becomes possible not to do so.

  In the power failure time process (steps S6709 to S6712) of the power failure information storage process (FIG. 101), the checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. The checksum is not calculated for the storage area corresponding to the nonspecific control of. This makes it possible to prevent the processing period required to complete the power failure processing from becoming excessively long.

  When an occurrence of abnormality is specified for the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, non-specific control is supported In the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) which is a process to be performed, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and the initialization process is executed. Thereby, the processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed in a state where the information of non-specific control work area 223 is held as it is despite the occurrence of some abnormality in non-specific control work area 223 It is possible to prevent Moreover, since the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the process of initializing it are executed by the process corresponding to non-specific control, the updating of the information in the work area 223 for non-specific control is performed. It becomes possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from being interposed.

  In the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, monitoring is performed as to whether or not an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and when an abnormality occurs. In the process, the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the process of initializing it are executed. Thereby, a series of processes in processing corresponding to non-specific control, monitoring whether or not an abnormality occurs in the non-specific control work area 223, and execution of initialization of the non-specific control work area 223 It becomes possible to carry out.

  When an occurrence of an abnormality is specified for the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control, Although the process of clearing “0” and the process of initializing the work area 223 are executed, the process of clearing “0” and the process of initializing the stack area 224 for nonspecific control are not executed. Thereby, while making it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control work area 223, information and management of the various registers used in the process corresponding to the specific control saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 It is possible to prevent the information on the return address after the processing is finished being erased.

  The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and initializing the process is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is "0". The process of clearing and initializing is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as storage areas dedicated to the process corresponding to the specific control, and the non-specific control is also performed for such initialization processing. It becomes possible for the work area 223 to be treated as a dedicated storage area of processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  In the main process (FIG. 100), it is configured to monitor whether the set value is normal or not in step S6608 and step S6614. However, the process of monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is The configuration may not be performed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power which is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Also, even if the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is not monitored whether the set value is normal, the timer interrupt executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. Since whether or not the set value is normal is monitored in the setting monitoring process (step S6820) of the process (FIG. 103), it is possible to cope with the case where the set value is abnormal.

  Further, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is not limited to the configuration executed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is started, and for example, the timing when the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is defined as plural The setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed every time it is executed a number of times (for example, 10000 times). In this case, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency of the monitoring while regularly monitoring whether the set value is normal.

  The setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed in the remaining process (steps S6610 to S6613) in the main process (FIG. 100). In this case, it is possible to monitor whether the set value is normal or not by using the idle time in the situation where the timer interrupt process is not executed.

  The setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed when the game play is newly started. More specifically, when the game play is newly started, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed before the acceptance determination process is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the success or failure determination process from being executed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

  In addition, when it is specified in the setting monitoring process (step S6820) that the setting value is abnormal, the setting control process (step S6904) is replaced with a configuration for shifting to the setting value updating process, and provided in the work area 221 for specific control. Alternatively, the game stop flag may be set to "1". In this case, the process of steps S6808 to S6821 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S6807 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), so that the progress of the game is stopped if the set value is abnormal. It becomes. However, since the processes in steps S6801 to S6806 are executed, power outage monitoring is executed, and updating of the random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and further Fraud detection is performed. In addition, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, execution of the setting value update process may be prompted by executing a notification indicating that the setting value should be updated. In this case, the game stop flag is cleared to "0" by the manager of the gaming hall having confirmed the notification performing the power ON operation in a mode in which the setting value update processing is executed after the power OFF operation. As a result, the state in which the progress of the game is stopped is cancelled, and the setting value update process is executed to set a normal setting value.

  If it is determined in the setting monitoring process (step S6820) that the setting value is abnormal, the main process (1) is set in the setting abnormality flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control 100) may be started, and in order to stop the progress of the game with the setting abnormality flag being set to “1” and turn off the state in which the progress of the game is stopped, the power is turned OFF → It is good also as composition which needs ON. In this case, in the main processing (FIG. 100), even if the operation for performing the setting value update processing is not performed, the setting is forcibly set if “1” is set in the setting abnormality flag. By performing the value updating process, it is possible to forcibly perform new setting of the setting value using the setting value updating process set in the main process (FIG. 100).

  Further, when the occurrence of an information abnormality is identified by the program monitoring unit 252 and the reset signal is forcibly turned ON from OFF, the initialization process is executed on the work area 221 for specific control. The setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may be "setting 1". In addition, when the occurrence of information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring unit 252 and the reset signal is forcibly turned ON from OFF, setting is performed after the initialization process is executed on the work area 221 for specific control. The value updating process may be executed.

  In addition, when the occurrence of an information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring unit 252, the clear processing (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed without the reset signal being forcedly turned from OFF to ON. Alternatively, the configuration may be configured to execute the clearing process (step S6620) and the setting value updating process (step S6621) at the time of setting update.

  Further, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607), the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1" by initializing the storage area storing the information of the setting value in the work area 221 for specific control. It may be configured, or may be configured to be a preset set value other than “setting 1”. As a result, when the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed, it becomes possible to set the value to a predetermined set value.

  In addition, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update (step S6607), the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0", but they are also cleared to "0" Good.

  Further, although the management start flag is not cleared to "0" in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the management start flag may be cleared to "0". In step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0". 234 may not be cleared to “0”.

  In step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the process of clearing "0" and the initial setting process are performed not only on the non-specific control work area 223 but also on the non-specific control stack area 224. It is good also as composition. In this case, it is used in the process corresponding to the specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and the information of the return address of the management execution process in the stack area 224 for non-specific control after the end of another monitoring process. It is preferable not to erase information in various registers.

  Further, in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and when it is identified that an abnormality has occurred, it is for non-specific control The stack area 224 may be configured to execute “0” clear processing and initial setting processing. In this case, it is preferable not to erase the information of the return address of the management execution process after the end of another monitoring process in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control.

  Further, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are not limited to the configuration for calculating the checksum, and only the work area 221 for specific control is the target for calculating the checksum. Alternatively, only the stack area 222 for specific control may be the checksum calculation target.

The Thirty-First Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the thirtieth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirtieth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned thirtieth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the main processing performed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment. The processing of step S7301 to step S7322 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, power on wait processing is executed (step S7301). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for weight (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and initialization of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S7302).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 in the main RAM 65 (step S7303). If "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S7303: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7304). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as step S6604 of the main process (FIG. 100) in the above-mentioned thirty-th embodiment.

  Thereafter, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process performed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and stored in the specific control work area 221 The checksum for the stack area 222 is read out from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read-out checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7304 (step S7305). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S7306).

  When an affirmation judging is carried out at Step S7306, processing of Step S7307-Step S7320 is performed. In this case, the process contents of step S7307 to step S7314 are the same as step S6614 to step S6621 of the main process (FIG. 100) in the above-mentioned thirty-th embodiment, and step S7316 to step S7320 The same as step S6609 to step S6613 of the process (FIG. 100).

  When the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step S7308), when a negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S7315). The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is the same as step S6607 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the above-mentioned thirty-second embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, after the clear process at the time of non-setting update is performed, the process proceeds to steps S7316 to S7320 without determining whether the set value is normal. Although the clear process (step S7315) at the time of non-setting update is executed only when the negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, the process of steps S7309 to S7311 is not performed. Since it is determined in step S7307 whether or not the setting value is normal, it is not necessary to determine whether the setting value is normal after the clearing process at the time of non-setting update is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7303 or step S7306, that is, if "1" is not set in the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221, or if a checksum error occurs, clear processing in the event of an abnormality is executed. (Step S7321). FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing clear processing at the time of abnormality. The processes of steps S7401 to S7405 in the clearing process at the time of abnormality are executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, the process of clearing the specific control work area 221 is executed (step S7401). In the clear process, the work area for the specific control except the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for the specific control. At the same time, the CPU 221 clears “0” 221 and initializes the area cleared “0”. As a result, the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, and therefore the success or failure lottery is performed regardless of the success or failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed. Furthermore, the common view display portion 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utility symbol 34a is in a closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased.

  Thereafter, the process of clearing the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S7402). In the clear processing, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is performed.

  After that, as “PUSH PSW”, the information on the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction (step S7403). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, and an input / output instruction. By saving the information of such a flag register before the start of the program of the subroutine corresponding to the clear process for non-specific control, the flag of the state before the call of the subroutine or the change of the subroutine after the start of the subroutine It becomes possible to save the information of the register in the stack area 222 for specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

  Thereafter, the non-specific control clear process is started by reading out a program of a subroutine corresponding to the non-specific control clear process set in the non-specific control program (step S7404). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the clearing process at the time of abnormality after execution of the clearing process for non-specific control is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction. Then, when the clear process for non-specific control is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the clear process at the time of abnormality indicated by the return address.

  If it returns to the program of clear processing at the time of abnormality after execution of the clear processing for non-specific control, the flag register saved as "POP PSW" in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S7402 by the pop instruction. Is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7405). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7402 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a clear process for nonspecific control. The processing of steps S7501 to S7516 in the clearing process for nonspecific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using the nonspecific control program and the nonspecific control data.

  First, Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (u + 2)" by the load instruction (step S7501). In this case, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, the information of the last address in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is set in the stack pointer.

  After that, the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by the load instruction as “LD (_WABUF), WA” (step S 7502). Further, as “LD (_BCBUF), BC”, the information on the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the BC buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S 7503). Further, as “LD (_DEBUF), DE”, the load instruction saves the information of the DE register of the main CPU 63 in the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for nonspecific control (step S7504). Further, as “LD (_HLBUF), HL”, the information on the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the HL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by the load instruction (step S 7505). Also, as “LD (_IXBUF), IX”, the load instruction saves the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 to the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S 7506). Further, as “LD (_IYBUF), IY”, the load instruction saves the information of the IY register of the main CPU 63 to the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for nonspecific control (step S7507).

  In the registers of the main CPU 63, various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers exist in addition to the flag registers described above. In this case, in step S7502 to step S7507, each information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register which is a part of these various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. Are evacuated to the corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for nonspecific control. The amount of information in each of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is 2 bytes.

  These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register are processes corresponding to non-specific control. Partial clear processing of non-specific control work area 223 (step S7508) and initialization processing ( It is a register used in step S7509). The information set in such a register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the process for partially clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509) By doing this, it becomes possible to save the information of these registers used for specific control before non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten in non-specific control, when the non-specific control is ended, the status of these registers is restored by restoring the information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 to these registers. It is possible to return to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  Also, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the non-specific control work area 223, the non-specific control work area 223 corresponding to non-specific control is processed. Information for WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in partial clear processing (step S7508) and initial setting processing (step S7509) is selectively used for nonspecific control By evacuating in the work area 223, it is possible to suppress the capacity secured for evacuating register information in the non-specific control work area 223. Therefore, while securing a large capacity of the non-specific control work area 223 which can be used at the time of partial clear processing of the non-specific control work area 223 (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509), It is possible to save such register information. Of course, among various general purpose registers, auxiliary registers and index registers in the main CPU 63, non-specific control is supported for registers other than WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register. The information set before the start of the process is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed.

  In addition, the capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224 can be reduced accordingly by saving the register information in the non-specific control stack area 224 instead of the non-specific control stack area 224. It becomes possible. Also, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the writing order of the information is read first from the later information as described above, so the reading order of the information may be shifted due to some sort of noise. If this happens, all subsequent read order information will be restored to different registers. The occurrence probability of such an event becomes higher as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the non-specific control work area 223, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned event even if there is much information to be saved. .

  After the processing of step S7502 to step S7507 is executed, partial clear processing of the non-specific control work area 223 is executed (step S7508). In the partial clear process, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, a storage area other than the storage area where information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control is saved. Clear "0". Specifically, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer among the storage areas of the non-specific control work area 223 are not cleared to "0", but storage other than these various buffers is performed. Clear the area to "0".

  In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control work area 223. Also, by not clearing "0" the storage area where the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  In step S7508, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". The stack area 224 for nonspecific control stores information on the return address of the clear process (FIG. 109) at the time of abnormality after the clear process for nonspecific control is completed, but the stack area for nonspecific control is stored. By not clearing “0” to 224, it is possible to prevent the information of this return address from being erased.

  Thereafter, the initial setting process is executed (step S 7509). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed on the storage area which is the target of “0” clear in step S7508 in the non-specific control work area 223.

  Thereafter, as “LD SP, Y (r + α)”, return to specific control to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. Y (r + α) is set as a fixed address at time (step S7510). The address Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten on the WA register of the main CPU 63 as “LD WA, (_WABUF)” (step S 7511). Further, as “LD BC, (_BCBUF)”, the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 223 for nonspecific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S 7512). Further, as “LD DE, (_DEBUF)”, the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7513). Further, the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)" (step S7514). Further, the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)" (step S7515). Further, as “LD IY, (_IYBUF)”, the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7516). By executing the processing of steps S7511 to S7516, processing corresponding to non-specific control of each information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of main side CPU 63 is started. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the event.

  According to the above configuration, in the main process (FIG. 108) executed when the supply of operation power to main side CPU 63 is started, the power failure flag is not set to “1”, or the checksum is abnormal. In the case where there is an error, by executing the clear processing at the time of abnormality (step S7321), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for nonspecific control It is cleared and initialized. If an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, there is a possibility that the information abnormality also occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The work area 223 is also initialized so that the process corresponding to the non-specific control is not executed in the state as it is despite the information abnormality occurring in the non-specific control work area 223 It is possible to

  Even if the process of clearing "0" in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the process of initializing are executed in the clearing process (step S7321) when abnormal, the work area for non-specific control The information of various registers used in the process corresponding to the specific control saved in H.223 is not cleared to “0”. Thus, the process of clearing "0" for the non-specific control work area 223 while not erasing the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. And, it becomes possible to execute the process of initializing.

  Even if the process of clearing “0” in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the process of initializing are executed in the clearing process (step S7321) at the time of abnormality, the stack area 224 for non-specific control The process of clearing “0” and the process of initializing are not executed for. This makes it possible to prevent the information on the return address after the end of the non-specific control clear process (FIG. 110) from being erased.

  The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is The process of clearing “0” and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to the nonspecific control. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are both treated as dedicated storage areas for the process corresponding to the specific control with respect to the process of clearing “0” and the process of initializing. It becomes possible to treat the specific control work area 223 as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  The work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are not limited to the configuration for calculating the checksum, and only the work area 221 for specific control is the checksum calculation target. Alternatively, only the stack area 222 for specific control may be the checksum calculation target.

  In addition, the work area 223 for non-specific control may be a calculation target of checksum. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be configured to calculate checksums, and the stack area 222 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control are checked. The configuration may be a calculation target of the sum, or the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be a calculation target of checksum.

  In addition, the stack area 224 for nonspecific control may be a calculation target of checksum. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be the calculation target of the checksum, and the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are checked. The configuration may be a calculation target of the sum, or the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be a calculation target of checksum.

  In addition, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be a calculation target of the checksum. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be the calculation target of the checksum, and the stack area 222 for specific control The work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be the calculation target of the checksum, and the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the non-specific control The work area 223 and the stack area 224 for nonspecific control may be a calculation target of the checksum.

  Further, in step S7508 and step S7509 in the clear process for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the process of clearing "0" for not only the non-specific control work area 223 but also the non-specific control stack area 224 It may be configured to execute the initial setting process. In this case, it is preferable not to erase the information of the return address of the clearing process at the time of abnormality after the termination of the clearing process for nonspecific control.

  Further, although the management start flag is cleared to “0” in step S7508 in the non-specific control clear process (FIG. 110), the management start flag may not be cleared to “0”. Further, in step S7508 in the clearing process (FIG. 110) for nonspecific control, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0". The calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

The Thirty-Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration relating to monitoring of an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 using a checksum is different from that of the above-described thirtieth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirtieth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned thirtieth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process according to the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103). Further, the processing of step S7601 to step S7613 in the power failure information storage processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  In step S7601 to step S7608 in the power failure information storage process, the same process as step S6701 to step S6708 of the power failure information storage process (FIG. 101) in the thirtieth embodiment is executed. If the occurrence of a power failure is identified, an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, and the power failure processing of steps S7609 to S7613 is executed.

  Specifically, first, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7609). As a result, when the power failure process is normally executed and the storage of information in the main RAM 65 is normally performed, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted, it is for the specific control. The power failure flag of the work area 221 is set to "1".

  Thereafter, checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7610). In this case, the storage areas in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 to be calculated when calculating the specific control checksum are the step S7701 of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) described later. The storage area is the same as the storage area in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 which are the target of calculation of the checksum for specific control. In addition, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the check sum for this specific control, an area in which information of a set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically Contains a set value counter). And it is a storage area for storing the checksum for the said specific control in the work area 221 for specific control which excludes the calculated checksum for specific control from the calculation object of the checksum for specific control It is stored in the existing memory area.

  Thereafter, checksums are calculated for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 (step S7611). In this case, the storage area in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 to be calculated when calculating the non-specific control checksum is a check sum monitoring process described later (FIG. 112) In step S7706, the storage areas in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 which are targets for calculation of the non-specific control checksum are the same. The calculated non-specific control check sum is a storage area for storing the non-specific control check sum in the specific control work area 221, and is excluded from the calculation target of the specific control checksum. It is stored in the memory area being stored.

  Thereafter, all the information on the output port in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to "0" (step S7612), and the access to the main RAM 65 is inhibited (step S7613). Then, the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and processing can not be performed.

  Next, the checksum monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The checksum monitoring process is executed instead of steps S6604 to S6606 in the main process (FIG. 100). Further, the processes of steps S7701 to S7711 in the checksum monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, a checksum for specific control is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7701). The method of calculating the check sum for the specific control is the same as step S7610 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 111). Thereafter, the specific control checksum calculated in step S7610 of the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is specified. While reading out from the control work area 221, the read specific control checksum is compared with the specific control checksum calculated in step S7701 (step S7702). Then, it is determined whether the checksums for specific control match (step S7703).

  If the checksums for specific control do not match (step S7703: NO). Clear processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7704). In the clear process, the work area for the specific control except the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for the specific control. At the same time, clear 221 and execute initialization. As a result, the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, and therefore the success or failure lottery is performed regardless of the success or failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed. Furthermore, the common view display portion 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utility symbol 34a is in a closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. Further, in the clear processing, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”, and the initialization is executed. Further, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is executed (step S 7705).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703 or the process of step S7705 is executed, a checksum for nonspecific control is calculated for the nonspecific control work area 223 and the nonspecific control stack area 224 (step S7706). The method of calculating the checksum for the nonspecific control is the same as step S7611 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 111). After that, the non-specific control checksum calculated in step S7611 of the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for specific control is used. While reading from the work area 221 for specific control, the read non-specific control checksum is compared with the non-specific control checksum calculated in step S 7706 (step S 7707). Then, it is determined whether the non-specific control check sums match (step S7708).

  If the checksums for non-specific control do not match (step S7708: NO), the information on the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction as "PUSH PSW" Step S7709). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes according to the execution result of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, and an input / output instruction. By saving the information of such a flag register before the start of the program of the subroutine corresponding to the clear process for non-specific control, the flag of the state before the call of the subroutine or the change of the subroutine after the start of the subroutine It becomes possible to save the information of the register in the stack area 222 for specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

  Thereafter, the non-specific control clear process is started by reading out the program of the subroutine corresponding to the non-specific control clear process set in the non-specific control program (step S7710). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the check sum monitoring process after execution of the non-specific control clear process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by the push instruction. Then, when the clear process for non-specific control is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the program of the monitoring process of the checksum indicated by the return address.

  If the program returns to the program for clear processing at the time of abnormality after execution of the clear processing for non-specific control, the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S7709 as "POP PSW" Is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7711). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7709 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing clear processing for nonspecific control. The processing of steps S7801 to S7818 in the clearing process for nonspecific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using the nonspecific control program and the nonspecific control data.

  In steps S7801 to S7807 in the clearing process for nonspecific control, the same processes as steps S7501 to S7507 in the clearing process for nonspecific control (FIG. 110) in the thirty-first embodiment are executed.

  Thereafter, partial clear processing of the non-specific control work area 223 is executed (step S7808). In the partial clear process, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, a storage area other than the storage area where information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control is saved. Clear "0". Specifically, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer among the storage areas of the non-specific control work area 223 are not cleared to "0", but storage other than these various buffers is performed. Clear the area to "0".

  In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control work area 223. Also, by not clearing "0" the storage area where the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the initial setting process is executed (step S7809). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed on the storage area which is the target of “0” clear in step S7808 in the non-specific control work area 223.

  Thereafter, partial clear processing of the stack area 224 for nonspecific control is executed (step S7810). In the partial clearing process, information on the return address of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) after the clearing process for nonspecific control is finished is stored among the storage areas of the stack area 224 for nonspecific control. Clear all storage areas other than the above storage area to "0". As a result, while the information on the return address of the check sum monitoring process (FIG. 112) after the non-specific control clear process is completed is not erased, the information abnormality in the non-specific control stack area 224 is prevented. It is possible to eliminate

  Thereafter, the initial setting process is executed (step S7811). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed on the storage area which is the target of “0” clear in step S7810 in the stack area 224 for nonspecific control.

  Thereafter, the processing of step S7812 to step S7818 is executed. The processes of steps S7812 to S7818 execute the same processes as steps S7510 to S7516 in the clearing process (FIG. 110) for nonspecific control in the thirty-first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, and the checksums for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 Calculated separately. As a result, it becomes possible to specify information abnormalities individually for each of the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 and the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control in the main RAM 65.

  If there is an error in the checksum for specific control, execute the processing of “0” clear processing and initialization processing for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and for non-specific control When there is an abnormality in the checksum, the processing of “0” clear and the initialization processing are executed on the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224. As a result, it is possible to narrow the targets on which the “0” clear process and the initial setting process are to be performed to the area in which the checksum abnormality is identified.

  The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is The process of clearing “0” and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to the nonspecific control. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as dedicated storage areas for the process corresponding to the specific control also with respect to the process of clearing "0" and the initialization process. The control work area 223 can be treated as a dedicated storage area of processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  Although the management start flag is cleared to “0” in step S7808 in the non-specific control clearing process (FIG. 113), the management start flag may not be cleared to “0”. Further, in step S7808 in the clearing process (FIG. 113) for nonspecific control, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0". The calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

The Thirty-Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S7901 to S7924 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, power on initialization processing is executed (step S7901). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for waiting (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S7902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), which is a process that is started up regularly interrupting the main process, is the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds) And setting the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, and the second interrupt cycle, which is a cycle shorter than the first interrupt cycle. (Specifically, 2 milliseconds).

  That is, in this embodiment, the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process exist as the timer interrupt process so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are activated by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. Also, in the situation where both the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing are not executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, then the second interrupt process and the second interrupt cycle do not matter Timer interrupt processing is started first. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process that is activated prior to the first timer interrupt process.

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63 Do. Further, in the internal function register setting process, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the random number counter C1 is executed in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles.

  After that, “1” is set in the start-up processing flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S7903). The start-up processing flag is a state where the first timer interrupt processing should be ended without executing various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing even if the first timer interrupt processing is started. Is a flag for specifying the main CPU 63. Even if the first timer interrupt process is activated, the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process are not executed by setting the flag during start-up process to “1”, and the first process is not performed. The timer interrupt process is ended.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S7904). Thus, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle. However, since “1” is set in the start-up processing flag in step S7903, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing is executed. The first timer interrupt process is ended without.

  Then, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7905). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the reset button 68 c is pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, although the setting key insertion portion 68 a and the reset button 68 c are provided in the main control device 60, the update button 68 b is not provided. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S7905: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1” (step S7906). When the power failure process is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later, the power failure flag is set to "1". The power failure flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the power failure process has been properly performed at the previous power-off time.

  If "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S7906: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7907). Although the method of calculating the checksum is arbitrary, the same calculation method as in the case where the checksum is calculated in the power failure process in the power failure information storage process (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later It has become a method. Although the checksum calculated in the power failure process is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control in which the checksum is stored is used for calculating the checksum. It is excluded from the storage area to be calculated.

  That is, at the time of calculation of the checksum, the storage area to be calculated which is a part of the storage area in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is the calculation target. In the storage area to be calculated, the checksum is calculated in the power failure process when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, and then the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed, and the process of step S7907 is performed. When power supply such as backup power to the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is continued until it is performed, basically, it is a storage area in which rewriting of information is not performed. Therefore, the information of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is not changed after the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is stopped and the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is resumed. In this case, the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are the same as immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. In addition, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum, an area in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically, the setting value counter )It is included. Note that the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not included in the calculation target of the checksum.

  Thereafter, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process performed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and stored in the specific control work area 221 The checksum for the stack area 222 is read out from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read-out checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7907 (step S7908). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S7909).

  If a negative determination is made in step S7906 or step S7909, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” or if the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step S7910). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later, the game stop flag is affirmed in step S8207 and the processes in steps S8208 to S8221 are not executed, that is, execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. It is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not it is a condition to be performed. By setting “1” to the game stop flag, by making an affirmative determination in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later, the processes in steps S8208 to S8221 are not executed. As a result, when the power failure process is not properly performed at the time of the previous power off and the power failure flag is not set to "1", the game progress is stopped, and In the case where at least one of the work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 does not match because the memory status of the information has changed since the previous power-off, the progress of the game is stopped. It will be

  In this case, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum, as described above, an area in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically, The set value counter is included. Therefore, if the setting value abnormality has occurred after the previous power off, the checksums will not match, and the progress of the game will be stopped.

  On the other hand, even in the situation where the gaming stop flag is set to "1", the processing of step S8202 to step S8206 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) is executed. Therefore, power failure monitoring is executed even when the progress of the game is stopped, and updating of the random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and further, Fraud detection is performed.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of the operation power supply is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S7911). The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power by receiving the abnormality command, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Output a voice. In addition, a character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is given when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

  The administrator of the gaming hall that has confirmed the above notification in a situation where the progress of the game is stopped temporarily suspends the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 and then resumes the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 In the case where the setting value updating process (step S7918) is performed in the case where the setting value changing process is performed, an operation is performed. This makes it possible to perform new setting of the setting value in the setting value update process (step S7918) when an abnormality occurs with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of supply of the operating power. .

  In particular, an area in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control as described above in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum (specifically, the setting values Since a counter is included, if there is an error in the checksum, there is a possibility that an error has occurred in the set value. On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the checksum as described above, the execution of the setting value updating process (step S7918) is prompted, so that the game is not performed with the abnormal setting value. It is possible to

  If the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (steps S7906 and S7909: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key. Then, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S7913). The front door opening sensor 95 is used to detect whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13 as in the thirtieth embodiment, and the gaming machine main body 12 is used for the outer frame 11. The main body opening sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not the main body is in the open state, as in the above-described thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7912: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the game machine main body is displayed with respect to the outer frame 11. If 12 is in the open state (step S7913: YES), the process for setting confirmation is executed (step S7914). In the setting confirmation process, the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are confirmed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 used to display various parameters that are management results of the game history. A process for displaying an indication of the current situation and indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing. The processing in steps S8001 to S8003 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S8001). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed. By setting “1” to the setting confirmation display flag, the display control corresponding to that is performed for the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described later. It will be. Thus, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 indicate that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed, and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 Is done.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF using the setting key (step S8002). In this case, the setting key insertion unit 68a may be configured to determine whether the ON state has been switched to the OFF state or may be configured to determine whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state. If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned OFF (step S8002: NO), the process of step S8002 is repeated.

  If the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF (step S8002: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S8003). Thus, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 indicate that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed, and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 Is released. In this case, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display indicating the management result of the game history is started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the operating power to the main CPU 63 In the situation where the main processing has been started after the supply of the key has been started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, so that the main processing enables the progress of the game. The setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, which is the situation before the execution, is being executed. This makes it possible to check the set value under a situation where a game is not being performed.

  Assuming that the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game is continued, for example, when the confirmation of the setting value is performed while the game is being performed, the setting value is being confirmed. There is a risk that transition to the open / close execution mode may occur. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball can not be launched toward the special power prize device 32 even though the open / close execution mode has been started. In addition, if the confirmation of the set value is performed during execution of the open / close execution mode, the open / close execution mode proceeds under the situation where the confirmation of the set value is performed. There is a risk that you can not launch the game ball towards the

  Assuming that the progress of the game is stopped when the confirmation of the set value is performed, if the confirmation of the set value is started in the situation where the game is being performed, the progress of the game is stopped halfway Processing may be complicated. For example, if confirmation of the set value is started during execution of the game run and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game, a process for stopping the game run is required. In this case, the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is stopped halfway when the confirmation of the set value is started, and the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is resumed when the confirmation of the set value is completed. If you try to do so, it will require more complicated processing. Further, for example, if confirmation of the setting value is started during execution of the open / close execution mode and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game halfway, processing for stopping the open / close execution mode is required. Moreover, if confirmation of the set value is started during execution of the variation display of the pattern in the common view display unit 38a and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game, the process for stopping the variation display of the pattern is It will be necessary. In addition, if confirmation of the setting value is started during execution of the open execution state of the portable electric utility product 34a and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game in the middle, processing for stopping the open execution state is necessary. Become. On the other hand, a configuration may be considered in which the setting value is checked after waiting for all the games to end, but in this case, the game times, the open / close execution mode, the variable display of symbols in the common view display unit 38a, and the public It is necessary to wait until the release execution state of the object 34a is not executed, which may increase the waiting time until the confirmation of the setting value is started.

  On the other hand, at the time of the supply start of the operation power which is the situation before the processing which enables the progress of the game is executed in the main processing which is executed when the supply of the operation power to the main side CPU 63 is started Since the setting confirmation process is performed in the situation where the process is being performed, the setting value is confirmed in the situation where the progress of the game is already stopped. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the confirmation of the set value in a situation where the game is in progress, and at the time of confirming the set value, the progress of the game is stopped halfway or the progress of the game is stopped. There is no need to wait for confirmation of the set value until Therefore, it becomes possible to check the set value appropriately.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 114), if the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step S7905), the RAM clear processing is executed (step S7915). In the RAM clear process, the work area for the specific control excluding the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. At the same time, clear 221 and execute initialization. As a result, the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, and therefore the success or failure lottery is performed regardless of the success or failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed. Furthermore, the common view display portion 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utility symbol 34a is in a closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. Further, in the RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is executed. Further, in the RAM clear process, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing (step S7902) of step S7902 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the RAM clear process, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to "0". As a result, it is possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" depending on the clear operation by the game hall manager.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7916), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outer frame 11 is It is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state (step S7917). The front door opening sensor 95 is used to detect whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13 as in the thirtieth embodiment, and the gaming machine main body 12 is used for the outer frame 11. The main body opening sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not the main body is in the open state, as in the above-described thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7916: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the game machine main body is displayed with respect to the outer frame 11. When 12 is in the open state (step S7917: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step S7918).

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing. The processing of steps S8101 to S8107 in the setting value update processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, "1" is set in the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S8101). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated. By setting “1” to the setting update display flag, display control corresponding to it is performed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described later on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be. As a result, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. It will be.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S8102). If the value of the set value counter is “0” or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8102, and “1” is set in the set value counter (step S8103). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8102 or the process of step S8103 is performed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off using the setting key (step S8104). In this case, the setting key insertion unit 68a may be configured to determine whether the ON state has been switched to the OFF state or may be configured to determine whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state.

  When the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned OFF (step S8104: NO), the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8105: YES) Is added 1 (step S8106). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one stage higher. When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8105: NO) or when the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to the process of step S8102, but in step S8102 If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, "1" is set in the set value counter in step S8103. As a result, when the reset button 68 c is pressed once under the condition of “setting 6”, the setting is returned to “setting 1”.

  If the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF (step S8104: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S8107). As a result, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The condition of being released is released. In this case, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display indicating the management result of the game history is started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while pressing the reset button 68c, whereby the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the main process is reset. The button 68c is pressed, and the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on. As a result, the content of the operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely connected to the execution of the RAM clear process (step S7915), and the RAM clear process (step S7915) is performed. It becomes possible to make the operation contents for generating easy to be understood for the game hall manager.

  Even when the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0", and the information of the set value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from being changed even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is performed.

  Not only does the power on operation of the pachinko machine 10 be performed while pressing the reset button 68c, and furthermore, the RAM clear processing is performed based on the power on operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key. Not only (step S7915) but also the setting value update processing (step S7918) is executed. Further, as described above, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is performed based on performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. To be executed. As a result, as the operation for executing the process relating to the setting value, it is possible to share the ON operation on the setting key insertion unit 68a. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating the process related to the setting value.

  Further, in the case where the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON by the setting key and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the processing for setting confirmation is executed and reset When the pressing operation of the button 68c is added, the setting value update process is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the processing to be executed different among the processing for setting confirmation and the processing for updating the setting value depending on the presence or absence of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing the desired process among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Further, by making the operation content for executing the setting value update process larger than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform the action of causing the setting value update process to be performed illegally.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 114), if the process of step S7911 is executed, if the negative determination is made in step S7912 or step S7913, if the process of step S7914 is executed, the negative in step S7916 or step S7917 If it is determined or if the process of step S7918 is executed, the startup processing in progress flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S7919). By clearing the in-progress processing flag to “0”, even if the first timer interrupt processing is activated, the state where various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing is not executed is cancelled. In step S7919, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S7920). The recovery command includes information indicating the number of pending information for the special view display unit 37a, information indicating the current status of the lottery mode, information indicating the current support mode, and indicating whether the open / close execution mode is being executed. Information and information indicating whether the game is being executed are included. These pieces of information are set based on the information stored in the specific control work area 221. The sound emission control device 81 receives the return command, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41, the light emission contents of the display light emitting unit 53, and the sound output contents of the speaker unit 54 correspond to various information set in the return command. The contents to be

  Here, when confirming the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to perform the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion unit 68a with the setting key. Then, for example, when it becomes necessary to check the set value during the game run, the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed during the game run, and thereafter the setting key insertion portion 68a is operated by the setting key The power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the ON operation is performed. In this case, since backup power is not supplied to the RAM provided in the sound emission control device 81, at the stage when the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, effects for the game circulation in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 The information for controlling the data is erased. On the other hand, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 and the clear processing of the main RAM 65 is not executed at the time of confirmation of the set value, the power OFF operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed during execution of the game run. Thereafter, when the power on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, the variation display of the pattern is displayed on the special view display portion 37a after the processing for setting confirmation is performed. Will be resumed. As a result, in the special view display unit 37a, although the variable display of the pattern is performed, a situation occurs in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed in the symbol display device 41.

  On the other hand, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 after the setting confirmation process is completed, and the return command includes information indicating whether or not the game is being executed. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the return command, the voice display control device 81 causes the symbol display device 41 to start variable display of symbols. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the situation where the variation display of the symbol is not performed in the symbol display device 41 although the variation display of the symbol is performed in the special view display unit 37a. . The variable display of the symbols is performed at a relatively high speed so that each symbol in the variable display becomes unidentifiable or hard to identify for the player. Further, the return command does not include the result of the success or failure determination processing of the game round to be resumed and the result of the distribution determination processing, and also does not include information indicating the end timing of the game round to be restarted. Therefore, when the voice light emission control device 81 starts the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 based on the return command, if the game turn to be resumed corresponds to the result, the next game turn is started. When the command to show the command or demo display is to be started by the symbol display device 41, the variation display of the symbol based on the return command is ended, and the display corresponding to the newly received command is started to be resumed If the game time corresponds to the jackpot result, when the opening command indicating the start of the opening / closing execution mode is received, the fluctuation display of the symbol based on the return command is ended and the opening effect is started.

  When the return command includes information indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed, the display control effect indicating that the voice emission control device 81 is in the open / close execution mode is started on the symbol display device 41. To be done. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the open / close execution mode is being executed.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S7921 to S7924. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process Remaining time will occur. Although this remaining time fluctuates in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S7921 to S7924 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining process of the step S7921 to the step S7924 is a non-periodic process that is executed non-periodically. In step S7921 to step S7924, the same process as step S113 to step S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, the first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first timer interrupt process is periodically activated at a cycle of 4 milliseconds which is the first interrupt cycle as described above. Further, a program corresponding to the first timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  First, it is determined whether "1" is set in the startup processing flag in the specific control work area 221 (step S8201). As already described, "1" is set in the start processing flag in step S7903 of the main processing (FIG. 114). Then, if “1” is set in the startup processing flag (step S8201: YES), the first timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the various processing of step S8202 to step S8221. Thereby, when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the main process (FIG. 114) is started, execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process is permitted early. Even if there are various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the first timer interrupt process until the process at the time of supply start of the operating power ends and execution of the process for controlling the progress of the game is permitted. It is possible to prevent execution.

  As already described, the start-up processing flag is cleared to “0” in step S7919 when the processing at the start of supply of the operating power ends in the main processing (FIG. 114). In the first timer interrupt process, when “1” is not set in the start-up process flag (step S8201: NO), the processes after step S8202 are executed.

  Steps S8202 to S8219 and step S8221 execute the same processes as steps S3701 to S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In this case, if it is determined that the power failure flag is not set to "1" in the main processing (FIG. 114) as already described (step S7906: NO), or if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S7906: S7909: NO), "1" is set to the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 (step S7910). If "1" is set in the game stop flag, although the processing of step S8201 to step S8206 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing, the processing of step S8208 to step S8221 is performed by making an affirmative determination in step S8207. Do not run As a result, when the power failure process is not properly performed at the time of the previous power off and the power failure flag is not set to "1", the game progress is stopped, and In the case where at least one of the work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 does not match because the memory status of the information has changed since the previous power-off, the progress of the game is stopped. It will be For example, firing of the game ball is prohibited by not executing the process of step S8212. In addition, execution of the game play and opening / closing execution mode is prohibited by not executing the process of step S8214. Further, since the process of step S8218 is not executed, the payout of the game ball is prohibited.

  On the other hand, even in the situation where the progress of the game is stopped in this way, the power failure monitoring in step S8202 is executed, and the per random number counter C1 in step S8203 and step S8204, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 Then, the update of the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the detection of fraud according to step S8206 is executed.

  In the first timer interrupt process, the setting monitoring process is executed in step S8220. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing setting monitoring processing. The processing of step S8301 to step S8303 in the setting monitoring processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  Whether or not the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal is determined by confirming the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8301). Specifically, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value counter is normal if the setting value is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is abnormal if it is “0” or 7 or more. Determine that there is.

  If the setting value is abnormal (step S8301: NO), "1" is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8302) as in step S7910 in the main process (FIG. 114). By setting “1” to the game stop flag, by making an affirmative determination in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the processes of step S8208 to step S8221 are not executed. Thus, when it is determined that the setting value is abnormal, the progress of the game is stopped. On the other hand, even in the situation where "1" is set to the game stop flag, the processing of step S8202 to step S8206 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) is executed, so the progress of the game is stopped. Even in the present situation, the power failure monitoring is performed, and the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and the detection of fraud is executed.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that the setting value is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S8303). The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting value abnormality by receiving the abnormality command, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output an audio saying "Please change the setting." . In addition, a character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step S7918) of the main process (FIG. 114) is performed. The above notification may be continued when it is turned off.

  The administrator of the gaming hall that has confirmed the above notification in a situation where the progress of the game is stopped temporarily suspends the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 and then resumes the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 In the case where the setting value updating process (step S7918) is performed in the case where the setting value changing process is performed, an operation is performed. This makes it possible to perform new setting of the setting value in the setting value updating process (step S7918) when the setting value abnormality occurs.

  Here, a monitoring process as to whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) periodically activated. This makes it possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even in a situation where a game is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the setting value is abnormal. Further, monitoring of whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed each time a monitoring opportunity occurs. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal.

  In the main process (FIG. 114), a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set. If a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is set in the process at the start of the operation power supply in the main process (FIG. 114), the power failure flag and the checksum at the start of the operation power supply It is necessary to monitor whether the set value is normal or not as well as to monitor, and the monitoring load becomes high. Furthermore, if it is attempted to execute the RAM clear process (step S7915) and the set value update process (step S7918) when it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of the supply of the operating power, only that process configuration Becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set in the main process (FIG. 114), the process configuration at the time of supply start of the operating power is preferable. It becomes possible to In addition, even if the process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power as described above, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is performed as described above. Since the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed, when the setting value is abnormal, it is possible to cope with it.

  In the configuration in which the first timer interrupt process is executed as described above, in the present embodiment, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is performed separately from the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) as the timer interrupt process as described above. While being present, the second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process even while the first timer interrupt process is being executed. In this case, although illustration is omitted in the first timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is inhibited and the timer interrupt process is permitted before and after each process of steps S8201 to S8221. For example, the timer interrupt process is prohibited before executing the lottery random number update process (step S8203), and the timer interrupt process is permitted after executing the lottery random number update process (step S8203). This makes it possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from being interrupted and activated while the lottery random number update process is being executed. Further, the timer interrupt process is inhibited before executing the special figure special power control process (step S8214), and the timer interrupt process is permitted after executing the special figure special power control process (step S8214). This makes it possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from being interrupted and activated while special image special power control process is being executed.

  Next, a configuration for controlling display of various display units by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 119 is a block diagram for describing a configuration for controlling display of various display units by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

  Targets for display control by the main CPU 63 include the special view display unit 37a, the special view hold display unit 37b, the common view display unit 38a, the common view hold display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 204 exist. Each of these is provided as a segment display unit in which a plurality of display segments by LEDs are arranged. These segment display units become a light emission state by setting data (for example, data “1” which is one of binary data) corresponding to a light emission state, and data corresponding to a light off state (for example, binary data) When the other data "0" is set, the light is turned off.

  The main control board 61 is provided with a first display circuit 261 corresponding to the special view display unit 37a, and a second display circuit 262 corresponding to the special view suspension display unit 37b. A third display circuit 263 is provided to correspond to the display unit 38a, and a fourth display circuit 264 is provided to correspond to the common view suspension display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are provided. A fifth display circuit 265 is provided in correspondence to 204. In the eleventh embodiment, the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 are provided on the main control board 61 in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourth notification displays 201 to 204, and However, in the present embodiment, the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 are not provided.

  The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special view display unit 37a. As a result, each display segment of the special view display unit 37 a is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261. In this case, although the first display circuit 261 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all “0” when the predetermined period elapses. It will approach the state of Therefore, the display segment of the special view display unit 37a that is in the light emitting state according to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261 has a predetermined period elapsed without new display data being provided to the first display circuit 261. It will be turned off gradually by doing. Moreover, not only when the display content of the special view display unit 37a is changed but also when the display content of the special view display unit 37a is not changed due to such a configuration, the process of outputting the previous display data is performed. The same display data as the time is supplied to the first display circuit 261.

  The number of display segments provided in the special view display unit 37a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the first display circuit 261 as display data for controlling display of the special view display unit 37a.

  The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special-image storage display unit 37b. As a result, each display segment of the special view reserve display unit 37b is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. In this case, although the second display circuit 262 can store the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all “0” when the predetermined period has elapsed. It will approach the state of Therefore, the display segment of the special view reserve display unit 37b in the light emission state according to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262 has a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the second display circuit 262. It will be turned off gradually as it passes. Further, not only when the display contents of the special view hold display unit 37b are changed but also when the display contents of the special view hold display unit 37b are not changed due to such a configuration, The same display data as the output processing time is supplied to the second display circuit 262.

  The number of display segments provided in the special view reserve display unit 37b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the second display circuit 262 as display data for controlling the display of the special view suspension display unit 37b. However, since provision of display data is performed in units of 8 bits, even when display data is provided to second display circuit 262, 8 bits of data are provided, but 4 bits of them are provided for the special view holding display portion 37b is used as display data for display control.

  The third display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the common view display unit 38a. As a result, each display segment of the common view display unit 38 a is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit 263. In this case, although the third display circuit 263 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all "0" when the predetermined period elapses. It will approach the state of Therefore, the display segment of the common view display unit 38a in the light emitting state according to the display data provided to the third display circuit 263 has a predetermined period elapsed without new display data being provided to the third display circuit 263. It will be turned off gradually by doing. Moreover, not only when the display contents of the common view display unit 38a are changed but also when the display contents of the common view display unit 38a are not changed due to such a configuration, the process of outputting the previous display data is performed. The same display data as that of the time is supplied to the third display circuit 263.

  The number of display segments provided in the common view display unit 38a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the third display circuit 263 as display data for controlling display of the common view display unit 38a.

  The fourth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the common drawing suspension display unit 38b. As a result, each display segment of the common drawing reserve display unit 38b is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264. In this case, although the fourth display circuit 264 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all “0” when the predetermined period elapses. It will approach the state of Therefore, the display segment of the common view suspension display unit 38b in the light emission state according to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264 has a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the fourth display circuit 264. It will be turned off gradually as it passes. Moreover, not only when the display content of the common view suspension display unit 38b is changed but also when the display content of the common view suspension display unit 38b is not changed due to such a configuration, The same display data as the output processing time is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264.

  The number of display segments provided in the common view suspension display unit 38b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264 as display data for performing display control of the common view suspension display unit 38b. However, since the provision of display data is performed in units of 8 bits, 8-bit data is provided even when the display data is provided to fourth display circuit 264, but 4 bits of the data are displayed in a general display pending display portion It is used as display data for display control of 38b.

  The fifth display circuit 265 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of a plurality of display segments provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thus, the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the light emission state or the light off state in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265. In this case, although the fifth display circuit 265 can store the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), the display data gradually becomes all “0” when the predetermined period has elapsed. It will approach the state of Therefore, new display data is provided to the fifth display circuit 265 for the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the light emitting state according to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265. When the predetermined period elapses, the light is gradually turned off. Moreover, not only when the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed but also the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed due to such a configuration. Even in the case where the display data is not output, the same display data as the previous output processing of display data is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265.

  Seven display segments are provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. On the other hand, provision of display data is performed in 8-bit units. When the display data of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided to the fifth display circuit 265, 7-bit display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is provided as 8-bit data. Then, 7-bit display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is provided as 8-bit data, and thereafter, 7-bit display data corresponding to the third notification display device 203 is 8-bit units Finally, 7-bit display data corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204 is provided as 8-bit data.

  In the configuration in which the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 supplies display data to the display IC 266. That is, the display IC 266 is not provided on a one-to-one basis for the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, but one for all the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The display IC 266 is provided. When the main CPU 63 supplies display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 also supplies type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data corresponds to.

  In detail, regarding the electrical connection between the main CPU 63 and the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 and the display IC 266 include the type data signal line LN1, the type clock signal line LN2, the display data signal line LN3, and the display clock signal. Electrical connection is made using line LN4. Each of the signal lines LN1 to LN4 is a signal line for transmitting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 in one-way communication.

  Type data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the type data signal line LN1. In this case, the division of each one bit of the type data by serial communication is indicated by the type clock signal transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the type clock signal line LN2. The type data is data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data to be transmitted corresponds to. The type data is transmitted as 5-bit data of the first to fifth bits. When the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the third display circuit 263, the third bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fourth display circuit 264, the fourth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit 265, the fifth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level.

  Display data is transmitted by serial communication from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, a division of each 1 bit of display data by serial communication is indicated by a display clock signal transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. Display data is transmitted in 8-bit units by the first to eighth bits.

  The main CPU 63 transmits display data corresponding to each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described later. In this case, in one processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing, display data is transmitted to one of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, and the nth display circuit → the n + 1th display Each time a new processing cycle of the second timer interrupt process occurs in accordance with the order of the circuits, the display circuits 261 to 265 which are the display data transmission targets are changed one by one. In addition, in the second timer interrupt processing in the next processing cycle following the processing cycle that transmitted the display data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265, which is the final order in the sequence, the first display circuit 261 that becomes the first order in the above sequence. Send the display data corresponding to. Note that only one piece of display data in 8-bit units is transmitted in the processing of the second timer interrupt processing of transmitting display data to any of the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, but the fifth display circuit 265 At the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting the display data, four pieces of display data in 8-bit units are transmitted in correspondence with the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the main CPU 63 transmits display data, various storage areas referred to by the main CPU 63 for transmitting display data to the specific control work area 221 and the non-specific control work area 223 Is set. FIG. 120 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various buffers 271 to 275 provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and FIG. 120 (b) is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is an explanatory view for explaining various storage areas 234 and 276.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the work area 221 for specific control, a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, and a fourth display data buffer 274; A fifth display data buffer 275 is provided.

  Display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the first display data buffer 271. Since the first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the special view display unit 37a as described above, the first display data buffer 271 has display data for causing the special view display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display. It will be stored. In this case, storage of display data in first display data buffer 271 is performed in display control processing (step S8216) based on the contents of the special power control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117). . Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the first display circuit 261 is reached, only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is changed Instead, even when the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  The second display data buffer 272 stores display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262. Since second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to special view reserve display unit 37b as already described, the second display data buffer 272 is a display for causing special view reserve display unit 37b to perform a predetermined display. Data will be stored. In this case, storage of display data in second display data buffer 272 is performed in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the special figure special power control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). . Also, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the second display circuit 262 is reached, only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is changed However, even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Display data to be supplied to the third display circuit 263 is stored in the third display data buffer 273. Since the third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the common view display unit 38a as described above, the third display data buffer 273 has display data for causing the common view display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display. It will be stored. In this case, storage of display data in the third display data buffer 273 is performed in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the common power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). It will be. In addition, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the third display circuit 263 is reached, only when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is changed Instead, even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit 264. Since the fourth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the common view holding display unit 38b as described above, the fourth display data buffer 274 is a display for causing the common view holding display unit 38b to perform a predetermined display. Data will be stored. In this case, the storage of display data in the fourth display data buffer 274 is performed by the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the common power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). It will be. In addition, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the fourth display circuit 264 is reached, only when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is changed Instead, even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit 265. Since the fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as already described, the fifth display data buffer 275 displays the first to fourth notification display devices 201. To display data for causing predetermined display to be stored. Not only when the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is changed, but also when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting the display data to the fifth display circuit 265 is reached. The display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266 even when the value of .beta.

  Here, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, display corresponding to the management result of the game history is performed, and the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 115) or the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is executed. In this case, the display corresponding to the current setting value is performed. In this case, since the fifth display data buffer 275 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, processing for storing display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed as processing corresponding to specific control. On the other hand, the process for deriving the management result of the game history is performed as the process corresponding to the nonspecific control, and the 61st to 68th parameters which are the management result of the game history are the display devices for the first to fourth notification. It becomes a display object sequentially in 201-204.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), not only the calculation result storage area 234 for storing the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter in the work area 223 for nonspecific control, but also the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter Among them, a display target setting area 276 for storing parameters to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided. Even in the present embodiment, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds as in the above-described fifteenth embodiment. The calculation result of the parameter to be displayed is read out from the calculation result storage area 234 according to a predetermined display order each time the second elapses, and the calculation result of the read parameter is stored in the display target setting area 276. Ru. Then, in the case where the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) which is a process corresponding to the specific control. The display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is read, and the read display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

  On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed, the first to fourth notification displays are displayed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) corresponding to the specific control. In the devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display data for displaying a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. It is stored in the display data buffer 275. Also, when the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed, the first to fourth notification displays are displayed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process corresponding to the specific control. Display data for displaying that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated in the devices 201 to 204 and displaying the present setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are fifth display data It is stored in the buffer 275.

  In the configuration in which the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 displays the display data corresponding to each processing cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). The display data is read from the buffers 271 to 275, and the read display data is transmitted to the display IC 266, and type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 corresponds to the display data Send to display IC 266. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of the display IC 266. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output unit 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output unit 284. The display data buffer 283 stores display data received from the main CPU 63. The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The type data buffer 281 stores type data received from the main CPU 63. The selection signal output unit 282 is a selection signal for specifying the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 among the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 as a display data reception destination. Output

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected using the display signal group 291. The display signal group 291 is provided to enable transmission of 8-bit display data at one time, and display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. Further, a branch signal group 292 is provided by branching from the display signal group 291, and the branch signal group 292 includes the second display circuit 262, the third display circuit 263, the fourth display circuit 264, and the fifth display circuit 265. It is electrically connected to each of the The branch signal group 292 is provided to enable transmission of 8-bit display data at one time, similarly to the display signal group 291, and display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. Ru.

  By providing the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 as described above, when the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284, the display data is firstly transmitted. To all of the fifth display circuits 261-265. In this case, first to fifth selection signal lines 301 to 305 are provided to receive the supplied display data and specify the display circuits 261 to 265 to be used.

  The first selection signal line 301 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261. In the case where type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the first display circuit 261 and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301. Thus, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the first display circuit 261.

  The second selection signal line 302 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262. When the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the second display circuit 262 receives display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 and uses it. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302. Thus, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the second display circuit 262.

  The third selection signal line 303 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit 263. When the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the third display circuit 263 and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a third selection signal to the third display circuit 263 through the third selection signal line 303. Thus, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the third display circuit 263.

  The fourth selection signal line 304 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit 264. When the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the fourth display circuit 264 and used. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit 264 through the fourth selection signal line 304. Thus, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the fourth display circuit 264.

  The fifth selection signal line 305 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit 265. When the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the fifth display circuit 265 receives display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 and uses it. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit 265 through the fifth selection signal line 305. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the fifth display circuit 265.

  FIG. 122 shows that the type data and the display data are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and the display data transmitted from the display IC 266 is received by the first display circuit 261 or the second display circuit 262. It is a time chart. 122 (a) shows the transmission period of the type data signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. 122 (b) shows the transmission period of the type clock signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266. Shows the transmission period of the display data signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122 (d) shows the transmission period of the display clock signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. 122 (f) shows the transmission period of the second selection signal from the display IC 266 to the second display circuit 262, and FIG. 122 (g) shows the transmission period of the first selection signal from the first display circuit 261 to the first display circuit 261. A transmission period of display data from the display IC 266 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is shown. The same applies to the case where display data is received by the third to fifth display circuits 263 to 265.

  Type data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 at timing t1 after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 including the main CPU 63, the display IC 266, and the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is started. And transmission of display data is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), pulse type clock signals are transmitted at timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, timing t4 and timing t5, respectively. As shown in (a), the pulse type data signal is transmitted corresponding to the transmission of the pulse type clock signal at the timing of t1. As a result, information corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), a pulse-shaped display clock is generated at each of the timing t1, the timing t2, the timing t3, the timing t4, the timing t5, the timing t6, the timing t7 and the timing t8. While the signal is transmitted, as shown in FIG. 122 (c), a pulse-like display data signal corresponding to the transmission of the pulse-like display clock signal at the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t5 and the timing of t7. Is sent. Thereby, display data corresponding to the above-described information form is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

  Then, when the transmission of the display clock signal of the 8th bit is completed as shown in FIG. 122 (d) at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 122 (e), the type data buffer 281 is displayed. Transmission of the first selection signal is started by the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 toward the first display circuit 261 corresponding to the stored type data, and as shown in FIG. 122 (g) at the timing of t9. Then, transmission of display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is started by the display data output unit 284 of the display IC 266. As a result, display data is received by the first display circuit 261 and used.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 122A to 122D, transmission of type data and display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is newly started at time t10. In this case, transmission of the first selection signal from the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261 is stopped at the timing of t10 as shown in FIGS. 122 (e) and 122 (g), and from the display IC 266 Transmission of display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is stopped.

  As for the new transmission of type data and display data, in detail, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the type clock of pulse form at each of the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t13 and the timing of t14. While the signal is transmitted, as shown in FIG. 122 (a), a pulse type data signal is transmitted corresponding to the transmission of the pulse type clock signal at the timing of t11. Thereby, the information corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), a pulse-shaped display clock is generated at timing t10, timing t11, timing t12, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, and timing t17. The signal is transmitted, and as shown in FIG. 122 (c), it corresponds to the transmission of the pulse-like display clock signal at the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t15, the timing of t16 and the timing of t17. The pulse-like display data signal is transmitted. Thereby, display data corresponding to the above-described information form is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

  Then, when the transmission of the display clock signal of the 8th bit is completed as shown in FIG. 122 (d) at the timing of t18, it is stored in the type data buffer 281 as shown in FIG. 122 (f). While transmission of the second selection signal is started by the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 toward the second display circuit 262 corresponding to the type data, as shown in FIG. 122 (g) at the timing of t18. Transmission of display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is started by the display data output unit 284 of the display IC 266. As a result, display data is received by the second display circuit 262 and used.

  Although only one display data is transmitted in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) to which display data is transmitted for the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, the fifth display circuit 265 In the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) which is the display data transmission target, four display data are transmitted in correspondence with the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started at the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) as described above, but it is a process that transmits four display data as well. Each processing time is set such that one processing cycle is completed in less than the second interrupt cycle.

  With the above configuration, display data can be transmitted to the plurality of display circuits 261 to 265 using one display IC 266. Here, as described above, each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 can store the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but the predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the display data will gradually approach the all "0" state. In this case, when reception of display data in each of the display circuits 261 to 265 exceeds a predetermined period, the special view display unit 37a, the special view hold display unit 37b, the common view display unit 38a, the common view hold display unit 38b, and Even if the display content is not changed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display segment that is in the light emission state temporarily approaches the light off state, and as a result, the light in the display segment There is a risk of blinking. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) activated in the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds), the second interrupt shorter than the first interrupt cycle The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) activated in a cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) is set, and the transmission of display data to the display IC 266 is collectively performed in the second timer interrupt process. .

  The second timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processing of step S8401 to step S8413 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), interrupt disable is set (step S8401). By inhibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent it from being activated by Further, even if the second interrupt cycle has elapsed during execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) by inhibiting the generation of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), the second timer interrupt is generated. It becomes possible to prevent the process (FIG. 123) from being activated redundantly.

  After that, it is determined whether “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 (step S8402). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the main CPU 63 is performing a setting value update process (FIG. 116). As already described, in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the process at the start of the operation power supply start is performed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is started. Although it will be executed, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is activated and started even if the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is being executed, so it is set by the main CPU 63 Even if the value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting.

  In the situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 63 executes the setting value update process (FIG. 116) at this time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). It means that it is the processing time started by interrupting by the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8402, processing for setting the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step S8403). In the setting process, a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Display data to be performed is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

  When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 through the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are described with reference to FIG. 124 (a). The display shown in the figure is performed. Specifically, when a display indicating that the setting values are being updated is displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. At least one display segment in each of them is in a light emitting state. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in the display state. As a result, even if the display indicating that the setting value is being updated is displayed, the fact that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 have not failed is The manager can grasp it. In addition, even when the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 emits light, and the first to fourth notifications are displayed. Each of the display devices 201 to 204 is in the display state.

  In detail, regarding the display content of each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one display segment at the center is in the light emission state, and the remaining display segments are in the light extinction state It becomes. Even if the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one display segment at the center of the first notification display device 201 can be in the light emitting state, The display content of the first notification display device 201 when the game history management result is displayed includes display content in which one display segment in the center is in the light emission state and the remaining display segments are in the light off state. Not. As a result, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 in the situation in which the setting value is being updated while using the display segment that can be in the light emission state even when the management result of the game history is displayed It becomes possible to set it as the display content which is not displayed in the management result of.

  In the second notification display device 202, as in the first notification display device 201, one display segment at the center is in the light emission state, and the remaining display segments are in the light extinction state. Even if the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one display segment at the center of the second notification display device 202 can be in the light emitting state, The display contents of the second notification display device 202 when the game history management result is displayed include display contents in which one display segment in the center is in the light emission state and the remaining display segments are in the light off state. Not. As a result, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in the situation in which the setting value is updated while using the display segment that can be in the light emission state even when the management result of the game history is displayed is the game history It becomes possible to set it as the display content which is not displayed in the management result of.

  In the third notification display device 203, a part of the display segments is in a light emitting state so that the character “H” is displayed, and the remaining display segments are in a light off state. In this case, the display segment that is in the light emission state can be in the light emission state even when the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but the game history management result is The display content of the third notification display device 203 when displayed does not include the display content in which the character “H” is displayed. Thereby, the display contents of the third notification display device 203 in the situation in which the setting value is updated while using the display segment which can be in the light emission state even when the management result of the game history is displayed It becomes possible to set it as the display content which is not displayed in the management result of. Moreover, the display content in which the character of "H" is displayed is not included in the display content of the 3rd alerting | reporting display apparatus 203 in the condition which is confirming the setting value. Thus, by displaying “H” on the third notification display device 203, it is possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall that the setting value is being updated.

  In the fourth notification display device 204, a part of the display segments emits light and the remaining display segments are turned off so that the display corresponding to the current setting value is performed. In the case of FIG. 124 (a), since the current setting value is “setting 2”, “2” corresponding to “setting 2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the current setting value. Note that the display content of the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the setting value is being updated may be displayed in any of the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed and the situation where the setting value is confirmed.

  Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), when a negative determination is made in step S8402, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step S8404). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115). As already described, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is performed when the process of starting the operation power supply start is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started. Although it will be executed, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is activated and started even if the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is being executed, so it is set by the main CPU 63 Even if the confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting.

  In the situation where "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag, the main CPU 63 executes the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) for the current processing of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). It means that it is the processing time started by interrupting by the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8404, processing for setting the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S8405). In the setting process, a display showing that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display showing the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Display data to be performed is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

  When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 through the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (b). The display shown in the figure is performed. Specifically, when a display indicating that the setting values are being updated is displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. At least one display segment in each of them is in a light emitting state. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in the display state. As a result, even if the display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed is displayed, the fact that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 have not failed is The manager can grasp it.

  In detail, regarding the display content of each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one display segment at the center is in the light emission state, and the remaining display segments are in the light extinction state It becomes. Even if the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one display segment at the center of the first notification display device 201 can be in the light emitting state, The display content of the first notification display device 201 when the game history management result is displayed includes display content in which one display segment in the center is in the light emission state and the remaining display segments are in the light off state. Not. As a result, the display content of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the setting value is checked while using the display segment that can be in the light emission state even when the management result of the game history is displayed is the game history It becomes possible to set it as the display content which is not displayed in the management result of.

  In the second notification display device 202, as in the first notification display device 201, one display segment at the center is in the light emission state, and the remaining display segments are in the light extinction state. Even if the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one display segment at the center of the second notification display device 202 can be in the light emitting state, The display contents of the second notification display device 202 when the game history management result is displayed include display contents in which one display segment in the center is in the light emission state and the remaining display segments are in the light off state. Not. As a result, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in the situation where the setting value is confirmed while using the display segment that can be in the light emission state even when the management result of the game history is displayed is the game history It becomes possible to set it as the display content which is not displayed in the management result of.

  Here, the display contents in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are the same regardless of whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed. Thus, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 indicate that the display targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 relate not to the management result of the game history but to the setting value. It becomes possible to clearly notify the game hall manager by the display of.

  In the third notification display device 203, a part of the display segments is in a light emitting state so that the character “k” is displayed, and the remaining display segments are in a light off state. In this case, the display segment that is in the light emission state can be in the light emission state even when the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but the game history management result is The display content of the third notification display device 203 in the case where it is displayed does not include the display content in which the character “k” is displayed. Thereby, the display contents of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the setting value is confirmed while using the display segment which can be in the light emission state even when the management result of the game history is displayed It becomes possible to set it as the display content which is not displayed in the management result of. Also, while "H" is displayed on the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the set value is being updated, "k" is displayed on the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the set value is checked. "Is displayed. Thus, by confirming the display content of the third notification display device 203, the administrator of the game hall is notified of the situation in which the setting value is being updated and the situation in which the setting value is being confirmed. It becomes possible.

  In the fourth notification display device 204, a part of the display segments emits light and the remaining display segments are turned off so that the display corresponding to the current setting value is performed. In the case of FIG. 124 (b), the current setting value is “setting 2”, so “2” corresponding to “setting 2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the current setting value. The display contents of the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the setting value is confirmed can be displayed in any of the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed and the situation where the setting value is updated.

  Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), when a negative determination is made in step S8404, a process of setting the fifth display data buffer 275 in a normal state is executed (step S8406). In this case, the information is read from the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the display of the parameters corresponding to the read information. Display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. The display data is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 through the display IC 266, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 calculate the current display target parameter among the 61st to 68th parameters. The result is displayed.

  When the process of step S8403, step S8405 or step S8406 is executed, the transmission state of the signal through type data signal line LN1 and type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S8407), and display data signal line LN3 and display The transmission state of the signal through the clock signal line LN4 is turned off (step S8408). Thereafter, the process of updating the type counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is executed (step S8409).

  The type counter is a counter for specifying the transmission target of display data among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 by the main CPU 63 in the current processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is When the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted. In the process of updating the type counter, the value of the type counter is incremented by one, and when the value of the type counter after the increment of 1 exceeds the upper limit "5", the value of the type counter is set to "1". . As a result, the transmission target of the display data is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 each time the second timer interrupt process is performed.

  Thereafter, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read out from the main ROM 64 (step S8410). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "2," the second The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is If it is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and if the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is mainly Read from the side ROM 64.

  Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S8411). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second display data buffer 272 is used. The display data is read out, and when the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data is read out from the third display data buffer 273. When the value of the type counter is “4”, the fourth display data buffer 274 is read out. The display data is read, and when the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275.

  Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S8412). In the transmission process, signal output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is performed so that the type data read in step S8410 is transmitted to the display IC 266. Further, in the transmission process, the signal output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is performed so that the display data read in step S8411 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Thereafter, in order to permit generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), interrupt permission is set (step S8413).

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In the state where the main processing (FIG. 114) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, and processing that enables the progress of the game in the main processing is executed. In the situation where the process at the time of the start of supply of the operating power which is the situation before is performed, the process for setting confirmation is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to check the setting value illegally.

  Assuming that the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game is continued, for example, when the confirmation of the setting value is performed while the game is being performed, the setting value is being confirmed. There is a risk that transition to the open / close execution mode may occur. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball can not be launched toward the special power prize device 32 even though the open / close execution mode has been started. In addition, if the confirmation of the set value is performed during execution of the open / close execution mode, the open / close execution mode proceeds under the situation where the confirmation of the set value is performed. There is a risk that you can not launch the game ball towards the

  Assuming that the progress of the game is stopped when the confirmation of the set value is performed, if the confirmation of the set value is started in the situation where the game is being performed, the progress of the game is stopped halfway Processing may be complicated. For example, if confirmation of the set value is started during execution of the game run and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game, a process for stopping the game run is required. In this case, the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is stopped halfway when the confirmation of the set value is started, and the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is resumed when the confirmation of the set value is completed. If you try to do so, it will require more complicated processing. Further, for example, if confirmation of the setting value is started during execution of the open / close execution mode and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game halfway, processing for stopping the open / close execution mode is required. Moreover, if confirmation of the set value is started during execution of the variation display of the pattern in the common view display unit 38a and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game, the process for stopping the variation display of the pattern is It will be necessary. In addition, if confirmation of the setting value is started during execution of the open execution state of the portable electric utility product 34a and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game in the middle, processing for stopping the open execution state is necessary. Become. On the other hand, a configuration may be considered in which the setting value is checked after waiting for all the games to end, but in this case, the game times, the open / close execution mode, the variable display of symbols in the common view display unit 38a, and the public It is necessary to wait until the release execution state of the object 34a is not executed, which may increase the waiting time until the confirmation of the setting value is started.

  On the other hand, at the time of the supply start of the operation power which is the situation before the processing which enables the progress of the game is executed in the main processing which is executed when the supply of the operation power to the main side CPU 63 is started Since the setting confirmation process is performed in the situation where the process is being performed, the setting value is confirmed in the situation where the progress of the game is already stopped. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the confirmation of the set value in a situation where the game is in progress, and at the time of confirming the set value, the progress of the game is stopped halfway or the progress of the game is stopped. There is no need to wait for confirmation of the set value until Therefore, it becomes possible to check the set value appropriately.

  By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the reset button 68c is started in the situation where the main process (FIG. 114) is started. Is pressed, and the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on. As a result, the content of the operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely connected to the execution of the RAM clear process (step S7915), and the RAM clear process (step S7915) It is possible to make it easy for the game hall manager to understand the operation content for generating the

  Even when the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0", and the information of the set value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from being changed even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is performed.

  Not only does the power of the pachinko machine 10 be turned on while pressing the reset button 68c, but also the RAM of the RAM is operated based on the power on of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key. Not only the clear process (step S7915) but also the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed. Also, as described above, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is performed based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. Is executed. As a result, as the operation for executing the process relating to the setting value, it is possible to share the ON operation on the setting key insertion unit 68a. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating the process related to the setting value.

  In the case where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on with the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the processing for setting confirmation is executed. When the pressing operation of 68 c is added, the setting value update process is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the processing to be executed different among the processing for setting confirmation and the processing for updating the setting value depending on the presence or absence of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing the desired process among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Further, by making the operation content for executing the setting value update process larger than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform the action of causing the setting value update process to be performed illegally.

  A monitoring process of whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) which is periodically started. This makes it possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even in a situation where a game is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the setting value is abnormal.

  The monitoring of whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed each time a monitoring trigger occurs. More specifically, it is executed each time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal.

  In the main process (FIG. 114), a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set. If a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is set in the process at the start of the operation power supply in the main process (FIG. 114), the power failure flag and the checksum at the start of the operation power supply It is necessary to monitor whether the set value is normal or not as well as to monitor, and the monitoring load becomes high. Furthermore, if it is attempted to execute the RAM clear process (step S7915) and the set value update process (step S7918) when it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of the supply of the operating power, only that process configuration Becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set in the main process (FIG. 114), the process configuration at the time of supply start of the operating power is preferable. It becomes possible to In addition, even if the process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, the setting is monitored by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). Since the process (step S8220) is executed, when the setting value is abnormal, it is possible to cope with it.

  The display setting for the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is performed by the display IC 266 in accordance with the display data transmitted from the main CPU 63, and the special view display unit 37a is configured to have display contents corresponding to the display data. The special view reservation display unit 37b, the common view display unit 38a, the common view reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth display devices for notification 201 to 204 are controlled. As a result, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced. In this case, a plurality of display units such as a special view display unit 37a, a special view suspension display unit 37b, a common view display unit 38a, a common view suspension display unit 38b, and first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 In the configuration provided, the display ICs 266 are not provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display portions, but one display IC 266 is shared with the plurality of display portions. This makes it possible to increase the number of display portions to be subjected to display control while suppressing an increase in the number of display ICs 266. In addition, the transmission interval of display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is set to the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to each display unit before the display corresponding to the display data can not be maintained in each display unit. It is set to a transmission interval at which display setting by the display IC 266 is performed. As a result, even when one display IC 266 is shared by a plurality of display units, it is possible to appropriately perform display corresponding to display data in each display unit.

  When transmitting the display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 transmits, to the display IC 266, type data that enables specification of the type of the display circuits 261 to 265 to be set as the display data. Accordingly, when display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the display IC 266 may set the display data in the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data transmitted from the main CPU 63. Therefore, even if one display IC 266 is shared by a plurality of display portions, the structure of the display IC 266 can be simplified.

  The main CPU 63 transmits the display data so that the update rounding is repeated when the update rounding is performed once that the plurality of display units become the setting target of the display data once in a predetermined order. I do. As a result, the main CPU 63 only needs to change the display unit to which display data is to be transmitted according to a predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the main CPU 63 can be simplified.

  Even if the main CPU 63 determines that the content of the display data for one display unit is the same as the content of the display data in the case where the display unit was transmitted last time as the transmission target, the display unit becomes the transmission target. Sends the display data. Thus, even in the configuration in which one display IC 266 is shared by a plurality of display units, it is possible to continue the same display on a predetermined display unit.

  The main CPU 63 executes processing for transmitting display data to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) which is started by interrupting another processing when the second interrupt cycle is reached. As a result, it is possible to set a cycle in which display data is set in each display unit as a predetermined cycle. Therefore, even if one display IC 266 is shared by a plurality of display units, each display unit can not maintain the display corresponding to the display data. Setting of display data by the display IC 266 can be performed.

  The processing for transmitting display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 which are targets of display setting by the display IC 266 is summarized in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). Thus, it is possible to make the cycle in which display data is set in the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the same cycle.

  When the first interrupt cycle is reached, the main CPU 63 interrupts another process and executes the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In this case, the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is set to a cycle shorter than the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). As a result, it is possible to transmit display data in a short cycle as compared with the configuration in which the process of transmitting display data to display IC 266 is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117).

  In addition, the processing to transmit display data to the display IC 266 is set to the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) whose interrupt cycle is shorter than the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) in which the processing for advancing the game is set. It is done. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) can be activated at an appropriate cycle to execute the process for advancing the game, and the excellent effects as described above can be achieved. Become.

  The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is being executed. This makes it possible to set the transmission cycle of display data to a predetermined cycle.

  When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started, the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is inhibited, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is ended, the first timer interrupt process The interrupts shown in FIG. 117 are permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) from being interrupted and executed while the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the process for transmitting display data.

  The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting even when the process (steps S7901 to S7918) at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed in the main process (FIG. 114). This makes it possible to control the display of the plurality of display units even in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed. Further, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting the process at the start of supply of the operating power, the process configuration at the start of the supply of the operating power is not complicated. Also, it becomes possible to control display of a plurality of display units in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being performed.

  While the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated, and in the situation, the second timer interrupt process In FIG. 123, display data for displaying the current setting value on the fourth notification display device 204 is transmitted. As a result, even if the processing configuration of the main processing (FIG. 114) is not complicated, the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the setting value update processing (step S7918) is being executed. It will be possible to

  Even after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated each time the second interrupt cycle elapses. Thus, by using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), either the situation where the process at the time of supply start of the operating power is being executed or the situation after the process at the start of supply of the operating power is finished It is possible to control display of a plurality of display units also in

  As in the first embodiment, the update button 68b is provided, and in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the set value is updated by one stage each time the reset button 68c is pressed. Alternatively, the setting value may be updated by one stage each time the update button 68b is pressed. In addition, positions corresponding to each of “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as rotational operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the turning operation is performed, and the setting key is inserted A set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the portion 68a may be set. In addition, the setting key insertion portion 68a can be rotated further than the ON position, and the setting value in the middle of updating is set to the next setting value each time the rotation operation exceeding the ON position is performed. The configuration may be updated.

  Further, in the setting value updating process (FIG. 116), the setting value being selected is decided by turning OFF the setting key insertion portion 68a, and the setting value updating process is ended by pressing the reset button 68c. It may be configured as Further, in the configuration provided with the update button 68b, in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the setting value being selected is decided by turning off the setting key insertion portion 68a, and the update button 68b is further pressed. The setting value update process may be terminated by being operated.

  Further, the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state may not be set as a condition for executing the setting value update process (FIG. 116), and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The condition that the condition is not set may be set, and the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open condition may not be set.

  Further, as a condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115), the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state may not be set, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The condition that the condition is not set may be set, and the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open condition may not be set.

  Further, in the main process (FIG. 114) executed when the supply of operation power to main side CPU 63 is started, it is specified that the power failure flag is not set to "1" or that the checksum is abnormal. In this case, the RAM clear process (step S7915) may be executed. In this case, the setting value updating process (step S7918) may be executed after the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed, and a notification indicating that the setting value updating process (step S7918) should be performed. And may be configured to stop the progress of the game, or may be configured to start processing for controlling the progress of the game.

  Further, in the main processing (FIG. 114), the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) is replaced with the configuration executed after the determination processing of whether the power failure flag is set to "1" and the comparison processing of checksums. The configuration may be performed prior to these processes. In this case, it is possible to give priority to the process for confirming the setting value.

  Further, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is not limited to the configuration executed each time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is activated, and, for example, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is plural. The setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed every time the number of triggers is set (for example, 10000 times). In this case, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency of the monitoring while regularly monitoring whether the set value is normal.

  Further, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed in the remaining process (steps S7921 to S7924) in the main process (FIG. 114). In this case, it may be monitored whether the set value is normal or not by using the idle time in a state where the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) are not executed. It becomes possible.

  The setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed when the game play is newly started. More specifically, when the game play is newly started, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed before the acceptance determination process is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the success or failure determination process from being executed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

  When it is specified in the setting monitoring process (step S8220) that the setting value is abnormal, the process may be shifted to the setting value updating process (step S7918).

  If it is determined in the setting monitoring process (step S8220) that the setting value is abnormal, the main process (1) is set in the setting abnormality flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control 114) may be started, and in the state where the setting abnormality flag is set to “1”, the progress of the game is stopped and the power is turned off to cancel the state in which the progress of the game is stopped. It is good also as composition which needs ON. In this case, in the main processing (FIG. 114), even if the operation for causing the setting value update processing to be executed is not performed, the setting is forcibly set if “1” is set in the setting abnormality flag. By performing the value updating process, it is possible to forcibly perform new setting of the setting value using the setting value updating process set in the main process (FIG. 114).

  In addition, the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 and the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the second operation opening 34 are stored separately, As the special view display unit 37a, a first special view display unit and a second special view display unit may be provided in correspondence with the hold information. In this case, the variation display of the pattern in the first special view display unit and the variation display of the pattern in the second special view display unit can be executed in an overlapping manner, and one of the two is displayed in the predetermined gaming state. It is good also as composition which the continuation period of the change display of the pattern in a special figure display part becomes extremely long. In this configuration, if it is attempted to wait for confirmation of the set value until the game is not being played, the waiting time will be long. On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed in the process at the time of start of supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63, whereby the setting value is not generated as described above. It is possible to check the

  In the low frequency support mode, the duration of the variable display of the pattern in the common view display section 38a may be extremely long. In this configuration, if it is attempted to wait for confirmation of the set value until the game is not being played, the waiting time will be long. On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed in the process at the time of start of supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63, whereby the setting value is not generated as described above. It is possible to check the

  Further, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is executed are not limited to the display contents in the above embodiment, and for example, the third notification Instead of the letter “k” being displayed on the display device 203, only the display segment at the center may emit light as in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. . In addition, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off, and the fourth notification display device 204 may be configured to perform display corresponding to the current setting value.

  In addition, when the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is executed, the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the display content in the above embodiment, for example, the third notification Instead of displaying the letter “H” on the display device 203, only the display segment at the center may emit light as in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. . In addition, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off, and the fourth notification display device 204 may be configured to perform display corresponding to the current setting value.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the type data and the display data are simultaneously transmitted to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 may be configured to start the transmission of the display data after the transmission of the type data is started. In this case, transmission of display data may be started during transmission of type data, or transmission of display data may be started after transmission of type data is completed. Further, the transmission of the type data may be started after the transmission of the display data is started. In this case, the transmission of the type data may be started during the transmission of the display data, or the transmission of the type data may be started after the transmission of the display data is completed.

  Further, the display IC 266 is not limited to a configuration in which only one display IC 266 is provided so as to be common to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. It may be configured to be provided in one-to-one correspondence with each other. In the configuration, when the display data stored in each display IC provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is short, the display data to be displayed on each display IC is short. Unintended blinking may occur in each display unit depending on the provision cycle. On the other hand, by aggregating the processing for transmitting the display data to the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) having a relatively short interrupt cycle as in the above embodiment, the display data on each display IC can be displayed. It becomes possible to shorten the provision cycle, and it becomes possible to prevent unintended blinking on each display unit.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the main random number counter C1 is provided in the main RAM 65, a configuration may be provided in which a random number circuit is provided for updating the random number obtained in the determination processing. In this case, in the internal function register setting process in the main process (FIG. 114), setting is performed to associate the random number of the random number circuit as the random number acquired in the propriety determination process.

  In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the timer interrupt process is prohibited and the timer interrupt process is permitted before and after each process of steps S8201 to S8221, but this may be changed. For example, for part of the processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117), prohibition of the timer interrupt processing and permission of the timer interrupt processing are performed before and after that, and other processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) In the case of (1), the timer interrupt process may not be inhibited and the timer interrupt process may not be permitted before and after that. Further, it may be configured that prohibition of the timer interrupt process and permission of the timer interrupt process are set by interposing a plurality of processes included in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117).

  Further, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the setting for prohibiting the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) may not be performed. In this case, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is executed with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), display control of a plurality of display units can be prioritized. . Also, in this configuration, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prohibited in order to prevent the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) from being activated in duplicate. On the other hand, the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) may not be inhibited.

  When both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) trigger an interrupt, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is executed as the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). Instead of the configuration in which priority is given to execution of step 117), the execution of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) may be prioritized over the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). The timer interrupt process may be started earlier than the timer interrupt process which occurs earlier.

  Also, in a situation where the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is executed instead of the configuration in which the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prohibited. Even in the situation described above, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) may be interrupted and activated. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the process for advancing the game over the display control of the plurality of display units.

  Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is not set, and various processes of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) are the main process (FIG. 114) and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). May be distributed and executed. For example, in the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the main process (FIG. 114), a display indicating that the setting is being confirmed and a display corresponding to the current setting value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is good also as composition set as processing for making it carry out. In the set value update process (step S7918) in the main process (FIG. 114), a display indicating that the setting is being updated and a display corresponding to the current set value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is good also as composition set as processing for making it carry out. In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the special view display unit 37a, the special view hold display unit 37b, the common view display unit 38a, the common view hold display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201. It is good also as composition set as processing for controlling display of.

  Further, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is not limited to the configuration in which only processing for display control of a plurality of display units is executed, and in addition to processing for display control of a plurality of display units. Alternatively or alternatively, processing different from the processing for display control of the plurality of display units may be performed. For example, part of the process for advancing the game may be executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), and the remaining process may be executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). In this case, the process in which the execution cycle is relatively short is preferable in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in which the interruption cycle is relatively short, and even if the execution cycle is relatively long, no problem occurs. Is preferably executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in which the interrupt cycle is relatively long. Further, among the processes of step S8202 to step S8221 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) of the above embodiment, the power failure information storage process (step S8202) is executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). Processing other than that may be executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117). In this case, the power failure monitoring can be repeatedly performed in a relatively short cycle. In addition to or instead of the configuration, the fraud detection process (step S8206) is executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and the other processes are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). It may be configured as In this case, fraud monitoring can be repeatedly performed in a relatively short cycle.

  Further, the number of display circuits 261 to 265 for which display setting of display data is performed by the display IC 266 is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four or six or more. It is also good. Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 are associated with the fifth display circuit 265, and the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 can be used. Display circuits may be provided in one-to-one correspondence.

The Thirty-Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of setting value update processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirty-third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the above-described thirty-third embodiment will be basically omitted. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with the update button 68 b as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing according to the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S8501 to S8508 in the setting value update processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, “1” is set in the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S8501). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S8502). If the value of the set value counter is “0” or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8502, and “1” is set in the set value counter (step S8503). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8502 or if the process of step S8503 is performed, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8504). When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8504: NO), the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control on condition that the update button 68b is pressed (step S8505: YES) Is incremented by 1 (step S8506). As a result, each time the update button 68 b is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one stage higher. When the update button 68b is not pressed (step S8505: NO) or when the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to the process of step S8502, but at step S8502 If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, "1" is set in the set value counter in step S8503. As a result, when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", the setting is returned to "setting 1".

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step S8504), the current setting value is determined, and the process advances to step S8507. In step S8507, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF using the setting key. In this case, the setting key insertion unit 68a may be configured to determine whether the ON state has been switched to the OFF state or may be configured to determine whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state. If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned OFF (step S8507: NO), the process of step S8507 is executed again.

  If the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF (step S8507: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8508).

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the setting value is updated by pressing the update button 68b, the setting value is determined by pressing the reset button 68c, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. Thus, the setting value update process is terminated. That is, in order to end the setting value updating process after updating the setting value in the setting value updating process, it is necessary to press the reset button 68c as well as to turn off the setting key insertion unit 68a. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to play a game with the setting value after the setting value is illegally updated.

The Thirty-Fifth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration regarding display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirty-third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the above-described thirty-third embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for nonspecific control.

  The calculation result storage area 234 stores information of a base value calculated by the main CPU 63. The base value refers to the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) in the situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is based on the jackpot result. It is the ratio of the total payout number of game balls.

In detail, regarding the calculation of the base value, although the normal counter area 231 is provided in the non-specific control work area 223 in the present embodiment, the open / close execution mode counter area 232 and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 Is not provided. The regular counter area 231 has a regular winning counter 231a for regular, a special power winning counter 231b for regular, a first operation counter 231c for regular, and a second operation counter 231d for regular, as in the fifteenth embodiment. A normal out counter 231e is provided. When one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is based on the jackpot result, the value of the general winning counter 231a for normal is incremented by 1, and the special power When one game ball enters the winning device 32, the value of the special power pay counter 231b for normal use is incremented by one, and when one game ball enters the first operation opening 33, for normal use The value of the first operation counter 231c is incremented by one, and when one gaming ball enters the second actuation port 34, the value of the second actuation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by one and the value is added to the out port 24a. When one gaming ball enters the ball, the value of the out counter 231e for normal use is incremented by one. The base values are as follows when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 in the situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode according to the big hit result are K91 to K95.
Base value: Total payout number of game balls (K91 x "Number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + K 92 x "Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32" + K 93 x "First operation opening 33 The number of winning balls for the winnings of the game + K94 × the number of winning balls for the winning on the second operation opening 34) / The ratio of the total number of playing balls (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95) discharged from the gaming area PA

  The calculation of the base value is performed each time when the result calculation process (FIG. 130) described later is executed in the management process (step S8920) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) described later. The values of the various counters 231a to 231e of 231 are in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode The total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) is cleared to “0” by becoming the management start reference number in a situation where none of them is In the situation where "1" is set in the management start flag, the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode by the jackpot result The total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (i.e. the total number of ball game which is supplied to the game area PA) is "0" cleared by the shift reference number in nor availability deviation.

  The management start reference number is set to 300, which is smaller than the shift reference number, as in the fifteenth embodiment. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before shipping, and at that time, the game ball is kept in each ball entry portion and the subsequent operation is checked. The base value in such a situation may be different from the situation in which a normal game is played. Therefore, the total number of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag and neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode according to the jackpot result is When the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA becomes the management start reference number which is less than the shift reference number, the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are once cleared to "0". This makes it possible to reduce the influence of the above operation check on the base value in a situation where a normal game is being played after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. The management start reference number is not limited to 300 but may be any number if it is a plurality, and may be set to a number smaller than 300, or set to a number larger than 300. It is also good.

  The shift reference number is set to 60000. In the pachinko machine 10, a maximum of 100 game balls are fired in one minute, so 60000 is the maximum number of shots in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours in the gaming hall are about 13 hours, and the time when the game is played in the situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode according to the jackpot result is about 10 hours. Therefore, the shift reference number is set on the assumption that the maximum number of game balls to be launched in one business day. By clearing the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 to "0" each time the shift reference number is reached, it becomes possible to calculate a base value within the shift reference number range. Note that the reference shift number is not limited to 60000 and is arbitrary if it is a plural number, and may be set to a number smaller than 60000, even if it is set to a number larger than 60000. Good.

  The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a third history area 314 as storage areas for storing the information of the base value. There is. These various areas 311 to 314 have the same storage capacity, and specifically have a capacity of 1 byte so as to be able to store information of the base value.

  The current value area 311 stores the base value calculated in the latest result calculation process (FIG. 130). That is, the latest base value is stored in the current area 311.

  The first history area 312 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. In this case, in the first history area 312, the open / close execution mode according to the jackpot result in the immediately preceding calculation period if the immediately preceding calculation period is after the management start flag is set to "1". The base value at the timing when the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) in the situation where neither the high frequency support mode nor the high frequency support mode Stored. In addition, if the management start flag is set to “1” when the previous calculation period has elapsed, in the first history area 312, the open / close execution mode according to the jackpot result in the previous calculation period and The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the situation where none of the high frequency support mode is Stored.

  The second history area 313 stores the final base value in the second calculation period. In this case, in the second history area 313, in the second history area 313, the open / close execution mode according to the jackpot result in the second calculation period if the second calculation period is after the management start flag is set to "1". The base value at the timing when the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) in the situation where neither the high frequency support mode nor the high frequency support mode Stored. In addition, if the management start flag is set to “1” when the second calculation period elapses, the second history area 313 displays the open / close execution mode according to the jackpot result in the second calculation period. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the situation where none of the high frequency support mode is Stored.

  The third history area 314 stores the final base value in the third calculation period. In this case, in the third history area 314, in the third history area 314, the open / close execution mode according to the jackpot result in the third calculation period, in the case where the third calculation period is after setting “1” in the management start flag. The base value at the timing when the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) in the situation where neither the high frequency support mode nor the high frequency support mode Stored. In addition, if the management start flag is set to “1” when the third calculation period elapses, the third history area 314 displays the open / close execution mode according to the jackpot result in the third calculation period. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the situation where none of the high frequency support mode is Stored.

  The base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, each time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 311 → the first history area 312 → the second history area 313 → the third history area 314 in a predetermined order. While switching the base value used as alerting | reporting object, switching of the base value used as alerting | reporting object according to the said predetermined order is repeated.

  Figs. 127 (a) to 127 (d) are for the first to fourth notification when the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 are notified in the situation where "1" is set in the management start flag. It is an explanatory view for explaining display contents of display devices 201-204. FIG. 127 (a) shows an example of the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified, and FIG. 127 (b) shows the first history 127 shows an example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the area 312 is notified, and FIG. 127 (c) shows the base stored in the second history area 313. 127 shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the value is notified, and FIG. 127 (d) shows the case where the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified. An example of the display content of the 1st-4th display apparatuses 201-204 for alerting | reporting is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (d), each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has eight display segments 321 to 324. Of the eight display segments 321 to 324, the seven display segments 321 to 324 are rod-shaped light emitting areas each having the same shape and the same size, and arranged so as to produce the character of “8”. It is done. On the other hand, one display segment 321 to 324 is a circular light emitting area, and is located at the lower right position with respect to the seven display segments 321 to 324 arranged in a “8” shape. It is provided. Even in the case of notifying any base value of the various areas 311 to 314, at least one display segment 321 to 324 is in a light emitting state in each of the first to fourth notification displays 201 to 204.

  In the first notification display device 201, a display is performed to indicate that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a state of notifying the base value. Specifically, even when any base value of the various areas 311 to 314 is notified, the character “b” is displayed on the first notification display device 201. When information other than the base value is notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the character "b" is not displayed on the first notification display device 201. As a result, by confirming that the letter "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the game hall manager can use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a base. It becomes possible to grasp that the value is informed.

  The second notification display device 202 displays a display indicating which one of the various areas 311 to 314 is in the state of notifying the user. Specifically, in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is notified, the character “L.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127 (a). In the situation where the base value of the first history area 312 is notified, the character “1.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. In the situation where the base value of the second history area 313 is notified, the character "2." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127 (c). In the situation where the base value of the third history area 314 is notified, the character "3." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127 (d). As a result, by confirming the characters displayed on the second notification display device 202, the administrator of the game hall can determine which of the base values is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to grasp whether it is in the calculation period of.

  In the second notification display device 202, the circular display segments 321 to 324 are in the light emitting state even in a situation where any base value of the various areas 311 to 314 is notified. As described later, in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, any one of numbers "0" to "9" is displayed as a display corresponding to the base value. In this case, when any one of the numbers "1" to "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, three numbers are displayed on the second to fourth notification display devices 202 to 204. It will line up and it will be difficult to grasp the base value. On the other hand, when the circular display segments 321 to 324 provided at the lower right of the second notification display device 202 are in the light emitting state, “1” to “1” to “2” are displayed on the second notification display device 202. Even if any of the numbers "3" is displayed, the numbers displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the numbers on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. It becomes possible to distinguish and grasp numbers.

  The third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display numbers of base values that are to be notified. Although the base value is calculated as a small number of decimal places, the first digit of the base value among the base values is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the decimal point of the base value is displayed. The second place number is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Here, when the base value is "1.00", the number "0" is displayed on each of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, when the base values are not stored in the areas 311 to 314 which are the notification targets, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128 (a), the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display The characters "-" are displayed on each of the devices 204. Thus, even in the case where the two display devices of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 notify the base value calculated as a small number to the second decimal place, the base value It is possible to distinguish the display contents between the case where “1.00” is “1.00” and the case where the base value is not stored in the areas 311 to 314 that are to be notified.

  The display content of the combination of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 is the same between the case where the base value is "1.00" and the case where the base value is "0.00". On the other hand, in order to distinguish between the two, one of the former and the latter may maintain the light emission state of "00" display, and on the other hand, the "00" display may blink.

  Next, while the management start flag is set to "1" while referring to the time chart of FIG. 129, the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Explain how it is done. FIG. 129 (a) shows a period during which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 129 (b) is stored in the first history area 312. FIG. 129 (c) shows the base value stored in the second history area 313 for the first to fourth notifications when the determined base value is notified on the first to fourth notification displays 201 to 204. 129 (d) shows the base value stored in the third history area 314 being notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 129 (e) shows the total of the game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode according to the big hit result since the calculation period of the base value is newly started. Number (Sona The total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA Chi) indicates the time to reach the initial reference number (6000 in particular).

  Notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started at the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 129 (a). At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), a display indicating that the base value is a notification target is displayed in the first notification display device 201, and stored in the current condition area 311 in the second notification display device 202. A display indicating that the base value is a notification target is displayed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 129 (e), the calculation initial display is performed over the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. Specifically, the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode according to the jackpot result is started after the calculation period of the base value is newly started (that is, the gaming area In the period until the total number of gaming balls supplied to PA reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), it becomes a display target in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 Instead of continuing the lighting of the characters, the characters to be displayed are flickered and displayed as the calculation initial display. Immediately after the calculation period is started, there is little information on the game history for calculating the base value, so the actual value of the base value can be a value far from the theoretical value range of the base value. On the other hand, it is possible to make the administrator of the game hall recognize that it is immediately after the start of the calculation period by performing the calculation initial display immediately after the start of the calculation period as described above. .

  In addition, in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 in which the number corresponding to the base value is displayed in the calculation initial display, while the lighting of the number is continued, the first notification display device Characters to be displayed on the display unit 201 and the second notification display unit 202 are displayed in a blinking manner. As a result, it is possible to notify that the calculation period is started immediately while preventing the visibility of the base value from being reduced. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is the operation initial display, it may be configured that blinking display is performed on at least one of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, both of them blink A configuration in which display is performed may be performed, or a configuration in which blinking display is performed in only one of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 may be performed. Further, the initial reference number is not limited to 6,000 but may be any number if it is a plural number, and may be set to a number smaller than 6000, even if it is set to a number larger than 6000. Good.

  The total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode according to the big hit result from the timing t1 at the timing of t2 (ie, the number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA When the total number) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), the operation initial display is ended as shown in FIG. 129 (e). Thus, the lighting display is started not only in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 but also in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t1 at the timing of t3, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 129 (a), and the display of FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the calculation result of the final base value in the previous calculation period, the calculation initial display is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t3 at the timing of t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. 129 (b), Notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started as shown in FIG. In this case, since the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the calculation result of the final base value in the second calculation period, the calculation initial display is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t4 at the timing of t5, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is ended as shown in FIG. 129 (c), as shown in FIG. Notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started as shown in FIG. In this case, since the base value stored in the third history area 314 is the calculation result of the final base value in the third calculation period, the calculation initial display is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t5 at the timing of t6, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is ended as shown in FIG. 129 (d), Notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started as shown in FIG. In this case, since the calculation period of the base value is newly started, the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is a big hit result In order to notify that it is a period until the total number of supplied game balls reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), the timing from t6 to the timing from t7 to FIG. 129 (e) The calculation initial display is performed as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t6 at the timing of t8, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 129 (a), and the display duration is ended in FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the calculation result of the final base value in the previous calculation period, the calculation initial display is not performed.

  Next, a processing configuration for enabling notification of the above base value will be described.

  The management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) described later is a process corresponding to the nonspecific control in step S3803 as in the management process (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Read the program of management execution processing. Then, in the management execution process (FIG. 71), the check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment.

  In the check processing, in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode according to the jackpot result, the entry of one gaming ball to the general winning opening 31 is specified, the normal winning counter 231a for normal When 1 is added to the value and 1 ball is entered to the special power winning device 32, 1 is added to the value of the special power winning counter 231b for normal use, and 1 to the first operation opening 33 When entering the game ball is specified, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter 231c for normal use, and when entering the one game ball to the second operation port 34 is specified, normal use The value of the second operation counter 231d is incremented by one, and when the entry of one gaming ball to the out port 24a is specified, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by one. Further, in the check process, a result calculation process and a display process are executed.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing result calculation processing. The processing of step S8601 to step S8615 in the result calculation processing is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, calculation processing of a base value is executed (step S8601). In the calculation process, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231. The method of calculating the base value is as described above. Then, the calculated base value is overwritten on the current area 311 (step S8602).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step S8603). The management start flag has a value of “0” when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the production of the pachinko machine 10. Also, when the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” including the management start flag and initialized, the value of the management start flag becomes “0”. The total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA in a situation where the management start flag is a value of “0” and is neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode according to the jackpot result When the total number of supplied gaming balls) becomes the management start reference number, "1" is set in the management start flag. When the management start flag is set to "1", the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0", and a new calculation period is started. As a result, the influence of the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 can be made more difficult with respect to the base value in the situation where a normal game is being performed after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by totaling all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8604). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is a number larger than 300, which is the management start reference number (step S 8605).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S8605, "1" is set in the management start flag (step S8606). Thereafter, data shift processing is executed (step S8607). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is stored in the second history area 313 → the third history area 314. The first history area 312 → the second history area 313 and the current area 311 → the first history area 312 are shifted in this order. Thus, the final base value in the second calculation period is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the third calculation period, and the final base value in the first calculation period is stored. Is stored in the second history area 313 as a final base value in the second calculation period, and the last calculated base value in the current calculation period is used as the final base value in the first calculation period. 1 stored in the history area 312. In the data shift process, when the above information shift is performed, the LDIR instruction is used. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage area is shifted (copied) to the storage area by specifying the address of the storage area of the information and the address of the storage area of the information. It becomes.

  However, in a situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag, basically no information on the base value is stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, so management is substantially performed in step S8607. Only the shift to the first history area 312 of the final base value of the calculation period in the situation where the start flag is not set to "1" is performed. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step S8608).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by totaling all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8609). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is a number larger than the initial reference number of 6000 (step S8610). If a negative determination is made in step S8610, "1" is set in the operation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8611), and if a positive determination is made in step S8610 The operation initial flag is cleared to "0" (step S8612). The calculation initial flag is the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode according to the big hit result since the calculation period of the base value is newly started The main CPU 63 is a flag for specifying whether or not the total number of gaming balls supplied to the PA has reached the initial reference number.

  If the process of step S8611 or step S8612 is executed, it is determined whether the total number calculated in step S8609 is 60000 or more, which is the shift reference number (step S8613). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8613, data shift processing is executed (step S8614). In the data shift process, as in step S8607, the information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 The shift is performed in the following order: 3 history area 314, first history area 312 → second history area 313, current area 311 → first history area 312. Thus, the final base value in the second calculation period is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the third calculation period, and the final base value in the first calculation period is stored. Is stored in the second history area 313 as a final base value in the second calculation period, and the last calculated base value in the current calculation period is used as the final base value in the first calculation period. 1 stored in the history area 312. In the data shift process, when the above information shift is performed, the LDIR instruction is used. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage area is shifted (copied) to the storage area by specifying the address of the storage area of the information and the address of the storage area of the information. It becomes. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step S8615).

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing display processing. The processing in steps S8701 to S8714 in the display processing is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step S8701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8701, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is decremented by 1 (step S8702). The switching timing counter displays the first to fourth notification displays of the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. The main CPU 63 is a counter for specifying that it is the timing to switch the base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. As described above, whenever the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, notification is made in a predetermined order of the current area 311 → the first history area 312 → the second history area 313 → the third history area 314 While switching the target base value, switching of the base value to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

  When the process of step S8702 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the switching timing counter after one subtraction is "0", and the base value currently being notified becomes the notification target. It is determined whether or not the display continuation period has passed since (step S8703). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8703, the value of the display target counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is incremented by one (step S8704). Then, when the value of the display target counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value “3” (step S8705: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to “0” (step S8706).

  The display target counter displays the first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. It is a counter for specifying in the main side CPU 63 a base value to be notified in the devices 201-204. Specifically, when the value of the display object counter is "0", the base value stored in the current area 311 is the notification object, and when the value of the display object counter is "1", the first history area When the base value stored in 312 is to be notified and the value of the display target counter is “2”, the base value stored in the second history area 313 is to be notified, and the value of the display target counter is “3”. In the case of “”, the base value stored in the third history area 314 is to be notified.

  If a negative determination is made in step S8705, or if the process of step S8706 is performed, the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control is a value corresponding to the switching timing of the next notification target (duration display period (specifically Specifically, the value corresponding to 5 seconds is set (step S8707).

  If a negative determination is made in step S8703, or if the process of step S8707 is executed, the display target setting area 276 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 corresponds to the base value that is the current notification target Execute processing to set display data. Specifically, first, display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8708). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and a notification target base The second notification display device 202 displays an indication as to which of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 the value corresponds to in the calculation result storage area 234. And display data to be performed.

  Thereafter, the base value is read out from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter among the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234, and the read base Calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal point number and the second decimal point number in the value are set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8709). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to perform display corresponding to the first digit of the decimal point in the base value of the notification target, and the second digit of the decimal point in the base value of the notification target And display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform a display corresponding to.

  As described above, display data including display type data and operation result data is set in the display target setting area 276. As the display data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) described later, the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .

  Also, the process of step S8709 is executed each time the process for display (FIG. 131) is executed, regardless of the switching timing of the base value to be notified. As described above, every time the calculation result storage process (FIG. 130) is executed, the base value is calculated using the current values in the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, and the calculated base value is It is stored in the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234. In this case, the processing of step S8709 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 276 as described above is the degree at which the processing for display (FIG. 131) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value of the notification target. When the base value of the current area 311 is changed to be notified, the changed base value can be notified.

  Thereafter, based on the value of the display target counter, it is determined whether or not the base value of the current area 311 is a notification target (step S8710), and the operation initial flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is It is determined whether "1" is set (step S8711). As described above, the calculation initial flag is the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high frequency support mode is started after the calculation period of the base value is newly started. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 whether or not (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) has reached the initial reference number. When an affirmative determination is made in both step S8710 and step S8711, "1" is set in the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8712), and either step S8710 or step S8711 If a negative determination is made in step S70, the initial display flag is cleared to "0" (step S8713).

  The initial display flag indicates that the base value is the base value of the calculation initial stage after the start of the calculation period in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified. It is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the second notification display device 202 should be blinked. When it is specified in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) described later that “1” is set to the initial display flag, it is only necessary to transmit the display data stored in display object setting area 276 to display IC 266 When the display corresponding to the display data is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are blinked and displayed. The notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are lit and displayed. When it is specified in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) described later that “1” is not set in the initial display flag, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is When the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used, all the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are lit and displayed.

  On the other hand, when “1” is not set in the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 and a negative determination is made in step S8701, the current area 311 is selected regardless of the value of the display target counter. The base value is read out, and calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place digit and the second decimal place digit in the read base value are set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the first decimal place number in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base of the current area 311 The second decimal place number in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag, the base value in the past calculation period is not notified, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified Be done.

  In the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag, although the calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276, the display type data is not set. Although the details will be described later, when the notification of the base value is performed in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are managed. The display content is different from that in the case where the notification of the base value is performed in the situation where the start flag is set to “1”.

  Next, main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 132. The processing of steps S8801 to S8825 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, power on initialization processing is executed (step S8801). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for waiting (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S8802). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is started up regularly interrupting the main process, is the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds) And setting the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process periodically started by interrupting the main process, to the second interrupt cycle which is shorter than the first interrupt cycle. (Specifically, 2 milliseconds).

  That is, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-third embodiment, the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process exist as the timer interrupt process so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are activated by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. Also, in the situation where both the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing are not executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, then the second interrupt process and the second interrupt cycle do not matter Timer interrupt processing is started first. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process that is activated prior to the first timer interrupt process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first timer interrupt process may be activated prior to the second timer interrupt process.

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63 Do. Further, in the internal function register setting process, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the random number counter C1 is executed in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles.

  After that, “1” is set in the startup processing in-progress flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S8803). Among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process, the process for performing a power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed even if the first timer interrupt process is started. On the other hand, the main CPU 63 is a flag for specifying that the first timer interrupt process should be ended without executing a process for advancing a game.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process according to the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. The first timer interrupt process is periodically activated at a cycle of 4 milliseconds which is the first interrupt cycle as described above. Further, a program corresponding to the first timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  In steps S8901 to S8905, the same processes as steps S301 to S305 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. That is, the power failure monitoring process is executed by executing the power failure information storage process in step S8901. Specifically, similarly to the power failure information storage process (FIG. 101) in the thirtieth embodiment, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption is received from the power interruption monitoring board 67. If an occurrence of is identified, it will become an infinite loop after executing a power failure process. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221, and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored in the specific control work area 221. Also, the random number updating process for drawing in step S8902 is performed to update each numerical information of the per-random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general public jack release counter C4, and in step S8903 The numerical value information of the random number initial value counter CINI is updated by executing the random number initial value updating process, and the numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is updated by executing the variation counter updating process in step S8904. Also, by executing the fraud detection process in step S8905, it is monitored whether or not an event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and it is confirmed that any of the plurality of types of events has occurred, thereby stopping the game provided in the work area 221 for specific control. Set the flag to "1".

  After executing the processing of step S8901 to step S8905, it is determined whether "1" is set in any of the game stop flag and the start processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step S8906). If “1” is not set in any of the game stop flag and the start processing in progress flag (step S 8906: NO), the processing of step S 8907 to step S 8920 is executed. In steps S8907 to S8919, the same processes as steps S8208 to S8220 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Also, although the management process is executed in step S8920 as in step S8221 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment, the contents of the check process of the management execution process called in the management process Is the content already described. In the check process, the update process of each counter 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 is performed, and the result calculation process (FIG. 130) and the display process (FIG. 131) are performed.

  On the other hand, when "1" is set in at least one of the game stop flag and the start processing flag (step S8906: YES), the first timer interrupt process is executed without executing the process of steps S8907 to S8920. finish. That is, not only in the situation where the game stop flag is set to “1” but also when the start processing flag is set to “1”, the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 is performed in the first timer interrupt processing. While the process is performed, the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not performed.

  As in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, the process during start of supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) is started and an interrupt permission flag is set (step S8805). Before execution, “1” is set, and processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed, and “0” is cleared before the remaining processing (steps S8822 to S8825) is started. In this case, in the first timer interrupt processing as described above, when the flag during start processing is set to “1”, the processing of steps S 8907 to S 8920 is not performed to supply operating power. In the situation where the process at the start (steps S8801 to S8819) is being executed, it is possible to prevent the process for proceeding the game from being executed. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt processing as described above, even when "1" is set in the startup processing flag, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed to start the supply of operating power. The blackout monitoring is performed even in the situation where the process (steps S8801 to S8819) is executed, and the update of the random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the random number initial value counter CINI is performed. Is performed and fraud detection is performed.

  In particular, even when the power-on process flag is set to “1”, the process at the start of the operation power supply start (step S8801 to step S8819) by executing the power failure information storage process (step S8901). Even if a power failure occurs in the situation where) is being executed, it is possible to execute the processing at the time of the power failure. In the power failure process, as described above, “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221, and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored in the specific control work area 221. In order to preserve | save, when supply of operation | movement electric power is started again, it becomes possible not to be identified as abnormality generation | occurrence | production of the main side RAM65. Thus, even if a power failure occurs during the setting value update process (step S8819), the setting value selected at that time can be stored and held as the setting value of the current pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting value update process, it is not necessary to execute the setting value update process again when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting value update process is being executed, the interrupt is not inhibited for any of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and an interrupt occurs at an arbitrary timing. It is possible. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the main process (FIG. 132) including the setting value update process, While the information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 132) for returning after the end of the timer interrupt process is saved is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, the main side immediately before the timer interrupt process is activated. Information of various registers of the CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be started is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 132) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 132), after setting the startup processing flag to “1” in step S8803, an initial check period (specifically, to the check processing counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control) Specifically, the value corresponding to 5 seconds is set (step S8804). In the present embodiment, when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, can each display segment 321 to 324 provided in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 normally be in the light emission state? In order to make the administrator of the game hall confirm whether or not the processing of step S8804 is started, the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until the initial check period elapses. . Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128 (b), all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the light emission state as the check display. . In step S8804, information corresponding to this initial check period is set in the counter under check.

  In addition, the initial check period is required until the process for controlling the progress of the game is started when none of steps S8811, S8812, S8815, and S8819 described later is executed in the main process. It is set to a time longer than the longest time. Therefore, a game may be started in the condition where the display for a check is performed by the display apparatuses 201-204 for 1st-4th alerting | reporting.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S8805). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle. However, since “1” is set in the start-up processing flag in step S8803, even if the first timer interrupt processing is activated, power failure monitoring among various processing of the first timer interrupt processing is performed. While the process for updating and monitoring the fraud is executed, the first timer interrupt process is ended without the process for advancing the game being executed.

  Thereafter, in step S8806 to step S8825, the same process as step S7905 to step S7924 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment is executed. Specifically, in step S8806, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed. That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the reset button 68 c is pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, the update button 68b is not provided in the main control device 60 although the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c are provided. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8806: NO), it is determined whether "1" is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8807). When the power failure process is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the power failure process has been properly performed at the previous power-off time.

  If "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S8807: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S8808). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as that of the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process performed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and stored in the specific control work area 221 The checksum for the stack area 222 is read out from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read-out checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S8808 (step S8809). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S8810).

  If a negative determination is made in step S8807 or step S8810, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" or if the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step S8811). By setting “1” to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is positive, thereby performing steps S8907 to S8907. Do not execute the processing of S8920. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power off, or if the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If the checksums do not match due to the change in the storage state of the information from the previous power-off at least one of the above, processing for monitoring power failure, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed. On the other hand, processing for advancing the game will not be executed.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of the operation power supply is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S8812). The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power by receiving the abnormality command, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Output a voice. In addition, a character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is given when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step S8819) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal (step S 8807 and step S 8810: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68 a is turned on using the setting key. Then, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S8814). The front door opening sensor 95 is used to detect whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13 as in the thirtieth embodiment, and the gaming machine main body 12 is used for the outer frame 11. The main body opening sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not the main body is in the open state, as in the above-described thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S8813: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the game machine main body is displayed with respect to the outer frame 11. If 12 is in the open state (step S8814: YES), processing for setting confirmation is executed (step S8815). Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8806: YES), the RAM clear process is executed (step S8816). The contents of the RAM clear process are the same as step S7915 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. After that, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S8817: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and a game is played against the outer frame 11 If the machine body 12 is in the open state (step S8818: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step S8819). Details of the setting value update process will be described later.

  When the process of step S8812 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S8813 or step S8814, when the process of step S8815 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S8817 or step S8818, or when the process of step S8819 is performed. If it has been executed, then the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8820). By clearing the in-progress processing flag to “0”, the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is canceled even if the first timer interrupt processing is activated. In step S8820, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S8821). The contents of the information contained in the return command and the processing contents of the voice emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as in step S7920 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. .

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S8822 to step S8825. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process Remaining time will occur. Although this remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of steps S8822 to S8825 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processing in steps S8822 to S8825 is a non-periodic processing that is performed non-periodically. In steps S8822 to S8825, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, the second timer interrupt process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The main CPU 63 executes the processing of steps S9001 to S9014 in the second timer interrupt processing using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), interrupt disable is set (step S9001). By inhibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent it from being activated by Also, even if the second interrupt cycle has elapsed during execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) because the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is inhibited from being generated, the second timer interrupt is generated. It is possible to prevent the process (FIG. 134) from being activated redundantly.

  Thereafter, the process of updating the counter during check is executed (step S9002). In the process of updating the counter during check, when the value of the counter during check provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more, the value of the counter during check is decremented by one. Thus, when the initial check period is being measured using the counter during check, the value of the counter during check is periodically subtracted every time the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started. The Rukoto.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 (step S9003). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the main CPU 63 is performing a setting value update process (FIG. 137). As already described, in the setting value update process (FIG. 137), the process at the start of the operation power supply start is executed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is started. The second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) is set and executed by the main CPU 63 because it is activated even if the process at the start of supply of the operation power is being executed. Even if the value update process (FIG. 137) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting.

  In the situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 executes the setting value update process (FIG. 137) at this time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). It means that it is the processing time started by interrupting by the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9003, a process of setting the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step S9004). In the setting process, as in step S8403 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are updated in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data indicating that the current situation of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed and a display indicating that the current situation is set. Thus, as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication indicating that the setting value is being updated and an indication indicating the current setting value. Is done.

  If a negative determination is made in step S9003, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9005). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the main CPU 63 is performing a setting confirmation process (FIG. 136). As already described, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is performed when the process of starting the operation power supply start is executed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is started. The second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) is set and executed by the main CPU 63 because it is activated even if the process at the start of supply of the operation power is being executed. Even if the confirmation process (FIG. 136) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting.

  In the situation where "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag, the main CPU 63 executes the setting confirmation process (FIG. 137) for the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). It means that it is the processing time started by interrupting by the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9005, a process of setting the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S9006). In the setting process, as in step S8405 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are confirmed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data indicating that the current situation of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed and a display indicating that the current situation is set. Thus, as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication indicating that the setting value is being checked and an indication indicating the current setting value. Is done.

  If a negative determination is made in step S9005, a setting process at the normal time is executed (step S9007). The setting process at the normal time will be described in detail later.

  When the process of step S9004, step S9006 or step S9007 is performed, the process of step S9008 to step S9014 is performed. The processing contents of these steps S9008 to S9014 are the same as the steps S8407 to S8413 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment.

  Specifically, first, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S9008), and the signal transmission through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is performed. The state is set to the OFF state (step S9009). Thereafter, the process of updating the type counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is executed (step S9010).

  The type counter is a counter for specifying the transmission target of display data among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 by the main CPU 63 in the current processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is When the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted. In the process of updating the type counter, the value of the type counter is incremented by one, and when the value of the type counter after the increment of 1 exceeds the upper limit "5", the value of the type counter is set to "1". . As a result, the transmission target of the display data is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 each time the second timer interrupt process is performed.

  Thereafter, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read out from the main ROM 64 (step S9011). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "2," the second The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is If it is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and if the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is mainly Read from the side ROM 64.

  Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S9012). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second display data buffer 272 is used. The display data is read out, and when the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data is read out from the third display data buffer 273. When the value of the type counter is “4”, the fourth display data buffer 274 is read out. The display data is read, and when the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275.

  Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S9013). In the transmission process, signal output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is performed so that the type data read in step S9011 is transmitted to the display IC 266. Further, in the transmission process, signal output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is performed so that the display data read in step S9012 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Thereafter, in order to permit generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), interrupt permission is set (step S9014).

  FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing setting processing in the normal state in step S9007 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). The processes of steps S9101 to S9109 in the normal setting process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  First, it is determined whether the value of the counter under check provided in the specific control work area 221 is 1 or more (step S9101). If the value of the counter during check is 1 or more (step S9101: YES), it means that it is an initial check period. In this case, the data for display for check is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9102). The display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is display data for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as described above. Further, the data for the check display is display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display, that is, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is display data for setting all the display segments 321 to 324 in the light emitting state. By the data of the display for the check being supplied to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 128 (b), all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed as the check display. The display segments 321 to 324 are in the light emitting state. As a result, it becomes possible for the game hall manager to grasp whether or not the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be normally brought into the light emitting state.

  Here, the initial check period is configured to be cancelable at the time of setting confirmation or setting value update. Such a cancelable configuration will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process performed in step S8815 of the main process (FIG. 132). The processing of steps S9201 to S9206 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, an operation instruction command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S9201). The voice emission control device 81 causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice "Please operate the reset button 68c" by receiving the operation instruction command. The notification is continued until the reset button 68c is pressed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9202). If the reset button 68c is not pressed, the process waits in step S9202. If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9202: YES), the in-check counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S9203). This cancels the initial check period.

  After that, “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S9204). By setting “1” to the setting confirmation display flag, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) makes an affirmative determination in step S9005 as already described, and displays the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 The fifth display data buffer 275 stores a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked at 204 and display data for causing a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. (Step S9006). Thus, as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication indicating that the setting value is being checked and an indication indicating the current setting value. Is done.

  Thereafter, under the condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF (step S9205: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S9206). Thus, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 indicate that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed, and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 Is released. In this case, the display indicating the base value is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the initial check period is canceled midway on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, and the current state in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The set value of is notified. Thereby, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 132) is started by the main CPU 63, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main processing is executed. Even if the initial check period is started in the situation where the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display, the process at the time of the supply start of the operating power is executed. In the case where the set value is confirmed in the above situation, it is possible to cancel the initial check period and display the current set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to check the set value without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

  In addition, even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period is started first, so the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It becomes possible to confirm the setting value after confirming whether or not each display segment 321 to 324 in each of them can be in the light emitting state normally. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing executed in step S8819 of the main processing (FIG. 132). The processing of steps S9301 to S9310 in the setting value update processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step S9301). By receiving the update start command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice “setting change in progress”. The notification is continued until the setting value update process is completed.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S9302). If the value of the set value counter is “0” or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S9302 to set “1” in the set value counter (step S9303). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S9302 or if the process of step S9303 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF using the setting key (step S9304). In this case, the setting key insertion unit 68a may be configured to determine whether the ON state has been switched to the OFF state or may be configured to determine whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state.

  If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned OFF (step S9304: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9305). If the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step S9305), the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" (step S9306: NO) ), The setting update display flag is set to “1” (step S9307), and the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S9308).

  The initial check period is canceled by clearing the counter “0” during the check. Further, by setting “1” to the setting update display flag, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) makes an affirmative determination in step S9003 as already described, and displays the first to fourth notification display devices In the fifth display data buffer 275, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated at 201 to 204 and display data for performing a display showing the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 It stores it (step S9004). Thus, as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication indicating that the setting value is being updated and an indication indicating the current setting value. Is done.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S9306, or if the process of step S9308 is performed, the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S9309). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one stage higher. When the reset button 68c is not pressed (NO in step S9305) or when the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S9302, but in step S9302 If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, "1" is set in the set value counter in step S9303. As a result, when the reset button 68 c is pressed once under the condition of “setting 6”, the setting is returned to “setting 1”.

  If the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF (step 9304: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9310). As a result, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The condition of being released is released. In this case, the display indicating the base value is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  As described above, when the setting value update process is executed, the initial check period is canceled midway on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, and the current state in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The set value of is notified. Thereby, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 132) is started by the main CPU 63, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main processing is executed. Even if the initial check period is started in the situation where the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display, the process at the time of the supply start of the operating power is executed. When the set value is updated in the above situation, it is possible to cancel the initial check period and display the current set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to update the setting value while checking the current setting value without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

  In addition, even when the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period is started first, so the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It becomes possible to update the setting value after confirming whether or not each display segment 321 to 324 in each of them can be in the light emitting state normally. This makes it possible to correctly update the setting value.

  Further, when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the set value in the set value update process (FIG. 137), the initial check period is canceled. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the setting value, the initial check period is canceled accordingly, and the operability for canceling the initial check period can be improved. Become.

  Returning to the description of the normal setting process (FIG. 135), when the value of the counter under check is “0” and it is not the initial check period (step S9101: NO), the work area 223 for non-specific control is provided. It is determined whether "1" is set in the management start flag (step S9103). If “1” is not set in the management start flag (step S 9103: NO), setting processing of display before management start is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S 9104). In the setting process, display data for setting all display segments 321 and 322 in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 in the light emitting state is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which all the display segments 321 and 322 are made to emit light in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, and the first and second notification display devices 201, It is also possible to have a configuration in which blinking display is performed in all the display segments 321 and 322 in each of 202.

  Thereafter, the operation result data set in the display target setting area 276 in the non-specific control work area 223 is read (step S9105), and the read operation result data is displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. The fifth display data buffer 275 is set as display data to be applied (step S9106). As already described, in the process for display (FIG. 131), when "1" is not set in the management start flag (step S8701: NO), the base value is read from the current area 311, and the first decimal point in the read base value is read. Operation result data corresponding to the digit of the place and the digit of the second place of the decimal point are set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). In step S9106, the calculation result data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204.

  As the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in steps S9104 and S9106 is supplied to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128 (c), the first and second notification displays In a situation where all the display segments 321 and 322 are in the light emitting state in each of the devices 201 and 202, the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period by the third notification display device 203 The second notification display device 204 displays the second digit of the decimal point of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. The numbers corresponding to the base value are displayed on the third and fourth display devices 203 and 204 while setting all display segments 321 and 322 in the first and second display devices 201 and 202 for light emission. By doing this, it becomes possible to make the administrator of the gaming hall recognize that the currently reported base value is the base value in the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag.

  Further, in a situation where the management start flag is set to “1”, as described above, the current area 311 → the first history area 312 → the first every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses. While the base values to be notified are switched by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the predetermined order of 2 history areas 313 → 3rd history area 314, the management start flag is " In a situation in which 1 "is not set, the base value of the current area 311 is maintained as a notification target. As a result, when the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to check the current base value at an arbitrary timing.

  If “1” is set in the management start flag (step S 9103: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 276 in the non-specific control work area 223 is read, and the read display data is read 5) Set in the display data buffer 275 (step S9107). If the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified by the display data being supplied to the display IC 266, the display as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 127 (a) is for the first to fourth notification. If it is performed on the display devices 201 to 204 and the base value of the first history area 312 is a notification target, the display as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 127 (b) is the display for the first to fourth notification If the base value of the second history area 313 is to be notified in the devices 201 to 204, the display as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 127 (c) is the display device for the first to fourth notification. If it is performed in 201 to 204 and the base value of the third history area 314 is to be notified, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127 (d) is the first to fourth display devices 201 for notification. To -204.

  After that, it is determined whether “1” is set in the initial display flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step S9108). The initial display flag is a first notification to notify that the base value is the base value of the calculation initial stage after the start of the calculation period in the situation where the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified as described above. The main CPU 63 is a flag for specifying that the display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 should be blinked. When “1” is set in the initial display flag (step S9108: YES), the blink setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9109).

  In the blink setting process, when the display corresponding to the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed by the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display blinks. To make settings. Specifically, as the setting for causing flickering display, transmission of display data to the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275. The corresponding data is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and then all the display segments 321 and 322 of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off. The data to be in the state is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined turn-off period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and thereafter, the predetermined turn-on period and the predetermined turn-off period are alternately repeated. As a result, when the base value of the current area 311 becomes a notification target immediately after the new calculation period of the base value is started, the calculation initial display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. To let the administrator of the game hall know that the current base value reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is immediately after the start of a new calculation period. It becomes possible.

  Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Fig. 138 (a) shows an initial check period, and Fig. 138 (b) shows the base value reported by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag. 138C shows the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 138 (d) shows a display showing that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display showing the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is the first to fourth FIG. 138 (e) shows a display period during setting update being performed on the notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 138 (e) shows a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and Setting value It shows the setting confirmation during a display period that is performed in the display is the first to fourth notification display device 201 to 204 shown, FIG. 138 (f) shows the timing of the reset button 68c is pressed.

  First, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started under the condition that "1" is not set in the management start flag, the process for setting confirmation in the process when the supply of the operating power is started (FIG. 136) The case where the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is not executed will be described.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), the initial check period is started. As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128 (b), the display for check is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), the initial check period ends without being canceled midway at the timing of t2. In this case, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), the display period before start of management is started at the timing of t2. In the display period before the start of management, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128 (c), in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, all the display segments 321 and 322 are in the light emission state. A number corresponding to the current base value is displayed on the 3 informing display device 203 and the 4th informing display device 204.

  Thereafter, at time t3, the gaming start state of the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area PA in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1” and is neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode The total number (i.e., the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) reaches a management start reference number, which is a number smaller than the shift reference number. As a result, the management start flag is set to "1", whereby the display period before management start is ended as shown in FIG. 138 (b). In this case, the normal display period is started as shown in FIG. 138 (c) at the timing of t3. In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification. Are notified sequentially.

  Next, the process for setting confirmation in the process when the supply of operating power is started in the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the management start flag is set to “1” (FIG. 136) And the case where the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is not executed will be described.

  At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), an initial check period is started. As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128 (b), the display for check is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), the initial check period ends without being canceled midway at the timing of t5. In this case, the normal display period is started as shown in FIG. 138 (c) at the timing of t5. In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification. Are notified sequentially.

  Next, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started under the condition that “1” is set in the management start flag, the setting value update process (FIG. 137) Will be described.

  At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), the initial check period is started. As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128 (b), the display for check is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started in the middle of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 138 (f) at the timing of t7. Thus, the initial check period is ended halfway as shown in FIG. 138 (a) at the timing of t7, and the display period being updated during setting updating is started as shown in FIG. 138 (d) at the timing of t7. Ru.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 138 (d), the setting updating display period ends. In this case, the normal display period is started as shown in FIG. 138 (c) at the timing of t8. In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification. Are notified sequentially.

  Next, the process for setting confirmation in the process when the supply of operating power is started in the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the management start flag is set to “1” (FIG. 136) Will be described.

  At the timing of t9, an initial check period is started as shown in FIG. 138 (a). As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128 (b), the display for check is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 136) is started in the middle of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed at timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 138 (f). Thus, the initial check period is ended halfway as shown in FIG. 138 (a) at the timing of t10, and the display period during setting confirmation is started as shown in FIG. 138 (e) at the timing of t10. Ru.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 138 (e), the display period during setting confirmation ends. In this case, the normal display period is started as shown in FIG. 138 (c) at the timing of t11. In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification. Are notified sequentially.

  It should be noted that the setting confirmation process is performed in the process when the supply of the operating power is started in the case where the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag (FIG. 136) Alternatively, when the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed and the initial check period is canceled on the way, the display period before the start of management is started after the display period during the setting update or the display period during the setting confirmation is ended. It will be.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  As a check display, an initial check period may occur in which each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 emits light. This makes it possible to check whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 will be in the light emitting state, and check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal or not. It is possible to

  When supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, an initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to quickly confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

  Every time supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, an initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. This makes it possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal each time the supply of operation power is started.

  When the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started without requiring a special operation. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

  Even if the initial check period has not elapsed, the display for check in the first to fourth notification display apparatuses 201 to 204 is ended halfway when a cancellation trigger occurs. As a result, even in the middle of the initial check period, the check display can be ended and another display can be performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started and the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed, the initial check period is started, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201- At 204, the check display is started. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal or not before the game is started.

  In a configuration in which predetermined setting related processing such as setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) and setting value update processing (FIG. 137) is executed in a situation where processing at the start of operation power supply start is performed, operation power supply start An initial check period is initiated in situations where the hour process is being performed. As a result, it is possible to aggregate processing for starting the initial check period as well as predetermined setting related processing with respect to processing at the start of supply of operating power.

  In the configuration confirmation process (FIG. 136) and the setting value update process (FIG. 137), in the configuration in which the display corresponding to the current setting value is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, these predetermined settings Before the related processing is performed, an initial check period is started, and the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thus, after confirming whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal or not, the current setting values are confirmed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to Therefore, it becomes possible to check the set value correctly.

  Even if the initial check period has not elapsed based on execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) in the situation of the initial check period, the first to fourth notification The display for check in the display devices 201 to 204 is ended halfway. Thus, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be selected without waiting for the initial check period to elapse. It is possible to end the processing for check in 204 and to display the current setting value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it becomes possible to confirm the present setting value early.

  When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in a situation that is an initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed, the initial check period has elapsed. Even if it does not exist, the display for check in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is ended halfway. This makes it possible to end the initial check period at any timing after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started. For example, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started, the administrator of the gaming hall is sufficient that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. It is possible to end the display for check in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and to start the display of the current setting value.

  Further, in the setting value update process (FIG. 137), the setting value of the selection target is updated by pressing the reset button 68c. In this case, when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above, the display for check is ended on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display of the current setting value is started By doing this, it is not necessary to perform a dedicated operation for ending the check display and starting the display of the current setting value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting value.

  The calculation result storage area 234 stores a plurality of base values derived using information of the normal counter area 231 in different periods. Thereby, since it becomes possible to grasp the base value in a plurality of periods, it becomes possible to grasp the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA accurately.

  The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current area 311 in which the latest base value is stored, and first to third history areas 312-314 in which base values derived before that are stored. There is. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp not only the latest one but also the past ones as well as the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of gaming balls supplied to the game area PA.

  The base value repeatedly calculated in a relatively short cycle before the elapse of the first calculation period is stored in the current area 311, and the base values calculated when the first calculation period elapses are the first to the third It is stored in history areas 312-314. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the latest one as to the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of gaming balls supplied to the game area PA, and also to grasp the above ratio in the unit of one calculation period. Is possible. In addition, since base values in units of one calculation period are stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, the number of base values stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314 is suppressed. It becomes possible.

  The various counters 231 a to 231 e of the normal counter area 231 are cleared to “0” based on the elapse of one calculation period. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the normal counter area 231. Further, even if the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are thus cleared to “0” as described above, the base values calculated when one calculation period has elapsed are the first to third values. As stored in the history areas 312 to 314, it becomes possible to grasp the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA in the past calculation period later.

  A plurality of history areas 312 to 314 are provided as areas for storing past base values. This makes it possible to compare base values in a plurality of past calculation periods.

  The base values stored in each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, it is possible to individually grasp base values in a plurality of calculation periods while suppressing the number of notification devices 201 to 204.

  Even if the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the occurrence of a power failure can be monitored and the occurrence of a power failure can be specified by execution of the power failure information storage process (step S8901). A power failure process is performed. As a result, when a power failure occurs in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being performed, it is possible to appropriately cope with the power failure.

  In the configuration in which the power failure information storage process (step S8901) is included in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer interrupt process is executed even if the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed. Interrupted and activated. This makes it possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power failure even in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being performed.

  The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting even if the remaining process is being performed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished. Thereby, it is possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power failure in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being performed, using the first timer interrupt processing which is started by interrupting residual processing. Become.

  If the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed, the startup process flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is The process for advancing a game is not performed because 1 'is set. Thereby, even in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed, the first timer interrupt process is interrupted and activated to periodically monitor the occurrence of the power failure. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed.

  In the configuration in which the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the situation where the process at the start of the operation power supply start, power failure information even in the situation where the process at the start of the operation power supply start is performed Storage processing (step S8901) is executed. As a result, even if a power failure occurs while setting the setting value to be used, it is possible to appropriately cope with it.

  In addition, the display for check of the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification is not limited to the configuration to be ended when the initial check period has elapsed, and the operation for ending the display for check The display for the check may be continued until the step is performed. As the operation for ending the process, for example, the reset button 68c may be operated regardless of whether any one of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is performed. The operating unit other than the reset button 68c may be operated. In this case, the check display is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to check the base value or the setting value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the base value or the setting value after confirming whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. In addition, since the display for check is ended based on the operation of the operation unit, the display for check can be ended at a desired timing.

  In addition, when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68 b or the reset button 68 c is operated regardless of whether the supply of the operation power is started, the check for the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. The display may be started. In this case, it is possible to start the display for check at a desired timing when checking the base value or the setting value. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be ended when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, and the above-described predetermined operation unit or another operation operated for starting the check display may be performed. The check display may be ended when the operation unit is operated.

  Further, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68 c such as the update button 68 b is operated, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The display for check may be configured not to be started when the display for check is started and the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started without the specific operation unit being operated. In this case, in the configuration in which the check display is performed in response to the start of the supply of the operating power, it is possible to select whether or not to start the check display by the operation of the game hall manager.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state or not. When the open state is specified based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may display the base value. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the display for check of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started first, and thereafter, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The base value may be displayed at 204. Thereby, when confirming a base value, it becomes possible to confirm whether the 1st-4th display apparatuses 201-204 are normal before that. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be ended when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, and the above-described predetermined operation unit or another operation operated for starting the check display may be performed. The check display may be ended when the operation unit is operated.

  Also, when the main process (FIG. 132) is started in a state where the condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is satisfied, the display for check of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is The display for check may be started when the main process is started in a state where the condition for executing the process for setting confirmation is not satisfied without being started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display for check from being performed when it is determined that the confirmation of the setting value is to be performed.

  Further, when the main process (FIG. 132) is started in a state where the conditions for executing the setting value update process (FIG. 137) are satisfied, the display for checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is The display for check may be started when the main process is started without satisfying the condition for executing the setting value update process without being started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display for check from being performed when it is determined that the update of the setting value is to be performed.

  Also, in the case where the main process (FIG. 132) is started in a state in which either the condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the condition for executing the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is satisfied. The main processing is performed in a state in which both the condition for executing the setting confirmation processing and the condition for executing the setting value update processing are not satisfied without the display for checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 being started. The display for checking may be started when the key is started. In this case, when it is determined that the confirmation of the set value or the update of the set value is performed, it is possible to prevent the display for check from being performed.

  Further, the display for check is not limited to the configuration in which the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the light emission state, and the first to fourth notifications The display segments 321 to 324 in each of the display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to blink. In the check display, each of the display segments 321 to 324 sequentially emits light one by one or a part of them in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the range of the initial check period The display segments 321 to 324 may be configured to emit light at least once.

  Further, the process of causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display is not limited to the configuration executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, and the process corresponding to the non-specific control It may be configured to be executed as

  Further, when the base value is not stored in any of the first to third history areas 312 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, the history areas 312 to 314 correspond to the first to fourth notification display devices 201. It is good also as composition which becomes not an alerting | reporting object by -204. In this case, for example, when the base value is stored in the current area 311 and the first history area 312 while the base value is not stored in the second history area 313 and the third history area 314, the display continuation period The notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is switched between the current area 311 and the first history area 312 each time the time elapses, and the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 It will not be an alerting target.

  Further, in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, base values represented as a small number up to the second decimal place are stored. Although the configuration has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to store information of a combination of the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number among the base values. Total payout number of game balls to enable calculation (K91 x "Number of prize balls for winning on general winning hole 31" + K 92 x "Number of prize balls for winning on special power winning device 32" + K 93 x "No. Number of winning balls for winning in 1 operation opening 33 + K94 × total number of winning balls for winning in 2nd opening 34), total number of gaming balls discharged from skill area PA (K 91 + K 92 + K 93 + K 9 + K95) a combination of information and may be configured to be stored. In the former case, the information of the various areas 311 to 314 can be set as they are in the display target setting area 276. In the latter case, the base value is calculated using the information of the various areas 311 to 314 Information on the first decimal place and the second decimal place extracted from the base value is set in the display target setting area 276.

  In addition, only the current area 311 and the first history area 312 may be provided as the area for storing the base value in the calculation result storage area 234. The current area 311, the first history area 312, and Only the two history areas 313 may be provided. Further, four or more areas may be provided as a history area for storing information of past base values.

  The calculation result storage area 234 has various areas 311 to 314 fixed on the address, and is not limited to the configuration in which the base value is shifted in the various areas 311 to 314 as needed. It is good also as composition provided by-314 as a ring buffer.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the base value is calculated as the aspect information, it may be configured that the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter are calculated as in the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment. In this case, all of the 61st to 68th parameters may be stored in each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. Although the 61st to 68th parameters are stored in the current area 311, some parameters such as only the 61st parameter may be stored in the 1st to 3rd history areas 312 to 314.

  In addition to or instead of the base value as aspect information, the occurrence probability of the jackpot result may be calculated and stored, or the occurrence probability of the high frequency support mode may be calculated and stored.

  In addition, the trigger for the base value to be shifted in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is limited to the case where the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the shift reference number. The shift may be performed when a predetermined period (for example, 8 hours) elapses, or the shift may be performed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The shift may be performed when the supply of the operation power to the CPU 63 is started, or the shift may be performed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which has two or more types of opportunity which shift is performed.

  Further, until the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1", the display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 202 emit light. However, the display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 202 may be configured to blink. In addition, until “1” is set in the management start flag, “bL .--” → “b1 .--” → “b2 .--” → in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The display of "b3. ---" may be repeated.

  Also, until the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to “1”, the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are set. The display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the light emission state or blink state without the check display in the light emission state being performed, and the third and fourth notification The display corresponding to the fact that "1" is not set in the management start flag may be performed such that the display corresponding to the current base value is performed on the display devices 203 and 204.

  In addition, when the game stop flag is set to “1” and the progress of the game is stopped because “1” is not set to the power failure flag or the checksum does not match, the first to fourth notification In the display devices 201 to 204, the display segments 321 to 324 may be configured to emit light as in the case of the check display, or may be configured to blink.

  In addition, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration performed by the main CPU 63, and may be performed by a dedicated control unit. Alternatively, the display control device 82 may perform the configuration. In this case, when the base values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject. When the set values are displayed in the fourth to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the set values to be notified are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject. In addition, when the process at the time of start of supply of the operating power is executed in the main CPU 63, the first to fourth display devices for notification 201 to 204 are in the situation where the process at the time of start of supply of the operating power is performed. Information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject so that the check display is started.

The Thirty-Sixth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the thirty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of step S9401 to step S9426 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  In step S9401 to step S9403, the same process as step S8801 to step S8803 of the main process (FIG. 132) in the thirty-fifth embodiment is performed. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S9404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle. However, since “1” is set in the start-up processing flag in step S9403, even if the first timer interrupt processing is activated, power failure monitoring among various processing of the first timer interrupt processing is performed. While the process for updating and monitoring the fraud is executed, the first timer interrupt process is ended without the process for advancing the game being executed.

  After that, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S9405). The value set in the counter during check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. When one or more values are set in the counter during check, the display for check is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the counter under check is “0” (step S9406). Then, the process waits in step S9406 until the value of the counter during check becomes "0". Thus, the display for check in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is continued until the initial check period set in step S9405 elapses.

  Thereafter, the processing of step S9407 to step S9426 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S 9407 to S 9426 are the same as steps S 8806 to S 8825 of the main processing (FIG. 132) in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the processing at the time of the start of the supply of the operating power is started in the main CPU 63, the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification At the same time, the progress of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is stopped until the initial check period elapses. As a result, setting confirmation and setting value updating can be prevented from being performed in the middle of the initial check period, and an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in the middle of the initial check period.

The Thirty-Seventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the thirty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S9501 to S9525 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  Steps S9501 to S9518 execute the same processes as steps S7901 to S7918 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the check counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S9519). The value set in the counter during check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. If one or more values are set in the counter during check, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, the processing of step S9520 and thereafter is executed. The processing contents of steps S9520 to S9525 are the same as steps S7919 to S7924 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the time of the start of the supply of the operating power (steps S9501 to S9518) is completed in the main CPU 63, and the remaining processing is performed. Before (steps S9522 to S9525) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed, the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The processing for setting confirmation (step S9514) and the setting value update processing (step S9518) are executed as processing at the start of supply of operating power, while the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the initial check period. It will be started later. Thereby, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display in the initial check period, the display of the set values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is possible. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  When supply of operation power to main side CPU 63 is started, either setting confirmation processing (step S9514) or setting value update processing (step S9518) is executed, and setting confirmation processing (step Even if neither of S9514) and the setting value update process (Step S9518) is executed, the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In the main processing (FIG. 140) of the main CPU 63 (FIG. 140), if either the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (step S9514) It is a process that is commonly executed regardless of whether the value updating process (step S9518) is not executed, and any of the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value updating process (step S9518). If the process is executed after the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked. A process for starting the display for the user is set. As described above, since the process for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to start the check display is set as the common process, the above-described excellent features can be obtained while simplifying the process configuration. It is possible to achieve the

  Even in a situation where the check display is being executed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing for advancing the game. As a result, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display after the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, the game is performed. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the process for advancing from being delayed.

  Note that the processing after step S9520 may not be started until the initial check period has elapsed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state in which the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

<The 38th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of setting processing executed at the main side CPU 63 at the normal time is different from that of the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing setting processing in a normal state according to the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. The process of steps S9601 to S9605 in the setting process at the normal time is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, it is determined whether "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step S9601). If "1" is not set in the management start flag (step S9601: NO), data for display for check is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9602). The data for the check display is supplied to the display IC 266, whereby the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, all the display segments 321 to 324 are in a light emitting state. As a result, it becomes possible for the game hall manager to grasp whether or not the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be normally brought into the light emitting state.

  If "1" is set in the management start flag (step S9601: YES), the processing of steps S9603 to S9605 is executed. The processing contents of step S9603 to step S9605 are the same as step S9107 to step S9109 in the setting processing at the normal time (FIG. 135) in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. By executing the processes of steps S9603 to S9605, the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, when the base value of the current area 311 is notified immediately after the start of a new calculation period, the calculation initial display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202.

  According to the above configuration, when the management start flag is not set to “1”, it is an initial check period in which the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. By this, when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the situation in the initial check period is limited to the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Is possible.

The forty-ninth embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to set values is different from that in the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirty-third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the above-described thirty-third embodiment will be basically omitted.

  142 (a) to 142 (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting correspondence storage area 325 provided in the main ROM 64. FIG.

  In the setting correspondence storage area 325, a low probability mode success / failure table, a high probability mode success / failure table, and a setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) and a setting value update process (FIG. 116) corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 10. In the above, display data of setting values used to display the current setting values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set. More specifically, the setting correspondence storage area 325 includes a first setting information storage area 325a, a second setting information storage area 325b, a third setting information storage area 325c, a fourth setting information storage area 325d, and a fifth setting information storage area. A 325e and a sixth setting information storage area 325f are provided.

  In each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, there is a storage area for storing a low probability mode success or failure table to be referred to when the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a success or failure lottery mode A storage area for storing a high probability mode pass / fail table to be referred to in the high probability mode, and the first to fourth notification in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) and the setting value update process (FIG. 116) A storage area for storing display data of setting values used to display the current setting values on the display devices 201 to 204 is provided. In each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, areas of a plurality of predetermined bytes are secured as storage areas for storing the pass / fail table of the low probability mode, and the pass / fail table of the high probability mode is stored. An area of a plurality of predetermined bytes is secured as a storage area for storing, and an area of 1 byte is secured as a storage area for storing display data of setting values. Therefore, each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f has a storage capacity of a plurality of bytes. In this case, the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a is A (1), the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b is A (2), and the third setting information storage area 325c is The start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is A (3), the start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325e is A (5), and the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e is A (5). The start address of the sixth setting information storage area 325f is A (6).

  In the above configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in the present embodiment, six setting values of “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 in the same manner as the 33 embodiment. ing. In this case, the probability of becoming a jackpot result in the low probability mode is different in each of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, while the probability of becoming a jackpot result in the high probability mode is mutually the same. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the first setting information storage area 325a, the first low probability table LT corresponding to “setting 1” in the storage area for storing the low probability mode pass / fail table 1) is stored, and a common high probability failure table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode pass / fail table, and the setting value Display data for displaying “1” is stored in a storage area for storing display data. In the second setting information storage area 325b, the second low probability table LT (2) corresponding to "setting 2" is stored in the storage area for storing the low probability mode success / failure table, and the high probability mode is stored. A common high probability table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the pass / fail table of “1” to “6”. Display data for displaying "2" is stored.

  In the third setting information storage area 325c, the third low probability table LT (3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the low probability mode success / failure table, and the high probability mode is stored. A common high probability table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the pass / fail table of “1” to “6”. Display data for displaying "3" is stored. In the fourth setting information storage area 325d, a fourth low probability table LT (4) corresponding to "setting 4" is stored in the storage area for storing the low probability mode success / failure table, and the high probability mode is stored. A common high probability table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the pass / fail table of “1” to “6”. Display data for displaying "4" is stored.

  In the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the fifth low probability table LT (5) corresponding to "setting 5" is stored in the storage area for storing the probability table of the low probability mode, and the high probability mode is stored. A common high probability table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the pass / fail table of “1” to “6”. Display data for displaying "5" is stored. In the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the sixth low probability of failure table LT (6) corresponding to "setting 6" is stored in the memory area for storing the probability table of the low probability mode, and the high probability mode is stored. A common high probability table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the pass / fail table of “1” to “6”. Display data for displaying "6" is stored.

  In the case of the configuration of the first embodiment, the probability of becoming a jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher as the setting value is larger. On the other hand, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is the same regardless of which setting value. In addition, since the probability of becoming a big hit result in the high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of becoming a big hit result in the high probability mode is higher than the big hit probability of the low probability mode in “setting 6” even in the “setting 1” It has a high probability.

  In the first mode in which “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as setting values, the process is executed in step S 503 in order to execute the equivalence determination process in step S 504 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13). The read processing of the success / failure table will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the read process of the success or failure table. The processing of steps S9701 to S9705 in the read processing of the success / failure table is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is read out (step S9701). The setting value counter should refer to which of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325 when reading the success / failure table and reading the display data of the setting values, respectively. Is a counter for specifying the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325, a storage area corresponding to the value of the setting value counter read in step S9701 is selected (step S9702). The set value counter is configured to take any value of “1” to “6” as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, and the first value is the case where the value of the set value counter is “1”. The setting information storage area 325a is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "2", the second setting information storage area 325b is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "3," the third The setting information storage area 325c is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "4", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "5", the fifth The setting information storage area 325 e is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is “6”, the sixth setting information storage area 325 f is selected.

  At this time, the correspondence table stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to. In the correspondence table, the correspondence between the value of the setting value counter and the start addresses of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is defined. Specifically, the start address A (1) of the first setting information storage area 325a is set to correspond to the value "1" of the set value counter, and corresponds to the value "2" of the set value counter. A (2) which is the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b is set, and A which is the start address of the third setting information storage area 325c corresponding to the value of “3” of the setting value counter. (3) is set, and A (4) which is the start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is set in correspondence with the value "4" of the set value counter, and "5" of the set value counter is set. A (5) which is the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e is set to correspond to the value of “6”, and the value of the sixth setting information storage area 325f is set to correspond to the value of “6” of the setting value counter. Start address A (6) has been set.

  After that, if the current success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (step S9703: NO), the low probability mode success / failure table is read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9704). On the other hand, if the current success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S9703: YES), the high probability mode success / failure table is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9705).

  As described above, when the read process of the success or failure table is executed, the success or failure table corresponding to the current success or failure lottery mode is read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the value of the setting value counter. Then, in the yes / no determination process (step S504) of the special figure change start process (FIG. 13), it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to the big hit result by using the read yes / no table.

  Next, description will be given of processing when the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started in a situation where the setting value update processing (step S7918) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63. Do. In this case, in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), a process of setting the fifth display data buffer 275 while setting values are being updated is executed (step S8403). FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. The process of steps S9801 to S9805 in the setting process is executed using a program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and data for specific control.

  First, the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is read out (step S9801). Thereafter, among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325, the storage area corresponding to the value of the setting value counter read in step S9801 is selected (step S9802). The set value counter is configured to take any value of “1” to “6” as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, and the first value is the case where the value of the set value counter is “1”. The setting information storage area 325a is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "2", the second setting information storage area 325b is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "3," the third The setting information storage area 325c is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "4", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "5", the fifth The setting information storage area 325 e is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is “6”, the sixth setting information storage area 325 f is selected. At the time of this selection, the correspondence table stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to in the same manner as the process of reading the pass / fail table (FIG. 143).

  Thereafter, display data of setting values is read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9802 (step S9803). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data for applying to the fourth notification display device 204 (step S9804). Further, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display an indication indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step S9805).

  As described above, by executing the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update, the display corresponding to the display data set to the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9805 is the first to the fourth. The third notification display device 204 performs the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9804. Thus, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), the display showing that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the display showing the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are the first The fourth to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are performed.

  The setting executed when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated in a state where the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63 Also in the setting process (step S8405) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during confirmation, regarding the setting of the display data of the setting value, the same as the setting process (FIG. 144) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update. Processing is performed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, six setting values of “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, but depending on the model and model of the pachinko machine 10 There are cases where less than six settings are used. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 142 (b), three setting values of “setting 1”, “setting 3” and “setting 6” are set, In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment shown in the explanatory view of 142 (c), four setting values of “setting 1”, “setting 2”, “setting 3” and “setting 4” are set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment shown in the explanatory diagram of (d), only one setting value of “setting 1” is set. In this case, in any of the second to fourth forms of pachinko machines 10, as in the first form of pachinko machines 10, first to sixth setting information storages that enable setting of six levels of setting values. A setting correspondence storage area 325 having areas 325a to 325f is used.

  In the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142 (b), the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area Various information corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in 325 d. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, the first low probability table LT (1) corresponding to "setting 1" in the storage area for storing the low probability mode pass / fail table. Is stored, and the first high probability table HT (1) corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode pass / fail table, and the display data of the set value is stored. Display data for displaying "1" is stored in a storage area for storing.

  Various information corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the second setting information storage area 325 b and the fifth setting information storage area 325 e. That is, in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the third low probability table LT corresponding to "setting 3" in the storage area for storing the low probability mode pass / fail table Is stored, and the third high probability table HT (3) corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode pass / fail table, and the display data of the set value is stored. Display data for displaying "3" is stored in a storage area for storage.

  Various information corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in the third setting information storage area 325 c and the sixth setting information storage area 325 f. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the storage area for storing the pass / fail table in the low probability mode corresponds to the “setting 6”. ) Is stored, and the sixth high probability table HT (6) corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode pass / fail table, and the display data of the set value is stored. Display data for displaying "6" is stored in a storage area for storage.

  In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, even if the configuration corresponding storage area 325 having the first to sixth configuration information storage areas 325a to 325f is used, these first to sixth configuration information storage areas 325a to 325f The set value of the number of stages smaller than 6 which is the number of is set. The probability that the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher as the setting value is larger, and the probability that the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher as the setting value is larger. Note that the jackpot probability of the high probability mode in “setting 1” is a probability higher than the jackpot probability of the low probability mode in “setting 6”.

  In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, in the read process of the hit / fail table (FIG. 143), the setting value counter corresponds to "setting 1" regardless of whether it is "1" or "4". The pass / fail table is read, and the pass / fail table corresponding to “setting 3” is read regardless of whether the value of the set value counter is “2” or “5”, and the value of the set value counter is Whether the case is "3" or "6", the result table corresponding to "setting 6" is read out.

  In the read process of the pass / fail table (FIG. 143), the pass / fail table is read out from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. As a result, even when the setting values of three levels are set, the processing configuration of the read process (FIG. 143) of the pass / fail table is the same processing configuration as the case where the setting values of six levels are set. It becomes possible.

  In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, since three setting values are set when setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting six setting values is used, setting is possible in setting correspondence storage area 325 It is possible to divide the number of steps of the set value by the number of steps of the set value to be used. That is, the number of stages of setting values to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of stages of setting values that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is different from the maximum number of stages. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are allocated to the setting values to be used, and one group of three setting values are arranged in ascending order. In such a case, setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that the group is repeated. Thereby, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value updating process (FIG. 116), the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification The setting values to be displayed are changed in the order of “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” →... In other words, a display of a certain mode is performed when one display cycle is performed when display of different set values is changed in response to one operation of the reset button 68c, and settable set values are displayed one by one. The lap will be repeated. Therefore, it becomes easy to perform the update operation of the setting value.

  In setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update (FIG. 144), display of the setting value from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of stages of the setting value It is the structure which reads data. Thereby, even when the setting value of three steps is set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) can be the same processing configuration as the case where the setting value of six steps is set. It becomes possible.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, various information corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, and the third setting information storage area 325c and the 4 Various information corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the setting information storage area 325 d, and various information corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325 e and the sixth setting information storage area 325 f The configuration may be That is, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are allocated to each of the setting values to be used, and the same setting values are continuous in relation to the value of the setting value counter. The configuration may be set to 325a to 325f. In this case, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the setting value counter is “1” in the setting value updating process (FIG. 116), the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification The setting values to be displayed are changed in the order of “1” → “1” → “3” → “3” → “6” → “6” → “1” →...

  In the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142 (c), the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area Various information corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in 325 b. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, the first low probability table LT (1) corresponding to "setting 1" in the storage area for storing the low probability mode pass / fail table. Is stored, and a common high probability failure table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode pass / fail table, and the setting value is displayed Display data for displaying "1" is stored in a storage area for storing data.

  Various information corresponding to “setting 2” is stored in the third setting information storage area 325 c and the fourth setting information storage area 325 d. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, the second low probability table LT corresponding to “setting 2” in the storage area for storing the low probability mode pass / fail table Is stored, and a common high probability failure table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode pass / fail table, and the setting value is displayed Display data for displaying "2" is stored in a storage area for storing data.

  Various information corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325 e. That is, in the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the third low probability of failure table LT (3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in the memory area for storing the probability table of the low probability mode. A common high probability table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the pass / fail table in the probability mode, and the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value The display data for displaying "3" are memorize | stored in.

  Various information corresponding to “setting 4” is stored in the sixth setting information storage area 325 f. That is, in the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the fourth low probability of failure table LT (4) corresponding to “setting 4” is stored in the memory area for storing the probability table of the low probability mode. A common high probability table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the pass / fail table in the probability mode, and the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value The display data for displaying "4" are memorize | stored in.

  In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, even if the configuration corresponding storage area 325 having the first to sixth configuration information storage areas 325a to 325f is used, these first to sixth configuration information storage areas 325a to 325f The set value of the number of stages smaller than 6 which is the number of is set. The probability that the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher as the setting value is larger, and the probability that the jackpot result in the high probability mode is the same regardless of which setting value. In addition, since the probability of becoming a big hit result in the high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of becoming a big hit result in the high probability mode is higher than the big hit probability of the low probability mode in “setting 4” even in the “setting 1” It has a high probability.

  In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, in the read process of the hit / fail table (FIG. 143), the setting value counter corresponds to “setting 1” regardless of whether it is “1” or “2”. The pass / fail table is read out, and the pass / fail table corresponding to “setting 2” is read out regardless of whether the value of the set value counter is “3” or “4”, and the value of the set value counter is In the case of “5”, the success or failure table corresponding to “setting 3” is read out, and when the value of the setting value counter is “6”, the success or failure table corresponding to “setting 4” is read out.

  In the read process of the pass / fail table (FIG. 143), the pass / fail table is read out from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. As a result, even when the setting values of four levels are set, the processing configuration of the read process (FIG. 143) of the pass / fail table is the same processing configuration as the case where the setting values of six levels are set. It becomes possible.

  In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, in the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting six setting values is used, the setting correspondence storage area 325 can be set because four setting values are set. The number of steps of the set value can not be divided by the number of steps of the set value to be used. In this case, for each of “setting 1” and “setting 2”, two consecutive setting information storage areas 325 a to 325 d are allocated in relation to the value of the setting value counter, and “setting 3” and One setting information storage area 325e, 325f is allocated to each of the "setting 4". Thereby, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value updating process (FIG. 116), the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification The setting values to be displayed are changed in the order of “1” → “1” → “2” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “1” →...

  In setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update (FIG. 144), display of the setting value from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of stages of the setting value It is the structure which reads data. Thereby, even when the setting value of four stages is set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) may be the same processing configuration as the case where the setting values of six stages are set. It becomes possible.

  In order to change the display of the set values in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in response to one operation of the reset button 68c in the set value update process (FIG. 116), It is preferable that various pieces of information corresponding to the same set value are not set in the continuous setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in relation to the value of the set value counter. For example, various information corresponding to "setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 325a, various information corresponding to "setting 2" is set in the second setting information storage area 325b, and a third setting information storage area Various information corresponding to "setting 3" is set in 325c, various information corresponding to "setting 4" is set in fourth setting information storage area 325d, and "setting 1" is supported in fifth setting information storage area 325e. Various types of information may be set, and various types of information corresponding to "setting 2" may be set in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. In this case, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the setting value counter is “1” in the setting value updating process (FIG. 116), the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification The setting values to be displayed are changed in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “1” → “2” → “1” →...

  In the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142 (d), all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are described in detail. Stores various information corresponding to "setting 1". That is, in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the first low probability table LT (1) corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the low probability mode success / failure table. A common high probability table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode success / failure table, and the display data of the setting value is stored. Display data for displaying “1” is stored in the storage area for setting.

  In the case of the configuration of the fourth embodiment, only one type of setting value is set even if the setting correspondence storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used. As described above, even in the configuration in which only one type of setting value is set, in the read processing of the success / failure table (FIG. 143), the configuration in which the success / failure table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter is there. Thus, even if only one type of setting value is set, the processing configuration of the read process (FIG. 143) of the pass / fail table has the same processing configuration as that when the setting value of six levels is set. It is possible to

  In the case of the configuration of the fourth embodiment, there is basically no need to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 116) since there is no need to set the setting value, but if an abnormality occurs in the setting value, the setting value is set. An update process (FIG. 116) may be performed. In this case, "setting 1" is allocated to all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Therefore, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value updating process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used. The displayed setting values are “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” → ... and so on. It will be.

  In setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update (FIG. 144), display of the setting value from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of stages of the setting value It is the structure which reads data. Thus, even when only one type of setting value is set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) has the same processing configuration as when setting values of six levels are set. Is possible.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. It will be. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second to fourth embodiments, a first predetermined number (specifically, six) of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f for storing the pass / fail table corresponding to the setting value is provided. In the configuration described above, the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number. This makes it possible to share the configuration regarding the pachinko machine 10 of the first form and the setting correspondence storage area 325 in which the number of types of setting values to be used is the first predetermined number, and changes the number of types of setting values. It becomes possible to do simply the design work of the pachinko machine 10 in the case where it does.

  In the setting value update process (step S7918), the numerical value information of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is changed each time the reset button 68c is operated, whereby the setting value to be used is changed. And that the success / failure determination processing is executed in a mode corresponding to the setting value of the use object by using the success / failure table of the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the changed numerical information in the success / failure determination processing. Become. In this case, each success or failure table of setting values that can be set is a configuration stored in at least one setting information storage area 325a to 325f, and is a part of the first predetermined number and stores a plurality of setting information Since the areas 325a to 325f are configured to store the same success / failure table, the success / failure tables are stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. As a result, while using the configuration in which the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used as they are and the setting value to be used is determined using the setting value counter, the setting values to be used are It is possible to make the number of types smaller than the first predetermined number.

  The success / failure table is read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical value information of the setting value counter, and the read / fail determination process is executed using the read out success / failure table. As a result, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, it is possible to use the configuration for reading out the yes / no table upon execution of the yes / no determination process. .

  In the situation where setting value update processing (step S7918) is executed, display data of the setting value is read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical value information of the setting value counter, and the display data of the read setting value is read. The corresponding display is performed by the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the configuration for reading out the display data of the setting values upon execution of the display corresponding to the setting values is used as it is It is possible to

  The number of stages of setting values to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of stages of setting values that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is different from the maximum number of stages. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are allocated to the setting values to be used, and one group of three setting values are arranged in ascending order. In such a case, setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that the group is repeated. Thereby, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value updating process (FIG. 116), the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification The setting values to be displayed are changed in the order of “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” →... In other words, a display of a certain mode is performed when one display cycle is performed when display of different set values is changed in response to one operation of the reset button 68c, and settable set values are displayed one by one. The lap will be repeated. Therefore, it becomes easy to perform the update operation of the setting value.

  In the configuration in which the high probability mode success / failure table does not change according to the setting value, the high probability mode success / failure table is stored in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325 a to 325 f of the setting correspondence storage area 325 Alternatively, the configuration may be configured to be stored in a storage area different from the setting correspondence storage area 325 in the main ROM 64.

  In addition, when there is only one set value to be used, the pass / fail table corresponding to the set value is set in only one set information storage area 325a to 325f and the remaining set information storage area 325a to 325f. It is good also as composition which a success / failure table is not set to 325f. In addition, although the setting value to be used is a plurality of steps, if the number of steps is smaller than the number of first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the success or failure tables corresponding to the respective setting values are respectively The configuration may be such that only the corresponding one of the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is set and the remaining setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are not set with the pass / fail table. In this configuration, setting information storage area in which no qualification table is set by setting numerical information corresponding to setting information storage areas 325a to 325 in which the qualification table is not set as numerical information that can not be selected in the setting value counter. It becomes possible to prevent 325a to 325f from being selected when reading the pass / fail table or reading the display data of the set value.

Forty-Fourth Embodiment
Although the configuration corresponding storage area 325 capable of setting six levels of setting values is used in the thirty-ninth embodiment, in this embodiment, setting correspondence capable of setting three levels of setting values is possible. The storage area 326 is used.

  FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting correspondence storage area 326 stored in advance in the main ROM 64. FIG.

  In the setting correspondence storage area 326, a first setting information storage area 326a, a second setting information storage area 326b, and a third setting information storage area 326c are provided. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first form shown in FIG. 145 (a), various information corresponding to "setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 326a, and "setting 2" in the second setting information storage area 326b Various pieces of information corresponding to “setting 3” are set in the third setting information storage area 326 c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the setting values corresponding to the maximum number that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 326 are set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 145 (b), various types of information corresponding to "setting 1" are set in all of the first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, only one type of setting value is set using the setting correspondence storage area 326 in which setting values of three levels can be set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 145 (c), various types of information corresponding to “setting 1” are set in the first setting information storage area 326a and the second setting information storage area 326b. Various information corresponding to "setting 3" is set in the information storage area 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, two setting values are set using the setting correspondence storage area 326 which can set three setting values.

  According to the above configuration, in the setting corresponding storage area 326 capable of setting the setting value of three steps, the setting values of the number of steps smaller than the setting value of three steps are used in the second form and the third form It becomes possible to divert to the pachinko machine 10 as it is. Further, as in the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment, the processing configuration of the success / failure table read processing (FIG. 143) and the processing configuration of the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update (FIG. 144) The third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 can be commonly used.

Forty-First Embodiment
In the present embodiment, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) or the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, it can be viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 This embodiment is different from the above-described thirty-third embodiment in that predetermined notification is performed by the display unit. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirty-third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the above-described thirty-third embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 146 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining various display portions provided in an area which can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 which causes the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As various display units, a special view display unit 37a, a special view reserve display unit 37b, a common view display unit 38a, and a regular view reserve display unit 38b are provided. These functions are the same as in the first embodiment. Although the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a are provided side by side, the round display unit 330 is provided so as to be laterally arranged with respect to the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a. It is done.

  The round display unit 330 has seven display segments 331 to 337 similar to the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a. The seven display segments 331 to 337 are rod-like light emitting areas each having the same shape and the same size, and are arranged so as to produce the character of “8”. The seven display segments 331 to 337 are individually controlled to emit light.

  In the round display unit 330, the number of round games occurring in the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result is notified. In this embodiment, as a jackpot result that can be selected when a jackpot is won in the success or failure determination process, the first jackpot result that becomes a transition trigger to the opening and closing execution mode with a relatively small number of round game execution, There is a second jackpot result as a trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode in which the number of executions of is relatively large. Specifically, the round game is executed twice in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first jackpot result, and the round game is executed sixteen times in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second jackpot result.

  In the first jackpot result, the jackpot result in which the success or failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the success / failure lottery mode has a high probability after the end of the open / close execution mode There is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the frequent support mode as well as the mode. In the second jackpot result, the jackpot result in which the success or failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the success / failure lottery mode has a high probability after the end of the open / close execution mode There is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the frequent support mode as well as the mode.

  FIG. 146 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining display contents of the round display unit 330.

  When the open / close execution mode triggered by any of the big hit results is started, the round display unit 330 is for at least partial display from the non-display state in which all the display segments 331 to 337 are turned off. The segments 331 to 337 are in a display state in which light is emitted. In the situation where the open / close execution mode continues, the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 at the start of the open / close execution mode is maintained. Then, when the open / close execution mode ends, the round display unit 330 changes from the display state to the non-display state.

  In the opening / closing execution mode in which two round games are to be executed, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are turned off, and the fifth The seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned on. In the open / close execution mode in which 16 round games are to be executed, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are turned on, and the fifth The seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned off. Thereby, the manager of the game hall checks the round display section 330 when the open / close execution mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10, and the open / close execution mode corresponds to any open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to grasp what it is.

  When the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, the corresponding display is performed in the round display unit 330. Specifically, when the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, and the like of the round display portion 330, The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned off, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334 and the sixth display segment 336 are turned on.

  The display on the round display unit 330 corresponding to the setting value updating process (step S7918) is started when the setting value updating process (step S7918) is started, and the setting value updating process (step S7918) is ended. It is finished. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the open / close execution mode is executed, and the round display unit when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) described later is executed. It is also different from the display content displayed on 330. Thereby, the administrator of the gaming hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting value update processing (step S7918) is being executed by checking the round display portion 330. Further, such grasping can be performed using the round display unit 330.

  When the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, the corresponding display is performed in the round display unit 330. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), the first display segment 331 and the third display segment 333 of the round display unit 330, The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned on, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334 and the sixth display segment 336 are turned off.

  The display on the round display unit 330 corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started, and is ended when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is ended. It is finished. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the open / close execution mode is executed, and when the setting value update process (step S7918) is further executed, the round display unit 330 is displayed. It is also different from the displayed content. Thereby, the manager of the gaming hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed by confirming the round display section 330. Further, such grasping can be performed using the round display unit 330.

  In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the process for advancing the game is not executed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are not performed in the situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed. Further, the other of the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) is not executed in the situation where one is being executed. Therefore, even if the round display unit 330 is also used as a display unit for performing each display, situations where each display should be performed do not occur redundantly.

  Note that the display content of the round display unit 330 is not limited to the above display content, and it is optional as long as it can be distinguished from the display content of the round display unit 330 that each situation is present, for example Of the display and setting value update processing (step S7918) corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914), all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 may be lit. In addition, in one of display and setting value update processing (step S7918) corresponding to the processing for setting confirmation (step S7914), all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are turned on and the state is maintained. In the other, all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 may be in a blinking state.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the display corresponding to the processing for setting confirmation and the display corresponding to the processing for updating the setting value are performed in the round display portion 330, the display may be performed in the special view display portion 37a. These displays may be performed by the common view display unit 38a. In addition, display corresponding to the processing for setting confirmation is performed on any one display unit of the special view display unit 37a, the common view display unit 38a, and the round display unit 330, and setting is performed on the other display unit. The display corresponding to the value update process may be performed.

  In addition, the hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first operation opening 33 and the hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second operation opening 34 are stored separately, As a special view display unit 37a, a first special view display unit in which game times are executed triggered by the hold information corresponding to the first operation opening 33, and a game triggered by the hold information corresponding to the second operation opening 34 In the configuration provided with the second special view display unit in which the time is executed, the display corresponding to the process for setting confirmation and the display corresponding to the setting value update process are performed in the first special view display unit. The second special view display unit may be configured to perform display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and display corresponding to the setting value update process, and the first special view display unit may correspond to the setting confirmation process. Display is performed and the setting value is updated on the second special view display unit It may be configured to display corresponding sense is performed.

  In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a dedicated display unit for displaying that the setting confirmation process is being performed is provided, and it is displayed that the setting value update process is being performed. A dedicated display unit may be provided for displaying that the setting confirmation process is being executed or the setting value update process is being executed. The display unit may be provided. In this case, the dedicated display unit may be configured to be display-controlled by the main CPU 63, or may be configured to be display-controlled by the sound emission control device 81 or the display control device 82.

Forty-Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing and the first timer interrupt processing is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirty-third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the above-described thirty-third embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S9901 to S9923 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, power on initialization processing is executed (step S9901). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for waiting (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S9902). In the internal function register setting process, as in step S7902 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment, a first timer interrupt process (a process started by periodically interrupting the main process) is executed. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process that is started up by periodically interrupting the main process, while setting the interrupt cycle of FIG. 148) to the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds). Is set to a second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is a cycle shorter than the first interrupt cycle.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set for the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step S9903). As a result, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. On the other hand, no interrupt permission setting is made for the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is still maintained in a state where interrupts are inhibited.

  Thereafter, the processes of steps S9904 to S9917 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S9904 to S9917 are the same as steps S7905 to S7918 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

  After the processes of steps S9904 to S9917 are finished, interrupt permission is set for the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) (step S9918). Thereby, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle. That is, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle. Thereafter, in step S9919 to step S9923, the same process as step S7920 to step S7924 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment is executed.

  FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the first timer interrupt process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The first timer interrupt process is periodically activated at a cycle of 4 milliseconds which is the first interrupt cycle as described above. Further, a program corresponding to the first timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  First, in order to inhibit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), interrupt disable is set (step SA101). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148), the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is prohibited, thereby provisionally executing the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148). Even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) from being activated in duplicate. Also, since the occurrence of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is inhibited, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) with respect to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) even if the second interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent the program from interrupting and being activated.

  Thereafter, in steps SA102 to SA121, the same processes as steps S8202 to S8221 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. If a positive determination is made in step SA107, or if the process of step SA121 is executed, setting of interrupt permission to permit generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (Step SA122).

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 147), the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is permitted while the first timer interrupt process The interrupts of FIG. 148 are not allowed. Thus, even when processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is possible. On the other hand, the process for controlling the progress of the game by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) can be prevented from being executed.

  Also, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148). It is not started by interrupting. This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt process from being activated in duplicate.

Forty-Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration for displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is different from that in the thirty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment will be basically omitted.

Even in the present embodiment, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the normal counter area 231 is provided in the work area 223 for nonspecific control. The regular counter area 231 has a regular winning counter 231a for regular, a special power winning counter 231b for regular, a first operation counter 231c for regular, and a second operation counter 231d for regular, as in the fifteenth embodiment. A normal out counter 231e is provided. When one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is based on the jackpot result, the value of the general winning counter 231a for normal is incremented by 1, and the special power When one game ball enters the winning device 32, the value of the special power pay counter 231b for normal use is incremented by one, and when one game ball enters the first operation opening 33, for normal use The value of the first operation counter 231c is incremented by one, and when one gaming ball enters the second actuation port 34, the value of the second actuation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by one and the value is added to the out port 24a. When one gaming ball enters the ball, the value of the out counter 231e for normal use is incremented by one. The base values are as follows when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 in the situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode according to the big hit result are K91 to K95.
Base value: Total payout number of game balls (K91 x "Number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31" + K 92 x "Number of prize balls for winning on special electric winning device 32" + K 93 x "First operation opening 33 The number of winning balls for the winnings of the game + K94 × the number of winning balls for the winning on the second operation opening 34) / The ratio of the total number of playing balls (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95) discharged from the gaming area PA

  In the work area 223 for nonspecific control, in addition to the normal counter area 231, an operation result storage area 234 is provided. As the storage area for storing the information of the base value in the calculation result storage area 234 as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment, the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and 3 history area 314 is provided (see FIG. 126). In the current area 311, the latest base value calculated in the result calculation process (FIG. 149) is stored. The first history area 312 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. The second history area 313 stores the final base value in the second calculation period. The third history area 314 stores the final base value in the third calculation period.

  FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the result calculation processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is a process corresponding to nonspecific control in step S3803, as in the management process (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Read the program of management execution processing. Then, in the management execution process (FIG. 71), the check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment. In this check processing, result calculation processing is performed and display processing (FIG. 150) described later is performed. Further, the processing of step SA201 to step SA217 in the result calculation processing is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, calculation processing of a base value is executed (step SA201). In the arithmetic processing, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. Here, in the present embodiment, the calculation of the base value is not completed in one processing cycle of the result calculation process, but is completed by the processing cycle of the result calculation process being performed a predetermined number of times.

  Specifically, at step SA201, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are set to K91 to K95 in the predetermined processing of the calculation processing as a result of the new calculation of the base value being started. In the case of K91 × “the number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31”, K92 × “the number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32”, and K93 × for the winning in the first operation port 33 Calculate the number of prize balls, K94 x the number of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34, and the total number of gaming balls discharged from the skill area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95) Are stored in the under-operation storage area provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. After that, in step SA201 of the result calculation process of the processing number of one processing time after the predetermined processing number of times, the total payout number of game balls (K91 × using the various information stored in the storage area under calculation) "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K 92 × "number of prize balls for winning in the special power prize device 32" + K 93 × "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operation opening 33" + K 94 × "second operation The number of winning balls for winning in the mouth 34 is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the above-mentioned calculation storage area. After that, in step SA201 of the result calculation process of the result of processing twice after the predetermined processing, the base value is calculated using the various information stored in the storage area during calculation.

  That is, in the present embodiment, it is necessary to execute result calculation processing three times in order to calculate one base value. In this case, since the result calculation process is called and executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), it is executed each time the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds) elapses. Become. Therefore, one base value is calculated in a cycle of about 12 milliseconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cycle in which one base value is calculated may be a cycle shorter than a 12 millisecond cycle, or may be a cycle longer than a 12 millisecond cycle.

  As described above, the processing load for calculating the base value can be reduced by calculating the one base value by executing the process of the result calculation process a plurality of times. In particular, since result calculation processing is executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control, in order to execute result calculation processing, not only processing for reading out non-specific control programs and data for non-specific control, but also specific control It is necessary to save the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to. In this case, by reducing the processing load for calculating the base value, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the result calculation processing, and as a result, the processing load for executing the processing corresponding to the nonspecific control. It is possible to reduce the

  Even if the processing of result calculation processing is executed multiple times to calculate one base value, each piece of information during calculation of the base value in each processing round of result calculation processing is a work for non-specific control It is written to the area 223. As a result, the process corresponding to the specific control is executed between one processing cycle of the result calculation process and the next process cycle, and the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control Even if the information in the various registers is erased, it is possible to store and hold each piece of information during calculation of the base value.

  Even if the processing of result calculation processing is executed multiple times to calculate one base value, the counter area for normal 231 is used in the first processing number of result calculation processing for calculating a new base value. All of the values of the various counters 231a to 231e are extracted, and the base value of the number of times of calculation is calculated using the extracted values. Thus, even if the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are changed during the calculation of the one base value, the one base value is prevented from being affected by the change of the values. It becomes possible to calculate

  After the calculation process of the base value is performed in step SA201, it is determined whether or not the calculation of one base value is completed in the result calculation process of the present processing cycle (step SA202). When the calculation of the one base value is not completed (step SA202: NO), the process of steps SA203 to SA205 is not performed to overwrite the base value in the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234.

  When the calculation of one base value is completed (step SA202: YES), the base value whose calculation is completed is overwritten on the current area 311 (step SA203). Thereafter, it is determined whether the shift trigger flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to “1” (step SA204). In the present embodiment, the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) in the situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode according to the jackpot result When calculation of a new base value is completed after reaching the shift reference number (specifically, 60000), data shift processing (step SA216) in the calculation result storage area 234 is performed. In this data shift process, the information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is referred to as second history area 313 → third history area After shifting in the order of 314, the first history area 312 → the second history area 313, and the current area 311 → the first history area 312, the current area 311 is cleared to “0”. The shift trigger flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that the situation is after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number and before the data shift processing is performed.

  When the shift trigger flag is set to "1" (step SA204: YES), "1" is set to the calculation completion flag at the time of shifting provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step SA205). The calculation completion flag at the time of shift is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that the calculation of one base value is completed after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA202, a negative determination is made in step SA204, or if the process of step SA205 is performed, “1” is included in the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223. It is determined whether it is set (step SA206). If “1” is not set in the management start flag (step SA206: NO), processing before management start is executed (step SA207). In the pre-management start process, the process of steps S8604 to S8608 of the result calculation process (FIG. 130) in the thirty-fifth embodiment is performed.

  If "1" is set in the management start flag (step SA206: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA208) . When the shift trigger flag is not set to "1" (step SA208: NO), the total number is calculated by totaling all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 (step SA209). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is 60000 or more, which is the shift reference number (step SA210).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SA210, the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA211). Further, "1" is set in the pre-shift display flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step SA212). The pre-shift display flag mainly indicates that the pre-shift display corresponding to the total number of gaming balls having reached the shift reference number should be started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is a flag for specifying in the side CPU 63.

  If the shift trigger flag is set to “1” and an affirmative determination is made in step SA208, it is determined whether “1” is set to the calculation completion flag at the time of shifting in the work area 223 for nonspecific control. (Step SA213). The calculation completion flag at the time of shift is set to “1” when the calculation of one base value is completed after the total number of gaming balls reaches the shift reference number as described above. When an affirmative determination is made in step SA213, the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA214). Further, the calculation completion flag at the time of shift in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to “0” (step SA215).

  Thereafter, data shift processing is performed (step SA216). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is stored in the second history area 313 → the third history area 314. After shifting in the order of the first history area 312 → the second history area 313 and the current area 311 → the first history area 312, the current area 311 is cleared to “0”. Thus, the final base value in the second calculation period is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the third calculation period, and the final base value in the first calculation period is stored. Is stored in the second history area 313 as a final base value in the second calculation period, and the base value calculated after the total number of gaming balls reaches the shift reference number in the current calculation period is one time It is stored in the first history area 312 as a final base value in the previous calculation period. In the current area 311, no base value is stored. In the data shift processing, when the above information shift is performed, the LDIR instruction is used. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage area is shifted (copied) to the storage area by specifying the address of the storage area of the information and the address of the storage area of the information. It becomes. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step SA217).

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the display processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of step SA301 to step SA320 in the display processing is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether "1" is set in the management start flag in the non-specific control work area 223 (step SA301). If a negative determination is made in step SA301, the base value is read out from the current area 311 as in step S8714 of the display process (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the first decimal place in the read base value The operation result data corresponding to the numeral and the numeral in the second decimal place are set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA302). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the first decimal place number in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base of the current area 311 The second decimal place number in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag, the base value in the past calculation period is not notified, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified Be done. The display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the case where the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" are the same as those of the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SA301, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is decremented by 1 (step SA303). The switching timing counter changes the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the condition that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the base value. It is a counter for specifying in.

  In the present embodiment, the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) in the situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode according to the jackpot result In a situation where the shift reference number has not been reached, notification of the base value stored in each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 is displayed continuously. Is performed for 5 seconds, and the interval non-display interval period (specifically, 1) is used to notify that switching of the base value to be notified will occur during notification of those base values. For the second). Specifically, all of the display segments 321 to 324 are turned off in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as the interval non-display, thereby displaying the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 204 becomes non-display state. Notification is performed by non-display for interval before the base value to be notified is switched in the predetermined order of current area 311 → first history area 312 → second history area 313 → third history area 314 It becomes possible to make the manager of the game hall clearly recognize that the target base value is switched.

  In the situation where the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the display before shift corresponding to it is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. Specifically, “A.” is displayed on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as the pre-shift display. The display contents of “A.” are display contents which are not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in any of the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value and the interval non-display period. is there. As a result, the entire display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the pre-shift display is performed, the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value, and the interval period when the interval is not displayed Can have different display contents. Therefore, the total number of the game balls reached the shift reference number by the administrator of the game hall confirming that the display before shift is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to grasp that it is the situation where shift of a base value is performed by this.

  The display contents of the pre-shift display are the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the check display is performed, and the first in the situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag. The display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is executed, and the setting value update This is also different from the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the process (FIG. 137) is being performed. From this point as well, the game hall manager confirms that the display before shift is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, so that the total number of game balls is the shift reference number. It becomes possible to grasp that it is the situation where shift of a base value is performed by having reached.

  The execution period of the pre-shift display is set to a period longer than the interval period (specifically, one second) in which the non-display for interval is performed. In addition, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to a period longer than the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) of the display corresponding to the base value. Specifically, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to 8 seconds. The present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the pre-shift display may be longer than the interval period and not longer than the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value, or may be shorter than the interval period. . However, in order to make the administrator of the gaming hall clearly recognize that the pre-shift display is being performed, it is preferable that the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to be longer than the interval period.

  As described above, in order to complete the calculation of one base value, the processing of the result calculation process (FIG. 149) needs to be executed a plurality of times. Specifically, the cycle in which the one base value is calculated is It has a 12 millisecond cycle. In addition, the data shift process (step SA216) in which the information of the base value is shifted between the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number is the shift reference number. After reaching, it is executed after one base value is newly calculated. In this case, the execution period of the pre-shift display is longer than the longest period required to complete the data shift process (step SA216) when the total number of gaming balls reaches the shift reference number. It is set. Thereby, in a situation where the display before shift is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the new calculation of one base value and the data shift process of the base value (step SA216) are completed. Is possible.

  Returning to the description of the display process (FIG. 150), when the process of step SA303 is executed, the base value is displayed by determining whether the value of the switching timing counter after 1 subtraction is "0". It is determined whether or not the current measurement target period has elapsed among the duration period, the interval period in which the interval non-display is performed, and the execution period of the display before shift (step SA304). If an affirmative determination is made in step SA304, it is determined that the pre-shift display should be started by determining whether or not the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (step SA305). If a negative determination is made in step SA305, it is determined whether "1" is set in the interval flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA306). The interval flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the interval non-display should be started.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA306, this means that the target for which notification is to be started on the basis of the current switching timing in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a base value. In this case, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for nonspecific control is incremented by 1 (step SA307). Then, when the value of the display object counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value “3” (step SA308: YES), the value of the display object counter is cleared to “0” (step SA309).

  The display target counter displays the first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. It is a counter for specifying in the main side CPU 63 a base value to be notified in the devices 201-204. Specifically, when the value of the display object counter is "0", the base value stored in the current area 311 is the notification object, and when the value of the display object counter is "1", the first history area When the base value stored in 312 is to be notified and the value of the display target counter is “2”, the base value stored in the second history area 313 is to be notified, and the value of the display target counter is “3”. In the case of “”, the base value stored in the third history area 314 is to be notified.

  When a negative determination is made in step SA308, or when the process of step SA309 is executed, a base value is displayed on the switching timing counter of the non-specific control work area 223 as a value corresponding to the next switching timing. A value corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set (step SA310). Thereafter, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA311). As a result, when “1” is not set in the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 before the next switching timing, when the next switching timing is reached, the interval non-use is made. Display will be performed.

  Thereafter, processing for setting display data corresponding to the base value that is the target of the present notification in the display target setting area 276 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is executed. Specifically, as in step S8708 of the process for display (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, display type data corresponding to the value of the display object counter is set in the display object setting area 276 (step SA312) . The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and a notification target base The second notification display device 202 displays an indication as to which of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 the value corresponds to in the calculation result storage area 234. And display data to be performed.

  Thereafter, the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234, as in step S8709 of the display process (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment. The base value is read out from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter among them, and the operation result data corresponding to the first decimal digit and the second decimal digit in the read base value are displayed in the display target setting area 276. (Step SA313). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to perform display corresponding to the first digit of the decimal point in the base value of the notification target, and the second digit of the decimal point in the base value of the notification target And display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform a display corresponding to.

  By setting display data including display type data and operation result data in the display target setting area 276, the display data is displayed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. , And the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. That is, when the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified, the display as shown in FIG. 127 (a) is performed by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 as an example. When the base value of the history area 312 is to be notified, the display as shown in FIG. 127 (b) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as an example, and the second history area is displayed. When the base value of 313 is to be notified, the display as shown in FIG. 127C is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as an example, and the display of the third history area 314 is performed. When the base value is to be notified, a display as shown in FIG. 127 (d) is performed on the first to fourth notification display apparatuses 201 to 204 as an example.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SA306 because the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to “1”, the current switching timing in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It means that the target which should start an alerting on the occasion of is interval non-display. In this case, an interval setting process is executed (step SA314). In the setting process, a value corresponding to an interval period (specifically, one second) is set as a value corresponding to the next switching timing in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for nonspecific control. Thereafter, the interval flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0" (step SA315). By this, when “1” is not set in the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 before the next switching timing, the base value is set when the next switching timing is reached. Display will be performed.

  Thereafter, interval data is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA316). The interval data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform non-display for intervals, and more specifically, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is data for turning off the display segments 321 to 324. By setting interval data in the display target setting area 276 as display data, the interval data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 All 204 become non-display state. The manager of the game hall having confirmed that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the non-display state can grasp that it is an interval period.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SA305 because the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for nonspecific control is set to “1”, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 use the current time. It means that the target for which the notification should be started upon switching timing is display before shift. In this case, the setting process of the display period before shift is executed (step SA317). In the setting process, a value corresponding to the execution period (specifically, eight seconds) of the pre-shift display is set as the value corresponding to the next switching timing in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for nonspecific control.

  Thereafter, the interval flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0" and the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0" (step SA318). The maximum value "3" is set in the display target counter in the work area 223 (step SA319). When the execution period of the display before shift has elapsed by clearing the interval flag to "0", the next notification target becomes the base value. Then, by setting the maximum value in the display target counter and making a negative determination in step SA306 to notify the base value, the display target counter after adding 1 to the value of the display target counter in step SA307 Value exceeds the maximum value, and an affirmative determination is made in step SA308 to clear the value of the display target counter to "0". Thus, when the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed, the next notification target becomes the base value, and the base value becomes the base value of the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234.

  That is, when the display before shift is performed, the notification of the base value is started from the notification of the base value regardless of whether the notification target before the display before shift is performed is the base value or the non-display for interval. As a result, when the pre-shift display is completed, it is possible to confirm the base value without waiting for the interval period to elapse. In addition, the base value finally notified of before the display before shift is displayed is any of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. Even if there is, when the pre-shift display is finished, the notification is started from the base value of the current area 311. This makes it possible to return the notification order of the base values in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 to the first notification order, and immediately after the base value shift occurs. It becomes possible to make it easy for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that it is.

  Thereafter, display data before shift is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step SA320). The pre-shift display data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the pre-shift display, and more specifically, “in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 Data for causing the display of “A.”. By setting pre-shift display data as display data in the display target setting area 276, the pre-shift display data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and for first to fourth notification. “A.” is displayed on each of the display devices 201 to 204. The manager of the game hall who confirms that the display before shift is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can grasp that it is the execution period of the display before shift .

  Next, while the management start flag is set to "1" while referring to the time chart of FIG. 151, the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Explain how it is done. 151 (a) shows the period when the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, and FIG. 151 (b) is stored in the first history area 312 151 (c) shows the base value stored in the second history area 313 for the first to fourth notices in FIG. 151 (c). 151 (d) shows the base values stored in the third history area 314 being notified by the first through fourth display devices 201-204. 151 (e) shows a period during which interval non-display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 151 (f) shows the first to fourth notification display devices. Period when display before shift is performed at 201 to 204 FIG. 151 (g) shows the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode according to the big hit result since the calculation period of the base value is newly started. (Ie, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) indicates the timing when the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) is reached.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 151 (a), the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), a display indicating that the base value is a notification target is displayed in the first notification display device 201, and stored in the current condition area 311 in the second notification display device 202. A display indicating that the base value is a notification target is displayed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t1 at the timing of t2, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (a), and shown in FIG. 151 (e). As described above, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for interval is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (e) at the timing of t3 which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t2.

  Notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started at the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 151 (b). At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), a display indicating that the base value is a notification target is displayed in the first notification display device 201, and in the second notification display device 202, the first history area 312 is displayed. A display indicating that the stored base value is to be notified is performed, and in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, a display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is a line. It will be.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t3 at the timing of t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (b), and the display duration of FIG. As shown in, the interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for interval is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (e) at the timing of t5 which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t4.

  Notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started at the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at time t5 as shown in FIG. 151 (c). At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), a display indicating that the base value is a notification target is displayed in the first notification display device 201, and in the second notification display device 202, the second history area 313 is displayed. A display indicating that the stored base value is to be notified is performed, and in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, a display corresponding to the base value stored in the second history area 313 is a line. It will be.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t5 at the timing of t6, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (c), and the display duration of FIG. As shown in, the interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for interval is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (e) at the timing of t7 which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t6.

  Notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started at the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 151 (d). At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127 (d), a display indicating that the base value is a notification target is displayed in the first notification display device 201, and in the third history area 314 in the second notification display device 202. A display indicating that the stored base value is a notification target is performed, and in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, a display corresponding to the base value stored in the third history area 314 is a line. It will be.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t7 at the timing of t8, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (d), and the diagram of FIG. 151 (e) As shown in, the interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for interval is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (e) at the timing of t9 which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t8.

  Thereafter, similarly to the timing t1 to the timing t2 over the timing t9 to the timing t10, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is the first to the fourth as shown in FIG. 151 (a). Non-display for intervals is performed as shown in FIG. 151 (e), similarly to the timing of t2 to the timing of t2 over the timing of t10 to the timing of t11. This is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Then, as shown at (b) in FIG. 151, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the timing t3 at the timing t11. It starts at.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (g), the calculation period of the base value is newly added at the timing of t12 which is the timing during the display in which the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is being performed. The total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) is shifted in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode according to the jackpot result is started It reaches the reference number (specifically, 60000). However, at the timing of t12, since the display continuation period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 is started at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 151 (b) The display corresponding to the base value of the one history area 312 is continued. Thereby, even if the timing when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number is arbitrary, the display of the current notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is as scheduled. It is possible to start the pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the period.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t11 at the timing of t13, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (b), and the timing of FIG. The display before shift is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the total number of gaming balls reaches the shift reference number while notification of other base values is being performed, the display continuation of notification of that base value has elapsed even before the shift. The display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, even if the total number of gaming balls reaches the shift reference number while interval non-display is being performed, the display before shift is made if the interval period for the interval non-display has elapsed. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are started.

  Thereafter, when the execution period of the display before shift elapses from the timing of t13 at the timing of t14, the display before shift is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (f), and the current area 311 as shown in FIG. 151 (a). The notification of the base value stored in is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. That is, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display is started is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display is finished, it corresponds to the first notification order in the notification order of the base value. The notification is started from the base value of the current area 311.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t14 at the timing of t15, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (a), and shown in FIG. 151 (e). As described above, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for interval is ended as shown in FIG. 151 (e) at the timing of t16, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 151 (b). The display corresponding to the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Be done. As a result, it is possible to individually notify each base value corresponding to different periods while suppressing the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, since each base value is displayed in accordance with a predetermined order, the manager of the gaming hall can easily grasp the type of the base value to be displayed.

  The display order of the base values is determined in association with each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of the base value to be displayed when newly displaying the base value.

  Before the first base value is displayed and the next base value is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not displayed for intervals. As a result, the game hall manager can clearly grasp that the type of the base value to be displayed has been switched.

  In the configuration in which the base value is sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, after the calculation period of the base value is newly started, either in the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode according to the big hit result If the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (ie, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has not reached the shift base number (specifically, 60000), the first The display before shift is performed by the fourth to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thus, it is possible to notify that the total number of gaming balls has reached the shift reference number using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 Is shifted to the rear storage area of the storage order, and the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0", and calculation of a base value of a new calculation period is started. Therefore, the notification content of the base value in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number. In this case, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the notification of the base value is resumed after the pre-shift display is performed, so the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number. It becomes possible to make the administrator of the game hall recognize that the notification content of the base value is changed with the event of the change.

  If the total number of gaming balls reaches the shift reference number while the base value is being displayed, the pre-shift display is started after the display continuation period of the display of the base value has elapsed. This makes it possible to start the pre-shift display while not disturbing the display of the base value already performed.

  In the configuration in which the plurality of base values stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed in accordance with the predetermined display order, after the pre-shift display is performed, the display is performed from the first order base value in the predetermined display order. Thereby, when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, it is possible to confirm again from the base value of the first order in the predetermined display order.

  In the configuration for calculating the base value in the result calculation process (FIG. 149), the result calculation process is performed multiple times from when the calculation of one base value is started to when the calculation of the base value is completed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for executing the result calculation process as compared with the configuration in which the calculation of the base value is completed in one result calculation process.

  When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, after the base value is newly derived at the timing when the shift reference number is reached, the data shift process (step SA216) of the base value is executed. When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the display before shift is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereby, in a situation where the base value is newly derived and the data shift processing of the base value is performed, it is possible to perform the pre-shift display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and shift Even if the reference number is reached, it is possible to prevent the display of the previous base value from being continued as it is.

  In addition, since the calculation period of the base value has been started, the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA in a situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode according to the big hit result is supplied (ie supplied to the gaming area PA) As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first to fourth base values of the current area 311 are displayed until the total number of game balls reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000). The calculation initial display may be performed by the notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Also, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) while the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not displayed for intervals, the shift is immediately made. The total number of the game balls reached the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) in the situation where the front display is started and the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In such a case, the pre-shift display may be started when the display continuation period of the display of the base value has elapsed. This makes it possible to start the pre-shift display early while preventing the end of the display of the base value that has already been performed.

  Further, the display content of the pre-shift display is not limited to the above, and the display content of at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be displayed even in other situations. However, the display contents of the entire first to fourth notification display apparatuses 201 to 204 may be display contents which are not displayed in other situations. In addition, when display before shift is performed, at least one display segment 321 to 324 is lit in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but the first to fourth The configuration may be such that all the display segments 321 to 324 are turned off for part of the four notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, when display before shift is performed, the display content of the display before shift is not limited to the configuration maintained over the execution period of display before shift, and the display content of display before shift is display before shift It may be configured to blink over the execution period of

  Further, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the execution period of the pre-shift display is fixed, and for example, a new base value is calculated after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000). The execution period of the pre-shift display may be varied according to the period required for the base value data shift processing to be completed.

  In addition, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the final display cycle of each base value performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time The display before shift may be started after the display of the base value of the order (that is, the base value stored in the third history area 314) is completed. This makes it possible to start display circulation of each new base value via the pre-shift display after completion of display circulation of each base value.

  Further, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, calculation of a base value is started using various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 at that time, and calculation of the base value is performed. The data shift process (step SA216) may be performed when the process is completed. In this case, it becomes possible to accurately calculate the base value at the timing when the total number of gaming balls reaches the shift reference number.

  Also, instead of the interval non-display being performed in the interval period, at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 performs a predetermined display and the first to fourth notification displays The display for the whole of the devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform interval display which has display contents different from the display contents that may occur in the situation where the base value is notified. For example, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, only the display segments 321 to 324 at the center may be turned on to display "-". (4) The display of "-" may be performed on a part of the display devices 201 to 204 for the notification, and the remaining display devices may be in the non-display state.

  Further, the interval period may not be set. In this case, when the display continuation period has elapsed for one base value, the display of the base values to be displayed in the next order is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Become.

Forty-Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the start timing of the display before shift is different from that of the forty-third embodiment. The configuration different from the above-described forty-third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the above-described forty-third embodiment will be basically omitted.

  The start timing of the pre-shift display in this embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 152 (a) shows a period during which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified by the first to fourth notification displays 201 to 204, and FIG. 152 (b) is stored in the first history area 312 FIG. 152 (c) shows the base value stored in the second history area 313 as the first to fourth notification when the determined base value is notified by the first to fourth notification displays 201 to 204. 152 (d) shows the base values stored in the third history area 314 being notified by the first through fourth display devices 201 through 204. 152 (e) shows a period when interval non-display is performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 152 (f) shows the first to fourth notification display devices. Period when display before shift is performed at 201 to 204 FIG. 152 (g) shows the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the open / close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is based on the jackpot result after the base value calculation period is newly started. (Ie, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) indicates the timing when the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) is reached.

  At the timing of t1 to t11, the display duration period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is similar to the time charts of FIG. 151 (a) to FIG. 151 (g) in the forty-third embodiment. The display corresponding to the base value across and the execution of the interval non-display in the interval period are repeated, and the display corresponding to the base value is the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234 → the first history area 312 → the second It is repeated in the order of the history area 313 → the third history area 314. Then, at timing t11, display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 152 (b).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (g), the calculation period of the base value is newly added at the timing of t12 which is a timing in the middle of the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312. The total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) is shifted in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode according to the jackpot result is started It reaches the reference number (specifically, 60000). In this case, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), although the display continuation period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 was started at the timing of t11 at the timing of t12. The notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended, and the pre-shift display is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG.

  It should be noted that even if the total number of gaming balls reaches the shift reference number during notification of other base values, the display before shift is the first to fourth notification display devices 201 at that timing. Start at -204. Also, even if the total number of gaming balls reaches the shift reference number while interval non-display is being performed, the display before shift is the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that timing. It starts at.

  Thereafter, when the execution period of the pre-shift display elapses from the timing of t12 at the timing of t13, the pre-shift display is finished as shown in FIG. 152 (f), and the current area 311 as shown in FIG. 152 (a). The notification of the base value stored in is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. That is, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display is started is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display is finished, it corresponds to the first notification order in the notification order of the base value. The notification is started from the base value of the current area 311.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t13 at the timing of t14, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 152 (a), and the display duration is shown in FIG. As described above, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for interval is ended as shown in FIG. 152 (e) at the timing of t15 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), the base of the first history area 312 as shown in FIG. The display corresponding to the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the above configuration, the total number of gaming balls discharged from gaming area PA in a situation where neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode according to the big hit result is started after the calculation period of the base value is newly started When the total number of gaming balls supplied to the area PA reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000), it is before the shift in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that timing. Display starts. This makes it possible to start the pre-shift display early, and it is possible to early notify that the total number of gaming balls has reached the shift reference number.

The forty-fifth embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the thirty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps SA401 to SA425 in the main process are executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, power on initialization processing is executed (step SA401). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for waiting (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SA402). In the internal function register setting process, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process periodically started by interrupting the main process, is performed at the first interrupt cycle. The interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is set to (specifically, 4 ms) and is periodically started by interrupting the main process, is performed from the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is also a short cycle, is set.

  That is, in this embodiment, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed as the timer interrupt process so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively long and short. And exist. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are both activated by interrupting the main process. Also, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Also, in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are not executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started first, regardless of the elapsed order of In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process that is activated prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated prior to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is mainly It sets to the specific register of side CPU63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the random number counter C1 is executed in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles.

  After that, “1” is set in the startup processing flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SA403). As in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag is one of various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started. While the process for monitoring the power failure and updating the various counters and monitoring the fraud is executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) should be ended without executing the process for advancing the game. Is a flag for specifying the main CPU 63.

  As in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the process during start of supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) is started and an interrupt permission (step SA404) is set in the startup processing flag. Before execution, “1” is set, and processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed, and “0” is cleared before the remaining processing (steps SA422 to SA425) is started. In this case, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), when "1" is set in the start-up processing flag, the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), even when "1" is set in the startup processing flag, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 performs the operation power. Power outage monitoring is performed even if the process (steps SA401 to SA418) at the time of the supply start of is performed, and the random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, random number initial value counter The CINI update is performed, and the fraud detection is performed.

  In particular, even when the power-on process flag is set to “1”, the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is performed by executing the power failure information storage process (step S8901) (steps SA401 to SA418). Even if a power failure occurs in the situation where) is being executed, it is possible to execute the processing at the time of the power failure. In the power failure process, similarly to the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. In the case where the supply of the operating power is started again, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 65 from being identified as having an abnormality. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SA 415) or the setting value update process (step SA 418), the occurrence of the power failure during the setting related process is supplied to the next operation power supply. It becomes possible to specify at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA 415) or the setting value update process (step SA 418) is being performed, any of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). The interrupt is not inhibited and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is performed in the main process (FIG. 153) including the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the set value update process (step SA418). In the case of interrupt and activation, information on the return address of the main processing (FIG. 153) for returning after completion of the timer interrupt processing as the activation target is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Information on various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer interrupt process is activated is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be started is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 153) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After "1" is set in the start-up processing flag in step SA403, interrupt permission is set (step SA404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle. However, since "1" is set in the start-up processing flag in step SA403, various processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is performed even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started. Among them, the process for monitoring the power failure and updating the various counters and the fraud monitoring is executed, while the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without the process for advancing the game being executed. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA405). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the reset button 68 c is pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, although the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c are provided in the main control device 60, the update button 68b is not provided. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA405: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA406). When the power failure process is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the power failure process has been properly performed at the previous power-off time.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step SA406: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step SA407). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as that of the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process performed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and stored in the specific control work area 221 The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read-out checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA407 (step SA408). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step SA409).

  If a negative determination is made in step SA406 or step SA409, that is, if "1" is not set in the power failure flag or if the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step SA410). By setting “1” to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is positive, thereby performing steps S8907 to S8907. Do not execute the processing of S8920. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power off, or if the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If the checksums do not match due to the change in the storage state of the information from the previous power-off at least one of the above, processing for monitoring power failure, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed. On the other hand, processing for advancing the game will not be executed.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of the operation power supply is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 81 (step SA411). The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power by receiving the abnormality command, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Output a voice. In addition, a character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is given when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step SA418) is performed. The configuration may be continued.

  When the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal (steps SA406 and SA409: YES), “1” is set to the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 It is determined whether it is set (step SA412). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is "1". Is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication indicating that the setting value is being updated, and an indication indicating the setting value in the middle of the update. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value update process (step SA418) is started and cleared to “0” when the setting value update process (step SA418) is ended. When the setting value update process (step SA418) is not executed, basically, the setting update display flag does not become "1". However, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (step SA418) is being performed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter In this state, the setting update display flag is set to "1". If the setting update display flag is set to "1", the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed or the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (step SA418). It is maintained until it is executed.

  If the determination in step SA412 is negative because "1" is not set in the setting update display flag, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA413). ). When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA413: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). In addition, even when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key (step SA413: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is "1". Is set (step SA414: YES), processing for setting confirmation is executed (step SA415). The setting confirmation process will be described later.

  The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting confirmation display flag is "1". If 1 is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a line indicating that the setting value is being checked and a line indicating the currently set setting value. It will be. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting confirmation process (step SA 415) is started and cleared to “0” when the setting confirmation process (step SA 415) is ended. In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed, basically, the setting confirmation display flag does not become "1". However, if the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SA 415) is being performed, the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter The setting confirmation display flag is set to “1” in. If the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed or the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to “0” in the setting confirmation process (step SA415). It is maintained until it is executed.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA405: YES), the RAM clear process is executed (step SA416). In the RAM clear process, the specific control excluding the area (specifically, the setting reference area 341 described later) in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control The initial setting is executed while clearing the work area 221 for “0”. As a result, the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, and therefore the success or failure lottery is performed regardless of the success or failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed. Furthermore, the common view display portion 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utility symbol 34a is in a closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to “0”. Further, a setting update area 342, which will be described later, provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is executed. Further, in the RAM clear process, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing of step SA402 is executed. The process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initialization are not executed for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA417). When the ON operation is performed (step SA417: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SA418). The setting value update process will be described later.

  When the process of step SA411 is performed, when a negative determination is made at step SA414, when the process of step SA415 is performed, when a negative determination is made at step SA417, or when the process of step SA418 is performed, specific control Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the check counter provided in the work area 221 (step SA419). The value set in the counter during check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. If one or more values are set in the counter during check, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the time of the start of the supply of the operating power by the main CPU 63 is completed (steps SA401 to SA418) and the remaining process Before (step SA422 to step SA425) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed, the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation process (step SA 415) and the setting value update process (step SA 418) are performed as the process at the start of the operation power supply, whereas the process at the start of the operation power supply is the initial check period. It starts after finishing. Thereby, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display in the initial check period, the display of the set values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is possible. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SA420). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by clearing the in-progress processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, thereby performing not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905. The processing of step S 8907 to step S 8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. At step SA420, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step SA421). The contents of the information contained in the return command and the processing contents of the voice emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as in step S7920 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. .

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step SA422 to step SA425. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process Remaining time will occur. Although this remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of step SA422 to step SA425 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processing of the step SA422 to step SA425 is a non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically. In steps SA422 to SA425, the same process as step S113 to step S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, the configuration regarding setting values in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of the storage area related to setting values provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

  As shown in FIG. 154, in the work area 221 for specific control, a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342 are provided. The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored. In step S503 in the special view fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is specified by the information stored in the setting reference area 341, and the pass / fail table corresponding to the specified setting value is read. Then, in step S504, the success or failure determination process is executed using the read out success or failure table. Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1”, the display of the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is the fourth notification display It is performed in the device 204.

  In the setting reference area 341, numerical information is stored as information on setting values. Specifically, when numerical value information of “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When numerical value information of “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When numerical value information of “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When numerical value information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When numerical value information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”.

  The setting updating area 342 stores information on setting values in the middle of updating in the setting value updating process (step SA418). That is, in the setting value update process (step SA418), the information of the setting value to be selected is updated each time the reset button 68c is pressed. However, the setting stored in the setting reference area 341 is updated at the time of updating. The information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 is changed without changing the information of the value. As a result, the setting value can be updated while storing and holding the information of the setting value set before the setting value update process (step SA418) is started. When the setting value update process (step SA418) is ended, the information on the setting value stored in the setting update area 342 at that time is overwritten in the setting reference area 341. As a result, the setting value of the result updated in the setting value update process (step SA418) is set as the setting value of the current pachinko machine 10. Further, in a situation where the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1”, the display of the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is the fourth notification display It is performed in the device 204.

  In the setting updating area 342, numerical information is stored as setting value information. Specifically, when numerical value information of “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When numerical value information of “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is “setting 2”. When numerical value information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is “setting 3”. When numerical value information of “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is “setting 4”. When numerical value information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is "setting 5". When numerical value information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is "setting 6".

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process performed in step SA415 of the main process (FIG. 153). The processes of steps SA501 to SA504 in the setting confirmation process are executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  Under the condition that "1" is not set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SA501: NO), "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SA502) . When the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) to set the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation. (Step S9006) is executed.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation. The processing of steps SA601 to SA603 in the setting processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, display data of the setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341 of the work area 221 for specific control is read (step SA601). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 as display data for applying to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA602). Further, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is checked is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA603).

  As described above, by executing the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation, the display corresponding to the display data set to the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA603 is the first to the fourth. The third notification display device 204 performs the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA602. Thus, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (b), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The fourth to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are performed.

  Returning to the description of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), if an affirmative determination is made in step SA501 or the process of step SA502 is performed, the setting key insertion unit 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key. It is determined whether or not it has been switched (step SA503). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of setting key insertion unit 68a is from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the process for setting confirmation is started in the situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. Also in this case, a negative determination is made in step SA503. When it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: NO), the process of step SA503 is repeated.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA504). Thus, by making a negative determination in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), a setting process (step S9006) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is not performed. Therefore, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state to be performed is released.

  As described above, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, whereby the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts. In the situation where the main process (FIG. 153) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, and the game can be progressed in the main process (FIG. 153). The processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is executed in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, which is the situation before the process to be executed, is executed. This makes it possible to check the set value under a situation where a game is not being performed.

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing executed in step SA418 of the main processing (FIG. 153). The process of steps SA701 to SA710 in the setting value update process is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SA701). If "1" is not set in the setting update display flag (step SA701: NO), "1" is set in the setting update display flag (step SA702). Thereafter, information on setting values stored in the setting reference area 341 in the specific control work area 221 is overwritten on the setting update area 342 in the specific control work area 221 (step SA703). As a result, the information of the setting value that was set when the supply of the operating power was stopped last time is set in the setting updating area 342.

  On the other hand, after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process is being performed, the supply of the operating power is resumed and the RAM clear process (step SA416) of the main process (FIG. 153) is performed. If the setting update display flag has already been set to “1” (“YES” at step SA701), the process at step SA703 is not executed. In this case, the process from step SA704 is executed in a state where the information of the setting value set in the setting updating area 342 is maintained as it is in the setting value updating process before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Become.

  If "1" is set in the setting update display flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) to set the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. (Step S9004) is executed.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. The process of steps SA801 to SA803 in the setting process is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, display data of the setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control is read (step SA801). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data for applying to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA802). Further, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA803).

  As described above, the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed, so that the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA 803 is the first to the fourth. The third notification display device 204 performs the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA802. Thus, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated, and a setting value selected as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 The display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Returning to the description of the setting value update process (FIG. 157), when the determination in step SA701 is affirmative or when the process of step SA703 is performed, the information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 It is determined whether it is any of "6" (step SA704). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SA704: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SA705). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SA704 or the process of step SA705 is performed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SA706). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of setting key insertion unit 68a is from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update processing is started in the situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. Also in the case of step SA706, a negative determination is made.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA706, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SA708), on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA707: YES). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one stage higher. When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA707: NO) or when the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SA704, but the setting is updated in step SA704. If it is determined that the value of the area 342 is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting updating area 342 in step SA705. As a result, when the reset button 68 c is pressed once under the condition of “setting 6”, the setting is returned to “setting 1”.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA706: YES), the setting reference area 341 overwrites the setting reference area 341 with the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area 342 Step SA709). As a result, the information of the set value updated as a result of the set value update process at this time is set in the setting reference area 341, and the set value corresponding to the set information is the current state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes a setting value.

  After that, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SA710). As a result, by making a negative determination in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), the setting processing (step S9004) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is not performed. Therefore, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated, and a setting selected as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 The display of the value is released.

  As described above, based on performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing and operating the reset button 68 c, and further performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68 a with the setting key. Not only the RAM clear process (step SA416) but also the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. In addition, based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c as described above, the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) To be executed. As a result, as an operation for executing the setting related process relating to the setting value, it is possible to make the ON operation to the setting key insertion unit 68 a common. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating the setting related process.

  Further, in the case where the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON by the setting key and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the processing for setting confirmation is executed and reset When the pressing operation of the button 68c is added, the setting value update process is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the processing to be executed different among the processing for setting confirmation and the processing for updating the setting value depending on the presence or absence of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing the desired process among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Further, by making the operation content for executing the setting value update process larger than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform the action of causing the setting value update process to be performed illegally.

  Next, when power failure processing is performed in a state where setting value update processing (FIG. 157) or processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being performed, main processing (FIG. The contents of the process executed in 153) will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  First, when power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is performed, the main processing (resuming the supply of operating power thereafter) The contents of the process executed in FIG. 153) will be described.

  When the supply of the operating power is resumed without the setting key insertion portion 68a being turned ON and the reset button 68c is not pressed (that is, in the case of "no operation"), the main process (FIG. 153) The clear process (step SA416), the setting value update process (step SA418) and the process for setting confirmation (step SA415) are not executed. When the supply of operation power is resumed while the reset button 68c is pressed while the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON (that is, when the "RAM clear operation" is performed), the main processing (FIG. 153) Then, while the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, the setting value update process (step SA418) and the process for setting confirmation (step SA415) are not executed. When supply of operation power is resumed while setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON and reset button 68c is pressed (that is, when a “setting change operation” is performed), the RAM in the main processing (FIG. 153) While the clear process (step SA416) is performed and the setting value update process (step SA418) is performed, the process for setting confirmation (step SA415) is not performed. Setting confirmation processing (step “setting confirmation operation” is performed) when supply of operating power is resumed without pressing reset button 68c although setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (step While SA 415) is executed, the RAM clear process (step SA 416) and the setting value update process (step SA 418) are not executed.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1"), supply of operating power thereafter The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when restarting the process will be described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in a state where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed in the main process (FIG. 153) while the setting value update process (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. That is, even if the process at the time of a power failure is executed in the situation where the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, the setting value is provided when “RAM clear operation” is performed at the time of resuming supply of operating power thereafter. The RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed without restart and new execution of the update process (step SA418). As a result, it is possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clear process (step SA416) for the "RAM clear operation". In this case, if the power failure process is performed before the process of step SA709 is performed in the set value update process (step SA418), the set value updated in the set value update process (step SA418) (ie, Since the information of the changed setting value is not set in the setting reference area 341, the setting value that was set before the setting value update process (step SA418) is started resumes the supply of operating power. It will be used later. The setting update display flag is cleared to “0” by executing the RAM clear process (step SA416).

  When the supply of operation power is resumed in the situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is performed and the setting value updating process (step SA418) is performed in the main process (FIG. 153). On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. That is, even if the process at the time of a power failure is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA418) is executed, the RAM is cleared when the “setting change operation” is performed at the time of the subsequent supply of operating power. After the process (step SA416) is performed, the setting value update process (step SA418) is newly started.

  When the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0” as described above, so that the setting value update process (FIG. 157) proceeds to step SA701. By making a negative determination at this point, the setting update area 342 is overwritten with the information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341. Therefore, if the power failure process is performed before the process of step SA709 is performed in the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of the operation power is stopped, the set value update process (step SA418) The information of the setting value updated in (1) is invalidated because the setting reference area 341 is not set. In this case, in the setting value update process (step SA418) after the restart of the supply of the operation power, the setting that was set before the start of the setting value update process (step SA418) before the supply of the operation power is stopped The setting value is updated from the value.

  If the operation power supply is resumed in the "no operation" status, or if the operation power supply is resumed in the "setting check operation" status, the power failure flag and the check are performed in the main processing (FIG. 153). By making a positive determination in step SA412 on the condition that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the sum, the setting value update process (step SA418) is performed without the RAM clear process (step SA416) being performed. If the RAM clear process (step SA416) is not executed, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is maintained at "1", so the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is performed in the step. By making an affirmative determination in SA 701, the information of the set value in the setting update area 342 is maintained as it is. Therefore, updating of the setting value is resumed from the setting value being updated in the setting value updating process (step SA418) before the supply of the operation power is stopped. As a result, when the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting value update process (step SA 418) and the “RAM clear operation” is not performed when the supply of operation power is resumed thereafter, “setting” is performed. Even if the change operation is not performed, the setting value update process (step SA418) can be resumed.

  In particular, it is assumed that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by mistake during execution of the setting value update process (step SA418). In this case, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is immediately turned on. Is considered to be performed. In this case, it is assumed that the power on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed without pressing the reset button 68 c while the setting key insertion portion 68 a is turned on, and then the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. Under these circumstances, the supply of operating power will be resumed. In such a situation, the setting value updating process (step SA418) is executed as described above, and the setting value updating process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power is stopped in the setting value updating process (step SA418). The update of the setting value is resumed from the setting value which is in the process of being updated. As a result, even if the above-described event occurs, it becomes possible to resume the update of the setting value without any problem.

  Next, when the process upon power failure is executed in a situation where the process for setting confirmation (step SA415) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), supply of operating power thereafter The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when restarting the process will be described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in a state where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed in the main process (FIG. 153) while the setting value update process (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. That is, even if the process at the time of a power failure is executed in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (step SA 415) is executed, the setting confirmation is performed when the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. The RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed without newly executing the process for use (step SA415). As a result, it is possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clear process (step SA416) for the "RAM clear operation". The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clear process (step SA416).

  When the supply of operation power is resumed in the situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is performed and the setting value updating process (step SA418) is performed in the main process (FIG. 153). On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. That is, even if the process at the time of a power failure is executed in a situation where the process for setting confirmation (step SA415) is executed, the setting confirmation is performed when the “setting change operation” is performed at the time of resuming supply of operating power thereafter. The setting value update process (step SA418) is executed after the execution of the RAM clear process (step SA416) without newly executing the process for use (step SA415). This makes it possible to prioritize execution of the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the setting value update process (step SA418) with respect to the “setting change operation”. In addition, even if the setting confirmation process (step SA 415) is not performed as described above, the setting value update process (step SA 418) is performed, and the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Since the information of the setting value to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341 at the end of the setting value update process (step SA418) and displayed, the administrator of the game hall is the current pachinko machine The set value of 10 can be confirmed. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clear process (step SA416).

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, the main processing (Fig. 153) is processing for setting confirmation on condition that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag and checksum. Execute SA 415). As a result, even if power failure processing is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SA 415), it is possible to restart the confirmation of the set value by performing the “setting confirmation operation” when the supply of the operating power is resumed. It becomes.

  When the supply of operation power is resumed in the state of "no operation", in the main processing (FIG. 153), an affirmative determination is made in step SA414 on the condition that no abnormality occurs with respect to the power failure flag and the checksum. Even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is performed. As a result, even if the process at the time of a power failure is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SA 415), the setting value is confirmed even if the operation power supply is resumed after that, the condition is “no operation”. It is possible to resume.

  Next, the end timing of the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in relation to the operation state of the setting key insertion unit 68a will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Fig. 160 (a) shows a period in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, Fig. 160 (b) shows a period in which the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on, and Fig. 160 (c) shows the setting. FIG. 160 (d) shows a period during which the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being executed, and FIG. 160 (e) shows a process during power failure. Indicates the period that is being

  First, the case where each of the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed in the normal flow will be described.

  The setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at the timing of t1 and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160 (a) at the timing of t2 thereafter. The operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started at the timing of t3. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at time t4, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off from the state in which the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on. Thus, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is completed.

  Also, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at the timing t5, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. 160 (a) at the timing t6 thereafter. ON operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 160 (d). After that, as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at time t8, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off from the state in which the setting key inserting portion 68a is turned on. Thus, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is completed as shown in FIG. 160 (d).

  Next, the case where the process at the time of a power failure is executed in the middle of execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the case where the operation power supply resumes thereafter will be a “no operation” situation.

  The setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at the timing of t9, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON as shown in FIG. 160 (a) at the timing of t10 thereafter. The operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started at the timing of t11. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the power is turned off as shown in FIG. 160 (a) due to the power off operation of the pachinko machine 10 or the occurrence of a sudden power failure of the commercial power supply at time t12 during execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 157). By being in the state, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), the power failure process is started. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is completed as shown in FIG. 160 (c) at the timing of t12, and the power failure process is completed as shown in FIG. 160 (e) at t13.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at time t14, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 160 (a) at time t15, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The ON operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. That is, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation of "no operation". However, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off last time, the process at the time of a power failure is executed in the middle of the setting value update process (FIG. 157). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started at the timing of t16. In this case, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is terminated when it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, and thus the setting value updating process (FIG. 157). Even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the OFF state from the start timing of 157), the end condition of the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is not satisfied.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at time t17 during the setting value updating process (FIG. 157), and the subsequent t18 is performed. At the timing, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off from the on state. Thus, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is completed.

  Next, the case where the process at the time of a power failure is executed during execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the case where the operation power supply is resumed afterward will be the state of “no operation”.

  The setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at the timing t19, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160 (a) at the timing t20 thereafter. The operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG. 160 (d). Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the power is turned off as shown in FIG. 160 (a) due to the power off operation of the pachinko machine 10 or the occurrence of a sudden power failure of the commercial power supply at timing t22 during execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). By being in the state, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), the power failure process is started. In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is completed as shown in FIG. 160 (d) at time t22, and the power failure process is completed as shown in FIG. 160 (e) at time t23.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at time t24, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 160 (a) at time t25, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The ON operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. That is, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation of "no operation". However, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off last time, the process upon power failure is executed in the middle of the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started at the timing of t26. In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is terminated when it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, and thus the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). Even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the OFF state from the start timing of 155), the end condition of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not satisfied.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160 (b) at time t27 during the process of setting confirmation (FIG. 155), and the subsequent t28 is performed. At the timing, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off from the on state. Thus, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is completed as shown in FIG. 160 (d).

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In order to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 157), when the supply of operation power is started, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON and the reset button 68c is pressed to operate. It is necessary to perform "change operation". As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to change the setting value illegally. In this case, when the supply of operating power is stopped when the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, the “setting change operation” is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. Also, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be performed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 157).

  When the supply of operating power is stopped when the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, the “setting confirmation operation” for confirming the setting is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 157) is executed instead of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). This makes it possible to give priority to the change of the set value over the confirmation of the set value, and prevents the game from being started even though the change of the set value to be used is not actually completed. It becomes possible.

  In the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, the setting values selected as the update targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. As a result, it is possible to change the setting value while grasping the setting value selected as the update target. In addition, when the supply of the operating power is resumed by displaying the setting value selected as the update target as described above, the setting value update process (FIG. Even in the configuration in which priority is given to 157), it is possible to confirm the set value substantially.

  In the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, not only the display corresponding to the setting value selected as the update target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 but also the setting value update process A display corresponding to the situation in which (FIG. 157) is being performed is also provided. Thereby, even when the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started despite the execution of the “setting confirmation operation” when the supply of the operation power is resumed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is performed. The manager of the gaming hall can easily grasp that it has been started.

  When the supply of the operating power is stopped after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed and the supply of the operating power is subsequently resumed, the case of “No operation” or “the setting confirmation operation” In the case where “is performed”, the setting value is changed from the setting value selected before the supply of the operation power is stopped. As a result, it is possible to continue changing the setting value from the setting value selected before the supply of the operating power is stopped.

  If the supply of operating power is stopped after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, and if the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed, the “setting change operation” is performed. The setting value is changed from the setting value to be used. As a result, it is possible to make the initial setting value in the case of starting the change of the setting value different according to the operation content in the case where the supply of the operating power is resumed.

  If "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed The setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is being performed, there is no need to execute setting value update processing (FIG. 157) thereafter. By performing the "RAM clear operation" when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process (FIG. 157) from being executed.

  In order to execute the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), it is necessary to perform the “setting confirmation operation” by turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a when the supply of the operating power is started. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to check the setting value illegally. In this case, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being performed, the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may also be performed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155).

  Even when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being performed, even if the supply of operating power is resumed, the “setting change operation” is performed The setting value update process (FIG. 157) is performed without the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) being performed. This makes it possible to give priority to the setting value changing operation over the setting value checking operation.

  A work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value update process is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value in the middle of change in the situation where FIG. 157 is being executed is stored in the setting updating area 342. Thus, while the information of the setting value set before the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started is stored and held in the setting reference area 341, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is the update target It is possible to change the setting value.

  When the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, the case of “No operation” or “setting confirmation operation” is performed when restarting the supply of operating power thereafter. In this case, the change of the setting value is started from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operation power is restarted thereafter. The change of the setting value may be started from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341. This makes it possible to generate each of these situations appropriately.

  In order to start the setting value update process (FIG. 157), since it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion unit 68a using the setting key, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is illegally started. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an action. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not completed only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF, and is not operated from the state where the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON. Ended. Thus, the setting key is inserted because the operation power supply is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed and "operation is not performed" when the supply of the operation power is resumed thereafter. Even when the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started in the state where the unit 68a is in the OFF state, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not ended immediately, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is temporarily turned on. Since the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is ended by further performing the OFF operation after the operation, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) can be ended at a timing preferable for the game hall manager.

  In order to start the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion unit 68a using the setting key, so the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is illegally started. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an action. In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not completed only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF, and is not operated from the state where the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON. Ended. Thereby, the setting key is inserted because the operation power supply is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being performed and "operation is not performed" when the operation power supply is resumed thereafter. Even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started in the state where the unit 68a is in the OFF state, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not immediately ended, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is once turned on. Since the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is completed by further performing the OFF operation after the operation, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) can be ended at a preferable timing for the game hall manager.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the process (steps SA401 to SA418) at the time of the start of the supply of the operating power is completed by the main CPU 63, and the remaining process (step SA422 to step). An initial check period is started before SA 425) is started. As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed, the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) and the processing for updating the setting value (FIG. 157) are executed as processing at the start of supply of operating power, while the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the initial check period. It will be started later. Thereby, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display in the initial check period, the display of the set values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is possible. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  When supply of operation power to main side CPU 63 is started, either setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, and setting confirmation process (FIG. Even if neither (155) nor the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  If either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed in the main process (FIG. 153) of the main CPU 63, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting It is a process commonly executed regardless of whether the value update process (FIG. 157) is not executed, and either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157). If the process is executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked. A process for starting the display for the user is set. As described above, since the process for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to start the check display is set as the common process, the above-described excellent features can be obtained while simplifying the process configuration. It is possible to achieve the

  Even in a situation where the check display is being executed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing for advancing the game. As a result, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, the game is performed. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the process for advancing from being delayed.

  In the case where the operation power supply is resumed when the operation power supply is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, the setting value update process is performed in the case of “no operation”. (FIG. 157) is not limited to the configuration started from the setting value during the change before the supply of the operation power is stopped, and is not limited to the setting value of the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341 The configuration may be started. In the case where the operation power supply is resumed when the operation power supply is stopped when the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the RAM clear process (when there is no operation) The setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be executed after step SA416) is executed, or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. It may be

  In addition, if the operation power supply is resumed when the operation power supply is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, the setting value update process (when there is no operation) The configuration shown in FIG. 157 may not be performed. In this case, the setting update area 342 may be overwritten with information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341 when the next setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started.

  If the operation power supply is resumed when the operation power supply is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being performed, the setting confirmation process (if there is no operation) The configuration shown in FIG. 155 may not be performed.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, and when the supply of operating power is resumed, the “clear RAM operation” is performed. The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be started from the setting value in the middle of change before the supply of the operation power is stopped, or the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341 The configuration may be started from the setting value of.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, and when the supply of operating power is resumed, the “clear RAM operation” is performed. The setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416), or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. May be executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be started from the setting value in the middle of change before the supply of the operation power is stopped, or the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341 The configuration may be started from the setting value of.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being performed, and when the supply of operating power is resumed, the “clear RAM operation” is performed. The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) without the RAM clear process (step SA416) being executed. Alternatively, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) may be performed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is performed.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed Although the set value update process (FIG. 157) is started from the set value of the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341, the set value update process (FIG. 157) stops the supply of operating power. It may be configured to be started from the setting value in the middle of change before being set.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, The setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416), or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. May be executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be started from the setting value in the middle of change before the supply of the operation power is stopped, or the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341 The configuration may be started from the setting value of.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being performed, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, Although the set value update process (FIG. 157) is started from the set value of the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341, the set value update process (FIG. 157) stops the supply of operating power. It may be configured to be started from the setting value in the middle of change before being set.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being performed, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, The setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416), or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. May be executed.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being performed, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed. The setting value update process (FIG. 157) is performed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed. Alternatively, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be performed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is performed. Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being performed, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, Both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not limited to the configuration started from the setting value in the middle of the change before the supply of the operation power is stopped, and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) The configuration may be started from the setting value of the current usage target stored in 341.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, The setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. It may be configured to be executed.

  Also, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, the setting is performed when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed without executing the value update process (FIG. 157). In this case, the setting update area 342 may be overwritten with information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341 when the next setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started.

  Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed. Alternatively, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be performed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. ) May be implemented. Also, in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, Both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed.

  In addition, when the supply of the operating power is started in a situation where the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", the power on initialization process (step SA401) is for weight use. It is stored in the display and setting updating area 342 indicating that the setting value is being updated by permitting the interrupt of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) after the predetermined time has elapsed. The display indicating the setting value corresponding to the information is not limited to the configuration in which the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification are started, and the above-described weight does not wait for the predetermined time to elapse. The display may be started. Also, even if the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the setting value is being updated under the condition that the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed. The display shown and the display indicating the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 may be performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, it is possible to prevent these displays from being performed in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not executed.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is started in the situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", the power on initialization process (step SA401) is for weight use. By permitting the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) after a predetermined time has elapsed, the setting value is stored in the display and setting reference area 341 indicating that the situation is the state of confirmation. The display indicating the setting value corresponding to the information is not limited to the configuration in which the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification are started, and the above-described weight does not wait for the predetermined time to elapse. The display may be started. In addition, even if the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, the setting confirmation is performed under the condition that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed. The display shown and the display indicating the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 may be performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, it is possible to prevent these displays from being performed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not performed.

  Further, in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, an image may be displayed that indicates that the setting value is being updated by the symbol display device 41, and the display may be performed. In addition to or in place of the above, an image showing an operation procedure for updating the setting value may be displayed, and the setting light source 53 or the speaker 54 is in a state of updating the setting value. It may be configured that notification to be shown is performed. In this case, it is possible to make the administrator of the game hall clearly recognize that the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed.

  Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being performed, an image may be displayed that indicates that the setting value is being confirmed by the symbol display device 41, and the display may be performed. In addition to or in place of the above, an image showing an operation procedure for confirming the setting value may be displayed, and the situation where the setting value is confirmed by the display light emitting unit 53 or the speaker unit 54 It may be configured that notification to be shown is performed. In this case, it is possible to make the administrator of the game hall clearly recognize that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed.

  Further, the operation unit operated to update the setting value in the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not limited to the reset button 68c, and may be a dedicated operation unit such as the update button 68b, The operation unit may be provided in main controller 60 in order to cancel the abnormal state. In addition, positions corresponding to each of “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as rotational operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the turning operation is performed, and the setting key is inserted A set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the portion 68a may be set. In addition, the setting key insertion portion 68a can be rotated further than the ON position, and the setting value in the middle of updating is set to the next setting value each time the rotation operation exceeding the ON position is performed. The configuration may be updated.

  When the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, a signal corresponding to that may be externally output from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall. In this case, the signal output may be performed for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds), and the signal output is continued while the set value update process (FIG. 157) is performed. Configuration. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp that the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 by the management computer of the game hall.

  When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, a signal corresponding to that may be externally output from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall. In this case, the signal output may be performed for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds), and the signal output is continued while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being performed. Configuration. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 by the management computer of the game hall.

  In addition, the configuration that terminates the process triggered by the key insertion unit being changed from the ON state to the OFF state is applied to the processes other than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157). It is also good. For example, in order to display the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the predetermined key insertion unit needs to be operated to the ON position, and the predetermined key insertion unit is turned on. The display may be ended when it is specified that the state has been changed to the OFF state.

  Further, a condition may be set that the opening target which is at least one of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is opened as the condition for starting the setting value updating process (FIG. 157). . In the configuration, the case where the operation power supply is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, and the case where the operation power supply is resumed “no operation” or “setting confirmation operation” In the case where “is performed”, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) may be started even if the release target is not open.

  In addition, a condition may be set in which the opening target which is at least one of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is opened as the condition for starting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). . In the configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being performed and the operation power supply is resumed, in the case of “no operation”, the above open The configuration confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be started even if the target is not opened.

  In addition, the RAM clearing process performed before the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed and the RAM clearing process performed without the setting value updating process are executed in the main side RAM 65. The target areas may be different.

  Also, when the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started in a situation where the setting update display flag is not set to “1”, from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the setting value is changed, and the setting value may be changed from a predetermined initial value setting value. The initial value may be, for example, “setting 1”, “setting 6”, or a setting value other than these.

  Moreover, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, in the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed based on the fact that “is performed”. Even if the configuration is concerned, if the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is completed before the normal termination trigger occurs, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is performed even if the “setting change operation” is not performed. With the configuration to be executed, it is possible to give priority to the setting value changing operation.

  Furthermore, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is executed as the process at the start of supply of operating power, “setting confirmation operation” The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed based on the fact that “is performed”. Even if the configuration is concerned, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is completed before the normal termination trigger occurs, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is performed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed. With the configuration to be executed, priority can be given to the confirmation operation of the setting value.

Forty-Sixth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-fifth embodiment. The configuration different from the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps SA901 to SA925 in the main process are executed using a program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and data for specific control.

  In steps SA901 to SA904, the same processes as steps SA401 to SA404 of the main process (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment are performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SA905). When the supply of operating power is resumed after the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (step SA 918) is being performed, the setting update display flag is set to "1". The main process is to be started at.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA905, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the reset button 68 c is pressed.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA906: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA907). When the power failure process is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the power failure process has been properly performed at the previous power-off time.

  If "1" is set in the power failure flag (step SA907: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step SA908). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as that of the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process performed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and stored in the specific control work area 221 The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read-out checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA 908 (step SA 909). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step SA 910).

  If a negative determination is made in step SA 907 or step SA 910, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" or if the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 221 Is set to "1" (step SA911). Further, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of the supply of the operating power is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SA912). The processing contents of these steps SA911 and SA912 are the same as steps SA410 and SA411 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment.

  If "1" is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal (steps SA907 and SA910: YES), it is determined whether setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key. (Step SA913). If the setting key insertion unit 68 a is turned on using the setting key (step SA 913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA 914). The processing content of the setting confirmation processing is the same as that of the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, even if "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221, the setting confirmation processing is executed unless the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON. I will not. Therefore, even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process is being performed, the setting confirmation process is not executed unless the operation power supply is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed.

  If "1" is set in the setting update display flag (step SA905: YES), or if the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906: YES), the RAM clear process is executed (step SA915). The processing content of the RAM clear processing is the same as the RAM clear processing (step SA416) of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, when the setting update display flag is set to “1” (step SA916: YES), the setting value update process is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step SA 918). On the other hand, when “1” is not set in the setting update display flag (step SA916: NO), setting value updating is performed on the condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step SA917: YES). The process is executed (step SA918). That is, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process is being performed, the RAM clear process (step is performed regardless of the operation content when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter). After SA 915) is executed, setting value update processing (step SA 918) is newly started.

  When the process of step SA912 is performed, when the negative determination is made at step SA913, when the process of step SA914 is performed, when the negative determination is made at step SA917, or when the process of step SA918 is performed, step SA919 Execute the process of step SA925. The process contents of step SA919 to step SA925 are the same as step SA419 to step SA425 of the main process (FIG. 153) in the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment.

  FIG. 162 shows the main process (resuming the supply of operating power thereafter) when the process upon power failure is executed in the situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) or the process for setting confirmation (step SA914) is being executed. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of the process executed in FIG.

  When the power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing (step SA 918) nor the setting confirmation processing (step SA 914) is performed, the main processing (FIG. 161) is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. The contents of the process performed in step b. That is, when the supply of the operating power is resumed in the state of "no operation", the main process (FIG. 161) performs the RAM clear process (step SA915), the setting value update process (step SA918) and the process for setting confirmation (step None of SA 914) is performed. Further, when the supply of operation power is resumed in a state where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed in the main process (FIG. 161) while the setting value update process (step SA 918) and the setting confirmation process (step SA 914) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” has been performed, the main process (FIG. 161) executes the RAM clear process (step SA915) and the setting value update process (step SA918). While being executed, the setting confirmation process (step SA 914) is not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, the main processing (FIG. 161) executes the processing for setting confirmation (step SA914) while the RAM clear processing (step SA915). The set value update process (step SA 918) is not executed.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), supply of operating power thereafter The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) at the time of resumption of will be described.

  If the operation power supply is resumed in the "no operation" status, and if the operation power supply is resumed in the "RAM clear operation" status, the operation is performed in the "setting change operation" status. The main process (FIG. 161) performs the RAM clear process (step SA 915) regardless of whether the power supply is resumed or the operation power supply is resumed in the state where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. While the setting value update process (step SA 918) is performed while the setting confirmation process (step SA 914) is not performed. That is, when the process at the time of a power failure is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA 918) is being executed, the RAM is cleared even if the operation content at the time of the subsequent supply of operating power is resumed After the process (step SA915) is performed, the setting value update process (step SA918) is newly started.

  With the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the setting value update process (step SA918), the setting key insertion unit when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is resumed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. It becomes possible to newly start the setting value update process (step SA918) after the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed regardless of the contents of the operation to the 68a and the reset button 68c. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being updated, if the supply of the operating power is subsequently restarted, an opportunity to be completed after updating the setting value is surely generated. It becomes possible. Therefore, the setting before the previous setting value update process (step SA 918) is started when the supply of the operation power is resumed after that while the supply of the operation power is stopped while the setting value is being updated. It is possible to prevent the game from being started with the value.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process (step SA918), the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed uniquely regardless of the operation content at the time of resuming the supply of the operating power. By performing setting value update processing (step SA 918) after being executed, the above-described superiority is achieved while simplifying the processing configuration as compared with the configuration in which the processing content to be executed is changed according to each operation content. It is possible to achieve the

  Next, when power failure processing is performed in a state where setting confirmation processing (step SA 914) is being performed (that is, a state where the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), subsequent operation power supply The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) at the time of resumption of will be described.

  When power failure processing is executed in a state where setting confirmation processing (step SA 914) is being performed (that is, a state where the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the main operation is to resume supply of operating power thereafter. The content of the process executed in the process (FIG. 161) is that the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (FIG. 157) nor the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is executed. Is the same as the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when the supply of the operation power is resumed thereafter. That is, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SA 914) is being performed, if the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, the power on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. A process corresponding to the operation content is executed.

  The confirmation of the set value is different from the change of the set value, and even if it is ended midway and not resumed, there is no influence on the game. Therefore, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the confirmation of the set value, the processing corresponding to the operation content at the time of the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, thereby the game hall manager It is possible to give priority to the operation contents at the time of the power ON operation by.

Forty-Seventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the main process (resuming the supply of the operating power) is performed when the process upon power failure is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) or the process for setting confirmation (step SA914) is being executed. The contents of the process executed in FIG. 161) are different from the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment. The configuration different from the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 163 shows the main processing (resuming the supply of operating power thereafter) when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) or the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being executed. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of the process executed in FIG. 153).

  When power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is performed, the main processing (FIG. The contents of the process executed in the above are the same as those of the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment. Also, when the process upon power failure is executed in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (step diagram 155) is being executed (that is, the situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), supply of operating power thereafter The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) upon resumption of the process are the same as those of the forty-sixth embodiment.

  When power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed (ie, the situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the main when resuming the supply of operating power thereafter The contents of the process executed in the process (FIG. 153) are the restart of the setting value update process (FIG. 157) as in the 45th embodiment in the case of “no operation” and in the case of “setting confirmation operation”. It is. Further, in the case of the “RAM clear operation” and the “setting change operation”, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is resumed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is performed. In this case, in the RAM clear process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the specific control work area 221 but also the setting update display flag and setting update provided in the specific control work area 221 Area 342 is excluded from the targets of initialization. Therefore, even if the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed in a state where the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting update display flag is set at the start of the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157). “1” is set, and updating of the setting value is started from the information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 at that time.

  With the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the updating of the set value, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not only reliably executed when the supply of the operating power is restarted thereafter. It becomes possible to resume the update of the setting value from the setting value in the middle of the update immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. This makes it possible to continue the change operation of the setting value as it is.

The forty-eighth embodiment
In the present embodiment, the main process (resuming the supply of the operating power) is performed when the process upon power failure is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) or the process for setting confirmation (step SA914) is being executed. The contents of the process executed in FIG. 161) are different from the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment. The configuration different from the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 164 shows the main processing (resuming the supply of operating power thereafter) when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) or the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) is being executed. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of the process executed in FIG. 153).

  When power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is performed, the main processing (FIG. The contents of the process executed in the above are the same as those of the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment. Also, when the process upon power failure is executed in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (step diagram 155) is being executed (that is, the situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), supply of operating power thereafter The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) upon resumption of the process are the same as those of the forty-sixth embodiment.

  When power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed (ie, the situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the main when resuming the supply of operating power thereafter The contents of the process executed in the process (FIG. 153) are the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation in the case of “No operation”, “RAM clear operation” and “setting confirmation operation”. Same as the contents of the process executed in the main process (Fig. 153) when restarting the supply of the operation power when the power failure process is executed in the situation where none of the process (Fig. 155) is executed It is. That is, in the case of "no operation", the RAM clear process (step SA416), the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 155) are not executed. In the case of (1), although the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) are not performed. Although the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) are not executed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the “setting change operation”, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is resumed after the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is performed. In this case, in the RAM clear process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the specific control work area 221 but also the setting update display flag and setting update provided in the specific control work area 221 Area 342 is excluded from the targets of initialization. Therefore, even if the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed in a state where the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting update display flag is set at the start of the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157). “1” is set, and updating of the setting value is started from the information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 at that time.

  With the above configuration, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being updated, the operation content by the game hall manager when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter is handled. It is possible to give priority to the execution of processing.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being updated, the supply of operating power is resumed when the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed. It is possible to resume the update of the setting value from the setting value in the middle of updating immediately before the stop. This makes it possible to continue the change operation of the setting value as it is.

The forty-ninth embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-fifth embodiment. The configuration different from the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SB101 to SB128 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, power on initialization processing is executed (step SB101). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for waiting (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SB102). In the internal function register setting process, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process periodically started by interrupting the main process, is performed at the first interrupt cycle. The interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is set to (specifically, 4 ms) and is periodically started by interrupting the main process, is performed from the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is also a short cycle, is set.

  That is, in this embodiment, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed as the timer interrupt process so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively long and short. And exist. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are both activated by interrupting the main process. Also, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Also, in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are not executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started first, regardless of the elapsed order of In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process that is activated prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated prior to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is mainly It sets to the specific register of side CPU63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the random number counter C1 is executed in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles.

  After that, “1” is set in the start-up processing flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB103). As in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag is one of various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started. While the process for monitoring the power failure and updating the various counters and monitoring the fraud is executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) should be ended without executing the process for advancing the game. Is a flag for specifying the main CPU 63.

  When the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of start of supply of operating power is started in the main process (FIG. 165), “1” is set in the startup processing flag, and the process when supply of operating power is started It is cleared to "0" before (step SB101 to step SB122) ends and the remaining process (step SB125 to step SB128) starts. As in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the flag during start-up processing is set to "1", the processes in steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. In order to advance the game in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) described later among the processes (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is performed. It is possible to prevent the process from being performed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), even when "1" is set in the startup processing flag, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 performs the operation power. Among the processes (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the power, the power failure monitoring is executed even in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) described later is executed. At the same time, updating of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the detection of fraud is executed.

  In particular, even when the power-on process flag is set to “1”, the process at the start of the operation power supply start (steps SB101 to SB122) by executing the power failure information storage process (step S8901). Even if a power failure occurs in a situation where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or a setting value update process (FIG. 167) to be described later is executed, the power failure process can be executed on the blackout. In the power failure process, similarly to the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. In the case where the supply of the operating power is started again, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 65 from being identified as having an abnormality. Thus, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167), the next power supply of operating power is that a power failure has occurred during these setting related processes. It becomes possible to specify at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, any of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) The interrupt is not inhibited and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 165) for returning after completion of the timer interrupt process as the start target is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. Information on various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be started is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 165) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After “1” is set in the startup processing flag in step SB103, it is determined whether “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in work area 221 for specific control (step SB104) . When the power failure process is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the power failure process has been properly performed at the previous power-off time.

  If "1" is set in the power failure flag (step SB104: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step SB105). Specifically, first, a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. The method of calculating the checksum is the same as that of the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process performed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and stored in the specific control work area 221 The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the main processing of this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

  If the checksums match (step SB105: YES), is the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 within the normal range? It is determined whether or not it is (step SB106). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored as in the 45th embodiment. When numerical value information of “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When numerical value information of “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When numerical value information of “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When numerical value information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When numerical value information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”. In step SB106, it is determined whether the information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341 is any one of "1" to "6".

  If all the determination in step SB104 to step SB106 is affirmative, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB107). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is "1". Is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication indicating that the setting value is being updated, and an indication indicating the setting value in the middle of the update. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started and cleared to “0” when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is ended. In the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is not executed, basically, the setting update display flag does not become "1". However, if the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being performed, the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. In this state, the setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the process of clearing the setting update display flag "0" in the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed.

  If the determination in step SB107 is negative because "1" is not set in the setting update display flag, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB108). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the reset button 68 c is pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, although the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c are provided in the main control device 60, the update button 68b is not provided. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB108: NO), it is determined whether "1" is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB109). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksum does not match or when the set value is abnormal. By setting “1” to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is positive, thereby performing steps S8907 to S8907. Do not execute the processing of S8920. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power off time, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of the information from the previous power-off at least one of the powers, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of the power failure, updating of various counters, and incorrectness While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB109, the processing of step SB121 and step SB122 described later is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step SB109, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB110). If the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB110: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112). In addition, even when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key (step SB110: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is "1". Is set (step SB111: YES), processing for setting confirmation is executed (step SB112).

  The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting confirmation display flag is “1”. If 1 is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a line indicating that the setting value is being checked and a line indicating the currently set setting value. It will be. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started and cleared to “0” when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is ended. In the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed, basically, the setting confirmation display flag does not become "1". However, if the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being performed, the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. The setting confirmation display flag is set to “1” in. If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the first RAM clear process (step SB117) to be described later is executed, the setting value update process to be described later (FIG. 167) is executed, or the setting confirmation is performed. This process is maintained until the process of clearing the setting confirmation display flag to "0" in the process for use (FIG. 166).

  Not only when the reset button 68c is not pressed as described above but when the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (that is, when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed), the reset button 68c is The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed by executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) even when the pressing operation is not performed and the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”. When the power failure process is executed in the situation where it is performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed when the supply of the operation power is restarted thereafter. Thereby, it becomes possible to continue to check the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the process at the time of a power failure is executed in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is being executed, if the reset button 68c is pressed when restarting the supply of operating power thereafter. The processing corresponding to the operation performed on the restart of the operation power supply among the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed without the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) being executed. Be done. Thus, execution of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) can be prioritized over the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166).

  Here, the setting confirmation process performed in step SB112 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart of the setting confirmation process. The processing in steps SB201 to SB207 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SB201). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle.

  In this embodiment, in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of the operating power, basically, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are inhibited. The interrupt is permitted in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is inhibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. And second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is set because "1." Even if 133) is activated, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), a process for monitoring a power failure, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while for proceeding a game The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without executing the process.

  Thereafter, under the condition that "1" is not set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221, "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SB202). When the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) to set the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation. (Step S9006) is executed. The processing content of the setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is the same as that of the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment. As a result of execution of the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (b), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and a current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 Is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step SB203). By receiving the confirmation start command, the voice emission control device 81 recognizes an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed and an operation content for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Display control of the display control device 82 is performed so that an image to be enabled is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thus, the game hall manager can recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and it is necessary to end the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). The administrator of the game hall can recognize the specific operation content. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41. In addition, an external output indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being performed may be performed on a device outside the pachinko machine 10, such as a game hall management computer.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB204). Specifically, similarly to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in the forty-fifth embodiment, the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor which detects the state of the setting key insertion portion 68a corresponds to the ON state It is determined whether the reception state corresponding to the OFF state is reached from the reception state. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is started in the situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state Even in the case where it is maintained, negative determination is made in step SB204. When it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: NO), the process of step SB204 is repeated.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB205). Thus, by making a negative determination in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), a setting process (step S9006) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is not performed. Therefore, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state to be performed is released.

  Thereafter, interrupt disable is set (step SB206). Thus, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 165) is completed when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is ended and the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 165) is resumed (steps SB101 to SB122). 133) and interrupts of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are inhibited.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step SB207). By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the voice emission control device 81 specifies that the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting supply of the operating power has been completed in the main CPU 63, and It is specified that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) has been executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start. Then, processing corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of confirmation is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  As described above, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, whereby the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts. In the state where the main process (FIG. 165) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, and the game is advanced in the main process (FIG. 165). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, which is the situation before the process of (b) is being executed. This makes it possible to check the set value under a situation where a game is not being performed.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 165), the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key, and the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (step SB110 and Step SB111: NO) A normal return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB113). By receiving the normal return command, the voice emission control device 81 specifies that the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of the start of supply of the operating power is completed in the main CPU 63, and the supply of the current operating power is started. It is specified that the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) . Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the normal return command is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c is pressed, and when it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (steps SB108 and step SB114). If it is determined in step SB107 that "1" is set in the setting update display flag, the setting value update processing is executed (step SB115). Not only when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above, but when the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (that is, when the “setting change operation” is performed), the reset button 68c is not The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed even when the setting update display flag is set to “1” regardless of whether the pressing operation and the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a are performed, thereby updating the setting value. When the process at the time of a power failure is executed in a situation where the process (FIG. 167) is executed, the operation contents at the time of starting the supply of operation power thereafter are “No operation”, “RAM clear operation”, “setting change The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed regardless of which of the operation and the setting confirmation operation. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167).

  Here, the setting value update process performed in step SB115 will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing setting value update processing. The processing in steps SB301 to SB314 in the setting value update processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SB301). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle.

  In this embodiment, in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of the operating power, basically, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are inhibited. The interrupt is permitted in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is inhibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. And second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is set because "1." Even if 133) is activated, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), a process for monitoring a power failure, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while for proceeding a game The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without executing the process.

  Thereafter, under the condition that "1" is not set in the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221, "1" is set in the setting update display flag (step SB302). When the setting update display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) to set the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. (Step S9004) is executed. The processing content of the setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that of the above-mentioned 45th embodiment. For example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), when the process is executed, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is selected as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 The displayed setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, initialization at the start time is performed (step SB303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". If the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process is not properly performed at the previous power off (step SB104: NO), the work area 221 for specific control and In the case where the checksums do not match due to the change in the storage state of the information from the previous power-off at least one of the stack area 222 for specific control (step SB105: NO) or the setting reference area 341 When the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SB106: NO), "1" is set in step SB119 of the main process (FIG. 165). By setting “1” to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is positive, thereby performing steps S8907 to S8907. Do not execute the processing of S8920. Thereby, when the information abnormality of the above-mentioned main side RAM 65 occurs, while processing for performing power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, processing for advancing a game is executed. It will not be. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SB303, the state where the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is identified is canceled when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. Is possible.

  Thereafter, “1” is set in the setting updating area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 (step SB304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information on setting values during updating is stored in the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) as in the above-mentioned forty-fifth embodiment. When numerical value information of “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When numerical value information of “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is “setting 2”. When numerical value information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is “setting 3”. When numerical value information of “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is “setting 4”. When numerical value information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is "setting 5". When numerical value information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is "setting 6".

  By setting “1” in the setting updating area 342 in step SB304, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started regardless of which setting value of the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is, the setting value of the update target is “setting 1”.

  Thereafter, the update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step SB305). The audio light emission control device 81 receives an update start command, thereby displaying an image indicating that the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is being performed, and an image for making it possible to recognize an operation content for changing the setting value. And the display control device 82 is controlled so that an image for making it possible to recognize an operation content for ending the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, the game hall manager can recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation content and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (FIG. 167) The manager of the game hall can recognize the contents of the operation necessary to end the event. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41. Also, an external output indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being performed may be performed on a device outside the pachinko machine 10, such as a game hall management computer.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area 342 is any one of “1” to “6” (step SB306). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SB306 or the process of step SB307 is performed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB308). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of setting key insertion unit 68a is from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update processing is started in the situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. Also in this case, a negative determination is made in step SB308.

  If a negative determination is made in step SB308, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB310), on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step SB309). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one stage higher. When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB309: NO) or when the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SB306, but the setting is updated in step SB306. If it is determined that the value of the area 342 is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 in step SB307. As a result, when the reset button 68 c is pressed once under the condition of “setting 6”, the setting is returned to “setting 1”.

  When it is specified that setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: YES), setting reference information stored in setting update area 342 is overwritten in setting reference area 341 (see FIG. Step SB311). As a result, the information on the setting value as a result of updating in the current setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current state. The setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is obtained.

  Thereafter, interrupt disable is set (step SB312). Thus, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 165) is performed when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is ended and the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 165) is resumed (steps SB101 to SB122). 133) and interrupts of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are inhibited.

  Thereafter, the second RAM clear process is executed (step SB313). In the second RAM clear process, as in the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the 45th embodiment, in the work area 221 for specific control, an area in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, and therefore the success or failure lottery is performed regardless of the success or failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed. Furthermore, the common view display portion 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utility symbol 34a is in a closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to “0”. Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Also, the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0". Further, in the second RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is executed. Further, in the second RAM clear processing, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process of step SB102 is performed. The process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initialization are not executed for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step SB314). By receiving the restoration command at the time of updating, the voice emission control device 81 specifies that the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of the start of supply of the operating power has been completed in the main CPU 63, and It is specified that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) has been executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start. Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of updating is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  As described above, based on performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing and operating the reset button 68 c, and further performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68 a with the setting key. The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is performed. In addition, based on the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c as described above, the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) To be executed. As a result, as an operation for executing the setting related process relating to the setting value, it is possible to make the ON operation to the setting key insertion unit 68 a common. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating the setting related process.

  In addition, in the case where the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) If it is executed and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c is added, a setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. This makes it possible to make the processing to be executed different among the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) and the processing for updating the setting value (FIG. 167) depending on the presence or absence of the pressing operation on the reset button 68c. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing the desired processing of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). In addition, the operation for causing the setting value update process (FIG. 167) to be performed illegally is performed by increasing the operation content for executing the setting value update process (FIG. 167) rather than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). It becomes possible to make it hard.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 165), if it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key. If it is determined (step SB114: NO), it is determined whether "1" is set in the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 (step SB116). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksum does not match or when the set value is abnormal. By setting “1” to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is positive, thereby performing steps S8907 to S8907. Do not execute the processing of S8920. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power off time, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of the information from the previous power-off at least one of the powers, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of the power failure, updating of various counters, and incorrectness While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  If "1" is not set in the game stop flag (step SB116: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step SB117). In the first RAM clear process, as in the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the 45th embodiment, in the work area 221 for specific control, an area in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, and therefore the success or failure lottery is performed regardless of the success or failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed. Furthermore, the common view display portion 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utility symbol 34a is in a closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to “0”. Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Further, in the first RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is executed. Further, in the first RAM clear processing, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process of step SB102 is performed.

  The process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initialization are not executed for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224. Moreover, the processing content of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is the same as the processing content of the second RAM clear processing (step SB313) in the setting value update processing (FIG. 167), but a part of these processing contents is different. The configuration may be For example, in the first RAM clear process (step SB117), an area which is the target of "0" clear and initial setting may not be a target of "0" clear and initial setting in the second RAM clear process (step SB313). In the second RAM clear process (step SB313), an area which is a target of “0” clear and initial setting may not be a target of “0” clear and initial setting in the first RAM clear process (step SB117).

  Thereafter, the clear command at the time of clearing is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step SB118). By receiving the recovery command at the time of clearing, the voice emission control device 81 identifies that the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting supply of operating power has been completed in the main CPU 63, and It is specified that the first RAM clear process (step SB117) has been executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start. Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the recovery command at the time of clearing is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main processing (FIG. 165), that is, if "1" is not set in the power failure flag, the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. If it is, “1” is set to the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 (step SB119). As described above, by setting “1” to the game stop flag, the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906. The processes in steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power off time, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of the information from the previous power-off at least one of the powers, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of the power failure, updating of various counters, and incorrectness While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB120). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (NO in step SB120), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, the checksum or the set value at the start of the supply of operating power is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 To do (step SB121). The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power by receiving the abnormality command, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Output a voice. In addition, a character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is given when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. It will be started again.

  Thereafter, external output processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step SB122). In the external output processing at the time of abnormality, processing for externally outputting an abnormality signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the situation where the game stop flag is set to “1”, the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and the game stop flag is cleared to “0”. The signal output may be stopped. In addition, the abnormal signal may be output also when an abnormality occurs that is different from the abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the setting value. For example, even in the case where it is identified in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) that a fraud (a fraudulent radio wave detection or a fraudulent magnetic detection) has occurred, the fault signal is identified. Externally output. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration in which the abnormal signal is shared, and may be configured such that an abnormal signal dedicated to an abnormality relating to a power failure flag, check sum or set value is externally output. An abnormal signal corresponding to each of the abnormality related to the error, the abnormality related to the checksum, and the abnormality related to the set value may be output to the outside.

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step SB120), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB114). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB114 and step SB120: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB115). The processing content of the setting value update processing is as described above. That is, when the operation power is supplied to the main CPU 63 in the situation where the “setting change operation” is being performed, the abnormality is generated in the main RAM 65 and thus negative in any one of step SB104 to step SB106. Even when the determination is made, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is performed. This makes it possible to prioritize the change of the setting value. Further, in the setting value update process (FIG. 167), the game stop flag is cleared to "0" by executing the initial setting at the start in step SB303 as described above. As a result, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 after the setting value update is completed.

  On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on (step SB120: YES, step SB114: NO), the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is "1. It is determined whether "is set" (step SB116). In the process of step SB116 after "1" is set to the game stop flag in step SB119, the game stop flag is naturally set to "1", so an affirmative determination is made in step SB116. In this case, the abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 in step SB121, and the abnormal signal is externally output in step SB122.

  That is, when an abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and the negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106, the operation to the main CPU 63 in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed. Even if the supply of power is started, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is not executed. The first RAM clear process is also performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started under the condition that "1" is set to the game stop flag and the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. (Step SB117) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the state where the game stop flag is set to "1" is not canceled It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" or not. In the initial setting (step SB303) at the start of the value updating process (FIG. 167), the game stop flag is cleared to "0". As a result, in order to cancel the state in which the gaming stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, not only the process for initializing the work area 221 for specific control but also resetting of the set value can be performed when the information abnormality of the work area 221 for specific control occurs. .

  Further, when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the gaming stop flag is set to "1", the case where "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, "no operation". In the case of or “RAM clear operation” or “setting confirmation operation” is performed, by making an affirmative determination in step SB109 or step SB116, an abnormal command is transmitted in step SB121 and an abnormality is detected in step SB122. Execute external output processing of. Thereby, when "1" is set to the game stop flag, the main side is performed unless the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed regardless of the processing result of step SB104 to step SB106 in the main processing thereafter. Every time supply of operation power to the CPU 63 is started, an abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and an external output at the time of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the manager of the gaming hall recognize that the setting value should be changed.

  When the process of step SB112 is executed, the process of step SB113 is executed, the process of step SB115 is executed, the process of step SB118 is executed, or the process of step SB122 is executed, for specific control Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a check counter provided in the work area 221 (step SB123). The value set in the counter during check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. If one or more values are set in the counter during check, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the time of the start of the supply of the operating power by the main CPU 63 is completed (steps SB101 to SB122) and the remaining process Before (step SB125 to step SB128) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed, the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of operating power, while the initial check period is operating power. It starts after the process at the time of the supply start of is finished. Thereby, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display in the initial check period, the display of the set values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is possible. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB124). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by clearing the in-progress processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, thereby performing not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905. The processing of step S 8907 to step S 8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB124, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step SB125 to step SB128. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process Remaining time will occur. Although this remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of step SB125 to step SB128 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processing of step SB125 to step SB128 is a non-periodic processing that is performed non-periodically. At step SB125 to step SB128, the same process as step S113 to step S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted in the situation where the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. The situation will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 168 (a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, and FIG. 168 (b) shows a period during which the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed. FIG. 168 (c) shows a period during which the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, and FIG. 168 (d) shows the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128). FIG. 168 (e) shows a period during which an interrupt is permitted, and FIG. 168 (f) shows a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). FIG. 168 (g) shows a period during which setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is being performed, and FIG. 168 (h) shows a process during setting confirmation (FIG. 166). To indicate the period it is.

  First, the case where both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power will be described.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed under the condition of “no operation” in which none of “RAM clear operation”, “setting change operation” and “setting confirmation operation” is performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power. Also, as shown in FIG. 168 (c), "1" is set in the startup processing flag in the specific control work area 221.

  Thereafter, at time t2, the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of the operating power is completed as shown in FIG. 168 (b), and the remaining process (step SB125) is performed as shown in FIG. 168 (d). The step SB128) is started. Further, at the timing of the time t2, as shown in FIG. 168 (c), the flag during the start-up processing in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". At the timing when the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started, the interrupt is not permitted as shown in FIG. 168 (e).

  Thereafter, at time t3, the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is finished as shown in FIG. 168 (d) and the interrupt is permitted as shown in FIG. 168 (e). As a result, as shown in FIG. 168 (f), timer interrupt processing is started. In this case, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is completed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is completed. It may be configured to be executed.

  Next, the case where the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power will be described.

  At timing t4, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the “setting change operation” is performed. At the timing of the time t4, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of operating power. Also, as shown in FIG. 168 (c), "1" is set in the startup processing flag in the specific control work area 221.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is started as shown in FIG. 168 (g). In this case, as shown in FIG. 168 (e), the interrupt is permitted at the timing of t5. When the interrupt is permitted, the timer interrupt process is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 168 (f). In this case, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is completed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is completed. It may be configured to be executed. Also, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed, “1” is set in the start-up processing flag as shown in FIG. 168 (c), so power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, While the process for performing fraud monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  The timer interrupt process ends at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 168 (f), and thereafter, at time t8, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) ends as shown in FIG. 168 (g). Then, at the timing of t8, the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power ends as shown in FIG. 168 (b) and the startup processing flag is as shown in FIG. 168 (c). "0" is cleared. At the timing of t8, the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started as shown in FIG. 168 (d).

  Next, the case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of the supply start of the operating power will be described.

  At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting supply of operating power. Also, as shown in FIG. 168 (c), "1" is set in the startup processing flag in the specific control work area 221.

  Thereafter, at time t10, the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is started as shown in FIG. 168 (h). In this case, as shown in FIG. 168 (e), the interrupt is permitted at the timing of t10. When the interrupt is permitted, the timer interrupt process is started as shown in FIG. 168 (f) at the timing of t11. In this case, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is completed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is completed. It may be configured to be executed. Also, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is executed, “1” is set in the start-up processing flag as shown in FIG. 168 (c), so power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, While the process for performing fraud monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  The timer interrupt process ends at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 168 (f), and then the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) ends at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 168 (h). Then, at the timing of t13, the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of the start of supply of the operating power ends as shown in FIG. 168 (b) and the startup processing flag is as shown in FIG. 168 (c). "0" is cleared. At the timing of t13, the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started as shown in FIG. 168 (d).

  As described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 167) is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being performed. 133) and execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is not interrupted and started during the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power. By doing this, it is possible to complete the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power early.

  On the other hand, when processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) and setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are executed, processing according to the operation of the game hall manager is executed, so the period of stay in these processing Will be longer. In this case, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, if the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is still inhibited, the execution start of the timer interrupt process is started. The timing is extremely slow. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution start timing of the timer interrupt process from being extremely delayed. Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being performed, the process for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. By interrupting and executing the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the display regarding the set value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). It can be done.

  Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, “1” is set in the startup process flag. Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. Among the various types of processing in 133), processing for performing power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is performed, and it is possible to prevent processing for advancing a game from being performed.

  Next, the progress of the process when an abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum or the set value occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 169 (a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, and FIG. 169 (b) shows a period during which the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed. FIG. 169 (c) shows the period during which the remaining process (step SB125 to step SB128) is being executed, and FIG. 169 (d) shows the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). 169 (e) shows a period in which "1" is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control, and FIG. 169 (f) shows an abnormal signal outside. FIG. 169 (g) shows a period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being performed.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 169 (a), the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed under the condition of “no operation” in which none of “RAM clear operation”, “setting change operation” and “setting confirmation operation” is performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power.

  After that, the occurrence of an abnormality relating to any of the power failure flag, the checksum and the setting value is specified at the timing of t2, so as shown in FIG. 169 (e), the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 "1" is set. Also, at the timing of the time t2, external output of the abnormal signal is started as shown in FIG. 169 (f). This makes it possible to specify in the game hall management computer that an abnormality relating to any of the power failure flag, the checksum and the setting value has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

  Thereafter, processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed as shown in FIG. 169 (b) at timing t3 and the remaining processing (step SB125 to steps as shown in FIG. 169 (c)). SB 128) is started. At time t4, the external output of the abnormal signal is ended as shown in FIG. 169 (f). By continuing the external output of the abnormal signal over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) of the timing t2 to the timing t4, an abnormality relating to any of the power failure flag, the check sum and the set value occurs in the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to accurately identify what has been done on the gaming hall management computer. In addition, since the period in which the external output of the abnormal signal is continued is constant in the predetermined period, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the external output of the abnormal signal. Not only the external output of the abnormal signal but also notification of abnormality in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 is executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 169 (c), the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is finished at the timing of t5. Then, the timer interrupt process is executed as shown in FIG. 169 (d) from the timing t5 to the timing t6, and the remaining processing (tc) as shown in FIG. 169 (c) from the timing t6 to the timing t7. Steps SB125 to SB128) are executed, and timer interrupt processing is executed as shown in FIG. 169 (d) from timing t7 to timing t8. However, as shown in FIG. 169 (e), since the gaming stop flag is set to "1", even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud are made. Although the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. At the timing of t8, a power failure process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 169 (a).

  Thereafter, at timing t9, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 169 (a), and processing at the start of supply of operating power as shown in FIG. 169 (b) (steps SB101 to SB122). ) Is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 169 (e), "1" is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control. Therefore, the external output of the abnormal signal is performed as shown in FIG. 169 (f) from the timing t10 to the timing t12. As a result, it becomes possible to make the management computer of the gaming hall recognize again that an abnormality relating to any of the power failure flag, the checksum and the setting value has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Not only the external output of the abnormal signal but also notification of abnormality in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends at the timing of t11, and FIG. 169 (c) extends from the timing of t11 to the timing of t13. The remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (d), the timer interrupt process is executed at the timing of t13. However, as shown in FIG. 169 (e), since the gaming stop flag is set to "1", even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud are made. Although the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. At the timing of t14, the power failure process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 169 (a).

  Thereafter, at timing t15, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 169 (a), and processing at the start of supply of operating power as shown in FIG. 169 (b) (steps SB101 to SB122). ) Is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (g), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed from timing t16 to timing t17. Not only is the setting value changed by execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167), but as shown in FIG. 169 (e), the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0". Ru. As a result, the state in which the execution of the process for causing the game to proceed is blocked due to the occurrence of the information abnormality in the specific control work area 221 is resolved. Thereafter, the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. 169 (c) from timing t17 to timing t18, and timer interrupt processing as shown in FIG. 169 (d) at timing t18. Is started.

  As described above, when an abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum and the set value occurs and the negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main processing (FIG. 165), the game in the work area 221 for specific control By setting “1” to the stop flag, processing for advancing a game is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being performed despite the occurrence of an information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Further, the state in which the game stop flag is set to “1” is not resolved unless the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. As a result, it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 167) in order to cancel the state in which the gaming stop flag is set to "1", and the occurrence of the information abnormality in the specific control work area 221 occurs. In this case, not only the processing for initializing the work area 221 for specific control but also resetting of the setting value can be required.

  Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 170 (a) shows a period during which the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of start of supply of operating power is being performed, and FIG. 170 (b) shows the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to step SB122). 170 (c) shows an initial check period, and FIG. 170 (d) shows a period during which the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed. In FIG. 170 (e), a display showing that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display showing the present setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 170 (f) shows a period during which the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is being executed, and FIG. 170 (g) confirms the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 The It shows the setting confirmation during a display period which is performed a display indicating the current settings of the display and the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth notification display device 201 to 204 indicate a that situation.

  First, the case where both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power will be described.

  From timing t1 to timing t2, as shown in FIG. 170A, the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of the start of supply of the operating power is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), the process after the end of the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started at the timing of t2. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the counter under check at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t2. As a result, the display for check is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128 (b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game may be performed in a state where the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), the initial check period ends at the timing of t3. Thereby, the display of the base value is started in the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification.

  Next, the case where the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power will be described.

  At timing t4, as shown in FIG. 170 (a), the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 170 (d), the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed from timing t5 to timing t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 170 (e), the setting updating display period is over the timing t5 to the timing t6.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (b) at time t6, the process after the process at the start of supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the counter under check at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t6. As a result, the display for check is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128 (b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game may be performed in a state where the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), the initial check period ends at the timing of t7. Thereby, the display of the base value is started in the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification.

  Next, the case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of the supply start of the operating power will be described.

  At the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 170 (a), the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of the start of supply of the operating power is started. Then, processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is executed from timing t9 to timing t10 as shown in FIG. 170 (f). In this case, as shown in FIG. 170 (g), the setting confirmation display period is performed over the timing t9 to the timing t10.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (b) at time t10, the process after the process at the start of supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the counter under check at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t10. As a result, the display for check is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128 (b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game may be performed in a state where the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), the initial check period ends at the timing of t11. Thereby, the display of the base value is started in the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the time of the start of the supply of the operating power by the main CPU 63 is completed (steps SB101 to SB122) and the remaining process Before (step SB125 to step SB128) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed, the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of operating power, while the initial check period is operating power. It starts after the process at the time of the supply start of is finished. Thereby, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display in the initial check period, the display of the set values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is possible. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  Next, when power failure processing is executed in a state where setting value update processing (FIG. 167) or processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is being performed, main processing (FIG. The contents of the process executed in 165) will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  When power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is performed, the main processing (FIG. 165) is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. First, the contents of the process executed in (1) will be described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of "no operation", the main process (FIG. 165) performs the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) and the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166). None of) is executed. Further, when the supply of operation power is resumed in a state where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165) while the setting value update process ( The process of FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, the main value processing (FIG. 167) is executed while the setting value updating processing (FIG. 167) is performed, while the first RAM clear processing (step SB117). And the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are not performed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in the state where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, the main confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 165) while the first RAM clear processing (step SB117). And the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is not executed.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), supply of operating power thereafter The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 165) upon resumption of the process will be described.

  If the operation power supply is resumed in the "no operation" status, and if the operation power supply is resumed in the "RAM clear operation" status, the operation is performed in the "setting change operation" status. Even when the supply of power is resumed, or the supply of operating power is resumed with the “setting confirmation operation” performed, the main value (in FIG. 165) is the setting value update process (figure While 167) is executed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed. That is, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the setting value is updated regardless of the operation content when restarting the supply of the operation power thereafter. The process (FIG. 167) is newly started.

  With the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the setting value update process (FIG. 167), the setting key insertion unit at the time of power on of the pachinko machine 10 is resumed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. It becomes possible to newly start the setting value update process (FIG. 167) regardless of the contents of the operation to the 68a and the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to reliably generate an opportunity to complete updating of the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though the update of the setting value is not completed.

  In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the set value update process (FIG. 167), the set value update process (FIG. 167) is uniquely executed regardless of the operation content when the supply of the operating power is resumed. By doing this, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration as compared with the configuration in which the processing content to be executed is changed according to each operation content.

  Next, when the process upon power failure is executed in a state where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is being executed (ie, a state where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), supply of operating power thereafter The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 165) upon resumption of the process will be described.

  When the supply of the operating power is resumed in a state where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165) while the setting value update process (FIG. 167) And the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed. That is, even if the process at the time of a power failure is executed in a situation where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is executed, the setting confirmation is performed when "RAM clear operation" is performed at the time of resuming supply of operating power thereafter. The first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed without newly executing the process for use (FIG. 166). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the first RAM clear process (step SB117) for the "RAM clear operation". The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the first RAM clear process (step SB117).

  When the supply of operation power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, the main processing (FIG. 165) executes setting value update processing (FIG. 167) while processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 166). Will not run. That is, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is performed, the setting confirmation is performed when the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operation power is resumed thereafter. The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed without newly executing the process for use (FIG. 166). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) for the “setting change operation”. In addition, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed as described above, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed so that the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Since the information of the setting value to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341 at the end of the setting value update process (FIG. 167) and displayed, the administrator of the game hall is the current pachinko machine The set value of 10 can be confirmed. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the second RAM clear process (step SB313) in the setting value update process (FIG. 167).

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where “setting confirmation operation” has been performed, the main processing (Fig. 165) is for setting confirmation on the condition that there is no abnormality in the power failure flag, checksum and setting value. Execute the process (FIG. 166). As a result, even if the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), the confirmation of the setting value can be resumed by performing the “setting confirmation operation” when the supply of the operating power is resumed. It becomes.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the state of "no operation", in the main processing (FIG. 165), the setting key insertion unit 68a operates under the condition that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, check sum and setting value. The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed even if the ON operation is not performed. As a result, even when the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the operation power supply resumes thereafter, the confirmation of the setting value is performed even if the operation is “no operation”. It is possible to resume.

  Next, processing executed by the sound emission control apparatus 81 will be described. Prior to the description of the processing, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control apparatus 81 will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG.

  The voice emission control device 81 includes a voice emission control board 351. The sound light side MPU 352 is mounted on the sound emission control board 351. The sound light side MPU 352 incorporates a sound light side ROM 354 and a sound light side RAM 355 in addition to the sound light side CPU 353 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit. In addition to the above elements, the sound side MPU 352 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and various counter circuits as a random number generator.

  The sound side ROM 354 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) which does not require an external power supply to store and hold a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used as a read only memory. The sound light side ROM 354 stores various control programs executed by the sound light side CPU 353 and fixed value data.

  The sound side RAM 355 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain the SRAM, DRAM, etc., and is used for both reading and writing. The sound light side RAM 355 enables random access, and the time required for reading is faster than the sound light side ROM 354 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound light side RAM 355 temporarily stores various data and the like in response to the execution of the control program stored in the sound light side ROM 354.

  The sound emission control board 351 has an RTC 356 and a memory 357 for RTC besides the sound light side MPU 352. The RTC 356 is a real time clock, constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the measured date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to an instruction from the sound-light CPU 353 It is a possible configuration. The RTC 356 is provided with a backup power supply, and can measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the date and time information is measured in the RTC 356, and only the time information may be measured.

  The RTC memory 357 is a memory (i.e., volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to store and retain SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The RTC memory 357 stores the date and time information of the RTC 356 in accordance with an instruction from the sound light side CPU 353. The date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is read by the sound light side CPU 353 as necessary. The sound light side CPU 353 grasps the reference time based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, and the time corresponding presentation is executed every time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses on the basis of the reference time. Execute the process to The RTC memory 357 is configured to be supplied with backup power from a backup power supply provided to the RTC 356, and date and time information is stored and held even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RTC memory 357 may be an EEPROM or the like which does not require an external power supply for storing and holding information.

  Next, the effect control process executed by the sound light side CPU 353 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The effect control process is executed when the supply of operation power to the sound light side CPU 353 is started.

  If an update start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB401: YES), a setting process of update notification is executed (step SB402). The update start command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 when the main CPU 63 starts the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) as described above. In the update notification setting process, an image showing that the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the set value, and the set value update process (FIG. The display control unit 82 performs display control so that an image for making it possible to recognize an operation content for ending the process in FIG. As a result, the game hall manager can recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation content and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (FIG. 167) The manager of the game hall can recognize the contents of the operation necessary to end the event. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41.

  If a confirmation start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB403: YES), a setting process of notification on confirmation is executed (step SB404). The confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 when the main CPU 63 starts the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) as described above. In the confirmation notification setting process, an image showing that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are available. Display control of the display control device 82 is performed so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thus, the game hall manager can recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and it is necessary to end the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). The administrator of the game hall can recognize the specific operation content. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41.

  When the processing of step SB401 to step SB404 is executed, it is determined whether any one of the normal return command, the return command at the clear, the return command at the confirmation, and the return command at the update is received from the main CPU 63 Step SB405). The normal recovery command is a process at the time of supply start of the operating power (step SB101) without any of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) being performed. .. Are sent when step SB122) is completed. The recovery command at the time of clearing is transmitted when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed and the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of the operating power is completed. The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed and the process at the start of supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. The restoration command at the time of updating is transmitted when the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed and the process at the start of supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed.

  If these return commands have not been received (step SB405: NO), the process returns to step SB401. The main CPU 63 transmits one of the recovery commands to the sound light side CPU 353 when the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is finished. In this case, as described above, the sound-light CPU 353 does not execute the processes after step SB406 until it receives one of the return commands from the main CPU 63. As a result, while the process at the time of supply start of the operation power being started by the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122) is being performed, the sound light CPU 353 does not start the execution control of the normal effect. It becomes possible.

  In addition, there is a possibility that the update start command or the confirmation start command may be received from the main CPU 63 in the situation where no return command is received, and when the update start command is received, the setting value update process as already described. A notification corresponding to the execution of (FIG. 167) needs to be performed, and when the confirmation start command is received, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is performed as described above. A corresponding notification needs to be provided. In this case, the sound-light CPU 353 does not execute the processing of step SB406 and subsequent steps until it receives one of the return commands from the main CPU 63, whereby a notification corresponding to the update start command or the confirmation start command is received. Can be suitably started.

  If any recovery command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB405: YES), it is determined whether the received recovery command is a normal recovery command (step SB406). As described in the normal return command, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, and the operation power supply start time is started. When the process (step SB101 to step SB122) of the above is completed, this is transmitted. When the normal return command is received (step SB406: YES), the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the date and time information serving as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-based effect is stored in the RTC memory 357.

  If the return command received this time is not the normal return command (step SB406: NO), and if it is the update return command (step SB408: YES), the updating notification end processing is executed (step SB409). The restoration command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 when the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is ended by the main CPU 63 as already described. In the update notification end processing, the notification corresponding to the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) started in step SB402 is ended.

  If the return command received this time is not the return command at the time of updating (step SB408: NO), but is the return command at the time of confirmation (step SB410: YES), processing for ending confirmation notification is performed (step SB411). The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 when the main CPU 63 ends the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) as described above. In the confirmation process at the time of confirmation, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) started at step SB404 is ended.

  When the process of step SB407 is performed, the process of step SB409 is performed, the negative determination is made in step SB410, or the process of step SB411 is performed, the process for performing the execution control of the normal effect is performed. Run. Specifically, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the time-based effect production (step SB412).

  The time-based effect is an effect executed each time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses on the basis of a reference time corresponding to date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. In the time corresponding production, the light emission production corresponding to the time corresponding production is performed in the display light emitting section 53, the sound output production corresponding to the time corresponding production is performed in the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the time corresponding production Display effects are performed.

  In addition, when the time-based effect is started in the situation where the effect for game operations is being executed, the time-based effect is executed with priority over the effect for game operations in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 On the other hand, in the symbol display device 41, the image display corresponding to the time-based effect is performed in a state where the image display corresponding to the effect for game use is reduced and displayed on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, when the time-based effect is started in a situation where the effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed, the time-based effect is given priority over the effect for the open / close execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 On the other hand, in the symbol display device 41, the image display corresponding to the time corresponding effect is performed in a state where the image display corresponding to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is reduced and displayed on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

  The time-corresponding effect is executed each time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses on the basis of the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the memory for RTC 357, whereby a plurality of adjacent in the game hall If the reference times of the pachinko machine 10 coincide with each other, it becomes possible to simultaneously start time-correspondence rendering on the plurality of pachinko machines 10. In the gaming hall, since the powers of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are simultaneously turned on, basically, the reference times of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 coincide with each other.

  In step SB412, the reference time is grasped based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. Further, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read out. Then, it is determined whether the time of the difference between the reference time and the time corresponding to the current date and time information read out from the RTC 356 is an integral multiple of a predetermined time. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB412, the setting process of the time-based effect is executed (step SB413). In the process of setting the time-based effect, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 perform settings for executing the time-based effect, and the display control device displays a command for causing the symbol display device 41 to execute the time-based effect. Send to 82 Note that the execution content of the time-based presentation may be different according to the number of times of the time-based presentation in the case where the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is used as a reference.

  If a negative determination is made in step SB412 or if the process of step SB413 is performed, another process is performed (step SB414). In the other processing, when a command to start the effects for the game is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are used to start the effects for the game If the setting is to be made, and it is a condition that the effect for game use should be advanced, the setting for advancing the effect for game use is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. When it is a situation where the effect for the game is to be ended, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 perform setting for ending the effect for the game. In the other processes, when the command to start the effect for the open / close execution mode is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 perform the effect for the open / close execution mode The setting for starting is performed, and in the situation where the effect for the open / close execution mode is to be advanced, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode The setting is performed, and in the situation where the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is to be ended, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform the setting for ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, the operation corresponding to the contents of the process performed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  The first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power in the main CPU 63 If the process at the start of supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is ended, the main CPU 63 transmits a normal return command to the sound-side CPU 353. When the sound-side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, the control relating to the notification is not executed. On the other hand, when receiving the normal return command, the sound light side CPU 353 stores the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 in the memory 357 for RTC. As a result, information corresponding to the reference time which is referred to for specifying the execution trigger of the time-based rendition is newly stored in the RTC memory 357.

  When the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63, the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power When the process ends, the main CPU 63 transmits to the sound light side CPU 353 a recovery command at the time of clearing. When the sound-side CPU 353 receives a return command at the time of clearing, the control related to notification is not executed. Further, even if the sound light side CPU 353 receives the recovery command at the time of clearing, it does not store the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 in the memory 357 for RTC. Since the power for backup is supplied to the memory for RTC 357, the memory for RTC before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off when the new storage of the date and time information in the memory for RTC 357 does not occur. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and held as it is.

  When the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of the start of supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63, the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to step SB122) When the process ends, the main CPU 63 transmits a restoration command at the time of updating to the sound light side CPU 353. When the sound-side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of updating, it ends the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting value updating process (FIG. 167). Further, even if the sound light side CPU 353 receives the restoration command at the time of updating, it does not store the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 in the memory 357 for RTC. Since the power for backup is supplied to the memory for RTC 357, the memory for RTC before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off when the new storage of the date and time information in the memory for RTC 357 does not occur. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and held as it is.

  When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63, the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of operating power When the process ends, the main CPU 63 transmits to the sound light side CPU 353 a return command at the time of confirmation. When the sound-side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound-light CPU 353 terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Further, even if the sound light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of confirmation, it does not store the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 in the memory 357 for RTC. Since the power for backup is supplied to the memory for RTC 357, the memory for RTC before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off when the new storage of the date and time information in the memory for RTC 357 does not occur. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and held as it is.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the predetermined start. Thus, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is started, in the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), the setting value changing operation from the setting value corresponding to a certain start. It is possible to do Therefore, the work content of the setting value changing operation can be easily understood by the operator.

  Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is “setting 1” with the lowest degree of advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value is changed from "setting 1" having the lowest degree of advantage. Thereby, even if the manager of the game hall ends the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) unintentionally immediately after the start of the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), the setting value with the lowest degree of advantage is obtained. Therefore, even if the game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage in the game hall.

  The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting updating area 342, and information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value updating process is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value during the change in the situation where (FIG. 167) is being executed is stored in the setting updating area 342. Thus, while the setting reference area 341 stores and holds information of the setting value set before the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is the update target It is possible to change the setting value.

  The main CPU 63 transmits a recovery command at the time of clearing when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed when the supply of operating power is started, and the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed. The reset command at the time of updating is sent, and when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the reset command at the time of confirmation is sent, these first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the set value update processing (FIG. 167) If none of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, a normal return command is transmitted. As a result, control corresponding to the type of start condition when the supply of operation power is started can be performed by the sound-side CPU 353 as well as the main CPU 63.

  Even if the sound light side CPU 353 receives any of the normal return command, the return command at the clear, the return command at the update, and the return command at the confirmation, an affirmative determination is made in step SB405 of the effect control process (FIG. 173). And the process of step SB412 to step SB414 is performed. On the other hand, when the normal return command is received, the process of writing to the RTC memory 357 (step SB407) is executed, and when the return command at the time of update is received, the update notification end process (step SB409) is performed. If it is executed and the return command at the time of confirmation is received, the end processing of notification at the time of confirmation (step SB411) is executed, and if the return command at the time of clearing is received, the dedicated processing is not executed. As a result, the control corresponding to each return command is performed while the processing corresponding to the progress of the game is started by the sound light side CPU 353 triggered by the reception of any one return command among the return commands. It becomes possible to be executed by the side CPU 353.

  After transmitting one of the recovery commands, the main CPU 63 ends the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power and starts the process (steps S8907 to S8920) for controlling the progression of the game. When the sound light side CPU 353 receives any return command, the sound light side CPU 353 controls the execution of the effect corresponding to the progress of the game. In this way, after the main CPU 63 is in a state in which processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed, the sound light side CPU 353 performs execution control of effects corresponding to the contents of the progress of the game. Is possible. In this case, the sound light side CPU 353 executes a process corresponding to each return command. As a result, the start timing of the execution control of the effect corresponding to the proceeding content of the game is triggered by the sound light side CPU 353 by using a plurality of return commands which make the execution contents of the process at the start of supply of the operation power in the sound light side CPU 353 different. Can be recognized by

  Since the time-based presentation is performed when the time-based presentation execution timing is reached based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the time-based presentation is performed at the timing when the predetermined time is reached. It is possible to In this case, when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. Does not generate new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357, while the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are all executed. If not, the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357. Thus, according to the processing content executed by the main CPU 63 when the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, a situation where date and time information is newly stored in the memory for RTC 357, and for RTC It is possible to cause a situation where date and time information is not newly stored in the memory 357.

  If the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, and the "setting change operation" is performed. The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. On the other hand, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the "no operation" state, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) and the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166). None of) is executed. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started as described above, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) or the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is performed. In this case, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, while any of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). When the CPU is not executed, the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357. As a result, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, whether the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 or is not newly stored in the RTC memory 357. It becomes possible for the manager of the gaming hall to select.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of the supply start of the operating power is completed by the main CPU 63, and the remaining process (step SB125 to step) Before SB 128) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed, the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) and the processing for updating the setting value (FIG. 167) are executed as processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power, while supply of operating power is performed during the initial check period. It is started after the start process is finished. Thereby, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display in the initial check period, the display of the set values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is possible. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  When supply of operation power to main side CPU 63 is started, either setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and setting confirmation process (FIG. Even if neither of 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In the main processing (FIG. 165) of the main CPU 63 (FIG. 165), either setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) It is a process commonly executed regardless of whether the value update process (FIG. 167) is not executed, and either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167). If the process is executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked. A process for starting the display for the user is set. As described above, since the process for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to start the check display is set as the common process, the above-described excellent features can be obtained while simplifying the process configuration. It is possible to achieve the

  Even in a situation where the check display is being executed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing for advancing the game. Thus, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the game is performed. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the process for advancing from being delayed.

  In the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of operation power executed when supply of operation power is started in main side CPU 63, it is determined whether the set value to be used is within the normal range. Processing for monitoring is performed. And when the setting value of use object is abnormal, it will be in the control state where the process for advancing a game is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the process for proceeding the game from being started despite the fact that the setting value to be used is abnormal.

  The process for monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is in the normal range is the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) even after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. Step S8919). As a result, even if the setting value to be used becomes abnormal in the process of proceeding with the game, it is possible to cope with it.

  In the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operation power which is executed when supply of operation power is started in the main CPU 63, whether or not the set value to be used is within the normal range. Not only monitoring, but also monitoring of whether the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" is executed and the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are checked. It is monitored whether the thumb is normal or not. When the power failure flag is not set to "1" or when the checksum is abnormal, a process of controlling the progress of the game is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the process for proceeding the game from being started despite the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main RAM 65.

  The regulation state is resumed when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped. As a result, it is possible that the state in which the execution of the process for advancing the game is restricted due to the occurrence of the information abnormality with respect to the main side RAM 65 can not be canceled only by stopping the supply of the operating power. Become.

  The restriction state is canceled by executing the setting value update process (FIG. 167). This makes it possible to newly set the setting value to be used when canceling the state in which the progress of the game is restricted by the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65.

  Even in the above-mentioned restricted state, power failure monitoring and update processing of various counters are executed. This makes it possible to secure the execution of the necessary processing even in the state where the progression of the game is restricted as described above. In particular, execution of the blackout monitoring makes it possible to appropriately cope with a blackout even if the progress of the game is restricted.

  When it is in the above-mentioned restricted state, it is informed that the set value of the object to be used should be changed. This makes it possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to eliminate the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main RAM 65.

  When an information abnormality has occurred with respect to the main side RAM 65, an abnormality signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall. This makes it possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to eliminate the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main RAM 65.

  An abnormality signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall even when an abnormality different from that in the case where an information abnormality has occurred with respect to the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to use the configuration for external output.

  Even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the restricted state where the progress of the game is restricted by the occurrence of the information abnormality with respect to the main side RAM 65, the restriction is still performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. If the state is not released, the external output of the abnormal signal is performed again. As a result, in the restricted state, the abnormal signal is externally output each time the supply of the operating power is resumed. Therefore, it becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to recognize that an information abnormality has occurred with respect to the main RAM 65.

  The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) And the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is inhibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. Execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is not interrupted and started during the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power. By doing this, it is possible to complete the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power early.

  On the other hand, when processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) and setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are executed, processing according to the operation of the game hall manager is executed, so the period of stay in these processing Will be longer. In this case, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, if the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is still inhibited, the execution start of the timer interrupt process is started. The timing is extremely slow. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution start timing of the timer interrupt process from being extremely delayed. Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being performed, the process for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. By interrupting and executing the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the display regarding the set value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). It can be done.

  Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, “1” is set in the startup process flag. Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. Among the various types of processing in 133), processing for performing power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is performed, and it is possible to prevent processing for advancing a game from being performed.

  If neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. If any of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) and the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 for RTC is performed. It is not limited to the configuration that does not occur. For example, when neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed. Alternatively, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may be generated. Also, neither the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed. Alternatively, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may be generated. Also, neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. Alternatively, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may be generated.

  If neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117) nor the set value update process (FIG. 167) is performed, the set value update process (FIG. 167) is performed. Alternatively, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may be generated. When neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed. Alternatively, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may be generated. When neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed. Alternatively, when the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may be generated.

  Also, when the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, and in other cases, new date and time information in the RTC memory 357. It is good also as composition which storage does not generate. Also, when setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date and time information occurs in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, new date and time information to the RTC memory 357. It is good also as composition which storage does not generate. Also, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, and in other cases, new date and time information in the RTC memory 357. It is good also as composition which storage does not generate. Further, when the first RAM clear process (step SB117) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. A configuration may be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur. If the first RAM clear process (step SB117) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. Otherwise, the RTC memory 357 Alternatively, new storage of date and time information may not be generated. Also, when setting value update processing (FIG. 167) or setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information occurs in RTC memory 357, and in the other cases, for RTC A configuration may be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur.

  When setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, the entire setting work area 221 including the setting reference area 341 and the setting update area 342 in the initial setting at the start (step SB303) The area may be cleared to "0" and initialization may be performed. In this case, the second RAM clear process (step SB313) may not be executed in the setting value update process (FIG. 167).

  Further, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value may be changed from a predetermined setting value other than “setting 1”. For example, the configuration may be configured to start changing the setting value from “setting 2”, or may be configured to start changing the setting value from “setting 3”. The configuration may be configured such that the change of the setting value is started from “setting 5”, or the configuration change may be started from “setting 6”.

  Also, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the information on the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten on the setting update area 342 as in the 45th embodiment. Thus, the configuration may be such that the change of the setting value is started from the setting value that has been set as the use target.

  Further, in the main process (FIG. 165), the process for transmitting various kinds of recovery commands may be set as the process before the remaining process (step SB125 to step SB128) is started. In this case, when any one of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the corresponding flag is set. In the processing for transmitting various recovery commands, the recovery command corresponding to the state of the flag may be transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353.

  Also, in addition to or in place of the configuration in which the time-based presentation is executed each time a predetermined time elapses based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is It may be configured to monitor whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred each time a predetermined time has elapsed, and every time a predetermined time has elapsed based on date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. The notification of the base value may be performed. In this case, an RTC 356 and an RTC memory 357 may be provided on the main control board 61, and the main CPU 63 may monitor the abnormality or notify the base value. Abnormality monitoring is simultaneously performed by a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall, and the result is notified by, for example, the symbol display device 41 etc. periodically to determine whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred. It becomes possible to perform various monitoring to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 collectively. In addition, the base value is notified at the same time by the symbol display device 41 or the like in a plurality of pachinko machines 10 set in the game hall, so that periodic monitoring of the base value is summarized for the plurality of pachinko machines 10 It is possible to The above-mentioned various notifications are not limited to the configuration performed by the pachinko machine 10 itself, but may be configured to be performed by an external output to the management computer of the game hall.

  If it is determined in the main process (FIG. 165) that the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksum is determined to be abnormal, or the set value in the setting reference area 341 is abnormal. If it is determined, the setting value update process (FIG. 165) may be forcibly executed regardless of whether the “setting change operation” is performed. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, it is possible to change the setting value immediately.

The 50th embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of effect control processing executed by the sound light side CPU 353 is different from that of the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing effect control processing according to the present embodiment that is executed by the sound light side CPU 353.

  In step SB501 to step SB505, the same process as step SB401 to step SB405 of the effect control process (FIG. 173) in the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment is executed. When receiving a normal recovery command, a recovery command at clear, a recovery command at confirmation, or a recovery command at update from the main side CPU 63 (step SB505: YES), the recovery command received this time is other than the normal recovery command. It is determined whether it is a return command (step SB506).

  If the return command received this time is any of the return command at the time of clear, the return command at the time of confirmation, and the return command at the time of update (step SB506: YES), effect control processing in the 49th embodiment (FIG. 173) Similar to step SB407, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the date and time information serving as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-based effect is stored in the RTC memory 357.

  In steps SB508 to SB514, the same processes as steps SB408 to SB414 in the effect control process (FIG. 173) in the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment are executed.

  FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram for describing an operation corresponding to the contents of the process performed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of the operating power in the main CPU 63.

  As in the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166), and the process at the time of supply start of operation power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122). If none of the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, the main CPU 63 transmits a normal return command to the sound light side CPU 353, and if the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed. The main CPU 63 transmits a reset command at the time of clearing to the sound CPU 353, and when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the main CPU 63 transmits the reset command at the update to the sound CPU 353. When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the main CPU 63 issues a return command at the time of confirmation to the sound side CPU 353. To send.

  As in the 49th embodiment, the sound light side CPU 353 ends the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167) when receiving the return command at the time of update, and at the time of confirmation When the return command of is received, the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is ended. Further, as in the forty-ninth embodiment, the sound light side CPU 353 does not execute control relating to notification even if it receives a normal return command and a return command at the time of clearing.

  When the sound-side CPU 353 receives any of the recovery command at the time of clearing, the recovery command at the time of updating, and the recovery command at the time of confirmation, it stores the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. As a result, information corresponding to the reference time which is referred to for specifying the execution trigger of the time-based rendition is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. On the other hand, even if the sound light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, it does not store the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since power for backup is supplied to the RTC memory 357, when new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, the RTC memory 357 is used before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The date and time information stored in the memory 357 is stored and held as it is.

  According to the above configuration, any one of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of supply start of operating power. If the time-of-day information stored in the RTC memory 357 is rewritten to the current time-of-day information being measured by the RTC 356, the process at the time of supply start of the operating power (step SB101 to If neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) nor the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is executed in step SB122), it is stored in the memory 357 for RTC Date and time information can not be rewritten. Thereby, even if the power of pachinko machine 10 is temporarily turned off for maintenance or operation check of pachinko machine 10 during business of the game hall, the situation of "no operation" at the time of resumption of supply of operation power thereafter By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 from being rewritten. Therefore, when resuming the supply of operation power after turning off the power of pachinko machine 10 once during operation of the game hall, the reference time of the time-correspondence effect is the same as that of the surrounding pachinko machine 10 in the game hall However, the operability for resuming the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 can be enhanced.

  In addition, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 can not be rewritten by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 in the “no operation” state, and thus the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on so that the key is not rewritten, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are not intended. It is possible to prevent processing from being performed.

The fifty-first embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of step SB601 to step SB630 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  Steps SB601 to SB622 execute the same processes as steps SB101 to SB122 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  When the process of step SB612 is executed, the process of step SB613 is executed, the process of step SB615 is executed, the process of step SB618 is executed, or the process of step SB622 is executed, for specific control Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the check counter provided in the work area 221 (step SB623). The value set in the counter during check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. If one or more values are set in the counter during check, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power by the main CPU 63 is completed (steps SB601 to SB622) and the remaining processing Before (step SB627 to step SB630) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed, the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process (steps SB601 to SB622) at the time of supply start of operating power, while the initial check period is operating power. It starts after the process at the time of the supply start of is finished. Thereby, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display in the initial check period, the display of the set values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is possible. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB624). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated, the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed so that the check display is performed in a situation where one or more values are set in the check counter Display control of 201 to 204 is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter under check in the specific control work area 221 is “0” (step SB 625). Then, the process waits in step SB 625 until the value of the counter during check becomes “0”. In this case, since the state in which the flag during start-up processing in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1” is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated, Among various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), processes for monitoring power failure, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while processes for advancing a game are not executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB623 elapses, the display for check on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked Will be continued.

  Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0” (step SB 626). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by clearing the in-progress processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, thereby performing not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905. The processing of step S 8907 to step S 8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. At step SB 626, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is also cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step SB627 to step SB630. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process Remaining time will occur. Although this remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of step SB627 to step SB630 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processing of step SB627 to step SB630 is a non-periodic processing that is performed non-periodically. In steps SB627 to SB630, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

  According to the above configuration, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. Thereby, it is possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal or not under the situation where the game is not performed.

The fifty-second embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of step SB701 to step SB734 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  In the main processing of the present embodiment, unlike the forty-ninth embodiment, the power on initialization processing is not executed. Therefore, when the main process is activated, the process after step SB701 is started without waiting for the predetermined time for waiting to elapse. Although the power-on initialization process is not executed, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted when the main process is started.

  In the main process, first, the internal function register setting process is executed (step SB701) as in step SB102 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the 49th embodiment, and the main process (FIG. 165) in the 49th embodiment. As in step SB103 of FIG. 6, "1" is set in the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 (step SB702). After that, “1” is set in the power failure flag, the checksum is normal, the set value is normal, and “1” is not set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control. Under the condition (step SB703 to step SB705: YES, step SB706: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB707).

  If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB707: NO), it is determined whether "1" is set in the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB708). The game stop flag is not set to "1", and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB708: NO, step SB709: YES), or the game stop flag The setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1” when “1” is not set to “1” and the setting key insertion unit 68 a is not turned on using the setting key. If it is determined (step SB708 and step SB709: NO, step SB710: YES), the process for setting confirmation is executed (step SB711). In the setting confirmation process, the processes of steps SB201 to SB202 and steps SB204 to SB207 are executed in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  That is, in the setting confirmation process of the present embodiment, the confirmation start command is not transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353. Therefore, even if the setting confirmation process is executed in the present embodiment, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process is not executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In the present embodiment, when the main processing is activated as already described, the symbol confirmation is performed at the timing when the processing for setting confirmation is started in order to start the processing after step SB701 without waiting for the predetermined time for weight to elapse. There is a possibility that the operation start and initialization of the display device 41 have not been completed. On the other hand, display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in a situation where the initial setting has not been completed by preventing the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process from being executed by the symbol display device 41 as described above. It is possible to prevent The notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process may be performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 but not performed by the symbol display device 41.

  After the setting confirmation process is executed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the check in progress counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB712). The value set in the counter during check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. If one or more values are set in the counter during check, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. That is, when the setting confirmation process is executed in the process (steps SB701 to SB729) at the time of supply start of the operating power, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process is completed. The display for check is started at 204, and the display for check is performed in a state where the progress of the process is not waiting.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed and the game stop flag is not set to "1" and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key, the work for specific control When “1” is not set in the setting confirmation display flag in area 221 (step SB 707 to step SB 710: NO), the initial check period (specifically, to the check in progress counter provided in work area 221 for specific control) The information corresponding to 5 seconds is set (step SB713). The value set in the counter during check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. If one or more values are set in the counter during check, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB714). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated, the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed so that the check display is performed in a situation where one or more values are set in the check counter Display control of 201 to 204 is performed.

  Thereafter, processing for weight is executed (step SB715). In the process for weight, the process waits until the value of the counter in check in the work area 221 for specific control becomes “0”. In this case, since the state in which the flag during start-up processing in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1” is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated, Among various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), processes for monitoring power failure, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while processes for advancing a game are not executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB713 elapses, the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed in a situation where execution of the processing for advancing the game is blocked. Will be continued. In addition, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the time waiting in the process for weight. That is, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, using the wait period for blocking the execution of the process for advancing the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. It is possible to display the check display. After the weight process (step SB715) is completed, a normal return command is sent to the sound side CPU 353 (step SB716) as in step SB113 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB707 and step SB717: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB718). In addition, regardless of whether the above-described “setting change operation” is performed or not, “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 (step SB706: YES And setting value update processing is executed (step SB717). In the setting value updating process, the processes of steps SB301 to SB304 and steps SB306 to SB314 are executed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  That is, in the setting value update process of this embodiment, the update start command is not transmitted to the sound side CPU 353. Therefore, even if the setting value update process is performed in the present embodiment, the notification corresponding to the setting value update process is not performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In the present embodiment, when the main process is activated as already described, the symbol is set at the timing when the setting value update process is started in order to start the process after step SB701 without waiting for the predetermined time for weight to elapse. There is a possibility that the operation start and initialization of the display device 41 have not been completed. On the other hand, display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in a situation where the initial setting is not completed by preventing the notification corresponding to the setting value update process from being executed by the symbol display device 41 as described above. It is possible to prevent The notification corresponding to the setting value update processing may be performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 but not performed by the symbol display device 41.

  After the setting value update process is performed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the check in progress counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB719). The value set in the counter during check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. If one or more values are set in the counter during check, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. That is, when the setting value update process is executed in the process (steps SB701 to SB729) at the time of supply start of the operating power, after the setting value update process is completed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 The display for check is started at 204, and the display for check is performed in a state where the progress of the process is not waiting.

  When reset button 68c is pressed and setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned ON (step SB707: YES, step SB717: NO), the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is "1". Is set (step SB720: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step SB721). The processing content of the first RAM clear processing is the same as the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

  Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the check in-progress counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB722). The value set in the counter during check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. If one or more values are set in the counter during check, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB723). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated, the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed so that the check display is performed in a situation where one or more values are set in the check counter Display control of 201 to 204 is performed.

  Thereafter, processing for weight is executed (step SB 724). In the process for weight, the process waits until the value of the counter in check in the work area 221 for specific control becomes “0”. In this case, since the state in which the flag during start-up processing in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1” is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated, Among various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), processes for monitoring power failure, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while processes for advancing a game are not executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB722 elapses, the display for check on first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked Will be continued. In addition, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the time waiting in the process for weight. That is, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, using the wait period for blocking the execution of the process for advancing the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. It is possible to display the check display. After the weight process (step SB724) is completed, the clear command at the time of clearing is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 (step SB725) as in step SB118 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the above-mentioned 49th embodiment.

  When a negative determination is made in any of steps SB703 to SB705, after setting the gaming stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control to "1" (step SB726), whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed or not It is determined (step SB727). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB717 and step SB727: YES), the setting value update process is performed in step SB718. While executing, at step SB719, the process of setting the counter being checked is executed. The contents of these processes are as described above.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB727: NO), when it is determined in step SB720 that "1" is set in the game stop flag, or in step SB708, the game stop flag is "1". Is determined to be set, the processing of step SB728 and step SB729 is executed. The processing contents of these steps SB728 and SB729 are the same as the steps SB121 and SB122 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment.

  When the process of step SB712 is executed, the process of step SB716 is executed, the process of step SB719 is executed, the process of step SB725 is executed, or the process of step SB729 is executed, for specific control The in-progress processing flag in the work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB730). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by clearing the in-progress processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, thereby performing not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905. The processing of step S 8907 to step S 8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB730, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step SB731 to step SB734. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process Remaining time will occur. Although this remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of step SB731 to step SB734 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processing of step SB731 to step SB734 is a non-periodic processing that is performed non-periodically. In step SB731 to step SB734, the same process as step S113 to step S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

  According to the above configuration, if the setting confirmation process (step SB711) and the setting value update process (step SB718) are not executed in the process (step SB701 to step SB729) when the supply of the operating power starts, the process for weight The display for check is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a state where the process is waiting for the progress of the process. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are utilized by using a weight period for blocking the execution of the process for advancing the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. It is possible to make a display for check in In addition, it is possible to secure an opportunity to check the display for check in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 before the processing for advancing the game is started.

  On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) does not end unless at least the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off by the game hall manager. Alternatively, by the time the setting value update process (step SB718) is ended, a time equal to or longer than the time required to complete the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 has elapsed. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is executed, the process for setting confirmation (step SB711) or setting is performed by preventing the weight process from being performed. When the value update process (step SB 718) is executed, it is possible to prevent the time required to start the process for proceeding the game from becoming excessively long.

  When the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is performed, the first to the fourth after the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is finished. (4) A check display is performed on the notification display devices 201 to 204. Thus, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 while not affecting the display of the setting values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

The fifty-third embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of step SB801 to step SB826 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, power on initialization processing is executed (step SB801). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for waiting (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SB802). In the internal function register setting process, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process periodically started by interrupting the main process, is performed at the first interrupt cycle. The interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is set to (specifically, 4 ms) and is periodically started by interrupting the main process, is performed from the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is also a short cycle, is set.

  That is, in this embodiment, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed as the timer interrupt process so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively long and short. And exist. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are both activated by interrupting the main process. Also, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Also, in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are not executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started first, regardless of the elapsed order of In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process that is activated prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated prior to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

  In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is mainly It sets to the specific register of side CPU63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the random number counter C1 is executed in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles.

  After that, “1” is set in the start-up processing flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB803). As in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the start-up processing flag is one of various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started. While the process for monitoring the power failure and updating the various counters and monitoring the fraud is executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) should be ended without executing the process for advancing the game. Is a flag for specifying the main CPU 63.

  The start-up processing flag is set to “1” when the process (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of operating power is started in the main process (FIG. 165), and the operating power is set. It is cleared to "0" before the process at the time of the start of supply is completed and the remaining process (steps SB819 to SB822) is started. As in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the flag during start-up processing is set to "1", the processes in steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. Of the process (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the time of start of supply of operating power (step SB810) or setting value update process (FIG. 181) described later. It is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), even when "1" is set in the startup processing flag, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 performs the operation power. Among the processes (steps SB801 to SB818, and steps SB823 to SB826) at the time of the start of supply of the ink, the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181) described later is performed. While the power failure monitoring is performed, the per-random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and the detection of fraud is executed.

  In particular, even when the power-on process flag is set to “1”, the process at the start of the operation power supply start (step SB801 to step SB818) by executing the power failure information storage process (step S8901). Even if a power failure occurs in a situation where a setting confirmation process (step SB810) or a setting value update process (FIG. 181) described later among steps SB823 to SB82 is executed, the process at the time of the power failure is executed. It becomes possible. In the power failure process, similarly to the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and the checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. In the case where the supply of the operating power is started again, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 65 from being identified as having an abnormality. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the occurrence of the power failure during the setting related process is supplied to the next operation power supply. It becomes possible to specify at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, any of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) The interrupt is not inhibited and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, in the case where the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 179) for returning after completion of the timer interrupt process as the start target is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. Information on various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be activated is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 179) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After “1” is set in the startup processing flag at step SB803, it is determined whether “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in work area 221 for specific control (step SB804) . When the power failure process is executed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the power failure process has been properly performed at the previous power-off time.

  If "1" is set in the power failure flag (step SB804: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step SB805). Specifically, first, a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. The method of calculating the checksum is the same as that of the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process performed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and stored in the specific control work area 221 The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the main processing of this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

  If the checksums match (step SB 805: YES), whether the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 is within the normal range It is determined whether or not it is (step SB806). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored as in the 45th embodiment. When numerical value information of “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When numerical value information of “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When numerical value information of “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When numerical value information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When numerical value information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”. In step SB806, it is determined whether the information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341 is any of “1” to “6”.

  If all the determination in step SB804 to step SB806 is affirmative, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB807). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the reset button 68 c is pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment, although the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c are provided in the main control device 60, the update button 68b is not provided. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (NO in step SB807), it is determined whether "1" is set in the game stop flag or setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step SB808).

  The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksum does not match or when the set value is abnormal. By setting “1” to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is positive, thereby performing steps S8907 to S8907. Do not execute the processing of S8920. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power off time, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of the information from the previous power-off at least one of the powers, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of the power failure, updating of various counters, and incorrectness While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is "1". Is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication indicating that the setting value is being updated, and an indication indicating the setting value in the middle of the update. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started and cleared to “0” when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is ended. In the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is not executed, basically, the setting update display flag does not become "1". However, if the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being performed, the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started. In this state, the setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to “1” is maintained until the process of clearing the setting update display flag to “0” in the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed.

  If "1" is not set to the game stop flag and the setting update display flag and thus the determination in step SB808 is negative, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key. To do (step SB809). If the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB809: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SB810). The processing content of the setting confirmation process is the same as the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment. In the present embodiment, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation is performed unless the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. Processing is not performed.

  If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned on using the setting key (step SB809: NO), a normal return command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SB811). The processing content executed by the voice emission control device 81 when the normal return command is received is the same as that of the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed at step SB807, and when it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (steps SB807 and SB812). : YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB813). That is, in the present embodiment, even if "1" is set in the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221, the "setting change operation" is not performed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. As long as the setting value update process is not performed. Details of the setting value update process will be described later.

  In the case where it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting key insertion unit 68a is determined not to be turned on using the setting key (step SB812: NO). It is determined whether "1" is set to the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the control work area 221 (step SB814).

  If “1” is not set in both the game stop flag and the setting update display flag (step SB814: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step SB815). In the first RAM clear process, as in the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the 45th embodiment, in the work area 221 for specific control, an area in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, and therefore the success or failure lottery is performed regardless of the success or failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed. Furthermore, the common view display portion 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utility symbol 34a is in a closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to “0”. Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Further, in the first RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is executed. Further, in the first RAM clear processing, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing of step SB802 is executed. The process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initialization are not executed for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224.

  Thereafter, the clear command at the time of clearing is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step SB816). The contents of processing executed by the audio light emission control device 81 when the return command at the time of clearing is received are the same as those of the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment.

  When the process of step SB810 is executed, the process of step SB811 is executed, the process of step SB813 is executed, or the process of step SB816 is executed, the check provided in the work area 221 for specific control is in progress Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the counter (step SB817). The value set in the counter during check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated as in the above-mentioned thirty-fifth embodiment. If one or more values are set in the counter during check, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the process (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is completed in the main CPU 63 The initial check period is started later, before the remaining processing (steps SB819 to SB822) is started. As a result, since it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed, the processing load in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181) are performed as the process (steps SB801 to SB818, and steps SB823 to SB826) at the time of starting supply of operating power. The initial check period is started after the process at the start of the operation power supply is completed. Thereby, even if the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display in the initial check period, the display of the set values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is possible. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0” (step SB 818). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by clearing the in-progress processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, thereby performing not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905. The processing of step S 8907 to step S 8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB 818, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step SB819 to step SB822. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process Remaining time will occur. Although this remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of step SB819 to step SB822 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of step SB819 to step SB822 are non-periodic processes that are performed non-periodically. In steps SB819 to SB822, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806 in the main processing (FIG. 179), that is, if "1" is not set in the power failure flag, the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. If it is, "1" is set to the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 (step SB823). As described above, by setting “1” to the game stop flag, the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906. The processes in steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power off time, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of the information from the previous power-off at least one of the powers, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of the power failure, updating of various counters, and incorrectness While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB824). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB824: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, checksum or setting value at the start of supply of operating power is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 Step SB 825). The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power by receiving the abnormality command, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Output a voice. In addition, a character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is given when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. It will be resumed.

  Thereafter, external output processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step SB826). In the external output processing at the time of abnormality, processing for externally outputting an abnormality signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a situation where an event that triggers the execution of the process of step SB826 occurs, the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and an event that triggers the execution of the process of step SB826 occurs. The configuration may be such that the signal output of the abnormal signal is stopped when the situation does not occur. In addition, the abnormal signal is not only output in step SB826, but may be output by another process. For example, even in the case where it is identified in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) that a fraud (a fraudulent radio wave detection or a fraudulent magnetic detection) has occurred, the fault signal is identified. Externally output. However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the abnormality signal is shared as described above, and an abnormality signal dedicated to step SB 826 may be externally output.

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step SB824), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB812). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB812 and step SB824: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step SB813). That is, when the operation power is supplied to the main CPU 63 in the situation where the “setting change operation” is being performed, the abnormality is generated in the main RAM 65, and the negative in any one of steps SB804 to SB806. Even when the determination is made, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is performed. This makes it possible to prioritize the change of the setting value.

  On the other hand, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on although the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB824: YES, step SB812: NO), the game stop flag or setting update in the work area 221 for specific control It is determined whether "1" is set in the display flag (step SB814). In the process of step SB 814 after “1” is set to the game stop flag at step SB 823, “1” is naturally set to the game stop flag, so an affirmative determination is made at step SB 814. In this case, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 in step SB825, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB826. Thereafter, without performing the processing of step SB817 and step SB818, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of step SB819 to step SB822.

  That is, when an abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of step SB804 to step SB806, the operation to the main CPU 63 in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed. Even if the supply of power is started, the first RAM clear process (step SB815) is not executed. The first RAM clear process is also performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started under the condition that "1" is set to the game stop flag and the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. (Step SB815) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operation power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the state where the game stop flag is set to "1" is not canceled It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" or not. Although described later, the game stop flag is cleared to “0” at the initial setting at the start of the setting value update process (FIG. 181). As a result, in order to cancel the state in which the gaming stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, not only the process for initializing the work area 221 for specific control but also resetting of the set value can be performed when the information abnormality of the work area 221 for specific control occurs. .

  Here, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c is not pressed, “1” is set to the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control in step SB808. If it is determined that the error command is determined, the abnormal command is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 81 in step SB825, and the abnormal signal is externally output in step SB826. Then, after these processes are performed, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of step SB819 to step SB822 without executing the processes of step SB817 and step SB818. In addition, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and it is determined in step SB812 that the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned on (that is, "RAM clear operation" is performed). Even if the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step SB814, and sound emission is performed in step SB825. An abnormal command is transmitted to the control device 81, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB826. Then, after these processes are performed, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of step SB819 to step SB822 without executing the processes of step SB817 and step SB818.

  Next, while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being performed, the state of subsequent processing when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 180. . FIG. 180 (a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, and FIG. 180 (b) shows the process (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of operating power. FIG. 180 (c) shows a period in which processing after execution of the process (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) is finished is completed. FIG. 180 (d) shows a period during which setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is being performed, and FIG. 180 (e) shows that the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". A period is shown, and in FIG. 180 (f), "1" is set in the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control. It indicates how long are, FIG 180 (g) shows a period during which the abnormal signal is externally outputted.

  At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the “setting change operation” is performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB801 to SB818, and steps SB823 to SB826) at the time of supply of operating power, and FIG. As shown in), "1" is set in the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started at the timing of t2. In this case, “1” is set to the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 as shown in FIG. 180 (e) at the timing of t2.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at timing t3 which is a state in the middle of the setting value update process (FIG. 181) being performed. The supply of operating power is stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the process (steps SB801 to SB818, and steps SB823 to SB826) at the time of starting supply of operating power ends and the setting value update process (shown in FIG. 180 (d)). Figure 181) ends.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again at the timing of t4. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed under the condition that the "RAM clear operation" is performed. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the time of supply of operating power. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 180 (e) and 180 (f), both the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 and the start processing flag are continued from before the previous supply stop of the operating power. "Is set.

  Since the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed under the condition that "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation where "1" is set to the setting update display flag this time, the first RAM clear process (step SB815 As shown in FIG. 180 (g), the external output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) of the timing t5 to the timing t7 without performing. In addition, abnormality notification based on the transmission of the abnormality command is started at the timing of t5.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (b), the process (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of the operating power started at the timing of t4 ends at the timing of t6. Then, the process after the process (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the time of the start of supply of the operating power ends at the timing of t6 is started.

  In this case, it is assumed that the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started because “1” is set in the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 as shown in FIG. 180 (f). While the process for monitoring the blackout, updating the various counters, and monitoring the fraud is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), at the timing of t8, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, whereby the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), the processing after the supply ends at the timing of the time t8.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again at the timing of t9. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the “setting change operation” is performed. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB801 to SB818, and steps SB823 to SB826) at the time of supply of operating power. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 180 (e) and 180 (f), both the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 and the start processing flag are continued from before the previous supply stop of the operating power. "Is set.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is executed from timing t10 to timing t11. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) ends normally. Then, at the timing of t11, which is the end timing, the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 180 (e). Also, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the process (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of the supply of the operating power ends at the timing of t11. As a result, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 180 (f), the start-up processing flag is cleared to "0". Then, as shown in FIG. 180 (c) at the timing of t11, the process after the process (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started. In this case, since the start-up processing flag has already been cleared to "0", processing for performing power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started. Not only processing for advancing a game is performed.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed as described above, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed. In the process (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of the operating power (unless the "setting change operation" is performed), transmission of the abnormal command to the voice emission control device 81 and external output of the abnormal signal Is executed, and even if the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the first RAM clear processing (step SB 815) is not performed, and the setting confirmation process (even if the “setting confirmation operation” is performed Step SB810) is not performed. Furthermore, when transmission of an abnormal command to the audio light emission control device 81 and external output of an abnormal signal are executed, a process of clearing the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control to “0” (step Since the remaining processing (steps SB 819 to SB 822) is performed without executing SB 818), power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are performed even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is activated. While the processing for is executed, the processing for advancing the game is not executed. Thereby, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed, the main CPU 63 is subjected to the “setting change operation”. It is necessary to resume the supply of operating power to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, it becomes possible to reliably change the setting value.

  Next, the setting value update processing in the present embodiment executed in step SB813 of the main processing (FIG. 179) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The processing of step SB901 to step SB918 in the setting value update processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  First, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB901). As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 182, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control. Even in the present embodiment, in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), each time the reset button 68c is pressed, the value of the setting update area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control, that is, the setting value of the update target is 1 It is added. In this case, when the reset button 68c is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state so that only the setting value to be updated is "1" for one pressing operation of the reset button 68c, that is, When the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 68c is switched from the operation non-detection state to the operation detection state, the setting update area setting value is added by 1 to update the setting value Is added by one.

  In this configuration, the OFF confirmation flag 361 checks whether or not the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is started when confirming whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed in the setting value update processing (FIG. 181). It is a flag to confirm. If it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed after the process of determining whether the reset button 68c is pressed or not (step SB910) in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), Is set, or the set state of "1" is maintained, and when it is determined that the reset button 68c is not pressed, "0" is cleared or the state of "0" is maintained.

  Here, the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is executed under the condition that it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in step SB807 or step SB824 of the main processing (FIG. 179) as described above. In step SB807 or step SB824, the main CPU 63 directly monitors the input port to which the detection signal from the detection sensor for detecting the presence or absence of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is input, thereby determining whether the reset button 68c is pressed. Determine if In this case, instead of confirming the start timing and the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, it is checked whether the reset button 68c is in the state of being pressed. Therefore, in step SB807 or step SB824, without confirming the OFF confirmation flag 361, an affirmative determination is made when a signal corresponding to pressing of the reset button 68c is input to the input port.

  However, in this configuration, between the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c and the start timing of the set value update process (FIG. 181) when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on to start the set value update process (FIG. 181). Depending on the relationship, a case where the pressing operation is a trigger for adding one to the setting value to be updated and a case where the pressing operation is not the trigger occur. Then, according to the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the update mode of the setting value to be updated is changed, and the operability is lowered. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in the situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "0", the setting value update process is performed in the configuration in which the setting value of the update target is added one. When (FIG. 181) is started, “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in step SB 901 which is executed prior to the processing for determining whether or not the reset button 68 c is pressed. By doing this, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value of the update target from being incremented by one due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  After executing the processing of step SB901, interrupt permission is set (step SB902). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the second interrupt cycle. In the present embodiment, as in the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the processing at the time of supply start of the operating power (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) are basically performed. 2) The interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is inhibited, and the interrupt is permitted in the process for setting confirmation (step SB810) and the process for updating the set value (FIG. 181). Therefore, in the process (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the time of starting supply of operating power, the process for setting confirmation (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181) are not executed. (1) The execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited, and the process for setting confirmation (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed. Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. Even if 133) is activated, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), a process for monitoring a power failure, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while for proceeding a game The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without executing the process.

  After that, under the condition that "1" is not set in the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221, "1" is set in the setting update display flag (step SB903). When the setting update display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) to set the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. (Step S9004) is executed. The processing content of the setting processing to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that of the above-mentioned 45th embodiment. For example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124 (a), when the process is executed, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is selected as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 The displayed setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, initialization at the start time is performed (step SB904). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". If the power failure flag is not set to “1” in the power failure flag because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the previous power off (step SB804: NO), the work area 221 for specific control and In the case where the checksums do not match due to the change in the information storage state from the previous power-off in at least one of the specific control stack area 222 (step SB 805: NO), or the setting reference area 341 If the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SB806: NO), the flag is set to “1” in step SB823 of the main process (FIG. 179). By setting “1” to the game stop flag, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the determination in step S8906 is positive, thereby performing steps S8907 to S8907. Do not execute the processing of S8920. Thereby, when the information abnormality of the above-mentioned main side RAM 65 occurs, while processing for performing power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, processing for advancing a game is executed. It will not be. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SB904, the state where the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is specified is canceled when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. Is possible.

  Thereafter, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 (step SB905). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information on setting values during updating is stored in the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) as in the 45th embodiment. When numerical value information of “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When numerical value information of “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is “setting 2”. When numerical value information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is “setting 3”. When numerical value information of “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is “setting 4”. When numerical value information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is "setting 5". When numerical value information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target is "setting 6".

  By setting “1” in the setting update area 342 in step SB 905, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started regardless of which setting value of the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is, the setting value of the update target is “setting 1”.

  Thereafter, the update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step SB 906). The voice emission control device 81 receives an update start command, thereby displaying an image indicating that the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is being performed, and an image for making it possible to recognize an operation content for changing the setting value. And the display control device 82 is controlled so that an image for making it possible to recognize an operation content for ending the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, the game hall manager can recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation content and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (FIG. 181) The manager of the game hall can recognize the contents of the operation necessary to end the event. The notification may be performed by at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in addition to or instead of being performed by the symbol display device 41. Further, an external output indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being performed may be performed on a device outside the pachinko machine 10, such as a game hall management computer.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 is any of “1” to “6” (step SB 907). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB907: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB908). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SB907 or if the process of step SB908 is performed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB909). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of setting key insertion unit 68a is from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Do.

  If a negative determination is made in step SB909, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910). Specifically, it directly determines whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed by directly monitoring an input port to which a detection signal from a detection sensor that detects the presence or absence of pressing the reset button 68c is input. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB911), and the process returns to step SB907.

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (YES in step SB910), it is determined whether the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is “0” (step SB912). When “1” is set in the OFF confirmation flag 361 (step SB912: NO), the current confirmation timing is not the start timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is continued. In order to mean that there is a situation, the process returns to step SB 907 without adding 1 to the setting value to be updated.

  If the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is “0” (step SB 912: YES), it means that the current confirmation timing is the start timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68 c. In this case, after the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “1” (step SB 913), the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB 914). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one stage higher. When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “1” (step SB912: NO), or the value of the setting update area 342 is set to 1 If added (step SB 914), the processing returns to step SB 907, but if it is determined in step SB 907 that the value of the setting updating area 342 is 7 or more, the setting updating area is determined in step SB 908. "1" is set to 342. As a result, when the reset button 68 c is pressed once under the condition of “setting 6”, the setting is returned to “setting 1”.

  When it is specified that setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB909: YES), information on the setting value stored in setting update area 342 is overwritten in setting reference area 341 ( Step SB915). As a result, the information of the set value updated as a result of the set value update process (FIG. 181) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the set value corresponding to the set information is the current state. The setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is obtained.

  Thereafter, interrupt disable is set (step SB916). Thus, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is ended and the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 179) is resumed (steps SB801 to SB818, and steps SB823 to SB826). Interrupts of the 1 timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are inhibited.

  Thereafter, the second RAM clear process is executed (step SB 917). In the second RAM clear process, as in the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the 45th embodiment, in the work area 221 for specific control, an area in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, and therefore the success or failure lottery is performed regardless of the success or failure lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed. Furthermore, the common view display portion 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the general public utility symbol 34a is in a closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general-purpose hold area 65c provided in the specific control work area 221 are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special view display unit 37a is erased and the general view display unit The pending information for 38a is erased. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to “0”. Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Also, the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0". Further, in the second RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is executed. Further, in the second RAM clear processing, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing of step SB802 is executed. The process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initialization are not executed for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 81 (step SB 918). The contents of processing executed by the audio light emission control device 81 when the return command at the time of updating is received are the same as those of the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment.

  Next, how the setting value to be updated is updated will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Fig. 183 (a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, Fig. 183 (b) shows the operation situation of the setting key insertion portion 68a, and Fig. 183 (c) shows the operation of the reset button 68c. FIG. 183 (d) shows the state during which the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being performed, FIG. 183 (e) shows the setting state of the OFF confirmation flag 361, and FIG. 183 (f) shows the setting. Indicates the value update timing.

  First, a comparative example in which “1” is not set in the OFF confirmation flag 361 when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started will be described.

  At the timing of t1, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183 (b) and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183 (c). Then, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed as shown in FIG. 183 (a) at the timing of t2 in which the on-operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued. In this case, since the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed in the state where the “setting change operation” is performed, the setting value update process ((d) in FIG. Figure 181) is started.

  In the comparative example, "1" is not set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, so the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 at timing t3 as shown in FIG. Is “0”. After that, the reset button 68 c is pressed under the condition that the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is “0” at the timing of t 4 at which the pressing operation of the reset button 68 c is continued when the power is turned on. That is, as shown in FIG. 183 (f), the setting value to be updated is incremented by one. Further, as shown in FIG. 183 (e), “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 at the timing of the time t4.

  That is, in the comparative example, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of the power ON operation is continued even after the start of the setting value updating process (FIG. 181), and the setting value of the update target is 1 triggered by the pressing operation. It will be added. In this case, even though the game hall manager does not intend to update the setting value to be updated, the setting value to be updated is to be updated.

  Next, the present embodiment will be described in which “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started.

  At the timing of t5, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183 (b) and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183 (c). Then, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed as shown in FIG. 183 (a) at the timing of t6 where the on-operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued. In this case, since the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed in the state where the “setting change operation” is performed, the setting value update process ((d) in FIG. Figure 181) is started. When the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, a process of setting “1” to the OFF confirmation flag 361 is executed in step SB901. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183 (e), the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" at time t7. Since the timing at which “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 is a timing prior to the timing at which it is determined whether or not the reset button 68 c has been pressed in the setting value update processing (FIG. 181), Even if the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of the power ON operation is continued as shown in), the setting value to be updated is not incremented by one. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 183 (c), the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is ended at the timing of t8, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 183 (e).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 183C, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is performed at timing t9 to timing t10, timing t11 to timing t12, and timing t13 to timing t14. In this case, the reset button 68c is pressed under the condition that the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is “0” at each of the timing of t9, the timing of t11, and the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. As shown, the set value to be updated is incremented by one at each of these timings.

  After that, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned OFF as shown in FIG. 183 (b) at the timing of t15, whereby the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is performed as shown in FIG. ) Ends.

  As described above, when it is determined that the reset button 68 c is pressed in the situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “0”, the setting value update process (see FIG. When 181) is started, “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in step SB901, which is executed prior to the processing for determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value of the update target from being incremented by one due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the predetermined start. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is started, in the setting value updating process (FIG. 181), the setting value changing operation from the setting value corresponding to a certain start. It is possible to do Therefore, the work content of the setting value changing operation can be easily understood by the operator.

  Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is “setting 1” with the lowest degree of advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value is changed from “setting 1” having the lowest degree of advantage. Thereby, even if the manager of the game hall ends the setting value update process (FIG. 181) unintentionally immediately after the start of the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the setting value with the lowest degree of advantage is obtained. Therefore, even if the game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage in the game hall.

  The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting updating area 342, and information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value updating process is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value in the middle of change in the situation where FIG. 181 is being executed is stored in the setting updating area 342. As a result, while the information of the set value set before the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started is stored and held in the setting reference area 341, the update process is performed in the set value update process (FIG. 181). It is possible to change the setting value.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the game is then resumed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed. Processing is not started to proceed the process. This makes it possible to prevent the process for proceeding the game from being started even though the set value update process (FIG. 181) is not completed.

  Even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is performed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed thereafter If the "setting change operation" is performed, the above-mentioned restriction state does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the process for advancing the game from being restricted until the setting value is changed.

  Even in the above-mentioned restricted state, power failure monitoring and update processing of various counters are executed. This makes it possible to secure the execution of the necessary processing even in the state where the progression of the game is restricted as described above. In particular, execution of the blackout monitoring makes it possible to appropriately cope with a blackout even if the progress of the game is restricted.

  The regulation state is resumed when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped. Thus, in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being performed, the state where the execution of the process for advancing the game is restricted by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is the operating power. It is possible to prevent the release only by stopping the supply of

  In the configuration where it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed under the condition that “0” is set in the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control, one is added to the setting value to be updated. When the value update process (FIG. 181) is started, “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in step SB901, which is executed prior to the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Configuration. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value of the update target from being incremented by one due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  It should be noted that in the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the process for setting confirmation is performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed thereafter ( When step SB810) is executed, the setting update display flag may be cleared to “0”, and the execution of the process for advancing the game may not be restricted. Since the setting value of the current use target is notified by executing the setting confirmation process (step SB810), it is possible for the administrator of the gaming hall to grasp the setting value of the use target. In such a case, even if the execution of the process for advancing the game is not restricted, the game does not proceed with the setting value not assumed by the game hall manager.

  In addition, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting value update process (FIG. 181), whether or not the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted thereafter. The setting value update process (FIG. 181) may be forcibly executed regardless of the above. This makes it possible to forcibly change the setting value.

  Further, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the execution of the process for advancing the game when the supply of the operating power is restarted is restricted. May be in a restricted state. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is executed when resuming the supply of operating power, the configuration may not be in the above-mentioned regulation state, and in addition to or in place of the configuration, the resumption of the supply of operating power. When the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed, the above-mentioned restriction state may not be established.

  In addition, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting confirmation process (step SB810), whether or not the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The setting confirmation process (step SB810) may be forcibly executed regardless of the above. This makes it possible to forcibly check the set value.

  Further, in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), it is specified that the reset button 68c is not pressed in the process cycle on the front side in two consecutive process cycles, and the reset button 68c is on the process cycle on the rear side. Although the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is determined that the pressing operation is specified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c is used in each of a plurality of consecutive processing times in the past. Is specified that the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is specified in one processing cycle or a plurality of consecutive processing cycles in that situation. It may be configured as Even in this case, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the reset button 68c is pressed to operate the information related to the confirmation history of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of successive processing times in the past. The setting value of the selection target is changed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) by the pressing operation of the reset button 68c for starting the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) by rewriting to the information corresponding to the setting. It becomes possible not to do so.

<Fifty-fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifty-third embodiment. The configuration different from the fifty-third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-mentioned fifty-third embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of step SC101 to step SC128 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control in the main CPU 63 and the data for specific control.

  At step SC101 to step SC106, the same process as step SB801 to step SB806 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the fifty-third embodiment is executed. When all the steps SC104 to SC106 make an affirmative determination, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SC107). When reset button 68c is not pressed (step SC107: NO), it is determined whether the setting update display flag in work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC108). ). When the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (steps SC107 and SC108: NO), the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is "1". It is determined whether "is set (step SC109). If "1" is set in the game stop flag, an abnormal command is transmitted in step SC127, and an external output process at the time of abnormality is executed in step SC128.

  When "1" is not set to the game stop flag (step SC109: NO), the process proceeds to step SC110. Steps SC110 to SC112 execute the same processes as steps SB809 to SB811 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the fifty-third embodiment.

  If it is determined in step SC107 that the reset button 68c is pressed, or if it is determined in step SC108 that "1" is set in the setting update display flag, the setting key insertion unit 68a is determined in step SC113. It is determined whether or not the on-operation is performed using the setting key. When it is determined that setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON (step SC113: YES), after setting “1” to OFF confirmation flag 361 in work area 221 for specific control (step SC114) A value update process is performed (step SC115). In steps SC116 to SC128, the same processes as steps SB114 to SB826 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the fifty-third embodiment are executed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during execution of the setting value update process (step SC115), the “no operation” state or the “RAM clear operation” is performed. When the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is resumed in the situation, while the situation in which the process for causing the game to proceed is blocked as in the 53rd embodiment, the "setting change operation" is continued. Not only when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed under the situation where a “setting check operation” is performed but also when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed under A setting value update process (step SC115) is performed. Thus, after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during execution of the setting value update processing (step SC115), the setting value update processing ((step SC115) is resumed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed. Step SC115) becomes easy to be executed.

  In particular, in the case of "setting change operation", it is necessary to turn on setting key insertion portion 68a using the setting key and press reset button 68c, and in the case of "setting confirmation operation", setting using the setting key In the configuration where it is necessary to turn on the key insertion portion 68a, if "1" is set in the setting update display flag, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. As a result, the setting value update process (step SC115) is performed. Thus, although the setting value update process (step SC115) is started by performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the "setting change operation" has been performed, for example, the power OFF operation is performed accidentally If the setting key insertion part 68a is maintained in the ON state in order to quickly return to the power ON state thereafter, the setting is made even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. It becomes possible to execute value update processing (step SC115).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step SC112 that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on, the work for specific control is performed in step SC114 before the setting value update processing (step SC115) is started. The OFF confirmation flag 361 in the area 221 is set to “1”. Thus, even if the process of setting the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not performed when the setting value update process (step SC115) is started, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of the power ON operation is a trigger. It becomes possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by one. Incidentally, in the setting value update processing (step SC115) in the present embodiment, the processing of step SB901 is not executed among the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) in the fifty-third embodiment and the processing of steps SB902 to SB918 is performed. To be executed.

  In the setting value update process (step SC115), it is specified that the reset button 68c is not pressed in the process cycle on the front side in the two consecutive process cycles, and the reset button 68c is on the process cycle on the rear side. Although the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is determined that the pressing operation is specified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c is used in each of a plurality of consecutive processing times in the past. Is specified that the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is specified in one processing cycle or a plurality of consecutive processing cycles in that situation. It may be configured as Even in this case, when the setting value update process (step SC115) is started, the reset button 68c is pressed to operate the information related to the confirmation history of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of successive processing times in the past. The setting value of the selection target is changed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) by the pressing operation of the reset button 68c for starting the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) by rewriting to the information corresponding to the setting. It becomes possible not to do so.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit game cycle is calculated as a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the open / close execution mode. It is also possible to calculate the result of dividing the number of times of occurrence of the open / close execution mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. Further, in addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode by the total number of the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 is calculated. It may be In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (2) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the high frequency support mode with respect to the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game cycle and the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode as a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the high frequency support mode In addition to or instead of this, the ratio of the number of occurrences of is calculated as a result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. Good. In addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 is calculated. It is good also as composition. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (3) Not only the jackpot result but also the small hit result may be present as a game result that becomes an occurrence trigger of the open / close execution mode. In the case of the small hit result, although the open / close execution mode occurs, the pass / fail lottery mode and the support mode are not changed before and after the open / close execution mode. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode resulting in the small hitting result, the low frequency winning mode may be adopted. In this case, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit result is stored in the history memory 117 when the big hit result occurs, and the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small hit result is history when the small hit result occurs It may be configured to be stored in the memory 117. Further, in the configuration, the parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the big hit result and the parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the small hit result may be calculated by using the history information stored in the history memory 117. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  Further, the probability of winning in the small hitting result may be changed according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 or may be not changed. In the case where the probability of winning the small hitting result changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the small hitting result, or the higher the setting value, the winning of the small hitting result The configuration may be low.

  Also, in a configuration in which a small hit result exists, it is obtained when the game ball enters the second operation port 34 with the holding information acquired when the game ball enters the first operation port 33. The distribution ratio of the type of the jackpot result in the case of the jackpot result with the suspension information is different, and when aiming to enter the first operation opening 33, the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA Also, when the game ball is made to flow down the area on the left side, the game ball flows down the area on the right side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA when aiming to enter the second operation port 34. It is good also as composition that small hit results may be generated based on retention information acquired when a game ball enters the 1st operation opening 33 so that it may carry out firing operation.

In the configuration, the following 51st parameter may be present as a management result of the game history. In addition, the period which added the execution period of opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hitting result based on entering the ball to the 1st operation opening 33, and the execution period which is not opening / closing execution mode but low frequency support mode Do. In addition, the number of balls entered into the out port 24a in the normal period is the number of balls entered K51, and the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 in the normal period is the number of balls entered K52. The number is assumed to be the number K53 of the ball, the number of balls entered the first operation port 33 in the normal period is the number K54, and the number of balls entered the second operation port 34 in the normal period is the number K55.
Parameter 51: Total payout number of gaming balls in a normal period (K 52 × “number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31” + K 53 × “number of prize balls for winning in special power winning device 32” + K 54 × “first Number of winning balls for winning in the operation opening 33 + K55 × proportion of total number (K51 + K52 + K53 + K54 + K55) of gaming balls discharged from the skill area PA in the normal period In the configuration in which the 51st parameter is calculated, when the winning probability of the small hitting result fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 It becomes. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the 51st parameter be erased when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, when the winning probability of the small hitting result does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the 51st parameter is not erased even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

  (4) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 even if any type of jackpot result occurs. The history information corresponding to the type of the jackpot result may be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency may be calculated for each type of jackpot result. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (5) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, various parameters (the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters) are periodically performed. Although the parameter is calculated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes the number of operation triggers (for example, 10000), various parameters are calculated The configuration may be such that various parameters may be calculated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the number of times of execution of the game has reached the number of operation triggers (for example, 1000). In this case, various parameters may be calculated. In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0” at the timing when various parameters are calculated. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (6) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty first to twenty sixth parameters, the thirty first parameter, and the thirty first parameter are provided each time operation timings of various parameters are reached. Although all of the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the above various parameters is to be calculated at one calculation timing, and the calculation timing is obtained. The parameter group to be calculated may be sequentially changed. For example, the first to eighth parameters are calculated at one calculation timing, the first to eighteenth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and the second to twenty-sixth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and the next calculation is performed. At timing, the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters may be calculated, and thereafter, the calculation target may be repeatedly changed according to the above-mentioned order each time the calculation timing is reached. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating parameters when one calculation timing is reached. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (7) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, calculation of various parameters may be executed using the history information of the history memory 117 under the condition that a game is being played. For example, calculation of various parameters may be executed on the condition that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being unnecessarily repeated even though the game is not being played. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (8) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and the function of the management IC 66 is performed by the main CPU 63. It is good also as composition. In this case, the correspondence information is stored in advance in the main ROM 64. Further, the memory for history 117, the memory for calculation result 131, and the memory for separate storage 171 may be provided separately from the main RAM 65. In the main RAM 65, the memory for history 117, the memory for calculation result 131, and The function of the storage memory 171 may be implemented. In the configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are performed in the main RAM 65, the history memory 117 is used when the main RAM 65 clear processing (steps S105 and S117) is performed. A part or all of the area corresponding to each of the memory 117, the calculation result memory 131 and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to "0", or the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131 and the separate storage The area corresponding to each of the memories 171 may be excluded from the target of “0” clear, and may be “0” clear when the corresponding clear condition in each of the above embodiments is satisfied. Further, in the main RAM 65, the manual operation content for executing the clear processing is different between the area corresponding to each of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 and the other areas. Good. Further, the function of the management IC 66 may be performed by the sound emission control device 81.

  (9) When new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the first to fourteenth embodiments, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored without being deleted, while the calculation is performed. Various parameters stored in the result memory 131 may be deleted. This makes it possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before the setting is performed after the setting of the setting is newly performed. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (10) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the setting value update process), If the setting value is not changed before and after the setting, the clearing process of the history memory 117 may not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the history information of the history memory 117 from being erased even though the setting value has not been changed.

  In this configuration, the area for storing the set value in the main side RAM 65 is not subject to “0” clear even if the clear process (step S117) is executed, the set value update process ( Before and after step S118), the main CPU 63 can specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the main CPU 63 identifies that the setting value is not changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the processing for recognition of setting update is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed, the management CPU 112 may output a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the processing for setting update recognition is executed.

  Also, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether the set value has been changed. In this case, when the management side CPU 112 specifies that the setting value is not changed, the clearing process of the history memory 117 is not performed, and the management side CPU 112 specifies that the setting value is changed. In this case, it is possible to execute the process of clearing the history memory 117.

  (11) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the setting value update process), If the setting value is not changed before and after setting, calculation processing of various parameters may not be executed with new setting of the setting state as a trigger. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated at the timing of new setting of the setting state, even though the setting value has not been changed.

  In this configuration, the area for storing the set value in the main side RAM 65 is not subject to “0” clear even if the clear process (step S117) is executed, the set value update process ( Before and after step S118), the main CPU 63 can specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the main CPU 63 identifies that the setting value is not changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the processing for recognition of setting update is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed, the management CPU 112 may output a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the processing for setting update recognition is executed.

  Also, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether the set value has been changed. In this case, when it is specified that the setting value is not changed in the management side CPU 112, calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state is not performed, and the setting is made in the management side CPU 112. When it is specified that the value has been changed, it becomes possible to execute the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state.

  (12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters are calculated in various calculation processing (step S1807) at that time. At the same time, various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171, and The information stored in the result memory 131 may be cleared to “0”. In this case, since it is not necessary to calculate various parameters under the condition that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171 early. Become.

  (13) In the third to fifth embodiments, the contents of the various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 are subjected to a predetermined display start operation. It may be configured to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or another display device. For the predetermined display start operation, a dedicated operation unit may be operated, or a predetermined dedicated operation may be performed on the operation unit for performing another operation. Thus, various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171 can be easily confirmed.

  (14) Although the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 are all configured to store history information (or ball entry history), The configuration is such that only part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the storage target of history information. It may be For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. It is good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the ball entry unit for which history information is to be stored.

  (15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to the ball entry result of the gaming ball in correspondence with each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Although 118a to 118c are set as the configuration, the present invention is not limited to this, and information corresponding to the ball entry results for the same type of ball entry portion has a plurality of the same type of ball entry portions. Even if there is a configuration in which there are a plurality of ball entry detection sensors in accordance with that, it may be configured to be transmitted as one type of information. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be reduced.

  (16) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is for management from the main CPU 63. The configuration to be transmitted to the IC 66 is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute the process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, the processing load of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (17) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, from the main CPU 63 of the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o, the management IC 66 Transmission to the main CPU 63 is started when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can be bi-directionally communicated, and used for management The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of correspondence information is received from the IC 66. In this case, the correspondence relationship memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of the operating power is stopped, the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores and holds the same. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of transmitting the correspondence information.

  (18) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, from the main CPU 63 of the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o, the management IC 66 Although the configuration is such that transmission to the target is performed using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information on detection results of the respective ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the correspondence relationship A dedicated signal path for transmitting information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 by the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

  (19) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, while the information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, the information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63, but is limited thereto However, the information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters may be performed. By transmitting a command corresponding to the content of the parameter to the voice emission control device 81, notification corresponding to the content of various parameters is executed using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It may be configured to

  (20) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 is based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters may be calculated, and the contents of the calculated various parameters may be notified using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball entry mode of the game balls in the game area PA on the business day immediately before the start of the business of the game hall was normal. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (21) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the first to fourteenth embodiments are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 until the prohibition release operation is performed. The game may not be started at the same time. For example, the configuration may be such that the game ball may not be launched, or may be configured such that each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a is disabled, and the first operation opening Even if a winning is generated in the 33 or the second operation port 34, the success or failure determination process may not be executed. In addition, as the prohibition release operation, the power of the pachinko machine 10 may be turned on again while the reset button 68c is pressed, and it is possible to operate when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11 It is good also as operation of the operation means which becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being performed as it is in a situation where the ball entry mode of the game balls of the game area PA is an abnormal mode. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game from being performed as it is in a situation where the occurrence frequency of the open / close execution mode is an abnormal mode. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (22) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is not It may be configured not to be executed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. In this case, the history information is read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the operator of the reading operation performs calculation of various parameters using the read history information. The external device may be configured to execute calculations of various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (23) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 is provided with a power supply separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 In the above, it may be possible to calculate various parameters using history information and output information of history information or various parameters. This makes it possible to read history information and various parameters with an external device even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

  (24) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the reading terminal 68d used to read a program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters by an external device. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and terminals used for reading history information or various parameters by an external device may be terminals 68d for reading a program from the main side ROM 64. It may be configured separately. In this case, terminals used to read history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

  (25) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 are limited to the configuration provided as a non-volatile storage unit such as a flash memory. For example, any one of these memories 116, 117, 131 is provided as volatile storage means requiring supply of power for storing and holding information, and backup power is supplied to the memory, Information may be stored and held even if the supply of operation power to the CPU 63 is stopped. In this case, a backup power device dedicated to the memory may be provided, and the backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power / fire control device 78 supplying the backup power to the main RAM 65. It is also good.

  (26) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 includes the management CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and based on the program and data stored in the management ROM 113, storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters The configuration to be executed is not limited, and a configuration may be employed in which a hard circuit designed to have these functions is formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, for example, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that the game ball has been detected by the detection sensor 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, specifically, in the case of the first embodiment. The correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffer having received the signal is stored from the correspondence relationship memory 116 in the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that point is stored in the history memory 117. Do. Further, for example, in the case of the sixth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that the game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. Further, when the operation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as the calculation result and externally outputs history information.

  (27) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, or may be provided as separate substrates, and another control device It is good also as composition provided as.

  (28) While entering the game ball into the out port 24a, the number of balls is measured, while the number of the game balls such as the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 The history information including the RTC information may be stored with regard to the payout of the winning balls and the entering of the bonus trigger into the ball receiving portion serving as a trigger of the determination processing. Thereby, while making it possible to extract the ball game history of the game ball to the bonus opportunity ball entering unit, it is possible to calculate the ball entering frequency of the game ball to each bonus opportunity ball entering unit with respect to the total discharged number of game balls Become.

  (29) A configuration may be adopted in which events other than those in the above embodiments are included as predetermined events that trigger history information to be stored. For example, the tank 75 may be configured to store at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a is full, the timing when the full condition was started, and the timing when the full condition was canceled, as history information. The payout device 76 may be in an abnormal state in which at least one of the non-ball state, the timing when the non-ball state is started, and the timing when the non-ball state is released may be stored as history information. Alternatively, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is canceled may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

  (30) In the first embodiment, the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 to correspond to the output instruction signal. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration in which the sixteenth buffer 122 p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by the type identification command being transmitted from the main CPU 63. It may be Further, in the first embodiment, the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 is set in advance in the design stage of the management IC 66 to correspond to the set value update signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the fifteenth buffer 122o corresponds to the setting value update signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by the type identification command being transmitted from the main CPU 63. It is good also as composition. In this case, it is not necessary to set in advance in the management IC 66 the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p.

  (31) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when the management IC 66 is operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (32) The display device for displaying the setting value in the middle of updating in the setting value updating process is not limited to the display devices 201 to 204 for the first to fourth notification, and may be the symbol display device 41, It may be a dedicated display device. Further, the display device for displaying the setting value in the setting confirmation process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be a symbol display device 41, and a dedicated display device It may be

  (33) The operation unit operated to update the setting value in the setting value update process is not limited to the update button 68b, and may be the reset button 68c. In addition, positions corresponding to each of “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as rotational operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the turning operation is performed, and the setting key is inserted A set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the portion 68a may be set. In addition, the setting key insertion portion 68a can be rotated further than the ON position, and the setting value in the middle of updating is set to the next setting value each time the rotation operation exceeding the ON position is performed. The configuration may be updated.

  (34) In the first to tenth and fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are provided side by side, but they are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction. It may be configured to be arranged diagonally, or may be arranged to be vertically divided into two stages. In the above-described eleventh to fourteenth and twenty-second to forty-fourth embodiments, the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification are provided in a horizontal arrangement, but are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction. The configuration may be a configuration, a configuration in which the components are provided obliquely in parallel, or a configuration in which the components are provided in parallel so as to have two upper and lower stages. In the fifteenth to twenty first embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be used as display devices for displaying the management result of the game history.

  (35) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, history information used to calculate a parameter whose normal value changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as change target history information) And different pieces of history information (hereinafter referred to as non-variation target history information) used to calculate a parameter whose normal value does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are different areas in the history memory 117. It may be configured to be stored in In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the area for storing the history information of the variation target in the history memory 117 is “0”. On the other hand, an area where history information of non-variation target is stored in the history memory 117 may not be cleared to "0" while it is cleared. As a result, calculation of the parameter whose normal value fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately performed even after the change of the setting value, and the normal value does not fluctuate according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to improve the accuracy of calculation of parameters. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments.

  (36) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be designated in advance in the main RAM 65. Even in this case, the area corresponding to these stack areas 222 and 224 will be designated as the main side RAM 65 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, but the area is designated beyond the storage capacity of the area. When the storage processing of information is executed, information which is not originally scheduled will be written in an area which is not originally scheduled, so that the main RAM 65 may be cleared to "0".

  (37) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, when the clear process of the main side RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117) is executed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control Although “0” is cleared, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared “0”, but instead, the main RAM 65 clear processing (step S 105, In step S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". . Further, in the process of clearing the main RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232 and the high frequency Although the support mode counter area 233 is cleared to “0”, the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 can be protected.

  (38) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the operation for clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to “0”, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the non-specific control The operation for clearing the stack area 224 for specific control to “0” may be different from each other. For example, when the operation power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the update button 68b is When the operation power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be cleared to "0". Thereby, each information can be selectively erased. Further, in the configuration, when the operation power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating both the update button 68b and the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control Alternatively, all of the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be cleared to “0”. As a result, in the configuration in which selective erasing is possible as described above, it is possible to improve the workability in the case of collectively erasing the information of the areas 221 to 224.

  (39) In the fifteenth to eighteenth and twentieth embodiments, as in the nineteenth embodiment, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 at the start of processing corresponding to nonspecific control is a work for nonspecific control The configuration may be such that the saved information is restored to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control while being saved in the area 223. As a result, even if the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 can be varied when the process corresponding to non-specific control is started, the main side can be determined if the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. It is possible to restore the state of the stack pointer of the CPU 63 to the state before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  (40) A process for collecting game history information as a process corresponding to nonspecific control in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, a process of calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and Although the processing for notifying the calculation result is executed, only a part of the processing is executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control, and the other is executed as processing corresponding to specific control. It may be In addition to or instead of the processing for collecting game history information, the processing for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and the processing for notifying the calculation result, other than these processing The processing may be executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control. For example, at least one of the fraud monitoring and the notification of the monitoring result may be executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  (41) In the above fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is being executed by the main CPU 63, the flag register of the main CPU 63; Although both the stack pointer and the various registers are not saved in the main RAM 65, instead of this, the main CPU 63 is executing processing corresponding to non-specific control and processing corresponding to specific control. When returning, at least a part of information of the flag register, the stack pointer and the various registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65, and the saved information is re-started the processing corresponding to the nonspecific control. It may be configured to be returned to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63 in the case. This makes it possible to carry over and use the information of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to non-specific control.

  (42) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, various parameters are calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area is 6,000, but when the calculation is performed The total number of game balls may be more or less than 6000. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area is 60000. In this case, the storage capacity required to store the information on the game history is increased, but the information on the game history is stored in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 as in the above-mentioned twenty-first embodiment. With the storage configuration, it is possible to flexibly cope with the increase in the storage capacity.

  (43) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the sixty-first to sixty-eighth parameters are calculated as the management result of the game history. However, in addition to or instead of this, the thirty-first embodiment in the first embodiment. The parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter may be calculated.

  (44) When the process of setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly performed in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control In addition to the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be cleared to “0”. In this case, when the process of setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed anew or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency The support mode counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0".

  In addition, when the process of setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly performed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control Although the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to “0”, the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 can be protected.

  When the process of setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly performed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are “0 The work area 223 for non-specific control of what is cleared and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured not to be cleared to “0”. In this case, it is possible to protect the information stored in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224.

  Further, when the configuration of the above (43) is provided, the first process is performed when the process of setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly performed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. The history information for calculating the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter in the embodiment of the present invention is deleted, but the counter area 231 for normal use, the counter area 232 for open / close execution mode, the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode The calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

  (45) In the first to 54th embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is used to calculate various parameters, the game area PA is supplied. The total supply number of game balls may be used. In this case, for example, a detection sensor is provided so as to detect the game ball which is fired from the game ball emission mechanism 27 and reaches the game area PA, and the game ball supplied to the game area PA based on the detection result of the detection sensor. It may be configured to measure the number. In this configuration, since it is not necessary to measure the number of gaming balls discharged from the out port 24a, the out port detection sensor 48a may not be provided.

  (46) In the fifteenth to fifty-fourth embodiments, at least a part of the information of the various registers and the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the stack area 222 for specific control or the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It may be configured to be saved by a load instruction. In this case, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 at the time of saving the information to the stack areas 222 and 224. Further, the information saved in the stack areas 222 and 224 may be returned to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction. Also in this case, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning the information from the stack areas 222 and 224.

  (47) When the setting value update process is performed in each of the above-described embodiments, the corresponding notification may be performed by any of the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. As a result, the game hall manager can clearly understand that the setting value update process is being performed.

  (48) The main RAM 65 may store a history of setting values being newly set in the above embodiments. Further, a history of setting values being newly set may be stored in the RAM provided in the sound emission control device 81. In this case, a command including information on the setting value set in the setting value update process is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control apparatus 81 every time the setting value update process is completed, and the sound emission control apparatus 81 is configured to cumulatively store information indicating that the setting value is newly set and information indicating the setting value at that time in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 each time the command is received. In the configuration, when a predetermined operation is performed, the setting display history of the setting values stored cumulatively in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  (49) In each of the above embodiments, when the set value is newly set in the set value update process, the information indicating the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out stored in the payout control device 77 is not deleted. However, instead of this, information indicating the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out may be deleted. Further, if the setting value has not been changed although the setting value update process has been executed, the information indicating the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out is not deleted, and the setting date is changed if the setting value is changed. The information indicating the number of game balls may be deleted.

  (50) In the above embodiments, when the set value update process is executed but the set value is not changed, the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 are not cleared to "0", and the set value is not changed. When changed, at least a part of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 may be cleared to "0". For example, when the set value is changed, an area other than the set value counter may be cleared to “0” in the work area 221 for specific control.

  (51) In the above-described twenty-second to fifty-fourth embodiments, even if the main CPU 63 is executing processing for confirming the set value in the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 87), it is in the gaming profit The movement of the movable object involved may be continued. For example, V zone and non-V zone are provided in the ball entering means capable of entering the ball in the opening / closing execution mode and the game ball entered in the ball entering means is distributed to any one of the V zone and the non-V zone In the configuration provided with the distributing member, the operation of the distributing member may be continued even when the process for confirming the setting value is performed in the setting confirmation process. In this case, it is possible to improperly generate a situation where the process for confirming the setting value is executed in the setting confirmation process and stop the operation of the distributing member, thereby making it impossible. It should be noted that, as a movable object whose operation is continued even in a situation where a process for confirming a set value is executed in the process for setting confirmation, the ball entered the ball entering means as well as the distributing member. The game ball to any of an advantage opening which will generate a round game after that a game ball enters a ball, and an outlet which discharges the game ball which entered the ball entering means without entering a advantage port. The distribution member which distributes can be considered.

  (52) In the twenty-second to fifty-fourth embodiments, at least one of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be a monitoring target of information abnormality. In this case, even if it is identified that an information error has occurred in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area By setting the configuration in which 224 is not cleared to “0”, it is possible not to generate a situation in which non-specific control work area 223 and non-specific control stack area 224 are cleared to “0” based on the occurrence of an information error. It is possible to

  (53) In the above twenty-second to fifty-fourth embodiments, the information abnormality is present in the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224 It may be configured that the monitoring of whether or not occurring is all executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, the configuration may be configured such that all the processing for clearing each of the areas 221 to 224 in the case where an information abnormality occurs is executed in processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  (54) In each of the above embodiments, the main RAM 65 needs power supply to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The main RAM 65 may be a non-volatile memory that does not require power supply for storing and holding information.

  (55) In the various clear processes of the main RAM 65 in each of the above embodiments, the target area is initialized by executing the process of clearing "0" to the target area of the main RAM 65 and the process of initializing it. Instead of the above, the target area may be initialized by executing the process of initialization without executing the process of clearing "0".

  (56) When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in each of the above embodiments, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON, setting value update processing is executed without requiring any other operation. It may be configured as Further, in place of the setting key insertion portion 68a which is turned ON / OFF by the setting key, a setting switch which is directly turned ON / OFF by hand may be provided. In addition, when the setting key insertion portion 68a is not provided and the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting value is set without requiring another operation when the reset button 68c is pressed. The update process may be executed. In this case, the cover member may be provided so as to be able to be switched between the closed state covering the reset button 68c and the open state not covering the lock button 68c. The locking device locks the cover member in the closed state. May be provided.

  (57) The configuration in which the setting value being selected is finalized and the setting value updating process is ended when the state where the setting key insertion unit 68a is operated to the OFF position in the setting value updating process is held for a predetermined period. It may be In addition, when the end reference period (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the start of the setting value update process, the setting value being selected may be automatically determined and the setting value update process may be terminated. In addition, in the setting value update process, when the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed and held over an end reference period (for example, 10 seconds) or more, the setting value being selected is decided and the setting value update process is ended. It is good also as composition.

  (58) The setting key insertion portion 68a can be turned further than the ON position, and the setting value in the middle of updating is the setting value of the next order each time the turning operation beyond the ON position is performed In the configuration to be updated, the setting confirmation process is started which enables the confirmation of the set value when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is operated to the ON position. The setting confirmation process may be terminated when the setting key insertion unit 68a is operated to the OFF position. In addition, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the update button 68 b or the reset button 68 c is pressed, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the setting value is started. The configuration confirmation process may be terminated when the pressing operation is released. In addition, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly turned on and off by hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion unit 68a that is turned on and off by the setting key, the setting switch is mainly turned on. When the supply of the operating power to the CPU 63 is started, the setting confirmation process enabling confirmation of the setting value is started, and the setting switch is turned off or turned on after the turning off. The configuration confirmation process may be terminated. In addition, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly turned on and off by hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion unit 68a that is turned on and off by the setting key, the setting switch is mainly turned on. The configuration confirmation process for enabling confirmation of the setting value when the supply of operation power to the CPU 63 is started is started, and the configuration confirmation process is ended when the reset button 68 c is pressed. It is also good.

  (59) When the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is performed in each of the above-described embodiments, an image corresponding to the procedure may be performed by the symbol display device 41. The voice corresponding to the procedure may be output from the speaker unit 54. For example, in the set value update process in the thirty-third embodiment, the set value is changed by one step by pressing the reset button 68c, and the set value update process ends by turning the set key insertion unit 68a OFF. It may be configured to be notified that it is done. This makes it easy to update the setting value. In addition, since the display control of the symbol display device 41 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the sound emission control device 81, when the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is started, the corresponding command is When the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is sent from the main CPU 63, the corresponding command needs to be sent from the main CPU 63.

  (60) In each of the above embodiments, the display for check of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not ended when the initial check period has elapsed, but for ending the display for check. The check display may be continued until the operation is performed. As the operation for ending the operation, for example, the reset button 68c may be operated regardless of whether any one of the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process is being performed, and an operation other than the reset button 68c. The unit may be operated. In this case, the check display is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to check the base value or the setting value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the base value or the setting value after confirming whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. In addition, since the display for check is ended based on the operation of the operation unit, the display for check can be ended at a desired timing.

  (61) The first to fourth notification display devices when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated regardless of whether or not the supply of operation power is started in each of the above embodiments. The display for check of 201 to 204 may be started. In this case, it is possible to start the display for check at a desired timing when checking the base value or the setting value. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be ended when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, and the above-described predetermined operation unit or another operation operated for starting the check display may be performed. The check display may be ended when the operation unit is operated.

  (62) In the above embodiments, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c such as the update button 68b is operated, the first to fourth notification If the display for check of the display devices 201 to 204 is started and the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started without operating the specific operation unit, the display for check may not be started. . In this case, in the configuration in which the check display is performed in response to the start of the supply of the operating power, it is possible to select whether or not to start the check display by the operation of the game hall manager.

  (63) In the above embodiments, the base value is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state, and the gaming machine body is not displayed. When it is specified based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 that the state 12 is in the open state, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may display the base value. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the display for check of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started first, and thereafter, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The base value may be displayed at 204. Thereby, when confirming a base value, it becomes possible to confirm whether the 1st-4th display apparatuses 201-204 are normal before that. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be ended when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, and the above-described predetermined operation unit or another operation operated for starting the check display may be performed. The check display may be ended when the operation unit is operated.

  (64) In the above embodiments, when the main processing is started in a state where the condition for executing the setting confirmation processing is satisfied, the display for checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Alternatively, the display for check may be started when the main process is started in a state where the condition for executing the process for setting confirmation is not satisfied. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display for check from being performed when it is determined that the confirmation of the setting value is to be performed.

  (65) In the above embodiments, when the main process is started in a state where the condition for executing the set value update process is satisfied, the display for checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Alternatively, the display for check may be started when the main processing is started in a state where the condition for executing the setting value update processing is not satisfied. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display for check from being performed when it is determined that the update of the setting value is to be performed.

  (66) The first to fourth notifications when the main processing is started in a state where one of the condition for executing the setting confirmation process and the condition for executing the setting value update process is satisfied in each of the above embodiments. When the main processing is started in a state in which both the condition under which the processing for setting confirmation is executed and the condition under which the setting value updating processing is executed are not satisfied without the display for checking of the display devices 201 to 204 being started. May be configured to start the check display. In this case, when it is determined that the confirmation of the set value or the update of the set value is performed, it is possible to prevent the display for check from being performed.

  (67) In the check display in each of the above embodiments, the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the light emission state, but the first to fourth The display segments 321 to 324 in each of the notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to blink. In the check display, each of the display segments 321 to 324 sequentially emits light one by one or a part of them in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the range of the initial check period The display segments 321 to 324 may be configured to emit light at least once.

  (68) In each of the above embodiments, the process of causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display is not performed as the process corresponding to the specific control, but corresponds to the nonspecific control. It may be configured to be executed as processing.

  (69) In the above embodiments, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may not be performed by the main CPU 63, but may be performed by a dedicated control unit. 81 may be performed by the display control device 82, or may be performed by the display control device 82. In this case, when the base values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject. When the set values are displayed in the fourth to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the set values to be notified are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject. In addition, when the process at the time of start of supply of the operating power is executed in the main CPU 63, the first to fourth display devices for notification 201 to 204 are in the situation where the process at the time of start of supply of the operating power is performed. Information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject so that the check display is started.

  (70) In each of the above embodiments, when the game stop flag is set to “1” and the progress of the game is stopped because “1” is not set to the power failure flag or the checksum does not match, Each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be configured to emit light in the same manner as the check display in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, or may be configured to blink each display segment 321 to 324. Good.

  (71) Not only when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in each of the above embodiments, but also when the setting change trigger occurs after the process when the supply of the operating power is started is completed. The update process may be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the power-off operation and the on-operation of the pachinko machine 10 from being required at the start of the setting value update process.

  (72) In each of the above-described embodiments, the “setting change operation” and the “setting confirmation operation” may have a reverse relationship. That is, when the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, it is identified that the "setting confirmation operation" is being performed, and the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting is performed. When the key insertion unit 68a is turned on, it may be specified that the “setting change operation” is performed. Further, the configuration may be such that the operation does not overlap at all between the “setting change operation” and the “setting confirmation operation”.

  (73) The setting value update process is started based on the start of the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 in the situation where the reset button 68c is pressed in each of the above embodiments, and the setting value update process The setting value of the selection target is not changed each time the reset button 68c is pressed in the operation, but the operation target operated to start the setting value update processing and the selection target in the setting value update processing The operation unit operated to change the setting value of may not match.

  (74) The display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 The device 82 may control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one function of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control unit 60, and both functions of both control units may be integrated into the main control unit 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (75) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which a motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when gaming balls enter a specific area of a special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, and the like.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

  In the case of applying the present invention to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, history information of a result of lottery processing of a combination executed when starting one game based on operation of a start lever. It is also possible to store as and calculate the actual winning probability of each combination by using the history information, and when transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information, and the history The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of stay games in the special game state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device, or a notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself. In addition, a setting state of a plurality of stages may be present as in “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and the winning probability in the lottery process of the winning combination may be varied according to the setting state. In this case, the configuration in each of the above embodiments may be applied to handling of history information when setting of a setting state is newly set or when setting values are changed, calculation of various parameters, and handling of repeated change. .

  (76) The characteristic configurations of the first to 54th embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic of the thirtieth embodiment The configuration may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the 45th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 2nd embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 4th embodiment, and the 8th embodiment , The characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the thirty-third embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the forty-third embodiment The characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fifteenth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the twenty first embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twenty first embodiment The characteristic configuration, the characteristic configuration of the above-mentioned thirty-fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment And the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the twenty-second embodiment, and the thirty-fifth The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the thirty-ninth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fifty-third embodiment may be combined. The configuration of the other embodiment may be applied in any combination to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to fifty-fourth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) to store history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (memory for history 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
An information erasing unit that erases at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit, using at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set; Function of executing the process of step S1809 in the management side CPU112, function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management side CPU112 in the fifth embodiment, and step S2306 to step in the management side CPU112 in the sixth embodiment A function of executing the process of S2308, and in the eighth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2608 in the management CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Also, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding thereto is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

  In this case, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit is erased, with at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used is newly set. This makes it possible to adjust the content of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be suitably managed in the situation after the new setting of the setting value to be used is performed. .

Feature A2. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entering means;
An assignment determination unit (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
Privilege giving means (step in main side CPU 63) for giving a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the giving information in the giving determination, resulting in the giving correspondence result. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to the feature A1, wherein the probability of becoming the result of the assignment corresponding to the assignment determination fluctuates according to the setting value.

  According to the feature A2, it is possible to change the probability of becoming an assigned correspondence result according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature A1, it is possible to preferably manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation after the probability of becoming the addition correspondence result is changed. It is possible to adjust the content.

  Feature A3. The information erasing means erases all the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set. The gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2.

  According to the feature A3, the setting of the setting value to be used is performed by erasing all the history information stored in the history storage means when the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed. It is possible to specify the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event on the basis of the timing at which a new event occurred.

  Feature A4. The information erasing means erases part of the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set. A game machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is left.

  According to the feature A4, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information unnecessary for managing the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event thereafter is erased, and the management of the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event thereafter is performed. It becomes possible to leave necessary historical information. This makes it possible to preferably manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event after the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed.

Feature A5. In the history information stored in the history storage means, first history information (the history indicating that the open / close execution mode has occurred) in which the occurrence probability of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information fluctuates according to the set value Information) and second history information (history information indicating that the game ball has been discharged from the game area PA) which does not change according to the set value,
The information erasing means erases the first history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set. The gaming machine according to the feature A4, wherein the second history information stored in the history storage means is left.

  According to the feature A5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the first history information corresponding to the predetermined event whose occurrence probability fluctuates according to the setting value is erased, and the occurrence probability is the setting value The second history information corresponding to the predetermined event which does not change according to the second event information is not deleted. Thereby, when the first history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed is taken over after the setting of the setting value is newly performed, the occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the first history information The first history information, which is not preferable in specifying the frequency, can be deleted when the setting of the setting value is newly performed. On the other hand, the second history information is referred to when specifying the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information by not deleting even if the setting of the setting value to be used is newly set. Since a large number of pieces of second history information can be secured, it is possible to accurately specify the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Feature A6. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entering means;
An assignment determination unit (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
Privilege giving means (step in main side CPU 63) for giving a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the giving information in the giving determination, resulting in the giving correspondence result. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
According to the setting value, the probability that the assignment response result is obtained in the assignment determination changes.
The first history information includes information corresponding to the provision of the benefit,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to the game ball being ejected from the gaming area in a predetermined manner.

  According to the feature A6, since the provision probability of the benefit changes according to the setting value, the first history information is erased when the setting value to be used is newly set. Then, it becomes possible to specify the grant frequency of the benefit under the condition of the newly set setting value. On the other hand, since the frequency at which the game ball is discharged from the game area does not change according to the set value, the second history information is not erased even if the set value to be used is newly set, It becomes possible to accurately specify the frequency at which the game balls are discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

  Feature A7. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the information erasing means stores at least the history information when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that a part is erased.

  According to the feature A7, when predetermined history information is not stored in the history storage means for a predetermined amount or more, the history information is not deleted even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed. Thereby, even if new setting of the setting value is repeated under the situation where the game is not performed, it is possible to prevent the deletion of the history information of the history storage means to be repeated.

  Feature A8. Responding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set. Information deriving means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management CPU 112). A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A8, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means has the configuration of the feature A1 and at least one condition that new setting of the setting value to be used is performed. In the configuration to be erased, an aspect corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using history information stored in history storage means in response to new setting of a setting value to be used being performed. Information is derived. Thereby, even if at least a part of the history information is erased when the setting value is changed, the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed is grasped It is possible to

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to the feature A8, further comprising: aspect information storage means (another storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature A9, the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means in response to the new setting of the setting value to be used being performed. Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. As a result, even if the setting value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the mode information storage means can store a plurality of the mode information.

  According to the feature A10, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage unit, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped based on the timing when the new setting of the setting value is performed. It is possible to In addition, even if new setting of setting values is repeated under a situation where a game is not performed, the mode information derived from the history information of the situation where a game is substantially performed is a mode information storage means It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Characteristics A11. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine executes special processing when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means exceeds the predetermined number under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, the management CPU 112) The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, comprising a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing, and in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature A11, the setting value is set under the situation where the game is not performed so that the mode information derived using the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played is not left in the mode information storage means If the new setting of is repeated, special processing is performed on it. This makes it possible to cope with the act.

  Feature A12. The game machine according to any one of the features A8 to A11, wherein the information deriving means derives the aspect information when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means. .

  According to the feature A12, since the mode information is derived when the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means by a predetermined amount or more, the mode information can be prevented from being derived unnecessarily .

  Feature A13. The information erasing unit erases the history information after setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed until a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit. Without the setting value being set by the setting means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means and when the predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means before the setting value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A12, wherein the history information stored in the history storage unit is erased.

  According to the feature A13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, storage is performed before the setting is performed even if new setting of the setting value to be used is performed. The history information that has been done is not deleted. As a result, even if new setting of the setting value is performed, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period.

Feature A14. The history storage means includes a first history storage means (first history memory 191) and a second history storage means (second history memory 192).
The history storage execution means is
When the predetermined event occurs in a predetermined period from the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means to the satisfaction of the cancellation condition, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the first history storing means, and A unit (function of executing the process of step S2604 in the management side CPU 112) stored in both of the second history storage unit;
Means for storing the corresponding history information on the side set as a storage target among the first history storage means and the second history storage means when the predetermined event occurs in a period other than the predetermined period (Function to execute the processing of step S2603 in the management side CPU 112),
Equipped with
The information erasing means erases the history information stored on the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, which has been set to the storage target, when the release condition is satisfied. A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed, the setting is stored before the setting is performed. The history information is not deleted. As a result, even if new setting of the setting value is performed, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period. In addition, it is possible to cause the effect to be generated only by appropriately changing the history storage unit to be the storage target of the history information between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit.

  Feature A15. Of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target among the first history storage means A game machine according to feature A14, characterized by comprising information deriving means (function to execute the process of step S2703 in the management side CPU 112).

  According to the feature A15, even if history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit by performing new setting of the setting value, an aspect using the history information It is possible to appropriately derive information.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A15, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) to store history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (memory for history 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
Equipped with
The predetermined history information stored in the history storage unit before the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set is the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit. A game machine characterized by being stored and held in the history storage means even after the game.

  According to the feature B1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Also, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding thereto is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

  In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage unit is stored without being deleted. Thus, even if the setting value to be used is set, history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history storage means, and accumulated in the history storage means over a long period of time. It becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history by using the history information.

  Feature B2. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history storage executing means stores the history information in the history storage means corresponding to the setting value when the setting value is set. The game according to the feature B1, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step S1307 in the management CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2408 in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. Machine.

  According to the feature B2, even if setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed, setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed in the configuration in which the history information is stored without being deleted. History information corresponding to each is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to distinguish between history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed and history information after the setting.

  Feature B3. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the storage execution means at the time of setting causes the history storage means to store information corresponding to the set value as the history information. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that

  According to the feature B3, it becomes possible to specify the content of the setting value set in the past by referring to the history information.

  Feature B4. The history storage means is provided with a plurality of correspondence history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

  According to the feature B4, since the correspondence history storage unit is provided in correspondence with each of the set values, it is possible to store history information separately for each set value.

  Feature B5. A means for setting the correspondence history storage means corresponding to the set value for which the setting has been performed as a storage object of the history information thereafter when the setting value to be used by the setting means is set (management side The gaming machine according to the feature B4, comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2406 in the CPU 112).

  According to the feature B5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the correspondence history storage unit corresponding to the setting value is to be the storage object of the history information thereafter, and therefore, for each setting value. It is possible to distinguish and store history information.

  Feature B6. Information deriving means (display output processing in the management side CPU 112) for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the correspondence history storage means which is the storage object The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that it has a function of performing

  According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which the history information is stored separately for each set value, it becomes possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the currently set set value.

Feature B7. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entering means;
An assignment determination unit (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
Privilege giving means (step in main side CPU 63) for giving a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the giving information in the giving determination, resulting in the giving correspondence result. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B6, wherein the probability that the assignment response result is obtained in the assignment determination fluctuates according to the setting value.

  According to the feature B7, it is possible to change the probability of becoming an assigned correspondence result according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

  Note that for the configuration of the features B1 to B7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) to store history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (memory for history 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
After setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the setting unit does not erase the history information at least until the history storage unit stores a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information. (Function to execute the processing of step S2506 and step S2605 to step S2609 in the management side CPU 112),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Also, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding thereto is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

  In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed, it is stored before the setting is performed. The history information is not deleted. As a result, even if new setting of the setting value is performed, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period.

  Feature C2. The post-setting handling unit sets the setting value when the predetermined amount of history information is stored in the history storage unit after the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set. The gaming machine according to the feature C1, wherein the history information stored in the history storage unit is erased before the second event is performed.

  According to the feature C2, when a specific amount of history information is stored in the history storage means, which makes it possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period after the new setting of the setting value is performed. The history information stored in the history storage means before the new setting of the setting value is performed is erased. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary history information from being continuously stored in the history storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage means includes a first history storage means (first history memory 191) and a second history storage means (second history memory 192).
The history storage execution means is
A means for storing the corresponding history information on the side set as the storage target among the first history storage means and the second history storage means when the predetermined event occurs (step S2603 in the management CPU 112) Function to execute the processing of
After the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set, the predetermined history information is set to the side not set as the storage target among the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit. Means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means until the predetermined amount or more is stored (management side CPU 112 A function of executing the process of step S2604 in
Equipped with
The post-setting handling means is
After the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set, the predetermined history information is stored in the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit which is not set as the storage target. A unit for changing the storage target between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit when the specific amount or more is stored (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the management CPU 112);
After the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set, the predetermined history information is stored in the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit which is not set as the storage target. A means for deleting the history information of the first history storage means and the second history storage means on the side which has been set as the storage object before the specific amount is stored (step S2608 in the management CPU 112 Function to execute the processing of
A game machine according to feature C1 or C2, comprising:

  According to the feature C3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, the setting is stored before the setting is performed. The history information is not deleted. As a result, even if new setting of the setting value is performed, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the predetermined period. In addition, it is possible to cause the effect to be generated only by appropriately changing the history storage unit to be the storage target of the history information between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit.

  Feature C4. Of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target among the first history storage means The gaming machine according to the feature C3, characterized in that it comprises information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management side CPU 112).

  According to the feature C4, an aspect using history information even if history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means by performing new setting of setting values It is possible to appropriately derive information.

Feature C5. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entering means;
An assignment determination unit (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
Privilege giving means (step in main side CPU 63) for giving a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the giving information in the giving determination, resulting in the giving correspondence result. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the probability that the result of the assignment corresponding to the assignment determination result is obtained according to the setting value.

  According to the feature C5, it is possible to change the probability of becoming an assigned correspondence result according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

  Note that for the configuration of the features C1 to C5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
Special execution means (in the third embodiment, monitoring of repetitive change in the management side CPU 112) which executes special processing with at least one condition that setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is executed in a special situation A function to execute processing, a function to execute repeated change monitoring processing in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, a function to make a negative determination in the step S2106 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, the special processing is performed on the condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used has been executed in the special situation as at least one condition. This makes it possible to cope with the case where a new setting of the setting value is made under unfavorable conditions.

  Feature D2. The special execution means executes the special processing on the condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed a specific number of times or more in the special situation as a condition D1. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature D2, even if new setting of the setting value to be used in the special situation is performed, the special process is not performed if the number of times of execution is less than the specific number. This makes it possible to prevent the special processing from being executed even if the authorized worker executes new setting of the setting value less than the specified number of times in the special situation.

  Feature D3. The special execution means sets the setting value to be used by the setting means as the special condition, and the setting value to be used by the setting means. In the situation where the game above the predetermined standard is not performed after the game is performed, the special process is performed under the condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is executed. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature D3, when a new setting of the set value to be used is performed in a situation where no game is played or a game is not actually played, a special process is executed, If the action is taken, it will be possible to cope with it.

  Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution unit executes a process for notification as the special process.

  According to the feature D4, the process for notification is performed with at least one condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation. This makes it possible to prompt the user to cope with the case where a new setting of the setting value is made under unfavorable conditions.

Feature D5. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) to store history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (memory for history 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
Responding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set. Information deriving means for deriving mode information (in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4, comprising:

  According to the feature D5, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

  In this case, with the new setting of the setting value to be used as a trigger, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is It is derived. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

  Feature D6. The special execution unit derives the mode information by the information deriving unit as the special processing, at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is executed in the special situation. The gaming machine according to Feature D5, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by not performing.

  According to the feature D6, even if a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed, the mode information is not derived if the setting is performed in an unfavorable situation. This makes it possible to prevent the aspect information from being derived unnecessarily.

  Feature D7. A game machine according to feature D5 or D6, comprising: aspect information storage means (another storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means.

  According to the feature D7, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means in response to the new setting of the setting value to be used being performed. Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. As a result, even if the setting value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature D8. The gaming machine according to the feature D7, wherein the mode information storage means can store a plurality of the mode information.

  According to the feature D8, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage unit, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped based on the timing when the new setting of the setting value is performed. It is possible to In addition, even if new setting of setting values is repeated under a situation where a game is not performed, the mode information derived from the history information of the situation where a game is substantially performed is a mode information storage means It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature D9. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The special execution unit is configured to execute the special processing when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit has occurred more than the predetermined number in the special situation. Or the gaming machine described in D8.

  According to the feature D9, the setting value is set under the situation where the game is not performed so that the mode information derived using the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played is not left in the mode information storage means If the new setting of is repeated, special processing is performed on it. This makes it possible to cope with the act.

Feature D10. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entering means;
An assignment determination unit (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
Privilege giving means (step in main side CPU 63) for giving a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the giving information in the giving determination, resulting in the giving correspondence result. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D9, wherein the probability that the assignment correspondence result is obtained in the assignment determination fluctuates according to the setting value.

  According to the feature D10, it is possible to change the probability of becoming an assigned correspondence result according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

  Note that for the configuration of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) to store history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (memory for history 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
Responding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set. Information deriving means for deriving mode information (in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Also, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding thereto is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

  In this case, with the new setting of the setting value to be used as a trigger, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is It is derived. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to the feature E1, further comprising: aspect information storage means (another storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature E2, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means triggered by the new setting of the setting value to be used. Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. As a result, even if the setting value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the setting value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature E3. The game machine according to Feature E2, wherein the mode information storage means can store a plurality of the mode information.

  According to the feature E3, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped based on the timing when the new setting of the setting value is performed. It is possible to In addition, even if new setting of setting values is repeated under a situation where a game is not performed, the mode information derived from the history information of the situation where a game is substantially performed is a mode information storage means It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in

Feature E4. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine executes special processing when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means exceeds the predetermined number under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, the management CPU 112) A game machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized in that it has a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing, and in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature E4, the setting value is set under a situation where the game is not performed so that the mode information derived using the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played is not left in the mode information storage means If the new setting of is repeated, special processing is performed on it. This makes it possible to cope with the act.

  Feature E5. The game machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4, wherein the information deriving means derives the aspect information when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means. .

  According to the feature E5, since the mode information is derived when the predetermined history information of the predetermined amount or more is stored in the history storage means, it is possible to prevent the mode information from being derived unnecessarily. Become.

Feature E6. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entering means;
An assignment determination unit (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
Privilege giving means (step in main side CPU 63) for giving a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the giving information in the giving determination, resulting in the giving correspondence result. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, wherein the probability that the assignment response result is obtained in the assignment determination fluctuates according to the setting value.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to change the probability of becoming an assigned correspondence result according to the setting value in a so-called pachinko machine.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature E1 to E6 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention of the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, and the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, management of the gaming machine needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entering means;
An assignment determination unit (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
Privilege giving means (step in main side CPU 63) for giving a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the giving information in the giving determination, resulting in the giving correspondence result. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
Equipped with
The assignment determination unit has a high probability mode and a low probability mode such that the probability of the assignment response result is relatively high and low as a mode of the assignment determination.
A game machine characterized in that the probability that the attainment result is obtained at least in the low probability mode fluctuates according to the setting value.

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to change the probability of becoming an assigned correspondence result at least in the low probability mode in accordance with the setting value in a so-called pachinko machine. This makes it possible to create an advantageous or disadvantageous situation with regard to the probability that an assigned response result will be obtained in the low probability mode even with a single gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to the feature F1, wherein the probability of being in the high probability mode is not changed according to the setting value.

  According to the feature F2, while the probability of becoming the addition correspondence result in the low probability mode is varied according to the setting value, the probability of becoming the addition correspondence result in the high probability mode is not varied according to the setting value By doing this, it is possible to limit the influence of setting values to the situation in the low probability mode.

Feature F3. There are multiple types of benefits,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the selection mode of the privilege does not change according to the setting value.

  According to the feature F3, while the probability of becoming an added correspondence result in the low probability mode is varied according to the set value, the effect of the set value is exerted by not changing the selection mode of the benefit according to the set value. Can be limited to the situation in low probability mode.

  Note that for the configurations of the features F1 to F3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) to store history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (memory for history 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
Information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 Function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and the function of executing the process S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third display devices 69a to 69c, the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c, and the first to third information display devices so that the display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means is performed In the 14th embodiment, a first information display control unit (a function for executing display processing in the management side CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Second information display control means (in the first to tenth embodiments, step S202 and step S208 in the main CPU 63) which performs display control of the information display means so that display corresponding to different information different from the mode information is performed. In the eleventh embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step S3101, step S3103 and step S3109 in the eleventh embodiment, and in the twelfth embodiment, step S3201, step S3202 and step S3204 in the main CPU 63. And a function of executing the process of step S3210, and in the thirteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process for displaying an abnormality in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived | led-out using the historical information memorize | stored in the historical memory means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the aspect information but also the display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

  Feature G2. A feature G1 is characterized in that a period in which a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed in the information display means and a period in which a display corresponding to the other information is performed in the information display means are distinguished. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G2, which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed in the information display means by grasping the situation in which the display is performed in the information display means It is possible to identify

  Feature G3. The second information display control means performs display control of the information display means so as to have a display mode different from the display mode in the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that it is performed.

  According to the feature G3, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed in the information display means. It becomes possible.

  Feature G4. Individual information display means capable of performing a plurality of types of display in each of the information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third display devices 69a to 69c, first to fourteenth items) The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3 comprising a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) in the embodiment.

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to perform display of various types of mode information by performing display corresponding to mode information using a plurality of individual information display means. In addition, since there are a plurality of individual information display means, the display mode can be largely different between the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and the case where the display corresponding to the other information is performed. .

  Feature G5. When the second information display control means performs the display corresponding to the separate information, a predetermined individual not to be in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b, and in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the first notification display device 201, the second notification A feature G4 is characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in the non-display state. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature G5, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. By this, it is clearly specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature G6. When the second information display control means performs the display corresponding to the separate information, a specific individual information display means (the first individual information display means is brought into a display state when the mode information is displayed among the plurality of individual information display means). In the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification The display device 204) for display.
When the display corresponding to the other information is performed, the display content of the specific individual information display means may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature G5.

  According to the feature G6, in the specific individual information display means, the display content which can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed can be displayed even when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. It becomes possible not to impose restrictions on the display content when the display corresponding to the information is performed. Also, even if the specific individual information display means is configured to have the same display content as described above, the display is not in the non-displayed state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed with the configuration of the feature G5. When the display corresponding to the separate information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state, so it is possible to specify which display is being performed in the plural individual information display means.

  Feature G7. The game machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the first information display control means causes each of the plurality of individual information display means to be in a display state when performing a display corresponding to the mode information.

  According to the feature G7, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and therefore, the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state. It becomes possible to distinguish clearly from the case where display is performed.

  Feature G8. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information in the information display means, and the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state also when changing the display of the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G7, wherein the gaming machine is not maintained.

  According to the feature G8, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are confirmed, it is specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed in the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

  Feature G9. The second information display control means is a specific individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, a third notification display device 69c, an eleventh and a twelfth information display means) of one of the plurality of individual information display means. In the fourth embodiment, the fourth notification display device 204) causes the display corresponding to the separate information to be performed, and the remaining individual information display means is made to be in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the feature G9, only one individual information display unit is in the display state when the display corresponding to the separate information is performed, so it is easy to grasp whether the display corresponding to the separate information is performed. Become.

Feature G10. The plurality of individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the specific individual information display means is present at an end of the plurality of individual information display means arranged in the predetermined direction in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature G10, since one individual information display means for performing display corresponding to another information is present at an end in a predetermined direction, it is grasped whether or not display corresponding to another information is performed. It becomes easy to do.

Feature G11. The first information display control means is an individual information display means for displaying the type which is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, 11th In the 14th to the 14th embodiments, a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202), and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means of the result display object which is a part of the above (in the first to tenth embodiments, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c, in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments, 3) A display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed is made to be displayed on the notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G5 to G10, wherein the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the individual information display means of the type display target.

  According to the feature G11, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display means for the type display object and the individual information display for the result display object is performed. In the means, display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed is performed. This makes it easy to grasp the mode information to be displayed. In this case, when the display corresponding to the separate information is performed, the individual information display means of the type display target is in the non-display state, and the non-display state of the type display corresponds to the separate information. It will be easier to understand if other information is displayed.

Feature G12. The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs predetermined display by a combination of unit light emitting units which are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. Configuration that can be
The second information display control means corresponds to the other information by setting a unit light emitting part that can be set to a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of unit light emitting parts. The display is performed, and the combination of the unit light emitting units, which is in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed, does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G11, which is to be combined.

  According to the feature G12, the display corresponding to the other information is performed by setting the unit light emitting unit that can be brought into the light emission state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, and the display corresponding to the other information is performed. It is possible to minimize the restriction on the contents of the display corresponding to the mode information in order to diversify the information. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the separate information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Thus, it becomes possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed by grasping the combination of the unit light emitting units in the light emitting state.

Feature G13. There are a plurality of display modes of the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
In the plurality of unit light emitting units, there is no unit light emitting unit that is not in the light emitting state even when all the displays corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes are performed. Machine.

  According to the feature G13, when display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light emitting unit in any combination is set to the light emitting state, so that the mode for achieving diversification of the display corresponding to the mode information It is possible to limit the content of the display corresponding to the information as much as possible.

Feature G14. The specific individual information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the thirteenth information display device as the information display means In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are provided,
When the second information display control means performs the display corresponding to the separate information, a predetermined individual not to be in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b, and in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the first notification display device 201, the second notification A feature G12 is characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in the non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in G13.

  According to the feature G14, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. By this, it is clearly specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature G15. The setting means (a function for executing the setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G14, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the other information to be performed in a situation where the set value can be changed.

  According to the feature G15, it is possible to combine the information display means in which the display corresponding to the mode information is performed as the display means for informing that the setting value can be changed.

  Feature G16. The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the second information display control means causes the display of information corresponding to the setting value currently selected as the display corresponding to the separate information.

  According to the feature G16, it is possible to combine the information display means in which the display corresponding to the mode information is performed as the display means for displaying the setting value during the change.

  Feature G17. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G16, wherein the second information display control means causes the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine to be performed as the display corresponding to the other information.

  According to the feature G17, the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the mode information can be used as the display means for performing the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

  Feature G18. The second information display control means is characterized in that, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the state where the abnormal state does not occur, the second information display control unit performs the display corresponding to the occurrence of the abnormal state. The gaming machine according to the feature G17.

  According to the feature G18, it becomes possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by confirming the information display means.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature G1 to G18. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) to store history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (memory for history 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
Information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 Function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and the function of executing the process S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third display devices 69a to 69c, the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c, and the first to third information display devices so that the display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means is performed In the 14th embodiment, a first information display control unit (a function for executing display processing in the management side CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Second information display control means (in the first to tenth embodiments, step S202 and step S208 in the main CPU 63) which performs display control of the information display means so that display corresponding to different information different from the mode information is performed. In the eleventh embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step S3101, step S3103 and step S3109 in the eleventh embodiment, and in the twelfth embodiment, step S3201, step S3202 and step S3204 in the main CPU 63. And a function of executing the process of step S3210, and in the thirteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process for displaying an abnormality in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs predetermined display by a combination of unit light emitting units which are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. Configuration that can be
The second information display control means corresponds to the other information by setting a unit light emitting part that can be set to a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of unit light emitting parts. The display is performed, and the combination of the unit light emitting units, which is in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed, does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is to be combined.

  According to the feature H1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived | led-out using the historical information memorize | stored in the historical memory means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the aspect information but also the display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

  In addition, when the display corresponding to other information is performed by setting the unit light emitting unit that can be brought into the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, diversification of the display corresponding to the mode information is achieved. It is possible to limit the content of the display corresponding to the form information as much as possible. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the separate information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Thus, it becomes possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed by grasping the combination of the unit light emitting units in the light emitting state.

Feature H2. There are a plurality of display modes of the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
In the plurality of unit light emitting units, there is no unit light emitting unit that is not in the light emitting state even when all the displays corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes are performed. Machine.

  According to the feature H2, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light emitting unit in any combination is set to the light emitting state, so that the mode for achieving diversification of the display corresponding to the mode information It is possible to limit the content of the display corresponding to the information as much as possible.

Feature H3. The specific individual information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the thirteenth information display device as the information display means In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are provided,
When the second information display control means performs the display corresponding to the separate information, a predetermined individual not to be in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b, and in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the first notification display device 201, the second notification A feature H1 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state Or the gaming machine described in H2.

  According to the feature H3, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the other information is performed. By this, it is clearly specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

  Feature H4. The game machine according to the feature H3, wherein the first information display control means causes each of the plurality of individual information display means to be in a display state when performing a display corresponding to the mode information.

  According to the feature H4, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and therefore, the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state. It becomes possible to distinguish clearly from the case where display is performed.

  Feature H5. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information in the information display means, and the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state also when changing the display of the mode information. The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, characterized in that it is not maintained.

  According to the feature H5, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are confirmed, it is specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the other information is performed in the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

Feature H6. The setting means (a function for executing the setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the second information display control means causes the display corresponding to the other information to be performed in a situation where the set value can be changed.

  According to the feature H6, it is possible to combine the information display means in which the display corresponding to the mode information is performed as the display means for informing that the setting value can be changed.

  Feature H7. The gaming machine according to the feature H6, wherein the second information display control means causes display of information corresponding to the setting value currently selected as display corresponding to the other information.

  According to the feature H7, it is possible to combine the information display means in which the display corresponding to the mode information is performed as the display means for displaying the setting value during the change.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature H1 to H7. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) to store history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (memory for history 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
Information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 Function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and the function of executing the process S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
First information display control means (management side) for controlling display of the information display means (the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed A function of executing processing for display in the CPU 112),
Second information display control means (a function for executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the information display means so that display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived | led-out using the historical information memorize | stored in the historical memory means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

  Feature I2. The second information display control means is characterized in that, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the state where the abnormal state does not occur, the second information display control unit performs the display corresponding to the occurrence of the abnormal state. The gaming machine according to feature I1.

  According to the feature I2, by confirming the information display means, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred.

  Feature I3. A feature I1 or I2 is characterized in that a period in which a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed in the information display means and a period in which a display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the information display means The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature I3, which one of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the information display means by grasping the situation in which the display is performed in the information display means It is possible to identify

  Feature I4. The second information display control means performs display control of the information display means so as to have a display mode different from the display mode in the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that it is performed.

  According to the feature I4, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the information display means. It becomes possible.

  Feature I5. A plurality of individual information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) capable of performing a plurality of types of display in each of the information display means. Features I1 to I4 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature I5, it is possible to perform display of various types of mode information by performing display corresponding to mode information using a plurality of individual information display means. In addition, since there are a plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to make the display mode largely different between the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and the case where the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. .

  Feature I6. When the second information display control means performs the display corresponding to the abnormal state, a predetermined individual not to be in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means A game machine according to Feature I5, characterized in that the information display means (the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) is brought into a non-display state.

  According to the feature I6, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. By this, it is clearly specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature I7. When the second information display control means performs the display corresponding to the abnormal state, a specific individual information display means (the first individual information display means is brought into a display state when the mode information is displayed among the plurality of individual information display means). 3) Display the notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204),
When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, the display content of the specific individual information display means may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature I6.

  According to the feature I7, in the specific individual information display means, the display content which can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed can be displayed even when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. It becomes possible not to impose restrictions on the display content when the display corresponding to the information is performed. Also, even if the specific individual information display means is configured to have the same display content as described above, it will not be in the non-displayed state if the display corresponding to the mode information is performed with the configuration of the feature I7. When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed when the predetermined individual information display means is displayed, the non-display state is established, so that it is possible to specify which display is being performed in a plurality of individual information display means.

  Feature I8. The game machine according to the feature I6 or I7, wherein the first information display control means causes each of the plurality of individual information display means to be in a display state when performing a display corresponding to the mode information.

  According to the feature I8, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and hence the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state. It becomes possible to distinguish clearly from the case where display is performed.

  Feature I9. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information in the information display means, and the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state also when changing the display of the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, wherein the gaming machine is not maintained.

  According to the feature I9, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are confirmed, it is specified which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature I1 to I9 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) to store history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (memory for history 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
Information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 Function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and the function of executing the process S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third display devices 69a to 69c, the first to third information display devices 69a to 69c, and the first to third information display devices so that the display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means is performed In the 14th embodiment, a first information display control unit (a function for executing display processing in the management side CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Equipped with
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means, and the information display means does not display even when the display corresponding to the mode information is changed A game machine characterized by not being maintained in a state.

  According to the feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived | led-out using the historical information memorize | stored in the historical memory means. Then, display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify the display corresponding to the mode information regardless of the timing at which the information display means is confirmed.

  Feature J2. Individual information display means capable of performing a plurality of types of display in each of the information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third display devices 69a to 69c, first to fourteenth items) A game machine according to feature J1, comprising a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) in the embodiment.

  According to the feature J2, it is possible to perform display of various types of mode information by performing display corresponding to mode information using a plurality of individual information display means.

  Feature J3. The game machine according to Feature J2, wherein the first information display control means causes each of the plurality of individual information display means to be in a display state when performing display corresponding to the mode information.

  According to the feature J3, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and the display state is made even when the display corresponding to the mode information is changed Maintained. This makes it easy to grasp the mode information.

  Feature J4. The first information display control means is an individual information display means for displaying the type which is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, 11th In the 14th to the 14th embodiments, a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202), and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means of the result display object which is a part of the above (in the first to tenth embodiments, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c, in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments, 3) A game machine according to feature J2 or J3 characterized in that a display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204).

  According to the feature J4, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of mode information to be displayed is performed in the individual information display means for the type display object and the individual information display for the result display object is performed In the means, display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed is performed. This makes it easy to grasp the mode information to be displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J4, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. History storage execution means (function to execute history setting processing in the management side CPU 112) to store history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (memory for history 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game Equipped with
The history storage execution means does not store the history information in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs when there is a limit situation (function to make a negative determination in step S3501 in the main CPU 63) A game machine characterized by comprising

  According to the feature K1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, since history information is not stored even when a predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation, it is possible to prevent history information from being stored in situations where storing history information is undesirable. .

  Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the restriction situation may occur as a situation from when supply of operation power to the history storage execution means is started to when a restriction cancellation event occurs.

  According to the feature K2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the predetermined event due to the operation check immediately after the start of the supply of the operation power as the history information.

Feature K3. And means for setting the restriction status when the supply of the operation power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is satisfied (function of executing the process of step S3610 in the main CPU 63) ,
A unit that does not set the restriction status when the supply of the operation power to the history storage execution unit is started and the restriction condition is not satisfied (function of executing the processing of step S3621 in the main CPU 63) When,
The gaming machine according to feature K2, comprising:

  According to the feature K3, there are cases where the restriction situation is set or not, depending on whether or not the restriction condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to prevent the restriction status from being set as necessary.

  Feature K4. The limit condition may occur as a condition from when supply of operation power to the history storage execution means is started to when the number of game balls discharged from the game area becomes equal to or more than a predetermined reference number. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K3.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored until the number of game balls discharged from the game area becomes equal to or more than the predetermined reference number after the supply of operation power is started.

Feature K5. When a predetermined event occurs due to the game being executed, the history information of the corresponding game is stored in the history storage means (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232, high-frequency support mode counter area 233) History storage executing means (a function for executing the normal ball management process in the main CPU 63, the ball management process in the opening / closing mode, and the ball management process in the high frequency support mode);
Information deriving means (function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the information deriving means does not derive the mode information when it is in a limited situation.

  According to the feature K5, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. Moreover, the aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived | led-out using the historical information memorize | stored in the historical memory means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. In addition, since the mode information is not derived even if the predetermined event occurs in the restricted situation, the mode information can be prevented from being derived in a situation where it is not preferable to derive the mode information. .

  Feature K6. The gaming machine according to Feature K5, wherein the restriction situation can occur as a situation from the start of supply of operation power to the history storage execution means to the occurrence of a restriction cancellation event.

  According to the feature K6, it is possible to prevent the mode information using the history information based on the occurrence of the predetermined event by the operation check immediately after the start of the supply of the operation power being derived.

  Feature K7. The limit condition may occur as a condition from when supply of operation power to the history storage execution means is started to when the number of game balls discharged from the game area becomes equal to or more than a predetermined reference number. The gaming machine according to K5 or K6.

  According to the feature K7, the mode information can be prevented from being derived until the number of game balls discharged from the game area becomes equal to or more than the predetermined reference number after the supply of operation power is started.

  Note that for the configuration of the features K1 to K7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, and the feature K group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, management of the gaming machine needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in the internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process from a condition of performing the first predetermined process or when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process Save execution means (the main side CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment functions to execute the processing of step S3802 and step S3902 to step S3907 in the fifteenth embodiment), the sixteenth embodiment Function of the main CPU 63 executing the processing of step S4402, the seventeenth embodiment the function of the main CPU 63 executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507, and the eighteenth embodiment the step of the main CPU 63 A function of executing the processing of S4602, in the nineteenth embodiment the main CP Processing of step S4701 and step S4703 and the ability to perform) in 63,
A return execution unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, the step S3804 in the main CPU 63 and the return execution unit) which returns the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit when or after the second predetermined process is completed. The function to execute the processing of step S3910 to step S3915, the function to execute the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment, and the processing of step S4510 to the step S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment Function in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4605 in the main CPU 63, and in the nineteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L1, it is stored in the internal storage means when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed is reached. At least part of the information is evacuated to the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is performed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is performed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is completed, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process ends, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to perform various control suitably.

  Feature L2. The gaming machine according to Feature L1, wherein the predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means.

  According to the feature L2, since only a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the predetermined storage means, the storage capacity necessary for saving the information of the internal storage means in the predetermined storage means It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature L3. The internal storage means includes a first storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register) and a second storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, And at least a register other than the IY register),
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to store information in the first storage area in the second predetermined process, but not store information in the second storage area.
The game machine according to Feature L2, wherein the save execution means saves the information stored in the first storage area in the predetermined storage means.

  According to the feature L3, the second predetermined process is performed in the internal storage unit in the case where the second predetermined process is performed or the second predetermined process is performed from the situation where the first predetermined process is performed. The information of the first storage area to be stored of information is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process, and in the predetermined storage means It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to save the information of the storage means.

Feature L4. The predetermined storage means is
A first predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control, a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of the features L1 to L3, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature L4, since the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage means, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means is determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means when the first predetermined process is being executed and the second predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Information is saved to the second predetermined storage area. Thus, it is possible to save the information of the internal storage means immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature L5. The evacuation execution means is
In the first predetermined process, the first predetermined information, which is a part of information stored in the internal storage unit, when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed. And means for saving the data in the first predetermined storage area (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3802 in the main CPU 63; in the sixteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4402 in the main CPU 63) ,
The second predetermined process, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage unit when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, is the second predetermined process. Means for saving to the second predetermined storage area (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3902 to step S3907 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, step S4502 to step S4507 in the main CPU 63) A function to execute processing, a function to execute the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function to execute the processing in step S4702 and step S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature L4, comprising:

  According to the feature L5, the first predetermined information which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage means The second predetermined information as is stored in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to save at a timing preferable for each piece of information stored in the internal storage means, and the process for saving the information is executed in a distributed manner by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible.

  Feature L6. The gaming machine according to Feature L5, wherein the first predetermined information is information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

  According to the feature L6, it is possible to appropriately save the information of the flag register in the situation where the first predetermined process is being performed.

Feature L7. The second predetermined storage area is
A stack area (a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (non-specific control work area 223) capable of writing and reading information by a load instruction;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features L4 to L6, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature L7, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area is changed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. At least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in one of the work areas. As a result, it becomes possible to consolidate the save destination of information, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for recovering.

  Feature L8. The game machine according to Feature L7, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the work area.

  According to the feature L8, since the save destination of at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage unit is the work area, the information can be saved without performing the cumulative change of the stack pointer. Become.

Feature L9. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing information and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. It is impossible to store information,
The second predetermined storage area is capable of storing information and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features L4 to L8, wherein storage of information is impossible.

  According to the feature L9, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. It becomes.

Feature L10. The predetermined storage means is
A stack area (a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (non-specific control work area 223) capable of writing and reading information by a load instruction;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature L10, it is possible to collect the save destination of the predetermined information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving the predetermined information and the processing configuration for restoring the predetermined information.

  Feature L11. The game machine according to Feature L10, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to the work area.

  According to the feature L11, since the save destination of the predetermined information is the work area, it is possible to save the information without performing the cumulative change of the stack pointer.

Feature L12. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage unit,
The internal storage means is configured to execute the second predetermined process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, or the situation where the second predetermined process is to be executed. The game machine according to the feature L11 is characterized by including means (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) for evacuating the specific information which is a part of the information stored in the stack area. .

  According to the feature L12, in the configuration in which the predetermined information is evacuated to the work area, the specific information is evacuated to the stack area. As a result, the information stored in the internal storage means can be distributed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

  Feature L13. The gaming machine according to Feature L12, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

  According to the feature L13, predetermined information having a larger amount of information than the specific information is saved in the work area, so that much information is cumulatively stored in the stack area when the information stored in the internal storage unit is saved. It becomes possible not to go wrong.

Feature L14. Information on the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means when it becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed Is a configuration that becomes fixed information,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L13, wherein the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not a target of save by the save execution means.

  According to the feature L14, since it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving information of the stack pointer in the predetermined storage unit, it is possible to suppress the capacity of the predetermined storage unit. Further, even when the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above, the situation where the second predetermined process is to be executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed If it does not, the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, so even if the stack pointer information is not saved as described above, it may be restored to the stack pointer information before the second predetermined process is started. It is possible.

  Feature L15. Means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after completing the second predetermined process (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3909 in the main CPU 63, the seventeenth embodiment The gaming machine according to the feature L14 characterized by having a function to execute the processing of step S4509 in the main CPU 63, and a function to execute the processing in step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment. .

  According to the feature L15, when or after the second predetermined process is ended, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started.

  Feature L16. When it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, or when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process, the stack pointer is executed to the second predetermined process A unit for setting the corresponding second correspondence start information (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3901 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4501 in the main CPU 63); In the eighteenth embodiment, the gaming machine according to the feature L14 or L15 is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S4601 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature L16, when the second predetermined process is started, the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, so that the address corresponding to the appropriate address in the second predetermined process is set. It is possible to store information in the stack area.

Feature L17. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L16, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature L17, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for the purpose.

Feature L18. The predetermined storage means is
A first predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control, a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to feature L17, characterized in that it comprises a high frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature L18, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten at the time of execution.

  Characteristic L19. The second predetermined process execution means is information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature L18, comprising a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature L19, management of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, by deriving the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature L20. The gaming machine according to the feature L19, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature L20, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Note that for the configuration of the features L1 to L20, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in the internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process from a condition of performing the first predetermined process or when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process Save execution means (the main side CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment functions to execute the processing of step S3902 to step S3907 in the fifteenth embodiment, the seventeenth embodiment) Then, the function of executing the processing of step S4502 to step S4507 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and step S4701 and step in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment Function to execute the process of S4703),
A return execution unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, the step S3910 in the main CPU 63) for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit when or after the second predetermined processing is completed. A function to execute the processing of step S3915, a function to execute the processing of step S4510 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a function to execute the processing in step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment In the nineteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means by a load instruction.

  According to the feature M1, it is stored in the internal storage means when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. Predetermined information which is at least a part of information is saved in a predetermined storage unit. Thus, when the second predetermined process is performed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is performed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is completed, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process ends, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. When the first predetermined process is executed and then the second predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed, the load information causes the predetermined information to be saved in the predetermined storage means. . This makes it possible to save predetermined information without requiring a change of the stack pointer.

Feature M2. The predetermined storage means is
A stack area (a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (non-specific control work area 223) capable of writing and reading information by a load instruction;
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature M1, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to the work area.

  According to the feature M2, since the save destination of the predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage unit, is the work area, the information is saved without performing the cumulative change of the stack pointer. It becomes possible.

Feature M3. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage unit,
The internal storage means is configured to execute the second predetermined process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, or the situation where the second predetermined process is to be executed. The game machine according to the feature M2 is characterized by including means (a function for executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) for evacuating the specific information which is a part of the information stored in the stack area. .

  According to the feature M3, in the configuration in which the predetermined information is evacuated to the work area, the specific information is evacuated to the stack area. As a result, the information stored in the internal storage means can be distributed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

  Feature M4. The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

  According to the feature M4, when the predetermined information having the information amount larger than the specific information is saved in the work area, a large amount of information is cumulatively stored in the stack area when the information stored in the internal storage unit is saved. It becomes possible not to go wrong.

Feature M5. The work area is
A first work area (specific control work area 221) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second work area (work area 223 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of the features M2 to M4, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to the second work area.

  According to the feature M5, by providing the first work area and the second work area in the work area, the storage destination of the information in the work area is clearly differentiated between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means when the first predetermined process is being executed and the second predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Information is saved to the second work area. This makes it possible to save the information of the internal storage means immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and to save the information without using the first work area.

Feature M6. Although the first work area is capable of storing information and reading information when the first predetermined process is performed, and reading of information is possible when the second predetermined process is performed. It is impossible to store information,
The second work area is capable of storing information and reading information when the second predetermined process is performed, and reading of information is possible when the first predetermined process is performed. The gaming machine according to feature M5, wherein storage of information is impossible.

  According to the feature M6, the first work area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second work area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. .

Feature M7. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in the internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process from a condition of performing the first predetermined process or when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process Save execution means (the main side CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment functions to execute the processing of step S3902 to step S3907 in the fifteenth embodiment, the seventeenth embodiment) Then, the function of executing the processing of step S4502 to step S4507 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and step S4701 and step in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment Function to execute the process of S4703),
A return execution unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, the step S3910 in the main CPU 63) for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit when or after the second predetermined processing is completed. A function to execute the processing of step S3915, a function to execute the processing of step S4510 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a function to execute the processing in step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment In the nineteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The predetermined storage means is
A stack area (a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (non-specific control work area 223) capable of writing and reading information by a load instruction;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the save execution means saves the predetermined information in one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature M7, it is stored in the internal storage means when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. Predetermined information which is at least a part of information is saved in a predetermined storage unit. Thus, when the second predetermined process is performed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is performed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is completed, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process ends, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process.

  In the case where the second predetermined process is to be executed or the second predetermined process is to be executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, one of the stack area and the work area in the predetermined storage means The above predetermined information is saved. As a result, it becomes possible to consolidate the save destination of information, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for recovering.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features M1 to M7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in the internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
Equipped with
When the second predetermined process is performed from the situation where the first predetermined process is being performed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage unit is configured to be fixed information. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature N1, when the second predetermined process is performed from the situation where the first predetermined process is performed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage unit is fixed information. There is no need to save the information of the stack pointer when starting the predetermined processing. This eliminates the need to reserve a storage area for saving the stack pointer information. In addition, since the stack pointer information is fixed when the first predetermined process is executed and the second predetermined process is executed, the stack pointer information is not saved as described above. However, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started.

  Feature N2. Means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after completing the second predetermined process (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3909 in the main CPU 63, the seventeenth embodiment The gaming machine according to the feature N1, characterized in that the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of step S4509, and the eighteenth embodiment has a function of executing the processing of step S4604 in the main CPU 63). .

  According to the feature N2, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, it is possible to restore the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started.

  Feature N3. A unit for setting second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process in the stack pointer when the second predetermined process is performed from the situation where the first predetermined process is performed (fifteenth embodiment) Function of the main CPU 63 executing the process of step S3901, the function of the main CPU 63 executing the process of step S4501 in the seventeenth embodiment, and the process of the step S4601 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment A game machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized in that it has a function of performing

  According to the feature N3, when the second predetermined process is started, the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, so that the address corresponding to the appropriate address in the second predetermined process is set. It is possible to store information in the stack area.

Feature N4. At least one stored in the internal storage means when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process from a condition of performing the first predetermined process or when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process Save execution means (the main side CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment functions to execute the processing of step S3802 and step S3902 to step S3907 in the fifteenth embodiment), the sixteenth embodiment Function of the main CPU 63 executing the processing of step S4402, the seventeenth embodiment the function of the main CPU 63 executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507, and the eighteenth embodiment the step of the main CPU 63 A function of executing the processing of S4602, in the nineteenth embodiment the main CP Processing of step S4701 and step S4703 and the ability to perform) in 63,
A return execution unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, the step S3804 in the main CPU 63 and the return execution unit) which returns the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit when or after the second predetermined process is completed. The function to execute the processing of step S3910 to step S3915, the function to execute the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment, and the processing of step S4510 to the step S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment Function in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4605 in the main CPU 63, and in the nineteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N3, wherein information of a stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not a target of save by the save execution means.

  According to the feature N4, it is stored in the internal storage means when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed becomes the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. At least part of the information is evacuated to the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is performed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is performed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is completed, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process ends, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. Further, since the information of the stack pointer is not a target of saving, it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving the information of the stack pointer in the predetermined storage unit. Therefore, the capacity of the predetermined storage unit can be reduced. Further, even when the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above, the situation where the second predetermined process is to be executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed If it does not, the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, so even if the stack pointer information is not saved as described above, it may be restored to the stack pointer information before the second predetermined process is started. It is possible.

Feature N5. The predetermined storage means is
A first predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control, a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to Feature N4, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature N5, since the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage means, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means is determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means when the first predetermined process is being executed and the second predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Information is saved to the second predetermined storage area. Thus, it is possible to save the information of the internal storage means immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature N6. The first predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the first predetermined process is performed, and can read information when the second predetermined process is performed. Memory of the information of things is impossible,
The second predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the second predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature N5, characterized in that storage of information of things is not possible.

  According to the feature N6, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. It becomes.

  Note that for the configuration of the features N1 to N6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature O group>
Characteristics O1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in the internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least a part of storage in the internal storage means when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process from a condition of performing the first predetermined process or when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process First state setting means (main CPU 63 in step S4803 to step S4808) for setting the state of a predetermined storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) which is an area Function to execute)
Second state setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S4903 to step S4908 in the main CPU 63) for setting the state of the predetermined storage area to the predetermined state when or after the second predetermined process is ended;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature O1, when it is determined that the second predetermined process is to be executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, or if the second predetermined process is to be executed, the predetermined storage area of the internal storage unit When the second predetermined process is ended or after the second predetermined process is ended, the state of the predetermined storage area is set again to the predetermined state. Thereby, it is possible to set the state of the predetermined storage area to the predetermined state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area by one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to perform various control suitably.

  Characteristics O2. The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the predetermined state is a state when supply of operation power to the control means is started.

  According to the feature O2, since the predetermined storage area is set as the predetermined state and the state when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state is simplified. Is possible.

  Characteristics O3. The gaming machine according to the feature O1 or O2, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the predetermined storage area is cleared to "0".

  According to the feature O3, since the predetermined storage area is set to the state cleared to "0" as the predetermined state, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting to the predetermined state.

  Characteristics O4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O3, wherein the predetermined storage area is a partial storage area in the internal storage means.

  According to the feature O4, only a part of the storage area of the internal storage means is set to the predetermined state, so that the processing load for setting the predetermined state can be reduced.

Characteristic O5. The internal storage means at least includes the predetermined storage area and another storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and register other than IY register),
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to store information in the predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process, but not store information in the separate storage area.
The gaming machine according to the feature O4, wherein the first state setting means and the second state setting means do not change the state of the separate storage area.

  According to the feature O5, the second predetermined process is performed in the internal storage unit in the case where the second predetermined process is performed or the second predetermined process is performed from the situation where the first predetermined process is performed. The predetermined storage area to which information is to be stored is set in a predetermined state. This makes it possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area by the first predetermined process from affecting the second predetermined process. In addition, since the state of the separate storage area is not changed, setting the predetermined state when the second predetermined process starts does not affect the process after the second predetermined process ends. It becomes possible.

  Feature O6. The information of the predetermined storage area before the setting of the predetermined state is performed by the first state setting unit is information not used after the second predetermined process is completed. The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the feature O6, even when the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state when the second predetermined process is performed or the second predetermined process is performed, the second predetermined process is ended. It is possible not to affect the post-processing.

Feature O7. A part stored in the internal storage means when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process from a condition of performing the first predetermined process or when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process Save execution means (function of executing the process of step S4802 in the main CPU 63) for saving predetermined information (information of flag register) which is information of the above in the predetermined storage means (main RAM 65);
Return execution means for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means when or after completing the second predetermined process (function of executing the process of step S4810 in the main CPU 63) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O6, comprising:

  According to the feature O7, it is stored in the internal storage means when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined process is performed or when the situation where the second predetermined process is performed. Predetermined information which is a part of information is saved in a predetermined storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, the information stored in the internal storage means at the time of execution of the first predetermined process, which is necessary at the time of execution of the first predetermined process thereafter, is rewritten. It becomes possible not to do so. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is completed, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process ends, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process.

Feature O8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature O8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for the purpose.

Feature O9. The predetermined storage means is
A first predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control, a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to feature O8, characterized in that the high frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided.

  According to the feature O9, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten at the time of execution.

  Feature O10. The second predetermined process execution means is information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature O9, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature O10, by managing the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by deriving the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature O11. The game machine according to Feature O10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature O11, when the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature O1 to O11 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in the internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function for executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control, a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature P1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means clearly different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

Feature P2. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to feature P1, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature P2, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for the purpose.

  Feature P3. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature P2, characterized in that the high frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided.

  According to the feature P3, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten at the time of execution.

  Feature P4. The second predetermined process execution means is information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) A game machine according to feature P3, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature P4, management of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, is realized by deriving the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature P5. The gaming machine according to the feature P4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature P5, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature P6. In the first predetermined process, the first predetermined information, which is a part of information stored in the internal storage unit, when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed. First saving means for saving to the first predetermined storage area (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3802 in the main CPU 63, and in the sixteenth embodiment, executing the processing of step S4402 in the main CPU 63) Function),
The second predetermined process, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage unit when the second predetermined process is executed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed, is the second predetermined process. In the second predetermined storage area (in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3902 to step S3907 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, step S4502 in the main CPU 63) A function to execute the process of step S4507, a function to execute the process of step S4602 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function to execute the processes of step S4701 and S4703 in the nineteenth embodiment) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to P5, comprising:

  According to the feature P6, the first predetermined information which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage means The second predetermined information as is stored in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to save at a timing preferable for each piece of information stored in the internal storage means, and the process for saving the information is executed in a distributed manner by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible.

Feature P7. First return execution means (mainly in the fifteenth embodiment) for returning the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined process is finished A function of executing the process of step S3804 in the CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment),
Second restoration executing means (in the fifteenth embodiment, the second restoration executor) for returning the second predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area to the internal storage means when or after completing the second predetermined process Function to execute the processing of step S3910 to step S3915 in the CPU 63, function to execute the processing of step S4510 to the step S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment A function to execute a process, and in the nineteenth embodiment, a function to execute the processes of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature P6, comprising:

  According to the feature P7, when or after the second predetermined process ends, the first predetermined information evacuated to the first predetermined storage area is returned to the internal storage means, and is evacuated to the second predetermined storage area (2) Since the predetermined information is returned to the internal storage means, it is possible to restore the state of the internal storage means to the state before the second predetermined processing is started.

  Feature P8. The gaming machine according to feature P6 or P7, wherein the first predetermined information includes information of a flag register provided in the internal storage unit.

  According to the feature P8, it is possible to appropriately save the information of the flag register in the situation where the first predetermined process is being performed.

  Feature P9. The gaming machine according to any one of the features P6 to P8, wherein the second predetermined information includes information of all the registers of the internal storage means.

  According to the feature P9, since the information of all the registers of the internal storage means is collectively saved, it is not necessary to selectively save the information of the registers.

Feature P10. The second predetermined storage area is
A stack area (a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is written by a push instruction and information is read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control) in which information is written and read by a load instruction;
Equipped with
The game machine according to Feature P9, wherein the second save execution means saves the second predetermined information in one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature P10, the information of all the registers of the internal storage means is saved to one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, the save destinations of the information of all the registers can be consolidated, and the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for recovering can be simplified.

  Feature P11. The game machine according to Feature P10, wherein the second save execution means saves the second predetermined information in the stack area.

  According to the feature P11, it is possible to save information of all the registers while not using the work area.

  Feature P12. The gaming machine according to any one of the features P6 to P11, wherein the second predetermined information includes information of a stack pointer of the internal storage unit.

  According to the feature P12, it is possible to appropriately save the information of the stack pointer in the situation where the first predetermined process is being performed.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature P1 to P12 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature L group, the feature M group, the feature N group, the feature O group and the feature P group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, various controls need to be suitably performed in the gaming machine as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Q group>
Feature Q1. A control unit (MPU 62) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the process is executed;
History storage means (management RAM 241) provided as a separate chip from the control means and capable of temporarily storing information;
Equipped with
The control means is a history storage execution means (normally entering game management processing in the main CPU 63) which causes the history storage means to store game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed. A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a ball entering management process in an open / close execution mode and a ball entering management process in a high frequency support mode.

  According to the feature Q1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, since the history storage means is provided as a separate chip from the control means, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing history information while using a general purpose control means.

  Feature Q2. The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein the control means comprises a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when executing various processes.

  According to the feature Q2, not only the predetermined storage means provided in the control means but also the history storage means provided as a separate chip from the control means, storing the history information in the history storage means A large amount of history information can be stored and held.

  Feature Q3. The game machine according to Feature Q2, wherein the control means causes information to be temporarily stored in the predetermined storage means when the process related to the history information is executed.

  According to the feature Q3, in the configuration in which the history storage means for storing history information is provided as a chip separate from the control means, the predetermined storage means provided in the control means is provided to execute the process related to the history information. Since the information is temporarily stored, it is possible to prevent the processing speed from extremely decreasing when executing the process related to the history information.

  Feature Q4. The control means uses information on the history information stored in the history storage means to derive information on the aspect corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (information processing means in the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S4208 The gaming machine according to any one of the features Q1 to Q3 characterized in that

  According to the feature Q4, by managing the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by deriving the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature Q5. The game machine according to Feature Q4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature Q5, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features Q1 to Q5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention concerning the above-mentioned characteristic Q group, it is possible to solve the following subjects.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, management of the gaming machine needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature R group>
Feature R1. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
The change of the setting value to be used based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including the first event and the second event when the supply of operation power to the control means having the setting means is started. (A function to execute the processing of step S5003 to step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, or step S5503 in the main CPU 63 in another form) A function of executing the process of step S5507, and in the twenty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S5703 to S5705 and S5715 in the main CPU 63;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature R1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, a plurality of events including the first event and the second event occur when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. You need to As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting operation of the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R2. Opening grasping means for grasping that the opening / closing body (front door frame 14) is in the open state (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5005 in the main CPU 63; in another embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 A function of executing the process of S5505, and in the twenty-third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63;
The situation generation means identifies that the first event is occurring based on the fact that the opening / closing body is in the open state and is grasped by the opening grasping means. Feature R1 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature R2, in order to set the setting value to be used, the open / close member needs to be in the open state. As a result, when an action is performed to set the setting value to be used illegally, it becomes possible to make the fraudulent activity stand out, and as a result it becomes possible to easily find out the fraudulent activity. .

Feature R3. Another opening grasping means (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 in another form) Function to execute the process of step S5506 in the above, and the function of executing the process of step S5704 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment),
The condition generating means is characterized in that the second event is generated based on the fact that the separate opening / closing body is in the open state is grasped by the separate opening grasping means. The gaming machine according to the feature R2.

  According to the feature R3, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening and closing body but also to open the other opening and closing body. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraud act more noticeable.

Feature R4. The setting means selects at least one of the selection of the setting value to be used and the setting of the setting value to be used based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (the update button 68b and the reset button 68c). Configuration,
The gaming machine according to feature R2 or R3, wherein the predetermined operation means is configured to be operable by opening the separate opening / closing body.

  According to the feature R4, the setting value to be used can not be set unless the open / close body different from the separate open / close body which is put in the open state in order to make the predetermined operation means operable. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraud act more noticeable.

Feature R5. The opening and closing body defines the front side of the gaming machine in the gaming area where the gaming ball flows down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features R2 to R4, wherein the gaming area is opened forward of the gaming machine by opening the opening / closing body.

  According to the feature R5, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the game area in front of the game machine with the open / close member in the open state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraud act more noticeable.

  Feature R6. The condition generation means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that a predetermined operation is performed on the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) by the setting key. A game machine according to any one of features R1 to R5 characterized in that.

  According to the feature R6, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform the predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion unit but also to generate another event. is there. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting operation of the setting value to be used due to fraud.

  Feature R7. The situation generation means is based on the occurrence of a predetermined game event (operation of the launch operation device 28, entry of the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is played, of the plurality of events. The gaming machine according to any one of the features R1 to R6, characterized in that one of the events is identified as occurring.

  According to the feature R7, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to generate a predetermined gaming event that occurs when a game is played, but separately from that Events need to be generated. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting operation of the setting value to be used due to fraud.

  Characteristics R8. The situation generation means is based on detection of the game ball by the ball detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) for detecting that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball storage portion provided in the game area. A game machine according to any one of features R1 to R7, wherein one of the plurality of events is identified as occurring.

  According to the feature R8, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry part and to generate another event. There is. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting operation of the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R9. It has a setting value notification means (function to execute a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value to be used set by the setting means by notification means.
The set value notification means sets the set value to be used set by the setting means to the notification means based on occurrence of a plurality of events including the first event and the second event. The gaming machine according to any one of the features R1 to R8 characterized in that:

  According to the feature R9, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of confirming the setting value due to fraud. In addition, the manager of the gaming hall has to work because it is sufficient to generate the first event and the second event in either setting of the set value to be used or confirmation of the set value. It becomes common and it becomes easy to grasp each work.

Feature R10. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
A plurality of events including both that a predetermined operation is performed on the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) with the setting key and another event different from the predetermined operation using the setting key for the setting key insertion unit Condition generating means (in the 22nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment) is configured to be able to set the setting value to be used by the setting means based on the occurrence. A function to execute the processing of step S5003 to step S5006, a function to execute the processing of step S5503 to step S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, and a step of S5703 to step S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment. Function to execute processing),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature R10, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation on the setting key insertion unit by the setting key but also to generate another event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting operation of the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R11. Opening grasping means for grasping that the opening / closing body (front door frame 14) is in the open state (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5005 in the main CPU 63; in another embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 A function of executing the process of S5505, and in the twenty-third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63;
In the feature R10, the situation generation means identifies that the other event has occurred based on the fact that the opening / closing body is in the open state is grasped by the opening grasping means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature R11, in order to set the setting value to be used, the open / close member needs to be in the open state. As a result, when an action is performed to set the setting value to be used illegally, it becomes possible to make the fraudulent activity stand out, and as a result it becomes possible to easily find out the fraudulent activity. .

Characteristics R12. Another opening grasping means (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 in another form) Function to execute the process of step S5506 in the above, and the function of executing the process of step S5704 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment),
The situation generation means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening / closing body is in the open state is grasped by the separate opening grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature R11, which is characterized in that:

  According to the feature R12, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening and closing body but also to open the other opening and closing body. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraud act more noticeable.

Feature R13. The setting means selects at least one of the selection of the setting value to be used and the setting of the setting value to be used based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (the update button 68b and the reset button 68c). Configuration,
The gaming machine according to feature R11 or R12, wherein the predetermined operation means is configured to be operable by opening the separate opening / closing body.

  According to the feature R13, the setting value to be used can not be set unless the open / close body different from the separate open / close body which is put in the open state in order to make the predetermined operation means operable. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraud act more noticeable.

Feature R14. The opening and closing body defines the front side of the gaming machine in the gaming area where the gaming ball flows down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features R11 to R13, wherein the gaming area is opened forward of the gaming machine by opening the opening / closing body.

  According to the feature R14, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the game area in front of the game machine with the open / close member in the open state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraud act more noticeable.

  Feature R15. The situation generation means is based on the occurrence of a predetermined game event (operation of the launch operation device 28, entry of the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is played, of the plurality of events. The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R14, wherein it is specified that one of the events has occurred.

  According to the feature R15, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only the predetermined operation by the setting key on the setting key insertion unit but also the predetermined event that occurs when the game is performed It is necessary to generate a gaming event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting operation of the setting value to be used due to fraud.

  Feature R16. The situation generation means is based on detection of the game ball by the ball detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) for detecting that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball storage portion provided in the game area. A game machine according to any one of features R10 to R15, wherein one of the plurality of events is identified as occurring.

  According to the feature R16, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only the predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion portion is performed, but also the game ball is inserted in the predetermined ball entry portion You need to let the ball go. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting operation of the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R17. It has a setting value notification means (function to execute a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value to be used set by the setting means by notification means.
The setting value notification means is configured to set the setting means based on the fact that the predetermined operation is being performed by the setting key with respect to the setting key insertion unit and that a plurality of events including both of the other events occur. The gaming machine according to any one of the features R10 to R16, wherein the notification means reports the set value to be used set by the user.

  According to the feature R17, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of confirming the set value due to fraud. In addition, the manager of the gaming hall performs a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion part and generates another event, regardless of whether the setting of the setting value to be used is set or the setting value is confirmed. Since the work can be made common, the work can be easily grasped.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features R1 to R17, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature R group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to cope with the fraud with respect to the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature S group>
Feature S1. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
Condition generating means for setting the settable condition in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the twenty-second embodiment, the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 and steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63) Function of executing the processing of step S5503 to step S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S5703 to step S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment, In the twenty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63, and in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63);
Setting value grasping means (in the twenty-second embodiment, step S5017 in the main CPU 63 for grasping whether or not the setting value before the setting possible state and the setting value set by the setting means are the same. And the function of executing the processing of step S5111 to step S5112, and in another form, the function of executing the processing of step S5611 to step S5612 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature S1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, it is grasped whether or not the setting value before the setting possible situation is the same as the setting value set in the setting possible situation. This makes it possible to execute processing corresponding to whether the setting values are the same across setting possible situations. Therefore, when setting of the setting value to be used is performed, it is possible to generate a preferable situation with respect to the setting result, and it becomes possible to preferably perform setting work of the setting value.

  Feature S2. Based on the fact that the setting value grasping means recognizes that the setting value before the setting possible state is the same as the setting value set by the setting means, the corresponding same-time processing is performed The same time means to be executed (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5113 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of step S5613 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature S1, characterized in that

  According to the feature S2, when the setting value is the same across the settable status, the same processing is performed, which makes it possible to generate a preferable status with respect to the setting value being the same. Become.

  Feature S3. The gaming machine according to feature S2, wherein the same-time means executes a process for causing a notification corresponding to the fact that the set value is not changed to be performed as the same-time process.

  According to the feature S3, it is possible to notify the administrator or the like of the game hall that the setting value is the same across the setting possible situation.

  Feature S4. The corresponding non-identical process is executed based on the fact that the setting value grasping means determines that the setting value before the setting possible state is different from the setting value set by the setting means. Having a function to execute the processing of step S5114 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of step S5614 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S3 characterized by

  According to the feature S4, when the setting value is not the same across the settable situation, the non-identical time process is executed, whereby a preferable situation can be generated against the setting value being changed. It becomes.

  Feature S5. The gaming machine according to the feature S4, characterized in that the non-identical-means unit executes, as the non-identical-time processing, processing for causing notification corresponding to the change of the set value to be performed. .

  According to the feature S5, it is possible to notify the administrator or the like of the game hall that the setting value has been changed with the setting possible state in between.

  Feature S6. The setting may be performed based on the necessity of erasing information stored in the storage unit storing the setting value after the supply of operation power to the control unit having the setting unit is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S5, which is to be in a possible situation.

  According to the feature S6, when it becomes necessary to delete the information of the storage means for storing the setting value, the setting is made possible, so the game is continued even though the information of the setting value is deleted. It becomes possible not to do so. In this case, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature S1 is provided, and it is grasped whether or not the set value before the settable state becomes the same as the set value set in the settable state. This makes it possible to execute processing corresponding to whether the setting values are the same across setting possible situations.

  Feature S7. The set value is not changed based on the fact that the set value grasping means recognizes that the set value before the settable state is the same as the set value set by the setting means. Means for performing notification corresponding to the event (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5113 in the main CPU 63, and in another embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5613 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature S6, characterized in that it comprises.

  According to the feature S7, the setting value is changed if the setting value is the same across the setting possible state even if the setting possible state is entered along with the deletion of the information of the storage unit. A notification corresponding to the absence is given. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the player that the setting value has not been changed even if the setting possible status is reached in the middle of the game, and the player is cheap even if the setting possible status is reached in the middle of the game. It is possible to keep the game in mind.

Feature S8. The condition generating means is
The first situation generating means (in the twenty-second embodiment, step S5003 in the main CPU 63) causes the setting possible state to be established based on the start of the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means. A function to execute the process of step S5006, a function to execute the processes of step S5503 to step S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, and a process of step S5703 to step S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment Function),
A second situation where the setting is made possible based on the need to erase information of the storage unit storing the setting value after the supply of the operation power to the control unit is started. Generating means (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The set value grasping means before the setting possible state is set in any of the setting possible state generated by the first state generating means and the setting possible state generated by the second state generating means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S7, wherein it is grasped whether or not the setting value in and the setting value set by the setting means are the same.

  According to the feature S8, when it becomes necessary to delete the information of the storage means for storing the setting value, the setting is made possible, so the game is continued even though the information of the setting value is deleted. It becomes possible not to do so. In this case, based on the start of supply of the operation power to the control means, the same process as in the case of the setting possible state is used, and the setting possible state is accompanied by the information in the storage means being erased. In the case where the event occurs, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to whether or not the setting value is the same across the setting possible situation.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature S1 to S8 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention concerning the above-mentioned characteristic S group, it is possible to solve the following subjects.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to create a suitable situation for setting the setting value that determines the degree of advantage of the gaming machine. There is room for

<Feature T group>
Feature T1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in the internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control, a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
The first monitoring execution means (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5401 to step S5404 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, the twenty-fourth embodiment) monitoring whether or not the first predetermined storage area is normal. A function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and a step S7701 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment. ~ A function of executing the process of step S7703),
A second monitoring execution unit that monitors whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5405 to step S5408 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-fourth embodiment A function of executing the processing of step S5809, step S5810, step S5812 and step S5813 in the main CPU 63, and in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6101, step S6102, step S6105 and step S6106 in the main CPU 63; In the thirty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of steps S7706 to S7708).
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature T1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means clearly different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Further, monitoring of whether or not the first predetermined storage area is normal is performed, and monitoring of whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal is performed, thereby performing the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It is possible to specify whether or not it is a situation in which each of the processes can be performed normally.

  Feature T2. The game according to the feature T1, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed in any one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Machine.

  According to the feature T2, the monitoring of whether or not the first predetermined storage area is normal and the monitoring of whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal are one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It is executed collectively. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the monitoring of each storage area is performed by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing in a distributed manner.

  Feature T3. The gaming machine according to feature T1 or T2, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed in the first predetermined process.

  According to the feature T3, the monitoring of whether or not the first predetermined storage area is normal and the monitoring of whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal can be collectively executed by the first predetermined process. It becomes.

  Feature T4. A predetermined erasing unit (in the twenty-second embodiment, the main side erases information of the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first predetermined storage area is determined to be abnormal by the first monitoring execution unit. Function to execute the processing of step S5410 in the CPU 63, function to execute the processing of step S5806, step S5811 and step S5814 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, step S5906 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment A game machine according to any one of the features T1 to T3 characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of S6103 and step S6107.

  According to the feature T4, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information of the first predetermined storage area is erased, so that the first predetermined process is executed with the first predetermined storage area being in the abnormal state. It is possible to prevent

  Feature T5. The predetermined erasing means erases the information of the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first monitoring execution means identifies that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, and the second predetermined storage is performed. The gaming machine according to feature T4, which erases area information.

  According to the feature T5, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the first predetermined storage area but the second predetermined storage area is erased. As a result, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the second predetermined storage area, it becomes possible to erase the information in the second predetermined storage area regardless of the monitoring result by the second monitoring execution means.

  Feature T6. The predetermined deletion means is characterized in that information of the second predetermined storage area is erased based on the fact that the second monitoring execution means identifies that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal. The gaming machine according to T4 or T5.

  According to the feature T6, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information of the first predetermined storage area is erased, whereby the first predetermined process is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in the abnormal state. It is possible to prevent

  Feature T7. The predetermined erasing unit erases the information of the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second monitoring execution unit identifies that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, and the first predetermined storage is performed. The gaming machine according to feature T6, wherein the information of the area is erased.

  According to the feature T7, when the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the second predetermined storage area but the first predetermined storage area is erased. Thus, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the first predetermined storage area, it is possible to erase the information in the first predetermined storage area regardless of the monitoring result by the first monitoring execution means.

  Feature T8. The process according to any one of the features T4 to T7 is characterized in that the process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing unit is performed in any one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature T8, the process of erasing the information of each of the predetermined storage areas based on the fact that the abnormality is identified is collectively executed in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the deletion of the information in each storage area is performed in a distributed manner by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing.

  Feature T9. The game machine according to any one of features T4 to T7, wherein the process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing unit is executed in the first predetermined process.

  According to the feature T9, it is possible to collectively execute and execute the process of erasing the information of each predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormality is identified, in the first predetermined process.

Feature T10. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T9, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature T10, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for the purpose.

  Feature T11. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to feature T10, comprising: a high frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature T11, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten at the time of execution.

  Feature T12. The second predetermined process execution means is information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature T11, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature T12, management of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is performed by deriving the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature T13. The gaming machine according to Feature T12, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature T13, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Note that for the configuration of the features T1 to T13, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature U group>
Feature U1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in the internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A flag register provided in the internal storage means when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process from a condition of performing the first predetermined process or when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process State setting means (the function of executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-seventh embodiment) A function of executing the processing of step S6302 to step S6307 and step S6312),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature U1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being performed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined process is performed or when the case where the second predetermined process is performed, the flag register of the internal storage means The state is set to a specific state. This makes it possible to start the second predetermined process in a situation where the state of the flag register is in a predetermined specific state. Therefore, various controls can be suitably performed.

  Features U2. The gaming machine according to feature U1, wherein the specific state is a state when supply of operation power to the control means is started.

  According to the feature U2, since the flag register is set to the state when the supply of the operation power to the control means is started as the specific state, the processing configuration for setting the specific state can be simplified. It becomes possible.

  Feature U3. The gaming machine according to feature U1 or U2, wherein the specific state is a state in which the flag register is cleared to “0”.

  According to the feature U3, since the flag register is set to the state of being cleared to “0” as the specific state, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting to the specific state.

  Feature U4. Means for causing the state of the flag register to be in the specific state when the second predetermined process is ended or after the end (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the processing of steps S6213 to S6218 in the main CPU 63 is performed The gaming machine according to any one of the features U1 to U3 having a function and a function of executing the processing of step S6314 to step S6322 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-seventh embodiment.

  According to the feature U4, not only the case where the second predetermined process is performed from the situation where the first predetermined process is performed, but the case where the second predetermined process is performed, the second predetermined process is performed. The state of the flag register is also set to the specific state when it ends or ends. This makes it possible to resume the first predetermined process in a situation where the state of the flag register is in a predetermined specific state. In addition, it is possible to set the state of the flag register to the specific state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the flag register by one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing from affecting the other processing.

Feature U5. It comprises a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) in which information is temporarily stored when the control means executes processing.
The state setting means
A unit for causing the state of a predetermined storage area in the predetermined storage means to be in the specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S6202 to step S6204 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-seventh embodiment A function of executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6307 in the main CPU 63);
A unit for causing the state of the flag register to be in the specific state by storing the information stored in the predetermined storage area in the flag register (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the processing of step S6211 in the main CPU 63) A function to be executed, and in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6312 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine according to any one of the features U1 to U4, characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the feature U5, even if the configuration of the state of the flag register can not be directly set to the specific state as an instruction of the control means, the flag is written using information writing to the predetermined storage means and reading of the information It is possible to set the state of the register to a specific state.

Feature U6. The predetermined storage means is
A stack area (specific control stack area 222) in which the control means can write information by a push instruction and the control means can read information by a pop instruction;
A work area (specific control work area 221) in which the control means can write and read information according to a load instruction;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature U5, wherein the predetermined storage area is provided in the stack area.

  According to the feature U6, even if the information stored in the work area can not be directly written in the flag register, the state of the flag register is specified using the writing of the information in the stack area and the reading of the information. It becomes possible to set to the state.

Feature U7. The predetermined register provided in the internal storage means when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed or when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process (A function to execute the processing of step S6205 to step S6210 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and step S6308 to step S6311 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-seventh embodiment) Function to execute processing)
The apparatus according to any one of the features U1 to U6, wherein the state setting unit causes the state of the flag register to be in the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is changed to the predetermined state. Gaming machine.

  The state of the flag register may change each time various processing is performed in the control means. In this case, according to the feature U7, since the state of the flag register is set to the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state, the flag register is set to the specific state immediately before the second predetermined process is started. It is possible to

Feature U8. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in the internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means causes the state of the flag register to be in the specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6202 to step S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63, twenty-seventh embodiment And a function of executing the processing of step S6302 to step S6307 and step S6312 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature U8, it is possible to set the state of the flag register to the specific state as needed.

  Note that for the configurations of the features U1 to U8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature V group>
Feature V1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in the internal storage means (register of the main side CPU 63) when executing the process,
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A flag register provided in the internal storage means when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process from a condition of performing the first predetermined process or when it becomes a condition to execute the second predetermined process Save execution means (the main side RAM 65) for saving information in the main storage (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main side CPU 63); in the sixteenth embodiment, the step of the step S4402 in the main side CPU 63 The function to execute the process, the function to execute the process of step S4802 in the main CPU 63 in the twentieth embodiment, and the function to execute the process in step S6402 to the step S6405 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-eighth embodiment In the embodiment, the processing of steps S6502 to S6509 in the main CPU 63 And the execution function),
Restoration execution means for restoring the information of the flag register saved in the predetermined storage means to the flag register when or after completing the second predetermined process (step S3804 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment) In the sixteenth embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step S4404 in the sixteenth embodiment, in the twentieth embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step S4810 in the main CPU 63, and the twenty-eighth embodiment And the function of executing the processing of step S6407 to step S6415 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step S6511 to step S6518 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-ninth embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature V1, when the first predetermined process is executed and the second predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed, the information of the flag register is stored in a predetermined manner. Evacuated by means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is performed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flag register from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is performed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is completed, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the flag register. As a result, when the second predetermined process ends, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the flag register before the execution of the second predetermined process. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to perform various control suitably.

Feature V2. The predetermined storage means is
A first predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control, a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature V1, wherein the save execution means saves the information of the flag register in the first predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature V2, since the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage means, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means is determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, when the first predetermined process is executed and then the second predetermined process is executed or the second predetermined process is executed, the flag register information indicates the first predetermined storage area. Be evacuated to Thus, it is possible to save the information of the flag register immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and to save the information without using the second predetermined storage area.

Feature V3. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing information and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. It is impossible to store information,
The second predetermined storage area is capable of storing information and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature V2, wherein storage of information is impossible.

  According to the feature V3, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. It becomes.

Feature V4. The predetermined storage means is
A stack area (specific control stack area 222) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (specific control work area 221) capable of writing and reading information by a load instruction;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, wherein the save execution means saves the information of the flag register to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature V4, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area is changed from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. The information of the flag register is saved in one of the work area and the work area. As a result, it becomes possible to consolidate the save destination of information, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for recovering.

  Feature V5. The game machine according to Feature V4, wherein the save execution means saves information of the flag register in the work area.

  According to the feature V5, since the save destination of the information of the flag register is the work area, the information can be saved without performing the cumulative change of the stack pointer.

Feature V6. The evacuation execution means is
A unit for storing the information of the flag register in a predetermined register provided in the internal storage unit (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6402 and step S6403 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-ninth embodiment A function of executing the processing of step S6502 to step S6505 in the side CPU 63),
Means for storing the information of the flag register stored in the predetermined register in the predetermined storage means (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6404 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63) A function of executing the process of step S6506 in
A game machine according to any one of the features V1 to V5, comprising:

  According to the feature V6, even if the information of the flag register can not be directly saved to the predetermined storage unit as an instruction of the control unit, the writing of the information to the predetermined register and the predetermined of the information stored in the predetermined register It becomes possible to save the information of the flag register to the predetermined storage means by utilizing the writing to the storage means.

  Note that for the configuration of the features V1 to V6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature W group>
Feature W1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes;
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control, a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
An abnormal event monitoring unit (program monitoring unit 252) that monitors whether or not an abnormal event has occurred;
Based on the fact that the abnormal event monitoring means identifies that the abnormal event has occurred, it is possible to cause a situation in which the erasing process of information is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area. Erase state generation means (reset signal output unit 251)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature W1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means clearly different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Further, based on the fact that the abnormal event has been identified, the information erasing process is executed on at least the first predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information of the first predetermined storage area is held as it is despite the occurrence of the abnormal event.

Feature W2. The control means
A unit that executes processing for storing power failure response information when the supply of operation power to the control unit is stopped (in the 30th embodiment, a function that executes the processing of step S6709 and step S6710 in the main CPU 63) In the thirty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S7609 to step S7611 in the main CPU 63),
When the supply of the operation power to the control means is started and the process at the time of the supply start is executed in the situation where the power failure correspondence information is not stored, the information erasing process is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area. (In the 30th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S6607 in the main CPU 63, in the 31st embodiment, the function of executing the clearing processing in the event of abnormality in the main CPU 63) Function of executing the processing of step S7704, step S7705, step S7808 and step S7810 in the main CPU 63), and
Equipped with
The erasure state generation means starts the supply by the control means in a situation where the blackout response information is not stored based on the fact that the abnormal event is specified by the abnormal event monitoring means. The gaming machine according to the feature W1, characterized in that a process of time is performed.

  According to the feature W2, when the supply of the operation power to the control means is started and the process at the time of the supply start is executed in the situation where the power failure correspondence information is not stored, the information erasing process is at least a first predetermined process. By being executed on the storage area, the information on the first predetermined storage area is held as it is when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started in the situation where the processing at the time of the power failure is not properly performed. It is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in the state. In this case, based on the fact that an abnormal event has been identified, the control means executes processing at the time of supply start in a situation where power failure response information is not stored. In this way, when the process at the time of supply start is executed by the control means in the situation where the power failure response information is not stored, the information erasing process is performed using the configuration to execute the information erasing process. It is possible to execute the erasing process.

Feature W3. The control means executes various processes when receiving a reset signal, and receives the reset signal from a situation where the reset signal is not received in a situation where operating power is supplied. Processing at the start of the supply is started based on the fact that
The erasure state generation means causes the control means to stop the reset signal after it is determined that the control means does not receive the reset signal based on the fact that the abnormal event is specified by the abnormal event monitoring means. The gaming machine according to feature W2, wherein the reset signal is received.

  According to the feature W3, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects by switching the reception state of the reset signal.

Feature W4. The control means is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage means (register and program counter of the main CPU 63) at the time of execution of processing, and the information stored in the internal storage means is stored in the first predetermined storage. It is a configuration that can be temporarily evacuated to the area,
The abnormal event monitoring means monitors, as the abnormal event, whether or not an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the internal storage means.
The erasure status generation means generates a situation in which erasure processing of the information is performed on at least both the first predetermined storage area and the internal storage means, any one of the features W1 to W3 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature W4, since the information stored in the internal storage means can be temporarily saved in the first predetermined storage area, when an abnormality occurs with respect to the information stored in the internal storage means (1) An abnormality may occur in the information stored in the predetermined storage area. In this case, when an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the internal storage unit, the information erasing process is executed not only on the internal storage unit but also on the first predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed as it is despite the occurrence of an abnormality in the information stored in the first predetermined storage area.

  Feature W5. The erasing situation generation means prevents the information erasing process from being executed on the second predetermined storage area even if the abnormal event monitoring means identifies that the abnormal event is occurring. The gaming machine according to any one of the features W1 to W4, characterized in that

  According to the feature W5, even if an abnormal event occurs, it is possible to store and hold information in the second predetermined storage area.

  Feature W6. The erasure state generation means, based on the fact that the abnormal event is identified by the abnormal event monitoring means, indicates that the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area of the information are erased. The gaming machine according to any one of the features W1 to W4, characterized in that it causes a situation to be executed for both of them.

  According to the feature W6, the information erasing process is executed on both the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormal event has been identified. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information of the first predetermined storage area is held as it is despite the occurrence of the abnormal event, and the abnormal event occurs. It becomes possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information of the second predetermined storage area is held as it is despite the above.

  Feature W7. The erasing process of the information to the first predetermined storage area is executed in the first predetermined process, and the erasing process of the information to the second predetermined storage area is executed in the second predetermined process. The gaming machine according to the feature W6.

  According to the feature W7, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing, even in the information erasing process. It will be possible to

Feature W8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features W1 to W7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature W8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for the purpose.

  Feature W9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to feature W8, comprising: a counter area for high frequency support mode 233).

  According to the feature W9, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten at the time of execution.

  Feature W10. The second predetermined process execution means is information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature W9, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature W10, management of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, by deriving the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature W11. The gaming machine according to feature W10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature W11, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features W1 to W11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature X group>
Feature X1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes;
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control, a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined process execution means is an erase execution means for performing an information erasure process on the second predetermined storage area as the second predetermined process based on the occurrence of the erasure trigger (the second predetermined process). In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S6103 and step S6107 in the main CPU 63, in the thirtieth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S7204 in the main CPU 63, and in the thirty-first embodiment, the main CPU 63 A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of step S7508, and a function of executing the processes of step S7808 and step S7810 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment.

  According to the feature X1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means clearly different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

  In addition, since the deletion process of information is executed to the second predetermined storage area when the deletion trigger occurs, the second predetermined storage area is in spite of occurrence of an abnormality in the second predetermined storage area. It is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being performed in a state in which the information of (1) is held as it is. In addition, since the deletion process of the information is performed in the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from intervening in updating the information in the second predetermined storage area.

  Feature X2. The erase execution means executes the erase process of the information on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the non-erase object information (management and monitoring flag, information of return address, information of various registers) from being erased. The gaming machine according to feature X1 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature X2, the erasing process of the information in the second predetermined storage area is performed while the non-deletion target information in the second predetermined storage area is not erased. This makes it possible to execute the process of erasing information in the second predetermined storage area while preventing even the necessary information from being erased.

Feature X3. The second predetermined process execution means is configured to execute the second predetermined process from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. A storage execution unit (in the 30th embodiment) that stores return correspondence information (information on return address, information on various registers) required when returning to the state of executing the first predetermined process in the second predetermined storage area A function of executing the processing of steps S7102 to S7107 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps S7502 to S7507 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-first embodiment, and a step S7802 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment. ~ Function to execute the process of step S7807),
The game according to the feature X2, wherein the erasing execution means executes the erasing process of the information on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the recovery correspondence information from being erased as the non-erasing object information. Machine.

  According to the feature X3, the second predetermined processing is prevented from being deleted even when the second predetermined processing is returned to the first predetermined processing. It becomes possible to execute the process of erasing information in the storage area.

  Feature X4. The storage execution means is characterized by storing, as the return correspondence information, information on a return address of a program in the case of ending the second predetermined process and returning to the first predetermined process in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature X3.

  According to the feature X4, since the process of erasing information is performed on the second predetermined storage area while the information on the return address of the program is not erased when returning to the first predetermined process, the second predetermined storage area Even if the information erasing process is executed on the other hand, it is possible to return to the predetermined program in the first predetermined process when the second predetermined process is completed.

Feature X5. The control means is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing processing.
The game machine according to feature X3 or X4, wherein the storage execution unit stores information stored in the internal storage unit in the second predetermined storage area as the return correspondence information.

  According to the feature X5, since the erasing process of information is executed to the second predetermined storage area while the information of the internal storage means used in the first predetermined process is not erased, the second predetermined storage area On the other hand, even if the information erasing process is executed, it is possible to restore the information used in the first predetermined process to the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is completed.

  Feature X6. The erasure execution means is configured to execute the erasure process of the information on the second predetermined storage area as the occurrence of the erasure trigger based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X5, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature X6, since the process of erasing information is executed to the second predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the second predetermined storage area, an abnormality occurs in the second predetermined storage area. It is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed in the non-operating state.

  Feature X7. A means for monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal as the second predetermined process (in the 30th embodiment, the step S7201 to the step S7203 in the main CPU 63) A game machine according to feature X6, characterized in that the game machine has a function of executing processing.

  According to the feature X7, not only the erasing process of the information to the second predetermined storage area but also the monitoring of whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal is the second predetermined process without intervention of the first predetermined process. Since execution is performed, it becomes possible to execute monitoring of whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal and execution of erasing processing of information to the second predetermined storage area as a series of processing in the second predetermined processing. .

Feature X8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features X1 to X7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature X8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for the purpose.

  Feature X9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature X8, characterized in that the high frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided.

  According to the feature X9, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten at the time of execution.

  Feature X10. The second predetermined process execution means is information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature X9, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature X10, by managing the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by deriving the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature X11. The game machine according to Feature X10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature X11, when the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Note that for the configuration of the features X1 to X11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature Y group>
Feature Y1. Control means (main side CPU 63) for executing various processes;
The control means
First predetermined process execution means (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) which executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
Second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for nonspecific control, a stack area 224 for nonspecific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
First calculating means for calculating first reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the first predetermined storage area (in the 30th embodiment, the processing of step S6604 and step S6710 in the main CPU 63 is executed Function, the function of executing the processing of step S7304 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-first embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of steps S7610 and S7701 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature Y1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means clearly different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. In this case, first reference numerical value information corresponding to the plurality of information stored in the first predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the first reference numerical value information, it is possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the first predetermined storage area.

  Feature Y2. An information erasing unit configured to execute information erasing processing on the first predetermined storage area based on specifying occurrence of abnormality in the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculating unit (In the 30th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step S6607 in the main CPU 63; in the 31st embodiment, the function to execute the processing in steps S7401 and S7402 in the main CPU 63; in the 32nd embodiment, the main A game machine according to feature Y1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S7704 and step S7705 in the CPU 63.

  According to the feature Y2, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified with respect to the first reference numerical information, the information erasing process is performed on the first predetermined storage area, and therefore, even though the information abnormality has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information of the first predetermined storage area is held as it is.

Feature Y3. The first calculation means is
First power failure time calculation means for calculating the first reference numerical value information when the supply of operation power to the control means is stopped (in the 30th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S6710 in the main CPU 63; In the thirty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S7610 in the main CPU 63),
First power-on time calculating means for calculating the first reference numerical information when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started (in the 30th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S6604 in the main CPU 63) In the thirty-first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S7304 in the main CPU 63, and in the thirty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S7701 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The information erasing means is based on the fact that the first reference numerical value information calculated by the first power failure time calculation means does not match the first reference numerical value information calculated by the first power-on time calculation means. The gaming machine according to Feature Y2, wherein the information erasing process is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature Y3, it is possible to specify whether or not the information of the first predetermined storage area is stored and held across the situation in which the supply of the operation power is stopped by calculating the first reference numerical value information It becomes. Then, when the information of the first predetermined storage area is not stored and held across the situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped, the information erasing process is performed on the first predetermined storage area, so that the information abnormality is generated. It is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information of the first predetermined storage area is held as it is despite the occurrence of the.

  Feature Y4. Even if the information erasing means specifies the occurrence of an abnormality in the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculating means, the information erasing means does not execute the information erasing process on the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature Y2 or Y3.

  According to the feature Y4, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified with respect to the first reference numerical information, the erasing process of the information is performed to the first predetermined storage area, while the information erasing is performed to the second predetermined storage area Processing is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the information in the second predetermined storage area from being erased even in the situation where the information abnormality occurs in the first predetermined storage area.

  Feature Y5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features Y1 to Y4, wherein the first reference numerical value information is information which does not change according to the information stored in the second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature Y5, in the configuration in which the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area exist, information abnormality relating to the first predetermined storage area can be individually identified using the first reference numerical value information. It becomes possible.

  Feature Y6. A second calculating unit (function of executing the processing of step S7611 and step S7706 in the main CPU 63) is provided to calculate second reference numerical information corresponding to the plurality of information stored in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y5, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature Y6, second reference numerical information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the second reference numerical value information, it is possible to specify whether an information abnormality has occurred only in the second predetermined storage area.

  Feature Y7. Means for performing information erasing processing on at least the second predetermined storage area based on the specification of occurrence of abnormality regarding the second reference numerical value information calculated by the second calculation means ((2) The gaming machine according to the feature Y6, characterized in that the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of step S7808 and step S7810).

  According to the feature Y7, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified with respect to the second reference numerical information, the deletion process of the information is executed to the second predetermined storage area, so that the information abnormality has occurred. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information on the second predetermined storage area is held as it is.

Feature Y8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features Y1 to Y7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature Y8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for the purpose.

  Feature Y9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed. , A high frequency support mode counter area 233), the gaming machine according to the feature Y8 characterized in that.

  According to the feature Y9, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Also, by storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten at the time of execution.

  Feature Y10. The second predetermined process execution means is information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to Feature Y9, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature Y10, management of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, by deriving the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area It becomes possible to grasp the result.

  Feature Y11. The game machine according to Feature Y10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature Y11, when the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the management result of the game history at any timing. In addition, processing for controlling the progression of the game is executed as the first predetermined processing, and processing for managing the gaming history is executed as the second predetermined processing, thereby controlling the progression of the game. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

  Note that for the configuration of the features Y1 to Y11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature T group, the feature U group, the feature V group, the feature W group, the feature X group and the feature Y group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, various controls need to be suitably performed in the gaming machine as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Z group>
Feature Z1. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
Condition generation means (a function of executing the processing of step S7905, step S7916 and step S7917 in the main CPU 63) that brings about a settable condition capable of changing the setting value to be used;
In the situation where the supply of the operation power to the control means (main side CPU 63) having the setting means is started and the process at the time of the supply start is executed, the setting value of the use object in the situation which is not the settable situation Setting notification means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that causes notification to be performed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature Z1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, in order to check the set value set as the target of use, it is necessary to once stop the supply of the operating power to the control means and then restart the supply of the operating power to the control means. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to check the setting value illegally. In addition, since notification of the set value is performed in the situation where the process at the time of supply start is performed, it is not necessary to notify the set value in the situation where the game is interrupted. Thus, notification of the set value can be suitably performed.

  Feature Z2. The gaming machine according to feature Z1, wherein the situation generating unit is configured to be in the setting enabled situation in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply is performed.

  According to the feature Z2, at the time of supply start, the setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be set, and the situation in which the setting value of the use target in the situation other than the setting possible situation is notified It is possible to aggregate the situation in which processing is being performed.

Feature Z3. The first identification unit (function to execute the processing of step S7912 and step S7916 in the main CPU 63) for identifying the occurrence of the first trigger event,
The setting notification means can be set based on the fact that the process at the start of the supply is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature Z1 or Z2, wherein notification of the setting value of the object to be used in a situation that is not a situation is performed.

  According to the feature Z3, in order to notify of the setting value of the object to be used, it is necessary not only to start the supply of the operating power to the control means but also to generate the first trigger event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to check the setting value illegally.

  Feature Z4. The gaming machine according to feature Z3, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation is performed on the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) using the setting key.

  According to the feature Z4, in order to notify the setting of the use target, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation on the setting key insertion unit by the setting key. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to check the setting value illegally.

Feature Z5. The setting notification means is a condition where the notification condition is satisfied based on the fact that the process at the time of the supply start is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means. And, when the user is in the setting possible state, the notification of the setting value of the use target is performed in the situation not being the setting possible state,
The condition generating means is a setting condition based on the condition that the process at the time of the supply start is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means. Make the setting possible status when
The gaming machine according to the feature Z3 or Z4, wherein the notification condition and the setting condition are different.

  According to the feature Z5, the first trigger event is not only started to supply the operation power to the control means, but also when generating the settable situation and when notifying the set value of the object to be used. It needs to be generated. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to set either the setting value to be used due to fraud or the action to check the setting value to be used due to fraud. On the other hand, since the setting condition for generating the settable condition and the notification condition for notifying the setting value of the use object are different, the setting condition and the setting value of the use object are notified. It is possible to produce either one of them alone.

Feature Z6. The second specifying unit (a function of executing the processing of step S7905 in the main CPU 63) for specifying the occurrence of the second trigger event,
The setting condition is a condition where the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying unit in a situation where the process at the start of the supply is being executed, and the second specifying unit It is established based on the fact that the occurrence of the trigger event is identified.
The notification condition is a condition in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying unit in a situation where the process at the start of the supply is being executed, and the second specifying unit The gaming machine according to Feature Z5, which is established based on the fact that occurrence of a trigger event is not specified.

  According to the feature Z6, in order to generate the settable condition, it is necessary to start the supply of the operation power to the control means and generate the second trigger event as well as the first trigger event. As a result, whether setting of the setting value to be used is performed or notification of the setting value of the use target, it is possible not only to start the supply of the operating power to the control means. In the configuration in which the first trigger event needs to be generated, it is possible to further complicate the operation for generating the settable situation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent more intensively the act of setting the setting value to be used illegally.

  Feature Z7. The gaming machine according to Feature Z6, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

  According to the feature Z7, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary to start the supply of the operation power to the control means and to operate not only the first trigger event but also the predetermined operation means. As a result, while making it difficult to set the setting value to be used illegally, it is possible to prevent the operation for generating the settable situation from becoming excessively complicated. It becomes possible.

  Feature Z8. An information erasing unit that executes an information erasing process based on the fact that the occurrence of the second trigger event is identified by the second identifying unit in the situation where the process at the time of the supply start is executed; A game machine according to feature Z6 or Z7, characterized in that the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step S7915.

  According to the feature Z8, using the second trigger event necessary to execute the erasing process of the information, the condition for generating the settable situation, and the setting value of the use target in the situation which is not the settable situation It becomes possible to make it different from the conditions for the notification to be performed.

  Feature Z9. A game machine according to feature Z8, wherein the information erasing means executes the information erasing process even when the setting possible situation occurs.

  According to the feature Z9, the information erasing process can be performed when the setting possible state is reached.

  Feature Z10. In the situation where the process at the time of the supply start is executed, the occurrence of the second trigger event is identified by the second identifying unit, and the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identifying unit. A gaming machine according to the feature Z8 or Z9, wherein the information erasing unit erases the information by the information erasing unit although it is not the settable status if the status is not set.

  According to the feature Z10, according to whether or not the first trigger event is generated when the supply of the operation power to the control means is started, the information erasing process is performed and the setting possible state is obtained, and the information It is possible to select the case where the deletion process of is performed but there is no settable status.

  Note that for the configuration of the features Z1 to Z10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature a group>
Features a1. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
Condition generation means (a function of executing the processing of step S7905, step S7916 and step S7917 in the main CPU 63) that brings about a settable condition capable of changing the setting value to be used;
Information erasing means (function of executing the process of step S7915 in the main CPU 63) for executing the information erasing process;
Setting notification means (function of executing processing for setting confirmation in the main CPU 63) that notifies notification of the setting value of the object to be used in the situation where the setting is not possible;
First specifying means (a function of executing the processing of steps S7912 and S7916 in the main CPU 63) for specifying the occurrence of the first trigger event;
Second specifying means (a function of executing the processing of step S7905 in the main CPU 63) for specifying the occurrence of the second trigger event;
Equipped with
The situation generation means identifies the occurrence of the first trigger event by the first identification means in a situation where the supply of the operation power to the control means having the setting means is started and the process at the time of supply start is executed. Setting the settable status on the basis of the status where the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means, and
The information erasing unit erases the information based on the fact that the occurrence of the second trigger event is identified by the second identifying unit in a situation where the process at the start of the supply is being executed. Run
In the situation where the process at the time of the supply start is executed, the occurrence of the second trigger event is identified by the second identifying unit, and the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identifying unit. If the situation is not the case, although the setting possible situation is not reached, the information erasing means executes the process of erasing the information,
The setting notification means is a situation in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means in a situation where the process at the time of the supply start is being executed, and the second specifying means A gaming machine characterized in that notification of a set value of the object to be used in a situation that is not the settable situation is performed based on a situation where occurrence of a trigger event is not specified.

  According to the feature a1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Further, since the information erasing process can be executed, it is possible to prevent the game from being performed despite the occurrence of the information abnormality. Further, since the setting value set as the use target can be notified, the setting value can be confirmed.

  In this case, in order to confirm the set value set as the target of use, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the control means and to generate a first trigger event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to check the setting value illegally.

  Further, in order to generate a settable state, it is necessary to start supply of operation power to the control means and to generate a second trigger event as well as to generate a first trigger event. As a result, whether setting of the setting value to be used is performed or notification of the setting value of the use target, it is possible not only to start the supply of the operating power to the control means. In the configuration in which the first trigger event needs to be generated, it is possible to further complicate the operation for generating the settable situation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent more intensively the act of setting the setting value to be used illegally.

  In addition, using the second trigger event necessary to execute the deletion process of information, notification of the condition for generating the settable situation and the setting value of the use target in the situation which is not the settable situation is performed. It is possible to make the condition different from the condition for making it possible.

  Further, depending on whether or not the first trigger event is generated when the supply of the operation power to the control means is started, the information erasing process is executed and the setting can be made, and the information erasing process is performed. It is possible to select the case where there is no settable status of what is to be executed.

  Features a2. The gaming machine according to feature a1, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation is performed on the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) using the setting key.

  According to the feature a2, in order to notify of the setting of the use object, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation on the setting key insertion unit by the setting key. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to check the setting value illegally.

  Features a3. The gaming machine according to feature a1 or a2, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

  According to the feature a3, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary to start the supply of the operation power to the control means and to operate not only the first trigger event but also the predetermined operation means. As a result, while making it difficult to set the setting value to be used illegally, it is possible to prevent the operation for generating the settable situation from becoming excessively complicated. It becomes possible.

  Note that for the configuration of the features a1 to a3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature Z group and the feature a group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably checking the set value that determines the degree of advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. .

<Feature b group>
Feature b1. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
Condition generation means (a function of executing the processing of step S7905, step S7916 and step S7917 in the main CPU 63) that brings about a settable condition capable of changing the setting value to be used;
A setting monitoring unit (a function of executing the processing of step S8220 in the main CPU 63) that executes a setting monitoring process for monitoring whether the setting value to be used is abnormal or not;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the time of supply start which is executed when the supply of the operation power to the control means having the setting means is started.

  According to the feature b1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Further, since the setting monitoring process for monitoring whether the setting value to be used is abnormal is executed, it is possible to cope with the case where the setting value to be used is abnormal. In addition, since the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply, it is possible to obtain the above-described excellent effects while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing.

  Feature b2. The gaming machine according to feature b1, wherein the condition generating means generates the settable condition in a condition in which the process at the time of the supply start is being executed.

  According to the feature b2, since the setting possible situation occurs in the situation where the process at the time of supply start is executed, it becomes possible to set the setting value of the use object before the game is started . In this case, since the set value to be used in the process at the start of supply is set, the processing load of the process at the start of supply is increased accordingly. On the other hand, since the configuration at the start of supply does not include the setting monitoring process, the processing load at the start of supply is not further increased, so that the processing load at the start of supply is not increased. It becomes possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal.

  Feature b3. The gaming machine according to feature b1 or b2, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process after the process at the start of the supply is completed.

  According to the feature b3, since the setting monitoring process is executed after the process at the start of supply is completed, the setting value of the use target is abnormal while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing. It becomes possible to monitor whether or not.

  Feature b4. The gaming machine according to feature b3, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process each time a monitoring opportunity occurs after the process at the start of the supply is completed.

  According to the feature b4, since the setting monitoring process is executed each time a monitoring opportunity occurs after the process at the time of supply start is completed, it becomes easy to identify that the setting value of the use target is abnormal.

Feature b5. A unit (function to execute a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for executing an interrupt process which is periodically activated;
The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b4, wherein the setting monitoring process is included in the interrupt process.

  According to the feature b5, since the setting monitoring process is executed periodically each time it is activated, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of monitoring whether the setting value to be used is abnormal.

  Feature b6. The setting monitoring means controls the progress of the game based on the specification that the setting value of the object to be used is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S8207 in the main CPU 63 and The gaming machine according to any one of the features b1 to b5, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step S8302.

  According to the feature b6, when it is specified that the setting value of the object to be used is abnormal, the progress of the game is restricted, so the game is continued despite the abnormality of the setting value of the object to be used. It becomes possible not to do so.

  Feature b7. The setting monitoring means is a notification that allows the player to recognize that the setting possible situation should be generated based on the setting monitoring process specifying that the setting value to be used is abnormal. A game machine according to any one of the features b1 to b6, characterized in that it comprises means (function to execute the processing of step S8303 in the main CPU 63) to be executed.

  According to the feature b7, when it is specified that the setting value to be used is abnormal, a notification is made to allow the player to recognize that the setting possible status should be generated, so the setting of the use object is performed. If the value becomes abnormal, it is possible to urge the game hall manager to eliminate it.

  Note that for the configuration of the features b1 to b7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the group of features b, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to suitably manage the setting value that determines the degree of advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature c group>
Features c1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the predetermined display means;
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display enabling confirmation as to whether or not the predetermined display means is normal based on the occurrence of the check trigger (35th A game machine having a function of executing the processing of step S9102 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S9602 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.

  According to the feature c1, based on the occurrence of the check trigger, the display for check is performed by the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check whether the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c2. The predetermined display means includes a plurality of light emitting units (display segments 321 to 324),
The gaming machine according to feature c1, wherein the check display is a display capable of confirming that each of the plurality of light emitting units can be in a light emitting state.

  According to the feature c2, each of the plurality of light emitting units of the predetermined display means is in the light emitting state as the check display. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not each of the plurality of light emitting units of the predetermined display means is in the light emitting state.

  Feature c3. The gaming machine according to the feature c1 or c2, wherein the check trigger occurs when the supply of operation power is started.

  According to the feature c3, since the display for check is performed when the supply of the operation power is started, it is possible to quickly confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal or not.

  Features c4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features c1 to c3, wherein the check trigger occurs every time supply of operation power is started.

  According to the feature c4, it is possible to check whether or not the predetermined display means is normal each time the supply of the operating power is started.

  Features c5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features c1 to c4, wherein the check trigger occurs without requiring an operation for generating the check trigger when the supply of operation power is started.

  According to the feature c5, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display for check is performed without requiring a special operation, so it is easy to check whether the predetermined display means is normal or not. It is possible to

  Feature c6. The check control means causes the predetermined display means to display the check when the supply of the operating power is started and the check trigger is generated, and the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features c1 to c5, wherein the display for check is not performed on the predetermined display means when the check trigger has not occurred.

  According to the feature c6, since the check display is performed when the supply of the operation power is started and the check trigger is generated, the predetermined display is performed before the game is started in the gaming machine. It becomes possible to confirm whether the means is normal. On the other hand, even when the supply of operating power is started, the display for check is not performed when the check trigger does not occur, and the display for check is performed in a situation where the display for check is not necessary. It becomes possible not to do so.

Feature c7. A means for storing information in the usage correspondence storage means (management start flag) based on the fact that the gaming machine has been used in a predetermined mode (a function of executing the process of step S8606 in the main CPU 63);
The check control means generates the check trigger when the supply of the operation power is started and the information stored in the use correspondence storage means does not correspond to the use correspondence information. In the case where the display for check is performed on the predetermined display means and the supply of the operating power is started, and the information stored in the use correspondence storage means corresponds to the use correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature c6, wherein the display for check is not performed on the predetermined display unit as the check trigger is not generated.

  According to the feature c7, when the supply of the operation power is started until the gaming machine is used in the predetermined mode, the display for check is performed by the predetermined display means, and the gaming machine is used in the predetermined mode Even if the supply of the operating power is started based on the above, the display for check is not performed by the predetermined display means. Thereby, for example, when the supply of the operation power is started at the shipment stage of the gaming machine, the display for check is performed by the predetermined display means, thereby determining whether the predetermined display means is normal or not. It is possible to enable confirmation, and after the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the display for check from being performed by the predetermined display means even if the supply of operation power is started.

Feature c8. The check control means
A display termination unit (a function of executing the processing of step S9002 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101) that terminates the display for check on the predetermined display unit based on the occurrence of the termination trigger;
Cancel means for ending the display for check on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of the cancellation trigger even if the end trigger has not occurred (function to execute the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63, and A function to make a negative determination at step S9101, a function to execute the process at step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make a negative determination at step S9101);
The gaming machine according to any one of the features c1 to c7, comprising:

  According to the feature c8, the display for check is ended based on the occurrence of the cancel trigger even if the end trigger for the display for check is not generated. Even in this case, it is possible to terminate the check display in the middle and perform another display.

  Feature c9. The gaming machine according to the feature c8, wherein the cancel opportunity is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

  According to the feature c9, since the cancel trigger occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at an arbitrary timing.

Feature c10. The predetermined display control means is a separate display control means (function to execute the processing of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63) to perform separate display different from the display for check when the separate display execution situation is reached. Equipped
The gaming machine according to the feature c8 or c9, wherein the cancellation opportunity is generated based on the different display execution situation.

  According to the feature c10, since the display for check is ended when the cancellation trigger occurs based on the different display execution status, the separate display can be prioritized over the display for check.

  Feature c11. A feature c1 is characterized by including means (a function for executing the process of step S9406 in the main CPU 63) to wait for the progress of the process in a situation where the check display is being executed by the predetermined display means. The gaming machine according to any one of c10.

  According to the feature c11, since the display for check is performed by the predetermined display unit in a situation where the progress of the process is waiting, the display for check can be performed while suppressing the increase in the processing load.

  Feature c12. The check control means causes the predetermined display means to start the check display before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of the operation power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of c1 to c11.

  According to the feature c12, when the supply of the operation power is started, it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal or not before the game is played on the gaming machine.

Feature c13. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
A unit for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S8801 to step S8819 in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of steps S9401 to S9420),
Equipped with
It is configured that predetermined setting related processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value updating processing) related to the setting value can be performed in a situation where processing at the time of supply start of the operation power is being executed,
The game machine according to Feature c12, wherein the check control means causes the display for check on the predetermined display means to start in a state where processing at the time of start of supply of the operation power is being performed.

  According to the feature c13, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Further, in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed, a predetermined setting related process regarding the setting value may be performed. This makes it possible to execute setting related processing at a stage before the game is started. In this case, the display for check is started by the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed. As a result, it is possible to combine the processing for starting the display for check on the predetermined display means as well as the predetermined setting related processing with respect to the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  Feature c14. The check control means is a means for starting the display for check on the predetermined display means before timing that the predetermined setting related processing can be executed (in the 35th embodiment, steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to the feature c13, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of and the function of executing the processing of step S9404 and step S9405 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment.

  According to the feature c14, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the predetermined setting related processing is performed.

  Feature c15. The predetermined display control means is a means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting related process is executed (function of executing the process of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63) The game machine according to feature c13 or c14, comprising:

  According to the feature c15, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting related processing is executed, the administrator of the gaming hall confirms the current setting value by confirming the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, the configuration of the feature c13 is provided, and processing for starting the display for check on the predetermined display means as well as predetermined setting related processing is integrated in the processing at the time of supply start of the operating power. A process of confirming the predetermined display means and grasping whether or not the predetermined display means is normal and an operation of confirming the predetermined display means and grasping the current setting value at the time of supply start of the operating power Can be done together in a situation where

  In addition, when the configuration of the feature c14 is provided, the display for check is started by the predetermined display unit before the current setting value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, so the predetermined display unit is normal. After confirming whether or not the current setting value can be confirmed using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately.

Features c16. The check control means
A unit (function of executing the processing of step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63) to start the display for check on the predetermined display unit before the timing when the predetermined setting related processing can be executed;
A unit for ending the check display based on the occurrence of the cancellation trigger in the predetermined setting related processing in the situation where the check display is being performed (the function and step of executing the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 A function of performing negative determination at S9101, a function of executing the processing of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of performing negative determination at step S9101);
The gaming machine according to feature c15, comprising:

  According to the feature c16, since the display for check is started by the predetermined display unit before the current setting value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, after confirming whether the predetermined display unit is normal or not The present setting value can be confirmed using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately. Further, in the situation where the display for check is being performed, the predetermined display related processing is executed, and the display for check is ended based on the occurrence of the cancellation trigger. Thereby, when the predetermined setting related processing is executed, the check display may be ended and the current setting value may be displayed on the predetermined display unit without waiting for the check display to be ended. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to confirm the present setting value early.

  Feature c17. The gaming machine according to the feature c16, wherein the cancel opportunity is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

  According to the feature c17, since the cancel trigger occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at an arbitrary timing.

  Feature c18. A unit for executing a process for setting a settable status in which the setting value to be used can be changed as the predetermined setting-related process (step in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to make a positive determination at step S9407, a step S9418, and a step S9419). The gaming machine according to any one of features c13 to c17.

  According to the feature c18, not only the process for setting the setting value to be used but also the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display unit are summarized with respect to the process at the time of supply start of the operating power. It becomes possible.

Features c19. The setting means updates the setting value to be used based on the fact that the predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated in the settable state.
The check control means
A unit (function of executing the processing of step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63) to start the display for check in the predetermined display unit before the setting possible status is obtained;
Means for ending the check display based on the fact that the check display is being performed and the predetermined operation means is operated in the settable state (performs the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) A function and a function to make a negative determination at step S9101, a function to execute the processing at step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make a negative determination at step S9101),
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means displays the current setting value on the predetermined display means after the check display is ended in the settable state (performs the processing of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature c18, characterized in that

  According to the feature c19, since the display for check is started by the predetermined display unit before the current setting value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, after confirming whether the predetermined display unit is normal or not The present setting value can be confirmed using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately. Further, in the situation where the display for check is performed, the settable status is reached, and the display for check is ended based on the fact that the predetermined operation means is operated, and the current set value is displayed. As a result, when the setting possible state is reached, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to be ended. . Therefore, it becomes possible to confirm the present setting value early.

  Furthermore, in the configuration in which the setting value to be used is updated based on the fact that the predetermined operation means is operated in the settable situation, the display for check is based on the predetermined operation means being operated in the settable situation. Since the current setting value is displayed after being terminated, a dedicated operation for ending the check display and displaying the current setting value is not required. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting value to be used.

  Feature c20. As the predetermined setting-related process, there is provided means for executing a process for causing the current setting value to be displayed on the predetermined display means (a function for executing the process for confirming the setting in the main CPU 63) The game machine according to any one of the features c13 to c19 characterized in that

  According to the feature c20, not only the process for confirming the current setting value but also the process for causing the predetermined display means to start the check display with respect to the process at the time of supply start of the operating power may be consolidated. It becomes possible.

  Feature c21. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function of executing the processing of step S8708, step S8709 and step S9107 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to any one of the features c1 to c20, characterized in that

  According to the feature c21, it is possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall of the management result of the gaming history. In this case, whether the display corresponding to the management result of the game history in the predetermined display means is correctly performed by providing the configuration of the feature c1 and the check display is performed by the predetermined display means It is possible to check the

  Note that for the configuration of the features c1 to c21, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature d group>
Feature d1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the predetermined display means;
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means checks whether the predetermined display means is normal or not before processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of operation power is started. Control means for causing the predetermined display means to execute the display (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S9102 in the main CPU 63; in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the process of step S9602 in the main CPU 63) Game machine characterized by having the following functions.

  According to the feature d1, it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal or not by the display for check being performed by the predetermined display means. In addition, since the display for check is started before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of the operation power is started, when the supply of the operation power is started, the game machine is started. It is possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal or not before the game is played.

Feature d2. Setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
A unit for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S8801 to step S8819 in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of steps S9401 to S9420),
Equipped with
It is configured that predetermined setting related processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value updating processing) related to the setting value can be performed in a situation where processing at the time of supply start of the operation power is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature d1, wherein the check control means causes the display for check on the predetermined display means to be started in a situation where processing at the time of start of supply of the operation power is being performed.

  According to the feature d2, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Further, in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed, a predetermined setting related process regarding the setting value may be performed. This makes it possible to execute setting related processing at a stage before the game is started. In this case, the display for check is started by the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed. As a result, it is possible to combine the processing for starting the display for check on the predetermined display means as well as the predetermined setting related processing with respect to the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  Feature d3. The check control means is a means for starting the display for check on the predetermined display means before timing that the predetermined setting related processing can be executed (in the 35th embodiment, steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature d2, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step 36, and a function of executing the processing of step S9404 and step S9405 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment.

  According to the feature d3, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the predetermined setting related processing is performed.

  Feature d4. The predetermined display control means is a means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting related process is executed (function of executing the process of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63) A game machine according to feature d2 or d3, characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the feature d4, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting related processing is executed, the administrator of the gaming hall confirms the current setting value by confirming the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, the configuration of the feature d2 is provided, and processing for starting the display for check on the predetermined display means as well as predetermined setting related processing is integrated in the processing at the time of supply start of the operating power. A process of confirming the predetermined display means and grasping whether or not the predetermined display means is normal and an operation of confirming the predetermined display means and grasping the current setting value at the time of supply start of the operating power Can be done together in a situation where

  In addition, when the configuration of the feature d3 is provided, the display for check is started by the predetermined display unit before the current setting value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, so that the predetermined display unit is normal. After confirming whether or not the current setting value can be confirmed using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately.

Feature d5. The check control means
A unit (function of executing the processing of step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63) to start the display for check on the predetermined display unit before the timing when the predetermined setting related processing can be executed;
A unit for ending the check display based on the occurrence of the cancellation trigger in the predetermined setting related processing in the situation where the check display is being performed (the function and step of executing the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 A function of performing negative determination at S9101, a function of executing the processing of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of performing negative determination at step S9101);
The gaming machine according to feature d4, comprising:

  According to the feature d5, since the display for check is started by the predetermined display means before the current setting value is displayed by the predetermined display means, after confirming whether the predetermined display means is normal or not The present setting value can be confirmed using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately. Further, in the situation where the display for check is being performed, the predetermined display related processing is executed, and the display for check is ended based on the occurrence of the cancellation trigger. Thereby, when the predetermined setting related processing is executed, the check display may be ended and the current setting value may be displayed on the predetermined display unit without waiting for the check display to be ended. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to confirm the present setting value early.

  Feature d6. The gaming machine according to feature d5, wherein the cancel opportunity is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

  According to the feature d6, since the cancel trigger occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at an arbitrary timing.

  Feature d7. A unit for executing a process for setting a settable status in which the setting value to be used can be changed as the predetermined setting-related process (step in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to make a positive determination at step S9407, a step S9418, and a step S9419). The gaming machine according to any one of features d2 to d6.

  According to the feature d7, not only the process for setting the setting value to be used but also the process for causing the predetermined display means to start the display for check is summarized with respect to the process at the time of supply start of the operating power. It becomes possible.

Feature d8. The setting means updates the setting value to be used based on the fact that the predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated in the settable state.
The check control means
A unit (function of executing the processing of step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63) to start the display for check in the predetermined display unit before the setting possible status is obtained;
Means for ending the check display based on the fact that the check display is being performed and the predetermined operation means is operated in the settable state (performs the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) A function and a function to make a negative determination at step S9101, a function to execute the processing at step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make a negative determination at step S9101),
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means displays the current setting value on the predetermined display means after the check display is ended in the settable state (performs the processing of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature d7, characterized in that

  According to the feature d8, since the display for check is started by the predetermined display unit before the current setting value is displayed by the predetermined display unit, after confirming whether the predetermined display unit is normal or not The present setting value can be confirmed using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to check the set value accurately. Further, in the situation where the display for check is performed, the settable status is reached, and the display for check is ended based on the fact that the predetermined operation means is operated, and the current set value is displayed. As a result, when the setting possible state is reached, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to be ended. . Therefore, it becomes possible to confirm the present setting value early.

  Furthermore, in the configuration in which the setting value to be used is updated based on the fact that the predetermined operation means is operated in the settable situation, the display for check is based on the predetermined operation means being operated in the settable situation. Since the current setting value is displayed after being terminated, a dedicated operation for ending the check display and displaying the current setting value is not required. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting value to be used.

  Feature d9. As the predetermined setting-related process, there is provided means for executing a process for causing the current setting value to be displayed on the predetermined display means (a function for executing the process for confirming the setting in the main CPU 63) The game machine according to any one of features d2 to d8, characterized in that

  According to the feature d9, not only the process for confirming the current setting value but also the process for causing the predetermined display means to start the check display with respect to the process at the time of supply start of the operating power It becomes possible.

  Feature d10. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function of executing the processing of step S8708, step S8709 and step S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of the features d1 to d9, characterized in that

  According to the feature d10, it is possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall of the management result of the gaming history. In this case, whether the display corresponding to the management result of the game history in the predetermined display means is correctly performed by providing the configuration of the feature d1 and the check display is performed by the predetermined display means It is possible to check the

  Note that for the configuration of the features d1 to d10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the feature c group and the feature d group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as that illustrated above, a configuration capable of confirming whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is correctly performed is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

<Feature e group>
Feature e1. History storage execution means (normally placed ball management process in the main CPU 63) which stores the history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game And the ability to perform
Information deriving means (function of executing the process of step S8601 in the main CPU 63) for deriving aspect information (base value) corresponding to a game result using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the mode information storage means can store a plurality of the mode information derived at different timings by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature e1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized alteration of the history information. Moreover, while the aspect information corresponding to the result of a game is derived using the historical information memorize | stored in the log | history memory means, the derived | led-out aspect information is memorize | stored in an aspect information memory means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and it is preferable to manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event by using this managed information. It is possible to do Further, the mode information storage means can store a plurality of mode information derived at different timings. As a result, since the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods can be grasped, the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be grasped accurately.

Feature e2. The aspect information storage means is
A latest storage area (current area 311) for storing the latest mode information derived by the information deriving means;
A past storage area (first to third history areas 312 to 314) storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means before the aspect information stored in the latest storage area;
The gaming machine according to feature e1, comprising:

  According to the feature e2, since each of the latest mode information and the past mode information derived before that is stored, not only the latest thing but also the past thing is grasped about the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event It becomes possible.

Feature e3. A period lapse specifying unit (function of executing the processing of step S 8605 and step S 8613 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period from the occurrence of the period start trigger to the occurrence of the period end trigger has elapsed;
The latest storage execution means (step in the main CPU 63) stores the mode information derived by the information deriving means in a situation where it is not specified that the predetermined period has elapsed by the period lapse identifying means Function to execute the process of S8602),
The predetermined information derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit on the basis of the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse identification unit. Past storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S8607 and step S8614 in the main CPU 63) which stores period information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the past storage area;
The game machine according to feature e2, comprising:

  According to the feature e3, the mode information derived in the situation where the predetermined period has not passed is stored in the latest storage area, and the mode information derived when the predetermined period passes is stored in the past memory area Be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp the most recent occurrence frequency of the predetermined event, and to grasp the occurrence frequency of the past predetermined event in units of a predetermined period. Further, since the form information in units of a predetermined period is stored in the past storage area, the number of pieces of form information stored in the past storage area can be reduced.

  Feature e4. A unit for deleting the history information stored in the history storage unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specification unit (steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63) The game machine according to feature e3, comprising a function of performing.

  According to the feature e4, since the history information of the history information storage means is erased when the predetermined period has elapsed, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history information storage means. Also, even if the history information is erased when the predetermined period elapses as described above, the aspect information derived using the history information in the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area It is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the period of time later.

  Feature e5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features e2 to e4, wherein the past storage area is capable of storing a plurality of the mode information having different derived timings.

  According to the feature e5, since a plurality of mode information is stored in the past storage area, it is possible to compare the occurrence frequency of predetermined events corresponding to a plurality of periods.

Feature e6. Period lapse specifying means for specifying that a predetermined period from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of a predetermined period end trigger has elapsed (function of executing the processing of step S8605 and step S8613 in the main CPU 63) )When,
The predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse specifying means. Past storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S8607 and step S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing the aspect information corresponding to the period result corresponding to the game result in the period in the aspect information storage means;
Equipped with
The game according to any one of the features e1 to e5, wherein the mode information storage means can store a plurality of mode information corresponding to a plurality of periods corresponding to each of the different predetermined periods. Machine.

  According to the feature e6, since a plurality of past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored, it is possible to cope with a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of mode information stored in the mode information storage unit. It is possible to compare the occurrence frequency of predetermined events.

  Feature e7. A unit for deleting the history information stored in the history storage unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specification unit (steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63) The game machine according to feature e6, comprising a function of performing

  According to the feature e7, since the history information of the history information storage unit is erased when the predetermined period has elapsed, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history information storage unit. Also, even if the history information is erased when the predetermined period elapses as described above, the aspect information derived using the history information in the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area It is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the period of time later.

  Feature e8. Means (main side) for controlling notification means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification) such that notification corresponding to each of a plurality of the aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is sequentially executed The gaming machine according to any one of the features e1 to e7, comprising: a function of executing the processing of step S8702 to step S8709 in the CPU 63).

  According to the feature e8, the notification corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the notification unit. This makes it possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event. Moreover, since the alerting | reporting corresponding to each of several aspect information is performed one by one, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain separately the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in several period, suppressing the number of alerting | reporting means.

Feature e9. The mode information storage means includes a first storage area (first history area 312) capable of storing the mode information, and a second storage area (second history area 313) capable of storing the mode information. And, and,
The gaming machine is configured to shift the mode information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area by an instruction including at least an LDIR instruction when a shift trigger of information occurs (step S8607 in the main CPU 63) And the function to execute the process of step S8614). The gaming machine according to any one of the features e1 to e8.

  According to the feature e9, it is possible to shift the storage areas of the mode information with a simple processing configuration.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature e1 to e9 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature e group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, management of the gaming machine needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature f group>
Feature f1. A unit for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S8801 to step S8819 in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of steps S9401 to S9420),
A power failure monitoring unit (function to execute the processing of step S8901 in the main CPU 63 so that the power failure monitoring processing for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure can be executed in the situation where the processing at the time of supply start of the operation power is executed. )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature f1, the power failure monitoring process is executed even when the process at the start of the operation power supply start is performed, so a power failure occurs when the process at the operation start of the operation power supply is executed. When it occurs, it becomes possible to cope with it appropriately.

Feature f2. A unit (function to execute a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for executing an interrupt process which is periodically activated;
The interruption process includes the power failure monitoring process,
The gaming machine according to feature f1, characterized in that the interrupt process can be interrupted and activated in a situation where the process at the time of start of supply of the operation power is being executed.

  According to the feature f2, since the interrupt processing is periodically interrupted and started even when the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed, the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed Even under circumstances, it is possible to regularly monitor the occurrence of a power failure.

  Feature f3. The interrupt process can be started by interrupting even after completion of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power after the end post process (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature f2.

  According to the feature f3, the monitoring of the occurrence of the power failure is regularly performed in the situation where the process at the time of the supply start of the operating power is executed using the interrupt process which can be interrupted and started in the situation where the post-finishing process is being executed. It is possible to do

Feature f4. The interrupt process includes a progress response process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) to be executed to control the progress of the game.
When the interrupt process is interrupted and started in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed while the progress response process is not executed,
When the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the post-termination process is being executed, both the power failure monitoring process and the progress response process may be executed. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature f4, the monitoring of the occurrence of the power failure is regularly performed in the situation where the process at the time of the supply start of the operating power is executed using the interrupt process which can be interrupted and started in the situation where the post-finishing process is executed. In the configuration to be performed in the same manner, the progress response processing for controlling the progress of the game is not executed even if the interrupt processing is interrupted and started in the situation where the processing at the time of supply start of operation power is executed. It is possible to

Feature f5. The setting means (a function for executing the setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage,
Any one of the features f1 to f4 characterized in that in the situation where the process at the start of supply of the operation power is being executed, the setting value can be changed so as to be used. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature f5, the power failure monitoring process is executed even when the setting value to be used is being set. Therefore, a power failure occurs while setting the setting value to be used. Even then, it will be possible to cope with it properly.

  Feature f6. When the supply of operating power is stopped after the occurrence of a power failure is identified in the power failure monitoring process, it is set as a target of use before the supply of operating power is stopped when the supply of operating power is resumed. The gaming machine according to feature f5, wherein it is possible to play the game with the set value.

  According to the feature f6, even if a power failure occurs while the setting value to be used is being set, the occurrence of the power failure is identified by the power failure monitoring process, so the supply of operating power is resumed. In this case, it is possible to play the game in a situation where the set value selected at the timing of the occurrence of the power failure becomes the target of use. As a result, even if a power failure occurs in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, there is no need to set the setting value again when the supply of the operating power is resumed.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature f1 to f6 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the feature f group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to appropriately cope with the occurrence of a power failure, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature g group>
Feature g1. Setting correspondence storage area (in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the first to sixth setting information memories) for storing setting correspondence information (low probability mode success / failure table, high probability mode success / failure table) corresponding to the player's degree of advantage Setting correspondence storage means (setting correspondence storage area 325 in the thirty-ninth embodiment) having areas 325a to 325f, and in the forty embodiment the first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c) In the 40th embodiment, a setting correspondence storage area 326),
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63);
Profit related means for executing a profit related process (step S504) related to a player's profit by using the setting correspondence information stored in the setting corresponding storage area corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (Function to execute special figure fluctuation start processing in main side CPU 63),
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of types of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is smaller than the first predetermined number.

  According to the feature g1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, in a configuration in which a first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to setting values are provided, the number of types of setting values to be used is more than the first predetermined number. It is a small number. As a result, it becomes possible to share the configuration regarding the gaming machine in which the number of types of setting values to be used is the first predetermined number and the setting correspondence storage means, and in the case of changing the number of types of setting values It becomes possible to do design work simply. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to make composition concerning a setting value suitable.

Features g2. A correspondence information storage unit (a set value counter in a work area 221 for specific control) capable of storing and holding correspondence information corresponding to each of the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas;
The setting unit is configured to set the setting value to be used by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage unit based on a change operation.
The setting correspondence information of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is configured to be stored in at least one of the setting correspondence storage area, and is a part of the first predetermined number, and a plurality of the setting correspondences Since the same setting correspondence information is stored in the storage area, the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of the setting correspondence storage areas. The gaming machine described in g1.

  According to the feature g2, by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage unit based on the change operation, the setting value to be used is changed, and the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the changed correspondence information By using the setting correspondence information of in the profit related processing, the profit related processing is executed in a mode corresponding to the setting value of the object to be used. In this case, the setting correspondence information of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is configured to be stored in at least one setting correspondence storage area, and is a part of the first predetermined number and a plurality of setting correspondence storages Since the same setting correspondence information is stored in the area, the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas. Thus, the number of types of setting values to be used while using the configuration for determining the setting values to be used using the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas as it is and using the correspondence information storage means as it is Can be smaller than the first predetermined number.

Feature g3. The profit related means is
A unit for reading the setting correspondence information from the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means (a function of executing read processing of a yes / no table in the main CPU 63);
A unit (function of executing the process of step S504 in the main CPU 63) that executes the profit related process using the read setting correspondence information;
The gaming machine according to feature g2, comprising:

  According to the feature g3, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage unit Since the profit related processing may be executed using the setting correspondence information read out from the storage area, the configuration for reading out the setting correspondence information when executing the profit related processing can be used as it is.

Feature g4. The predetermined display control for causing the predetermined display means (the fourth notification display device 204) to perform the display corresponding to the current setting value in the situation where the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means can be changed A unit (function of executing the processing of step S9801 to step S9804 in the main CPU 63);
The predetermined display control means
A unit for reading out the display information of the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information of the correspondence information storage means (the processing of steps S9801 to S9803 in the main CPU 63 Function to execute)
A unit for causing the predetermined display unit to perform display corresponding to the display information of the read setting value (a function of executing the processing of step S9804 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine according to feature g2 or g3, characterized in that it comprises

  According to the feature g4, when changing the setting value to be used, it is possible to change the setting value while confirming the display corresponding to the current setting value displayed on the predetermined display means Become. In this case, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence information of the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information of the correspondence information storage unit is The display information of the corresponding set value is read out, and the display corresponding to the display information of the read out set value is displayed on the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to use the configuration for reading out the display information of the setting value when executing the display corresponding to the setting value as it is.

Feature g5. The number of types of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is a divisor of the first predetermined number, and is a number different from the first predetermined number,
The game machine according to Feature g4, wherein the number of the setting correspondence storage areas in which the setting correspondence information corresponding to each setting value is stored is the same among the setting values.

  According to the feature g5, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the frequency at which the display corresponding to the setting values is performed by the predetermined display means The setting values can be made identical.

  Feature g6. The setting correspondence information corresponding to the same setting value is stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in a sequential order in the change order of the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature g4 or g5 characterized by not being provided.

  According to the feature g6, it is possible to change the setting value to be displayed by the predetermined display means each time the change operation is performed once. This makes it possible to improve the operability of the change operation, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features g1 to g6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the feature g group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to make the configuration regarding the setting value that determines the degree of advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature h group>
Feature h1. Display means (special view display unit 37a, special view hold display unit 37b, common view display unit 38a, common view hold display unit 38b, first to fourth display devices for notification 201 to 204, first to fifth display circuits 261 ~ 265),
Display control means (main CPU 63) for transmitting display data (display data signal, display clock signal) corresponding to the display content to be displayed on the display means;
A display execution unit (display IC 266) configured to perform display setting on the display unit so that the display content corresponds to the display data when the display data is transmitted by the display control unit;
In a gaming machine provided with
A plurality of the display means,
The display control means comprises sequential transmission means (function to execute a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for sequentially transmitting the display data corresponding to each of the plurality of display means to the display execution means,
The display execution means, when the display data is transmitted by the display control means, displays the display contents corresponding to the display data with respect to the display means to be set with the display data among the plurality of display means. To set the display to be
The transmission interval of the display data from the sequential transmission unit to the display execution unit is the display execution unit before each display unit can not maintain the display corresponding to the display data. It is a transmission interval by which the display setting according to will be performed.

  According to the feature h1, the display execution means performs the display setting on the display means in accordance with the display data transmitted from the display control means, and the display means is controlled so as to have the display content corresponding to the display data. Ru. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means. In this case, in a configuration provided with a plurality of display means, the display execution means is not provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display means, but one display is provided for the plurality of display means. The execution means is also used. This makes it possible to increase the number of display means while suppressing the increase in the number of display execution means. In addition, the transmission interval of display data from the display control means to the display execution means is set by the display execution means to the display means before the display corresponding to the display data can not be maintained in each display means. Is set to the transmission interval that will be performed. As a result, even in the configuration in which one display execution means is shared with a plurality of display means, it is possible to appropriately perform the display corresponding to the display data in each display means. From the above, it is possible to make the configuration for controlling the display of the display means suitable.

  Feature h2. The sequential transmission means, when transmitting the display data to the display execution means, includes specific possible information (type data signal, type clock signal) that enables specification of the type of the display means to be set as the display data. The gaming machine according to the feature h1, which is transmitted to the display execution means.

  According to the feature h2, when display data is transmitted from the display control means, the display execution means may set the display data to the display means corresponding to the identifiable information transmitted from the display control means. As a result, even if one display execution unit is shared by a plurality of display units, the configuration of the display execution unit can be simplified.

  Feature h3. The sequential transmission unit is configured to repeat the update rounding when the plurality of display means are to be the setting target of the display data once in the predetermined order once. The gaming machine according to the feature h1 or h2, characterized in that it transmits display data.

  According to the feature h3, since the display control means may change the display means to be transmitted of the display data in accordance with the predetermined order, the processing configuration of the display control means can be simplified.

  Feature h4. Even if the contents of the display data for one display means are the same as the contents of the display data in the case where the contents of the display data for the one display means were transmitted last time are the same as the contents of the display data. The gaming machine according to any one of the features h1 to h3 characterized in that the display data is transmitted in the event of becoming unsatisfied.

  According to the feature h4, since the display data is transmitted even if the contents of the display data to be transmitted are not changed, one display execution means is shared with a plurality of display means. Also, the same display can be continued on the predetermined display means.

  Feature h5. The sequential transmission means executes a process for transmitting the display data in a predetermined interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) which is activated by interrupting in a situation where the display control means is executing a predetermined process. A game machine according to any one of features h1 to h4 characterized in that.

  According to the feature h5, since the process for transmitting display data is executed in the predetermined interrupt process, it is possible to set the cycle in which the display data is set to each display means as the predetermined cycle. Therefore, even if one display execution means is shared by a plurality of display means, the display means can not maintain the display corresponding to the display data in each display means. It is possible to set display data by the display execution means.

  Feature h6. The process for transmitting the display data to the plurality of display means targeted for the display setting by the display execution means is summarized in the predetermined interrupt process. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature h6, it is possible to make the cycle in which the display data is set to each display means to be displayed and set by the display execution means the same cycle.

Feature h7. The display control means has means (function to execute the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) to interrupt and start the specific interrupt process (the first timer interrupt process) in a situation where the predetermined process is being performed ,
The gaming machine according to the feature h5 or h6, wherein an interrupt cycle of the predetermined interrupt process is a cycle shorter than an interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process.

  According to the feature h7, the process of transmitting the display data to the display execution means is performed in the predetermined interrupt process which is a cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process. As a result, it becomes possible to transmit display data in a short cycle as compared with a configuration in which processing for transmitting display data to the display execution means is executed in specific interrupt processing.

  Feature h8. The game machine according to Feature h7, wherein a process for advancing a game is executed in the specific interrupt process.

  According to the feature h8, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while performing the specific interrupt process at an appropriate cycle when executing the process for advancing the game.

  Feature h9. The gaming machine according to the feature h7 or h8, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started even after the specific interrupt process is being executed.

  According to the feature h9, since the predetermined interrupt processing is started by interrupting even when the specific interrupt processing is being executed, the display data transmission cycle is set even when the specific interrupt processing is interrupted and started. It becomes possible to make it a predetermined cycle.

  Feature h10. In the features h7 to h9, the interrupt of the specific interrupt process is inhibited when the predetermined interrupt process is started, and the interrupt of the specific interrupt process is permitted when the predetermined interrupt process is ended. The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the feature h10, it is possible to prevent the specific interrupt process from being interrupted and executed in a situation where the predetermined interrupt process is being executed. This makes it possible to prioritize processing for transmitting display data.

Feature h11. The display control means is means for executing the process at the start of the supply of the operating power when the supply of the operating power is started (in the thirty-third embodiment, the function of executing the process of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63) In the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, and in the thirty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63, thirty-seventh embodiment The main CPU 63 has the function of executing the processing of step S9501 to step S9518, and the 42nd embodiment has the function of executing the processing of step S9901 to step S9917 of the main CPU 63).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features h5 to h10, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started even if the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed.

  According to the feature h11, it is possible to control the display of the plurality of display means even in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed. Further, since the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started to the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, the supply of the operating power can be performed without complicating the process configuration of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power. It becomes possible to control display of a plurality of display means in a situation where processing at the time of start is being executed.

Feature h12. The setting means (a function for executing the setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage,
In the situation where the process at the time of the supply start of the operation power is being executed, it is possible to become the setting possible situation where it is possible to change the setting value to be used.
The sequential transmission unit transmits the display data for causing a display corresponding to the current setting value to be performed by the predetermined display unit in the settable state to the display execution unit. The gaming machine according to feature h11.

  According to the feature h12, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, the setting operation of the setting value to be used can be easily performed. .

Feature h13. The display control means is a means (function to execute the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) to execute the progress handling process to control the progress of the game after the process at the time of the supply start of the operation power is finished. Equipped
The sequential transmission means may cause the display execution means to display the display data for causing the correspondence display corresponding to the execution result of the progress correspondence process to be performed by at least a part of the plurality of display means. To send,
The gaming machine according to the feature h11 or h12, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even after the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is finished.

  According to the feature h13, by using the predetermined interrupt processing, there are a plurality of situations where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed and the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished. It becomes possible to perform display control of the display means of.

  Note that for the configuration of the features h1 to h13, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature i group>
Feature i1. First interrupt execution means (first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) which interrupts the other process based on the passage of the first interrupt cycle and executes the first interrupt process in a situation where the other process is being executed And the ability to perform
Second interrupt execution means (a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) which interrupts the other process based on the passage of the second interrupt cycle and executes the second interrupt process in a situation where the other process is being executed And the ability to perform
Equipped with
The second interrupt cycle is a cycle shorter than the first interrupt cycle,
For controlling display of predetermined display means (special view display unit 37a, special view reserve display unit 37b, common view display unit 38a, regular view reserve display unit 38b, first to fourth display devices for notification 201 to 204) A game machine characterized in that a process is executed in the second interrupt process.

  According to the feature i1, processing for display control of the predetermined display means is performed in the predetermined interrupt processing which is a cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt processing. This makes it possible to perform display control of the predetermined display means in a short cycle as compared with a configuration in which processing for display control of the predetermined display means is executed in the specific interrupt process.

  Feature i2. The game machine according to feature i1, wherein a process for advancing a game is executed in the first interrupt process.

  According to the feature i2, while the first interrupt process is activated at an appropriate cycle when executing the process for advancing the game, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

  Feature i3. The gaming machine according to the feature i1 or i2, wherein the second interrupt process is started by interrupting even if the first interrupt process is being executed.

  According to the feature i3, the second interrupt process is started even after the first interrupt process is being executed, so even if the first interrupt process is interrupted and started, the predetermined display is made. It becomes possible to perform display control of the means at a predetermined cycle.

  Feature i4. The feature is characterized in that the interrupt of the first interrupt process is inhibited when the second interrupt process is started, and the interrupt of the first interrupt process is permitted when the second interrupt process is ended. The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i3.

  According to the feature i4, it is possible to prevent the first interrupt process from being interrupted and executed in a situation where the second interrupt process is being executed. Thereby, priority can be given to display control of a predetermined display means.

Feature i5. A unit (function to execute main processing in the main CPU 63) for executing processing at the time of supply start of the operation power when supply of the operation power is started;
The game machine according to any one of the features i1 to i4, wherein the second interrupt process is activated even if the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is being executed.

  According to the feature i5, it is possible to control the display of the predetermined display means even in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed. In addition, since the second interrupt process is interrupted and started to the process at the start of the operation power supply, the operation power can be increased without complicating the process configuration of the process at the start of the operation power supply start. It becomes possible to control display of a predetermined display means in a situation where processing at the time of supply start is being performed.

Feature i6. The setting means (a function for executing the setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage,
In the situation where the process at the time of the supply start of the operation power is being executed, it is possible to become the setting possible situation where it is possible to change the setting value to be used.
The second interrupt execution means executes, in the second interrupt process, a process for causing a display corresponding to the current setting value to be performed by the predetermined display means in the settable state. The gaming machine according to feature i5.

  According to the feature i6, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, the setting operation of the setting value to be used can be easily performed. .

  Feature i7. The second interrupt execution means executes the second interrupt process based on the passage of the second interrupt cycle even after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished. Or the game machine according to i6.

  According to the feature i7, by using the predetermined interrupt process, the predetermined state is performed in any of the situation where the process at the time of supply start of the operating power is being executed and the situation after the process at the start of supply of the operating power is finished. It becomes possible to perform display control of the display means of.

  Note that for the configuration of the features i1 to i7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature h group and the feature i group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to make the configuration for displaying on the display means suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature j group>
Feature j1. A unit for executing the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power based on the start of the supply of the operating power (in the thirty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S7901 to step S7918 in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step S8801 to step S8819 in the main CPU 63, a function to execute the processing of step S9401 to step S9420 in the 36th embodiment, and the main CPU 63 in the thirty-seventh embodiment. A function of executing the processing of step S9501 to step S9518, and a function of executing the processing of step S9901 to step S9917 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment),
The predetermined interrupt execution means (the function to execute the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63, the function to execute the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) which interrupts the process at the start of supplying the operation power and executes the predetermined interrupt process )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature j1, the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated even in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed. Therefore, the process is set as the predetermined interrupt process even immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power It is possible to give priority to the execution of the processing being performed. In addition, since it is not necessary to set the process set as the predetermined interrupt process to the process at the start of supply of the operating power, the operation can be performed without complicating the process configuration of the process at the start of supply of the operating power. It is possible to give priority to the execution of the process set as the predetermined interrupt process even immediately after the start of the power supply. From the above, it is possible to suitably perform the process when the supply of the operating power is started.

  Feature j2. The predetermined interrupt execution means is a predetermined display means (special view display unit 37a, special view hold display unit 37b, common view display unit 38a, common view hold display unit 38b, first to fourth display devices for notification 201 to 204 The gaming machine according to feature j1, wherein processing for display control is performed in the predetermined interrupt processing.

  According to the feature j2, even immediately after the start of supply of the operating power, it is possible to cause the predetermined display to perform predetermined display.

Feature j3. The setting means (a function for executing the setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage,
In the situation where the process at the time of the supply start of the operation power is being executed, it is possible to become the setting possible situation where it is possible to change the setting value to be used.
The predetermined interrupt execution means performs a process for causing a display corresponding to the current setting value to be performed on the predetermined display means (the fourth notification display device 204) in the settable state to the predetermined interrupt process. The game machine according to feature j1 or j2, which is characterized in that it is executed.

  According to the feature j3, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, the setting operation of the setting value to be used can be easily performed. .

  Feature j4. The predetermined interrupt execution means executes the predetermined interrupt process based on the passage of a predetermined interrupt cycle even after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the feature j4, by using the predetermined interrupt process, the predetermined state is performed in any of the situation where the process at the time of supply start of the operating power is being executed and the situation after the process at the start of supply of the operating power is finished. It becomes possible to execute the process set as the interrupt process.

  Feature j5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features j1 to j4, wherein the predetermined interrupt execution means executes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in the predetermined interrupt process.

  According to the feature j5, the power failure monitoring process is executed even when the process at the start of the operation power supply start is performed, so a power failure occurs when the process at the operation start of the operation power supply is executed. When it occurs, it becomes possible to cope with it appropriately.

Feature j6. The predetermined interruption process includes a process corresponding to the progress (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game.
If the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed while the progress response process is not executed.
If the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the end post process (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is executed after the process at the start of supply of the operation power is finished, the power failure monitoring A gaming machine according to Feature j5, wherein both processing and the progress handling processing can be performed.

  According to the feature j6, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored in the situation where the process at the time of the supply start of the operating power is executed using the predetermined interrupt process which can be interrupted and started in the situation where the post-end process is executed. In the configuration to be performed periodically, the progress response processing for controlling the progress of the game is not executed even if the predetermined interrupt processing is interrupted and started in the situation where the processing at the time of supply start of the operation power is executed. It will be possible to

  Note that for the configuration of the features j1 to j6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature j group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., the processing when the supply of the operating power is started needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature k group>
Feature k1. History storage execution means (normally placed ball management process in the main CPU 63) which stores the history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game And the ability to perform
Information deriving means (function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving aspect information (base value) corresponding to a game result using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Aspect information display control means (main side CPU 63) for controlling display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed Function for executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in
A predetermined correspondence display in which a predetermined correspondence display (pre-shift display) is performed by the information display unit before a display corresponding to the mode information is newly started based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger. Control means (function of executing the process of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature k1, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized alteration of the history information. Moreover, while the aspect information corresponding to the result of a game is derived | led-out using the historical information memorize | stored in the log | history memory means, the display corresponding to the derived | led-out aspect information is performed by an information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Further, based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means before the display corresponding to the mode information is newly started. As a result, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it is possible to give priority to the corresponding display corresponding to it by the information display means over the display corresponding to the mode information, and using the information display means It is possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred.

Features k2. A period lapse specifying means (function to execute the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period from the occurrence of a predetermined period start timing to the occurrence of the predetermined period end timing has elapsed. ,
The predetermined correspondence display control means determines that the predetermined correspondence display is made by the information display means as the predetermined display trigger is generated when the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature k1, characterized in that it is performed.

  According to the feature k2, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the information display means performs the predetermined correspondence display, and thereafter, the information display means newly starts the display corresponding to the mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the mode information displayed on the information display means is after the lapse of a predetermined period.

Feature k3. The information deriving means uses the history information corresponding to the predetermined event which occurs later than the predetermined period, based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specifying means. To derive the aspect information,
The predetermined correspondence display control means, based on the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed is specified by the period lapse specifying means, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event occurring after the predetermined period. The predetermined correspondence display may be performed by the information display means before the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed by the information display means. The gaming machine according to feature k2.

  According to the feature k3, in the configuration in which new derivation of the mode information is performed on the basis of the passage of the predetermined period, when the predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means A display corresponding to the newly derived aspect information is performed after the elapse of a predetermined period. Thus, the administrator of the game hall can grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means is the display corresponding to the newly derived mode information after the predetermined period has elapsed. It becomes.

  Feature k4. Means for deleting the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse specifying means (performing the process of step SA 217 in the main CPU 63) A game machine according to feature k3, characterized in that it has a function.

  According to the feature k4, since the history information of the history information storage unit is erased when the predetermined period has elapsed, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history information storage unit.

Feature k5. The predetermined information derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit on the basis of the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse identification unit. Memory executing means (function of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the game result in the period in the mode information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as period correspondence mode information Equipped with
The aspect information display control means performs display control of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period correspondence aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed.
The predetermined correspondence display control means corresponds to the period newly stored in the mode information storage means by the storage execution means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse identification means. The game according to any one of the features k2 to k4, wherein the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display unit before the display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display unit. Machine.

  According to the feature k5, the past mode information derived in the unit of the predetermined period is stored as the period correspondence mode information, and the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall can grasp past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period by confirming the information display means. In addition, when the predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the period correspondence aspect information newly derived when the predetermined period has elapsed is performed. Thus, the game hall manager may or may not be the display corresponding to the time correspondence mode information newly derived based on the passage of the predetermined period in the information display means. Can be understood.

Feature k6. The aspect information storage means can store a plurality of period correspondence aspect information corresponding to each of the different predetermined periods,
The aspect information display control means performs display control of the information display means such that display corresponding to each of the plurality of period correspondence aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed. The gaming machine according to feature k5.

  According to the feature k6, since a plurality of past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored and a display corresponding to the plurality of period correspondence mode information is performed by the information display means, a plurality of It becomes possible to compare the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the predetermined period.

  Feature k7. From the situation where the display corresponding to the mode information is being performed, before the display corresponding to the mode information different from the mode information is performed, the information display means is brought into the pre-switching state (interval non-display state) The gaming machine according to any one of the features k1 to k6, characterized in that it comprises means for performing the processing of step SA316 and the second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature k7, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the administrator of the game hall clearly indicates that the mode information to be displayed is switched by the information display means being in the pre-switching state. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, the configuration of the feature k1 is provided, and the predetermined display is performed by the information display unit based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the predetermined display trigger has occurred using the information display means in which the display corresponding to the different mode information is performed with the state before switching being interposed therebetween.

  Feature k8. When the predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to display the predetermined correspondence display even if the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the mode information has not elapsed. A game machine according to any one of the features k1 to k7, characterized in that the game machine is started.

  According to the feature k8, when the predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined correspondence display is started even if the display corresponding to the mode information is in the middle. As a result, it is possible to early notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred.

  Feature k9. When the predetermined display trigger occurs during the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the mode information, the predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to display the predetermined correspondence display after the display continuation period has elapsed. A game machine according to any one of the features k1 to k7, characterized in that the game machine is started.

  According to the feature k9, even if the predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined correspondence display is started after the display corresponding to the mode information displayed at that time is completed. This makes it possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred while not disturbing the display corresponding to the mode information that has already been performed.

Feature k10. A mode information storage unit (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit;
The aspect information storage means allows a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311, first history area 312) to enable storage of each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information derivation means. , Second history area 313, third history area 314),
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that the display corresponding to each of a plurality of the aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k9.

  According to the feature k10, since the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of mode information is sequentially executed, it is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the plurality of periods while suppressing the number of information display means It becomes. In addition, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to the predetermined display order, the administrator of the game hall grasps the type of mode information to be displayed It becomes easy to do.

  Feature k11. A game machine according to feature k10, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

  According to the feature k11, since the predetermined display order of the display corresponding to the mode information is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas, when the display corresponding to one mode information is newly started, It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of aspect information.

  Features k12. When the information display control means causes the information display means to perform the display corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, in the first order in the predetermined display order The game machine according to feature k10 or k11, wherein the game starts from a display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

  According to the feature k12, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, the display is started from the display corresponding to the aspect corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order. Thus, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it is possible to check again the display corresponding to the mode information from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature k13. Period lapse specifying means (function to execute the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period from the occurrence of the predetermined period start timing to the occurrence of the predetermined period end timing has elapsed;
The predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse specifying means. Storage executing means (function of executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the period as the period correspondence aspect information in the plurality of specific storage areas;
Equipped with
Any one of the features k10 to k12, wherein the storage execution means is configured to store the period correspondence mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas according to the order derived by the information derivation means. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature k13, it is possible to confirm the period correspondence mode information in accordance with the derived order.

  Features k14. The information deriving means executes an information deriving process for deriving the mode information based on occurrence of a process execution trigger, and the mode information is derived after the mode information is started to be derived. The gaming machine according to any one of the features k1 to k13, characterized in that the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times before the completion of.

  According to the feature k14, since the information derivation process is executed multiple times after the derivation of the aspect information is started until the derivation of the aspect information is completed, the derivation of the aspect information is completed in one information derivation process It is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the information derivation process as compared with the configuration to be performed.

Features k15. Period lapse specifying means (function to execute the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period from the occurrence of the predetermined period start timing to the occurrence of the predetermined period end timing has elapsed;
The predetermined information derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit on the basis of the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse identification unit. Memory executing means (function of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the game result in the period in the mode information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as period correspondence mode information )When,
Equipped with
The aspect information display control means performs display control of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period correspondence aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed.
The predetermined correspondence display control means determines that the predetermined correspondence display is made by the information display means as the predetermined display trigger is generated when the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature k14, characterized in that it is performed.

  According to the feature k15, the past mode information derived in the unit of the predetermined period is stored as the period correspondence mode information, and the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall can grasp past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period by confirming the information display means. In addition, when the predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the period correspondence aspect information newly derived when the predetermined period has elapsed is performed. Thus, the game hall manager may or may not be the display corresponding to the time correspondence mode information newly derived based on the passage of the predetermined period in the information display means. Can be understood. In addition, since it is possible to perform predetermined correspondence display in a period during derivation of period correspondence aspect information, it is in the process of deriving period correspondence aspect information after a predetermined period has elapsed. Nevertheless, regardless of that, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information from being performed.

  Features k16. The predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display over a period longer than a longest period required to derive one of the aspect information by the information derivation means. The gaming machine according to feature k15.

  According to the feature k16, when the predetermined period has elapsed and the period correspondence aspect information is being derived, the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means.

  Note that for the configurations of the features k1 to k16, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature l group>
Feature l1. History storage execution means (normally placed ball management process in the main CPU 63) which stores the history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game And the ability to perform
Information deriving means (function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving aspect information (base value) corresponding to a game result using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means;
Aspect information display control means (main side for controlling display of information display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to the aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed A function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the CPU 63),
Equipped with
The aspect information storage means may store a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311, first history area 312) so as to enable storage of each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information deriving means. , Second history area 313, third history area 314),
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that the display corresponding to each of the plurality of the aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order. A game machine that features it.

  According to the feature 11, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized alteration of the history information. Moreover, while the aspect information corresponding to the result of a game is derived | led-out using the historical information memorize | stored in the log | history memory means, the display corresponding to the derived | led-out aspect information is performed by an information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

  Further, since a plurality of mode information having different derived timings are stored in the mode information storage means and the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information is sequentially executed, the number of information display means can be reduced. It is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods. In addition, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to the predetermined display order, the administrator of the game hall grasps the type of mode information to be displayed It becomes easy to do.

  Characteristics l2. A game machine according to feature 11, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

  According to the feature 12, since the predetermined display order of the display corresponding to the mode information is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas, the display target is newly displayed when the display corresponding to one mode information is started. It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of aspect information.

Characteristics l3. A predetermined correspondence display in which a predetermined correspondence display (pre-shift display) is performed by the information display unit before a display corresponding to the mode information is newly started based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger. Control means (function to execute the process of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
When the information display control means causes the information display means to perform the display corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, in the first order in the predetermined display order The gaming machine according to the feature 11 or 12, wherein the game starts from a display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

  According to the feature 13, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, the display is started from the display corresponding to the aspect corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order. As a result, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it is possible to confirm again the display corresponding to the type information from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Characteristics l4. Period lapse specifying means (function to execute the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period from the occurrence of the predetermined period start timing to the occurrence of the predetermined period end timing has elapsed;
The predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse specifying means. Storage executing means (function of executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the period as the period correspondence aspect information in the plurality of specific storage areas;
Equipped with
Any one of the features l1 to l3 characterized in that the storage execution means is in a state where the period correspondence mode information is stored in the plurality of specific storage areas according to the order derived by the information derivation means. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature l4, it is possible to confirm the period correspondence mode information in accordance with the derived order.

  Characteristics l5. From the situation where the display corresponding to the mode information is being performed, before the display corresponding to the mode information different from the mode information is performed, the information display means is brought into the pre-switching state (interval non-display state) The gaming machine according to any one of the features l1 to l4, further comprising means for performing the processing of step SA316 and the second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature l5, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the administrator of the game hall clearly indicates that the mode information to be displayed is switched by the information display means being in the pre-switching state. It becomes possible to grasp.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature 11 to 15 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature m group>
Feature m1. History storage execution means (normally placed ball management process in the main CPU 63) which stores the history information of the corresponding game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game And the ability to perform
Information deriving means (function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving aspect information (base value) corresponding to a game result using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Equipped with
The information deriving means executes an information deriving process for deriving the mode information based on occurrence of a process execution trigger, and the mode information is derived after the mode information is started to be derived. A game machine characterized by executing the information derivation process a plurality of times before completing the above.

  According to the feature m1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized alteration of the history information. Further, by deriving the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, the management result of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is grasped It becomes possible. In addition, since information derivation processing is executed multiple times after the derivation of the aspect information is started until the derivation of the aspect information is completed, compared to the configuration in which the derivation of the aspect information is completed in one information derivation processing This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for executing the information derivation process.

Features m2. Period lapse specifying means (function to execute the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period from the occurrence of the predetermined period start timing to the occurrence of the predetermined period end timing has elapsed;
The predetermined information derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit on the basis of the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse identification unit. Memory executing means (function of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the game result in the period in the mode information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as period correspondence mode information )When,
Aspect information display control means (display control of information display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to the period correspondence aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed A function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
The predetermined correspondence display control means (step SA320 in the main CPU 63) causes the information display means to display the predetermined correspondence display based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse specifying means Processing and the second timer interrupt processing),
The gaming machine according to feature m1, comprising:

  According to the feature m2, the past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period correspondence mode information, and a display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall can grasp past period correspondence mode information derived in units of a predetermined period by confirming the information display means. In addition, when the predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the period correspondence aspect information newly derived when the predetermined period has elapsed is performed. Thus, the game hall manager may or may not be the display corresponding to the time correspondence mode information newly derived based on the passage of the predetermined period in the information display means. Can be understood. In addition, since it is possible to perform predetermined correspondence display in a period during derivation of period correspondence aspect information, it is in the process of deriving period correspondence aspect information after a predetermined period has elapsed. Nevertheless, regardless of that, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information from being performed.

  Feature m3. The predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display over a period longer than a longest period required to derive one of the aspect information by the information derivation means. The gaming machine according to the feature m2.

  According to the feature m3, when the predetermined period has elapsed and the period correspondence aspect information is being derived, the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means.

  Note that for the configuration of the features m1 to m3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the feature k group, the feature l group, and the feature m group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, management of the gaming machine needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature n group>
Feature n1. Setting means (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
The change of the setting value to be used based on the fact that the first setting related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of operation power is started. Function and step for making an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment so that the setting possible state (the state in which the setting value update process is executed) can be performed A function to make a positive determination at SA 417, a function to make a positive determination at step SA 905 and step SA 916 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-sixth embodiment, and a function to make a positive determination at step SA 917);
When the supply of the operation power is started, the setting value to be used set by the setting unit is based on the second setting related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) being performed. Notification generation means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) to be notified;
Equipped with
When the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable status, the status generating means can be set even if the second setting related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is subsequently started. After start generation means for achieving the situation (in the 45th embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63, in the 46th embodiment, a positive determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63 A game machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature n1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In addition, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of the operating power is started, and therefore an action to illegally change the setting value to be used It is possible to make it difficult to In addition, since the setting value of the use target is notified by performing the second setting related operation when the supply of the operation power is started, the game hall manager confirms the setting value of the use target as necessary. It becomes possible.

  Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible state, the setting possible state is obtained even if the second setting related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the set value to be used, setting of the use target rather than the notification of the set value to be used when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter It becomes possible to give priority to the change of the value, and it becomes possible to prevent the game from being started even though the change of the setting value to be used is not actually completed.

  Features n2. The status notifying means (a function for executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63 and a function for executing the second timer interrupt processing) for notifying the setting value in the middle of change in the setting possible status is notified The gaming machine according to feature n1, characterized in that

  According to the feature n2, since the setting value in the middle of the change is notified in the settable situation, the setting value can be changed while grasping the current setting value. In addition, by notifying the setting value in the middle of the change in the settable situation as described above, the setting can be set even if the second setting related operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started. Even in the configuration in which the change operation of the value is prioritized, it is possible to substantially confirm the set value.

  Feature n3. Each of the status notification means and the notification generation means is characterized in that the target setting value is displayed on a predetermined display means (the first to fourth notification displays 201 to 204). The gaming machine described in n2.

  According to the feature n3, since the target setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in either of the case where the setting value is changed and the case where the setting value is confirmed, the target value is displayed in each situation. On the other hand, it is possible to use a predetermined display means. Also, even if the second setting related operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started, even if the configuration is in the setting possible state, the setting possible state causes the predetermined display means to set the setting value. Is displayed, the manager of the game hall that has performed the second setting related operation can confirm the set value by visually observing the predetermined display means.

  Feature n4. The condition notifying means is characterized in that the display corresponding to the setting value during the change and the display corresponding to the setting possible state are performed by the predetermined display means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature n4, when the setting possible state is set, not only the display corresponding to the setting value in the middle of the change is performed by the predetermined display means but also the display corresponding to the setting possible state is performed. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the settable state is reached despite the second setting related operation being performed. In this case, it becomes easy for the game hall manager to grasp that the setting possible state has been reached.

  Feature n5. The post-start generation unit can change the setting value from the setting value selected when the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible state, in the case of setting the setting possible state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features n1 to n4.

  According to the feature n5, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the setting value is changed from the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. It is possible to continue the operation.

Feature n6. A setting correspondence storage unit (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting unit;
Selection correspondence storage means (a setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible situation;
Equipped with
The condition generating means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible state. (Function to execute the process of step SA 708 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. Setting the setting value that has been the selection target in the setting possible situation as the use target,
The post-start generation unit is configured to correspond to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage unit when the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible state, in the case where the setting possible state is set. The gaming machine according to any one of the features n1 to n5, which is capable of changing the setting value from a value.

  According to the feature n6, the setting correspondence storage means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the setting possible situation By being provided, it becomes possible to change a setting value in a setting possible situation, storing and holding the information on the setting value set before the setting possible situation was started. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible state, the information is stored in the selection corresponding storage unit when the supply of the operating power is stopped. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped halfway through the settable status, when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the setting value changing operation is continued from the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. It is possible to do

  Feature n7. The situation generation means is the case where the first setting related operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the settable situation and the supply of the operation power is started thereafter. A unit capable of changing the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage unit (in the 45th embodiment, a function to make an affirmative determination in step SA417 in the main CPU 63) In the forty-sixth embodiment, the gaming machine according to the feature n6, characterized in that the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917.

  According to the feature n7, if the second setting related operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is resumed after the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, the supply of the operation power is stopped While it becomes possible to resume the change of the setting value from the setting value that was the target of change before it is done, the supply of the operation power is resumed after the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible status When the second setting related operation is performed, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage unit. As a result, it is possible to make the initial setting value in the case of starting the change of the setting value different according to the operation content in the case where the supply of the operating power is resumed.

  Feature n8. The after-start generation means is the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the first setting related operation and the second setting related The gaming machine according to any one of the features n1 to n7, wherein the settable situation can be established even if any operation is not performed.

  According to the feature n8, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, and when the supply of the operating power thereafter is started, both of the first setting related operation and the second setting related operation are performed. Even if it is not done, it can be settable status, so if the operation power supply is stopped while changing the setting value, change the setting value when restarting the operation power supply after that It is possible to actively create a situation where

Feature n9. The first setting related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined correspondence state (a state in which the ON operation is performed) by the setting key,
The situation generation means ends the setting possible situation based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit has been changed by the setting key from the predetermined correspondence state to a specific correspondence state (state turned OFF). A game machine according to any one of the features n1 to n8, comprising means (a function of executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature n9, in order to make the setting possible state, it is necessary to set the setting key insertion unit to the predetermined correspondence state using the setting key, and therefore, an action to illegally change the setting value to be used It becomes possible to make it hard to do. In this case, the settable status does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, and ends when the setting key insertion part is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. As a result, even when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible state and then the supply of the operating power is started in the state where the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state, the setting possible state is immediately The game hall manager is not terminated because the setting possible state is ended by changing the setting key insertion unit from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state and then changing from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. It is possible to end the settable situation at a preferable timing for

  Feature n10. The situation generation means is a case where the supply of the operation power is stopped while the notification generation means is informing of the setting value of the use object, and the supply of the operation power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of the features n1 to n9, wherein when the first setting related operation is performed, the setting is made possible.

  According to the feature n10, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the notification of the setting value to be used is being performed, the first setting related operation is performed at the start of the subsequent supply of the operating power. It becomes the setting possible situation. This makes it possible to give priority to the setting value changing operation over the setting value checking operation.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature n1 to n10. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature o group>
Characteristics o1. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
Setting related execution means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63, a function for executing processing for setting confirmation in the main CPU 63) for executing predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value;
Midway resumption means for resuming the predetermined setting related processing from the middle after the supply of the operating power is started thereafter based on the supply of the operating power being stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed In the 45th embodiment, the function to make an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and the function to make an affirmative determination in step SA414 in the main CPU 63, and in the 46th embodiment, to step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63 Function to make a positive decision),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature o1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the predetermined setting-related processing is resumed midway if the supply of the operating power is resumed. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the predetermined setting related processing, the predetermined setting related processing can be continued when the supply of the operating power is resumed.

Features o2. The setting related execution means is a predetermined setting related operation (if the predetermined setting related processing is a setting value update processing, the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, and the predetermined setting related processing are for setting confirmation In the case of the process, the predetermined setting related process is executed based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on).
The gaming machine according to the feature o1, wherein the halfway restart unit restarts the predetermined setting related process from the middle even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed.

  According to the feature o2, when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the predetermined setting related processing is resumed from the middle even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed. It is possible to give priority to resumption from the middle of predetermined setting related processing.

Features o3. The setting related execution unit is configured to execute the predetermined setting related processing based on the fact that the predetermined setting related operation is performed when the supply of operation power is started.
The halfway restart unit is configured to restart the predetermined setting related process from the middle even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operation power is started.
When the supply of the operating power is stopped after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, and when the predetermined setting related operation is performed after the supply of the operating power is started, the halfway restart unit The gaming machine according to the feature o2, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is newly started by the setting-related execution unit, instead of the predetermined setting-related process being resumed from the middle.

  According to the feature o3, when the supply of the operation power is started, the predetermined setting related process is executed based on the predetermined setting related operation being performed, and thus the action of causing the predetermined setting related process to be performed illegally It is possible to make it difficult to In this case, even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting related processing, the predetermined setting related processing is in progress Thus, it is possible to give priority to resumption from the middle of predetermined setting related processing. On the other hand, when the supply of the operation power is resumed after the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting related processing, the predetermined setting related processing is started from the middle when the predetermined setting related operation is performed. Rather than being resumed, it is newly started. Thus, when the supply of the operation power is stopped during the predetermined setting related processing, the predetermined setting related processing is newly started depending on the presence or absence of the predetermined setting related operation when the supply of the operation power is resumed. And, it is possible to select one of restarting predetermined setting related processing from the middle.

Characteristics o4. The predetermined setting related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined correspondence state (a state of being operated ON) by the setting key,
The setting related processing unit performs the setting related processing based on the setting key insertion unit specifying that the predetermined correspondence state is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to a specific correspondence state (a state of being turned off) by the setting key. A feature o2 or o3 according to a feature o2 or o3 comprising: means for terminating the process (function to execute the process of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, function to execute the processes of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63) Gaming machine.

  According to the feature o4, in order to start the predetermined setting related processing, it is necessary to set the setting key insertion unit to the predetermined correspondence state by using the setting key, and therefore, an act of illegally executing the predetermined setting related processing It becomes possible to make it hard to do. In this case, the predetermined setting related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, and ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thereby, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, even if the supply of the operating power is started in the situation where the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state thereafter, immediately. The predetermined setting related process is not ended, and after the setting key insertion unit is changed from the specific corresponding state to the predetermined corresponding state, the predetermined setting related process is ended by changing the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to end the predetermined setting related processing at a preferable timing for the game hall manager.

  Feature o5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features o1 to o4, wherein the predetermined setting related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

  According to the feature o5, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while changing the set value, when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the set value is changed from the set value in the middle of the change. It is possible to resume. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while changing the set value, it is possible to continuously change the set value when the supply of the operating power is resumed.

Feature o6. The predetermined setting related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used,
A setting correspondence storage unit (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the predetermined setting related processing;
Equipped with
The setting related execution means is
A unit (main side for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage unit so that the setting value to be selected is changed when the change trigger occurs as the predetermined setting related processing A function of executing the process of step SA 708 in the CPU 63),
By storing information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means as the predetermined setting-related process when an end trigger occurs. A unit (a function of executing the processing of step SA 709 in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value that has been the selection target as the usage target;
Equipped with
The halfway resumption means sets the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of the operation power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting related processing. The gaming machine according to any one of the features o1 to o5, which makes it possible to change

  According to the feature o6, the setting correspondence storage means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the setting possible situation. By being provided, it becomes possible to change a setting value in a setting possible situation, storing and holding the information on the setting value set before the setting possible situation was started. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the memory is stored in the selected correspondence storage means when the supply of the operating power is stopped. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selected correspondence information. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the set value, if the supply of operating power is resumed, the set value is changed from the state immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. It is possible to continue the operation.

Feature o7. The setting related execution unit is configured to execute the predetermined setting related processing based on the fact that the predetermined setting related operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started.
The halfway restart unit restarts the predetermined setting related process from the middle based on the fact that the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operation power is started.
The setting related execution unit is configured to perform the predetermined setting related operation when the supply of the operation power is started after the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed. And means for enabling change of the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the 45th embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step SA417 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to the feature o6, characterized in that the gaming machine according to the forty-sixth embodiment has a function of making a positive determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature o7, based on the fact that the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed. While it becomes possible to resume the change of the setting value from the setting value that was the change target before the supply of the power supply was stopped, while the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed When the operation related to the predetermined setting is performed when the supply of the operation power is resumed, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage unit. As a result, it is possible to make the initial setting value in the case of starting the change of the setting value different according to the operation content in the case where the supply of the operating power is resumed.

  Note that for the configuration of the features o1 to o7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature p group>
Features p1. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
Predetermined setting related operation (If the predetermined setting related process is the setting value update process, the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c; if the predetermined setting related process is the setting confirmation process, the setting key is inserted Setting related execution means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63, setting in the main CPU 63) that executes predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value based on the fact that the ON operation of the unit 68a is performed Function to execute confirmation processing),
Equipped with
When the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, the setting-related execution means does not perform the predetermined setting-related operation after the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. (The function to make affirmation determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment and the function to make affirmation determination in step SA414 in the main CPU 63, A game machine characterized by comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA 905 and step SA 916 in the main CPU 63 in the 46 embodiments.

  According to the feature p1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In addition, it is possible to execute predetermined setting related processing by performing the predetermined setting related operation. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. Related processing is performed. This makes it possible to give priority to execution of predetermined setting related processing.

Features p2. The setting related execution unit is configured to execute the predetermined setting related processing based on the fact that the predetermined setting related operation is performed when the supply of operation power is started.
The gaming machine according to the feature p1, wherein the post-supplying execution unit executes the predetermined setting-related process even when the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of operation power is started. .

  According to the feature p2, when the supply of the operation power is started, the predetermined setting related process is executed based on the predetermined setting related operation being performed. It is possible to make it difficult to In this case, even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the predetermined setting related processing, the predetermined setting related processing is executed. Therefore, priority can be given to execution of predetermined setting related processing.

Feature p3. The predetermined setting related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined correspondence state (a state of being operated ON) by the setting key,
The setting related processing unit performs the setting related processing based on the setting key insertion unit specifying that the predetermined correspondence state is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to a specific correspondence state (a state of being turned off) by the setting key. A feature described in the feature p1 or p2 is characterized by including means for ending the processing (a function of executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature p3, in order to start the predetermined setting related processing, it is necessary to set the setting key insertion unit to the predetermined correspondence state by using the setting key, and therefore an act of illegally executing the predetermined setting related processing It becomes possible to make it hard to do. In this case, the predetermined setting related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, and ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thereby, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, even if the supply of the operating power is started in the situation where the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state thereafter, immediately. The predetermined setting related process is not ended, and after the setting key insertion unit is changed from the specific corresponding state to the predetermined corresponding state, the predetermined setting related process is ended by changing the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to end the predetermined setting related processing at a preferable timing for the game hall manager.

  Features p4. The post-supply execution means performs the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started after that, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. In this case, the game machine according to any one of the features p1 to p3 is characterized in that the predetermined setting related process is not performed.

  According to the feature p4, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is subsequently started. Is not performed predetermined setting related processing. Thus, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing, the supply of the operating power is started if it is not necessary to subsequently execute the predetermined setting related processing. In this case, by performing the specific related operation, it is possible to prevent predetermined setting related processing from being executed.

  Features p5. The game machine according to any one of the features p1 to p4, wherein the predetermined setting related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used.

  According to the feature p5, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the notification of the set value is being performed, the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Also, notification of the set value is started again. This makes it possible to give priority to notification of the set value.

Feature p6. Setting means (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
The setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of the operation power is started. Condition generating means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs an affirmative determination in step SA412) and a step SA417. A function to make a positive determination, and in the 46th embodiment, a function to make a positive determination at step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make a positive determination at step SA917);
Equipped with
The post-supply execution means may execute the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started after that, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting related process. If it does, it does not execute the predetermined setting related processing,
The condition generation means performs the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started after that, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. The gaming machine according to feature p5, wherein in the case where it is set, the setting possible situation is established.

  According to the feature p6, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter In this case, notification of the set value is not performed, but a settable state in which the set value can be changed is obtained. As a result, when a specific related operation is performed to set the settable state in which the set value can be changed, generation of the settable state can be prioritized over notification of the set value.

  Feature p7. The game machine according to any one of the features p1 to p6, wherein the predetermined setting related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

  According to the feature p7, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while changing the set value, it is possible to change the set value when the supply of the operating power is resumed. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while changing the set value, it is possible to continuously change the set value when the supply of the operating power is resumed.

  Note that for the configuration of features p1 to p7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature q group>
Feature q1. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
Setting related execution means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63, a function for executing processing for setting confirmation in the main CPU 63) for executing predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value;
Equipped with
The setting related execution unit performs the specific related operation (predetermined setting related processing when the supply of the operating power is started after that, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed. If the setting confirmation process is performed, if the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed, and if the predetermined setting related process is the setting value updating process, the RAM is not performed, the predetermined setting related process is not performed. A game machine that features it.

  According to the feature q1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing, the predetermined related operation is performed if the supply of the operating power is subsequently started. Configuration related processing is not executed. Thus, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing, the supply of the operating power is started if it is not necessary to subsequently execute the predetermined setting related processing. In this case, by performing the specific related operation, it is possible to prevent predetermined setting related processing from being executed.

  Features q2. The gaming machine according to the feature q1, wherein the predetermined setting related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used.

  According to the feature q2, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the setting is performed when the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Notification of the value is not resumed. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the supply of the operation power is started if it is not necessary to notify the setting value thereafter. It is possible to prevent notification of the setting value by performing the specific related operation.

  Feature q3. The setting related execution means is a predetermined setting related operation (if the predetermined setting related processing is a setting value update processing, the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, and the predetermined setting related processing are for setting confirmation In the case of processing, the predetermined setting related process is executed based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON), and the supply of operating power is performed before the predetermined setting related process is completed. Even if the operation is stopped, the predetermined setting related processing is not performed when the specific related operation is performed instead of the predetermined setting related operation when the supply of operation power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to q1 or q2.

  According to the feature q3, since it is necessary to perform the predetermined setting related operation in order to perform the predetermined setting related processing, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation to improperly execute the predetermined setting related processing.

  Feature q4. The setting related execution means does not perform the specific related operation when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing and the supply of the operation power is started thereafter. Means for executing the predetermined setting related process even if the predetermined setting related operation is not performed (in the 45th embodiment, the function to make a positive determination in step SA412 of the main CPU 63 and the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to the feature q3, further comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA414.

  According to the feature q4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the predetermined setting related operation is performed depending on whether the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. It is possible to select whether or not predetermined setting related processing is to be executed without performing.

Feature q5. The predetermined setting related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined correspondence state (a state of being operated ON) by the setting key,
The setting related processing unit performs the setting related processing based on the setting key insertion unit specifying that the predetermined correspondence state is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to a specific correspondence state (a state of being turned off) by the setting key. The gaming machine according to the feature q4, characterized in that it comprises means for ending the processing (a function of executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63). .

  According to the feature q5, in order to start the predetermined setting related process, it is necessary to set the setting key insertion unit to the predetermined correspondence state by using the setting key, and therefore, an act of illegally executing the predetermined setting related process It becomes possible to make it hard to do. In this case, the predetermined setting related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, and ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thereby, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, even if the supply of the operating power is started in the situation where the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state thereafter, immediately. The predetermined setting related process is not ended, and after the setting key insertion unit is changed from the specific corresponding state to the predetermined corresponding state, the predetermined setting related process is ended by changing the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to end the predetermined setting related processing at a preferable timing for the game hall manager.

  Feature q6. Another execution means (a predetermined setting related process is for setting confirmation) that executes another process different from the predetermined setting related process based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started If it is a process, the main CPU 63 only executes the RAM clear process and does not execute the setting value update process, or the function to execute the RAM clear process and the setting value update process in the main CPU 63, predetermined setting related process is the setting value In the case of update processing, any one of the features q1 to q5 is provided with a function of executing only the RAM clear processing of the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment and not executing the set value update processing). Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature q6, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the operation power is supplied after the specific related operation performed to execute the separate processing. It is possible to prevent predetermined setting related processing from being executed when it is started.

  Feature q7. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the separate execution means is that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to the feature q6, characterized in that the separate process is executed based on the feature q6.

  According to the feature q7, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, and the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. It is possible to give priority to the execution of another process over the predetermined setting related process.

  Feature q8. The predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a set value to be used, and the separate process is a process for changing the set value to be used. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature q8, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the setting is performed when the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Notification of the value is not resumed. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the supply of the operation power is started if it is not necessary to notify the setting value thereafter. It is possible to prevent notification of the setting value by performing the specific related operation. Further, as the operation for preventing the notification of the setting value as described above, it is possible to use the specific related operation for executing the process for changing the setting value.

  Note that for the configuration of features q1 to q8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature r group>
Feature r1. Setting means (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
Condition generation means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, step SA412 in the main CPU 63) for setting the possible setting condition (the condition where the setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed Function to make affirmation determination at step SA417 and function to make affirmation determination at step SA417, and in the forty-sixth embodiment, a function to make affirmation determination at step SA905 and step SA916 in main CPU 63 and a function to make affirmation determination at step SA917 )When,
A setting correspondence storage unit (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting unit;
Selection correspondence storage means (a setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible situation;
Equipped with
The condition generating means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible state. (Function to execute the process of step SA 708 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. A game machine characterized by setting a set value which has been selected in the settable situation as a use target.

  According to the feature r1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, there are provided a setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and a selection correspondence storage means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the setting possible situation. By this, it becomes possible to change the set value in the settable status while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the settable status is started.

  Feature r2. The situation generation means is stored in the selection handling storage means in the previous setting possible situation in the possible setting situation occurring after the setting possible situation is ended before the termination trigger occurs. A feature r1 is characterized by including a first change execution unit (function to make a positive determination in step SA701 of the main CPU 63) that enables change of the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information. The gaming machine described.

  Feature r2. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection handling information stored in the selection handling storage means when the setting possible situation is started after the setting possible situation is finished before the termination trigger occurs. . As a result, even if the settable status is ended before the termination trigger occurs, when the settable status is resumed, the operation of changing the set value from the last selected set value in the previous settable status It is possible to continue to

  Feature r3. The situation generation means is a setting corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the setting possible situation which occurs after the setting possible situation ends before the termination trigger occurs. The gaming machine according to the feature r2, further comprising second change execution means (function to make a negative determination in step SA701 of the main CPU 63) capable of changing the setting value from a value.

  According to the feature r3, when the settable state is started after the settable state is ended before the termination trigger occurs, the set value is changed from the last selected set value in the previous settable state. Not only can it be resumed, but also corresponds to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means when the setting possible situation is started after the setting possible situation ends before the termination trigger occurs. It is possible to change the set value from the set value. As a result, it is possible to make the initial set value in the case of starting the change of the set value different according to the situation in the case where the settable situation is resumed.

  Feature r4. The second change execution means is a setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the setting possible situation occurring after the setting possible situation ended by the termination trigger occurring. The gaming machine according to feature r3, wherein the setting value can be changed.

  According to the feature r4, in the normal setting possible situation, the setting value is changed from the current setting value to be used.

  Feature r5. The situation generation means is based on the fact that the setting related situation is started after the setting possible situation is ended before the termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. A setting corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means, a setting enabling the change of the setting value, and a setting corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means It is characterized by having a means (function to execute the processing of step SA405, step SA412 and step SA417 in the main CPU 63) to become one of the conditions enabling change of the setting value from the value. The gaming machine according to the feature r3 or r4.

  According to the feature r5, when the setting possible situation is started after the setting possible situation is ended before the termination trigger occurs, the setting value which is selected from the setting value selected last in the previous setting possible situation is It becomes possible for the game hall administrator to select whether to resume the change or to start the change of the setting value from the current setting value of the use object.

  Feature r6. The display of the set value corresponding to the selected correspondence information stored in the selected correspondence storage means in the settable situation is performed by the predetermined display means (the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) The gaming machine according to any one of the features r1 to r5, characterized in that it comprises means (function to execute the processing of step SA801 to step SA803 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature r6, it is possible to perform the change operation of the setting value while confirming the setting value in the middle of the change in the setting possible situation.

  Feature r7. The display of the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the situation where the setting is not possible is the predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) A game machine according to any one of the features r1 to r6, comprising means for performing (function of executing the processing of step SA601 to step SA603 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature r7, it is possible to confirm the current setting value of the use target as necessary.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature r1 to r7 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature n group, the feature o group, the feature p group, the feature q group, and the feature r group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to make the configuration regarding the setting value that determines the degree of advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Features s group>
Features s1. Based on the predetermined key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) being in the predetermined correspondence state (the ON state) by the predetermined key, the predetermined correspondence processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value updating processing) is started. Predetermined correspondence start means (in the 45th embodiment, the function to make affirmation determination in step SA413 and the function to make affirmation determination in step SA417 in the main CPU 63; in the 46th embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 A function of making a positive determination at SA 913 and a function of making a positive determination at step SA 917),
A predetermined response ending means (a main processing for ending the predetermined response processing based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion unit has been changed by the predetermined key from the predetermined response state to the specific response state (a state operated OFF) A function of executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the CPU 63 on the side of the CPU);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature s1, since the predetermined key insertion unit needs to be in the predetermined correspondence state using the predetermined key in order to start the predetermined correspondence processing, an action to illegally start the predetermined correspondence processing is performed. It becomes possible to make it hard. In this case, the predetermined handling process does not end only when the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, and ends when the predetermined key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. As a result, even if the predetermined handling process is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific handling state for some reason, the predetermined handling process is not immediately ended, and the predetermined key inserting unit is started from the specific handling state Since the predetermined handling process is ended by changing the predetermined handling state to the specific handling state after changing to the predetermined handling state, it is possible to finish the predetermined handling process at a preferable timing for the game hall manager.

  Features s2. Another start unit (in the 45th embodiment, step SA412 in the main CPU 63) for starting the predetermined handling process in the situation where the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specified handling state based on the satisfaction of the specific start condition. In the 46th embodiment, the main CPU 63 is provided with a function to make a positive determination and a function to make a positive determination in the main CPU 63, and a function to make a positive determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the 46th embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature s1, characterized in that

  According to the feature s2, since the predetermined handling process is started even if the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific handling state based on the satisfaction of the specific start condition, various timings for starting the predetermined handling process can be obtained. It is possible to However, in the configuration, the predetermined response processing is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific response state, but the configuration of the feature s1 is provided, and the predetermined response processing is performed when the predetermined key insertion portion is in the specific response state If the predetermined key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state, the process ends. As a result, even if the predetermined handling process is started in a situation where the predetermined key inserting unit is in the specific handling state, the predetermined handling process is not immediately ended, and the predetermined key inserting portion is in the predetermined handling state from the specific handling state. Since the predetermined handling process is ended by further changing from the predetermined handling state to the specific handling state after the change to the predetermined handling state, the predetermined handling process can be ended at a timing preferable for the game hall manager.

Features s3. The predetermined correspondence start means is configured to start the predetermined correspondence processing based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion unit is in the predetermined correspondence state when the supply of the operation power is started.
The specific start condition is a feature s2 described in the feature s2 characterized in that the specific start condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the predetermined handling process is being performed. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature s3, when the supply of the operation power is started, the predetermined handling process is started based on the predetermined key insertion unit being in the predetermined handling state, so the predetermined handling process may be illegally started. It is possible to make it difficult to Further, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the predetermined handling process is being performed, if the supply of the operating power is resumed, and the specific start condition is satisfied, the predetermined key insertion unit performs the predetermined handling Even if it is not in the state, the predetermined handling process is started. As a result, when the predetermined handling process ends halfway, it is possible to give priority to the start of the predetermined handling process.

Features s4. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) Have the ability to perform
The gaming machine according to any one of the features s1 to s3, wherein the predetermined handling process is a process associated with the set value.

  According to the feature s4, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects in the process related to the setting value.

  Note that for the configuration of the features s1 to s4, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature s group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to generate a game state advantageous to the player by the control means, for example.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., the processing in the control means needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature t group>
Feature t1. Setting means for setting setting values to be used from among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S205 to step S207 in the main CPU 63; In the eleventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3106 to step S3108 in the main CPU 63, and in the twelfth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3207 to step S3209 in the main CPU 63, twenty-second embodiment Then, the function of executing the processing of step S5605 to step S5607 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, and the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment And the ability to perform
Condition generation means (in the first embodiment, step S103 in the main CPU 63) for setting a settable condition (a condition in which setting value update processing is executed) capable of changing the setting value to be used. In the twenty-second embodiment, the function to make affirmation determination in steps S5503 to S5507 in the twenty-second embodiment, and in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function to make affirmation determination in step SB113 in the main CPU 63 In the fifty-third embodiment, the main CPU 63 a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812);
Start corresponding means (in the first embodiment, the process of step S201 in the main CPU 63 is executed so that the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the predetermined start when the setting possible state is reached) Function, A function to execute the processing of step S3102 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment, a function to execute the processing in step S3203 in the main CPU 63 in the twelfth embodiment, and the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment A function to execute the processing of step S5601 in step 49, a function to execute the processing of step SB304 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function to execute the processing in step SB905 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature t1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, when the setting possible state is reached, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the predetermined start. As a result, regardless of the setting value of the use target before the setting possible state, in the setting possible state, it is possible to change the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the start. Therefore, the work content of the setting value changing operation can be easily understood by the operator.

  Feature t2. The gaming machine according to feature t1, wherein the setting value corresponding to the start is a setting value (“setting 1”) in which the degree of advantage is the lowest.

  According to the feature t2, when the setting possible state is reached, the setting value is changed from the setting value with the lowest degree of advantage. As a result, even if the administrator of the gaming hall has ended the setting possible situation unintentionally immediately after becoming the setting possible situation, the setting value is the lowest in the degree of advantage. Even if the game is played, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage in the game hall.

Feature t3. A setting correspondence storage unit (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting unit;
Selection correspondence storage means (a setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible situation;
Equipped with
The condition generating means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible state. (The 49th embodiment has a function of executing the processing of step SB307 and step SB310 in the main CPU 63, and the 53rd embodiment has a function of executing the processing of step SB908 and step SB914 in the main CPU 63)
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. Setting the setting value that has been the selection target in the setting possible situation as the use target,
The game according to the feature t1 or t2, wherein the start handling means stores the selection handling information corresponding to the setting value for the start handling in the selection handling storage means when the setting possible state is reached. Machine.

  According to the feature t3, the setting correspondence storage means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the setting possible situation. By being provided, it becomes possible to change a setting value in a setting possible situation, storing and holding the information on the setting value set before the setting possible situation was started.

  Feature t4. The display of the set value corresponding to the selected correspondence information stored in the selected correspondence storage means in the settable situation is performed by the predetermined display means (the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) The gaming machine according to feature t3, further comprising means (function to execute the processing of step SA801 to step SA803 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature t4, it is possible to change the setting value while confirming the setting value in the middle of the change in the setting possible state.

  Feature t5. The display of the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the situation where the setting is not possible is the predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) A game machine according to feature t3 or t4, characterized in that it comprises means (function to execute the processing of step SA601 to step SA603 in the main CPU 63) to be performed.

  According to the feature t5, it is possible to check the current setting value of the target to be used as needed.

  Note that for the configuration of the features t1 to t5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention concerning the above-mentioned feature t group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to make the configuration regarding the setting value that determines the degree of advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature u group>
Characteristics u1. First control means (MPU 62);
Second control means (sound side MPU 352) for executing control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control means;
In a gaming machine provided with
The first control means is
First transmission means (main side in the forty-ninth embodiment) for transmitting first start correspondence information (return command at the time of updating) based on the fact that the first start situation is reached when supply of operation power is started A function of executing the process of step SB314 in the CPU 63, and in the fifty-third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB918 in the main CPU 63);
The second transmission means (the 49th transmission means for transmitting the 2nd start corresponding information (the return command at the time of confirmation or the return command at the time of clear) based on the fact that the second start situation is reached when the supply of operation power is started. In the embodiment of the present invention, the function of executing the processing of step SB118 or step SB207 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step SB618 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, and the step in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment A function to execute the processing of SB 725, a function to execute the processing of step SB 816 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of step SC 118 in the 54th embodiment.
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature u1, in the configuration in which the control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control means is executed by the second control means, the first control means starts the first start when the supply of the operating power is started. The first start correspondence information is transmitted based on the situation, and the second start correspondence information is transmitted based on the second start situation. This makes it possible to perform control corresponding to the type of start condition when the supply of operation power is started, not only by the first control unit but by the second control unit.

  Characteristics u2. The first control means performs processing at the time of start of supply of operating power in the case of the first start status and in the case of the second start status when the supply of operating power is started (Embodiment 49) In step SB101 to step SB122 in the 51st embodiment, step SB601 to step SB729 in the 52nd embodiment, and step SB801 to step SB818 and step SB823 to step SB826 in the 53rd embodiment. A game machine according to the feature u1 characterized in that the processing content of at least a part of step SC101 to step SC120 and step SC125 to step SC128) is different in the 54th embodiment.

  According to the feature u2, at least a part of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power in the first control means depending on which of the first start situation and the second start situation is when the supply of the operating power is started. Since the process contents are different, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to the start situation as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power by the first control means.

Characteristics u3. The second control means is
Start correspondence execution means for executing the start correspondence process regardless of whether the first start correspondence information is received or the second start correspondence information is received (affirmative determination is made in step SB405 in the sound side CPU 353) Function),
When one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, a predetermined correspondence process is executed, and the other of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is executed. Predetermined correspondence execution means (function of executing processing of step SB407, step SB409 and step SB411 in the CPU 353 of the sound light side) which does not execute the predetermined correspondence processing when the start correspondence information is received;
The game machine according to feature u1 or u2, comprising:

  According to the feature u3, since the second control means executes the start correspondence process even when any of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, any one of the start correspondences from the first control means It is possible to cause the second control means to execute the start handling process in response to the transmission of the information. Further, the second control means executes the predetermined correspondence process when one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, and performs the predetermined correspondence processing when the other start correspondence information is received. Do not execute the response process. This makes it possible to perform control corresponding to the type of start condition when the supply of operation power is started, not only by the first control unit but by the second control unit.

Characteristics u4. One of the first start condition and the second start condition is that a predetermined start operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation) has been performed when the supply of operation power is started. Occurs based on
The other of the first start situation and the second start situation is generated based on the fact that the predetermined start handling operation has not been performed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature u4, the contents of the control executed not only by the first control means but by the second control means depending on whether or not the predetermined start corresponding operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started. Can be made different.

Characteristics u5. A process for controlling the progress of the game after transmitting the start correspondence information of any one of a plurality of types of start correspondence information including the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information. (Steps S8907 to S8920) are executed,
The second control means is configured to execute a process (steps SB412 to SB414) corresponding to the progress of the game after receiving any one of the plurality of types of start correspondence information. The gaming machine according to the feature u3 or u4 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature u5, the first control means transmits any start correspondence information before starting processing for controlling the progress of the game, and the second control means receives any start correspondence information. Execute processing corresponding to the progress of the game. Thus, after the first control means performs a process for controlling the progress of the game, the second control means performs the process corresponding to the progress of the game. It becomes possible. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature u3, the start of the process corresponding to the proceedings of the game by using a plurality of start correspondence information which makes the execution of the predetermined correspondence process different in the second control means different. It becomes possible to make the second control means recognize the trigger.

Characteristics u6. The first control means is
Means for executing common handling processing regardless of whether the first start situation or the second start situation is reached when supply of operating power is started (Embodiment 49) In the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB601 to step SB603 in the 51st embodiment, and in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB101 to step SB103. A function to execute the processing of SB701 and step SB702, a function to execute the processing of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a processing of steps SC101 to SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment And the ability to perform
When the supply of the operation power is started, the specific handling process is executed based on the start condition of one of the first start condition and the second start condition, and the supply of the operation power is started. Means for not executing the specific handling process on the basis of the other being the start condition among the first start condition and the second start condition (step SB112 in the main side CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB112) A function to execute the processing of SB115 or step SB117, a function to execute the processing of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, step SB711 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment Function to execute processing of SB 718 or step SB 721 In the 53rd embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB810, step SB813 or step SB815 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SC111, step SC115 or step SC117 in the main CPU 63) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features u1 to u5, comprising:

  According to the feature u6, the first control means executes the common handling process regardless of whether it is in the first start condition or in the second start condition, while the first start condition and 2) The specific handling process is executed when one of the start situations is started. Thus, the common control process is executed by the first control means regardless of the start situation, while the process corresponding to the type of the start situation is executed by the first control means. It is possible to In this case, the configuration of the feature u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information on the basis of the first start situation, and the first control means on the basis of the second start situation. (2) In order to transmit start correspondence information, it is possible that control corresponding to the type of start situation when supply of operation power is started can be performed not only by the first control means but by the second control means Become.

Characteristics u7. The first control means is
Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the fifty-third In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB 915 in the main CPU 63);
Assuming that the first start situation is established based on the fact that the first setting related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of operation power is started. First correspondence execution means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, in the main CPU 63) for setting a settable condition (a condition in which setting value update processing is executed) capable of changing the setting value to be used. A function to make a positive determination at step SB114, a function to make a positive determination at step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function to make a positive determination at step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, In the 53rd embodiment, a function to make an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU And function) to the affirmative determination at step SC113 in 3,
It is set by the setting means as being the second start condition based on the fact that the second setting related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. A second correspondence execution unit (function of executing processing for setting confirmation in the main CPU 63) for notifying the set value to be used,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features u1 to u6, comprising:

  According to the feature u7, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In addition, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of the operating power is started, and therefore an action to illegally change the setting value to be used It is possible to make it difficult to In addition, since the setting value of the use target is notified by performing the second setting related operation when the supply of the operation power is started, the game hall manager confirms the setting value of the use target as necessary. It becomes possible. In this case, the configuration of the feature u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information on the basis of the first start situation, and the first control means on the basis of the second start situation. (2) Since the start correspondence information is transmitted, different control can be performed by the second control means in the case where the setting possible state is reached and in the case where the setting value to be used is notified.

Characteristics u8. The first control means is
A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
First response execution means (setting value update processing or setting confirmation in main side CPU 63) that executes predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value based on the first start situation when the supply of operation power is started Functions to execute processing for
Second correspondence execution means (the main side in the forty-ninth embodiment) that performs another corresponding processing different from the predetermined setting related processing based on the second start state when the supply of operation power is started A function of executing the processing of step SB117 in the CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, A function of executing the processing of step SB 815 in the main CPU 63 in the 53 embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step SC 117 in the main CPU 63 in the 54 th embodiment;
The gaming machine according to any one of the features u1 to u7, comprising:

  According to the feature u8, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting related process related to the setting value is executed based on the first start status, and when the supply of operating power is started, the second start status is performed. And another corresponding processing different from the predetermined setting related processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to cause the case where the predetermined setting related processing is performed and the case where the predetermined setting related processing is not performed depending on the start situation when the supply of the operation power is started. In this case, the configuration of the feature u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information on the basis of the first start situation, and the first control means on the basis of the second start situation. (2) Since the start correspondence information is transmitted, different control can be performed by the second control means depending on whether the first control means performs predetermined setting related processing or not. .

  Characteristics u9. The game machine according to Feature u8, wherein the second correspondence execution means executes a process for initializing a predetermined storage area provided in the first control means as the another correspondence process.

  According to the feature u9, the case where the predetermined setting related processing is executed according to the start situation when the supply of the operation power is started and the case where the predetermined storage area of the first control means is initialized are generated. It is possible to In this case, the configuration of the feature u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information on the basis of the first start situation, and the first control means on the basis of the second start situation. (2) In order to transmit start correspondence information, different control is performed in the second control means in the case where the first control means executes the predetermined setting related processing and in the case where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It is possible to

Characteristics u10. The second control means is
When corresponding to one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured in the time measurement means (RTC 356) which enables measurement of time is stored as time correspondence A unit (RTC memory 357) stores the function (step 49 in the 49th embodiment performs the processing of step SB407 in the CPU 353), the 50th embodiment executes the processing in step SB507 in the CPU 353 Function),
Means for executing time correspondence processing when processing execution timing is reached on the basis of the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the processing of step SB413 in the sound side CPU 353 is executed Function to execute the processing of step SB513 in the CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features u1 to u9, comprising:

  According to the feature u10, since the second control means executes the time correspondence processing when the processing execution timing comes based on the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means, the timing when the predetermined time comes It is possible to execute time-correspondence processing. In this case, when one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is stored in the time correspondence storage means. Thus, it is possible to select each of the situation where the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and the situation where it is not newly stored.

  Note that for the configuration of the features u1 to u10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature v group>
Features v1. Time storage executing means (on the sound light side in the forty-ninth embodiment) for storing time correspondence information measured by time measuring means (RTC 356) enabling measurement of time in time correspondence storage means (memory for RTC 357) A function of executing the process of step SB407 in the CPU 353; a function of executing the process of step SB507 in the sound-light CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment);
Time-correspondence execution means for executing time-correspondence processing when processing execution timing is reached based on the time-correspondence information stored in the time-correspondence storage means (in the 49th embodiment, step SB413 in the CPU 353 A function to execute the process, and in the 50th embodiment, a function to execute the process of step SB513 in the CPU 353);
Equipped with
The time memory executing means is the first start situation (when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in the situation of no operation in the 49th embodiment) when the supply of the operation power is started, the 50th In the embodiment, it is measured by the time measuring means based on the fact that the power on of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the RAM clear operation, the setting change operation or the setting confirmation operation is performed). The time correspondence information is stored in the time correspondence storage means, and when the supply of operation power is started, the second start situation (in the 49th embodiment, the RAM clear operation, the setting change operation or the setting confirmation operation In the 50th embodiment, when the power on of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the operation is not performed, the power on of the pachinko machine 10 is performed). Gaming machine, wherein the time correspondence information that has been measured by the time measuring unit based on Rukoto in which not stored in the time correspondence storage means.

  According to the feature v1, since the time correspondence processing is executed when the processing execution timing is reached based on the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means, the time correspondence processing is performed at the timing when the predetermined time is reached. It can be made to be implemented. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started and the first start situation is reached, the time correspondence information measured in the time measuring means is stored in the time correspondence storage means, and the supply of operating power is started When the second start situation is reached, the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. Thus, it is possible to select each of the situation where the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and the situation where it is not newly stored.

Features v2. One of the first start condition and the second start condition is that a predetermined start operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation) has been performed when the supply of operation power is started. Occurs based on
The other of the first start situation and the second start situation is generated based on the fact that the predetermined start handling operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature v2, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and is not newly stored, depending on whether or not the predetermined start correspondence operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started. It is possible to select each of

Features v3. The second start situation occurs based on the fact that a predetermined start handling operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation) is performed when the supply of operation power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature v1 or v2, wherein the first start situation is generated based on the fact that the predetermined start handling operation has not been performed when the supply of operation power is started.

  According to the feature v3, when the predetermined start operation is not performed when the supply of the operation power is started, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage unit, and the supply of the operation power is started. The time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means when the predetermined start correspondence operation is performed. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is started, the time correspondence information is basically newly stored in the time correspondence storage means, while performing the predetermined start correspondence operation as necessary. It is possible to prevent correspondence information from being stored in the time correspondence storage means.

  Features v4. When the supply of the operation power is started, the specific handling process is executed based on the start condition of one of the first start condition and the second start condition, and the supply of the operation power is started. Means for not executing the specific handling process on the basis of the other being the start condition among the first start condition and the second start condition (step SB112 in the main side CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB112) A function to execute the processing of SB115 or step SB117, a function to execute the processing of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, step SB711 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment Function to execute processing of SB 718 or step SB 721 In the 53rd embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB810, step SB813 or step SB815 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SC111, step SC115 or step SC117 in the main CPU 63) A game machine according to any one of the features v1 to v3, characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the feature v4, the specific handling process is executed when one of the first start situation and the second start situation is the start situation. In this case, the configuration of the feature v1 is provided, and based on the fact that the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means on the basis of the first start situation, the time is on the basis of the second start situation. Correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to associate the execution of the specific handling process with the new storage of the time correspondence information.

  Features v5. When the supply of operating power is started, the specific handling process is executed based on the fact that the second start status is set, and the first start status is set when the supply of operating power is started Means for not executing the specific handling process (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB112, step SB115 or step SB117 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-first embodiment, step SB612 in the main CPU 63, Function to execute the processing of step SB615 or step SB617, function to execute the processing of step SB711, step SB718 or step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, step SB810 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment Step SB81 Or any one of the features v1 to v4 having a function of executing the processing of step SB815, and a function of executing the processing of step SC111, step SC115 or step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the feature v5, the specific handling process is executed when the second start situation is the first start situation or the second start situation. In this case, the configuration of the feature v1 is provided, and based on the fact that the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means on the basis of the first start situation, the time is on the basis of the second start situation. Correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to prevent time correspondence information from being newly stored in the time correspondence storage means when the specific correspondence process is executed.

  Feature v6. Means for executing common handling processing regardless of whether the first start situation or the second start situation is reached when supply of operating power is started (Embodiment 49) In the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB601 to step SB603 in the 51st embodiment, and in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB101 to step SB103. A function to execute the processing of SB701 and step SB702, a function to execute the processing of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a processing of steps SC101 to SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment The ability to perform The gaming machine according to the features v4 or v5, characterized in that that example.

  According to the feature v6, the common handling process is executed in any of the first start situation and the second start situation, while the first start situation and the second start situation The specific handling process is executed when one of the start situations is reached. This makes it possible to execute the process corresponding to the type of the start situation while performing the common handling process regardless of which start situation.

Feature v7. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
Setting related execution means (a function for executing setting value update processing or setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) which executes predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value when supply of operation power is started;
Equipped with
The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that one of the first start situation and the second start situation is reached when the supply of operation power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features v1 to v6, which is characterized in that:

  According to the feature v7, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Further, when the supply of the operation power is started, the predetermined setting related processing is executed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition is set. As a result, it is possible to associate the presence or absence of execution of predetermined setting-related processing with the presence or absence of new storage of time correspondence information.

  Feature v8. A predetermined storage area provided in the control means is initialized based on the fact that one of the first start situation and the second start situation is reached when the supply of operating power is started. Means (The function to execute the processing of step SB117 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function to execute the processing in step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, and the function in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment The function of executing the processing of step SB721, the function of executing the processing of step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment) The game machine according to any one of features v1 to v7 characterized in that:

  According to the feature v8, when the supply of the operation power is started, the predetermined storage area of the first control means is initial based on the fact that one of the first start situation and the second start situation is reached. Be This makes it possible to associate the presence or absence of initialization of the predetermined storage area with the presence or absence of new storage of time correspondence information.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A15, the feature B1 to B7, the feature C1 to C5, the feature D1 to D10, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F3, the feature G1 to G18, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature v1 to v8 H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the feature u group and the feature v group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., the processing when the supply of the operating power is started needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature w group>
Feature w1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the predetermined display means;
A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
Setting related execution means (a function for executing setting value update processing or setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) which executes predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value when supply of operation power is started;
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means
A unit for causing the predetermined display unit to display the setting value when the predetermined setting related processing is executed (a function of executing the processing of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63);
Check control means (in the thirty-seventh embodiment, mainly the check control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform a check display enabling confirmation as to whether or not the predetermined display means is normal after the predetermined setting related processing is executed) A function of executing the processing of step S9519 in the CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of step SA419 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SA919 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment; In the 49th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB123 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function to execute the processing in step SB623 in the main CPU 63, and in the 52nd embodiment, step SB712 in the main CPU 63 And the function of executing the process of step SB719, 3 embodiment is the ability to perform the processing of step SB817 in the main side CPU 63, and functions) for executing the processing of step SC119 in the main side CPU 63 in the embodiment of 54,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature w1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Further, when predetermined setting related processing is executed, the display regarding the set value is performed on the predetermined display means, so that the game hall manager can grasp the current set value by confirming the predetermined display means. It becomes. In addition, since the check display is performed by the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal or not.

  In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started, the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means after the predetermined setting related processing is executed. Thereby, when the predetermined setting related process is performed, the display related to the setting value in the case where the predetermined setting related process is executed without requiring the adjustment process such that the check display is ended halfway is started. Can be prioritized over the display for checking.

  Feature w2. The check control means displays the check display when the supply of operation power is started, when the predetermined setting related process is performed, or when the predetermined setting related process is not performed. The gaming machine according to feature w1, characterized in that the predetermined display means performs the predetermined display means.

  According to the feature w2, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display for check is performed by the predetermined display means regardless of whether or not the predetermined setting related process is executed. This makes it possible to check whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature w3. As processing at the time of supply start which is executed when supply of operation power is started, either the case where the predetermined setting related process is performed or the case where the predetermined setting related process is not performed When the predetermined setting-related process is executed, a common process that is executed after the predetermined setting-related process is set.
The gaming machine according to the feature w1 or w2, wherein processing for causing the predetermined display means to start the display for check is set as the common processing.

  According to the feature w3, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display for check is performed by the predetermined display unit regardless of whether or not the predetermined setting related process is performed. This makes it possible to check whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power is started. Further, since the process for causing the predetermined display means to start the check display is set as the common process, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the process configuration.

Feature w4. Means for executing processing for advancing the game after the processing at the start of supply is started after the supply of operation power is started (function to execute the processing of step S8907 to step S8920 in the main CPU 63);
The game machine according to any one of the features w1 to w3 characterized in that the process for advancing the game can be started even in a situation where the check display is being executed by the predetermined display means. .

  According to the feature w4, even if the display for check in the predetermined display means is being executed, the processing for advancing the game can be started. Therefore, after the execution of the predetermined setting related processing, the predetermined display means checks Even when the display is performed, it is possible to prevent the start timing of the process for advancing the game from being delayed.

Feature w5. Delay execution means (performs step SB 715 and step SB 724 in the main CPU 63) to execute a delay process that makes it possible to delay the start of the process for advancing the game when the supply of the operation power is started Function),
The check control means causes the predetermined display means to start the check display before the delay process is started, when the predetermined setting related process is not executed when the supply of the operation power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features w1 to w4 that is the feature.

  According to the feature w5, the initial setting of the various devices is completed by the execution of the delay process which makes it possible to delay the start of the process for advancing the game when the supply of the operation power is started. It is possible to start processing for advancing the game later. In this case, when the supply of the operation power is started and the predetermined setting related process is not executed, the display for check in the predetermined display means is started before the delay process is started. As a result, it is possible to perform the check display using the period in which the start of the process for advancing the game is delayed.

  Feature w6. The game machine according to Feature w5, wherein the delay execution unit does not execute the delay process when the predetermined setting related process is performed.

  According to the feature w6, since predetermined time is required when predetermined setting related processing is executed, it is possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before the processing for advancing the game is started. Become. In this case, the delay process is not executed when the predetermined setting related process is executed, so that the start of the process for advancing the game in the situation where the predetermined setting related process is executed is extremely It is possible to prevent it from becoming late.

Feature w7. The setting related execution means is
The change of the setting value to be used based on the fact that the first setting related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of operation power is started. Condition generating means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SB114 in the main CPU 63) to be in a settable condition (a condition in which setting value update processing is performed) in which In the 51st embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SB614 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SB717 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63 The function to make an affirmative determination at SB812, and in the 54th embodiment, at step SC113 in the main CPU 63 And features that the constant determination),
A notification occurs that the setting value to be used is notified based on the fact that the second setting related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) is performed when the supply of operation power is started. Means (function to execute setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of the features w1 to w6, comprising:

  According to the feature w7, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of the operation power is started, so the setting value to be used is changed illegally It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of trying. In addition, since the setting value of the use target is notified by performing the second setting related operation when the supply of the operation power is started, the game hall manager confirms the setting value of the use target as necessary. It becomes possible.

  Feature w8. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function of executing the processing of step S8708, step S8709 and step S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of the features w1 to w7 characterized in that:

  According to the feature w8, it is possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall of the management result of the gaming history. In this case, whether the display corresponding to the management result of the game history in the predetermined display means is correctly performed by providing the configuration of the feature w1 and the check display is performed by the predetermined display means It is possible to check the

  Note that for the configuration of the features w1 to w8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature x group>
Feature x1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the predetermined display means;
A unit that executes processing for advancing the game after the supply of operation power is started and the situation after supply start is ended (function to execute the processing of step S8907 to step S8920 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
36. Check control means (36th embodiment) for causing the predetermined display means to perform a check display enabling confirmation whether the predetermined display means is normal or not in the situation after the supply start In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has the function of executing the processing of step S9405, and in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB713 and step SB722 in the main CPU 63),
A delay situation which makes it possible to delay the start of the process for advancing the game in the situation where the display for check is performed by the predetermined display means (in the 36th embodiment, a negative determination is made in step S9406 The gaming machine according to the 52nd embodiment is characterized in that the main CPU 63 can execute steps SB715 and SB724.

  According to the feature x1, when the supply of the operation power is started, the check display is performed by the predetermined display unit, so that it can be checked whether the predetermined display unit is normal or not. In this case, in the situation where the display for check is being performed, a delay situation may occur which makes it possible to delay the start of the process for advancing the game. This makes it possible to secure an opportunity to confirm the check display on the predetermined display means before the process for advancing the game is started. In addition, due to the occurrence of the delay situation, it is possible to complete the initialization of the various devices before the processing for advancing the game is started. Then, it is possible to make the display for check on the predetermined display means utilizing this delay situation.

  Features x2. Means for causing the delay state in the situation where the display for check is performed in the predetermined display means (in the 36th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9406 in the main CPU 63, the 52nd embodiment The gaming machine according to the feature x1, characterized in that the gaming machine according to the feature x1 has a function of executing the processing of step SB715 and step SB724 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature x2, in the situation where the check display is being performed, there is a delay situation, so that the process for advancing the game is not started while the check display is being performed. Is possible.

  Features x3. In the situation where the display for check is performed by the predetermined display means based on the first start situation when the supply of the operating power is started, the delayed situation is reached and the supply of the operating power is started The gaming machine according to the feature x1 or x2, wherein the delay status does not occur in a situation where the display for check is performed by the predetermined display unit based on the second start status.

  According to the feature x3, the game is progressed while the check display is being performed by becoming the delay state in the state where the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means when in the first start condition It is possible to prevent the process for starting from being started, and in the case of the second start situation, by setting the check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to prevent the delay situation. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the process for advancing the game from becoming extremely late.

Features x4. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
Setting related execution means (a function for executing setting value update processing or setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) which executes predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value when supply of operation power is started;
Equipped with
The first start situation is a situation where the predetermined setting related process is not executed in the situation after the supply start,
The gaming machine according to Feature x3, wherein the second start situation is a situation where the predetermined setting related process is executed in the situation after the supply start.

  According to the feature x4, since predetermined time is required when predetermined setting related processing is executed, it is possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before the processing for advancing the game is started. Become. In this case, when the predetermined setting related process is executed, the predetermined setting related process is performed by preventing a delay state in a state where the check display is performed by the predetermined display means. In the situation, it is possible to prevent the start of the process for advancing the game from becoming extremely slow.

Features x5. The setting related execution means is
The change of the setting value to be used based on the fact that the first setting related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of operation power is started. Condition generating means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SB114 in the main CPU 63) to be in a settable condition (a condition in which setting value update processing is performed) in which In the 51st embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SB614 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SB717 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63 The function to make an affirmative determination at SB812, and in the 54th embodiment, at step SC113 in the main CPU 63 And features that the constant determination),
A notification occurs that the setting value to be used is notified based on the fact that the second setting related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) is performed when the supply of operation power is started. Means (function to execute setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature x4, comprising:

  According to the feature x5, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of the operating power is started, so the setting value to be used is illegally changed It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of trying. In addition, since the setting value of the use target is notified by performing the second setting related operation when the supply of the operation power is started, the game hall manager confirms the setting value of the use target as necessary. It becomes possible.

  Features x6. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function of executing the processing of step S8708, step S8709 and step S9107 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to any one of features x1 to x5, characterized in that

  According to the feature x6, it is possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall of the management result of the gaming history. In this case, whether the information corresponding to the management result of the game history in the predetermined display means is correctly displayed by providing the configuration of the feature x1 and the check display is performed by the predetermined display means It is possible to check the

  Note that for the configuration of the features x1 to x6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature w group and the feature x group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as that illustrated above, a configuration capable of confirming whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is correctly performed is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

<Feature y group>
Feature y1. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the fifty-third In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB 915 in the main CPU 63);
Condition generating means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB114 in the main CPU 63) for setting the possible setting condition (the condition where the setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed In the 51st embodiment, the function to make an affirmative determination in step SB614 in the 51st embodiment, in the 52nd embodiment, the function to make an affirmative determination in step SB717 in the main CPU 63, the 53rd embodiment In the embodiment of the present invention, the main CPU 63 has a function to make a positive determination at step SB812, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to make a positive determination at step SC113);
Setting monitoring means for executing setting monitoring processing for monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB106 in the main CPU 63, the fifty-first In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB606 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step SB705 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, and the processing of step SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment. A function to be executed, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SC106 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
Processing at the time of supply start which is executed when supply of operation power to the control means having the setting means is started (step SB101 to step SB122 in the 49th embodiment, step SB601 to step in the 51st embodiment) SB 622, step SB 701 to step SB 729 in the 52nd embodiment, step SB 801 to step SB 818 and step SB 823 to step SB 826 in the 53rd embodiment, step SC 101 to step SC 120 and step SC 125 to step SC 128 in the 54th embodiment) A game machine including the setting monitoring process.

  According to the feature y1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be Further, since the setting monitoring process for monitoring whether the setting value to be used is abnormal is executed, it is possible to cope with the case where the setting value to be used is abnormal. In addition, since the setting monitoring process is included in the process at the start of supply, it is possible to prevent the process for proceeding the game from being started even though the setting value of the object to be used is abnormal. It becomes.

  Feature y2. The game machine according to Feature y1, wherein the setting monitoring means executes the setting monitoring process each time a monitoring opportunity occurs even after the process at the start of the supply is finished.

  According to the feature y2, since the setting monitoring process is executed each time a monitoring opportunity occurs after the process at the time of the supply start is completed, it becomes easy to specify that the setting value of the use target is abnormal.

Feature y3. A unit (function to execute a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for executing an interrupt process which is periodically activated;
The gaming machine according to feature y2, wherein the setting monitoring process is included in the interrupt process.

  According to the feature y3, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time the system is activated, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of monitoring whether the setting value to be used is abnormal.

  Feature y4. The setting monitoring unit is set in a control state in which execution of predetermined progressing processing for advancing a game is restricted based on specifying that the setting value of the use target is abnormal in the setting monitoring processing. Restriction means (The function to execute the processing of step SB119 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function to execute the processing in step SB619 in the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment In the 53rd embodiment, the function to execute the processing in step SB 823 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, the function to execute the processing in step SC 125 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features y1 to y3 characterized in that:

  According to the feature y4, when it is specified that the setting value of the use object is abnormal, the execution of the predetermined progressing process for advancing the game is restricted, so that the setting value of the object to be used is also abnormal. It becomes possible to prevent the game from being started regardless of the situation.

  Feature y5. A unit for releasing the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable state (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB303 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-third embodiment, step SB904 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature y4, comprising a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature y5, it is possible to newly set the setting value of the object to be used at the time of canceling the situation where the setting value of the object to be used is abnormal.

  Feature y6. The restriction means is configured to be in the restriction state when the supply of the operation power is resumed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the state of the restriction state. Feature y4 or y5 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature y6, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progressing process is restricted from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operation power because the setting value to be used is abnormal.

  Feature y7. A feature y4 to feature comprising means for executing non-regulatory processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state (a function for executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of y6.

  According to the feature y7, it is possible to execute the non-regulatory process even in a situation where execution of the predetermined progress process is regulated because the setting value of the use target is abnormal. This makes it possible to secure the execution of necessary processing even in a regulated state.

  Feature y8. The gaming machine according to Feature y7, wherein the non-regulation process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

  According to the feature y8, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that it is possible to appropriately cope with the case where the power failure occurs in the restricted state.

  Feature y9. The setting monitoring means is a notification that allows the player to recognize that the setting possible situation should be generated based on the setting monitoring process specifying that the setting value to be used is abnormal. Means to be executed (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step SB121 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-first embodiment, a function to execute the processing in step SB621 in the main CPU 63) In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB728 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and executing the processing of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. To any one of the features y1 to y8. Of the game machine.

  According to the feature y9, when it is specified that the setting value to be used is abnormal, a notification is made to allow the player to recognize that the setting possible state should be generated, so the setting of the use object is performed. If the value becomes abnormal, it is possible to urge the game hall manager to eliminate it.

  Note that for the configuration of the features y1 to y9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature y group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to suitably manage the setting value that determines the degree of advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature z group>
Feature z1. A predetermined monitoring means (33rd embodiment) configured to monitor whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221) when the supply of operation power is started Then, the function of executing the processing of step S7906 and step S7909 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step S8807 and step S8810 in the main CPU 63 in the 35th embodiment, and the step in the main CPU 63 in the 36th embodiment A function to execute the processing of S9408 and step S9411, a function to execute the processing of step S9506 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and a processing in step S9905 and the step S9908 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment Run In the 45th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SA406 and step SA409 in the main CPU 63, and in the 46th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SA907 and step SA910 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB104 to step SB106 in the main CPU 63, the function to execute the processing of step SB604 to step SB606 in the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment Function to execute the processing of step SB703 to step SB705 in the 53rd embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB804 to step SB806 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 Processing of step SC104~ step SC106 and the function to be executed),
Control means for setting a control state in which execution of a predetermined progressing process for advancing a game is controlled based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means (the thirty-third embodiment) Then, the function of executing the processing of step S7910 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step S8811 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the processing of step S9412 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment Function, A function to execute the processing of step S9510 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-seventh embodiment, a function to execute the processing in step S9909 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment, and a main CPU 63 in the forty-fifth embodiment A function of executing the process of step SA410, in the 46th embodiment A function to execute the processing of step SA911 in the main CPU 63, a function to execute the processing in step SB119 in the 49th embodiment, and a function to execute the processing in step SB619 in the 51st embodiment In the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB 726 in the main CPU 63, in the 53rd embodiment the function of executing the processing of step SB 823 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 Function to execute the processing of SC 125),
A means for executing non-regulatory processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state (in the thirty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S8201 to step S8206 in the main CPU 63; in the thirty-fifth embodiment A function of executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63, and in the forty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SA101 to SA106 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature z1, when it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution of the predetermined progressing process for advancing the game is restricted, so the predetermined abnormality is It becomes possible to prevent the game from being started despite the occurrence. In addition, even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progressing process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, the non-regulatory process can be performed. This makes it possible to secure the execution of necessary processing even in a regulated state.

  Features z2. The non-regulation process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8201 in the 33rd embodiment, step S8901 in the 35th embodiment, and step SA102 in the 42nd embodiment) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure. The gaming machine according to feature z1, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature z2, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, when a power failure occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately cope with the power failure.

  Feature z3. The restriction means is configured to be in the restriction state when the supply of the operation power is resumed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the state of the restriction state. Feature z1 or z2 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature z3, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progressing process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature z4. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the fifty-third In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB 915 in the main CPU 63);
Condition generating means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB114 in the main CPU 63) for setting the possible setting condition (the condition where the setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed In the 51st embodiment, the function to make an affirmative determination in step SB614 in the 51st embodiment, in the 52nd embodiment, the function to make an affirmative determination in step SB717 in the main CPU 63, the 53rd embodiment In the embodiment of the present invention, the main CPU 63 has a function to make a positive determination at step SB812, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to make a positive determination at step SC113);
A game machine according to any one of the features z1 to z3.

  According to the feature z4, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, when a predetermined abnormality occurs in the information stored in the predetermined storage area, an abnormality may also occur in the setting value. On the other hand, when the configuration of the feature z1 is specified and it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution of the predetermined progression processing for advancing the game is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being started despite the possibility of an abnormality occurring in the set value.

  Feature z5. Means for executing notification to make it possible for the player to recognize that the settable situation should be generated based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means In the 49th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB121 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function to execute the processing in step SB621 in the main CPU 63, and in the 52nd embodiment, step SB728 in the main CPU 63 Function of executing the process of step SB 825 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC 127 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature z4, characterized in that

  According to the feature z5, in the case where it is determined that the setting possible situation should be generated when the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is specified, the notification is made to allow the player to recognize the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. The manager of the gaming hall can be urged to set the setting value.

  Feature z6. A unit for releasing the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable state (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB303 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-third embodiment, step SB904 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to the feature z4 or z5, which has a function of executing the processing of

  According to the feature z6, it is possible to newly set the setting value to be used when canceling the situation in which the predetermined abnormality occurs.

  Note that for the configuration of the features z1 to z6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1-c21, feature d1-d10, feature e1-e9, feature f1-f6, feature g1-g6, feature h1-h13, feature i1-i7, feature j1-j6, feature k1-k16, feature l ~ L5, features m1-m3, features n1-n10, features o1-o7, features p1-p7, features q1-q8, features r1-r7, features s1-s4, features t1-t5, features u1-u10, features v1 ~ V8, feature w1 to w8, feature x1 to x6, feature y1 to y9, feature z1 to z6, feature αA1 to αA10, feature αB1 to αB6, feature αC1 to αC13, feature αD1 to αD9, feature αE1 to αE5 One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature αA group>
Characteristics αA1. A predetermined monitoring unit (49th embodiment) monitors whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221) when the supply of operation power is started. In the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB604 to step SB606 in the 51st embodiment, and in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB104 to step SB106. A function to execute the processing of SB703 to step SB705, a function to execute the processing of step SB804 to step SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a processing of step SC104 to step SC106 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment The ability to perform ,
When it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred by the predetermined monitoring means, it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred by the predetermined monitoring means as the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power. The regulation means (the function to execute the processing of step SB119 in the main side CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the processing in step SB619 in the main side CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment) A function to execute, a function to execute the processing of step SB 726 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, a function to execute the processing in step SB 823 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a main side in the 54 th embodiment A function of executing the process of step SC125 in the CPU 63),
Specific output means for performing specific output to the outside of the gaming machine based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the process of step SB122 in the main CPU 63) In the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB622 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB729 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the main A function of executing the process of step SB826 on the side CPU 63, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC128 on the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αA1, when it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power does not occur the predetermined abnormality Because the execution content is different from that of the above, it is possible to prevent the processing from proceeding normally as the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. In addition, a specific output is performed to the outside of the gaming machine based on the specification that the predetermined abnormality has occurred. This makes it possible to urge the game hall manager to cope with occurrence of a predetermined abnormality.

  Characteristics αA2. The gaming machine according to the feature αA1, wherein the particular output unit performs the particular output outside the gaming machine even when it is identified that an event different from the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

  According to the feature αA2, the specific output is performed outside the gaming machine even when an event different from the predetermined abnormality occurs. This makes it possible to use the configuration for performing specific output.

  Feature αA3. The specific output unit is a game machine when the predetermined abnormality occurs when the supply of the operation power is resumed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in a situation where the predetermined abnormality has occurred. The gaming machine according to the feature αA1 or αA2 characterized in that the specific output is performed to the outside.

  According to the feature αA3, in the situation where the predetermined abnormality occurs, it is possible to perform the specific output to the outside of the gaming machine every time the supply of the operating power is resumed. This makes it easy for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

  Characteristics αA4. The restriction means is set to a restriction state in which execution of predetermined progress processing for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means. The gaming machine according to any one of features αA1 to αA3.

  According to the feature αA4, when it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution of the predetermined progressing process for advancing the game is restricted, so the predetermined abnormality is It becomes possible to prevent the game from being started despite the occurrence.

  Characteristics αA5. A means for executing non-regulatory processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state (in the thirty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S8201 to step S8206 in the main CPU 63; in the thirty-fifth embodiment A function characterized by having a function of executing the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of step SA101 to step SA106 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-second embodiment The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature αA5, it is possible to execute the non-regulatory process even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is regulated due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. This makes it possible to secure the execution of necessary processing even in a regulated state.

  Feature αA6. The non-regulation process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8201 in the 33rd embodiment, step S8901 in the 35th embodiment, and step SA102 in the 42nd embodiment) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure. The gaming machine according to feature αA5, characterized in that

  According to the feature αA6, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, when a power failure occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately cope with it.

  Feature αA7. The restriction means is configured to be in the restriction state when the supply of the operation power is resumed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the state of the restriction state. Features αA4 to αA6 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature αA7, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progressing process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operation power.

Feature αA8. Setting means for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the fifty-third In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB 915 in the main CPU 63);
Condition generating means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB114 in the main CPU 63) for setting the possible setting condition (the condition where the setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed In the 51st embodiment, the function to make an affirmative determination in step SB614 in the 51st embodiment, in the 52nd embodiment, the function to make an affirmative determination in step SB717 in the main CPU 63, the 53rd embodiment In the embodiment of the present invention, the main CPU 63 has a function to make a positive determination at step SB812, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to make a positive determination at step SC113);
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αA4 to αA7, comprising:

  According to the feature αA8, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, when a predetermined abnormality occurs in the information stored in the predetermined storage area, an abnormality may also occur in the setting value. On the other hand, when the configuration of the feature αA1 is specified and it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution content of the process at the start of supply of the operating power is predetermined Since the execution content is different from that in the case where no abnormality has occurred, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding normally even though there may be an abnormality in the set value. Become. In addition, since the specific output is performed to the outside of the gaming machine based on the specified occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, it is possible to cope with the possibility that the abnormality may occur with respect to the set value. It will be possible to prompt the management of the hall.

  Feature αA9. Means for executing notification to make it possible for the player to recognize that the settable situation should be generated based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means In the 49th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SB121 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function to execute the processing in step SB621 in the main CPU 63, and in the 52nd embodiment, step SB728 in the main CPU 63 Function of executing the process of step SB 825 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC 127 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature αA8, characterized in that

  According to the feature αA9, when it is determined that the setting possible situation should be generated when it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification that allows the player to recognize that the setting possible state should be generated is executed. The manager of the gaming hall can be urged to set the setting value.

Feature αA10. The restriction means is in a restriction state in which execution of predetermined progress processing for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means. ,
This gaming machine is a means for releasing the restriction state based on the occurrence of the setting possible state (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB303 in the main CPU 63, in the fifty-third embodiment the main The gaming machine according to the feature αA8 or αA9, characterized in that the CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of step SB904.

  According to the feature αA10, it is possible to newly set the setting value to be used when canceling the situation in which the predetermined abnormality occurs.

  Note that for the configuration of the features αA1 to αA10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1 to c21, feature d1 to d10, feature e1 to e9, feature f1 to f6, feature g1 to g6, feature h1 to h13, feature i1 to i7, feature j1 to j6, feature k1 to k16, feature Features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, Features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more of the configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature αB group>
Feature αB1. A unit for starting processing at the start of supply of operating power when supply of operating power is started (steps SB101 to SB122 in the 49th embodiment, steps SB601 to SB622, and 52nd in the 51st embodiment) Steps SB701 to SB729 in the embodiment, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, and steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128) in the 54th embodiment,
A means for executing an interrupt process which is periodically activated (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
Setting related execution means for executing predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value as a part of processing at the time of start of supply of the operation power (function for executing setting value update processing or setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63 )When,
A permission setting means for setting the state in which execution of the interrupt process is prohibited in a process in which execution of the interrupt process is permitted when the predetermined setting related process is executed in the process at the time of start of supply of the operation power (In the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB201 or step SB301 in the main CPU 63; in the fifty-third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB901 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αB1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In addition, since the predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value is executed as a part of the processing at the time of the supply start of the operation power, it is difficult to perform an action to illegally execute the predetermined setting related processing. It becomes possible.

  In this case, when a predetermined setting-related process is performed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, the state in which the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited is permitted. That is, while the process at the time of the start of supply of the operation power basically prohibits the execution of the interrupt process, the interrupt process can be interrupted and activated in the predetermined setting related process. In the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, by basically prohibiting the execution of the interrupt process, it is possible to shorten the time required for the process at the start of the supply of the operating power to be completed. On the other hand, in the predetermined setting related process, it is assumed that the time required to complete the process is prolonged because the process related to the set value is executed, and in the situation where such predetermined setting related process is being executed, By permitting execution of the interrupt processing, it is possible to make the execution mode of the processing suitable.

  Feature αB2. The setting related execution means is configured to end the predetermined setting related processing based on an end trigger operation being performed in the predetermined setting related processing.

  According to the feature αB2, since the predetermined setting related processing is continued until the termination trigger operation is performed, the time required to complete the processing tends to be long. In this case, the configuration of the feature αB1 is provided, and execution of interrupt processing is permitted in a situation where predetermined setting related processing is being performed, so that the execution mode of the processing can be made preferable. .

  Feature αB3. Prohibition setting means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, in the main CPU 63) for setting to a state where execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited from being in a state where execution of the interrupt processing is permitted when the predetermined setting related processing ends. The gaming machine according to the feature αB1 or αB2 comprising a function of executing the processing of step SB206 or step SB312, and a function of executing the processing of step SB916 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-third embodiment.

  According to the feature αB3, when the predetermined setting related processing ends, the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited again. This makes it possible to limit the period during which execution of interrupt processing is permitted in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being performed, to a period during which predetermined setting related processing is being performed.

  Characteristics αB4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αB1 to αB3, wherein the interruption process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

  According to the feature αB4, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the situation where the predetermined setting related process is being performed, the time required to complete the predetermined setting related process can be extended. Even in the case where a power failure occurs in a situation where predetermined setting related processing is being performed, it is possible to appropriately cope with it.

Feature αB5. The interrupt process includes a progress response process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) to be executed to control the progress of the game.
When the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the predetermined setting related process is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed while the progress response process is not executed.
When the interrupt process is interrupted and activated after the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is finished, both the power failure monitoring process and the progress response process may be executed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αB5, in the configuration in which the occurrence of the power failure is periodically monitored in the situation where the predetermined setting related process is being executed, the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in the situation where the predetermined setting related process is being executed It becomes possible to prevent the progress response processing for controlling the progress of the game from being executed.

Feature αB6. The setting related execution means is
The use of the first setting related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) when the supply of the operation power is started is performed as the predetermined setting related process. A unit for executing changeable processing in which a target setting value may be changed (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63);
The setting value to be used as the predetermined setting-related process based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. A unit for executing a setting notification process to be notified (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The permission setting means sets a state in which execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited in a state where execution of the interrupt processing is permitted when the changeable processing is executed in the processing at the time of supply start of the operation power. Setting the state in which execution of the interrupt process is prohibited when the setting notification process is performed in the process at the start of supply of the operation power, the state in which execution of the interrupt process is permitted The gaming machine according to any one of the features αB1 to αB5, which is characterized in that:

  According to the feature αB6, since it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of operation power is started in order to change the setting value to be used, the setting value to be used is illegally changed It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of trying. In addition, since the setting value of the use target is notified by performing the second setting related operation when the supply of the operation power is started, the game hall manager confirms the setting value of the use target as necessary. It becomes possible.

  Note that for the configuration of the features αB1 to αB6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature z group, the feature αA group, and the feature αB group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., the processing when the supply of the operating power is started needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature αC group>
Feature αC1. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
Setting related execution means (a function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) that executes predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value when supply of operation power is started;
In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the regulation is restricted in which the execution of the predetermined progressing processing for advancing the game is performed. A restriction means for setting a state (in the 53rd embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63, and in 54th embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SC108 and step SC116 in the main CPU 63) ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αC1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing, the execution of the predetermined progressing process for advancing the game is restricted when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. Ru. In this way, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progressing process for progressing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting related process is not completed.

  Feature αC2. The restriction means executes the predetermined setting related process even when the supply of the operating power is started after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. The gaming machine according to feature αC1 characterized in that the restriction state is not set in the case of

  According to the feature αC2, it is possible to prevent the regulation of the execution of the predetermined progressing process for advancing the game until the predetermined setting related process is executed when the supply of the operation power is resumed. .

  Feature αC3. A feature αC1 or means characterized by having a means (function to execute the processing of step S8901 to step S8905 in the main CPU 63) which executes non-regulatory processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state. The gaming machine described in αC2.

  According to the feature αC3, the non-regulatory process can be performed even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is regulated. This makes it possible to secure the execution of necessary processing even in a regulated state.

  Characteristics αC4. The gaming machine according to the feature αC3 characterized in that the non-regulatory process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

  According to the feature αC4, since the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately cope with the case where the power failure occurs in the restricted state.

  Characteristics αC5. The restricting means is configured to be in the restricted state when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the restricted state. Features αC1 to αC4 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature αC5, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

  Feature αC6. Means for causing a notification to be made to allow a player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing should be performed based on the restriction state being executed (in the 53rd embodiment, and the like) A function of executing the processing of step SB 825 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of step SC 127 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment) is characterized by any one of the features .alpha.C1 to .alpha.C5. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature αC6, it is possible to urge the game hall manager to execute the predetermined setting related process again when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. Become.

  Feature αC7. When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the restricting unit performs the specific related operation (setting key insertion unit 68a even when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter). The gaming machine according to any one of the features αC1 to αC6, wherein the restricted state is not set based on the fact that the ON operation and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are performed.

  According to the feature αC7, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the game is advanced by performing the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is resumed. It is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted.

  Feature αC8. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operation power is started. .

  According to the feature αC8, it is possible to prevent the regulation of the execution of the predetermined progressing process for advancing the game until the predetermined setting related process is executed when the supply of the operation power is resumed. .

Feature αC9. For the specific related operation, the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (ON state) by the setting key, and another predetermined operation (pressing operation of the reset button 68c) Including what is done),
When the supply of the operation power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing and the supply of the operation power is started thereafter, the restriction means does not perform the other predetermined operation. Also, the gaming machine according to the feature αC8, wherein the setting key insertion unit is not in the restriction state based on the predetermined correspondence state.

  According to the feature αC9, even if the specific related operation is not performed at the time of resuming the supply of the operation power, the setting key insertion unit is in the predetermined correspondence state, so that the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the restriction of Thereby, when the supply of the operation power is stopped during execution of the predetermined setting related processing, the setting key insertion unit performs the power ON operation without performing another predetermined operation although in the predetermined correspondence state. Even if there is, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted.

  Feature αC10. When the supply of the operation power is started, another related process related to the setting value is executed based on the setting key insertion unit being in the predetermined correspondence state in a state where the other predetermined operation is not performed. A game machine according to feature αC9, characterized by comprising another related execution means (a function for executing a process for confirming settings in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature αC10, even when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing, by performing another related processing at the time of the restart of the supply of the operation power, It is possible to prevent the execution of predetermined progress processing for advancing a game from being restricted.

  Feature αC11. When the supply of the operating power is stopped after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the setting key insertion unit is performed in a state where the other predetermined operation is not performed. The gaming machine according to the feature αC10, wherein the predetermined setting related processing is performed without the another related processing being performed based on the fact that the predetermined correspondence state is made.

  According to the feature αC11, when the operation power supply is resumed when the operation power supply is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed, an operation for performing another related process is performed. The predetermined setting related processing is executed instead of another related processing. This makes it possible to give priority to execution of predetermined setting related processing.

Feature αC12. The predetermined setting related process is a process that makes it possible to change the setting value to be used.
The gaming machine according to feature αC11, wherein the another related process is a process for notifying of the setting value to be used.

  According to the feature αC12, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being changed, the setting value to be used is notified when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. It becomes possible to give priority to the execution of the process for changing the setting value to be used rather than the process.

  Feature αC13. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αC1 to αC12, wherein the predetermined setting related process is a process that makes it possible to change the setting value to be used.

  According to the feature αC13, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the process for changing the setting value to be used, the game is advanced when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The execution of the predetermined progress processing is regulated. This makes it possible to execute predetermined progress processing for advancing the game despite the fact that the change of the setting value has not been completed.

  Note that for the configuration of the features αC1 to αC13, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, feature c1 to c21, feature d1 to d10, feature e1 to e9, feature f1 to f6, feature g1 to g6, feature h1 to h13, feature i1 to i7, feature j1 to j6, feature k1 to k16, feature Features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, Features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more of the configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature αD group>
Feature αD1. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
Executes predetermined setting related processing related to the setting value based on the fact that the specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of operation power is started Setting related execution means (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63);
Another related execution unit (main operation to execute predetermined other related processing related to the setting value based on the fact that the predetermined related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) is performed when the supply of operation power is started Function to execute setting value update processing in the side CPU 63),
In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the regulation is restricted in which the execution of the predetermined progressing processing for advancing the game is performed. A restriction means for setting a state (in the 53rd embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63, and in 54th embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SC108 and step SC116 in the main CPU 63) ,
Equipped with
The restriction means is that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started even after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the supply of the operating power is started after that even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the restricted state is not made based on a predetermined related operation being performed.

  According to the feature αD1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing, the execution of the predetermined progressing process for advancing the game is restricted when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. Ru. In this way, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progressing process for progressing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting related process is not completed.

  In addition, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the execution of the predetermined progressing process is not restricted by performing the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is resumed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation of the execution of the predetermined progressing process for advancing the game until the predetermined setting related process is executed when the supply of the operation power is resumed.

  Further, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing, the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted even when the predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. I will not. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progressing process from being restricted when an operation for performing the process related to the set value is performed.

  Features αD2. When the supply of the operating power is stopped after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the other related processing is performed based on the fact that the predetermined related operation is performed. The gaming machine according to feature αD1 is characterized in that the predetermined setting related process is executed without being executed.

  According to the feature αD2, when the operation power supply is resumed when the operation power supply is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed, an operation for performing another related process is performed. The predetermined setting related processing is executed instead of another related processing. This makes it possible to give priority to execution of predetermined setting related processing.

Feature αD3. For the specific related operation, the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (ON state) by the setting key, and another predetermined operation (pressing operation of the reset button 68c) Including what is done),
The predetermined related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit is in the predetermined correspondence state by the setting key, and does not include that the other predetermined operation is performed. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature αD3, even if the specific related operation is not performed at the time of resuming the supply of the operation power, the setting key insertion unit is in the predetermined corresponding state, and the execution of the predetermined progression processing for advancing the game It is possible to prevent the restriction of Thereby, when the supply of the operation power is stopped during execution of the predetermined setting related processing, the setting key insertion unit performs the power ON operation without performing another predetermined operation although in the predetermined correspondence state. Even if there is, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted.

Characteristics αD4. The predetermined setting related process is a process that makes it possible to change the setting value to be used.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αD1 to αD3 characterized in that the another related process is a process for notifying of the set value to be used.

  According to the feature αD4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the process for changing the set value to be used, the game is advanced when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The execution of the predetermined progress processing is regulated. This makes it possible to execute predetermined progress processing for advancing the game despite the fact that the change of the setting value has not been completed. In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value to be used, there is a process that makes it possible to change the setting value to be used when restarting the supply of operating power. Not only when an operation to be performed is performed, but also when an operation for performing processing for notifying a set value to be used is performed It is possible to prevent the regulation of

  Feature αD5. A feature αD1 is characterized by including means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63) for executing non-regulation processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the regulation state. The gaming machine according to any one of αD4.

  According to the feature αD5, the non-regulatory process can be performed even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is regulated. This makes it possible to secure the execution of necessary processing even in a regulated state.

  Feature αD6. The gaming machine according to feature αD5, wherein the non-regulatory process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

  According to the feature αD6, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that it is possible to appropriately cope with the case where the power failure occurs in the restricted state.

  Feature αD7. The restricting means is configured to be in the restricted state when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the restricted state. Features αD1 to αD6 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature αD7, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operation power.

  Feature αD8. Means for causing a notification to be made to allow a player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing should be performed based on the restriction state being executed (in the 53rd embodiment, and the like) A function of executing the processing of step SB825 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment) is characterized by any one of the features .alpha.D1 to .alpha.D7. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature αD8, it is possible to urge the game hall manager to execute the predetermined setting related process again when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. Become.

Feature αD9. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
Executes predetermined setting related processing related to the setting value based on the fact that the specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of operation power is started Setting related execution means (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63);
In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the regulation is restricted in which the execution of the predetermined progressing processing for advancing the game is performed. A restriction means for setting a state (in the 53rd embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63, and in 54th embodiment, a function to make a positive determination in step SC108 and step SC116 in the main CPU 63) ,
Equipped with
The specific related operation includes a first related operation (an ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) and a second related operation (an operation of pressing the reset button 68c).
Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the restriction means performs the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the supply of the operating power is started after that even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed. A gaming machine characterized by not being in the restricted state based on the execution of the first related operation among the first related operation and the second related operation.

  According to the feature αD9, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing, the execution of the predetermined progressing process for advancing the game is restricted when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. Ru. In this way, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progressing process for progressing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting related process is not completed.

  In addition, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the execution of the predetermined progressing process is not restricted by performing the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is resumed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation of the execution of the predetermined progressing process for advancing the game until the predetermined setting related process is executed when the supply of the operation power is resumed.

  In addition, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted if the first related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. I will not. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation of the execution of the predetermined progressing process when a part of the operation for executing the predetermined setting related process is performed.

  Note that for the configuration of the features αD1 to αD9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature αE group>
Feature αE1. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
A settable condition (a setting value capable of changing the setting value to be used based on the fact that the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined response operation means is performed when the supply of the operation power is started. In the condition generating means (in the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs an affirmative determination in step SB812). In the 54th embodiment, the process proceeds to step SC113 in the main CPU 63. Function to make a positive decision),
Operation specifying means (function to execute the process of step SB 910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
When the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is not operated, the stored state becomes the non-operation corresponding state, and the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined correspondence operation means is operated. Operation correspondence storage means (OFF confirmation flag 361) in which the storage state becomes the operation correspondence state when the
In the situation where the storage state of the operation corresponding storage means in the settable situation is the non-operation correspondence state, selection is made based on the fact that the predetermined correspondence operation means is being operated by the operation specifying means Selection target changing means (function to execute the processing of step SB 914 in the main CPU 63) for changing the target setting value;
Equipped with
The setting value to be selected is the setting value to be used when the end trigger occurs in the settable state,
This gaming machine is a state setting means (the fifty-third embodiment) for setting the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means to the operation correspondence state when the setting possible state is started or when the setting possible state is started. A game machine having a function of executing the processing of step SB901 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of step SC114 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature αE1, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In addition, in order to generate a settable condition that can change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the power ON operation in the state where the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. Because of this, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to change the setting value to be used illegally. In addition, since the setting value of the selection target is changed based on the fact that the predetermined corresponding operation means operated to cause the setting possible situation is operated, the number of operation means necessary for changing the setting value is It becomes possible to suppress. Further, in the settable situation, the setting value to be selected is changed based on the fact that the predetermined correspondence operation means is specified to be operated in the situation where the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation correspondence state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the change of the setting value to be selected from occurring a plurality of times for one operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means.

  In this case, when the settable situation is started or when the settable situation is started, the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is set to the operation correspondence state. Thereby, when the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means for causing the settable state is continued even after the start of the settable state, the change of the setting value to be selected occurs by the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means It is possible to prevent them from

  Characteristics αE2. When the detection state of the means for detecting the operation of the predetermined correspondence operation means is the operation detection state, the situation generation means is that the predetermined correspondence operation means is operated regardless of the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means The gaming machine according to the feature αE1 characterized by specifying.

  According to the feature αE2, when specifying whether or not the specific related operation has been performed, it is not specified whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means has been switched from the state where the operation is not performed to the operated state. Since it is the structure which specifies whether the means is operated, it becomes possible to simplify the processing composition for specifying whether a setting possible situation is generated.

Feature αE3. A setting correspondence storage unit (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used;
A selection correspondence storage unit (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be selected;
Equipped with
The selection object changing means is specified that the predetermined correspondence operation means is operated by the operation specifying means in a situation where the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation correspondence state in the settable situation Changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage unit so that the setting value to be selected is changed based on the following.
The situation generation means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when the termination trigger occurs in the settable situation. The gaming machine according to the feature αE1 or αE2, wherein the setting value that has been the selection target in the setting enabled situation is set as the usage target by causing the setting to be used.

  According to the feature αE3, the setting correspondence storage means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value in the middle of change in the setting possible situation. By being provided, it becomes possible to change a setting value in a setting possible situation, storing and holding the information on the setting value set before the setting possible situation was started.

  Characteristics αE4. A unit (step SA801 in the main CPU 63) for causing the display of the setting value to be selected in the settable situation to be performed by a predetermined display unit (the first to fourth notification displays 201 to 204) ~ A gaming machine according to any one of the features αE1 to αE3 characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step SA803.

  According to the feature αE4, it is possible to change the setting value while confirming the setting value in the middle of the change in the setting enabled state.

Feature αE5. A unit for executing a profit granting process in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a use target among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) And the ability to perform
A settable condition (a setting value capable of changing the setting value to be used based on the fact that the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined response operation means is performed when the supply of the operation power is started. In the condition generating means (in the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs an affirmative determination in step SB812). In the 54th embodiment, the process proceeds to step SC113 in the main CPU 63. Function to make a positive decision),
Operation specifying means (function to execute the process of step SB 910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
Selection target changing means for changing the setting value to be selected based on the fact that the predetermined correspondence operation means is operated in the settable situation is specified by the operation specifying means (step SB914 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute the processing of
Equipped with
The setting value to be selected is the setting value to be used when the end trigger occurs in the settable state,
In the gaming machine, when the supply of operation power for generating the settable status is started, the operation of the predetermined response operation means triggers a change of the set value to be selected in the settable status. It is provided with means for preventing it from being treated as an operation (in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB901 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SC114 in the main CPU 63). A gaming machine characterized by having

  According to the feature αE5, since the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. Expect to be In addition, in order to generate a settable condition that can change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the power ON operation in the state where the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. Because of this, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action to change the setting value to be used illegally. In addition, since the setting value of the selection target is changed based on the fact that the predetermined corresponding operation means operated to cause the setting possible situation is operated, the number of operation means necessary for changing the setting value is It becomes possible to suppress.

  In this case, the operation of the predetermined response operation means when the supply of operation power for generating the settable status is started is treated as an operation serving as a trigger for changing the setting value to be selected in the settable status. It will not be. Thereby, when the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means for causing the settable state is continued even after the start of the settable state, the change of the setting value to be selected occurs by the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means It is possible to prevent them from

  Note that for the configuration of the features αE1 to αE5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1- R17, feature S1 to S8, feature T1 to T13, feature U1 to U8, feature V1 to V6, feature W1 to W11, feature X1 to X11, feature Y1 to Y11, feature Z1 to Z10, feature a1 to a3, feature b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, and features αE1 to αE5 Any one or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention related to the feature αC group, the feature αD group, and the feature αE group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a plate storage unit for storing game balls provided to the player on the front face of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage unit are guided by the game ball launcher , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out, for example, from the payout device to the dish storage portion. Moreover, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which the upper plate storage unit and the lower plate storage unit are provided as the plate storage unit, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit is released The game balls which are guided by the device and become surplus in the upper plate storage section are discharged to the lower plate storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to make the configuration regarding the setting value that determines the degree of advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 12 ... game machine main body, 14 ... front door frame, 28 ... firing operation device, 33 ... 1st operation port, 34 ... 2nd operation port, 35 ... through gate, 49a ... gate detection sensor, 62 ... MPU 63: main CPU 65: main RAM 68a: setting key insertion portion 68b: update button 68c: reset button 69a: first notification display device 69b: second notification display device 69c ... 3rd notification display device, 112 ... management side CPU, 117 ... history memory, 171 ... another storage memory, 181 to 186 ... history memory for settings 1 to 6 191 ... first history memory, 192 ... second history memory, 201 ... first notification display device, 201a-201g ... display segment, 202 ... second notification display device, 202a-202g ... display segment, 203 ... third notification Display device 204 Fourth notification display device 221 Work area for specific control 222 Stack area for specific control 223 Work area for non-specific control 224 Stack area for non-specific control 231: normal counter area, 232: open / close execution mode counter area, 233: high frequency support mode counter area, 234: calculation result storage area, 241: management RAM, 251: reset signal output unit, 252: program monitoring Part 266: Display IC 311: Current area 312: First history area 313: Second history area 314: Third history area 321 to 324: Display segment 325: Setting correspondence storage area 325a 325f ... first to sixth setting information storage area, 326 ... setting correspondence storage area, 326a to 3 6c: first to third setting information storage area, 341: setting reference area, 342: setting updating area, 352: sound light side MPU, 353: sound light side CPU, 356: RTC, 357: memory for RTC, 361 ... OFF confirmation flag.

Claims (1)

A means for executing the profit giving process in a mode corresponding to the set value set as the use target among the set values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage;
Setting related execution means for executing predetermined setting related processing related to the set value based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operation power is started;
And another related execution means for executing a predetermined other related process related to the setting value based on the fact that the predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started.
In the case where the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the regulation is restricted in which the execution of the predetermined progressing processing for advancing the game is performed. The regulation means to make a state,
Equipped with
The restriction means is that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started even after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, the supply of the operating power is started after that even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the restricted state is not made based on a predetermined related operation being performed.

Images